THE LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LOS ANGELES NOTES ON THE HEBREW TEXT AND THE TOPOGRAPHY OF THE BOOKS OF SAMUEL HENRY FROWDE, M.A. PUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD LONDON, EDINBURGH, NEW YORK, TORONTO MELBOURNE AND BOMBAY 35°30' 32° -1230 N "'•■' i " -1)00 I oGilgal ( \<^..'o ;s 3530' I and of Messrs. John Bartholomew & Co. Section of CENTRAL PALESTINE of the Fa'eeiine Exploration Fund ojid ol Mt>sr*. John Bartholumew & Co. C pm .^30' U2Z' 'BethJeshimqth"' 2052 s- '^sd -1292 ,^ ~i< ^£- [rTimnal- iTUmoL- -1292 1930 "S \~ d3S t^ y / mi 'S^'^Mah mei-me^ Mr. / as- t&SeilJ^];^ »5"30' of Messrs, John Bartholomew ^ Co. Section of SOUTHERN PALESTINE 'BelhJeshimoth' tn-Rimmomzw' Sh .OmffuvRtuna/n Railways Heights in English feet. Uy fiCiiiiinioii of ihr Pdlotii c Eijiloralion Fund jn'J of UrMn John Q*fthbl<>fr.rv A Co C NOTES ON THE HEBREW TEXT AND THE TOPOGRAPHY OF THE BOOKS OF SAMUEL WITH AN INTRODUCTION ON HEBREW PALAEOGRAPHY AND THE ANCIENT VERSIONS AND FACSIMILES OF INSCRIPTIONS AND MAPS BY THE REV. S. R. DRIVER, D.D. REGIUS PROFESSOR OF HEBREW, AND CANON OF CHRIST CHURCH, OXFORD HON. D.LITT. CAMBRIDGE AND DUBLIN ; HON. D.D. GLASGOW AND ABERDEEN FELLOW OF THE BRITISH ACADEMY CORRESPONDING MEMBER OF THE ROYAL PRUSSIAN ACADEMY OF SCIENCES SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED OXFORD AT THE CLARENDON PRESS 1913 /^5 43:2. t^. FROM THE /.^Xr PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION The present volume is designed as a contribution to the philology and textual criticism of the Old Testament. It may, I hope, be found useful as a sequel to Mr. Spurrell's Notes 071 Genesis'^. The Books of Samuel are not so suitable as a reading book for a beginner in Hebrew as some of the other historical books : for though they con- tain classical examples of a chaste and beautiful Hebrew prose style, they have suffered unusually from transcrip- tional corruption, and hence raise frequently questions of text, with which a beginner is evidently not in a position to deal. But for one who has made further progress in the language, they afford an admirable field for study : they familiarize him with many of the most characteristic idioms of the language, and at the same time introduce him to the grounds and principles of the textual criticism of the Old Testament. The idiomatic knowledge of Hebrew is best acquired by an attentive and repeated study of the Hebrew prose writers ; and I have made it my aim through- out not merely to explain (so far as this was possible ^) the text of the Books of Samuel, but also to point out and illustrate, as fully as seemed needful, the principal idiomatic usages which they exemplify. In the Introduction I have sought to bring within reach of the student materials — especially relating to Inscriptions — often with difficulty accessible, including matter which, at least to some readers, will probably be new. More space could easily have been 1 Clarendon Press, 1887 ; ed. 2, 1896. * For there are some passages which — from whatever cause — defy, or elude, explanation. 20e2'101 VI Preface to the First Edition devoted to the subject of the Ancient Versions ; but enough, I hope, will have been said to illustrate their character, and their value to the student of the Old Testament. Historical questions, and questions touching the structure of the Books of Samuel, lying outside the plan of the work, have been noticed only incidentally: I have, however, articulated the two Books in a manner, the utility of which will, I hope, appear to those readers who proceed to the study of the sources of which they are composed. A portion of the volume was already in type, when the loan of some MS. notes of the late Prof. Duncan H. Weir, extending as far as i Sam. 4, 13 *, was offered to me. Know- ing, from the extracts in Prof. Cheyne's Isaiah (1884), the value of Dr. Weir's suggestions, I thankfully availed myself of the offer. The notes, I found, were less complete than I had expected ; and though I gladly quoted from them what I could, I did not obtain from them as much assistance as I had hoped. It remains to speak briefly of the history of the textual criticism of the Books of Samuel. To Otto Thenius ^ belongfs the merit of having been the first to point out systematically how the Septuagint frequently supplied materials for the restoration of the Massoretic text. His Commentary is eminently suggestive and stimulating ; and for the manner in which he has recovered, with the help of the Septuagint, the true text and meaning of numerous passages in the two Books, he has earned the lasting gratitude of Hebrew scholars. Thenius' results were largely utilized by Ewald in the first edition of his History of Israel {1^40,)'^: Fr. Bottcher'* followed ^ See the Academy, 1889, Aug. 24, p. 119. ^ Die Bikher Samuelis in the Kurzgefasstes exegetisches Haiidbttch zum A.T., ed. I, 1842; ed. 2, 1864. •■• Without suitable acknowledgement, as Thenius complains (Pref. ed. 2, p. vii). * Neue exegetisch-kritische Aehrenlese zuin A. T. (1863). Comp. ib., p. viii. Preface to the First Edition VII on the same lines, sometimes correcting Thenius, at other times, not always happily, seeking to supplement him. It cannot, however, be denied that Thenius shewed a disposition to adopt readings from the Septuagint without sufficient discrimination ; and his restorations were sometimes deficient in point of Hebrew scholarship. In 1871 appeared an un- pretending but epoch-making work on the textual criticism of the Old Testament— the monograph of Julius Wellhausen on ' The Text of the Books of Samuel.' The importance of this book lies in particular in the strictness with which it emphasizes the discriminating use of the Ancient Versions for purposes of textual criticism. With rare acumen and sagacity, Wellhausen compares the Massoretic text with the Ancient Versions (specially with the Septuagint), and elicits from the comparison the principles that must have operated, on the one hand in the process of translation, on the other in the transmission both of the Hebrew text itself and of the corresponding Ancient Version. He thus sets in its true light the crucial distinction between renderings which pre- suppose a different Hebrew original, and those which do not do this, but are due to other causes ; and shews further that both texts, the Massoretic text as well as that of the Septuagint, have received modification (chiefly in the form of harmonistic or other additions), though in unequal degrees, in the process of transmission. Naturally he endorses a large number of Thenius' restorations; but others he subjects to a keen criticism, shewing that they do not rest upon a sub- stantial basis. Wellhausen's scholarship is fine : his judgement is rarely at fault ; and in the critical treatment of the text, I have been strongly sensible of the value of his guidance. But I have uniformly maintained an independent judgement, whether towards Wellhausen or other scholars ; and I have been careful to adopt nothing of importance, from whatever source, without acknowledgement at the time. VIII Preface to the First Edition The fact that valuable original readings are preserved by the Septuagint or other Versions has been recognized also by Gratz ^, Stade ^, and other scholars : in this country by Mr. (now Professor) Kirkpatrick ^, in his Commentary on the Books of Samuel in the Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges, and the Rev. F. H. Woods, in an Essay on the subject contributed by him to the Studia Biblica *. A more recent work than any of these, also dealing largely with the criticism of the text, is Klostermann's Commentary on the Books of Samuel and Kings, forming part of the Kurzgefasster Comnientar zu den Heiligeji Schriften Alien 7ind Nenen Testamentes, edited by Strack and Zockler (1887). Klostermann is a genuine scholar, an acute and able critic ; and his Commentary has evidently had great pains bestowed upon it. But in his treatment of the text, where he adopts an independent line, it is, unhappily, very rarely possible to follow him. Klostermann can make, and has made, clever and probable emendations : but his originality is excessive ; he is too ready with an ingenious but recondite combination ; he is apt to assume that the text has suffered more than is probable ; and his restorations themselves betray sometimes a defective appreciation of Hebrew modes of expression. But it remains his merit to have been the first to perceive distinctly the critical importance of Lucian's recension of the Septuagint, and to have utilized it consistently in his Commentary. S. R. D. Christ Church, Oxford, November, 1889. 1 Gesch. derjuden, i. (1874). » Gesch. des V. Israels, i. (1887). ' [And now (191 2), since 1906, Dean of Ely.] * Oxford, 1885, p. 21 ff. PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION Just twenty-three years have elapsed since the first edition of the present work appeared. In the interval much has been done for the elucidation of the Old Testament ; and the student of it — especially the English student — finds much at hand to help him which in 1890 either did not exist, or, if it did exist, was either unknown, or with difficulty accessible. If the years have not been marked by any such epoch-making work as Wellhausen's History of Israel (1878), yet a number of works placing much new and important matter in the hands of students have appeared : for instance — to name only a few — the two series of Commentaries on the Old Testament, edited by Nowack and Marti ; the fifteen volumes which have at present (Oct. 191 2) appeared of the International Critical Commentary ; the Hebrew-English Lexicon, edited by Prof. Briggs, Prof. Brown, and the present writer ; Kittel's very useful Biblia Hebraica ; Kautzsch's greatly improved editions (dating from 1889) of Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar, two of which have been translated into English (1898, 1910); the two great repertories of Biblical learning, Hastings' Dictionary of the Bible (1898-1904), and the Encyclopaedia Biblica (1899- 1903); G. A. Cooke's North- Semitic Inscrip- tiotis (1903) ; and the Papyri of Assuan and Elephantine, published respectively by Sayce and Cowley (1906), and Sachau (19 11), which have thrown such unexpected light on the social and religious condition of the Jews of Upper Egypt in the fifth century B.C. The new knowledge, derivable from these and other sources, I have endeavoured, as far as the scope of the work permitted, to make available for students of the Old Testament in the present edition. This edition exceeds the first edition by more than 100 pages. The character of the work remains, 1365 a 3 X Preface to the Second Edition however, unaltered, its object being still, as I said in the Preface to the First Edition (p. V), not solely to explain the text of the Books of Samuel, but, while doing this, to teach the student to understand Hebrew philology, and to appre- ciate Hebrew idioms. The increase in size is due partly to the incorporation of new matter of the kind just referred to, and to the notice that necessarily had to be taken of the many new suggestions about the text, which had been made in (especially) the very ably-written Commentaries of Budde, H. P. Smith, and Nowack ; and partly to the fact that I have enlarged the scope of the book, — and, I hope, increased at the same time, its usefulness, — by adding fresh notes, not only on points of philology and idiom, but also on the topography of the Books of Samuel. I was led in the first instance to deal with the latter subject by the desire to illustrate from these Books the force of the ' went up ' and * came down,' at once so characteristic of the historical books of the Old Testament, and so vividly reflecting the physical features of the country in which they were written ; and then, in view of the many highly questionable identifications of ancient sites in the current English maps of Palestine^ (to which I have called attention elsewhere 2), I went further, and added notes on the sites of places mentioned in the Books of Samuel. The notes are brief; but they embody often the result of considerable research. To illustrate further the topography of the Books, I have added Maps, indicating the elevations (which are important for following properly the history), and ^ Except those in the Encyclopaedia Biblica, which are above reproach. 2 See the Expository Times, xiii (July, 1902), p. 457 ff. ; xxi (Aug. and Sept. 1910), 495 ff., 562 ff. ; Expositor, 1911, Nov., p. 38S f., 1912, Jan., pp. 25 «., 26 k., 32 f., Feb., p. 124 f. Bartholomew, though an admirable chartographer, clearly does not possess the philological and historical knowledge enabling him to distinguish between a sound and unsound identification of an ancient site. But G. A. Smith's Historical Atlas of the Holy Land, which is likely now (Feb., 1913) to appear shortly, may be confidently expected to satisfy all requirements. Preface to the Second Edition XI including all such sites as can be reasonably identified, those which are doubtful or conjectural being marked by a query. I have naturally, in preparing this edition, adjusted refer- ences (e.g. those to Gesenius-Kautzsch) to the latest editions of the works referred to, and also referred to more generally accessible books in preference to the less accessible books which in 1889 were often alone available (e.g. to Dr. Cooke's NSL, in preference to the CIS.). I have also enlarged the Index, and made it, I hope, more useful to those who wish to study Hebrew idioms. In the transliteration of Hebrew and Arabic names, especially names of places, I am sorry to say, I have not succeeded in attaining uniformity ; but I hope that no serious misunderstanding will arise in consequence. Conjectural emendation, especially in the prophetical and poetical books of the Old Testament, is at present much in evi- dence ; and I venture to add a few remarks upon it. The value of the Ancient Versions for correcting — naturally, with the precautions noted on pp. xxxviii, xlv — the Massoretic text is now generally recognized by Biblical scholars. But it must be evident to a careful student of the Massoretic text that the Versions do not enable us to correct all errors in it ; and hence the necessity of conjectural emendation must be admitted. Passages often occur which strongly excite sus- picion ; and the character of the ancient, unpointed script is such as to lend itself readily to corruption. The fact that a clever scholar can indulge his genius for improvement to excess is not evidence that conjecture, in itself, is illegitimate. We must exercise judgement and discrimination. An emenda- tion, to be convincing, must yield a good sense, unmistakeably superior to that of the Massoretic text, be in accordance with idiom, and not differ too widely from the ductus littcrartnn of the existing text, — especially in the older script. It ought also not to presume unduly that, when only limited remains of Hebrew literature have come down to us, wc have an XII Preface to the Second Edition absolute knowledge of what might, or might not, have been said in the ancient language. Conjectural emendations, satis- fying these conditions, have unquestionably been made, including some which have afterwards been found to be con- firmed by the testimony of an Ancient Version. On the other hand, it is impossible not to feel that a large proportion of the conjectural emendations which have been proposed rest upon arbitrary or otherwise insufficient grounds. There are also many of which it is impossible to say more than that they Diay be right, they are such as the author might have written, but we can have no assurance that he did write them. Hence they can be adopted only with the qualification ' perhaps.' The conditions under which the writings of the Old Testament have come down to us are such that the legitimacy of con- jectural emendation is undoubted ; we must only satisfy ourselves, before definitely accepting a conjectural emendation, that the grounds upon which it rests are sound and sufficient. For the typographical accuracy of the volume I am greatly indebted to Mr. J. C. Pembrey, Hon. M.A., the octogenarian Oriental 'reader' of the Clarendon Press. Nearly every Oriental work that has been published by the Press during the last fifty years, including, for instance, Max Muller's Rig-veda, Payne Smith's Thesaurus Syriacus^ and Neubauer's Catalogue of Hebrezv MSS. in the Bodleian Library, has had the benefit of Mr. Pembrey 's watchful supervision : but, notwithstanding his years, his eye, as I can testify from experience, is still un- dimmed, and he is still as able as ever to bestow upon a book passing through his hands that interest, and more than con- scientious care, which so many Orientalists have learnt to appreciate. S. R. D. Christ Church, Oxford, October 28, 191 2. CONTENTS List of Abbreviations ....... Addenda .......... Introduction : — § I. 77ie Early History of the Hebrew Alphabet § 2. Early Hebrew Orthography . . . . . § 3. The Chief Ancient Versions of the Old Testanmit § 4. Characteristics of the Chief Ancient Versions of Samuel Appendix : — The Inscription of Mesha', commonly known as the ' Moabite Stone' Note on the Maps . . , . Notes on I Samuel . Notes on II Samuel . Index of Subjects Index of Hebrew Words and Idioms Index of Places. page XV XIX 1 xxvii xxxiii Iv Ixxxiv xcv I 231 381 384 389 Facsimiles. I. Hebrew Inscribed Tablet from Gezer II. The Siloam Inscription .... III. The Carpentras Stele ..... IV. Part of an Egyptian Aramaic Papyrus, of 484 B.C. V. Egyptian Aramaic Papyrus .... VI. Inscription of Tabnith, King of Zidon . To face p. vii p. ix p. xii p. xvi p. xvii p. xxiv Maps. The Pass of Michmas Section of Northern Palestine . Section of Central Palestine Section of Southern Palestine To face p. 106 „ p. 213 At the end of the voluvie LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AJSL. ■=■ American Journal of Semitic Languages. al. = alii, aliter. alt. = alternatively (to denote one of two suggested views). Aptow. I, II, III = Aptowitzer, V., Das Schriftwort in der Rabhinischen Liter atur : (I) in the Sitziingsherichte der Akad. der Wiss. in Wien, vol. cliii (1906), Abhandl. VI; (II) il/id. vol. clx (1908), Abh. VII (on ancient renderings, and citations, of I Sam.); (HI) in the XVIII. Jahresbericht der Isr.-Theol. Lehranstalt in Wien, 1911 (on 2 Sam. and Joshua). AV. = Authorized Version. ^3 = the Rabbinical Bible, edited by Jacob ben Hayyim, and published by Daniel Bomberg, Venice, 1524-5. Baer = Liber Samuelis. Textum Masoreticum accuratissime ex- pressit, e fontibus Masorae varie illustravit, notis criticis confirmavit S. Baer (1892). Bo. = Bottcher, Fr., Neue exeg.-krit. Aehrenlese zum A. T. (above, p.VIf.). Sometimes also the Ausfuhrliches Lehrbuch der Hebr. Sprache, 1866, — a gigantic Thesaurus of grammatical forms, of great value for occasional refer- ence, but not adapted for general use. Bu. = Budde, K., Die BUcher Samuel erkldrt, 1902 (in Marti's Kurzer Hand-Co7nmentar zum A. T). Buhl = Buhl, F., Geographic des alien Paldstitia, 1896. CIS. := Corpus Inscriptionum Semiticarum, Parisiis, 1881 ff. Tom. I contains Phoenician Inscriptions ; Tom. II Aramaic Inscriptions. DB. = Hastings' Dictionary of the Bible. In five volumes (1898- 1904). Dh. = Dhorme, Le P^re P., Les Livres de Samuel, 19 10. EB. = Encyclopaedia Biblica (i 899-1 903). Ehrl. = Ehrlich, A. B., Randglossen zur Hebr. Bibel, vol. iii, 19 10. Clever ; but apt to be arbitrary, and unconvincing. EVV. = English Versions (used in quoting passages in which AV. and RV. agree). XVI List of Abbreviations Ew. = Ewald, H., Lehrbuch der Hebrdischen Sprache, ed. 7, 1863; ed. 8, 1870. The Syntax has been translated by J. Kennedy, Edinburgh, 1881. Gi. = Ginsburg, C. D., Massoretico-critical edition of the Hebrew Bible, 1894 ; ed. 2, much enlarged, now [19 12] appearing. GK. = Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar, as edited and enlarged by E. Kautzsch (ed. 28, 1909), translated by A. E. Cowley, 1 9 10. H.G. = G. A. Smith, Historical Geography of the Holy Land, 1894. fBLit. ■= four nal of Biblical Literature (Boston, U.S.A.). Ke. = Keil, C. F., Commentar ilber die BUcher Samuelis, ed. 2, 1875. Kenn., Kennedy = A. R. S. Kennedy, Samuel (in the Century Bible), 1905. Kit., Kitt. = Kittel, Biblia Hebraica (with footnotes, containing a selection of various readings from MSS., the Versions, and conjecture), 1905. Kit. ap. Kautzsch = Kittel's translation of Samuel in Kautzsch's Die Heilige Schrift des A.T.s, ed. 2, 1910. KIo. = Klostermann, Aug. (above, p. VIII). Kon. = Konig, F. E., Historisch-kritisches Lehrgebdude der Hebr. Sprache, i. (Accidence), 1881 ; ii. (Forms of nouns, numerals, adverbs, &c.), 1895; iii. (Syntax), 1897. Exhaustive, with full discussions of alternative views. Kp. = Kirkpatrick, A. F., Commentary on Samuel in the Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges, 1880. Lex. = Hebrew and English Lexicon, by F. Brown, S. R. Driver, and C. A. Briggs, 1906. Lidzb. = Lidzbarski, Handbuch der Nordsemitischen Epigraphik, 1898. Lo. = Lohr, Max, Die Biicher Samuels, 1898 (in the Kurzgefasstes Exegetisches Handbuch, taking the place of a third edition of Thenius). LOT? = Driver, S. R., Introduction to the Literature of the OT., ed. 8, 1909. Luc, Lucian = Lucian's recension of the LXX (see p. xlviii ff.). MT. = Massoretic text. NHWB. = J. Levy, Neuhebrdisches und Chalddisches Wdrterbuch, 1876-1889. List of Abbreviations XVII Now. = Nowack, W., Richier, Ruth und Biicher Samuelis, 1902 (in Nowack's Handkomvientar zuvi A.T.). NSI. = G. A.Cooke, A Text-Book of North-Semitic Inscriptiofis, 1903. 01. = Olshausen, Justus, Lehrbuch der Hebrdischen Sprache, i. 1861. A masterly work, containing, however, only the Laut-, Schrift-, and Formen- Lehre. The author never completed the syntax. The chapter devoted to the formation of Hebrew proper names is valuable. Onom. = P. de Lagarde, Onomastica Sacra, ed. i, 1870, OTfC} - W. R. Smith, The OT. in the fewish Church, ed. 2, 1892. PEFQS. = Quarterly Statement of the Palestine Exploration Fund. Perles = Felix Perles, Attalekten zur Textkritik des A.Ts, 1895. PRE? = Realencyklopddie fur Protestantische Theologie und Kirche, ed. 3 (edited by A. Hauck), 1 896-1 909. PS. = Payne Smith, Thesaurus Syriacus. Reinke = Reinke, Laur., Beitrage zur Erklarung des A.Ts, vol. vii. Munster, 1866. On transcriptional errors in the Massoretic text, or presupposed by the Ancient Versions, with many illustrations. The author is a Roman Catholic, in his attitude towards the Massoretic text entirely free from prejudice, and in fact not sufficiently discriminating in his criticism. Rob. = Edw. Robinson, Biblical Researches in Palestine, ed. 2, 1856. RV. = Revised Version. The University Presses have issued recently, very unfortunately, an edition of the Revised Version without the marginal notes of the Revisers. This is a retrograde step, which is greatly to be deplored. The Revisers' marginal notes contain not only much other information helpful to the reader, but also a large number of renderings unquestionably superior to those of the text, of which it is an injustice to deprive the public, even in a single edition. Readers of the present volume are asked, as occasion offers, to explain to those who desire to make the best use of the Revised Version the paramount importance of reading it in an edition containing the marginal notes. On the character andvalue of these notes, and on the bestway of making profitable use of them, I may refer to pp. xxiv-xxxii of my Book of Job in the Revised Version (1906). In the notes to this edition of Job, as also in Woods and Powell's very useful Hebrew Pi-ophets for English Readers (4 vols., 1909- 191 2), attention is regularly called to the marginal renderings preferable to those of the text. Sm. = Smith, H. P., The Books of Samuel, 1899 (in the International Critical Commentary). Stade = Stade, B., Lehrbuch der Hebrdischen Grammatik, i. 1879. On the lines of Olshausen. The most convenient book for those who desire an accidence more comprehensive thaa that of Gesenius-Kautzsch, and XVIII List of Abbreviations yet not so minute or elaborate as those of Olshausen or KOnig. The syntax never appeared. Th. = Thenius, Otto (above, p. VI). T. W. = Conder, C. R., Teni Work m Palestine, ed. 1887. We. = Wellhausen, Julius (above, p. VII). ZATW., ZAW.rzz Zeitschrift filr die Alitestamentliche Wtssenscha/l, edited by Bernhard Stade, 1881 flf. ZDMG. = Zeitschrift der Deulschen Morgenlandischen Gesellscha/l. ZDP V. = Zeitschrift des Deiitschen P alastina-Vereins. 'V\ - npiJI and the rest — ' etc' The readings of the Septuagint, when not otherwise stated, are those of Cod. B, as given in Dr. Swete's edition (p. xlvii). Lucian's recension (p. xlviii) is denoted by ' LXX (Luc.) ' or ' Luc' The abbreviation ' LXX ' is construed with a plural or a singular verb, according as the reference is more particularly to the translators themselves, or to the translation in the form in which we now have it. In words transliterated from the Hebrew, breathings (except sometimes the light breathings) and accents are not inserted : the earliest uncial MSS. have neither * ; and those inserted in Swete's edition have no authority whatever, being merely added by the editor in accordance with the orthography and accentuation of the Massoretic text ^ Their introduction is unfortunate ; for not only does it suggest an anachro- nism, but their presence in the text might readily give rise to false inferences. After what has been said, however, it will be obvious that nothing can be inferred from them respecting either the readings of the MSS. upon which the Septuagint is based, or the accentuation of Hebrew words in the age of the translators. The Peshitto and the Targum are cited from the editions of Lee and Lagarde, respectively. The sign t following a series of references indicates that all occurrences of the word or form in question have been quoted. The small 'superior' figure (as OTfCF) denotes the edition of the work referred to. In case this volume should reach any German readers, may I be allowed to explain that ' no doubt ' and ' doubtless ' do not affirm as strongly as ' undoubtedly,' and that they correspond to ' wohl ' rather than to ' unzweifelhaft ' .'' 1 Swete, Introd. to the OT. in Greek, p. 136. "^ See Swete's OT. in Greek, i. pp. xiii-xiv. ADDENDA P. 45. Gulhe {Miitheil. des Deuischen Pal.-Vereins, 191 2, p. 40 ff.) agrees that the ' Stone of Help ' of 7, 12, set up by Samuel, is not the Eben-ezer of 4, r, that Beth-horon is better \\i2,xv Beth-car xxi 7, 11, and that Yeshanah (p. 65), if = 'Ain Siniyeh, will not suit 7, 1 1 f. And on jNIejdel Yaba, marked on the Map as a possible site for Apheq, see ib. 1 9 1 1 , p. 33 ff. P. 98, note on v. 3, 1. 2 -.for 10, 10 (cf. 6) read 10, 5. P. 106 bottovu Conder (in ihe PEFQS. i88r, p. 253) objects to W. Abu Ja'd (leading up to Michmas : see the Map (Plate V) at the end of ZDPV. xxviii), as the scene of Jonathan's exploit, on the ground that this approach would have been naturally guarded by ihe Philistines, and that there would have been no occasion for Jonathan to climb up it on his hands and feet ; and considers the cliff el-Hosn (=Bozez), which, with difficulty, he climbed himself almost to the top (p. 252 f.), to be the place where Jonathan made his ascent. If the scene of the exploit is ever to be determined definitely, a fresh exploration of the Wady would seem to be necessary. P. 112, last line: y^^r Jud. 11, 20 read ]\xA. 11, 30. I 15, 6. The following synopsis of the occurrences of '^ in 93, the critical editions of Baer, Ginsburg, and Kittel, and MSS. and editions cited by Ginsburg, may be convenient. It will shew, among other things, how considerably, on Massoretic minutiae, texts and authorities differ. Fortunately, for exegesis, such minutiae have no importance. Jud. 20, 43 '^^^^:^^ BaG' (v. Baer, p. 102); "]"in [not ^] 93K. *i Sam. I, 6 nny^n 9BBaKGS- 1 6 MSS., 4 Edd.J *io, 24 DnwnggBaKG^; 1 4 MSS., 3 Edd., and 2 Mass. lists cited by Aptow. II, p. 73. 15, 6 ^T=i ^""D BaG'^ I MS., Yemenite Massoretic list ap. Ginsb. " The Massorah, iii. 73 ; H") gSK 39 MSS., 10 Edd. *i7, 25 Dn^8<^n SBBaKG^ 25 MSS., 4 Edd. ; 1 2 MSS., 4 Edd. 23, 28 Pl'-rni? BaG^ 2 MSS.; p1T]9 SBK 25 MSS., 7 Edd.; fl'l^O [not '^^^ Yemenite Mass. list ap. Ginsb. I.e. ♦The asterisk denotes cases mentioned by Kimchi, Michlol, ed. Lyck, p. 57'. X In each case, of the MSS. and early Edd. (excluding 93, which is cited here separately) quoted in Ginsburg's second edition (C^). On the passages cited from his first edition, no MSS. or Edd. are quoted by him. XX Addenda 2 Sam. i8, i6 fj'l^t? Ba 2 MSS.; V^^ K; K^-^X? S9G»; pi'tio 4 MSS., 2 Edd., Mass. list, I.e. p. 74, cf. Aptow. Ill, p. 56. 23, 28 ^inp [sic] Mass. list (but in no MS. or old Ed. ; G* ad loc). *2 Ki. 6, 32" Dri>K^n SSBaKG^ Mass. list, /.r. p. 73 (on i Sam. 10, 24); -I 5 MSS., 4 Edd. Jer. 22, 22 n=ivnj;"iri Ba (v. Baer, p. 99; GK. § 228); nn 23KG^ *39, 12 y^ ncixrp gSBaKG' (v. Baer, p. no; GK. § 228). *Ez. 16, 4 ^^B' n^D-K^ aSBaG^K. 21, 35 n^vli'^N Mass. list; 1 aBBaG^K. *Hab. 3, 13 m-^ mno BaG^ 27 MSS., i Ed., Yemenite Mass. list, p. 90 ; {^Nl SK 15 MSS., 9 Edd. *Ps. 52, 5 V^ nnriK aSBaG^K, Yemen list, p. 93. Prov. 3, 8 ^^ti'i' ^nn niiNDl aSBaG^K. *ii, 21 y^ ni53VN^ SBBaG^K. *i4, 10 itj'sa n^9 SBBaG'K. *i5, I tirn2i|P SBBaK ; 111 G^ 20, 2 3 y^/ncWx Ba; y-J 9BG'K. Job 39, 9 D^"n nn^vi BaGi; Dn ggK. *Cant. 5, 2 ^^-Nj'rp? ^B'k^B' aSBaG^K. Ezr. 9, 6 ti'K^ nbvpSj aSBaG^K. 2 Ch. 26, 10 nrnipo Ba; 31 95G'K. I 17, 17. It was objected, by a reviewer of my first edition, to the proposal to read nrn Dn^n nncy, that urh must be the accusative of speciahzation (comp. Wright, Arab. Gr. ii. § 96), and that the Arabic grammarians (Sibawaihi, ed. Derenb. i. p. 251) in this case distinctly forbid the employment of the art. with the subst. But there are in Hebrew several cases of the numeral in the si. abs. followed by a subst. determined by the art. (17, 14 D^bnjn rwh^. Jos. 6, 4. 8 (])is), 13 (bis). 15, 14 = Jud. I, 20. I Ki. II, 31 D^DnB^n n-iU'V ns'), or a suff. (Zech. 4, 2) ; and are we certain that the subst. in such cases is not in apposition (GK. § 134^; Kon. iii. § 3i2<^)? Or, if in all these passages, the si.c. (^'Tlb'y, etc.) is to be restored, in accordance with the alternative Arabic construction (Wright, /.r.), then it will be equally legitimate to restore it in i Sam. 17, 17 as well. On I 17, 40, 1. 2, for tJ^pSj:! read O^^'??. P. 253. Guthe {ib. 191 2, p. I ff.) points out objections to the iden- tification of el-Bireh with Beeroth, and suggests el-Lattatin, i^ m. NW. of Gibeon. INTRODUCTION § I. The Early History of the Hebrew Alphabet. The Old Testament — except, possibly, the latest portions — was not written originally in the characters with which we are familiar ; and a recollection of the change through which the Hebrew alphabet passed is preserved both in the Talmud and by the Fathers. In the Talmud, Sanh. 21^, we read : 'Originally the law was given to Israel in the Hebrew character and in the sacred tongue : it was given again to them, in the days of Ezra, in the '^Assyrian" character (■""ilt^'S 3nD3), and in the Aramaic tongue. Israel chose for themselves the "Assyrian " character and the sacred tongue, and left to the iSiwrat the Hebrew character and the Aramaic tongue. Who are the iStwrai ? R. Hasda^ said. The Cuthites [i.e. the Samaritans: 2 Ki. 17, 24]. What is the Hebrew character? R. Hasda said, ^nNJin""^ 3n3^' The original character is here termed Hebrew CI^V ^C|)> the new character nitJ'N "*. In the Jerus. Talmud, Megillah i, 71^, two explanations are offered of the latter term: 'And why is it called niK'N? Because it is straight ("'K'N'p) in form. R. Levi says. Because the Jews brought it home with them from Assyria'-'! The explanation Assyrian is ^ A teacher of the school of Sura, d. 309. ^ ^ty^i Dn^ nin-iji nnrn trnipn \vS\ ^'\'2:i anaa h^-wh nnin n^n^: ni^nni "Nma Nion 'i -ids* niDvnn |no n^^Dix pc'h nay ans mmnn^ in^jni r\\!i.v\ih 2n3 N*iDn '-1 idn nnny 3n3 ^xd. ^ An expression of uncertain meaning: comp. Hoffmann in the ZATW. i. 337; Levy NHWB. s. v. * The same term is used elsewhere: thus in the Mishnah, Megillah i, 8 nimni p^sni pLi'^ bn pnn^j DnaontJ' n^n mnr»i p^sn^ nnso pn ps nmii'K N?N pnnSJ P''i<, i.e. the sacred books might be written in any language, but the Tefdlin and Mezuzoth only in the 'Assyrian' character. 5 mn nbyj' dc' i?y ^i^ 'i -ir:N unaa nc'iN» nihb' niK'K ir:c' nip: noh TT : T TV ' b 1365 ii Introduction the more probable, whether it be supposed to be used loosely for ' Babylonian,' or whether — as others have thought — it have the sense of Syrian or Aramaic (as occasionally in later times appears to have been the case ^), and so embody a true tradition as to the origin of the new character. The nv.i'N 3n3 is that which in later times acquired the name of V3"i?p 303 or square character '^. Origen, speaking of the sacred name, says that in accurate MSS. it was written in archaic characters, unlike those in use in his own day ' : eo-rt Sc Trap' avrois Ka.1 TO aveKcjiwvrjTov rerpaypa^^aTOV ottc/d ctti tov )(pv(rov TreraXov tov ap)^upe(Di; iyeypaiTTO- KvpLos 8e Kat tovto Trap "EAXrycrt cK^wvciTai. Kai ev TOis aKpiySecrt twv avTLypd<}>wv EySpatKois dpxaiois ypajjifiaai yeypaTTTai dXX ouyl ToTs vvv. aCTl ydp tov "EaSpai' erepois XP^'^°-^^°^^ /lerd TTjk' aixp.aXwaiai', In his Commentary on Ez. 9, 4 he adds that a con- verted Jew, in answer to an enquiry, told him that to, dpxoua a-Toixfia ifx.(jiepe<; ex^'V to 6av tw tov CTTavpov ^^apa/CTT^pt. Jerome, at the beginning of the ' Prologus Galeatus *,' after observing that the Hebrews, Syrians, and Chaldaeans had all an alphabet of twenty-two characters, continues, ' Samaritan! etiam Pentateuchum Moysi totidem litteris scriptitant, figuris tantum et apicibus discrepantes. Certumque est Esdram scribam legisque doctorem, post capta Hierosolyma et instaurationem templi sub Zorobabel, a/tas litteras reppertsse quibus nunc uiirmir, cum ad illud usque tempus iidem Samaritanorum et Hebraeorum characteres fuerint.' On Ez. 9, 4 he makes a remark to the same effect as Origen. In his letter to Marcella, De decern nominibtis Dei^, he writes, * Nomen TeTpaypd/x/jiaTov quod dvcKc^wvr^Tov id est ineffabile putaverunt quod his litteris scribitur nin^ : quod quidam non intelligentes propter elementorum similitudinem cum in Graecis 1 Cf. Jer. 35 (42), II. Ez. 32, 29 {'Aaavptoi for DIN, i.e. D"IN) in the LXX. * For other statements made by the Jews respecting the change of script, and often dependent upon most fanciful exegesis, see Chapman, Introd. to the Pentateuch (uniform with the Cafiibridge Bible), 1911, pp. 279-287). 2 On \p. 2, 2 (quoted by Montfaucon, Hexapla, i. 86 : in a slightly different form, from other MSS., in ed. Bened. ii. 539 = Lommatzsch xi. 396 f.). * Or Preface to the Four Books of Kings (which were the first translated by Jerome from the Hebrew), designed as a defetice (galea) against detractors, — printed at the beginning of ordinary editions of the Vulgate. * Ep. 25 (ed. Bened. i. 705 ; Vallarsi i. 129). § I. Change of Character in the Hebrew Script iii litteris repererent mm legere consueverunt ^' Epiphanius'^ (d. 403) makes a statement similar to that contained in the extract from Sanhedrin, that a change of character was introduced by Ezra, and that the old form was only retained by the Samaritans. The' fact of a change of character, to which these passages bear witness, is correct : the only error is that it is represented as having been introduced by one man. Tradition, as is its wont, has attributed 7 to a single age, and to a single name, what was in reality only accom- plished gradually, and certainly was not completed at the time of Ezra (who came to Palestine B.C. 458). What, then, was that older character of which the Talmud and the ^ Fathers speak, and which they describe as being still retained by the Samaritans? It was the character which, with slight modifications of form, is found upon the Inscription of Mesha' (commonly known as the ' Moabite Stone '), upon early Aramaic and Hebrew gems, upon Phoenician Inscriptions, and upon the few early Hebrew Inscriptions which we at present possess, viz. those found at Samaria, Gezer, and Siloam ^ It was the common Semitic character, used alike, in ancient times, by the Moabites, Hebrews, Aramaeans, and Phoenicians, and transmitted by the Phoenicians to the Greeks. This character remained longest without substantial alteration in Hebrew proper and Phoenician : in Greek it changed gradually to the character with which we are now familiar : the transition to what is termed above the mti'N 3n3 was effected first in Aramaic ; it was only accomplished at a later period in Hebrew, in consequence, no doubt, of the growing influence of the Aramaic language in Palestine, in the period imme- diately preceding the Christian era. Tables of the chief ancient Semitic alphabets are to be found in * Comp. the Hexapla on ^. 26 (25), i ; Is. i, 2 (with Dr. Field's note); Nestle in the ZDMG. xxxii. 466-9, 507. In the palimpsest Fragments of the Books of Kings [i Ki. 20, 7-17; 2 Ki. 23, 11- 27] in Aqtiilds Translation, found by Dr. Schechter in the Cairo Genizah, and published by F. C. Bnrkitt in 1897, and in those from the Psalms, published in C.Taylor's Cairo Genizah Palimpsests (1900), the Tetragrammaton is regularly written in the archaic characters here referred to (cf. Burkitt, p. 15 f. ; DB. iv. 444). ' Dexiigemmis, §63 (ed. Dindorf, 1863,1V. 213; cited by Hoffmann, «. J. p. 334). ' See p. vii ff. b 2 IV Introduction most Hebrew grammars of modern times \ and they need not be here repeated. It will be more instructive to place before the reader specimens of Inscriptions themselves in facsimile. The earliest Inscription of all, that of Mesha' {c. b.c. 900), has not been included, as facsimiles of it with transcriptions in modern Hebrew characters are readily obtainable^. The characters used in this Inscription are the most ancient of the West-Semitic type that are known ^, though they differ but slightly from the earliest of those that are figured below : the differences may be studied in detail with the aid of the Tables mentioned below. Here are examples of seals with Aramaic (Figs, i and 2) and Hebrew (Figs. 3 and 4) Inscriptions, the first three of which are Fig. I. Fig. 2. Fig. 3. Fig. 4- (Levy, Taf. I, i) (Levy, Taf. 1, 3) innTJ? p "IJlDOn I (Levy, Taf. Ill, i) (Levy, Taf. Ill, 3) assigned by M. A. Levy* to the eighth cent, b.c, while the fourth is somewhat later. ^ There is a good one at the beginning of Geseniiis-Kautzsch. More extensive Tables may be found in Cooke's A'ortk-Semitic Inscriptiotis {i()0'^), Plates XII-XIV; in Plates XLIV-XLVI of the Atlas to Lidzbarski's Hatidbuch dernordsemitischeH Epigraphik (1898) ; and especially in Chwolson's Corpus Inscriptionum Hebrai- carum ettthal/end Grabmschriften aus der Krim, etc., 1882 (a Table constructed by the eminent German palaeographer Euting, containing specimens of not less than 139 alphabets). ^ See Die Inschrift des K'dnigs Mesa von Moab fiir akademische Vorlesungen heratisgegeben von Rudolf Smend nnd Albert Socin (Freiburg i. B., 1886); and Plate I in Lidzbarski's Handbiich (above, n. i). ' The Inscription on fragments of a bowl dedicated to p3? p'^1, found in Cyprus in 1872, is, however, considered by some to be of greater antiquity (see Cooke, NSI. No. 11). The characters are very similar (Lidzb. Atlas, II. i). * Siegel und Gemmen 7nit aramdischen, phdnizischen, althebrdischen etc. In- schrifien (Breslau, 1869), pp. 6, 8, 34, 37. § I. Old West-Semitic and Greek Inscriptions v No. I was found under the pedestal of a colossal bull at Khorsabad : Nos. 3 and 4 were obtained by M. Waddington, the former in Aleppo, the latter in Damascus. The resemblance of some of the characters to those of the Greek alphabet will be evident : the T and D are closely similar to A^ and H, while the forms of n and "1 become, when turned round so as to face the right, E and P respectively. The 7 and y exhibit quite the forms which they still have in modern European alphabets, L and O, but from which in the later Hebrew alphabet they both diverged considerably. The characters on old Phoenician seals and gems are so similar that it has not been deemed necessary to add illustrations I The following specimens of ancient Inscriptions from Thera will illustrate the derivation of the Greek alphabet from the Phoenician ' : the letters, as is often the case in the most ancient Greek Inscriptions, are read from right to left : — Fig- 5- 3^093 'Efl-a-yaTOj liTote(<) Fig. 6. r^ o^o'AV aA^^ Kephvvonos (From Roehl's Imaghtes Inscripiioiium Graecanim Antiquissimae, Berolini, 1883, Nos. i and 4.) The E does not differ materially from the n in Fig. 3 ; the n differs but slightly from the S of Mesha"s Inscription, and indeed agrees ' In the Inscription of Mesha', as in that to |J3^ pyi, from Cyprus (Cooke, NSI. No. n ; Lidzb., Plate II, A), the 1 is a simple triangle, with no elongation of the right side downwards; it thus exactly resembles the Greek A, and is also distinct from the "I. '^ Examples may be seen in Levy, /. c Taf. II ; cf. Cooke, PI. IX, B 1-7. ' For two other rather interesting examples, from the Gortynian Code, and the Treaty between the Eleans and the Heraeans (c. 525 B.C.), see Berger, Hist, de VEcriture dans P AntiquitP (1892), pp. 132-4 (also in Roberts, Greek Epigraphy, Pt. i. (1887), pp. 42, 288, — with many other facsimiles of archaic Greek inscriptions, pp. 23 ff., 39 ff., etc.). vi Introduction substantially with the f) of modern printed texts : the r and K are quite the 3 and 3 of Mesha"s: the I, which has not yet become a straight hne, retains evident traces of its origin (cf. Fig. 3) : the M as compared with the N has a double turn at the top, exactly as in Fig. 3, the P and the A are more differentiated, but do not differ in principle from the forms in Figs, i and 2. By turning the letters round so as to face the right, the later and usual form of the Greek character is (in most cases) immediately produced. The evidence of Inscriptions thus confirms the testimony of Herodotus, respecting the origin of the Greek alphabet from Phoenicia \ The most ancient West-Semitic Inscriptions, at present known, next to that of Mesha', are probably the p2b ?y3 Inscription from Cyprus (p. iv n. 3), and the Old Aramaic Inscriptions of Zinjirli, near ' Hd. 5. 58 Oi 5^ *0(V(/C€s ovtoi ol avv KaSuqj airtKofifVoi . . . dWa t( iroWa, o'lKTjcravTts tuvttjv ttjv xajprji/, (aTjyayov SiSaaKuAia ts tovs "EXAj^vos, Kal 81] Kal Ypap.^aTa, ovk i6vTa irpiv Tots"EWrjai, ws i/xol SoKtfiv irpaiTa fxiv, roiffi Kal dnavrts XptojvTai ^oiviKts' fiird 54, xP"''ov irpo^aivovros, dfia ttj (pwvTJ fxeTe0a\ov Kal tov ^v6p.uv (the shape) tujv ypafinarmv. Tlfpio'iKtov 5( acptas tcL woWd twv x'^P'^^ TovTov Tuv xpupov 'EA.Atjj'oii' ''laivts. ot TTapaXaPuvTts SiSaxjj irapd tujv ^oivikcjv tcL jpafifiara utTappvOpLiaavris a2fip (2 Sam. 21, 9), in April. The D is placed below the line for want of space. 5. 'The month of the reaping (or harvest) of all things,' i.e. of the general harvest in May. 6. The pruning ("lOT Ct. 2, 12) meant will be (Dalm. p. 1 19), the second Y>T\xmng, in June. 7. Y? (i.e. }^^"^) the late summer fruits (see on 2 Sam. 16, i), ripe in July or August. The Calendar is imperfect, containing only 8 months : but this and other difficulties connected with it need not here be considered \ The characters are bold and clear, though evidently the work of an unpractised hand. Most of the characters have archaic forms (compare, for instance, the N, 1, 1, f, n, D, V, p, K' with the earlier forms in the Tables of Cooke, Lidzbarski, or GK.) : there are few or none of the curves, or other modifications, which are characteristic of the later forms. The 3 in 1. 5 is very abnormal ; but this may be due to the inexperience of the engraver. The letters at the lower left-hand corner are read by Lidzbarski as 365, — perhaps [P'i]^''3K '^. Until the discovery of the Gezer Inscription, the Inscription on the wall of the tunnel of Siloam (Plate II) was considered to be the oldest known Hebrew Inscription. The Pool of Siloam is situated at the extreme S. of the Eastern hill of Jerusalem (on the N. of which the Temple formerly stood), near the entrance to the Tyropoeon valley; and a conduit or tunnel cut through the rock from the Virgin's 1 See further PEFQS. 1909, 26 ff. (Lidzbarski), 30 ff. (G. B. Gray), 113 ff. (Daiches, on Babylonian parallels), ii8f. (Dalman), 189 ff. (Gray), 194 f. (Lidz- barski) ; lAAzb^Lxski^s Ephemeris, iii. 37 ff. (notice, p. 45, the parallel from Tose/ia, p. 215, 1. 15 ff., ed. Zuckermandel) ; Marti, ZAIV. 1909, p. 222 ff. ^ The line above a letter indicates that the reading is not quite certain. Plate II is o H s a [Face page ix § I. The Siloajn Inscription ix Spring ' — the one natural spring which Jerusalem possesses — situated some distance above it, on the E. side of the same hill, leads down to it, and supplies it with water ^ The tunnel is circuitous, measuring 1708 feet (Warren), or 1757 feet (Conder), though the distance in a straight line is considerably less. At a distance of about 19 feet from where the tunnel opens into the Pool of Siloam, and on the right-hand side as one enters it, is an artificial niche or tablet in the rock, the lower part of which is occupied by the Inscription. The Inscription was first observed in 1880, by a pupil of Architect Schick, who, while wading in the Pool with a lighted candle, observed what appeared to be characters engraved on the rock. Ultimately, in 1 881, a gypsum cast was obtained by Dr. Guthe, who published a photograph, with accompanying description, in 1882^, which has since been often reproduced. A portion of three lines in the In- scription has been destroyed through the wearing away of the rock ; but the general sense is quite plain. Here is the Inscription, trans- literated into modern Hebrew characters : ********** niyQ . napjn . nan . rrri . nn . n2p3n * * * i p . c'N . ^p . ^[dc'J 2]^:irh . ddx . ^b^ . niyni . tyn . ^n . cs* . irnan 2 n . D-ni ******. p^n . nv3 . mr . n\n . ""3 . lyn . ^n . ^<-l 3 . 13^^"! . jrn: . \>v . ]]'\i . lyn . mp^ . ^^ , D3vnn . isn . nap: 4 ND1 . nr^N . ej^Ki . D>nND3 . nDnan . ^n . a-^^r^ri . p . D'^Dn 5 . Dnxnn . ^ii-\ . bv . ^vn , n33 . n>n . noN . n 6 I.e. I. [Behold] the piercing through! And this was the manner of the piercing through. Whilst yet [the miners were lifting up] 2. the pick, each towards his fellow, and whilst yet there were three cubits to be pierced [through, there was heard] the voice of each call- 3. ing to his fellow, for there was a fissure (?) in the rock on the right- hand And on the day of the ' Not the Virgin's Fool, as stated incorrectly in the Palaeographical Society's Volume. This is a small artificial reservoir near St. Stephen's Gate, and has no connexion with either the Virgin's Spring, or the Pool of Siloam. 2 See the Plan in EB. ii, facing col. 2419-20, or G. A. ^m\'i\\, Jerusalem (1907), ii, Plan facing p. 39 ; and comp. i. 87-92. ^ ZDMG. 1882, pp. 725-50. See also Lidzbarski, Ephemcris, i. 53. Introduction 4. piercing through, the miners (lit. hewers) smote each so as to meet his fellow, pick against pick : and there flowed 5. the water from the source to the pool, 1200 cubits; and one hun- 6. dred cubits was the height of the rock over the head of the miners. The Hebrew is as idiomatic, and flowing, as a passage from the Old Testament, i. nzpJ or <"i3i?3 does not occur in the OT. : 3pJ is to pierce (2 Ki. 12, 10 al.) ; jLoj is a hole or aperiure. — On the use of "lan, comp. p. 192 7iote. 2. iy"?. as Jer. 6, 21 : usually ^ny~\. — *iiy3 as Gen. 48, 7, cf. Am. 4, 7. 3. nM, i.e. probably n;n as 2 Ki. 9, 37 Kt.— mr: the letters are quite clear, but the meaning is altogether uncertain, the word being not otherwise known, and the derivation from n^r producing no suitable sense. 4. nnp^, vocalize nip?, the infin. of n-J^. 5. The order of the numerals in P]^N1 D^nNJO (the smaller before the greater), as Nu. 3, 50 ^i^SI niXO ^h^; but the order is rare in OT., except in P, Ez. Chr. (GK. § 134'). and with ^l^N very rare^ 5_6. HDN nXJD, as ^rt^• nxp Gen. 5, 3, and often besides in P {LOT. p. 131 (edd. 1-5, p. 124), No. 8 ; GK. § 134^). On the orthography of the Inscription, see below, pp. xxx, xxxii. The words, as in the Inscription of Mesha', are separated by dots, without spaces ^. The Inscription has been generally assigned to the time of Hezekiah, who is stated to have ' made the pool, and the conduit, and brought water into the city' (2 Ki. 20, 20) 'to the west side of the city of David' (2 Ch. 32, 30) in terms which appear exactly to describe the function of the tunnel in which the Inscription is I E. J. Pilcher, however {PSBA. 1897, p. 165 ff., with a Table of Alphabets; 1898, p. 213 ff.), pointed out the resemblance of several of its characters to those of a later date, and argued that it belonged to the time of Herod. His conclusions were combated by Conder {FEFQS. 1897, p. 204 ff.) : he replied ibid. 1898, p. 56 f. Stanley A. Cook, in his detailed palaeographical study of the Old Hebrew alphabet in the FEFQS. 1909, p. 284 ff., though not accepting a date as late as this, agrees (cf. p. 305 bottom) that the characters point to a date later than c. 700 B. c. : ' if placed early,' he remarks (p. 308), ' it embarrasses, and will always embarrass, Hebrew palaeography ; ' he cannot, indeed {ibid. n. 2), fix the approximate date with any confidence, but thinks a date in the time of Simon, son of Onias (see Ecclus. 50, 3 Heb.),— probably c. 220 B.C.,— not impossible. Let us hope that future discoveries will make the date clearer. 1 Add I Ki. 5, 12, Ez. 48, 16. 30.32. 33.34; and see, for further particulars, Herner, Syntax dcr Zahlwortcr im AT., 1893, pp. 72 f., 74, 79. '^ See further, NSL No. 2. » Guthe, /. c. pp. 745-^; Smith, i. IC2 f., ii. 151. § I. The Siloam Inscription XI For our present purpose it is not necessary to consider this question further. Although some of the Siloam characters do resemble the later, rather than the earlier, examples of the older script (see, in Lidzbarski's Plate XLVI, Table III, the parallel cross strokes of the K, the T, the curving tail in 3, D, J, and D, and the disappearance of the left-hand upright stroke of the x), they are still substantially of the archaic type, and there is no appreciable approximation to the ' square ' type. The Samaritan character, as stated in the passages quoted above from the Talmud and the Fathers, preserves in all essential features the old Hebrew type, the modifications being confined to details, and originally, no doubt, being merely calligraphic variations : — In Palestine the old Hebrew character was used regularly on coins, from the earliest Sheqels and half-Sheqels struck by Simon Maccabaeus (b.c. 141-135) to those of the Great Revolt, a.d. 65-68, and of Simon Bar-cochab, a.d. 132-135*. The example (Fig. 7) is a Sheqel of the third year (3 C i.e. : JiJCr) of Simon Maccabaeus: — Fig. 7. r\m'^\>r\ n^^c'n'- (From Madden's Coins of the Jews, p. 68, No. 5.) As characters that were entirely unknown would evidently not be suitable for use upon coins, it may be inferred that though in the time of Christ the older character had been generally superseded (for the \ Matth. 5, 18, is by no means the smallest letter in the old alphabet), it was still known, and could be read without difficulty. ' Madden, Coins of the Jews (ed. 3, 1881), pp. 67 ff., 198 ff., 233 ff. xii Introduction In the characters represented hitherto, no tendency to modification in the direction of the modern square type has been observable. Such a tendency first manifests itself in the Aramaic alphabet, and may be traced most distinctly in Aramaic Inscriptions from Egypt. Plate III is a facsimile of the ' Carpentras stele V a monument carved in lime- stone, the early history of which is not known, but which is now deposited in the Bibliothbque et Musde d'Inguimbert in the town of Carpentras (ddp. Vaucluse) in France. The monument is a funereal one : the representation above the Inscription exhibits the embalmed body of the deceased, a lady named Taba, resting on the lion-shaped bier, and attended by the jackal-headed Anubis at the feet, and by the hawk-headed Horus at the head, with the four customary funereal vases beneath. The figures stationed as mourners at a litde distance from the head and feet of the bier are Isis and Nephthys. The first three lines of the Inscription are about 9^ inches long ; the height of the letters is f of an inch, or a little more. . The Inscription { = CIS. II. i. 141 =A^^/. No. 75), in square characters, is as follows: — Nni?N noiN n Nnjnn ''snn nna am nana i nron m?DN ab c'^x ^^;-i3i mny ab e^^w cyn^n 2 ^np pD nois mp |n nn nsnn noix mp 3 n''Dn p3i ""nyrDJ nnbs ^in 4 I.e. I. Blessed be Taba, the daughter of Tahapi, devoted worshipper of the God Osiris. 2. Aught of evil she did not, and calumny against any man she never uttered. 3. Before Osiris be thou blessed : from Osiris take thou water. 4. Be thou a worshipper (sc. before Osiris), my darling; and among the pious [mayest thou be at peace !]. I. ^n^ori ; Monk is an Egyptian word, mtzxivcvg perfect, pious ; the prefix ta (/') is the fem. article. n=Heb. HT: the demonstrative with the force of a relative, as regularly in Aramaic. But n ( = Arab. jj) is usually hardened to "'"^ in Aram. (Dan. Ezr. passim) ; the same form, 1 Plate LXIV in the Palaeographical Society's Volume. Plate III o C i-i *-• m '(J ^ 1 1^= W ti, PL, H C/2 ^ "-^ 'O < X -a W ^ H T Face page xii] § I. Egyptian Aramaic Inscriptions xiii however, recurs in Plate V, lines i, 3, 5, and, as is now known, is the form all but uniformly found in Egyptian Aramaic ^ 2. Oy^ji'? something ^ is the oldest extant form ' of the word which appears in Mandaic as DNirD, in the Targums as Oy^O*, and in Syriac as P»i2) : comp. ZDMG. xxxiv. 568, 766. K'''N3 is the older form of the Syr. jkAd evil: comp. ^'Hi.l to be evil in the Targums, Gen. 21, 11, and often, ^*B'''3 (emph.) evil. JTiny and nipx are the usual Aram, forms of 3 fern. pf. ''2?")3 must correspond to what is usually written in Aram, as »V"ip (see Dan. 3, 8. 6, 25); in Mandaic, however, the root is written pD ; and comp. Syr. )>^.i3=:Heb. nE'i'5, and Mand. NDCD = )]^cii3 = Heb. ^^P. The term will be used here in the derived sense of ' calumny ' (though this explanation is not free from objec- tion) ^ non cannot mean perfect (nsri) ' because adjectives of this form are very rarely derived from verbs S?"y (the Aram, form is jp-ocr*^), and because, as the subj. of mON, we should expect the emphatic nnOD. If nj2n = Syr. ^r=Heb. DK', as in Ezr. 5, 17. 6, I. 6. 12, it must mean there, yonder, the speaker being conceived as in the world beyond the grave, and therefore referring to this earthly life as "yonder." This seems, however, rather forced: and it is perhaps better to adopt Lagarde's suggestion that nDn = Syr. fol^m (rad. Y^^) " ^^^^" ' (Dr. Wright). The word must be allowed * See the Glossaries of Sayce-Cowley, Aramaic Papyri discovered at Assuan (1906), and Sachau, Aramdische Papyrus aus . . . Ekphantitie (191 1). It is also the form found in the old Aramaic of Zinjirli and Nineveh, and in that of Babylon, Tema, and even Cilicia. See the particulars and references given in LOT} 504, 515. 2 From NID V'^'i'? scibile quid (cf. V^IJIO, knowledge, from VT*, Dan. 5, 12) ; Fleischer, in Levy's Chald. Worterb. ii. 567 ; Noldeke, Manddische Granim., 186. ^ Now (1912) attested as early as B.C. 407 and 419 (Sachau, 2, 14; 6, 7), if not as B.C. 510 (Sachau, 52, 11 : see p. 185), and also occurring elsewhere in Egyptian Aramaic (see Sachau's Glossary, p. 285), and in Nabataean (Cooke, NSI. 94, 5, of the 1st cent. a.d.). Also in the pi. NrUDVl^D, Sachau, 2, 12. 3, 11. * So in the Palmyrene Tariff Inscription of A.D. 137, NSI. 147, i. 5 |inO; 8,9 XCynO; ii. ^4oDj;nD. ' Lagarde, Synunicta, ii. p. 61 f. ^ Comp. "^^.^^ii.?, j^JLX, MoA^.j'^.oXo, i..ii3, y^», Ja*i3», by the side of b"^, ly, rtifj bp, "^P, "JI, pi (Lagarde, Anmerkun^en zur griech. Obers. der Proz'erbien, 1863, on 4, ^). xiv Introduction to be uncertain. 3. Oni^. (O, as Dan. 2, 6, and often, po, i.e. f*l?. The expression Receive water may be illustrated from Greek Inscrip- tions*; and the representation of the bestowal of water upon the dead is common on Egyptian monuments. 4. "TiyDJ (which admits of no explanation) is supposed to be an error of the stone-cutter for ••nttyjl my pleasant, delightful one (cf. 2 Sam. i, 26. Cant. 7, 7). n'pn^JiIA:; tJu pious. At the end no^^K' (or ^n) ^in may be plausibly supplied: some have thought that traces of these letters are even discernible on the stone. The language of the Inscription is almost pure Aramaic : a Hebrew (or Phoenician) element is, however, present in Ci'-'S and >np (np^) ^ The date of this Inscription is not perfectly certain : but it belongs probably to the fourth cent. b.c. An earlier type of the Egyptian Aramaic character, dating from b.c. 482, is exhibited on the stele of Saqqarah (2 miles NW. of Memphis), found in 1877 ' ; the stele of Carpentras has been preferred for reproduction here, as the characters (in the photograph) are more distinct. Observe that the upper part of the 3, 1, "I, and y is open : this is the first stage in the formation of the later square character, which is ultimately produced, in the case of these letters, by the disappearance of the two parallel lines at the top of 3, n, "), and by the addition of a tail to the y. (These letters are formed similarly on the Saqqarah stele.) The stroke at the upper right-hand corner of the X is almost, if not quite, separated from the transverse stroke which forms the body of the letter : this is a similar change in the direction of the later form of the character*. The two * Boeckh, Corp, Inscr. Grace. 6562 : ©(eofs) K(aTax5oj'/ois). AvprjXia TlpoauSw AioaKovpiSrjs avrjp r^ favTov avv^iw xpTjaroTaTr) Kal yXvuvTaTji fivdas xapiv. tinpvxd, Kvpia, Kal Soi(i)) ctoi 6'Ocripis to vjivxpov liScop. The same wish, id. 6717. ^ Both now (191 2) known to occur frequently in Egyptian Aramaic : see the Glossaries in Sayce-Cowley and Sachan. 3 Plate LXIII in the Palaeographical Society's Volume ; Lidzbarski, Plate XXVIII. I (drawn by the author) : cf. the transcription, with notes, in NS/. No. 71. The Inscription is dated the 4th year of Xerxes ( =B. c. 482) : the name Xerxes is written tJ'1X"'ki'n Hshiarsh (Pers. KhshaydrshA), as regularly in Egyptian Aramaic (see the Glossaries in Sayce-Cowley and Sachau). * The form of the N (as of many of the other letters) in Palmyrene is, however, the one which approaches most closely to the square type : see Fig. 1 1 below, and the Tables in Cooke or Lidzbarski. § I. Egyptian Aramaic Inscriptions xv lower horizontal strokes of the old n are merged in one, which however is separated from the perpendicular stroke, and hangs down from the upper horizontal stroke, thus anticipating the form ultimately assumed by the letter. 1 and T have both nearly assumed the modern form, n appears (as on the Saqqarah stele) with only a single horizontal bar : the bar, if a little lowered, produces H, H, if a little raised, n. On the stone of Mesha' (as in the Inscriptions figured above) ^ appears composed of four distinct strokes (like Z with two parallel strokes on the left at the top) : here the four strokes are crumpled up so as to form a sort of triangle, which, when reduced in size, becomes the modern V In the stele of Saqqarah, the '• appears still in its old form. The two diverging lines towards the top of the D, on the left, which still appear on the Saqqarah stele, become a single line, turned up at the end, which in the Papyri becomes in its turn a single thick line. D exhibits a modification which is difficult to describe, but which, when the tail, as happens afterwards, is curled round to the left, produces an evident approximation to the modern form of the letter ^ 1 scarcely differs from *l except by having a longer tail. ^ has been modified, and approaches the modern type : almost the same form appears on the stele of Saqqarah. T\ is no longer a complete cross : the horizontal cross-line is confined to the right-hand side of the letter, and is deflected downwards : by the further prolongation of this deflection, and the accompanying reduction of the upper part of the perpendicular stroke, the modern n is produced. 7, D, J, 2, are not materially changed, shewing, as was said, that the transition to the square character was gradual, and not accomplished for all the letters at the same time. The words are separated, not by dots, but by small spaces. In Papyri, the softer material, written upon by a reed-pen, led naturally to the production of more cursive characters. Here (Plate IV) is part of an Inscription written on a Papyrus discovered in 1907-8, at Elephantine, the ancient Yeb, at the extreme south of Egypt, just below the First Cataract : it is dated in the 2nd year of Xerxes * Cf. Lidzbarski, p. 191 ; and see Plates XLV, cols. 6-25, XLVI, 11 a, cols. 2, 6. xvi Introduction (b.c. 484), and is consequently two years older than the Saqqarah stele ^ Transliterated into square characters, it reads : — n |nj3 N3n:s* hjt s-i2D2 p^ns 1 1 3'' Nivis nsD mpi so^D jT'a 1 2 p^na n n^JK xna:^ i^aiD^ jT'^y 13 . . . N"lVl]S' nSD Dipi X2^0 JT-aa pJD2 li? 14 r eiDD til jK'na pidd ib 31m x^mx 15 ND^c rr-a n pisn o^c n^Ni nh^n 16 Ninya s^Dnn ny nnN»b o^t:' djx i^ 17 3K''nx DD ^y y^m ana 18 The Inscription (taking into account the part not here reproduced) is a contract between two Jews of the military colony at Elephantine and a dealer to supply provisions for two ' hundreds ' (companies) of tlie garrison; and the passage quoted deals with the payment for what has been supplied : but the words lost at the ends of the lines make it impossible to give a continuous translation. The parts which remain may be rendered as follows : — II written (i.e. named) in this deed. We will give . . . 1 2. the house of the king (=the government), and before the scribes of the treasury . . . 13. by our hand ( = through us) to bring to these men who are written (named) [in this deed] . . . 14. to thee by number {or by mna's) in the house of the king, and before the scribes of the tr[easury] . . . 15. We shall owe thee 100 karashas"^ of silver, silver of . . . . 16. the god. And thou hast authority over (a charge upon) our salary, which the house of the king [gives] 1 7. to us ; thou hast authority to take (it) until thou art fully paid for ' the corn. 18. Hoshea' has written (this deed) at the mouth (dictation) of Ahiab. 13. 721D, inf. Qal from hy, which occurs in these Papyri in a trans, sense (1. 9 ; 42, 17. 43 (1), 4 "jn^ab ''^^l bring me to thy house). In Bibl. ^ Sachan, Aramdische Papyrus und Ostraka aus einerjiidischen Militar-Kolonie zu Elephantine (191 1), No. 25 (p. 99). ' A Persian weight, equal to 10 shekels (Lidzbarski, Ephemeris, iii. 76, 130). Plate IV ^ ?^ oo l^ ^ ^ tx< ^ o ^ »«; oo" l-J ■« Si 1^ Ph k < ^ (^ w o rt ^-- -d 1 ' CJ «=1 rt < C/2 PS ^4-1 -< o > '^ ><; < X 4-t ;>• JS •J s M < p in O a *U1 tn H Pi s <; CM cn. ?-. -a ^ 13 0) o Ei -ra o u a, aj Cd, Face page xvi] Plate V ^ '-wit' , "^ *- ■«*-**ii^7. ■. ^,3 Egyptian Aramaic Papyrus Reproduced, by permission, from Plate XXVI of the Facsimiles of Manuscripts and Inscriptions publislied by the Palaeographical Society. [Face page xvii § I. Egyptian Aramaic Inscriptions xvii Aram., Tgg., and Syr., only the Aphel, b^n, ^^nis, ^^c/r n^X, the form in Egyptian Nabataean and Cappadocian Aramaic, Jer. lo, ii, Ezr. 5, 15 Kt., for the Biblical Aram, and Targumic I^;.^5 : see Lex. 1080^, LOT.* 255;/. 15. I^^ns, t^lDS as the name of a weight, occurs often besides in these Inscriptions. 16. t2?U', i.e. 12"?^' Ezr. 4, 20. 7, 24 al. {Lex. 1115^). D"13, see Sayce-Cowley, L 6, P 3 ( = Lidzbarski, Ephemeris, ii. 224, 6. 237, 3). The word may mean properly a portion or measure of food (Sachau, p. 52 : cf. |k£D^ = o-iToju-eVpiov Luke 12, 42, PS. col. 3279; and Sachau, Pap. 36 (Taf. 32), 8). 17. N^cnn, see Sachau, Pap. 28 (Taf. 28-9), 11. 17. 18. D3 ^V, so Sayce-Cowley, L 16. Cf. in Heb. Jer. 36, 4 inn 2n3^1 liTOT ^. 6. 17. 18. As was remarked above, the differences from the Carpentras script are due mainly to the more yielding nature of the material used for producing the characters. Instead of the sharply cut characters incised on the Carpentras stele, the strokes, especially the horizontal and slanting ones, are thick ; and those lines which are straight in the stele shew a tendency to curve. And in 3, 1, 3, "i, the part open at the top almost disappears owing to a single thick stroke taking its place : this stroke ultimately becomes the top line of these letters in the square form. The following (Plate V) is a specimen of the Egyptian Aramaic script on a fragment of Papyrus now in the British Museum, belong- ing to the late Ptolemaic or Roman period '^. Here is a transliteration of the Inscription { = CIS. II. i. i45B=iV^/. No. 76 B):— . . . ynci Nsijo n ^ Ninon bv ''^^b i Ns^ro my ins in b'jid in 2 . . . . yi -it:N N3^D n s-'^o ij'Jid "i3 3 m i^-'H aina inn ion n^t2(p) 4 . . . Nn:::* xm n^aa' n n"'2C'i "j^ j^n'' n 5 ^ Read incorrectly by Sayce-Cowley (A 7 al.) {^23. See Lidzbarski, Ephemeris^ iii. 76. * Plate XXVI in the Palaeographical Society's Volume. 3 So De Vogiie in CIS. 11. i. 145 B. In the Palaeographical Society's Volume, the word is transliterated N3n3n. f 13G5 C 1 xviii Introduction l^^Di i'lN:^' pnn^ n^ n^oiji 1^x5 .... 6 VJC3 N3^D ^D^N ^jy tT . . . . 7 I.e. I. ... for my sons according to the testimony of the king, and he heard . . . 2. , . . the son of Punsh, he delayed (?). The king answered 3. . . . the son of Punsh the words which the king had spoken, and . . . 4. . . . thou didst kill them. Mayest thou go with the sword of thy strength, and .... 5 and the captives which thou hast taken this year 6 in them ; and thy bones shall not descend into She'ol, and thy shadow 7 on the thousands of the king .... The text, as is evident, is much mutilated. The subject appears to be a tale, ' composed either by a heathen Aramaean, who was hostile to the Egyptian religion ^, or by an Egyptian Jew as a Haggadah on Ex. I, — more probably the latter.' The language is Aramaic, tinged (like the Carpentras Inscription) with Hebrew or Phoenician, 2. N3??D njy, cf. Dan. 2, 5. 8. 20 etc. 4. isn them, as Ezr. 4, 10. 23 etc. ^i?lp, of. ^n^ Ezr. 5, 5. 5. NT (fem.), as Sachau 2, 17 NnB'''N3 NT. 6* NT NDJ^J', Re'pert. d'tpigr. Sim. i. 247 NT NHTn ; =Bibl. Aram. NT (Lex. 1086''): cf. *t and ''% p. xii bottom. 6. 'H?^ those, as Dan. 3, 12 etc. pnni from nn3, the common Aram, word for^f down. The characters are in general very similar to those of Plate III ; but, in so far as there is a difference, they have approached nearer to the square type. The n assumes a form more resembling the square n. The tail of the D shews a tendency to curl round to the left, and the whole letter approximates to the modern form. In the same way the right-hand stroke of the D is longer, and curls round, so that the letter, especially the one in *]nn (1. 4), closely resembles the square n. The 3 (notice 11. 4 y\r\, 6 'l"'0"ij) is almost exactly like the square final "j. The square form of 3 is produced by the stroke on the left being gradually brought lower down : see * There is an allusion to the ' Egyptian gods' in the first column of the Papyrus published as Plate XXV of the same Volume (Cooke, NSI. 76 A). § I. Transition to the Square Character xix col. 13 in GK. ; the Inscription ITJ Dnn 'Boundary of Gezer' from Gezer (Lidzbarski, Plate XLVI, II a, col. 3), and the Palmyrene a {ibid. Plate XLV, cols. 10, 13; Cooke, Plate XIV, cols. 6, 7, 9). The gradual change of script can also be well studied in the Table in Gesenius-Kautzsch (ed. 19 10). From this it appears at once that the characters of ]\Iesha"s Inscription ( nT -o r^i- T.1. ^ 1 to Chwolson's Cort). Inscr. (From No. 383 of the Photographs „, ^ fl published by the Palestine Explora- ^ ' ^ °- ^'> tion Fund.) From its position, the Inscription cannot well be earlier than the period when the caves were constructed, and may, of course, be later. It must be read njaiD «. The transitional character of the alphabet appears in the approximations to the square type : in the 1 without the right-hand upper stroke, in the 3 open at the top, and in the ^ and n approaching the type of Fig. 10. The t3, also, originally a cross ^ See the view of the caves in the Memoirs of the Survey of Eastern Palestine, vol. i (1889), opposite p. 72 ; or in G. A. Smith's Jerusalem (1908), ii. 426 (also, p. 428, a photograph of the cave with the Inscription A), cf. p. 427 «. ' The reading has been disputed. De Vogiid {Melanges, 1868, p. 162 f.), and Clermont-Ganneau {Researches in Palestine, 1896, ii, 261), both of whom had seen and copied the Inscription, read it n^31D. On the other hand, the Photo- graph (Fig. 8), and the reproductions in the Memoirs, p. 76 f., and the Plate opposite p. 84, seemed to leave no doubt that the first letter was y ; and so n'3iy was adopted in the first edition of the present work, and by Lidzbarski in 1898 (pp. 117, 190). It appears now, however, from the very complete descriptions in the Publications of the Princeton Archaeological Expedition to Syria in 1904-5 [Division II (Ancient Architecture in Syria), § A (Southern Syria), Part i (Ammonitis), pp. 1-28 ('Araq el- Amir); Division III (Inscriptions), § A (Southern Syria), Part i (Ammonitis), pp. 1-7 (Hebrew Inscriptions of 'Araq el-Amir), by Enno Littmann], Div. Ill, § A, Pt. i, p. 2 (Photos. A and B), that (as stated above) there are in fact two inscriptions (cf Smith, 427 «.), one (A) agreeing with Fig, 8, the other (B) agreeing with Fig. 9 (except that the circle of the L3 should be closed at the top) : the second can only be read H^^ID , and this determines the reading of the first (in A there are no traces visible, any more than there are in the photograph from which Fig. 8 is taken, of a line, like that in B, drawn upwards from the left- hand upper-corner; but Littmann expresses it distinctly in his sketch of the inscription on the same page). Lidzbarski now accepts HUID {Ephem. iii. 49). § I. Transition to the Square Character xxi enclosed in a circle, shews (in B) a modification, similar to that in Egyptian Aramaic and Palmyrene, and approximating to the square type. The next Inscription is that of the Bene Hezir, above the entrance to the so-called Tomb of St. James, situated on the Mount of Olives, immediately opposite to the SE. angle of the Temple-area. Fig. lo. Inscription of the B*ne Hezir. (From Chwolson's Corpus Inscriptionum Hebraicarum, No. 6. Cf. NSI. No. 148 A.) pnv pj;Dc> mm^ nTyr n'-jn nry^x^ 3[3]Ernni "iap[n] nr n^in ^J3 -iryi'Ni ^\yh\\ ... 3 ... ja fjoi' ''J3 -i^tn ^J30 .... I. e. This is the tomb and the resting-place for Eleazar, Hanniah, Yo'ezer, Yehudah, Simeon, Yohanan, The sons of Yoseph, the son of [and for Yojseph and Eleazar, the sons of Hanniah, .... of the sons (i. e. family) of Hezir. Here we observe Hebrew advancing towards the square character. A Hezir, ancestor of a priestly family, is mentioned i Ch. 24, 15 : another Hezir, not a priest, but one of the chiefs of the people, is named Neh. 10, 21. The date of the Inscription is probably shortly before the Christian era. The advance towards the square character is very marked. Notice, for instance, the N, the n, the 7, the D, the y, the "1 ; and the bar of the n, higher up than in the Egyptian Aramaic. Notice also that by the turn to the left given to the lower part of the 3, when standing in the middle of a word, a medial and a final form of the letter are distinguished (as in pnv at the end of the first line) : when "• follows, this turn is regularly connected with it, giving rise to a ligature : the same happens with 3 followed by J. 1 and T are xxii Introduction scarcely distinguishable from one another. The first letters of line 3 are uncertain : they may perhaps be read as nu . . . , ' The ligature just spoken of is peculiarly common in the Palmyrene character. The Palmyrene Inscriptions ' are written in a dialect of Aramaic ^ and date from b. c. 9 onwards ; the character differs from the square type only in calligraphical details. A specimen (Fig. 11) is given {=NSI. No. 141), for the sake of illustrating the tendency of Aramaic on the East, as well as on the West, of Palestine to advance in the direction of the square character : — Fig. II. (From De Vogue's Syrie Centrale, 1868, Plate V, No. 30*.) n nn N"|3P I. e. This tomb is that of n "I^\-I3 "13 iruny 'Athinathan, son of Kohilu, which ^Tm '•nii?y IJI built over him his sons ^^1J3 p''ni ')^\n3 Kohilu and Hairan, his sons, Nn^D ''J2 |D n of (the family of) the children of Maitha, nil "^ III DJti* |133 n"T»3 in the month Kanun, in the year 304 [|133 is written Jin] [Seleuc. = B.c. 9]*. "^ Other Inscriptions (mostly fragmentary) from approximately the same period, may be seen in Chwolson's volume, Nos. 2 ("113 DPtn Boundary [Aram.] of Cezer), 3, 4, 5 (Aram., from the Hauran), 7, 8, 9, 10. No. 5 is bilingual, and may be found also in De Vogiie, Syrie Centrale, p. 89 : nJ3 ""T mJOn H Ht^Bi Tl/y^ n3''1K Tv? = 'OSaiVa^os ' hvvij'Kov (UKoSo/XTjafV Tijv aTqXrjv 'KafxpaTji rrji airov yvvaiKi. ^ See Cooke, NS/. pp. 263-340. * Which exhibits some noticeable affinities with the Aramaic of Ezra and Daniel : see Sachau, ZDMG. 1883, pp. 564-7 ; A. A. Bevan, A Commentary on Daniel (1892), pp. X, 37, 211 ff.; Z07'.'504. * On the Nabatacan Inscriptions, in which some of the letters, esp. 3^ D^ D, § I. Transition to the Square Character xxiii In the following Inscription [=^NSI. No. 148 B), from the lintel of a door, belonging to a ruined Synagogue at Kefr-Eir'im, a village a few miles NVV. of Safed in Galilee, discovered by M. Renan in the course of his expedition in Palestine in 1863, the transition to the square character may be said to be accomplished : the date may be c. 300 A.D. (Renan), or somewhat earlier (Chwolson). Fig. 12. (From Chwolson's Corpus Inscriptionum Hebraicarum ^, No. 1 7.) nor ^Nnc''' niDipo hii\ nrn DipDa nii'tr '•.t B^vyoa n^na Nan nrn Piipt^^n T\m ""i^ p '•li'n I.e. May there be peace in this place, and in all the places of Israel ! Yosah the Levite, son of Levi, made this lintel : may blessing come upon his works 1 U'Vyo is evidently an error of the carver for VE'yn : he first omitted the ^ by accident, and then attached it at the end. Notice in this Inscription the close resemblance between 1 and ^ which in the Inscription of the B^ne Hezir are distinguished by the turn to the left — a survival of the primitive form of the letter — at the top of the ^ ; also that between 3 and O (cf. p. Ixvii), as well as the final D. Notice also the xegn\zr pletia scriptio. The resemblance of mn^ to mm (p. iii) in a character such as this will be evident. In conclusion, a specimen is given (Plate VI) of a complete Phoenician Inscription {—NSI. No. 4), which may serve as an example of the style, as regards character and general appearance, in which the autographs of the Old Testament must have been written. The Inscription was found at Zidon in 1887, engraved on the base of a sarcophagus of black basalt, of Egyptian workmanship, and bearing and y approach closely to the square characters, see Cooke, NSI. p. i\^&., and, for the characters, Plate XIV, Lidzb. Plate XLV. 1 In the original the Inscription is in one line : it is divided here merely for convenience. See Photograph No. 459 of the Palestine Exploration Fund. xxiv Introduction in front a hieroglyphic Inscription, designed no doubt originally for use in Egypt, but diverted from its original purpose and taken to Phoenicia in order to receive the remains of a Phoenician prince. The contents of the hieroglyphic Inscription bear no relation to those of the Phoenician one. Transliterated into square characters, the latter reads as follows : — p nn^ ^712 nnntt'y jna n:3n 13n i pxn 22^ nnv n^D mnc^y |n3 -iryjDC'K 2 n ^N ^N r pNH JT'N pan ^^ onx ^3 nx "o t 3 jhx "IN flD3 J^lS* ^N 3 JUiri ^Nl "Tib nJlD 4 nan ^n ^n r psa 2'2\^ i^n n^3 ne^D djo bi |nn 5 ns DN1 xn nann mnc'y nayn a irnn ^ni Ti^y n 6 n^ nnn D'-na y-ir [i]^ j[3]^ ^n frnn rni Tiby nnan n 7 Dxan nx 2•2^■o^ ^ 8 I.e. I. I Tabnith, priest of 'Ashtart, king of the Zidonians, son 2. of Eshmun'azar, priest of 'Ashtart, king of the Zidonians, lie in this coffin : 3. whoever thou art, (even) any man, that bringest forth this coffin, do not 4. open my sepulchral chamber, and disquiet me not ; for there is no image of silver, there is no image of 5. gold, nor any jewels of.'': only myself am lying in this coffin; do not o- 6. -pen my sepulchral chamber, and disquiet me not ; for such an act is an abomination unto 'Ashtart ; and if thou at all 7. openest my chamber, or disquietest me at all, mayest thou have no seed among the living under the su- 8. -n, or resting-place with the Shades. The Tabnith who speaks is the father of the Eshmun'azar (II) whose long and interesting funereal Inscription^ (22 lines) was found in 1855 OJ^ the site of the ancient necropolis of Zidon, and who describes himself (lines 13-15), as son of Tabnith, king of the Zidonians, and of Amm'ashtart, priestess of 'Ashtart, and grandson ' It may be found in M. A. Levy's Ph&nizische Studien, i. (1856) ; in Schroder's Die Phon. Sprache {iS6c)), p. 224, with Plate I; CIS. I. i. No. 3 (with facsimiles); and elsewhere : most recently in Cooke, NSI. No. 5 (with facsimile, Plate I). Plate VI o Q o CO ^ ^ ^ K> ^ =< >— » OJ W rG ^ ffi o H vi! HH i<; '^ M i; C H i-ii o a o H brH Ch <^ h-H ^4-< OS o G a .2 KH ■33 Ul 'a »-• i> Oh >^ ^ ^ -u aj 3 73 c^ Face page xxiv] § I. The Inscription of Tabnith xxv of Eshmun'azar (I), who is mentioned here as Tabnith's father. From the style of the Egyptian ornamentation displayed both by the sarcophagus of Tabnith, and also by the related sarcophagus of Eshmun'azar II, it is concluded that the date of the Inscription is not earlier than the fourth cent. b.c. ; and as upon other grounds it cannot be much later than this, it may be plausibly assigned to c. 300 B.c^ The Inscription is of value to the Hebrew student, not only on account of its palaeographical interest, but also on account of the illustration which it affords of the language and ideas of the Old Testament. 1. *]3X occurs frequently in Phoenician Inscriptions: it was pro- nounced probably T35< (Schroder, Phd7i. Spr., p. 143): a final vowel is often not represented in Phoenician orthography : comp. below \, 3, jmn''. On the pronunciation 'Ashlart, see p. 62. 2. px of a coffin, or mummy-case, as Gen. 50, 26. 3. r, i.e. \ (Heb. "]). So regularly, as JS/SI. 9, 3 T "lyB'n this gate; 19, I T naVD this pillar; 42, 3 (the sacrificial table from Marseilles) T riNJyron this payment ; CIS. I. i. 88, 4 T '^\:l'^t2r\ (cf. Cooke, p. 26). Observe that T (unlike the Heb. nf) is without the article, although the accompanying noun has it : pronounce, therefore, here ). |1^2 (not pN|), as line 3 T pxn.— With ':i nx ''» cf. NSI. 64, 5-6. 65, 8 : mN p2 is, however, somewhat awkward. Renan, observing that in Eshmun'azar's Inscription there occurs twice the similarly worded phrase, line 4 T n3•l^'D n\S nriS'' ^N DIX ^31 n^^DO ^3 HN ''OJp, line 20 ^n^y nns"' b^ din ^31 HD^CD ^3 ns* ""Dip, suggests that ""O is an error of the stone-cutter for '•DJp, which is supposed, on the strength of a statement in the Mishnah, Giiiin 4, 7 (lONt^ nnsa \SV'i2 HJ^yD ^Bn3» ^J>N DN D:ip \m^h i.e. a man in Zidon said to his wife D^ip ^A curse (upon me), if I do not divorce thee ! '), to have been a Phoenician formula of imprecation (see further Cooke, p. 34). Render in this case, then : ' My curse (be) with every man, whosoever * Ph. Berger in the Revue Archeologique, Juillet 1887, p. 7. ' So 7N these (p. 34 note^, in accordance with the dissyllabic form found in the Semitic languages generally, was pronounced in all probability ?S (in the Poenulus V. I, 9 written ily ; in an Inscr. from N. Africa, ZDMG. xxix. 240, N^N : Lidz- barski, p. 264''). Comp. Cooke, NSI. p. 26. xxvi Introduction thou art, that bringest forth,' etc. — B'N, the Phoenician form of the relative, occurring constantly in the Inscriptions, to be pronounced probably tsh or esh, if not rather as a dissyllable E*X i. — psn prob. psri or pSO; cf. Aram. pS3 to go forth, pax to bring forth, or Heb. P^SD (Is. 58, 10). — n»X=Heb. riN, the mark of the accus. : for the vocalization, cf. Arab. 151 . 4. Tl^y: comp. in Eshmun'azar's Inscription {NSI. 5), lines 5-6 "'JE' natt'D n^y r 33D'm fOny ^JNI nee superaedificent lecto huic cameram lecti alterius, 10, and 20-21 "ly 7N1 Tl^y nnS'' ?N DHN ?3 Tl^y. — I."!?']!!', comp. PJin used of disquieting the spirits of the dead in I S. 28, 15. Is. 14, 16. — 3 i.e. ? C*?), as often (Schrod. p. 218 f.; Lidzbarski, p. 295): e.g. CIS. 2, 12. 13 ^JX 3 = ^'3^? ?. — ""X not: cf. p. 49 «o/^. — plN, probably the Greek etSwAov. 5. pn, the usual Phoenician word {or gold {NSI. 3, 5; 24, i ypHD TK pn this plating of gold; 33, 3. 5 ; CIS. 327, 4-5 pnn 'qpb the goldsmith); in Hebrew confined to poetry. — D?^ prob. = Aram. |ND, pi. p:N9, N*3S)9._nb2:=''rib3. 6. NH -imn mnc'y nnyn ""D : comp. the very similar use of D^yin TV\rv in Dt. (7, 25 Nin yrhii. ""^ nayin '•a. 17, i. 18, 12. 22, 5. 23, 19. 25, 16. 27, i5)andPr. (3, 32. 11, 20. 12, 22 al.). — xn nmn, sn without the art., as T above: so CIS. 2, 22 NH na^CDH that kingdom ; 166, d 4 an nnbn. On the orthography of Nil, see below, p. xxxi. 7. n?"!^ 1^1, with the inf. ^«/, according to the scheme noticed on II 20, 18. — ]2\ i.e. ]^1, impf from i=l3 (see p. 285 footnote; A^SI. Index, p. 369 ; and the Glossary in Lidzbarski, p. 294). Cf. NSI. 42, 13 n:r\2b p'' = Heb. n^Jn^^ ,t,T.— D^Dli Vl]-. comp. the corre- sponding imprecation in Eshmun'azar's Inscription, lines 8-9 \y ^S1 D:nnn y~lI1 p ch and let him (them) not have son or seed in his (their) stead; 11-12 t^'r^E^' nnn D^nn lan) byDJ) nsi ^ib ^n^ ab p^ ba (see Is. 37, 31). 8. DNDT na 23t^'Dl : comp. id. line 8 nNSn DN 335^0 D^ p"" i'NI : 22^^ of a resting-place in the underworld, as Ez. 32, 25 : the D''N2"i as Is. 14, 9. 26, 14. 19. i/^. 88, II. Pr. 2, 18. 9, 18. 21, 16. Job 26, st ^ * In the Poemilus of Plautus represented by si (V. i, i. 4. 6. 8), and ass (V. 2, 56 assamar = li'Qii E^'^?). Comp. Schroder, pp. 162-6. ^ For further information on the subject of the Phoenician language and Phoenician Inscriptions, the reader is referred to M. A. Levy, Phonizische Studien in § 2. Early Hebrew Orthography xxvii § 2. Early Hebrew Orthography. Having determined the nature of the old Hebrew character, we have next to consider the nature of the old Hebrew orthography. Did this differ from that which we find in modern printed texts ? and if so, in what respects ? I. Division of words. In the Inscription of Mesha' and in the Siloam Inscription the words are separated by a point, but in Inscriptions on gems and coins and in Phoenician Inscriptions generally (see e.g. Plate VI) separations between words are not marked^. Whether they were marked (either by points or spaces) in the auto- graphs of the OT. cannot be determined with certainty : if they were, 4 Parts, Breslau, 1856-70; Schroder, Die Phbnizische Spractie, Halle, 1869; the Corpus Inscriptiomim Scmiticaruin^ Tom. I (where the Bibliography relating to each Inscription is specified in full) ; Cooke, NSI. pp. 18-158; and Lidzbarski, Nordsem. Inscr. pp. 4-83, 493-499 (Bibliography [to 1898]), 204-388, 500-504 (Glossary), 389-412 (synopsis of grammatical forms, etc.). The best treatment of the relation of Phoenician to Hebrew is to be found in the Essay of Stade in the Morgenldtidische Forschungen (Leipzig, 1875), PP- 179-232. All these authorities may, however, in greater or less degree, be supplemented from Inscriptions that have been discovered more recently, and for which search must be made (chiefly) in the Repertoire d' £pigraphie Simitique (from 1900), a supplement, appearing from time to time, to the CIS., and in Lidzbarski's Ephemeris fiir Semitische Epigraphik (from 1902), with Glossaries at the end of each volume. For further details respecting the history of the West-Semitic alphabets generally, and of the Hebrew alphabet in particular (in addition to the works of Levy, Chwolson, Madden, Berger, and Lidzbarski, mentioned above), reference may be made to Lenormant, Essai sur la propagation de V Alph. PMnicien dans Vane, monde, 1S72-3 ; Stade's Lehrbuch, pp. 23-34; Wellhausen's edition of Bleek's Einleitung, ed. 1878, p. 626 ff. ; ed. 1886, p. 580 ff. ; De Vogiie, Melanges d Ar- cheologie Orientate (1868), especially pp. 141-178, ' L'Alphabet Arameen et I'Alphabet H^braiqne; ' Isaac Taylor's History of the Alphabet, Chaps. IV, V ; S. A. Cook's study, mentioned above (p. x), in the FEFQS. 1909, pp. 284-309 ; the other Facsimiles of Semitic Inscriptions contained in the Palaeographical Society's Volume; Euting's Nabatciische Inschriften (1885); the Plates ia the Corpus Inscriptionum Seniiticarum ; and Neubauer's Faesimites of Hebrew Manuscripts, with Transcriptions, Oxford, i886. ' In many of the older Aramaic Inscriptions also the words are separated by a point : in the Papyri they are usually separated by a space. See further Lidzb., p. 302 f. A perpendicular line, seemingly a clause-separator, occurs twice in the Gezer Inscription (11. i. a). xxviii Introduction some irregularity and neglect must have been shewn in the observance of them : for the existing MT. contains instances of almost certainly incorrect division of words {a) ; and the LXX frequently presuppose a different division from that in MT. {b), which (whether right or wrong) could scarcely have arisen had the separation of words been marked distinctly. It is probable, however, that before the Massoretic text was definitely fixed, the division of words had been generally established, and the distinction made between the medial and final forms of 3, O, J, Q, V (above, p. xix) : for the Massorites, instead of altering in the text what they view as a wrong division of words, leave the text as it is, and only direct the reader to substitute the correct division ; this implies that at the time when notes such as those referred to were added, the division of words found in the STia was regarded as definitely settled (\ (another grammatical anomaly) 1. 1'isD rj^bn 1^ y-ipi, 23, 33 NK^e-np-ns; ]. mrhr^ Dns (so LXX, Vulg.). Ez. 43, 13 HDNH i^ni 1. nsx r\'^''ry\. Hos. 6, 5 NV^ -lis y]:^ti^TJ\ 1. : xr -i^N3 ^CE^'jpl (so LXX, Pesh. Targ.). ,/.. 25, 17 *:^'irn l^n-in 1. ^J^'i-m Tn-in (see the Commentators). 42, 6-7 ^rh^ :V3S niyirr^ 1. \>rh^\ ^jd niyic^ (so LXX, Pesh. : comp. V. 12. y\i. 43, 5). 73, 4 DniD^ 1. on iJDj? (so Ew. Hitz. Del. etc.). ((5) Nu. 24, 22 nn-ny f^p : veoo-o-ta 7ravoi;pytas=nO"|y |p. I S. I, I fjl^-p: ev Nao-et/?=a^VJ3. 14, 21 non D31 3''3D : avecrTpdcfirja-av kol avTOi^nCH D3 133D. 20, 40 N"'nn ^b: TTopevov, €i(reA(9€ = N*^3 Hof). I Ch. 17, lob •jb-njNI: Kal av^-^ao) 16 niccK'v DID "'E': 'p. Job 38, I myonjo : nnyisri fp 'p. 40, 6 myojo : n-iyp jr? 'p. Neh. 2, 13 n-vnsDn: D^'nD Dn 'p. 1 Ch. 9, 4 pD *J3 |rD"':3 p : pD "32 |p "33 f3 'p. /? La. 4, 3 D''3y --S : D^3y^3 'p. 2 Ch. 34, 6 nn-Tin nna : on-nii-ins 'p. y 2 S. 5, 2 -ncni N^^io nn^\n : ^3oni N-'^ion n"'\n 'p. 21, 12 DTlC'^Dn DK': D'nC^6D n?£B' 'p. ' T T ' Ez. 42, 9 n^N.n ni3'^^ nnnnr:i : n^xn mstj^i^n nnn^i 'p. Job 38, 12 voipro "in'.y nnyT": ioipp iriE'ri ny^ 9. Ezra 4, 12 l^^^^C'wS nitJ'l: ^^'j??!^ iin^B'l ^p. XXX Introduction However, as the need of a re-division of words is comparatively unfrequent, it may perhaps be inferred that in old Hebrew MSS. the divisions between words were not regularly unmarked ^. 2. The pletia scriptio was rare. Thus in Mesha' 's Inscription the ^ of the plural is regularly not expressed (line 2 JK'^K' thirty: 4 p^CTl (p. Ixxxix); 5 pn p\ i.e. pi |D^ many days; 16 p3J, i.e. H?? men): we have also 10. 13. 20 k^n, ii "ip for what in MT. would be K'''N, T'i? : further (attaching the points, to avoid repetition) i ^^5to, 4 ''jytJ'n saved me, 27 ""riiii, Din : and even 23. 27. 30 n3, 7 nn3, for T)"]^, ^^"7^ (once 25 nJ^na); the duals, 15 Din^'n (in MT. D^H?-)' 20 JDND two hundred, 30 jnbaT n2 (Jer. 48, 22 D^n^^"n n''3), 31 pn-m (Isa. 15, 5 D^3i"in). Even N is sometimes omitted, not merely in nrnNI 11. 20 (i.e. i^jn^J, '"'^n^J), 24 ncNI ("IP^I), where the radical N following the prefix of I ps. sg. of the imperfect is dispensed with as in Hebrew, but in ri't^'l 20 = ntrN"i its chief {£). Similarly in the Siloam Inscription we find 2. 4 rx (i.e. K^''N), 2 ntDN (i.e. rm), 3 1^2 (1^2^?), p>D (r»*»), 4- 6 Dn^fnn (D?>*nn), 6 "ivn ("llSfL") ; and even (where the 1 is radical) 2 \)\> (so rarely in MT. : usually ijip), 3 D^n (i.e. DV3_never D^ in MT.). We find, however, beside these 'defective' forms i. 2 ^1ya C^i'l), 5 N^IDH, and 6 C'N"). Perhaps the most remarkable case of the defectiva scriptio is that of the pron. of 3 sing., which is twice on Mesha"s Inscription (in the masculine) written NH (6 NH D3 "IDN"'") ; 27 t^^^>}. Jer. 6, 15 DvSJ3 vQ'' : ■jrea-ovvTat iv rrj TTTwa-ei avrutv^^^P^^ VS\ 23 non^n^ C^^iNa : ws Trvp {^^^) eis TToXe/xov. 29 ipn3 ab D^y~n : TrovrjpCa avTwv ovk cTaKr; = 'iIlEI3 N? DJ)")1. 12, 15 D''na"'::'m: koI KaroiKM avTov^=^''J^^^^]. 17, 25 CDIOni: Ktti iTTTTots avT(Si'=DDlDni. 32 (39), 5 ^.?^"': €la■iXevaeTal='^2^. (jlN being disregarded). 50 (27), 16 Vl^T: o-7r€/Dyu,a=yil (in spite of the parallel Karexorra Bpeiravov). 51 (28), 59 nni20 "IB': apxw Scopwv=nn3D -lb'. ^ The view formerly held that the epicene NIH was an archaism in Hebrew, cannot, in the light of these facts, be any longer sustained : Hebrew must have possessed the double form from the beginning. Cf. NOldeke, ZDMG. 1866, p. 458 f ; 1878, p. 594; Delitzsch, Comm. on Genesis (Engl. Tr.), i. pp. 42 f., 50 ; Wright, Comparative Grammar of the Semitic Languages (1890), p. 104. xxxii Introduction Ezek. 7, 24 D''Ty J1N3 : to ^puay/x,a tjJs Icryyo'i avTwv=Djy PW (comp. 24, 21). 13. 13 nnyO nn: ttvo^v e^aipouorav=ri"?.VD nil. 42,16-17 (similarly 17-18) *no :2''3D: koI iiri(TTp€if/e . . . koi BufieTprja-e i.e. *T19 -^?? (so most moderns: comp. v. 19 MT.). i/^. 5 title nv^n3n"bN: VTTip TTJs KXr]povoixovcrr]s = D9S^. 104, 17 D-C'na: lyyciTat auTwv = Dtt'N13. 107,17 D^^IX: avTcAa^cTO awTwv=D?•1^5 or D?*.N\ Job 19, 18 cSiy: ctsTov aiwi/a = D^iy^ 3. The suffix of 3 sg. masc. was written n- instead of 1-, as is normally the case in MT. The original form of this suffix was in-, as seen still in in"'3, and in derivatives of r\"b verbs as l^i^.^P, in3p, etc.: also in such verbal forms as ^nn^E', inbwX, in^nri3, ^nj^ay:, inpn, ^nrinnN, ^n33-ii; (Stade, §§ 345, 628), and the form -/lu is used regularly in Arabic ; but in the majority of cases a contraction takes place, the aspirate being rejected, and a-/iu, for instance, becoming first au and ultimately 0. At first, however, the orthography was not altered, n- remained, though \\ followed the 6, and in fact was only a sign of the final long vowel : in the end, however, \- was mostly substituted for it. Mesha' still writes uniformly n- ; e.g. (adding the points) ni:-iS2 nb|, r\rqi^ na, nb'"):'!, etc. : on the Siloam Inscription, on the contrary, the examples which occur, viz. iy"l thrice, have i-. In MT., though in the vast majority of cases the contracted suffix is written i-, there occur a number of instances in which n- has been suffered to remain, testifying (in the light of the cognate dialects) to a previous general prevalence of this form: viz. Gen. 9, 21. 12, 8. 13.3- 35. 21 ^\}^\ 49, II '"ITy and nhlD; Ex. 22, 4 nTy3 ; 26 nhiD3; Ex.32, 17 ny"i3; 25 nyns- Lev. 23, 13 nroj; Nu. 10, 36 1 As though from a verb ^1X or i?*N : cf. ^. 22, i n^"'N dvTi\Tjif>is ; 20 "TliyX fio-qefia fxov; 88,5 7"'X pX o0o:j9i]tos ; Syr. Jl^/ ke/p, succour, Ephr. i. 398 al. ^ Yet in some cases the plena sci-iptio must have been in use : Jud. 9, 37 DH"!'' KaraPalvajv icara daXaaaav (D^ T>^) ; Jer. 22, 20 Cl^yJO «f's to wepac t^s OaAaffarjs § 2. Early Hebrew Orthography xxxiii nmni; 23, 8 nap; Dt. 34, 7 nhb; Jos. n, 16 nh^c^'i; jud. 9, 49 r\:^^; 2 Ki. 6, 10 nTHiH; 9, 25 nb'J';^; 19, 23 nsfp (is. 37, 24 ^i'i?); 20, 13 (=Is. 39, 2) nhbi : jer. 2, 3 nhsun ; 17, 24 n3 ; 22, iS^ nnn ; Ez. 12, 14 nn]j?; 31, 18. 32, 31. 32. 39, II all nbiDn,- 48, 8 (so SB, Kittel, but not Baer and Ginsburg). 15 ejid. 21 end T\'2Sn ; 18 ilhsun ; Hab. 3, 4 n^y; ^. 10, 9. 27, 5 nsM; 42, 9 nn^; Dan. n, 10 niyo; and the eighteen (seventeen) cases of n?3 quoted on II 2, 9 ^ The non-recognition of this form of the suffix has sometimes, as in i S. 14, 27 (see note). 2 S. 21, i (see note). Is. 30, 33 (rd. "^n^nD). Ez. 43, 13 (see p. xxviii), led to error in MT. Comp. also Gen. 49, 10 in the Versions {^f). The retention of the form in the instances cited is probably due to accident : it cannot be said to occur more frequently in passages that are (presumably) ancient than in others ; thus in Gen, 49 and Ex. 22 there are numerous cases of the usual form in V, in other ancient passages there are no occurrences of n- whatever ^. § 3. The Chief Ancient Versions of the Old Testament. It does not lie within the compass of the present work to give a complete account of the different Ancient Versions of the Old Testament : it will suffice if enough be said to illustrate their general character and relation to one another, so far as the Books of Samuel * H- occurs also in n[bK'] and n3 in the Nash Papyrus, containing the Decalogue and Dt. 6, 4 f . (2 cent. A.D.) : see S. A. Cook, PSBA. 1903, 34 ff., or (briefly) my Exodus, p. 417. ^ I do not stop to shew in detail that ancient Hebrew MSS. were unpointed. That they were unpointed is (i) probable, from the analogy of all ancient Semitic writing, which has come down to us in its original form (Moabitic, Aramaic, Phoe- nician, Hebrew Inscriptions) ; (2) certain, [a) from the very numerotis renderings of the Ancient Versions, presupposing a different vocalization from that of the Massoretic text, which it cannot reasonably be supposed that the translators would have adopted had they had pointed texts before them ; [b) from the silence of the Talmud and Jerome as regards any system of punctuation, which, when it is con- sidered that passages are frequently discussed, and alternative renderings and pro- nunciations compared, both by the Rabbis and by Jerome, is more than would be credible, had Hebrew MSS. in their day been provided with points. (On Jerome, particulars may be found in Nowack's monograph [p. liii n. 4], p. 43 ff.) The system of points must have been introduced during the sixth and seventh cent. A.D. — a period of which the literary history is unfortunately slirouded in obscurity, which even the pedigree of Aaron Ben-Asher, brought to light by the Crimean MSS. (Strack,in the art. cited p. xxxiv n. 4, pp. 610-613), does not enable us to pierce. 1365 iii. 860 ; F. C. Burkitt, EB. iv. 5029-31. § 3- The Ancient Versions and Textual Criticism xxxix the first : it is necessary to insist upon them, as cases are on record in which they have been unduly neglected '. I. The Septiiagint. The Version that is of greatest importance for purposes of textual criticism is that known as the Septiiagint"'. In the case of the Pentateuch, this Version dates, no doubt, from the third century b.c. — according to tradition from the reign of Ptolemy Philadelphus, B.C. 285-247: the subsequent parts of the OT. were probably completed gradually in the course of the two following centuries, for the differences of style and method exhibited by the different books shew that the whole cannot be the work of a single hand. The characteristics of the LXX are best learnt from actual study of it, though illustrations, so far as the Books of Samuel are concerned, are given below. In some books, the translation is much more literal than in others ; in difficult passages, especially such as are poetical, the translators have evidently been often unable to seize the sense of the original. Except in such passages as Gen. 49. Dt. 32. 33, the Pentateuch is the best translated part of the historical books : the Psalter is tolerably well done, and though few Psalms are wholly free from error, the general sense is fairly well expressed : the translation of Isaiah is poor and paraphrastic ; those of Job and the Minor Prophets are often unintelligible. In the case of Jeremiah the text represented by LXX deviates so considerably from the Massoretic text as to assume the character of a separate recension '. There are few books of the OT. in which the Massoretic text may not, more or less frequently, be emended with help of the LXX * ; but the LXX 1 In Prof. Workman's Text of Jeremiah (1889), the neglect to observe the second precaution has led to disastrous consequences : a very large proportion of the exam- ples cited, p. 283 ff., in the ' Conspectus of the Variations' presuppose no difference in the Hebrew text read by the translator, but are due simply to the fact that the translator did not make it his aim to produce a word-for-word version. See a criticism by the present writer in the Expositor, May, 18S9, pp. 321-337. ^ See, very fully, on this Dr. Swete's excellent Introdtiction to the OT. in Greek (1900); and St. John Thackeray's Grammar of the OT. in Greek, ace. to the Sept., vol. i (Introduction, Orthography, and Accidence), 1909 ; also Nestle, DB. iv.437 ff. * See LOT? 269 f., with the references; and add L. Kohler, ZAW. 1909, 1-39 (on Jer. 1-9). * And naturally, sometimes, of other Ancient Versions as well. A minimum of such necessary emendations may be found in the margin of the Revised Version : xl Introduction Version of Samuel, parts of Kings, and Ezekiel, is of special value, as the MS. (or MSS.) on which the Masscretic text of these books is based, must have suffered more than usually from corrupting influences. 21ie Versions of Aquila, Symmachus, and Theodotmi. After the destruction of Jerusalem in a.d. 70, a reaction began in Jewish circles against the use of the LXX, partly, as seems probable, originating in opposition to the Christians (who from the times in which the NT. was written had been accustomed to quote the LXX as an authoritative Version of the OT.), partly in a growing sense of the imperfections of the Septuagint translation, and of its inadequacy as a correct repre- sentation of the Hebrew original. Hence arose in the second cent. A.D. the three improved Greek Versions of the OT., those oi Aquila, Theodoiion, and Symmachus. Aquila and Theodotion are both men- tioned by Irenaeus (iii. 21) writing c. a.d. 180: Symmachus lived probably somewhat later. Of these translators, Aquila was a Jewish proselyte of Pontus. His method was that of extreme literalness ', which he carried to such an extent, that he sought to represent words which had acquired derived meanings in accordance with their etymology, and even to reproduce particles for which Greek possessed no proper equivalent ^ Jerome on Is. 8, 14 mentions a tradition that a larger selection — the majority, at least as it appears to the present writer, not less necessary — is afforded by the notes in the ' Variorum Bible,' published by Eyre and Spottiswoode. But many more are in fact necessary : see examples in the writer's Book of Jeremiah ''■ (i 906), and Nah.-Mal. in the Century Bible ( 1 906) ; and compare (with discrimination) any recent critical commentary. A good collection of emendations from the LXX and other Versions, with explanations, will be found in T. K. Abbott, Essays chiefly on the Origifial Texts 0/ OT. awcf iVZ". (1891), p. 1 ff. 1 AovXivcuv TTj 'E$paiKTJ A.€^6j, Origen, Ep. ad Africannm, § 2. ^ Jerome, Ep. 57 ad Pammachium : quia Hebraei non solum habent dp9pa sed et TrpoapOpa, ille Kauo^rjXoji et syllabas interpretatur et literas, dicitque (v ice(pa\aicp iKTiaiv 6 6eds crvv [riN] tov ovpavbv koI ativ t^c 7^1/. il locale he represented by -5«, as 'ClipeipSe I Ki. 22, 49; KvprjvrjvSe 2 Ki. 16, 9. As examples of etymolo- gizing renderings may be quoted aTiX-nvoTTjs for "inV, St(S7]fj.aTi(javT6 pa for ''31'in3 ip. 22, 13, fK\fKTwdTjTe for ^"lUn Is. 52, II, TefovTovv for fjlj?, etc. Sometimes, in genuine Rabbinic fashion (e.g. Gen. 41, 43 Targ.), he treated a word as a com- pound : thus I Sam. 6, 8 W1X3 is rendered by him ev vcpei Kovpas as though = T3 31i?3 ; ^- 16, 1 On^JD ravdvoKppwv Koi airXovs (DD "^D) ; 73, 21 pID^N fvp Kairvt- (ofifvov (pin CX) : cf. p. Ixxxiii. See more in the Prolegomena to Dr. Field's Hexapla, p. xxi ff., or in the art. Hexapla (by Dr. C. Taylor) in the Dictionary of Christian Biography. § 3- I- TJie Greek Versions of the Old Testament xli Aquila was a pupil of R. Aqiba ; and the statement is confirmed by the character of his translation. For R. Aqiba, at the beginning of the second cent, a.d., introduced a new system of interpretation, laying exaggerated stress upon even syllables and letters, quite in the manner followed by Aquila \ The Version of Theodotion was rather a revision of the LXX than a new translation, and hence frequently agrees with it. Renderings of Theodotion have often found their way into MSS. of the LXX, sometimes as doublets, sometimes as insertions made with the view of supplying apparent omissions (i Sam. 17, 12-31 in Cod. A). In the case of Daniel, Theodotion's Version superseded that of the LXX, and occupies its place in ordinary MSS. and editions'^. Symmachus was an Ebionite (Eus. Hist. Eccl. vi. 17). He is praised by Jerome as frequently clever and successful in his renderings : not slavish like Aquila, and yet reproducing, often with happy accom- modations to Greek idiom, the sense of the original '. Ort'gens Hexapla. These three translations are not preserved in their entirety : they have been transmitted only in fragments, chiefly through the work of Origen, which is now to be described. Origen (a.d. 185-254), observing not only the variations between the Septuagint and the Hebrew text current in his day, but also the variations between different MSS. of the Septuagint itself, undertook * Illustrations may be found in Dr. Pusey's What is of Faith as to Everlasting Punishment ? p. 80 ff. ; Gratz, Gesch. der Judcn, iv. 53 ff. ^ The LXX Version of Daniel was first published from a unique MS. in 1772. In Tisch.'s edition it stands at the end of the second volume ; in Swete's it is printed in parallel pages with Theodotion. Renderings agreeing remarkably with Theodo- tion's Version occur in the NT. (cf. p. 129 «.) and writers of the early part of the second century : it has hence been conjectured that his version of this book is based upon an earlier Greek translation independent of the LXX (Salmon, Introd. to the ^r., ed. 3,p. 586ff.). ' Illustrations are given in abundance by Dr. Field, Hexapla, p. xxxi f. ; for instance, in his use of the ptcp., of adverbs, of compounds, i Sam. 22,8 LXX (literally) iv to) liaOkcBai tov viov /xov Sta&rjKTjv, Symm. avvnQiiiivov tov viov ftov ; Gen. 4, 2 LXX icat npoOfOrjKt r'lKTUV, Symm. koI -nakiv (t(K(v; Pr. 15, 15 2p 3"t3 Symm. a (ievnuv; Is. 9, 15 n"'JD NIti'J aiUaiixos; i Sam. 25, 3 h^V n21D LXX dyaOfi (Tvvtafi, 2. (v5iau6r]Tos ; id. D>7?J?'^"y"> hXXvovrjpos tv firiT-qSev/xaai, 2. kuko- "yvwiiaiv; 2 Sam. 12, 8 nJUDI T]in2 LXX koLtoL ravra, 2. iio\Kan\aaiova. xlii Introduction the task of recovering, if possible, the true text of the Septuagint, partly by aid of the Hebrew, partly by aid of the other Greek Versions. For this purpose, he arranged the different texts which he wished to compare in six parallel columns ; the work thus formed being known in consequence as the Hexapla. In the first column, he placed the Hebrew text; in the second, the Hebrew transcribed in Greek characters ; in the third and fourth, Aquila and Symmachus respec- tively ; in the fifth, the Septuagint; in the sixth, Theodotion. In the Septuagint column, additions, to which nothing corresponded in the Hebrew, were marked by an obelus prefixed (-f- .<) ^ ; omissions, where words standing in the Hebrew were not represented in the Greek, were filled in by him, usually from Theodotion, and noted similarly by an asterisk (-X- -i)'. In cases where copies of the LXX differed between themselves, it is probable that Origen adopted silently the reading that agreed most closely with the Hebrew. Proper names, also, which the original translators had sometimes transliterated with some freedom, sometimes expressed in accordance with the older pronunciation, or which in other cases had become corrupted by transcription, Origen assimilated to the current Hebrew text. The manuscript of this great work was preserved for long in the Library of Pamphilus in Caesarea ; Jerome collated it specially for his own use ; but in 638 Caesarea fell into the hands of the Saracens, and from that time the Library and its contents are heard of no more. Copies of the whole work were probably never made ; but the Septua- gint column was edited separately by Eusebius and Pamphilus, and * The sign 4, indicates the close of the words to which the obelus or asterisk refers. ^ The following is the important passage in which Origen himself describes both the motive and the plan of his work : Nkj'j 5t hT]KovoTi noWfj ftyovtv 17 rttjv avTi- ypd(l>wv 5ia(popa, fire diro pqOvfiias tivujv -fpa 6~9' I Sam. 12, 18 — 14, 9. i//. 49, 20 — 79, II. That of all MSS. of LXX, B (with which N frequently agrees), as a rule, exhibits relatively the purest and most original * Preface to Chronicles (printed at the beginning of the Vulgate) : Alexandria et Aegyptns in Septuaginta suis Hesychium laudat anctorem ; Constantinopolis usque Antiochiam Luciani martyris exemplaria probat ; mediae inter has provinciae Palestinos codices legunt quos ab Origene elaborates Eusebius et Pamphilus vul- gaverunt : totusque orbis hac inter se trifaria varietate conipugnat. The last of these recensions is naturally the source of the Hexaplar text spoken of above ; and Jerome states elsewhere (I 635 Vallarsi) that it was read (' decantatur ') at Jerusa- lem and in the churches of the East. * Lagarde, Mittheilungen, ii. 52 ; comp. G. F. Moore, AJSL. xxix. 47-50. ' Le recensioni dei LXX e la versione latina delta Itala, Estratto dai Rendiconti del R. istituto Lombardo, Serie II, vol. xix, fasc. IV (Milan, 1886), p. 2. Lagarde, /. c. p. 56, says that he knows of one MS. of the Octateuch (in private hands), not yet collated, which ' almost certainly ' contains it. § 3- 1- Manuscripts and Editions of the Septuagtnt xlvii Septuagintal text, is generally allowed ^ : that it contains double ren- derings, and has otherwise not escaped corruption, will appear presently (p. Iv ff.) ^ The Alexandrian MS. exhibits a text which has been systematically corrected so as to agree more closely with the Hebrew : proof of this is afforded by almost any page: thus i Sam. i, i where Cod. B has "Av^/jcottos tjv i$ ApfxaOaL/x 2ei<^a, Cod. A has Kai lyivero av6p9i ediilo simplex), originated in the needs of the large Syriac- speaking population N. and NE. of Palestine, whose literary centre was Edessa. No historical details respecting its origin have come down to us : already Theodore of Mopsuestia (fourth cent.) declares that it is not known who translated the Scriptures into Syriac ; but it is generally considered to date, at least in the main, from the early part of the second cent. a. d. Like the Septuagint, the Peshitto is * On the alleged dependence of Luc. on Theodotion, see Smith, Comm., 402 ff. ' For fuller particulars see the art. Targum (by E. Deutsch) in Smith's Dictionary of the Bible ; Bacher in the ZDMG. xxviii, p. I ff. ; and art. Targum (T. Walker) in DB. e 2 lii Introduction not the work of a single hand ; and the style of the different books, or groups of books, varies. Mainly, no doubt, the translators were either Jews or, more probably, Jewish Christians. Thus the transla- tion of the Pentateuch, for instance, often adheres closely to ancient Jewish exegesis ^ traces of which are also discernible in other books, especially in the Chronicles, the translation of which has additions and embellishments, imparting to it quite the character of a Targum ^ Job, on the other hand, is literal : while the translation of the Psalms is strongly influenced by the Septuagint, with which it often re- markably agrees, where both deviate from the Hebrew. 4. We reach now the Latin Versions. Of these the first is the Old Latin Version, used by early Latin Fathers, as Tertullian (died c. 220), Cyprian (d. 257), Lactantius, Lucifer of Cagliari (d. 371), and Augustine ^ This Version exists only in a more or less fragmentary form, derived partly from MSS., partly from quotations in the Fathers. Of the OT. the part most completely preserved is the Hexateuch, published (to Dt, 1 1, 4 ^) by Ulysse Robert from a Lyons MS. (1881) : in the Books of Samuel only fragments are extant derived from the sources just named. Of these fragments, such as were known at the time were published by Sabatier in 1743 in his great work, Biblionan Sacrorum Antiquae Ver stones Latinae : Vercellone in 1864 in vol. ii of the Variae Lectiones Vulgatae Latinae Biblioriim editionis printed other considerable extracts from the margin of a Gothic MS. at Leon in Spain ' ; three fragments, discovered in the bindings of some books at Magdeburg (II 2, 29—3, 5 [also i Ki. 5, 2-9*]) and Quedlinburg (I 9, 1-8^; 15, 10-17^), were edited by Von Miilverstedt in 1874"; two other fragments, discovered similarly at Vienna, were published 1 See especially J. Perles, Meletemata Peschitthoniana (Vratislaviae, 1859). ''■ Sig. Frankel, Die Syr. Obersetzung zu den BB. der Chronik (1879). 3 See fully, on this Version, H. A. A. Kennedy's comprehensive article, DB. iii. 47 ff. : comp. PREP' viii. 433-443 (Fritzsche) ; PRE? iii. 25-31 (Nestle). * On the continuation, see DB. iii. 49'', iv. 446^. » Variae Lectiones, ii. pp. xxi-xxii, 179, etc. : comp. i. pp. xciii-xcv. 6 Zeitschrift des Harzvereins, 1874, pp. 251-263. The two Quedlinburg frag- ments were re-edited by W. Schum in the Stnd. u. Kritiken, 1876, p. 123 f. (i Ki. z^^^ 6,11' has recently been recovered from the same source: A. Diining, Ein neues Fragment des Quedlinburger Itala^Codex , 1888), § 3- 4- ^'''^ ^^^ Latin Version liii in 1877^; in 1885 J. Belsheim edited some longer fragments (of other parts of the OT. as well as 1-2 Sam.) from a palimpsest MS. at Vienna I The Old Latin Version does not, as a rule, possess an independent value for the textual criticism of the OT., for it was not made immediately from the Hebrew, but was formed upon the Greek. As the extant parts of it shew that it existed in different recensions *, it becomes a matter of importance to inquire how these are related to one another, and upon what MSS., or family of MSS., of the LXX they are based. As will be shewn below (p. Ixxvi flf.), in the Books of Samuel the recensions which we possess are based upon a text agreeing with that of Lucian. IMore important for our present purpose is the Latin Version of Jerome, commonly known as the Vulgate *. Jerome began his labours as a translator by merely revising the Old Latin ; but ultimately made a new Version directly from the Hebrew. He had originally learnt Hebrew as a youth ^, and after having dropped the study for a while,^ ^ Augusiissimae Bibliothecae Caesareae Regiae Palatinae Vindobonensis Prae- fecto Dodori Ernesto Birk mufierum publicorwn feliciter peracto XL annorttm cyclo gratulantes qui a Bibliotheca sunt Veteris Antchieronymianae Versionis Libri II Reguin sive Samuelis Cap. X. 18 — XI. \1 et Cap. XIV. i*j-2,o prin- cipem editionem dedicant inlustratam Tabulis Photographicis (Vindobonae, MDCCCLXXVII). Cited as Vind.'. ^ Palimpsestus Vindobonensis antiquissimae Vet. Test. Translationis latinae frag- menta e codice rescripto emit et primum edidit Johannes Belsheim Christianiae, 1885 (iSam. I, 14—2, 15. 3, 10—4, 18. 6, 3-15. 9, 21 — 10, 7. 10, 16— II, 13. M, 12-34- 2 Sam. 4, 10—5, 25. 10, 13— u, 18. 13, 13—14, 4. 17, 12—18, 9). Cited as Vind.^. (One column of this MS., containing II 11, 2-6, had been pub- lished previously, as a specimen, by Eichenfeld and Endlicher, Analecta Gram- matica, Vindob. 1837, p. ix.) For some other recently discovered fragments see DB. iii. 50*. ^ Regarded by some as independent versions: see PREP' viii. 434-6; DB. iii. 48-9. * On the Vulgate generally, see the elaborate article by Mr. (afterwards Bishop) Westcott in Smith's Dictionary of the Bible : on its relation to the Hebrew text of the OT. in particular, the careful monograph of W. Nowack, Die Bedeutung des Hieronymus fUr die alttestamentliche Textkritik (Gottingen, 1875), should by all means be consulted. See also H. J. White's art. Vulgate in DB. iv. p. 873 ff. ^ Preface to Daniel (printed at the beginning of editions of the Vulgate) ; Ep. 125, § 12 (Migne, i. 1079),— an interesting passage, too long to quote. liv Introduction resumed it in his later years, after his migration to Bethlehem in 386. The Books of Samuel and Kings were published first (c. 393), but the whole work was not completed till 405, For the purpose of perfecting his knowledge of Hebrew, and also subsequently for assistance in the translation of particular books, Jerome engaged the help of Jewish teachers, to whom in his commentaries he more than once alludes', and from whom no doubt he derived the Rabbinical interpretations which occur from time to time in the pages of the Vulgate '^. Though his Version was made afresh from the Hebrew, he did not disdain to avail himself of the labours of his predecessors, and consulted constantly the Greek Versions (both the LXX and Aq. Theod. Symm.), the renderings of which he frequently quotes and discusses. He was especially prone to be guided by Symmachus. Where the Vulgate exhibits a rendering which deviates alike from the Hebrew text and from the LXX, the clue to its origin will generally be found in one of the other Greek translations, especially in that of Symmachus (see pp. Ixxxi-lxxxiii). Note. — For the recovery of the original text of the LXX, much yet remains to be done (cf. EB.'w. 5021 f.). The first step is the more accurate collation ofMSS. for the purpose, if possible, of grouping them in families, or recensions. Upon this field of study Lagarde (d. 1 89 1 ) stood pre-eminent (comp. Cornill , Ezech., p. 63) : but * Ep. 84, § 3 : Putabant me homines finem fecisse discendi. Veni rursum lero- solyma et Bethleem. Quo labore, quo pretio Baraninam nocturnum habui praecep- torem ! Timebat enim Judaeos, et mihi alterum exhibebat Nicodemum. Preface to Chron. : Denique cum a me litteris flagitassetis ut vobis librum Paralipomenon Latino sermone transferrem, de Tiberiade quemdam legis doctorem qui apud Hebraeos admiration! habebatur assumpsi : et contuli cum eo a vertice, ut aiunt, usque ad extremum unguem ; et sic confirmatus ausus sum facere quod iubebatis. Preface to Job : Memini me ob intelligentiani huius voluminis Lyddaeum quemdam praeceptorem, qui apud Hebraeos primus haberi putabatur, non parvis redemisse nummis. On Am. 3, 11 he alludes to the ' Hebraeus qui me in sacris Scripturis erudivit:' similarly on Zeph. 3, 8. Gal. 3, 14 al. On Hab. 2, 15 : Audivi Lyddae quemdam de Hebraeis qui sapiens apud illos et StvTffxJuTTjs [ = NSri] vocabatur nar- rantem huiuscemodi fabulam, etc. On Zech. 14, 20 : Quod cum ab Hebraeo quaere- rem quid significaret, ait mihi, etc. * Comment, on Is. 22, 17 on 123 : Hebraeus autem qui nos in Veteris Testament! lectione eiudivit ^a/h(m gaUinaceum transtulit. (See the Comm. of Rashi ad loc.) Comp. M. Rahmer, Die hehrdischen Traditionen in den Werken des Hieronymus (Breslan, 1861); continued (with reference toHosea) in Yxzxif^fM's, Monatschrift, 1865, pp. 216, 460; 1867, p. 107; 1868, p. 419. § 4- The Vulgate Iv the task was greater than any single man, even with Lagarde's extraordinary powers of work, could accomplish ; and he was only able to point the way which others could follow (see Rahlfs, Sept. Studien, iii. 3, 23-30). His mantle has fallen upon his pupil and successor at Gottingen, Alfred Rahlfs, who has published exhaustive investigations on the pre-Hexaplar LXX-text of 1-2 Kings, as inferred from Origea's citations ; on the text and MSS. of the Psalms ; and on Lucian's recension of 1-2 Kings [Septuaginta-sttidien, L 1904, ii. 1907, iii. 191 1). See also O. Procksch, Studie7t zur Gesch. der Sept. 1910 (on the text of the Prophets) ; and G. F. Moore's valuable article on the Antiochian Recension of the LXX in AJSL. xxix (Oct. 191 2), pp. 37-62. And, on the recovery of the Hebrew original of difficult LXX render- ings, see Margolis, ZA W. 1905, 31 1 ff., 1906, 85 ff., 1907, 255 ff. ; AJSL. xxii (Jan. 1906), no ff., xxvi (Oct. 1909), 33 ff. ; Harper Memorial Studies (1908), i. 133 ff. § 4. Characteristics of the Chief Ancient Versions of Samuel^. I. The Septuagint. a. Features which presumably are not original elements in the Version, or due to the translators themselves. (a) Examples of double renderings (' doublets ') : these are fre- quently connected by /cat: — I I, 16 Luc. Tl'tJ' 3"1D = £K ttAtJ^ovs dSoAto-T^tas //.ou kox Ik ttAt/^vs a6viJ.La; )(eipS)v avTov do)3oaji ; 12, 30 M«Xx;oA. (usually for P^'D); 14, 2'j end K^LaOap. Sometimes, also, constantly, as b*3'3X A^iyata (no doubt A for A) ; bD''?D m.f\xo\ ; nra-C"'N 'le0o ^ l^h Trapaa-Lwrr-qcrri'i a(f>' tj/JibiV Tov fxr] /3oav. — 7> 14- 17) ^ '^^^ i^^^ . . . P^ avo. p.i(Tov . . . /cat dva /Mc'crov. — 18, 22 'n }*3n OiXtiv cV; 25 (SovXcaOai eV. — 20, 21 "JOO nini dirb aov koL utSe. — 22 HX/m ']12D airo (tov Koi CTreKfiva. — 24, 7 /u,Tj8afiws /U.01 Trapo. Kuptou (nilT'D), ti iron/ja-fji . . . — 28, 1 7 XaAtiv ci* X^''P^ Tivos. — II 1 8, 4 "lycn T* ?x di'd x^^P"^ ^^5 ttvXt^s. — 24, 3 cnsi Dna wo-TTcp auTOiJs Kai w(Tirep avTous (contrast Dt. I, II — by a different hand — D33 ws co-re ;(tAto7rXcurtojs). The pron. *33S (when expressed in the Hebrew) is (after II 7) seven times represented curiously by the substantive verb : — II II, 5 cycii ct/x.t ev yaarpc €)(io', 12, 7 '^"•t eycj ei/xt ipvaa/xrjv 6. 7- 15, 20. 24. 16, 23. 17, 5. 10. 12. 16. 18, 2. 22. 26. 27. 19, 20. 40. 43. 20, 16. 21, 20. (So before in A and Luc. but not in B, as I i, 6 L. 8, 8 L. 18, 5 A L. 19, Ix Introduction {b) They even translate not unfrequently wholly regardless of the sense: — I l, 26 ""a Iv i/xoL — 5, 6 CDtr''1 koI i-n-jyayev a^rots (D1?'B')1, the suffix construed as a dative : GK. §11 7^). — 8, 3 yV3n nnx ottiVo) T^s (TVVTeXetas. — 8, 1 6 inDN?D? nti'yi Ktti aTroScKarwcrci (~>??'V1) «is tol epya avTov. — 12, 2 ''Jp^t^ koI KaOyjaofxai (''rinB'J). — 12, 25 ISDJjl tt/doo-tc- Orjaea-Oe (as though ISOri from ^P!I) : SO 27, I. — 14, 38 Ta? ywi/tas tou 'lo-paT/A. — 14, 40 "^95^? €is Sot'Xctav ([n]"l3yP). — 15, II TrapaKeKXrjixaL (so II 24, 26 Trap^KXrjO-q : ^D? = TrapaKaAew ; hence TrapaKeKXrjfJiai derived mechanically to express the Nifal). — 18, 21 ''0'^'' ^at rjv i^^'^X) iirl ZaouX (!) ^ctp o.XXo(f)vXu)v. {c) A Hebrew word not understood, or treated incorrectly as a proper name, or if of a technical character, is often transliterated : I I, 24 oi^i, ve/SeX [10, 3 do-Kov]. — 2, 18 e^ovS (Sap. — 28 al. €(f)ov8 [in the Pent, regularly cttw/ais]. — 32 (Cod. A) Kparaiw/Aa /xovmv. — 9, 12. 13 al. Bafxa. — 10, 5 al. m/?Aa. — 13, 3 Nao-£t^. — 1 4, I cts Mco-o-a^ twv a.XXo(}>vX(j)V (but 13, 23 vTroo-Tacris). — 6. Ii. 12. 15 Meacraff). — 23 rryv BaixwO. — 33 iv ViOOatfx. (for orinjn !), — 16, 20 yo/xop (see note). — 17, 18 Luc. tpov/Sa. — '20, 19 Trapa to (pyafS eKeivo. — 20 eis t^v Ap/jLarrapd. — 21 yov^av. — 41 ctTTO tov apya/S. — 25, 18 oi. Characteristics of the Septiiagint Ixi diro TTcJAecus M«0A.a. 2 Ki. 2, 14 Xin FjN d€iXavTO ktX. Both MT. and LXX may be accounted for by the assumption of an original DNI n-^mbQ n^D b;>^n jbnj.— 10, 22 ibxK^I, LXX Kai iTrrjpi^jr-qaev -^afJiovyjX. The original text had bii^'''). — 11, 9 D''3X^D^ nJDK^, LXX Kai eT-n-fv Tois dyye'Aois. Originally *1?DX''1, here best read as a singular ' on account of the definiteness of the message' (We.). — 15 13''^?0''1, LXX KoX expio-e "^a/xovrjX. — 1 7, 39^ IvVD 111 D"lD"'1, LXX koL d^aipouo-tv avTOL air' avrov. Originally only vb]}^ mci, fixed in MT. to a sing, by the addition of 1)1, read by LXX as D"??^!. — 30, 20 TiT np"^ |N^n"73"nx, LXX KOL eXaftev iravTa to. iroL/xvia. ^1'^ almost certainly a false ' Explicitum : ' see the note. c. On the Orthography of the Hebrew Text used by LXX (comp. above, p. xxviii ff.). {a) The number of cases in which LXX and MT. differ in respect of the number of a verb, or in which the MT. itself has one number where the other would be expected, makes it probable that there was a time when the final consonant was not always expressed in writing, and that when the scriptio plena was introduced an (apparent) singular was sometimes left, which ought to have become a plural. The omission was in some cases made good by the Massorites in the Qre, but not always. Nu. 13, 22 xron ny xn-'i 3:n "i^yi (read inti). 32, 25 'J3 -ionm piXI ^J31 n:. 33, 7. Jud. 8, 6. I Sam. 9, 4^. 19, 20 S'TI (of the CDX^D just mentioned), LXX koL eTSav. i Ki. 13, 11 1J3 NUM ib'nSD^I (the sequel pn"'ax^ DliSD^ shews that 1^ ';;2D''1 IJ? ^^i3^"l must § 4. 1- c. Character of Hebrew Text used by the LXX Ixiii have been intended : cf. LXX ep^^ovrai ol viol airov kol Sirjy-qaavTo). 22, 49 (probably sSl and rWiHn "i^C^: ^2 were intended by the author). \}/. 79, 7 IDcn , , , 73K (contrast the p/urats in Jer. lo, 25b). The correction is made in the Qre {Ochlah we-Ochlak, No. 119), Gen. 27, 29 'inn:^'"'!; 43, 28 ^nn^^ np^i ; jud. 21, 20. i Sam. 12, 10. 13, 19 D'n:^'SD ion* *3. T Ki. 9, 9. 12,7. 2 Ki. 20, 18 np"* (as Is. 39, 7 IHp^ ; but the sing, may here stand : LXX XrifiU/fTai). Est. 9, 27 (contrast w. 23). Ezr. 3, 3. Elsewhere the sing, may be explained by the principle noticed on I 16, 4 : Gen. 42, 25 p nr\b K'yi so. ^t^•1y^ (LXX /faJ iyfvTieT); b'V>1 would be unnatural). 48, I ^Dvb 1DN"'1 sc. nOINH (LXX Kai dnriyytXri = "I0N_»1). 2 IDN^I . . . 13^ (LXX avr]y~fi\rj 5t . . . Ae^oi'Tey). Conversely MT. sometimes has a plural where LXX (not always rightly) read as a singular: I 7, 13 D^nK'^Q 1^33^1, LXX fcai irairei- vfDorev KvpLo1 — the latter not idiomatic ; cf. p. 258). — 2 1^ ^xt:"'1, LXX Koi rjpu}T7j(Tav avTov (the subject is the men left behind). Comp. Gen. 25, 25 IKT; IDS' "iwS"ip"n, LXX 67ro)vo'/u,a(rev : V. 26 (in a similar context) MT. has Nnp-il, LXX cKaAeo-ev. The correction is made in the Qre {^Ochlah we-Ochlah, No. 120) : Jos. 6, 7 Dyn b« (np -|0X>1) IIDK^I (the subject is Joshua). 9, 7 (^p nON>1) nDN"'1 PXIli''' K^'X (the correction is here unnecessary), i Sam. 15, 16. i Ki. 12, 3. 21. 2 Ki. 14, 13 pS>1 D^U^n"' (np N3^1) 1K2''1 . . . ti'Sn, LXX koX nXQtv. Ez. 46, 9" INJf (10^ strangely not made). Neh. 3, 15 (comp. v. 14). The case is particularly clear in some of the instances in which the phrase tn?y]yyi\r\ (or avqyylXr]) Xeyovre^ occurs. This Strange con- struction Kara avvea-Lv ^ might be supposed to have been forced upon the translators when they found what would only naturally be read by them as itoxj) 1^\ I 15, 12. 19, 19. II 6, 12. 15, 31 (MT. T3n). 19, I. I Ki. I, 51 ^: but it is scarcely credible that they should have * Winer, Grammar of NT. Greek, § lix. 11. ^ So also Gen. 22, 20. 38, 13. 24 (cf. 45, 16. 48, 2). Jos. 10, 17. Jud. 16, 2 (in MT. njM has dropped out), i Ki. 2, 29. 41 (without IDK^). Ixiv Introduction gone out of their way to use it for what in MT. stands as "lON? "n^VI I 14, 33. 23, I. 24, 2 (XcyovTwv). II 3, 23. I Ki. 2, 39 : in these instances, therefore, it can hardly be doubted that the original text had simply nri, which was read by LXX as "13'!, but in MT. was resolved into n3£l. {b) The MSS. used by the LXX translators — except, probably, in those parts of the OT. which were translated first — must have been written in an early form of the square character \ That it was not the unmodified archaic character appears clearly from the frequency with which letters, which have no resemblance to one another in that character, are interchanged in many parts of the Septuagint. For the same reason it can hardly have been very similar to the Egyptian Aramaic alphabet illustrated above. It was no doubt a transitional alphabet, probably a Palestinian one, of a type not greatly differing from that of Kefr-Bir'im (p. xxiii). In this alphabet, not only are 1 and ■» remarkably alike ^, but also 2 and 3, and 2 and D (of which there are many clear instances of confusion in the Septuagint): n, n, and the final D also approach each other. 1 and "i resemble each other in most Semitic alphabets : so that from their confusion — next to that of 1 and \ the most common in LXX — little can be inferred respecting the alphabet used^. ^ So long ago Gesenius, Gesch. d. Hcb. Sprache u. Schrift (1815), p. 158 ; for a more recent opinion, see K. Vollers in the ZATW. 1883, p. 230 f. * They are also alike, it may be observed, in the late type of the archaic char- acter in which niH^ is written in the fragments of Aquila mentioned above (p. iii) ; see p. 1 5 in Burkitt's edition. ' It is true, the Kefr-Bir'im alphabet is considerably later than the LXX (as the scriptio plena alone would shew), but the Inscription of B'^ne Hezir, and those alluded to p. xxii, note i, appear to shew that an alphabet not differing from it materially was in popular use in Palestine at least as early as the Christian era : and if more abundant records had been preserved it would probably be found to begin at an earlier period still. The confusion of ^ and 1, and f3 and 1 (which cannot be explained from the old character) is in the Pent, so uncommon that it may be due to accidental causes : the books in which it is frequent can only have been translated after the change of character had been effected ; the Pent., as tradi- tion states, may have been translated earlier. Possibly a large and discriminating induction of instances (in which isolated cases, especially of proper names, should be used with reserve) might lead to more definite conclusions. § 4- I- c. Character of Hebreiv Text used by the LXX Ixv Examples of letters confused in LXX : — (a) MT. \ LXXl : II 23, 7 N^O^ Kal7rX^p£s( = N^r:i) : MT. \ LXX ^ : I 2, 29 |iy[0] 6(ji0aXfx(^ {= py). 12, 2 (p. Ix). 19, 22 1X'3 €V 2€<^et ( = ''DCrn). 24, 16 ^^■^1 yivono ( = n\n*): both changes together, 12, 3 13 Ty aTTOKpiOrjTi KUT ifjLov { = ''2 13y). Very clear examples are afforded by the Psalms : MT. ^ LXX 1 : — if/. 2, 6 ^3i?D ^ri3p3 Karea-Tde-qv ySacrtAeus w ai^roS^'lsS'P ^ri3B3. 16, 3 ''VDn -'S Travra to. OeX-qfiara auTo{5=:1V3n"?3. 20, 10 IJjy Kttt €7raKOU(rov ■:7//,w;/^"l33yi. 22, 17 nW ojpi;^ai/ = 11^<3. 32, 4 pp aKav^av = pp. 35, 16 "liyb i^efxvKT-qpuTdv iJiC'=-)i]}?. 36, 2 ^l!? 3-lp3 eV eavTi^ = )2b 3np3. 38, 12 >yj3 ^yyto-av = iy?3 (see 32, 6. 88, 4). 45, 12 V ''innti'ni Kat Trpoo-Kwr/o-oucnv aura) = v linnt^ni. 46, 5 ''33tJ^ K^np rjyiaa-e to aKT^viDfjua avrov^l^^y''? ^1i?. 50, 2 1 ni'in dvo/i,tW=rii^L' (see 52, 2). 58, 4 3T3 ''"131 iXdX-qcrav i/'€u8^ = 3r3 1131. 69, 33 D^n^N '•C^n c/c^T;T7;o-aTe=V^"n. 73, 7 1D3''y dStKta aiTwv = i?3:ij?. 10* IJOy 6 Aaos jxov^^JD]}. >j6, 12-13 nV3^ :N">1D^ tw ^o^epw Kat d^atpoi;/x,eVa) = ">P^ t*!''^^. 88, 16 yJ2ii ^nXB'J vi{/u)e€h Sk £Ta7rcivw^T/v=^1^^ '•nNtf? (see Lev. 25, 39. and cf. t/r, 106, 43). 90, 16 nsT Kati8e = nS-)^. 91, 6 llt^'' Kttt 8aLfjioviov=-'^'^) (see 106, 37). 12 2, 6 vi^B''' /cat €u(9>yvia = nip^1 (z;. 7). 144, 15* ■'"IK'K c/xa/cdpio-av = ^"if'i^, — a passage which shews how scrupulously the LXX expressed what they found in their MSS. ; for in the parallel clause n^^'X^/Aaxapio?. Add Is. 29, 13 '31 'nX nnN-\> ■•nril fj,dTrjv 8e aifiovrai ixe ktX. (so Mt. 15, 8; Mk. 7, 6)='m Dr-iNT inhl. Jer. 6, 9 l^^iy bb'\V KaXajxaa-Oe KaAa/Aacr^e = li^^Jiy l^^iy. 10, 20 •':x:i' /cat ra Trpd^ara /aou = ''JN\'1. Zech. 5, 6 nJ''y r] dhiKia auro>v = DjiK, etc. 1305 * Ixvi Introduction MT. 1, LXX ^ :— )/f. 17, II iniC'S' e/c^aXoWes />te='J ?;? (perhaps Aram, ''T)'}^ 2 2, 25 1Jr:D d-Tr' e>oJ} = ''JDa. 30 .Tn N^ irSJI /cat iy y\ivxr] /aou auTw C??='^tC' ^^ "'^?5V 4 1) 91^ P^^"" KaredevTO Kar e/Ao{) = ''3 ? . 56, 8 JIN ^y virep Tov /A7?^evos = rN* ^y. 59> 10 iry TO Kparos /Aou=''Ty (cf. Z'. 18). 62, I pnn^ 'iSi^ow\ 5 iriNti'D T^V TLfXrjv /MOV. 64, 7 3"lp1 7r/Docr€XeweTat = 21p^. 65, 8 D^rON^ ])r2n) TapaxOwovrai Wvr^^^'^^ l^'^n^ (or r.»n^). 68, 7 nriTlV IJSC' Tors KarotKoCvras cv Td(f)OL^=^ ? ^PP^. 73, lo'J N^D ''D1 Kal TjfjLepaL TrX-)]p€L^ = i6D ''D'' (Kai added). 76, 7 D1D1 33"11 DTIJ ivva-raiav ol cTrt/Jc^Sr/KOTes toli? ittttods = DID ""nsi imnj. 91, 5 mriDI KVKXwa-et o-€ = ']'nnD\ 109, 10 )V11) €K/3Xr]e-^TM(Tav = '^^y]. 28 IDp 01 €7ravi(rTa//,evot /AOi = 'Pi^. ^^9> 3 '"'''^y "'''yS i^^ ^^^ ou yap 01 ipya^ofievoL tyjv di/o/>ttav=xb *]N nhy 'bv^. Add Ez. 48, lob mn'' eo■Tal=n^^^ 35 lOtJ' mn'' eo-rat to ovo/i.a avr^s = "lt:t:' n\n\ Lam. 3, 22 UDD N^ ^3 ovk i^eXiTrov fie=^3Bri N^ (GK. § 117^). Sometimes both confusions occur in one word or verse : — ^- 35. 19 py ^^">P^ Kal Siav€vovT€? 6cf)eaXixo2?=VV ^ifT]. 145. 5 ''■13T) XaXT7o-oi;o-t = nnT'. Jer. 6, 23 "iny 1331'' D'^DID ^yi e>' iTTTTOts Kol apfjiao-L 7rapaTd^€Tai = Tjny: 2311 n^DiD ^y^. * So in Kt. 39, I. 77, I. Neh, ti, 17. i Ch. 16, 38 : and in LXX of i Ch. 9, 16 etc., where MT. has regularly pnn\ ^ Instances such as "ZiKp for ClIY ; 'A7x<"'s for L"''3X ; ip. 8 ////^ n^JlSn twi/ XrjvSiv = nin:n ; 27, 6 on"" v^pwcTf = O^ni ; 88, H IClp^ D^*?") DX ^ larpot dvaffrrjaovat = Wp'' D^NSI DN (cf. Is. 26, 14) are not cited, as the difference of pronunciation presupposed by LXX is due probably, not to confusion of 1 and ^, but to the absence of the plena scriptio. That the MS. (or MSB.) upon which the Massoretic text is founded must also at § 4- I- c- Character of Hebrew Text used by the LXX Ixvii (/3) MT. n, LXX l: I 4, 10 and 15, 4 ""^Jl Tay/xarwv (as though 'hy\\ see Nu. 2, 2, etc.); 10, 24 lyT lyvwo-av; 13, 3 and 14, 21 Dnay So9Aoi; 40 3/j nny SovAeiav; 19, 13 "1"'33 ^Trap (13D); 23, 15 n'j'nnn eV ttj Kaiv^; 24, 3 Luc. niv t^? ^T^pas (n^^*) ; 11 19, 18 mnyi mjyn koi iXeLTOvpyyja-av Trjv XcLTOvpyiav ', 2 2, 2 1. 25 Luc. "^33 So^av, MT. n, LXX n: I 17, 8 D^ay 'E(3paloi; 19, 22 i?nj aXw (pa); 21, 7, etc. Aw^K 6 lu'pos; 23, 14. 19. 24, i nnVD Maaepe/j., Mio-a-apa, cVrots CTTevois; 24, 12 mif Sco-yaeveis (">">V) ; 30, 8 1)1} yeSSovp; II 3, 4 n^ilK, B 'Opi/eiX, A 'Opvias, Luc. 'Opvia [so I Ki. I — 2 Luc, through- out]; 6, 10-12 (so I Ch. 13, 13. 14a, but not 15, 24. 25, etc.) 12]} DnN 'A/ScSSapa (as though niN-nay). And often in other books. (y) MT. 2, LXX JO: ir 5, 20 D'-nS ^y32 €K Twv tVai/o) StaKOTrwv ( = D''ViD ^yo?3); II, 21 f. j*2n 0ap,ao-t; 21, 19 33'Po/a; and probably (though not certainly) in the following places where 2 is rendered by airo, ck: I 4, 3. 25, 14 end. II 2, 31. 5, 24. 6, i. 9, 4b. 16, 13. 18, 8. 19, 23. 40 Luc. (nny for I2y; so 2 Ki. 6, 30). Cf. m^'-ax 'Ap,€tva8a/? ^ Notice the resemblance of a and D in the Kefr-Bir'im Inscription (above, p. xxiii, Fig. 12). MT. D, LXX 3: 16, 20 noy SieXeelv (nay); 9, 2 |D cv; 26 (see note); 14, i; II 13, 34^ 2. one time or other have been written in a character in which "i and 1 were very similar, is clear from the frequency with which 1 occnrs with ^ """Ip, and "• with 1 np {Ochlah we-Ochlah, Nos. 80, 81, 134-148), the ""Ip being often, as i Sam. 22, 17. 25, 3. 2 Sam. 15, 20 (though not always), indisputably correct. 1 See also Dt. 1, 44 p^y^D for I'^i^l rightly). ^. 18, 14* (l£ as in || 2 Sam. both LXX and MT.). 32, 3^. 78, 26^ 105, 36*. 119, 84^ 139, 13^ Pr. 10, 21 cm v\iir]\a (D'lm). 12, 3^ 24, 5». 28, 12. 28 Dip3 Iv rovois (DIpD : notice mmpron in the Inscr. of Kefr-Bir'im). i Ch. 7,6 njDT for ''llf Jos. 7, i. Hos. 5,' 13 and 10, 6 nil 'Iap€i/i. 13, 9 ""a LXX, Pesh. ""D (rightly). Jer. 38, 24^ 46, 10". Ez. 16, 6 €« ToC ai'/ioTos cou for "^^DH^. Ob. 21. Hab. 2, 4 t/f niaTius fiov for in3icK3. Jos. 3, 16" nay uuriiKfi (cf. on ii 15, 23). 2 See also ^^z. 45, 14^' ev. 68, 23'' (li/in spite of l« 23*). 36*. 81, 7'' (nJiayD *in3 for nnnyn nnD). 104, 15*. 119, 68'' (Di^rOI read as aiLD31) : cf. 70, 4 UIC"" for IDK'^ 40, 16. Pr. 17, Io^ Jer. 21, i iT'K'yD Bairatoi/. 46, 25 X313 toj/ vldu avr^s (nJ2). Ez. 48, 29 npmn for n^mprightIy(seeJos. 13, i6. 23, 4; H^mrD is un- translateable). Jos. 8, 33 D''1?oy napcrropdJovTo. Sometimes, as ^. 31, 8''. 135, 21*. Jer. 9, i8 (19). ao, 1 7, it may be doubtful whether the variation points to a difference f 2 Ixviii Introduction Other letters confused in LXX may be noted by the reader for himself. All cannot be reduced to rule : a certain number are due to accidental causes, as the partial illegibility of a letter in particular cases \ ( ('"> Dip njian ^yi ; Heb. msn '^: so z'. II. 2, 21); 28 ''•^ vn^NtJ'n I have dehvered him up that he may minister be/ore '1 ; ib. '"h PiNti' he shall minister be/ore '"i ; 2, 11 ministered be/ore '"< ; 25b '■« pan ""3 for it was pleasure (xiyi) be/ore '■• to slay them; 35 and I will raise up be/ore me; 6, 17 as a guilt offering be/bre '1 ; 7, 3 and worship be/ore Him alone (so v. 4. 12, lob); 17 and built an altar there be/ore '^; 10, 17 gathered be/ore '* ; II 7, 5 shalt thou build be/bre me a house ? And so frequently. Dip |0 /rom before is employed similarly : I i , 5 and children were withheld from her from before '\ 20^ for from before '''• have I asked 1 So, for instance, i Sam. 5, Io^ 11 ; 29, 3 TlX r^ithv ; 30, 22 ; 2 Sam. 10, 1 1 bis ; Ex. 14, 25 nOIJN , saying (so II 7, 4). 26, 19 [[from before '* thou art stirred up against me, let mine offering be accepted with favour, but if the children of men, let them be accursedyV^wi before '\ {b) Paraphrastic renderings. These are very numerous, and only specimens can be given here : I i, 12^ and Eli waited for her till she should cease; 16 Dishonour not thy handmaid before a daughter of wickedness; 2, 11 'hv *''n3 in Eli's lifetime (for 'hv ''JQTIX) ; 32a and thou shalt observe and shalt behold the affliction that shall come upon the men of thy house for the sins which ye have sinned in my sanctuary ; and after that I will bring good upon Israel ; 3, 1^ and Samuel had not yet learnt to know instruction from before '% and the prophecy of ''' was not yet revealed to him; 19 and Samuel grew, and the Word (nidVO) of '•• was his help^; 4, 8 who will deliver us from the hand of the ' Memra ' of '"• whose mighty works these are ? 6, 19 and he slew among the men of B., because they rejoiced that they had seen the ark of '"• exposed ('•^J 13) ; and he killed among the elders of the people seventy men, and in the congregation 50,000 ; 7, 6 and poured out their heart in penitence as water before '* ; 9, 5 they came into the land wherein was a prophet (for «i"iV pN : cf. i , i N^3J n^r^^no for D^SIV; see Hab. 2, i Heb.); 9, 12. 14. 25 n^ NnnnOX dining-chamber (for noan : NnnnDN = HDC'bn v. 22) ; 10, 5. II NnSD scribes (for D'X"'a3) ; 15, 29 And if thou sayest, I will turn (repent) from my sin, and it shall be forgiven me in order that I and my sons may hold the kingdom over Israel for ever, already is it decreed upon thee from before the Lord of the victory of Israel, * Such impersonal constructions are common in the Targums. ^ On the n^ retained mechanically from the Hebrew, in spite of the construction being varied, see 'Ca^ Journal of Philology, xi. 227 f. ^ So often when Yahweh is said to be 'with 'a person: 10, 7. 16, 18. 18, 14. Gen. 39, 2. 3 etc. §4- 2. Characteristics of the Tar gum of Samuel Ixxi before whom is no falsehood, and who turns not from what He has said ; for He is not as the sons of men, who say and belie themselves, who decree and confirm not ; 25, 29 but may the soul of my lord be hidden in the treasury of eternal life (sD7y ''^n T3J3) before '" thy God ; 28, 19 (on the margin of the Reuchl. Cod.: Lagarde, p. xviii, 1. 10') and to-morrow thou and thy sons shall be with me in the treasury of eternal life; II 6, 19 "i2:i'N (see note); 20, 18 and she spake, saying, I remember now what is written in the book of the Law to ask peace of a city first [Dt. 20, 10] ; so oughtest thou to ask at Abel whether they will make peace ; 21, 19 and David the son of Jesse, the weaver of the veils of the sanctuary (Heb. d^jiN ny-'-p pn!?S' !), of Bethlehem, slew Goliath the Gittite. 3. The Peshitto. The Hebrew text presupposed by the Peshitto deviates less from the Massoretic text than that which underlies the LXX, though it does not approach it so closely as that on which the Targums are based. It is worth observing that passages not unfre- quently occur, in which Pesh. agrees with the text of Luctan, where both deviate from the Massoretic text ^. In the translation of the Books of Samuel the Jewish element alluded to above (p. Hi) is not so strongly marked as in that of the Pent. ; but it is nevertheless present, and may be traced in certain characteristic expressions, which would hardly be met with beyond the reach of Jewish influence. Expressions such as ' to say, speak, worship, pray, sin before God,' where the Hebrew has simply io God, are, as we have seen, a dis- tinctive feature of the exegesis embodied in the Targums ; and they meet us similarly in the Peshitto version of Samuel. Thus I i, 10 prayed before the Lord (so v. 26. 7, 5. 8. 9. 8, 6. 12, 8. 10. 19. 15, 11. II 7, 27). 2, II )l.;.2o OJ.C ]oo» ooojoo ministered before the Lord (so 3, i). 26 in favour before God. 8, 21 spake them before the Lord (Heb. ''JIX3). 10, 17 gathered before the Lord. II 11, 27 end ^ Comp. Bacher, ZDMG. 1874, p. 23, who also notices the other readings pub- lished by Lagarde from the same source, pointing out, where it exists, their agree- ment with other Jewish Midrashic authorities. Mi2,ii. 13,5. 14,49. 15.7- 17,12. 30,15. 1111,4.15,7. 21,8.23,17. 24, 4 : for some other cases, in which the agreement is mostly not in text, but in interpretation (as I 4, 15. 10, 2, 17, 18), see Stockmayer, ZAW. 1892, p. 2 2off. Ixxii Introduction (for "'J"'y3). 2 1, 6. 23, 16 end. 24, 10 and 17 (W^ before) : in all these passages, except II 11, 27, Targ. also has Dip. Similarly y)^ ^ from before: I 2, 25 n^"l^N I^^QI he shall ask (forgiveness) frovi before the Lord. 16, 14'J (for DNO : so Targ.). II 3, 28 (for DyJD: so Targ.). 6, 9 (so Targ.). 23, 17 V^-^ia '^^ ^ ^^ .m*. (so Targ., as also I 24, 7. 26, 11, where, however, Pesh. has simply )u;jio ^). I 2, 17 ^"^ nmo nx IVNJ is rendered by X^-^m ys^is oJ^»/ which is a Jewish paraphrase for to curse or provoke God : see Lev. 24, II al. Onq. (for ^bp); i Ki. 22, 54. 2 Ki. 17, 11 Targ. Pesh. (for D"'y2n : often also besides in Targ. for this word); 2, 22 n"iN3Vn ^^^» who prayed, Targ. nN7V7 |riNT who came to pray (of. note); 30 '^llb |13^nn^ v».2o*i3 yQjoo-fcj shall minister before me, Targ. pc'Ct*"' ■'Dnp; 17, 49 inVD ^N wo»ailx li^*=> as Targ.; 21, 3 ^ych^ ''J^D DlpO w.*^>»o U;;^? )»!./, cf. Targ. (both here and 2 Ki. 6, 8) ^D3 nnxb TIDDI ; 27, 7 yj^:» yjJi- for nnD"" as Targ.'; 11 i, 21 ^Iji.iajsc» monn (cf. the renderings of noiin and onn in the Pent., e.g. Ex. 25, 2 Onq. Nm::^"iax ''Onp n::'iD'1, Pesh. )kXi».»a3 wJ^ ^a*.;Ajo, lit. that they separate for me a separation'^'); 6,6 flDJ jUiJl ppDD; 14 "131DD paraphrased by u<.^ioo praising, as in Targ.; 7, 23 msm: )u6).- visions (cf. the rend, of N"i"iD, mxilD by |)]n in Dt. 4, 34. 26, 8. 34, 12 [where Pesh., as here, Joju. or )doJL.]); 8, 18 □'•jn^ ^>o), Targ. p3"ini; 24, 15 nyiD ny ny to the sixth hour I As a whole the translation, though not a strictly literal one, repre- sents fairly the general sense of the original. Disregarding variations which depend presumably upon a various reading, the translation deviates from INIT. {a) by slight and usually unimportant additions 1 So 29, 3. II 13, 23 Pesh. (but not Targ.) ; Gen. 24, 55 Onq. (but not Pesh.) ; Nu. 9, 22 Onq. and Pesh. * Cf. LXX d(paip(/^a. The explanation underlying these renderings is, in all probability, correct : D''"in is io lift off, nOlin that which is lifted off, or separated, from a larger mass for the purpose of being set apart as sacred (cf. p. 236). ^ ' Syrus in eandem sententiam de verbis *iyiD ny Ty abiit, quam de illis Rabbini statuerunt, Berach. 62'' noN lyiD ny 'NO nyiD ny nyi "ip^nro ny Tonn no'n-^* nykj'o xrjn "n n^Dcn w^n m n'^jnn sno ^Nim* rroD mi'n ny icn pnr 'n inpni nyc'. chaidaeus ergo (D"'3jnroi p'^V P ponon nyi NTI^n) prlmam, Syrus alteram secutus est sententiam ' (Perles, p. 16). § 4- 3- Characteristics of the PesJiifto of Samuel Ixxiii or glosses : {b) by omissions, due often either to b^oioTiXi.vTov, or to an inability to understand the sense of the Hebrew : {c) by paraphrases, due sometimes likewise to an inability to give a literal rendering, and occasionally of a curious character. Specimens of these three classes : {a) Additions: I 2, 13 (and they made themselves a prong of three teeth) and the right of the priests (they took) from the people; 35 a priest faithful (after My own heart); 4, 9 end-io and fight (with them). And the Philistines fought (with Israel) ; 5, 8 (thrice) + the Lord; 7, 14 to Gath and their borders [ns neglected], and (the Lord) delivered Israel, etc.; 8, 6 to judge us (like all the peoples); 12 + and captains of hundreds . . . and captains of tens; 12, 6 the Lord (alone is God,) who, etc.; 24 + and with all your soul; 14, 49 + and Ashboshul (= Ishbosheth^); 23, 12 end+Kxist, go out from the city ; 24, 20 and when a man finds his enemy and sends him [in/d treated as a continuation of the protasis] on a good way, (the Lord reward him with good); 30, 15 ^«^+and David sware unto him (cf. Luc). II 6, 5 of (cedar and) cypress; 12, 8 and thy master's wives (have I let sleep) in thy bosom; 18, 4 beginning + knd his servants said to David, We will go out and hasten to fight with them ; 8 and (the beasts of) the wood devoured of the people, etc. (so Targ.); 20 Kt. for (thou wilt announce) respecting the king's son that he is dead; 20, 8 end and it came out, and (his hand) fell (upon his sword); 24, 7 and they came to the land of Judah (in thirty-eight days) [text disordered]. There are also many instances of the addition of the subj. or obj. of a verb, or of the substitution of a noun for a pron. suffix (' Explicita '), of which it is not worth while to give examples. In 2 Sam. 22 the text has generally been made to conform with that ofi/^. 18. {b) Omissions: I 3, 21 I^K'a ^X1?0C;>^ """• n^JJ '•D ^. 5, 10 NH^ \T"I pipy D^•^^N^ jiinI 12, 2 •j^nna 17 ^"^ ^jd^ nn^'^v ic'n. 13, 4* iyn*tr -iDN^. 14, I Dvn M''i. 34 Dribxi. 35^ from br\T\ iriN. 36a rb'h. 36b from -iDN''v 15, 2 1^ n^ nc'N^ 32 njnsiD ::x r^N nij^i*. 16, ' Pesh. identifies Ishui with Abinadab (see 31, 2). ''' Probably through o/xoioTiAevTov. " Probably not understood. Ixxiv Introduction i5b_i6a -13ns* . . . n:. ir)b D'ln^x. 17, n n^sn. 13 yoo*::©*:*!*.© for nrsn^rDn i^i-n ib'n vn •n^'?^ on. 14^. 22 -idic:'. 31 nri. 39 -n^DJ . . . nos^i^ 45''ntrx^ 18, 9^ ns^ni. 23, iib-i2a icnm '!?1NB' .... 24, 20b (abbreviated =*). 25, 30 nan "lU'wS ^D3^ 33 end^ [cf. the paraphr. in 26]. II i, 21 "-^a. 8, 14 Dnxa and DnV3 Dti'. 13, 12k 18 (the whole verse '). 15, 18 {i>"'N niND ^V. 20 f^tf i^a*, for riDNi non ^ryl 24 p-ix nx ipv'i dm^nh nna'. 27 nns ^Nn^^ 18, 2b-3a (o N2fn Ni> NVN xv^) '. 3 n^ ir^N .... inc^ dsi "•3 \ 2ib, 26a (first five words). 19, 18 (first four words). 21. 6 *"'' Tna. 24, 6a (6b follows at the end of z*. 7). 23 I^Dn. (t) Paraphrases (including some due to a mistranslation or to a faulty text): I 2, 17 (see p. Ixxii). 22 paK'^ ^t::>._vs. 24 Cin''3j;D ^ * \j^^.vi . 25. 29 \'\'^ from the wilderness. 30 "'J3^ JIDi'nn'' should minister before me. 32 jiyio nv fiDnm (31 there shall not be an old man in thy house) or one holding a sceptre in thy dwelling. 3, 13 VJ3 Dni? D''^^pD ''3 Ui^ii. -oicULs ^^ot oooi ^*;-i>._50?. 4, 2 COni Jooto. 6, 6b and how ///rj/ mocked them, and did not send them away. 10, 22 IJ'iN xhr\ "tiy Nan where is this man? 12, 3a ^jjn behold, I stand before you. 3b ojjso/ o^ wOa-V 1».o U ^^''J? D>^ytO wJi».. 6. 13, 4 CS*33 ^;si«. 6 nyn biJ '3 l!? "i:» O simply ci^«.?o and they feared. 7 ^;/^ inns* mn simply ot-vi.'^. 12 Tf^n N^ fc^Ju. )). 14, 7b 133^3 »ri.x ^-%N->» '^. 24a And Saul drew near in that day, and said to the people. Cursed, etc. 25a And they went into all the land, and entered into the woods. 16, 4 mrT*"! cuiajo. 6 in"'K'0 "'"'' liJ IS* om**ax> )-i."so? o»laa/. 19 end \^^1 ■^^^^{ w^ ...a... 20 Dn7 (and laded it with) bread. 17, i8b v^ J]^/ yOo»l»iu»o (cf. Targ. TlTl fina''D n"'1, and the doublet in Luc. Kai eio-oto-ets /u-ot t^v dyycAiW avTwv). 39 03? PX^I and would not go. 52 "iyn''1 aa:^^Uo. 18, 22 nCN^ d!?3 wofc*/ i» the son of Jesse (!). 20, 12 n'^'^b^n ^*S^ tOsLfcJiik at the third hour : so 19 for nc^ti'1. 26 Nin ninu ^D^^a ■niiiD X? ''3 perhaps he is clean, or perhaps he is not clean. 21, 6 ^ oo» ^l^^.'io U=>»ais (as though 1J^ niify n^N!): see also 21, 14. 16. 22, 19 (3J nN1 ). 6, 16 (-13-1301 nSO U^l^s^-^o \IL^). 2iK 7, 23b. 8, 13a. II, 25 (a-inn 73Xn it happens in war!). 12, 25 ^« in his mind). 14, 7. 17 (i^C?^)- 20* (/// mihi [""^S] morem gereres: PS. col. 279). 24. 30. 32^. 15, 19. 32. 34. 16, i. 2 (no U^-./ ^). 4 (TT'innc'n w^ fc^/ '-«^»)- 8^. 21^ 17, 10 (fmisoU^io U a*fiaj!o]<^j» will not melt). 16^. 20 (see note). 18, 5^ (take me the young man Absalom alive). 18. 29. 33 [19, i Heb.] (inb33 for 103^3). 19, 9^(10^). 17 (Heb. 18: in^^l they have crossed and 5n'dged Jordan). 31 (32) end. 35 (36 )l»)k*.o ]'*U*, i.e. Dnb' nnbi!). 20, 8 (n-iynn l^i:^?^;^ ^/). 18^. 19a. 21, 2^ (in his zeal to cause the Israelites to sin). 5. 23, i (Saith the man who set up the yoke [by Dipn] 0/ his Messiah!). 8. 11 (mn )«a!^.ao ia^ ^.so 0/ the mountain of the king : so 25 for mnn). 19. 22. 23 (1nyDt^'D i'X to go out and to come in). 33a (n-inn )l^I) »q^ ^"*»?)' ^4' ^S'*^- ^^' ^5 ("i^iyi pK^ "i"'' bk»/ ^'i^s.x )...iiD w.:i>^l|o: not so elsewhere). The Syriac text of Pesh. sometimes (as might indeed be anticipated from the nature of the character) exhibits corruptions, similar to those noticed in the case of LXX, p. Ivii f. Thus I i, 21 a*o,..va.^ for Q.<^-2o (-"^o at the beginning has fallen out). 3, 14 o . . , \t.^T for ? . . . fcs-oo/ (Heb. iny^tJ'J). 19 >!>^*-o for 04.-0 (Heb. hj^l). 9, 4 Ji^joa*,^? for JwAi^J (Heb. T\^h^^). 12, 21 U? yoloaol probably for ^»la.» U? (Heb. I^'^yi^ N^ "IC'N : notice the 1 Comill, Ezechiel, p. 144 f., exaggerates the extent to which this MS. may have been corrected after MT. : its approximations to MT. (p. 140 flf.) are slight, com- pared with the cases in which it agrees with other MSS. against it (p. 148 ff.). Comp. Rahlfs, ZATW. 1889, pp. 180-192. 2 Which, in the Books of Samuel, and in certain parts of Kings, is based upon the Pesh. : see Roediger, De orig. et indole Arab. libr. V. T. hist, interpr. (1829). ' So Tuch on Gen. 10, 6, and PS. coll. 681-2, 741. Comp. 2 Ki. 4, 42 Pesh. {jwh^ connected similarly with C'^K', D'CvK', commonly represented in Pesh. Ixxvi Introduction following ptcp. for 1^^^'> xh). 17, 20 )l**i^ for 1L«^ (so Cod. Ambr.). 40 )Li ^>o for ]LJ ^..m5 (Heb. ^n:n-p). 28, 6 rClL-ass for rtt^ prob. for \L^L2> (Heb. -iVa). (Several of these instances are noted by Well., p. 8.) The name y\i2 is represented regularly by ojj. 4. The Latin Versions. {a) The affinity subsisting between the Old Latin Version and the recension of Lucian appears to have been first distinctly per- ceived (with reference in particular to the Lamentations) by Ceriani ^ Afterwards, it was noticed, and frequently remarked on, by Vercellone, as characteristic of the excerpts of the Old Latin Version on the margin of the Leon Manuscript (above, p. Hi), that, when they diverged from the ordinary Septuagintal text, they constantly agreed with Holmes' four MSS. 19, 82, 93, 108, which, as was clear, represented on their part one and the same recension^. A version identical with that represented in the excerpts was also, as Vercellone further pointed out, cited by Ambrose and Claudius of Turin ^ The conclusion which the facts observed authorize is thus that the Old Latin is a version made, or revised, on the basis of MSS. agreeing closely with those which were followed by Lucian in framing his recension ■*. The Old Latin must date from the second cent. a. d. ; hence it cannot be based upon the recension of Lucian as such : its peculiar interest lies in the fact that it affords independent evidence of the existence of MSS. containing Lucian's characteristic readings (or renderings), considerably before the time of Lucian himself ^ The following comparison of passages from the Old Latin Version of I and 2 Sam., derived from one of the sources indicated above (p. lii f), and all presupposing a text differing from that of the * Monumenta Sacra et Profaiia, I. i (1861), p. xvi {Addenda). ^ Variae Lcctiones, ii. 436 (and in other passages). s lb. p. 455 f. (on 3 Reg. 2, 5). * Comp. Ceriani, Le recejisiotii dei LXX, etc., p. 5. ^ Rahlfs (iii. 159 f.) agrees with Ceriani and S. Berger {Hist, de la Vtilg., p. 6) in questioning this conclusion (cf. Moore, AJSL. xxix. 60), on the ground that there is no sufficient evidence for the early date assigned to the Leon fragments by Vercel- lone : he thinks rather that the resemblances shew them to be later than Lucian. §4- 4- Characteristics of the Old Latin Version Ixxvii normal LXX, but agreeing with that of Lucian, will shew the justice of this conclusion. Although, however, the text upon which the Old Latin is based agrees largely with that of Lucian, it must not be supposed to be identical with it : there are passages in which it agrees with B or A, or with other MSS., against Lucian ^ Sometimes moreover, it is to be observed, other particular INISS. agree with the Old Latin, as well as those which exhibit Lucian's recension. A more detailed inquiry into the sources of the Old Latin Version of the OT. must be reserved for future investigators. (The list is not an exhaustive one. The words printed in heavy type are those in which Lucian's text differs from B. In the passages marked t, the deviation is confined to the MSS. which exhibit Lucian's recension, and is not quoted — at least by Holmes and Parsons — for other MSS. The quotations will also illustrate the variations prevailing between different recensions of the Old Latin.) I I, 6 Goth, quia ad nihilum reputabat Luc. Sid to €^ov9ev€iv airt^v (for earn. HDynn "lUV^). So 55, 158 ; and similarly {Ji^ovQivovacC) 44, 74, 106, 120, 134. ^ I 4, 12 Vind.^ Et cucurrit. BA koX 'dSpafifv (Luc. Kal t Spvjxcv 'Kippaiji (Luc. iv to) Sp. Maatvav) . 9 Vind.2 Et occurrit Absalom. 'RA.Kaiavvr]vrriatvPi..{\^xxc.Kai?jv fxiyas k.). Nor does the Old Latin express Lucian's doublets in I 2, 11. 6, 12. 10, 2 {piearjtx- fipiai). 27''. 15, 29. 32. Sometimes, however, his doublets do occur in it, as I i, 6 G. 16 G. (not V.'O. 4, 18 G. 6, 7 G. (not V.»). 16, 14 G. 27, 8 G. 12, 25 Goth, apponemini in plaga. 14, 20 Vind.2 Et exclamavit. 17, I W'lDl DDN Goth. Sepherme. II 18, 6 Vind.« in silvam Efre. Ixxviii Introduction I 2, lo Vind.'' + quia iustus est. 15 Vind.^ + ante Domirmm. 3, 14 Sab. et nunc sic iuravi. Vind.'* et ideo sic iuravi. 6, 12 Vind.^ in viam . . . rectam. 9, 27 Vind.* in loco summo civitatis. 10, 3 Goth, usqne ad arborem glan- dis electae. Vind.^ ad arborem Thabor alectae (i. e. electae). 12,3 Goth, aut calceamentum, et ab- scondam oculos meos in quo dici- tis adversuna me, et reddam vobis. Sab. vel calceamentum, dicite ad- versus me, et reddam vobis. 14, 14 Goth, in bolidis et petrobolis et in saxis campi. Vind.2 in sagittis et in fundibolis et in muculis campi. 14, 15 Goth, et ipsi nolebant esse in laboribus. 15, II Sab. Quedl. verba mea non statuit. 17, 39 Goth, et claudicare coepit am- bulans sub armis. 18, 21 Goth, in virtute eris mihi ge- ner hodie. 20, 30 Goth. Filius puellamm va- gantium, quae se passim coinqui- nant esca mulierum. 27, 8 Goth. Et apponebant se super omnem appropinquantem, et ex- lendebant se super Gesur. 30, 15 end (in the current Vulg.) et iuravit ei David. Luc. SiKaios oiv. So other MSS., among them 44, 55, 71, 74, 120, 134, 144, 158, 246. Luc. «vu)iriov Kvpiov. So other MSS., among them 44, 55, 71, 74, 120, 134, 158. No Greek MS. is cited with the reading therefore for pb, all having ouS' (or Dvx) ourcoj (see note). Luc. tv TpiPo) tvGeicjfj-. Luc. (Is aKpov TTJs irdAfo)?'!". Luc. «tUS TTJS SpVUS TTJS €K\€KTfjS *. 246 ecus TTJs Spvus Qafiwp Trji (KKeKrfjs. Luc. Tj iiTTodrj/xa, Kal dTr€Kpvij;a tovps 64>9aX|xo'U5 [lov «v aviTu ; (inaTt Kar ip-ov, Kal diToSuao} vpiv ■)■. So also (with Kdp.ol for Kar' i/xov) Theodoret., Qitaest. 16 in i J\eg. Luc. kv jioKiai Kal \Locriv auTM (121 marg. «at w. avTw AavtS. So Pesh.). * "13n being connected with Tl3 to choose out : see II 22, 27. •• In 9, 4 (per terram Sagalim et non invenerunt) Quedl. agrees also with 123, not with Lucian (who has hid. t^v 7^? PaSSi. ttjs iroXeus ^(yaKtifi : cf. 56 FaSSi T^j iroKtais alone). §4- 4- Characteristics of the Old Latin Version Ixxix II I, 19 Goth. Cura te (al. curare), Is- rael, de interfectis tuis. Sab. Considera, Israel, pro his qui mortui sunt. 2, 8 Goth. Isbalem. 2, 29 Magd. in castra Madiam *. 6, 12 Sab. Dixitque David, Ibo at reducam arcam cum benedictione in domum meam, 7, 8 Goth. Accepi te de casa pas- torali ex uno grege. 9, 6 Goth. Memphibaal. 10, 19 Vind.'j'^ omnes reges qui con- venerunt ad [Vind.^ cum] Adrazar . . . et disposuerunt testamentum coram [Vind.^ cum] Israel, et ser- vierunt Israhel [Vind.^ Israeli tri- bus]. 11, 4 Goth, et haec erat dimissa " [Alias et haec erat abluta] excelso loco. Vind.2« jjaec autem lota erat post purgationem. II, 12 Vind.2^ redi hie. II, 13 Vind.') * inebriatus est. ii,i6Vind.S^ in locum pessimum ubi sciebat etc. II, 17 Vind.^ et caecidit Joab de po- pulo secundum praeceptum Davit. II, 24 Goth, de servis regis quasi viri XVIII. 13, 21 Vind.2 et deficit animo valde''. 13, 32 Vind.^ in ira enim est ad [?eum] Abessalon. 14, 26 Goth. Vind.' centum. Luc. 'AKpCpaaai, 'laparjX, vnip kt\. (106 uKpiPcvaai arT]Kajcrai)f. So Theo- doret., Qteaest. in 2 Reg. Cod. 93 (but not 19, 82) EtVPaaX. Luc. fis Ttapifi.fioXas Ma8ia|ji. So 158. Luc. Kai etire AaviS 'E-irio-Tpeij/to ttiv etiXoYiav tis tov oikov jjiov. So 158. Luc. I« T^y ftavSpai «£ Ivos t«v iroiji- VlCl>V "t". Luc. Mifj.(Spov avrr}s. So the Ethiopic Version** and Pesh. Not cited from any I. e. y^ for y^ f. Greek MS. Luc. ipii9v Kal SU9. dia6. added to riuTOfioXrjaav on the marg. of B. by an ancient hand. " Based evidently on XtXv/xfi'T] for kfXovixfvr]. BA ayia^ofxevT]. ^ Which is based on the LXX ; see p. 1, n. 3. " There are lacunae in these passages in Vind.^ ' Unless indeed redi be an error for sede : cf. sedit in clause fi. 8 ' Verba Tiiv novovyra eleganter vertunt Ilebracum V'T'^ "ItJ'N [pro VT* '^ti'N] ' (Dr. Field). ^ Goth, ei iratus foetus est agrees here with B «ot (Ov/x^Otj. Ixxx Introduction II 15, 23 Goth, et omnis terra bene- ciiccntes voce magna \Jacund\ per viam olivae, quae erat in deserto. 17. 8 Goth, sicut ursus qui a bove \_Alias ab aestu : /. ab oestro] stimulatur in campo. 17, 13 Goth, ut non inveniatur ibi conversatio. Vind.- ut non inveniatur tumulus fundamenti. 17, 20 Vind.2 festinanter transierunt prendere aquam ; (et inquisierunt) etc. 17, 22 Sab. . . . et antequam denu- daretur verbum . . . 17, 29 Goth, et lactantes vitulos. Vind. 2 et vitulos saginatos. 18, 2 Vind.'' Et tripartitum fecit Davit populum. 18, 3 Vind.2 non stabit in nobis cor nostrum. 20, 8 Goth, gladium rudentem (/. bidentem, We.). 20, 23 Goth. Et Baneas filius Joab desuper lateris et in ponentibus (/. potentibus). 23, 4 Goth, et non tenebrescet a lu- mine quasi pluvia, quasi herba de terra "•. 23, 6 Goth, quoniam omnes qui ori- untur sicut spinae, et reliqui quasi quod emungit de lucema. 23, 8 Goth. lesbael filius Thegemani . . . hie adornavit adomationem suam super nongentos vulneratos in semel. Luc. KoX naaa f] 777 euXo-yovvTfs T| f . Luc. Ai€\T|Xv9acri o-n-ev5ovT€S" ical «^ij- TOVV\'. Luc. 610S ToO jxYJ diroKaX\j<|)0-fivai tov Xoyov, OTJTCJS Sif^rjaav tuv 'Iop5di/j;c"t". Luc. Koi ■yaXaOT)vd p-ocrxapia. So 158. Luc. Koi €TpiTiKt]. 158 ^ax- ^v- (jTOfxov (/. Slarofiov) dfi(pTjKT). Luc. Kal Bavaias v'ws 'IcDaSSat firt tov irXivOiov Kal (TTi Toiis BvvdcTTas f. So (except BwaToiis) Theodoret., Quaest. 40 in 2 Reg. Luc. Kal oti o-KOTdo-€i [so other MSS., among them 44, 56, 158, 246] duo (peyyovs d)S v€t6s, u)S PoTdvT) fK yrjs. Luc. oTi irdvTes 01 dvareXXovres ojcrirfp aKavda, Kal ol Xoi-irol us d7r6|xvY|Jia Xvxvou 'irdvT€si'. Luc. 'leo-paaX vios 0€Ke(i,avei . . . ovroi SieKocr^ei ttjv SiacrKevT)/ avrdv inl ivvaKoaiovs rpavfxaTias els airaf f. (5) On the general characteristics of Jerome's Version of the OT., reference must be made to the monograph of Nowack, referred to above (p. liii). A synopsis of the principal deviations from the Massoretic text presupposed by it in the Books of Samuel, is given * But 23, 3 agrees partly with BA : In me locutus est ciesios Israel paralwlam Die hominibus. § 4* 4* Characteristics of the Old Latin Version Ixxxi ib. pp. 25-27, 35, 37. 38, 50; the most important are also noticed, at their proper place, in the notes in the present volume ^ The following instances (which could easily be added to) will exemplify the dependence of Jerome in exegesis upon his Greek predecessors, especially Symmachus : — I I, 18 my rh Vn ^ 2. (ou) SLerpdrrr] (m), Vulg. non Sunt amplius in diversa mutati. 2, 5 v"!n 2. dv€v8e€t<; iyevovTO, V. saturati sunt. 5, 6 Dv3y3 2. Kara twv K/3V7rTwv -, V. in secretiori parte. 6, 1 8 ^)'\zr[ "123 lyi 2. ews kw/av^s dreixfo-Tov, V. usque ad villam quae erat absque muro ^. 9, 24 "IJJIO? 2. cTrt'rr^Se?, V. de industria. 12, 3 \~iiin "AAAos" i(TVKO(fidvT7]o-a, V . calumniatus sum'*. 22 •''*''' ^>Xin '•3 V. quia iuravit ^ Dominus. 14, 48 (^Ti) cyi "AAAos* crvcTTrjcrdfjLevo's, V. congregato (exercitu). 20, 41 i5n:n nn ny 2. Aai^iS 8e vTrepi^aXXev, V. David autem amplius. 22, 6 PC'Sn A. Toi/ SevSpwm, 2- to (jivrov, V. (in) nemore. Simi- larly 31, 13. ^ The current (Clementine) text contains many passages which are no genuine part of Jerome's translation, but are glosses derived from the Old Latin (marked *), or other sources. The following list of such passages (taken from Vercellone, Variae Lectiones, ii. pp. ix-xiii) is given for the convenience of students: — I 4, I to pugnam* ; 5, 6 from et ebullierutU* ; 9 from inierunt*; 8, 18 from quia*; 9, 25 from stravitf; 10, i from et liberabis*; 11,1 to mensem*; 13, 15 ^/ reliqui . . . Benjamin*; 14, 22 from Et eraiit*; 41 Domine Dens Israel and quid est . . . sancti- tatem*; 15, 3 et non . . . aliquid*; 12^-13* Saul offerebat . . . ad Saul*; 32 et tremens*; 17, 36 Ntmc* . . . ineircumeisus ; 19, 21 from £t iratus*; 20, 15 from atiferat*; 21, 11 cu/n vidissent David ('ex ignoto fonte'); 23, 13-14 et salvatus . . . opaco ; 30, 15 ^/ iuravit ei David* ; II i, 18 from et ait, Considera*; 26 from Siciit mater; 4, 5 from Et ostiaria ; 5, 23 Si . . . meas ; 6, 6 et declinaverunt earn; 6, 12 from et erant ; 10, 19 expaverunt . . .Israel. Et ; 13, 21 from et noluit*; 27 from Fecerat*; 14, 30 from Et venientes ; 15, 18 pugnaiores validi ; 20 et Dominus . . . veritatem ; 21,18 de genere gigantum. ^ Comp. Mic. 4, 8 PDJ? ^.dwuKpvcpos. * Comp. Dt. 3, 5. * Comp. Amos 4, i calnmniam facitis. ' See Ex. 2, 21 bXVI 2. ujpKiae 5t, V. iuravit ergo, which shews the source of iuravit iiere. 1265 g Ixxxii Introduction I 23, 13 la^nn^ ■^C'Nn lai'nnM 2. Kal e>p€>/3ovTO OTrovSiyTrorc \ 26 D^itoy Ot XoiTvoi irepL(TT€(f>avovvTis, V. in modum coronae cingebant. 25, 3 DvPyD I?"i 2. KaKoyvwfxwv, V. (pessimus et) malitiosus. 7 DiJDPin ab 2. (oiik) ci/w;^X7^o-a/A£i/ (avTovs), V. numquam eis molesti fuimus. 18 D"'p1D^* 2. cvSecr/Aovs crTa^iSos, V. ligaturas uvae passae. So 30, 12. 29 mi"li* 2. 7re(f)vXay fxevr], V. CUStodita. 31 npID? A. 2. (eis) Auy/xdv, V. in singultum. 33 yK'ini 2. iKSiKrjcrai, V. et ulciscerer (me manu mea). 26, 5 bi]}^2 2- (ev TT7) (TKiqvfi, V. in tentorio. 27, I nnS DT" nSDN 2- TrapaTrea-ov/xai ttotc, V, Aliquando inci- dam una die. 30, 16 CB'tDJ 2. dvaTrcTTTCDKOTcs, V. discumbebant. II 2, 16 D''"lXn np?n A. 2- KXrjpo'i twv a-Tep^Cyv, V. ager robus- torum. 8, 2 nnjo ^Nu>: 2. vtto <^o>oi/, V. sub tribute. 10, 6 nnS 1k^*N33 2. iKaKovpyrjo-av Trpos Aai^tS, V. quod iniuriam fecissent David. 12, 14 n^►NJ Y^^ ■^- /^Xaa-^jirjp-ricrai. eVotr^cra? (the Other versions all differently), V. blasphemare fecisti. 15, 28 njsnonJO 2. Kpv/3y(rop.aL, V. abscondar. 18, 23 "132n "]1T Ot r'. (Kara Tr]v oSov) ttjv Siare/tj/ovo-av, V. per viam compendii. Three examples, shewing how Jerome followed Aq. or Symm. in dividing artificially a Hebrew word (p. xl «. 2), may be added — the last being of peculiar interest, as it explains a familiar rendering of the Authorized Version : — ij/. 16, I IH/' DnSD A. Tov TaTreLv62 , •'jxin . •ii . p^i*>n . bo . "'jyu-n . o . yc 4 ixa . j^^DD . 5]3xv . •i:) . p-i . p" . 3XD . nx . 1:^1 . ^xic''' . i^d . "i 5 5 . "icx . '^''2 I 3XJD . nx . "ijyx . xn . d: . -i?:x^i . nn , r]th>n>^ I n^* 6 [nx] nx . n»y . u'n^i . D^y . lax . nnx . ^xTtr^i 1 nnnni . na . xixi 7 ii^'^i . nc' . fyaix . nn . ■'r^'- . ''i*ni . no'' . nn . 3l*"'1 i xmnD . }• 8 pxi . mo'xn . nn . cyxi . wobv^ . nx . pxi 1 "'n'-a . ::'dd . n2 9 "• . I^D . n^ . pM . n^yo . nioy . }nxn . nt^"' . n: . cxi 1 |nnp . nx 10 [o] . D]in . b . nx . nnxi I mnxi , "ipn . Dnn^xi 1 moy . nx . i^xnc' 1 1 [d]xi . ni)! . ^xix . nx . D'JD . TJ'xi I 3X0^ . c^o^l? . nn . npn 12 K'x , nxi . pB* . E'x . nx . nn . nti'xi I nnpa . cdd . "^^tb . nnn 13 XT I ^xTk^'"' . b]} . ni: . nx . inx . ib , :i>n3 . ^b . nt:x^i 1 nnno 14 iixi I Din^M . iy . nnncn . ypno . nn . cnn^xi . rhbi , "j^n 15 [n:]i . nnnji 1 pji . n[n]3 . )d^x . nynt^ . rib . nnxi . nr 16 [3 . n]x . ni:'D . npxi I nnonnn . K^m . nnc^y^ . '•3 1 nonm . n 17 nx . r\:2 . ^x-i:^'' . i^ni 1 d'cd . ••jd^ . on . nnoxi . n'ir\'> . '•^ 18 [1 ']32o . c-'D3 . nc'-iri I ^n . ni^nnba . nn , 2^^) . |'n* 19 . nrnxi . |*n^n . nxt;>xi 1 nc'-i . b . c'x . fnx» . nxcn . npx 20 ncm . ny\-i . non . nnip . •'n:n . i^x 1 pn . ^y . nsD^ 21 XI I nnHjD . ''njn . i3xi . nnytj' . ''njn . n:xi 1 byn 22 nnpn . p[r2^ . mje'xn . 'b . "icn^~ 32 c^y . D^D . m ^yi . ^du . b'dd . n3[::'^i] 33 JN1 I pncr . nc' 34 1. I am Mesha' son of Chemosh[kan ?], king of Moab, the Da- 2. -ibonite. My father reigned over Moab for 30 years, and I reign- 3. -ed after my father. And I made this high place for Chemosh in QRHH, a [high place of sal-] 4. -vation, because he had saved me from all the assailants (?), and because he had let me see my pleasure on all them that hated me. Omr- 5. -i king of Israel afflicted Moab for many days, because Chemosh was angry with his la- 6. -nd. And his son succeeded him ; and he also said, I will afflict Moab. In my days said he th[us ;] 7. but I saw my pleasure on him, and on his house, and Israel perished with an everlasting destruction. And Omri took possession of the [la-] 8. -nd of Mehedeba, and it (i.e. Israel) dwelt therein, during his days, and half his son's days, forty years ; but [resto-] 9. -red it Chemosh in my days. And I built Ba'al-Me'on, and I made in it the reservoir (?) ; and I built 10. Qiryathen. And the men of Gad had dwelt in the land of 'Ataroth from of old ; and built for himself the king of I- 11. -srael 'Ataroth. And I fought against the city, and took it. And I slew all the people [from] 12. the city, a gazingstock unto Chemosh, and unto Moab. And I brought back {or, took captive) thence the altar-hearth of Davdoh {or } ^'T\'^ its (divine) guardian), and I drag- 13. -ged it before Chemosh in Qeriyyoth. And I settled therein the men of shrn, and the men of 14. MHRTH. And Chemosh said unto me, Go, take Nebo against Israel. And I 15. went by night, and fought against it from the break of dawn until noon. And I too- The Inscription of Meshd Ixxxvii 1 6. -k it, and slew the whole of it, 7,000 men and male sojourners, and women and [female sojourner-] 17. -s, and female slaves: for I had devoted it to 'Ashtor-Cheraosh. And I took thence the [ves-] 18. -sels of Yahweh, and I dragged them before Chemosh. And the king of Israel had built 19. Yahaz, and abode in it, while he fought against me. But Chemosh drave him out from before me ; and 20. I took of Moab 200 men, even all its chiefs; and I brought them up against Yahaz, and took it 21. to add it unto Daibon. I built qrhh, the wall of Ye'arim (l, cf. i_iJiJ>, and Is. 9, 9.— nif i.e. Ahab.— i^n, p. XXX. — NH Dj, as Jud. 3, 31. 6, 35 al. — ijyx, i.e. 1?y^. — :d, probably n33 (i Ki. i, 48). JIN'D (Jud. 8, 8) would, as Hebrew, be preferable : but there seems not to be room for more than two letters \— 7. nil N^NI ^. 118, 7.— D^j? 1?N lilX,— D^y as i/r. 89, 2. 3. 38 {poetically for D^yb). Or possibly D^y inx n3K; cf. Jer. 51, 39. — "•'iDy tJ'lM, as a plup. sense is required, this by the principles of ^ Smend and Socin imagined that they could read "1313 ; but the traces are far too indistinct to make it probable, in view of the close general similarity of the two languages, that what is impossible in Hebrew (it should be ntH ">313 or DHQID nt'Nri) was possible in Moabitic. xc Appendix Heb. syntax should be B*!^ noyi. Or, perhaps, B'l^l should be read. —8. i^'y^^'O, in Heb. nnn>D._n?D\ i. e., if the n be correct, TOJ (for yamaihu, i. e. VO^) : of. the same rare form in Hebrew (see on I Sam. 14, 48; and Wright, Comp. Gramni. p. 158). The original n (Stade, § 113. 4) is seen (though not heard) in the Aram. wwo-. The same phrase occurs Jer. 17, \\.— Forty years. On the chronological difficulty involved, see EB. iii. 3047. It is relieved, though not entirely removed, by reading, with Nordlander and Winckler, ^31 (like ni?^) his sons (i. e. Ahaziah and Jehoram), instead of nb2 his son's. — 8-9. 09^1^- = the letters supplied were conjectured cleverly by Noldeke in 1S70, and have been generally accepted. — 9. pxi. — niB'Nn, prop, depression (cf. ^O^K'), pit^ perhaps an excavation used for the storage either of provisions, arms, etc., or (cf. line 23) of water. Cf. n^K^S Ecclus. 50, 3 Heb., of Simon, son of Onias : n-ja; \'\r\ii IK'K iJbnn [rd. D*?] on n^K'X nipr? = ^V ^/te^ats ai^roO yiXaTTiLOrj [rd. IXaTOfJirfOr]] aiTo^o)(^'iov vSaTwr, ;j(aXKos [rd., with A, Aa/eTpov.— io. jn^li? (Nold.), in Heb. D^nnip.—E^NI (Jud. 20, 17, etc.). — rib, Heb. i^ — 11. Dnni^Sl from Dnn^n = Arab. Vni conj. — "ii?2 agaifis/ the city. — n'THNI. — 12. K'Oa^ nn ^ spectacle unto Chernosh: cf. Nah. 3, 6. Ez. 28, 17. — Either ntJ'NI (Jos. 14, 7), or (Clermont-Ganneau, Renan) If XI. — 7N")X, to be explained probably from Ez. 43, 15. 16 of the hearth of the altar, which was prized by the captors as a kind of ' spolia opima ' (Smend and Socin, p. 4). But this explanation is not certain. — nin , apparently the name, or title, of a god: cf. KAT? 225, 483 ; EB. \. 1126, 11 27. — 12-13. "^^CP?! Jer. 22, 19. 2 Sam. 17, 13. — 13. ^yy2 ^3Q^, cf. nin'' '•jsi? i Sam. 15, 33. 2 Sam. 21, 9.— 3B'S1: 2 Ki. 17, 24. — 14. And Chernosh said to ?ne, Go, take, etc. ; similarly 1. 32 : comp. Jos. 8, i ; Jud. 7, 9 ; i Sam. 23, 4; 2 Ki. 18, 25t>. — 14-15. V.^l^J, cf. Job 16, 22. 23, 8: in prose once (in 3 ps.) Ex. 9, 23.— 15. n^i?3 = Heb. nb^^i?. — yp3D, cf. Is. 58, 8: the ordinary Hebrew equivalent would be IHB'n DipVO. — 16. n?2, rnna, 7?ien, women. On the Clj), cf. on 2 Sam. i, 13. — 17. ^iteni? Jud. 5, 30: female slaves are probably meant. — 'Ashtor-Chemosh, ac- cording to Baethgen, Beitrdge, 254 ff.^, a compound deity, of a type ' Cf. pp. 39, 47 f., 84-7; so also G. A. Barton, in an article on 'West-Semitic Deities with Compound Names,' JBLzi. 1901, p. 22 ff. ; H. P. Smith in an art. on The Inscription of MeshcC xci of which other examples are cited from Semitic mythology. The male 'Ashtor is a South-Semitic deity, ib. i i7ff. ; cf. Encycl. of Religion and Ethics, \\. 115^ — \!'!"?"1[!]|[!' : see p. 131. — 17-18. "hSj:^ , n]s*, others supply ^^[xi]n, cf. 1. 12. Renan says that the last two letters of 1. 17 are quite ' dans la nuit,' and that '•73 DX ' garde toute sa probabilite.' Against ""^NIX he objects the absence of nx (contrast 1. 12), and the plural [contrast the sing. 1. 12). — 18. Dn (if, as seems to be the case, the reading is correct) must be a case of the independent pron. used as an accus., cf. Aram, ton (Ezr. 4, 10 etc.). — 19. nzi"3B'»1, i.e. he made it a po.st of occupation during his war with Mesha'. — nonnVnn, i.e. on the analogy of the inf. of the Arab. VIII, nbnnpn2: cf. the Heb. place-names yi^^Jpf?, ^NJjif? (see on i Sam. 30, 28).— nb'i:^! (provided }*n'' be masc). "'^DD ^'\i : Mesha' speaks of ^D2 in exactly the same terms which the Hebrew used of niiT, Dt. 33, 27. Jos. 24, 18.— 20. iriKO, in Heb. D^ns'^.— nkCTXi.— 21. nao^ (Nold.) from • Theophorons Proper Names in the OT.' in the Harper Metnorial Studies (1908), i. p. 48. Among the names cited are Milk-'Ashtart (JlinCySPC : Cooke, NSI. 10. 2-3), Eshmun-'Ashtart (mn::'y3n::'K : NSI. p. 49), mp^ttarDtrN {ib:), -nX:DD>« {CIS. I. i. 118), ^yaS^O and -|DNDbj3 {NSI. pp. 49, 103, 104), eiyinip^D {NSI. 150. 5), nip^OTXand n2m^ {UAih.Nordsein.Epigr.ii(y,i^>i); Atargatis (nnyiny : set PR E.^ or Encycl. of Religion and Ethics, s.\.); and the Bab. Adar-Malik, and Anu-Malik : in each case, a fusion of the personalities and characters of the deities named being supposed to have taken place. Baudissin, however, argues strongly that in all these cases the second name is in the genitive, so that we should render 'Ashtor of Chemosh, Eshmun of 'Ashtart, etc., the meaning being that 'Ashtor, for instance, was the associate of Chemosh, and worshipped in his temple {Adonis und Esmun, 191 1, pp. 259-66, 269, 274-9; cf. PRE.^ ii. (1897), 157, vii. 293 ; and Moore in EB. i. 737). Ed. Meyer {Der Papyrusftmd von Elephantine, 191 2, p. 62 f.) takes the same view. These Papyri exhibit other remarkable names of deities of the same type, viz. Pap. 18, col. 7. 5 ^Sn^D^K ; ib. 1. 6 ^NJT'anjy 'Anath-Bethel or 'Anath of Bethel [' Bethel ' being the name of a deity : cf. Pap. 34. 5 jnj'irT' "l3 fDJ^Nrr'n — the name formed exactly like \r\y\r\\ [flJ^K ; CIS. II. i. 54 •'J^n^Nrfa (cf. .T^"n) ; and KAT.^ 437 f.] ; Pap. 27. 7 7Xn''3rDin [Din another divine name ; cf. Pap. 34. 4 fnJOin fn3^Nn''2 13] ; and even (Pap. 32. 3) liTDjy 'Anath- Yahweh or Yahweh's 'Anath ('Anath as belonging to, or associated with, Yahweh). See further Sachau, Papyri aus . . . Elephantine (191 1), pp. 82-5; Meyer, pp. 57-65; Burney, Church Quarterly Review, July 191 2, pp. 403-6. It is now clear that in Zech. 7, 2 "tXKT^ PN"n''3 should be read as one word, 'And Bethelsarezer sent,' etc. xcii Appendix '^P^ Pointed irregularly by the Massorites ribp^ nbp^ Nu. 32, 14. Is. 30, I. — nVP //^^ w^^^/r, — probably the name of a place. — 22. ^C"^"!?'?.— 23. lijC na I Ki. 16, 18.— ^xfj? either both (Nold.), cf. ^^yS, h^^^:, or possibly ///d- locks or t/awj, from the root S'^3.— pc|) for water.— 26,. "12 «>/^r«.— jx = Heb. pN (Gen. 47, 13 ; cf. on i Sam. 21, 2).— 25. Probably nmsen (or nh-lDQn) a ciittmg (or cuttings) of some sort : the special application must remain uncertain. — C'N r\r\^'2.'2 13 ; for the custom of every house having its cistern, cf. 2 Ki. 18, 31, and, in the ancient Leja (see DB. i. 146), on the East of Jordan, Burckhardt, Travels in Syria (1822), p. iiof., cited by Thomson, The Land and the Book, Vol. on Lebanon, Damascus, and Beyond Jordan, p. 469, and ^^. i. 88.-25-6. nBS3._26. n^DrDn = Heb. n^p»n._2 7. nm nn, probably the same place as nV33 Nu. 21, 19; byi ni»3 22, 41. Jos. 13, 17.— Din I Ki. 18, 30.— HV Mic. 3, 12. — 28. Before ^, there is space for four or five letters. After py, r\^r\ (or.? T,)r\ Is. 16, 4) suggests itself naturally as the first word of 1. 28. The conjecture K'lII] has the support of 1. 20, and is the restoration usually accepted : but Hal^vy suggests ^\)Xi\ for K^[-|3], i.e. 'I built Bezer, for ruins it had become, ivith the help o/{d. 1. 25) fifty men of Daibon,' etc.— nyoc'O, see p. 182 7iote.—2^. If >n3^D 28-9 be correct (the 2 is not quite certain), the next word must almost necessarily be bv ■ the two letters for which space still remains may be trn (as exhibited in the translation). Lines 28-29 will then describe the number of chiefs, i.e. either heads of families, or warriors, over whom Mesha' ruled in Daibon itself (if di is right in 1. 28), and in the cities which he recovered.— ni?? in the cities (Clermont-Ganneau, Smend and Socin) : with what follows, cf. the expression used of Yahaz 11. 20-21.— 30. "IiHb, if the reading be correct,— pj is 'possible,' says Lidzbarski, though the letters seem to him to be yo,— will allude to the persons engaged in cultivating the breed of sheep, small and stunted in growth, but prized on account of their wool (see on Am. I, I in the Cambridge Bible), for which Moab was famous. It is the word which is actually used of Mesha' himself in 2 Ki. 3, 4.-32. Cf. ]. 14. With go down Clermont-Ganneau pertinently compares Jer. 48, 5 which speaks of the D^mn min or descent to Horonaim.— 33. No doubt n^EJ'M as 11. 8-9.— Haldvy proposes DK^ HT {jyi 'And The Inscription of Meshd xciii beside it there was set,' supposing the sequel to relate to a guard of twenty men ; but the sing, followed by [fiDt^' pjt^'y is difficult. The language of Moab is far more closely akin to Hebrew than any other Semitic language at present known (though it may be conjectured that the languages spoken by Ammon and Edom were approximately similar) : in fact, it scarcely differs from it otherwise than dialectically ^ In syntax, form of sentence, and general mode of expression, it is entirely in the style of the earlier narratives con- tained in the historical books of the OT. The vocabulary, with two or three exceptions, not more singular than many a aTra^ dprjfxevov occurring in the OT., is identical with that of Hebrew. In some respects, the language of the Inscription even shares with Hebrew distinctive features, as the waw conv. with the impf., ytJ'in to save, ntJ'y to make, D3, '2 HNI, tt'l^ to take in possession, nn, "Jd!?, the dual D"inv, Dnnn to ban, ^-\l, nnpn, and especially I'fX. It shares "JJN with Hebrew and Phoenician, against Aramaic, Arabic, and Ethiopic {x:n, Lil, hh). The most noticeable differences, as compared with Hebrew, are nxr noan (not riNrn as in Hebrew), the n of the fem. sg., and the ] of the dual (except in Din^f '^ 15) and plural, the D and \ of the plural both occurring only sporadically in the OT.^, the conj. nnn?n, Tp city, THiS II, 14 to take a city (Heb. 1?^); and the following words, which, though they occur in the OT., are not the usual prose terms, ^n 6 to succeed, J?p3 1 5 of the break of dawn, P^a and nnaa 16 (in a context such as the present, the normal Hebrew expression would be QitrJN and CD'J), n'^^Cl i7> ^'^'^ 20, 30. > By a happy instinct the truth was divined by Mr. (afterwards Sir George) Grove, six years before any Moabite document whatever was known, in his interesting article Moab, in Smith's Dictionary of the Bibte (p. 399*) "• 'And from the origin of the nation and other considerations we may perhaps conjecture that their language was more a dialect of Hebrew tlian a different tongue? 2 If this be really a dual, and not a notninal form in D -^p- : cf. GK. § 88"= (com- paring p. 2, below), and on the other side Konig, ii. p. 437, iii. § 257''. * The I 25 times, mostly dialectically, or late (GK. § 87" [add, as the text stands, 3 S. 21, 20] ; Stade, § 323*), and some doubtfultextuaily, 15 times being in Job, but even there irregularly (p^D 13 times, against DvO 10 times). On the T\ of the fem., see GK. § 80'. «. xciv Appendix The chief features of historical interest presented by the Inscription may be summarized as follows: (i) the re-conquest of Moab by Omri; (2) the fact that ]Mesha"s revolt took place in the middle of Ahab's reign, not after his death (as stated, 2 Ki. i, i); (3) particulars of the war by which Moab regained its independence ; (4) the extent of country occupied and fortified by Mesha' ; (5) the manner and terms in which the authority of Chemosh, the national deity of Moab, is recognized by Mesha' ; (6) the existence of a sanctuary of Yahweh in Nebo ' ; (7) the state of civilization and culture which had been reached by Moab at the end of the tenth century b.c. Sir George Grove, in the article referred to on the last page, writes (p. 396) : ' The nation appears ' from allusions in the OT.'^ * as high-spirited, wealthy, populous, and even, to a certain extent, civilized, enjoying a wide reputation and popularity .... In its cities we discern a " great multitude " of people living in " glory," and in the enjoyment of " great treasure," crowding the public squares, the house-tops, and the ascents and descents of the numerous high-places and sanctuaries, where the " priests and princes " of Chemosh minister to the anxious devotees .... In this case there can be no doubt that among the pastoral people of Syria, Moab stood next to Israel in all matters of material wealth and civilization.' This conclusion is confirmed by the Inscription, The length, and finished literary form, of the Inscription shew that the Moabites, in the ninth century b.c, were not a nation that had recently emerged from barbarism ; and INIesha' reveals himself in it as a monarch capable of organizing and con- solidating his dominions by means similar to those adopted by contemporary sovereigns in the kingdoms of Israel and Judah. ' The reading mn^ is quite certain ; the letters can be read distinctly on the plaster-cast of the stone in the British Museum. 2 Chiefly Is. 15—16; Jer. 48. Note on the Maps xcv NOTE ON THE MAPS The Maps in this volume have been drawn by Mr. B. V. Darbishire, of Oxford. The Map of the Pass of Michmas is reproduced, by permission, from a Map by Gustaf Dalman, the well-known Hebrew and Aramaic scholar, now Director of the German Evangelical Archaeological Institute in Jerusalem, in the ZDAIG. (see particulars in the note attached to the Map) : and the three Maps of Sections of Palestine are based upon Maps published by the Palestine Exploration Fund, and by Messrs. John Bartholomew & Co., of Edinburgh. In the three last-named Maps the coloured contours, geographical features, and modern sites, are reproduced (with permission) from the sources mentioned : the ancient sites have been repro- duced from them only after a careful examination of the data on which the determination of the sites depends, such as rest upon questionable or inconclusive grounds being marked by a query, while those which rest upon clearly insufficient grounds are omitted altogether. The identification of a modern with an ancient site depends mostly, it must be remembered, in cases in which the ancient name itself has not been unambiguously preserved, partly upon historical, but very largely upon philological considerations : and men who are admirable surveyors, and who can write valuable descriptions of the physical features, topography, or antiquities of a country, are not necessarily good philologists. Hence the f in. to the mile Map of Palestine containing ancient sites, published by the P. E. F., Bartholomew's Maps, and in fact current English Maps of Palestine in general (with the exception of those in the Encyclopaedia Biblica), include many highly questionable and uncertain identifications^. Maps described as being 'according to the P. E. F. Survey' are not better than others : the description is in fact misleading ; for the ' Survey ' relates only to the physical geography, and modern topography of the country : the ancient sites marked on such a map are an addition to what is actually determined by the ' Survey : ' the authority attaching to the ' Survey ' does not consequently extend to them at all ; and, as a matter of fact, many rest upon a most precarious basis. In the articles and notes referred to above (p. X «.), I have taken a number of names, including, for instance, Succoth and Penuel {Exp. Times, xiii. 457 ff.), Luhith (Is. 15, 5 ; ib. xxi. 495 ff.), and Ja'zer (Is. 16, 8, and elsewhere ; ib. xxi. 562 f.), and shewn in detail how very uncertain the proposed identifications are*. An example or two may be mentioned here. The compilers of the | in. to the mile P. E. F. Map, referred to above, mark on the SVV. of the Sea of Galilee the ^ On the principles which should regulate the identification of modern Arabic with ancient Hebrew place-names, the scholarly articles of Kampffmeyer, ZDPV. xv (1892), 1-33, 65-116, xvi (1893), 1-71, should be consulted. ' Guthe's beautiful and very complete Bibelatlas in 20 Haupt- tmd 28 Neben' karten (191 1) may be commended to English students as eminently instructive and scholarly. And the forthcoming Historical Atlas of the Holy Land, by G. A. Smith, is likely to prove in all respects adequate and trustworthy. xcvi Note on the Maps ' Plain of Zaanaim : ' Bartholomew, in the Map at the beginning of vol. i of Hastings' Dictionary of the Bible, does the same, and even goes further; for, both in this and in other maps designed by him, he inserts on the NW. of Hebron— in this case without the support of the P. E. Y. Map— the ' Plain of Mamre.' But both these 'plains' are purely imaginary localities; for, as every Hebrew scholar knows, though 'plain' is the rendering of ji^SI and p^N in AV., both words really mean a tree, most probably a terebinth or an oak, and they are so rendered in the Revised Version (Gen. 12, 6, etc.: Jos. 19, 33; Jud. 4, 11). On the other hand, the P. E. F. authorities, for some inscrutable reason, have never accepted Robinson's identification of Gibeah ( = Gibeah of Benjamin and Gibeah of Saul) with Tell el-Ful, 25 miles N. of Jerusalem 1 : it is accordingly, in the f in. to the mile map, not marked at this spot, but confused with Geba; and Bartholomew, in his maps, including even those edited by G. A. Smith 2, confuses it with Geba likewise. It is true, the two names have sometimes been accidentally interchanged in the Massoretic text ^ : but Is. 10, 29 shews incontrovertibly not only that they were two distinct places, but also, taken in conjunction with Jud. 19, 13, that Gibeah must have lain between Ramah and Jerusalem, very near the highway leading from Jerusalem to the North, which is just the position of Tell el-Ful. Unless, however, the relative positions of Gibeah and Geba are properly appre- hended, there are parts of the narratives of Jud. 19 — 20, and i Sam. 13 — 14, which it is impossible to understand. In the transliteration of modern Arabic place-names, I have endeavoured to insert the hard breathing (=p) and the diacritical points in accordance with either Buhl's excellent Geograpkie des alten Paldstina, or E. H. Palmer's Arabic and English Name Lists published by the P. E. F., though I fear I may not in all cases have secured entire accuracy. Still less, I am afraid, have I attained consistency in marking the long vowels. But I trust that these imperfections will not impair the usefulness of the Maps for those for whom they are primarily designed, viz. students of the history. The frequent Kh., I should add, stands for Khurbet { — TVIl'\r\\ ruzn, 7-mned site. ^ Comp. Grove's art. Gibeah in Smith's Diet, of the Bible, Stenning's art. Gibeah in DB., and below, p. 69. 2 Who himself adopts the Tell el-Ful site {ferusalem, ii. 92 w.). 2 The reader will do well to mark on the margin of his RV. Gibeah against Geba in Jud. 20, 33 ('on the west of Gibeah:' in v. 10 the correction is made already in EVV. ; in v. 31 put Gibeon against Gibeah), 1 Sam. 13, 3 (see 10, 5) ; and Geba against Gibeah in Jud. 20, 43. i Sam. 13, 2 (see v. 16). 14, 2 (see 13, i6\ 16; also, with a (?), against Gibeon, 2 Sam. 2, 24. In 2 Sam. 5, 25, on the other hand, Gibeon (LXX ; i Ch. 14, 16) is better than Geba; and in 2 Sam. 21,6 read probably (see the note ; and cf. v. 9) ' in Gibeon, in the mountain (in3) of Yahweh ' for ' in Gibeah of Saul, the chosen one (ira) of Yahweh.' NOTES ON THE BOOKS OF SAMUEL 1, I — 4, I*. Birth and yoiilh of Samuel. Announceinent of the fall of Ell's house. 1, I. ins tJ'^s] The same idiomatic use of nriN, especially with ^^, in the sense of a certain (man), quidam, as II i8, lo. Jud. 9, 53 nCfK nnN; 13, 2 m2» ia:ri ""nn nnst^rDD r\v\'^ nnx k'''K ^T1. i Ki. 13, n. 20, 13. 2 Ki. 4, I al. D^DIV DTlJDin] Grammatically indefensible. d^DIV cannot be a ptcp. in apposition with DTlDin; for this, being fem., would require nisix (cf. niDI D^ry 1/^. 18, 28 etc.), — not to say niSiSfn ; nor can it, as Keil supposes, be a genitive (!) after cnonn 'the two heights of the Zophites'.' LXX has 2€t. 27^'. 19,33". iKi.2,8'l4,i4'-; Q:n^1Uos. 15, 36; f^'^^rpy Ez. 47, io%- D^im- Jos. 18, 22. 2Ch. 13, 4'^; D^^^i? Jos. 21, 22 • Dr3;^ Jos. 15, 36 ° : cf. ?nsy 2 Ch. 13, 19 Qre (Kt. P^V.Y'. Still all these do not necessarily fall into the same category, and some may have been really duals. In several, as the notes will have shewn, the dual is also expressed in LXX (cod. B). If there were two hills at Samuel's village, as there are at Gezer, DjOnnn would be a very natural name for it. And we have the corresponding form yi*koo > '^ in the Syr. version of i Mace. 11,34. Cf Konig, ii. 437 ; and note the forcible arguments of G. B. Gray, EB. iii. 3319. 1 LXX (A) each time Aaj0aufM. 2 lxX (B) Ac,j9a(in. ^ LXX -aifx. * LXX ir6\€us TTapaOaAaaaias (= ntS"* Jinp). = LXX -ui/x. « LXX .(in. ^ LXX ASccpai. 8 LXX Ttedai. « LXX Maavaid. " LXX -ae/jt. ^^ LXX -aei/u.. " LXX Maavattiov. '^ LXX "XofMopuv. " LXX Efpoiiv. ^5 Codd. AS corruptly 'PaSajxeiv : others 'Pa/xaee/i. /. r 3 The transition from either D^nD-jn or Ori^^n to r\'Oi;r\ in v. 19 is, however, abrupt and strange. In MT. the form occurs here alone, Samuel's home being elsewhere always nD"in. LXX has kpfx-aOaifx not only here, but also wherever noin occurs accidentally with n, in conse- quence of the n of motion being attached to it (nnroin), i, 19. 2, n. 7, 17. 8, 4. 15, 34. 16, 13. 19,18. 22, as well as for ncnn in 25, i. 28,3 : in 19, 19. 22. 23. 20, I (as in Jud. 4, 5) for nD"l3 it has Iv'Yafxa. In 25,1. 28, 3 cod. A has 'Pa/^a : in this cod. therefore no"in is consistently 'Pa/^a, DTlDnn (or Dnoin) and nnD"in are consistently ApixaOai/j.. Probably, however, this is merely a correction of a kind not unfrequent in cod. A, made with the view of assimilating the Greek text more closely to the Hebrew, and not a part of the original LXX. It is scarcely possible to frame an entirely satisfactory explanation of the variations. It seems clear that in 2, 11 etc. ApfxaOai/x is due to the presence of the n in the form of the Hebrew word there read by the translators : but it would be precarious to conclude that this was actually DTimn (or DnD^n). From the abruptness of the change in z*. 19 to the sing., We. thinks it probable that the original form of the name was the singular, which in the first instance stood in the Hebrew text everywhere, but that the dual form came into use subsequently, and was introduced as a cor- rection in I, I in MT.; in LXX 'Pa/xa was originally the uniform rendering, but in course of time an artificial distinction was drawn between riDin and nnD">n, and when this was done it was introduced into the text of LXX — in cod. B, however, in 19, 19 — 20, i only, in cod. A uniformly ('Pa/ia = nD"in : Ap/xaOaL/jL = nriDin). Klo. ingeni- ously proposes to punctuate Cno^n'p ' from the Ramathites ' (so Bu. Sm.; not Now.), cf. Timn i Ch. 27, 27: but this is not the usual manner in which a person's native place is designated in the OT. n?0"in is the name of several places mentioned in the OT. ; and the site of this one is not certain. The best known is the 'Ramah' of Is. 10, 29, which is certainly the modem er-Rdm, 5 miles N. of Jerusalem. Bu. argues in favour of this ; but does not overcome the presumption that the unnamed city, the home of Samuel in ch. 9, which was clearly (comp. 10, 2 with 9, 4 f.) N. of Benjamin, and consequently not er-Ram, was the Ramathaim of i, i and the Ramah of I, 19, etc. Eusebius {Otiomastica^ , ed. Lagarde, 225, 11-14) says that Ramathaim was near Diospolis (Lydda), to which Jerome {ib. 96, 18) adds ' in the district of Timnah;' and i Mace. 11, 34 speaks of 'Ramathem' as a toparchy which had belonged to Samaria, but was transferred in B.C. 145 to Jerusalem: Eusebius B 2 The First Book of Samuel, (288, 1 1 f.) and Jerome (146, 23 f.) also identify Arimathaea (= Ramathaim) with 'Pefiis or Remfthis, in the territory of Diospolis. These statements would point either (Buhl, Geogr., p. 170; Now.; cf. H. G. 254) to Beit-Rivia, a village on a hill, 12 miles NW. of Bethel, 13 miles ENE. of Lydda, and 2 miles N. of Timnah, or (Guthe, Kiirzes Bibelworterb., 1903, p. 536; Lagrange) to Rends, a small village 5 miles W. of Beit-Rima, and 9 miles NE. of Lydda. H. P. Smith and others have thought of Rdin-AIlah, a village standing on a high ridge, 3 miles S\V. of Bethel : but either Beit-Rima or Rentis has better ancient authority in its favour. See further DB. iv. 198. Dnn'»] LXX "UpefierjX, i.e. ^i^'pnT 1 Yerahme'el, perhaps rightly (the name Yeroham occurs elsewhere). The pedigree of Samuel is given twice besides, with variations similar to those which usually occur in parallel passages in the OT., especially in lists of names : — „ I C/^ 6,13-1 1 iC/^.6, iS-20 ■^'^'"- '' '• (LXX 28-26). (LXX 33-35)- Samuel 13 Samuel 18 Samuel Elqanah 12 Elqanah 19 Elqanah Yeroham Yeroham Yeroham Elihu Eliab Eliel Tohu II Nahath'-' Toah' Zuph Zophai 2oQreZuph* TI'iSx] This word appears to represent Elqanah not merely as resident in Ephraim (D^ISS "inro), but as an Ephraimite ; in i Ch. 6 he is represented as a Levite, of the descendants of Qohath (Nu. 3, 27 etc.). The discrepancy is hard to reconcile. Jud. 1 7, 7 the expression ' of the family of Judah,' applied to a Levite, has been supposed to shew that Levites settled in a particular tribe may have been reckoned as belong- ing to it; but even if that were the case^, the addition "'P Nini would ^ Thenius ?ND"I'', on which We., De Gcntibus et Familiis Judaeis quae I Ch.2. 4. numerantur (Gottingae, 1870), remarks justly (p. 27), * Dresdense potius quam Hehiaetim^ ^ So Vulg. Pesh. ; LXX Katvo^. No doubt the 3 is an error for n, the two letters being somewhat similar in the old character, though which of the three forms is original cannot be definitely determined, probably Tohu. In any case Keil's explanation, of the variation is untenable. 3 LXX (B) 0€if, (A) 0OOV6, Vulg. Thohu, i.e. Tohu as in i, i. Pesh. k>— L < So also LXX, Vulg.; Kt. Ziph. ^ It is more probable that 'Levite' denotes there a professio7t, rather than membership in a tribe : see Moore, ad loc; McNeile, Exodus, pp. Ixvi L, 26. I-J^ 5 there make the double relationship clear; here the addition TllSN seems to shew that the narrator has no consciousness of Samuel's Levitical descent. The explanation that the term designates Elqanah as an Ephraimite, merely so far as his civil rights and standing were concerned, makes it express nothing more than what is virtually de- clared in V. *, and moreover implies a limitation which is not, at least, sustained by usage. It is a question whether the traditions embodied in Ch. have been handed down uniformly in their original form, and whether in some cases the genealogies have not been artificially com- pleted. The supposition that Samuel was really of Ephraimite descent, and was only in later times reckoned as a Levite, is the simplest explanation of the divergence. 2. D"'C'3 "Tlir l^l] The order, and form of sentence, as 17, 12. 25, 2 (cf. 36), II 14, 30. 17, i8. 23, 18. 22. Jud. 3, 16. Zech. 5,9. Dan. 8, 3 etc. nnx] The numeral, being definite in itself, may dispense with the art.; cf. 13, 17. 18 ; Nu. 28, 4 : Ew. § 290^; GK. §§ 126^, 134I. But in a connexion such as the present nriNn would be more classical (Gen. 2, 1 1. 4, 19. 10, 25 (all belonging to the Pentateuchal source J); Dt. 21,15; II 4, 2), and ought probably to be restored. It is read by several MSS. \Tl] before the plural D''*T^\ according to GK. § 145°; Ew. § 3i6'i. So not unfrequently : e.g. with the same verb Gen. i, 14. 5, 23. Jud. 20, 46. I Ki. 13, 33 riion ''3n3 '«n"i^ that there might be {Tenses, § 63) priests of the high places. 3. n^yi] The pf. with waw conv. has a frequentative force, used to go up; comp. 4^-7'^, where observe that it interchanges, not with the bare perfect, the tense of simple narrative, but with the mp/., which likewise expresses habituation: see Tenses, § 120, GK. § iiz^*^; and comp. Ex. 17, II. 18, 26. Jud. 2, i8f. etc. T\)yty CCD] The same phrase, likewise with reference to the obser- vance of a pilgrimage or sacred season, 2, i9'\ Ex. 13, 10. Jud. 11, 40. 21, i9t. n''DS lit. days, tends by usage to denote the definite period of a year: cf. v. 21. 2, 19^^; and on 27, 7. rh^~\ now SeilTin, in a secluded nook, 9^m. N. of Bethel, and 11 m. S. of Shechem. See the writer's art. in DB. s.v. The First Book of Samuel, 'y\ Dti'l] LXX Kai Iko. HXei Kal oi Si'o viol avTov, which has been supposed to i)oint to vV ''33 ""ykJ"! \p}; DCl. Some independent notice of Eli seems to be presupposed by v. 9 : either, therefore (Th. Klo.), 1 'h^ has dropped out in MT., or (We.) the mention of Eli originally /r(?c^^C L word, at once defensible philologically, and suited to the context. It has been rendered (i) ' heavily.' So, for instance, the Vulgate {tristis), several mediaeval authorities (e.g. the 'Great' Bible of 1539: 'a portion with an heavy cheer'), and amongst moderns, Bo. Th. But for this sense of D^?^ there is no support in the known usage of the language : D*SN3 occurs with the meaning 'in anger' in Dan. 11, 20; but that would be unsuitable here, and the expressions T'JS "ipSJ (Gen. 4, 6) and niy n? Vn N7 iTJD (below, v. 1 8) are not sufficient to justify the sense of a fl'it/Vr/ffl' countenance being assigned to CSX. It has been rendered (2) in connexion with nns nJO^ otie porimi of two faces (=two persons), i.e. a double portion. So Keil and even Gesenius. It is true that the Syriac ^T corresponds generally in usage with the Hebrew D''JS ; but, to say nothing of the fact that a Syriasm is unexpected in Samuel, and that even in late Hebrew D''SX does not occur with the Aramaic sense of 'person,' there is nothing in the use of the Syriac word to suggest that the dual would, in Hebrew, denote two persons : i^r (like D''JD) is used of one person, the singular not occurring. If D^EiN means two persons, it must be implied that the singular E]t< might denote 07ie person, which the meaning of the word {jiostril) obviously does not permit. Secondly, the construction, even if on lexical grounds this rendering were defensible, would be unexampled. D''2X evidently cannot be a genitive after nriN run: Ew. § 287b (cited by Keil) com- bines together cases of apposition and of the accusative of limitation ; but the disparity of idea {one portion and ttuo persons) shews that D^SN cannot be in apposition with nriN nJD : it 7night be an accusative defining the amount or measure of the nnx njD {Tenses, App. § 194) : but how unnaturally expressed ! ' one (emph.) portion,' immediately defined as a portion suitable for two persons, i.e. as a double portion, as in fact not one portion at all, but two ! Upon grammatical grounds, hardly less decisively than upon lexical grounds, this rendering must thus be pronounced inadmissible. (3) The rendering of AV. a ivorthy 8 The First Book of Samuel, portion is inherited from the Geneva Version of 1560, and is based ultimately upon the Targum, which has "1^13 in phn, i.e. 'one choice portion.' "l'''7l choice corresponds in the Targum to the Hebrew D''SN ; but it is clear that it is no translation of it, nor can it be derived from it by any intelligible process. Kimchi, in his Coynmentary and the Book o/Roois, makes two attempts to account for it — both unsuccessful. Evidently it is a mere conjecture, designed to replace the untranslatable word by something that will more or less harmonize wdth the context. The Hebrew text does not admit of a defensible rendering. In the LXX D"'2X is represented by ttAt/v, i.e. D2X. This reading at once relieves the difficulty of the verse, and affords a consistent and gram- matical sense. ''3 DDK restricts or qualifies the preceding clause, precisely as in Nu. 13, 28. 'But unto Hannah he used to give one portion:' this, following the portio7is of v. 4, might seem to imply that Elqanah felt less affection for her than for Peninnah. To obviate such a mis- conception, the writer adds: *■ Howbeit he loved Hannah; but Yahweh had shut up her womb,' the last clause assigning the reason why Hannah received but one portion. This reading is followed by We., Stade {Gesch. des V. Isr. i. 199), Now., Kp., Kenn., Dhorme, and is rightly represented on the margin of R V. : the words because she had no child, however, though found in LXX, formed probably no part of the text used by the translators, but were added by them as an explanatory comment. 6. Dya D3 . . . nnoy^l] ' and . . . used to vex her even with a vexation,' i.e. vexed her bitterly. Dy3 is not (as it is often rendered) to provoke to anger, but io vex, as oy? is vexation : it always denotes the feeling aroused by some unmerited treatment; cf Job 5, 2. 6, 2 ; Dt. 32, 19 the vexation caused to Yahweh by the undutiful behaviour of His 'sons and daughters,' 27 'vexation from the enemy,' i. e. the vexation which He would experience from their triumph at Israel's ruin. Dya] The abstr. subst., in place of the more common inf. abs., as Is. 21, 7 3&'P TD'pni ; comp. also 22, 17 will hurl thee as a man [or, O man] zvith a hurling, i.e. will hurl thee violently, 18 will wind thee up with a winding; 24, 16. 22 will be gathered, as captives, with a gathering [but read here ''^l?^*^ ^DNj ; Ez. 25, 12. 15; 27, 35; Mic. I^ 9 4, 9; Hab. 3, 9; Job 16, 14; 27, 12. D3 occurs in the same position before the inf. abs. Gen. 31, 15. 46, 4. Nu. 16, i3t- Perhaps, indeed (Ehrlich, Raiidglossen zur Hebr. Bibel, iii. (1910), p. 163), we should read here the inf., DJ??. nmv] 'her rival- ox fellow-wife :'' LXX (Luc.) 17 avTL^r]\o<; avrrj's, Vulg. ae?fiula eius, Pesh. chI;:^. The meaning is certain. A com- parison of Hebrew with the cognate languages, Arabic and Syriac, shews that in old times, when polygamy was prevalent, a common term was in use among the Semitic peoples to denote the idea of a rival- or fellow-ivife, derived from a root JJi to irijure or vex, viz. Arabic \Jj> darraiiin = Syriac ]li>. 'arlhd = Hebrew iTJif. The variation in the initial letter shews that the term was not borrowed by one Semitic language from another, within historical times, but that it was already in use at the time when the common ancestors of the Hebrews, Aramaeans, and Arabs dwelt together in a common home : after the three branches separated, the initial consonant in process of time underwent a variation till it appeared finally as V in Hebrew, as >a^ in Aramaic, and as (^ in Arabic ^ For an example of the Syriac word, see Ephrem Syrus, I. 65 D, where Hagar is spoken of as the Jl;X of Sarah : it is also used here in Pesh. to represent mv. For the Arabic, see Lane's Arab. Lex., p. 1776, and The looi Nighls (Habicht), iii. 276, 8 (cf. Lane's translation, London, 1865, ii. 135), referred to by Lagarde (' Budoor and Hayat-en-Nufoos are both wives of Qamar-ez-Zeman, and the one is ij^ = mv to the other : compare i Samuel i, 6 of the family of Elqanah ') ; Lane, Modern Egypiia7ts, i. 232 ; S. A. Cook, The Laws of Moses and The Code of JIamvmrabi, p. 116 (who cites examples of the working of the system in Syria, and quotes the alliterative proverb, ed-durra viurra, *A fellow- wife is bitter') : also Saadyah's version of Lev. 18, 18 (in Le Jay's or 1 The variation is in accordance with rule : where Heb. Jf corresponds to o . s Arab. (^, its representative in Aramaic is >^, 1? : e.g. |N2f = Jjl-^ = t^i ^^ > n? "" lA;^ "" "^^T, i'^^ (it also, in the Aramaic of Jer. 10, 11 (NpIN), of Nineveh and Babylon, Zinjirli, Cappadocia, and Egypt, becomes p (as py = yx = !•); ; nDp = npy = -\my. see Lor.\ 1909, pp. 255, 504, 515; Cooke, NSl. p. 185). See Lagarde, Setnitica, I. (1878), pp. 22-27, or the list in the Appendix to the writer's Hebrew Tenses (ed. 3), § 178. lo The First Book of Samuel, Walton's Polyglott, or in Derenbourg's ediiion of his Works, vol. i, Paris, 1893)'. "nv^ in Lev. 18, 18 is a ' dcnominaiive' (GK. § 38 r) from mv, as used here, having the sense of to take a rival- ox/ellow- ivife (LXX yvvaxKa lir aSeXcfifj avTrjq ov X-rj^j/r] dvxi^TjXoi')", just like the Arab. Ill '/j^-^- I11 post-Biblical Hebrew mv occurs in the same sense in the Mishnah, Yebamoth, ch. i ^ njoy^n] On the anomalous '^ (with dagesh dirimens) see GK. § 22^ {26^) ; Ew. § 28b {b) ; Stade, § i38«'. The root Dyi elsewhere in Heb., except Ez, 27, 35 (where read probably with LXX, Pesh. DH'^pQ 'iVO^), means always to thimder (e.g. ch. 7, 10); but in Targ. it means in tlie Iihpaal to murmur, complain (oft. for p7, as Ex. 16, 2 1Dy"inN for "IJ1?''1) ; and in Syr. (besides meaning to thunder) the root, esp. in Ethpeal and Eihpael, and in its derivatives, is very frequent (see numerous examples in PS. s.v.) in the sense of be indignant, complain, and also lament (e.g. »ci.Na-N»ir J« = /^^ ;;(aXe7ratVeT6 ; o«_')a.v»l( = riyavoLKTrjcrav ; and )k-^2b^o» = fxojjic^ri, Col. 3, 1 3). The Hif. may be rendered here to irritate her. The Arab. ^c. (which is usually a denom. from 'As-' earth or dust, and is used of the nose cleaving to the dust, fig. of abasement) has also the sense o[ to anger (conjj. i and iv; cf. iii and v: Lane, Arab. Lex., 1 1 13 f.). It is possible that, in this sense, it is allied with the Aram. Dyi mentioned above, and with the Heb. Cynn here. 7. n^y] Difficult. Keil: 'So used he (Elqanah) to do (viz. gave 1 ' And a woman with her sister thou shall not take I4J ..^ ^y^''^ th^t she may be Jier fellow-wife.' " Keil's rendering of "l"lif?, derived from Knobel, is not probable. ' See further on this word Lagarde, in his essay IVhelhcr Afarriage wilh a Deceased IVife's Sister is, or is not, proliibited in tJie Mosaic IVj-itings, published originally in the Gottingen Nachrichten, 1882, No. 13, and reprinted in the volume entitled Mitttieilmigen i. (18S4), pp. 125-134. Substantially the word was already correctly explained by Alb. Schultens in his Consessus Haririi qiiartus quintus et sextus (Lugd. Bat. 1740), p. 77 : 'Sub 'Ikj regnat speciatim usus obtrcctandi et aemulandi, cojitendendi ex Zelotypia, Q\\x&t \ocs.tui \\'j-o et .^. Hinc is _o n^if est Diulier quae cum alia comimmein habei inaritum. Sic i Sam. i, 6 :' and he quotes the phrase i.^ AS cj^s^-' diicto,fitit super aemutatjone, i.e. alien uxori fuit adiiincta, and refers also to "lllikV in Lev. 18, 18. (Similarly in the Animadversioues PJiilologicae et Crijicae ad varia loca V. T. (1709), on this passage : reprinted in the Opera Minora, 1769, p. i66.) /. 6-g II her a double portion), . . . ; so used she to vex her,' i.e. the more he shewed his affection for Hannah, the more Peninnah vexed her : but, even apart from the untenable expl. ' double portion,' there is no analogy for this sense of the repeated p : ' the more . . . the more ' is p . . . "TJ'N3 (Ex. I, 12). Th. We. point 'I^V'! 'so was it done year by year . . . , so (namely) did she vex her : ' but this use of the passive riE'yj is hardly a Hebrew idiom. Probably we should read with Pesh. (loot )*^iK.), Vulg. (implicitly), nb'yri pi ' and so used she (Peninnah) io do year by year . . . , so (namely) used she to vex her : ' in this case the second p is simply resumptive of the first. T\yw'2 rutJ*] year_/?*r year, i.e. one year like another = yearly. So elsewhere, as i Ki. 10, 25. See Lex. p. 90*^. ^■jip] lit. oiii 0/ the sufficiency of, idiom, for as often as : see Lex. 191^^ nn^y] Read probably with Vulg. D'^-'J?. mn'' n"'33] After the verb of motion, we expect the accus. niiT' n''3, ■which is probably to be read with 34 MSS., Kimchi, and three Rabb. authorities ap. Aptowitzer, I (see List of Abbreviations), p. 37. naim] Instead of continuing, by '"'^^i^'"' ^0 describe what took place every year, the narrator, by using the hist, tense nD3m, glides here into the description of what happened in the particular year referred to in V. 4^. ^3N*n N^l] More significant than the normal : npSX x5l would have been, and emphasizing the continual condition in which Hannah was : see TcTises, §§ 30, 42 /?, 85 Obs.; GK. § 107^. So n33n v. io'\ 8. '"i^pj So pointed only in this verse (thrice): GK. § 102I; Lex. 554''^. Comp. the cases in which HD is pointed anomalously HO (Stade, § 173 c^); and for the tone Mil'el the anomalous '"IDP Job 7, 20. 12^ yT] So Dt. 15, 10 : cf. the yi 3^ {sad heart) of Pr. 25, 20, and the opposite 21D said of the heart ch. 25, 36 (where see note) : also D'yn n^J2 (Gen. 40, 7), said in Neh. 2, 2 to be due to 3p yi. LXX Tvirret ae for V^,, i.e. 'ij?-, but unsuitably (see 24, 6. H 24, 10). 9. n^3N] The inf. cstr. with the fem. termination, as regularly with nsns nzinN, and with this word in Jer. 12, 9, the Priests' Code, and Ezekiel; also sporadically with other words' (cf. inyfOC'i Is. 30, 19; 1 ^zz Journal of Ptiilology, XI. (1S82), 235 f. ; GK. § 45 -d 12 The First Book of Samuel, rip21? Dt. II, 22): and with the sufl[ix omitted, as also takes place exceptionally (e.g. ch. 18, 19. Gen. 24, 30. i Ki. 20, 12). ^^?? (so LXX) is, however, what would be naturally expected — the suffix referring to the party generally, in spite of Hannah's not joining with them. ni?L*'3 is, however, in fact superfluous, as the entire incident takes place at Shiloh : perhaps (We.) '"ip^3n the boiled flesh (cf. 2, 15), or (Kittel) nstJ'pa (see on v. 18), should be read. Klo., in view oi v. 18 LXX, for n^ti'n n!?3N nnx, emends very cleverly naK'b n^DS* mm, 'and left her food (uneaten) in the (dining-)chamber ' (see 9, 22), — followed by (see below), 'and stood before Yahweh.' This emendation is accepted by Bu., but not by Sm. Now.: see further on v. 18. nh^j Very anomalous (cf. GK. § ws^^ ni), being the only example of an inf. abs. after a preposition*: contrast i Ki. 13, 23 m3N "•iriN inin^ nnxi on!?. LXX do not express nn{J> nns'l ; and it may well be an addition to n?3S nns, made on the analogy of other passages in which r\T\^ follows ^3N (e.g. Gen. 24, 54). LXX have, however, after n^l /cat KarkfiTy] cVcottiov Yivpiov, i.e. ^"^ ^)p}> ^rnril (cf. v. 26. 10, 19), which is indeed required for the sequel, and is accepted by Th. We. Klo. etc. 25?'''] The ptcp. describes what Eli was doing at the time when Hannah appeared where he was. nnro ^y] h^ = by: Lex. 756a. 10. C'S: Tr\'6] Cf. 2 Ki. 4, 27 n^ mo nc'SJl: Job 3, 20. 27, 2 al. The expression implies a state of mental embitterment, i.e. disappoint- ment, dissatisfaction, discontent (Jud. 18, 25. ch. 22, 5). 7y] for the more usual ?N, which is read here by several MSS. There is a tendency, however, in these two books to use ^y and i^X interchangeably: comp. v. 13. 2, 11. II 19, J3 : also i Ki. 9, 5b. 20, 43. Is. 22, 15; and see on 13, 13. Cf. Lex. 41*. 1 1. nN"in riN"! Dn] The expression of a condition is often emphasized by the addition of the inf. abs.: see on 20, 6; and exactly as here. ^ The inf. abs. occurs, however, though even then rarely, as the object of another verb (Ew. § 240*; GK. § 113''). — Ewald, in his explanation of this passage (§ SSQ**), appears to have read Hp^N (as some MSS. and Edd. do read [see the note in Michaelis], though against the Massorah). On Ex. 32, 6, which might be thought, perhaps, to afford a parallel to the text, see the note on 22, 13. /. g-i3 13 Nu. 21, 2. For "^y in a similar connexion, cf. Gen. 29, 32; and for n^r (also V. 19^), Gen. 30, 22. ■•Jni^n] The pf. with waw conv. carrying on the impf. nN"in, according to Tenses, § 115 s.v. DX. So Ex. 19, 5^^. 23, 2 2*^etc. VnnJi] Here the pf. with waw conv. marks the apodosis : ib. § 136 a. So 20, 6; Ex. 19, 5^. 23, 22'' etc. ^''Tl ''D^ bs ^""'i' VnnJIJ LXX has Kox Biacroi avTov evtoTriov aov Botov Itos rjixipas Oavdrov avrov' koI oTvov koX fiiOvafia ov irUraL. This is probably an amplification of the Hebrew text, by means of elements borrowed from Nu. 3, 9. 18, 6. 6, 3 (all P), designed with the view of representing Samuel's dedication as more complete. 12. iTHl] As a frequentative sense is here out of place, this must be the perf. with simple waw, in place of the normal ''HM^ such as is met with occasionally, as 10, 9. 13, 22. 17, 48. 25, 20 (see note). II 6, 16 (see note); and with other verbs 3, 13 (but see note). 4, 19. 17, 38. II 7, Ilk 13, 18 (?yJ1, as Jud. 3, 23). 16, 5. 23, 20 (and more fre- quently in later Hebrew): see Teftses, § 133. We. Bu. and others would correct n\"l1 always to '"H^l. This may seem violent: but it is observable that in almost every case future tenses precede, so that a scribe might, even more than once, have written n\"il by error, supposing inadvertently that the future verbs were to continue. Cf. the discussions in Tenses, I.e.; GK. § ii2rp~"'^ ; Kon. iii. § 37oc-r. ?7'Snn? nnmn] lit. did much in respect ^praying, i.e. prayed long or 7nuch: cf. Is. 55, 7 ni^DP n3"|^ "3 = for he will abundantly pardon, II 14, II. Ex. 36, 5. \|/-. 78, 38. So ^INt:'^ n^C'pn thou hast done hardly in r^j/^f/ Raskin g= thou hast asked a hard thing 2 Ki. 2, 10; 235n'» XUP = come in stealthily II 19, 4; m3^ nN3n3 = fled secretly Gen. 31, 27 ; r\:hb nVt^'n N^ = shall not comeback i Ki. 13, 17; Disn^ nnLi\T Jer. I, 12; n"l3? Ticnp I was beforehand iti fleeing = I fled betimes Jon. 4, 2 : GK. § 114° with the footnote. 12-13. . . . mmo X^n njm . . . W ^i^yi] Two circumstantial clauses {Tenses, § 160), iiTll being resumed by nic^nil in 13b. -yo^ has here the sense of observed, i.e. marked — not a common use of 1?jtJ>, at least in prose: comp. i/^. 17, 4. Job 39, i. Zech. 11, 11. 1 3. km] For the pron. (which is unusual, as thus joined with the indef. ptcp.) cf. Dt. 31, 3. Jos. 22, 22 : Tenses, § 199 note. 14 The First Book of Samuel, n37 bv T\'\'y]'o] not, of course, as Is. 40, 2 al, in the sense of coti- solwg, but, the pron. being reflexive, as ^n^ ^N "131^ in Gen. 24, 45 = to speak io oneself (where LXX Hkewise render by eV, so that there is no ground for changing here bv into 3). Comp. 13^ bn. "irON''1 (followed of course— the verb being n^N— by the words supposed to be said) 27, I. Gen. 8, 21 (We.). It is another instance of i?y=:^x. yOE'^ N?] not V'Q'f) N?, in agreement with the continuance expressed by the preceding ptcp. niVJ. '7 3C^n] as Gen. 38, 15. Job 33, 10 al. 14. pi^nc'n] the I of the 2 fem. sing., retained regularly in Aramaic and Arabic, is found in Hebrew only seven times, viz. here, Jer. 31, 22. Is. 45, 10. Ruth 2, 8. 21. 3, 4. 18 (Stade, §553; GK. § 470). "Ivy?3] /rom upon thee — the wine (in its effects) being conceived as clinging to her, and weighing her down. Comp. for the idiom (applied literally) 17, 39. Gen. 38, 19 al., and (metaphorically) Am. 5, 23: also Jud. 16, 19 vi^yn inD -1D''1 (in allusion to the hair as the seat of Samson's strength). 15. nn riK'p] The expression occurs only here : upon the analogy of 3? ^^\> Ez. 3, 7 (cf. Dt. 2, 30) it would denote hard-spirited, i.e. obstinate, unyielding. LXX 17 o-kXtjpo. iifAepa, i.e. Di'' T)^\>, which is supported by Job 30, 25, where DV ^rp is used in the sense which is here desiderated, viz. imforiunate, lit. hard of day, i.e. one upon whom times are hard (cf. ^va-qix^pio). So Th. We. Hitzig (on Job I.e.), etc. "•^JX] 7nirel {Tenses, § 91), the pausal form of ^33N, here with a ?ninor disjunctive accent {zaqef), such as often induces a pausal form {Tenses, § 103)- '•tJ'DJ] i.e. the emotions and desire, of which in Hebrew psychology the 'soul' is the seat: cf. ^. 42, 5; also 102, i. 142, 3, which illus- trate at the same time "'H'^b' v. \ 6. See the synopsis of passages in the writer's Parallel Psalter, p. 459 f. 16. ^y"i^3-n3 ^Jsi?] 'b |n: means to male in/o, '3 jn3 to treat as (Gen. 42, 30. \j/. 44, 12): 1^27 jn3 means elsewhere to set before (i Ki. 9, 6) or to give up before (Dt. 2, 31. 33) — neither sense, however, being suitable here. If the text be correct, '•JS^ must have the force of like, which it also appears to possess in Job 3, 24 (parallel with 3). 4, 19 (Ew. Del. Hiiz.) ; but in these passages also the sense is questionable. /. I3-I8 15 LXX express simply ^y^nTin^ ; but '^ jnJ never occurs in the sense of |^' to represent as. The best suggestion seems to be to read '3 n33 . . . jnn'bx treat not . . . as (Gen, 42, 30), throwing out ""JS?, as having come in by error from the line above (Sm. Bu.). On ^yv3, see Lex. s.v. "mm] LXX cKTeVaKa, Targ. JT'iniN, — both paraphrasing. 17. "^U^^] for 'iinpSK' (unusual), GK. § 23^. Here begins a series of plays (ij 17. 20. 27. 28. 2, 20) by which the stem bii^ is brought into connexion with the name Samuel. Cf. Gen. 17, 17. 18, 12. 13. 15. 21, 6 (Laac); 25, 26. 27, 36 (Jacob). icyjo] Dyo is idiomatic with b'H'^: v. 27. Dt. 10, 12. Is. 7, 11 al. {Lex. 768b ^(j/^w). Cf. nsD I Ki. 2, 16 TjriND ^xb^ "3iN nnx rh^f, 18. n3TlP] LXX adds koL elcrTJXOev eis to KardXyfia avTr)<;, i.e. no doubt, as We. rightly perceived, nriBK'pn N3ri1 (see 9, 22) 'and entered into the (dining-)chamber ' — LXX having incorrectly treated the n locate as the suffix of the 3 pers. sing. fem. The il2^b was a chamber near the mn"" 73"n, as in 9, 22 near the n?oa, in which the sacrificial meals were held. In later times the word denotes the chambers in the Temple Court in which the priests lived : Jer. 35, 2. 4. Ez. 40, 17 etc. ^J^xni] LXX for this has an entire sentence, presupposing the Heb. riK'm n^'-'X ny b:^iih nns^j^^n xbni. if these words are original,— and they certainly read as if they were, — Hannah leaves the sacred meal {v. 9) dt^ore it is over, and goes to the temple to pray : she then returns to the dining-chamber, and finishes her meal with her husband. KIo.'s emend, of v. 9 agrees with this representation. Would the narrator, however, have said, ' and went her way,' if he had pictured her merely as returning to the adjoining n:iW (Sm.) ? If the additional words in LXX here are wo/ original, then 73Nni will mean 'and ate' in general; and with this will agree MT. of v. 9, according to which Hannah leaves the T]2W after the sacred meal is finished. KIo.'s emend, of V. 9 is brilliant, and attractive : but it is difficult to be as confident that it is right, as Bu. is. Nowack and Smith do not accept either it, or the LXX reading here. ijixm] milra', on account of the disjunctive accent, zdqef: out of pause, we have ?3Xni {iniVel) ; so e.g. Lev. 10, 2. See GK. § 68fi>e. ITija] D^iS of a vexed or discontented countenance, as Job 9, 27 nj"!?3X1 "JD nnryx '•n^C' rwsv^f, nox nx. LXX understood the word i6 The First Book of Samuel, in its ordinary sense, reading (or paraphrasing) "tiy v23 n^ iT'JDI (cf. Gen. 4, 6). Klo. rh^hr} N^ (jer. 3, 12) for rh Vn i6. 20. It is doubtful if the text is in its original form. We should expect (cf. Gen. 30, 22 f.) the 'remembering' to be followed imme- diately by the conception, and the date which, in the text as it stands, fixes the time of the conception, to fix rather the time of the birth. Hence Reifmann {Or Soger, Berlin, 1879, P- 28) supposes a trans- position to have taken place, and would restore the words n:n "inni to the beginning of the verse: 'And Hannah conceived; and it came to pass, at the close of the year, that she bare a son.' So in effect LXX {koX a-wiXafi^v, Kol ly^vrjOr] tw Katpw rajj/ rjfxepwv koI £T€K£v vlov), but wlthout thc retention of njn, which is desiderated by Hebrew style ("inni alone being too light by the side of the long clause following). D^O\n niDpn^] Read, with 6 MSS., nsipn^ (the pi. is strange ; and the 1 would form no part of the original text : Introd. § 2. 2), a/ the (completed) circuit of the days, i. e. not (as Th. We.) at the end of the period of gestation, but like nJBTi nsipn Ex. 34, 22 {=n:\i^n JlNYa in the parallel, Ex. 23, 16), of the Feast of Ingathering at the close of the year, which was no doubt the occasion of the pilgrimage alluded to in V. 21. Cf the cogn. fjpj in Is. 29, i lDp:> D"'3n ' let the feasts ^c? roufid,' i.e. complete their circuit. D'^JD'' as z^i^. 3. 21. ^ of time as II II, I. I Ki. 20, 22. 26. 2 Ch. 24, 23 njtrn nsipn^. nsipn occurs besides only if/. 19, 7. ^KIDC'] The current etymologies of this name cannot be accepted. This is evident at once in the case of the old derivation, which still lingers in the margin of AV., ' that is, As^ed of God,' as if ^S'^OK' were contracted from 7X0 b^H^ : for such a contraction would be altogether alien to the genius of the Hebrew language. What the writer means to express must be (as often in the OT.) an assonatice, not an ety- mology, i.e. the name ^XIOC' recalled to his mind the word hxc' asked, though in no sense derived from it. So PP or nK'D, for instance, recalled or suggested the verbs HJp to get, and ntJ'JD to draw out, though the names do not themselves signify either 'gotten' or 'drawn out.' What, however, is the actual meaning of the name ^KIOtT ? When the explanation ' Asked of God ' was seen to be untenable, an attempt was /. 20 17 made to bring the name into some sort of connexion with the text by the suggestion that it was = PNS?11D^, and signified ' heard of God ' (so e.g. Keil). Had this, however, been the writer's intention, we should have expected the word hear to occur somewhere in the narra- tive, which is not the case. But there are even more serious objections to this derivation, (i) Had this been the true account of the name, the N rather than the y would have been naturally the letter elided : an original p^V^'O^ would have given rise to ?syiCB' (on the analogy of ?NyD^'^) rather than to bxiDtt'i. (2) Compound proper names in Hebrew are constructed, for the most part, after particular types or models : thus one large class consists of one of the sacred names followed by a verb in the perfect tense (the last vowel only being lengthened, after the analogy of substantives), as \^i?^, I^ji\ ^'^t??) yijin^, i.e. Fl (or Vah) has given, El (or I^ah) has ktiown. Another class is similarly compounded, but the verb stands first, as (^)'"i;jJ5n, ^Wn, Vah (or El) has been gracious, {^)^l'^)l, ^^"^X^,, Yah (or El) has helped. In a third (less numerous) class the verb still stands first, but is in the imperfect tense, as ^Nipni^ El hath mercy (or, with an optative < force. May El have Jiiercy !), ('l)n^J7X^ J^ah hearkeneth (or. May Yah hearken!). There are, of course, other types, which need not however be here considered. But numerous as are the proper names com- pounded of one of the sacred names and a verb, there are none, or next to none, compounded with a passive participle. Obvious as such a form as blessed or helped or redeemed of Vah might appear to be, it was uniformly discarded by the Hebrews. In proper names, the passive participle is used only by itself. We have 'n^"*^' and "l^^T^ for instance, but ^5X213 or injD^n^, not n^3^-i3; nnm, nnibx or 0)nn?i, not nn^nt; we have not only \r\})^ and injin^ (or fnjV), but also {^)™}_ and i'Wnj, not however ^Wn3 ; we have (l)'iVPf and ^NJ/nf ^ (also VOC^'^N), but not PSyiOC'. There is no name in the OT. formed analogously to a presumable PNyiOty heard o/God^; and the fact that this type of 1 In h^TT. I Ch. 7, 6 al. even the N is not elided. ^ The only possible exception would be ?N'"inp Gen. 4, 18, if this mean ' smitten of God,' which, however, is far from certain : following the Qrc, we may vocalize PX^^TO, which would agree with the LXX Moii^A, i.e. 'God is a life- giver' (Budde, Biblische Urgeschichie, ■p. 128). But, in any case, an archaic 1365 C i8 The First Book of Samuel, compound name was studiously avoided by the Hebrews is practically conclusive against the proposed derivation. The derivation suggested by Gesenius, PNIJD^ = ' Name of God,' is as obvious as it is natural. It is suitable and appropriate in itself; and the form of compound which it implies is in exact agreement with ^N132 'Face of God,' ^MV") 'Friend of God,' ^Nisa 'Majesty of God.' The u is the old termination of the nominative case (see GK. § 90^^), retained as a binding-vowel, both in the instances cited, and also occa- sionally besides : e. g. in npK'inO ' Man of the weapon V and ?N^iriO * ' Man who belongs to God.' The preceding argument, on its negative side, that /KICB' does ttoi mean ' Heard of God,' has been generally allowed to be conclusive : but it has been felt by some that ' Name of God ' does not yield a good sense for the name of a person ; and other explanations of it have been proposed. I. ^NIDB*, it has been pointed out, resembles in form certain South Arabian proper names of the type Sumhii apika, ' His name is mighty,' Sumlni-yadda, ' His name has determined,' Suinlni-kariba, ' His name has blessed,' Suiiihu-zvatara, ' His name is pre-eminent* [Heb. "in"*], etc. : the names of two of the kings of the first Babylonian dynasty, c. 2100 B.C. (of South Arabian origin), Shumu-abi, Shuniu- la-ilu, have been also explained similarly, viz. {Shumu being regarded as a con- traction of Shumii-hii) ' His name is my father,' * Is not his name God ? ' Hommel, who first called attention to these resemblances !yAnc. Heb. Trad., 1897, 85 f., 99 f.), interpreted these names in a monotheistic sense, and understood ' His name ' to be a periphrasis for ' God ; ' but Giesebrecht , who discussed the subject, and compared many names of similar formation, such as Ili-kariba, Abi-kariba, {Die ATliche Schdtzung des Gottesnamens, 1901, pp. 103-113, 140-144), regards it, with much greater probability, as a periphrasis for the name of a god whom the giver of the name for some reason shrinks from mentioning. The same view of the Bab. names is taken by Winckler and Zimmern (see KAT.^, pp. 225, 483 f., with the references). And all these scholars regard PNIJOti' as formed similarly, and as meaning 'His name is God,' i.e. (Giesebrecht, pp. 108 f., 112 f.) the name such as this has no appreciable bearing upon the usage of the language in historic times. With active participles, there occur the compounds (1")n"'D7'tJ'0 I Ch. 9, 21. 26, I. 2. 9; and the Ara7naic ^NZirC'C 'God is a dehverer' Neh. 3, 4 al., and PSIDt^'HtD 'God is a benefactor' Neh. 6, 10 (in Gen. 36, 39 the name borne by the wife of an Edomite king). ^ Though more probably TO^ conceals the name of some Babylonian deity : see conjectures in Skinner's Genesis, p. 133 ; and the writer's Genesis, p. 81. ^ The {J* marks this word as a j5rt^// DnDi] LXX iv IX6(JX<^ TpUTLloVTL, Pcsh. jfc^ol )»0K2» _ tr?tJ'?p ")S3 (see Gen. 15, 9): no doubt correctly, for (i) the order T[\i,h^ DHQ is very tinusuaP: (2) only one IS is spoken of in v. 25. The change is really only one in the grouping of letters : for in the older orthography D^ID would be written regularly roia (without ^ and without the distinctive final form of the D : cf. on the Siloam Inscription D3Vnn = D''3ifnn ; there are also many indications that the plena scnptio was not in use in the MSS. used by the LXX translators. See further in the Introduction). For nriN with one term only of the ^ It is, however, doubtful whether this argument should be here pressed : in ?i\i%io{ different things, the substantives may stand first for emphasis (GK. § 134"^) : cf. Gen. 32, 15 f. (JE), Nu. 7, 17. 23 etc. (P). (In the footnote to GK. § 134"=, 1. 5, there is an oversight : 'nearly always after' should be 'more often after:' Herner, op. cit., pp. 58-59, gives more than three pages of instances in P with the numeral before the subst., and hardly half a page of cases with it after /) /. 21-28 21 enumeration cf. i6, 20. LXX add after V^^yQ 123 Ka\ apTois = Dn?1 — probably (We.) from Ex. 29, 2 3f. nop] may be either in appos. to nns nD"'N, or an accus. of limita- tion : see Tenses, § 194; and cf. GK. § i3i'^>p. So Gen. 18, 6 v7^ npi? D\stp. Ex. 16, 32 19 Toyn n^o, etc. 17C'] The correction "17C'3 is unnecessary : the accus. is under the influence of inX3ni: cf. v. 19. 10, 26. 15, 34. II 20, 3. Jos. 9, 6. 10, 15. 43. 18, 9b. Jud. 9, 5. 21, 12I'. nyj lyjni] AV. RV. 'and the child was young.' But this rendering implies that "lyj as predicate expresses more than it does as subject, which cannot be the case. The words can only be rendered ' and the lad was a lad.' It is just possible that this might be understood — in accordance with the Semitic usage explained on 23, 13 — as meaning ' the lad was what he was — there is no occasion to say more about him : ' but the case is barely parallel to the other examples of the usage ; and this fact about Samuel would be so obvious from the narrative in general that it would scarcely deserve to be mads the subject of a special remark. It is more probable that the text is in error. LXX express D^V lyDni; but this is tautologous, following 24a MT. It is best to read with Klo. Bu. (LXX da-^XOev) S2rn. 25. iDn'iTM] The subject is not Hannah and Elqanah, but D'pntJ'n (We.) : see on 16, 4. Wa"")] viz. D''X''3rDn (see the last note), the attendants of the temple, perhaps the same as D'^DHti^n. Or we might read either with LXX t^^ni ' came wM,' or >5nri1 'brought.' 26. ""a] LXX here and Jud. 6, 13. 15. 13, 8. i Ki. 3, 17. 26 render ^^v '^ unintelligibly by 'Ev i/xot, elsewhere (Pent. Jos.) correctly by Aco/tai, Aco/Ac^a. On this precative ""^ (Gen. 43, 20 al.), see Zex. 106^. ']^z: ^n] See on 17, 55. n^cy] merely an orthographical variation for ^^V (here only) : so naoi Ex. 15, II l^isf; nnriwX Nu. 22, 33 ; nDHN Ex. 29, 35t; '1?| Ex. 7, 29. II 22, 30. xj/. 141, 8t; '"I?? Gen. 27, 37. II 18, 22. Is. 3, 6t- ^n] ZV1//1 reference to, regarding {x\o\.for)\ as Is. 37, 21. 33. 28^. ""^JN DJi] 'et ego vicissim, Job 7, 11' (Th. from Le Clerc), cf. ch. 28, 22 : II 12, 13. The so-called 'DJ correlaiivum.' {Lex. 169^4.) 22 The First Book of Sanmel, nNT . . . nin''?] The first of the two zdqefs always marks the greater break (GK. § 15™), as indeed the sense frequently shews; comp. 2, 14. rw:h "l^''n^N:^*^] h^^^'r\ is to let a person ask (viz. successfully), i.e. to grant him his request : lit., therefore, ' let (one) ask him for Y.' = let him be asked for (lent him to) Y. So Ex. 12, 36 (the correlative of ask in 3, 22. 11, 2, as of the same word here in vv. 17. 27 ; for PSti' ask in the sense of borrow, see also Ex. 22, 13. 2 Ki. 4, 3^). In the cognate languages, however, the word by usage acquires definitely the sense of lend: see Luke n, 5 Pesh., where v..i.>^.)>j^,( stands for the Greek yjyr\(r6v /xot ^. '31 CfSNT^D] 'all the days for which he shall be {y\A^./uerit; the fut. perf., as Gen. 48, 6 : Tenses, § 17 ; GK. § 106°), he is granted to (lit. asked for) Yahweh.' It is probable that for HM we should read, with LXX, Pesh. Targ. (though these, as AV., may indeed merely paraphrase), ''D (cf. Gen. 5, 5) ; but in any case Nin is to be construed with what follows, not (as by LXX) with what precedes. V^rvh blXk^] asked {borroivcd) for {— lent to) Yahweh : cf. 2 Ki. 6, 5 b^i^^ Nim (= borrowed) ^ 2 8^\ The last words oiv. 28 must be dealt with in connexion with 2, \i^. LXX do not express i, 28^; on the other hand they have in 2, II* (xat KaTeXiTrev avTov eKCc ckwttiov K.vpLov, koI air^XOev eis Apfj-aOaifji) an addition to MT., which looks like a various recension of the words not expressed by them in i, 28^. The two texts may be compared, by placing one above the other, as is done by We. : MT. inu-^y nno-in mpbs* i^m hi.t^ dii^ inncM LXX nnroin Tj^rii ni.T ■•dsJj d^ ^nnirii In the light of the context, LXX deserves the preference. For in ^ As Bu. aptly remarks, ^H^ and ?''i^C'n are to borrow and lend, as a trans- action between friends, HD and nOH are to borrow and lend in a commercial sense. "^ Cf. Sir. 46, 13 Heb. (the clause is not in the Greek text) ^Nlt^'DH (rd. the Hof. ptcp. ^NL"TOn) 10X ;L33tD: Syr. o^\^ \.co-^ ^ "^IISj^-I? ^. ^ Jastrow {JBLit. xix, 1900, p. 100) supposes p''Nt^*n to be a denominative from !5X'5J' asker (viz. of the Divine will, — a function of the priest), and would render accordingly, 'have made him an asker (^priest) to Yahweh :' but though mrT'Q PXti* is often said (e.g. ch. 22, 10), bxb' never occurs as a designation of the priest, nor is it throughout this narrative used of Samuel. /. 28— IL I 23 I\IT. Hannah alone is mentioned as coming up with Samuel to Shiloh (vv, 24-28^: so V. 22 'I,' V. 23 'thou'); when the account of the visit is ended, an unnamed ' he ' appears as the subject of inn*C'''1, who finally (2, 1 1^) is resolved into Elqanah. Had Elqanah, according to the conception of the writer, been present at this visit to Shiloh, he would assuredly have been named explicitly at an earlier stage of the narrative. There is the less ground for supposing that LXX altered arbitrarily the genders at the end, as in their text Elqanah is already introduced in v. 24; so that the masc. in v. 28, had the translators had mriL'^l before them, w-ould have occasioned no difficulty, and given no occasion for a change. On these grounds there is a strong probability that LXX have here preserved the original text. Pesh. Vulg. render innc'''1 by a plural verb (as though the reading were 1inn'i:"'1 : comp. Gen. 27, 29. 43, 28^^ where the punctuators direct inriw'^ to be read as a plur.) ; Klo. suggests that DB' may be a mutilated fragment of ^NIDD': but neither of the remedies relieves the real difficulty of MT., that only Hannah is mentioned (not allusively merely, but circumstantially) as coming up to Shiloh with Samuel, and only Elqanah is mentioned (2, 11) as returning from Shiloh to Ramah. If it be true that i, 2813 MT. is but a variant of 2, i !» LXX, it will follow that Hannah's Song is inserted in MT. and LXX in a different place. 2, i-io. nafi7iah's Song'^. I. '•Jlp no"i] The figure is that of an animal carrying its head high, and proudly conscious of its strength : cf. i/^. 92, 11. 112, 9 ; and (in the Hif'il) v. 10. \p. 75, 5. 6. 89, 18 al. On the contrary, Jer. 48, 25, nxiro \'\\> nyij:. mrfa (2)] 27 MSS., and some Rabb. quotations, ap. Aptowitzer, I (see List of Abbreviations), p. 37, ''i^?^Ti ^justice, justice (and this alone) shalt thou follow;' Qoh. 7, 24 (GK. § 133!^). ' Do not let your words breathe ever (l3"in), and emphatically {px\yi. nnnj), a spirit of haughtiness.' But the line is unduly long, as compared with 3'^; and the word may have been accidentally repeated. 'jl X^''] Clause b, though not attached to a by "I, is governed by PX at the beginning : so \\i. 35, 19. 75, 6, and with N? \\f. 9, 19. Is. 23, 4^. 38, 18% X7 niD^ Job 3, II, JD "A. 13, 5 ; comp. GK. § 152'''.^ The person of the verb here changes in the second clause, and the repetition of ^N (Hpt.) would certainly be an improvement. ' Comp. similarly after rtD? ^. 10, i. 44, 25. 74, i. 88, 15. Is. 63, 17*. Hb. 1, 13". Job 10, 18 ; ilD h'i f. 10, 13 : HD ly 79, 5 (nearly = 89, 47) ; TlD iP 74, 10; njN ny 62, 4; •'d 89, 7 (cf. 49). 106, 2. is. 42, 23. pny] >/'. 75, 6: also 31, 19. 94, 4t. See Z^at. 801*. myn] So Job 36, 4: cf. niJiDS* Pr. 28,20; ni3''n Is, 27, II ; niJian Is. 40, 14 al.; niMn \/^. 49, 4 al. ; nion i/'. 76, II. Pr. 2 2, 24. Poetic, amplificative plurals (GK. § 1240). m^^y "iJOnJ ab)] Read with the Qr6 li^l. n!? and "l!?, being pro- nounced alike, were sometimes in error written one for the other : and in certain cases (though not always) the correction was made by the INIassorah (see Lex. 520^). 'And by Him actions are fes/ed or es/i- ma/ed' (viz. by the application of a measure, |3n, Ex. 5, 18. Ez. 45, 11); for 7, as introducing the efficient cause with a passive verb, see Lex. 514^, GK. § 121^. LXX Kol 6i6<; iTOLfjidt,wv would correspond no doubt (cf. 4 Ki. 12, 11) to |?i^ ^i^]: but in all probability the rendering is simply a free one ; if pn ?N1 had once stood here, it is difficult to understand why it should have been changed to 123713 v1. The epithet r\\2p pn esiimaier of hearts is applied to Yahweh in Pr. 21, 2. 24, i2t, and riin^"i pri ih. 16, 2t; here it is said that man's actions are estimated by Him. The argument is : Do not speak arrogantly : for Yahweh has full knowledge of what you do, and your actions are thus all appraised by Him. 4. ^^''JjiD] in the pi. by attraction to DnU3, because this is the principal idea, and what the poet desires to express is not so much that the bows, as that the warriors themselves, are broken. Cf. Is. 21, 17. Zech. 8, 10 ; and Ew. § 317*^, GK. § 146*. Ehrlich^ however, suggests cleverly inn DHDJ 15^3; the two verbs parallel, as Is. 20, 5. 37, 27 al. h^n iiTN'] i/'. 18, 33 ^--n ""nTNon bsn. 5. ':i ny] lit. ' even to the barren — she beareth seven ' = even the barren beareth seven. *iy recurs in the same sense Job 25, 5 ' lo, even to the moon, it doth not shine.' Foriy ib^n (^^n absol. as Dt. 15, 11), Reifm. Klo. Bu. Now. Kitt. would read "I^y v"in cease to toil, probably rightly. The v. is evidently related to Jer. 15,9 nyne'n m^V n^^ON : though which is original cannot from a mere comparison of the two passages be determined. 6a. Dt. 32, 39 n'-nsi ri"'ON ^jn: 6^. ^. 30, 4. ^yi] continuing the ptcp., as \\i. 34, 8. 65, 9 etc. : Tenses, §§80, 117; GK. §§ III", ii6^(^etid). 7. K^niD] To be poor is tf'll j so we should expect K'^O. Kni (Qal) 26 The First Book of Samuel, means, however, to impoverish in Jud. 14,5; and tJ'liJ to be impoverished in Gen. 45, 11 al. {Lex. 439'')j so 'contamination of signification through confusion with ^"^ may be suspected' {Moore, Judges, p. 337)- DJDn?3 ^IN ^"'DC'Id] for this poet, use of S|N, introducing emphatically a new thought, cf. Dt. 33, 20 Ipip fix yilT fpVi). >//. 65, 14 pj^ lyynn^ )'\'<^'' ; and often in II Isaiah, as 42, 13 JV^'i^ ^IN yn"". 43, 7 sjN vnnv vrT't'y. Cf. ZfAT. 64b. 8*. Hence (with variations) x/^. 113, 7 f. The nstJ'S (cf. Lam. 4, 5) is the mound of dung and other rubbish, now called a mezbele, or ' place of dung,' which accumulates outside an eastern town or village, and on which beggars sit, asking alms of passers-by, and, by night, often sleep. See Wetzstein in Delitzsch's Hiob (on 2, 8), quoted in Davidson's /(?<5 (in the Camb. Bible, p. 14). — In clause a the main division is at }V3N* (cf. on i, 28): the two clauses which follow are parallel, the force of D^m^ "I being dependent on, and deter- mined by, 3''tJ'in^, — 'to make them to sit with nobles, and he will (= and to) cause them to inherit,' etc. So Is. 10, 2b. 13, 9b, 14^ 25. 45, I. i/f. 105, 22. Pr. 5, 2 al. : cf. Tenses, § 118; GK. § 114'". 8^. 1. e. because the earth is owned by Yahweh, and He can dispose of it, as He will. LXX, however, omits 8b and in lieu of 9^ reads 8t8ous ev^'^v Tw €tixo/x.eVa)' kox €vX6yr)cr€V hr) StKatov = ^"^"l^ "'Iv 10^ r]-}^) D'^p'^'Hif niJ^I. Apparently this variation represents an attempt to accommodate the Song more closely to Hannah's position. But, as We. remarks, it is not in harmony with the general tenor of the Song (which represents God as granting ?fiore than the desires or expecta- tions of His worshippers). 8c. ••pvc] Only here : if correct, from plif (Job 28, 2. 29, 6) = PT^, to pour out, melt, cast, and so something cast firm and hard (cf. P^^\, from p^J, Job 41, 15. 16, and pXID Job 38, 38), i.e. a metal pillar. 9. -^m^ vn^Dn ^^n] Ehrlich, cleverly, (Neh. 9, \2)^'^\ vn^DH \^2VP. This, it is true, brings the figure of 9^ into logical antithesis with that of 9b : but the idea of 9^ is antithetic to that of 9b (apart from the figure by which it is expressed) in INIT., and with that the poet may have been satisfied. On on^on godly (properly, ^ind) see the writer's Parallel Psalter, p. 443 f. IDT] Cf. Jer. 49, 26. 50, 30: also (in Qal) f 31, 18 ^W} CT. //. 'j-io 27 10. ITID inn^ mn^] LXX Kuptos ao-^cv^ Troiiycrct tov avn'StKov avrov, i.e. (cf. 4'-^) "inno nn; (cf. is. 9, 3) for nno inni, which Th. We. Klo. would restore here. But the change is at least not a necessary one ; the casus pendens {Tenses, § 197. 2 ; GK. § 143"^) is forcible and very idiomatic : see i/^. 10, 5. 11, 4. 46,5. 89, 3. 90, 10. Is. 34, 3. — The existing text of LXX after this clause exhibits a long insertion borrowed from Jer. 9, 23 f.^ ny-i' D^rsB'n 'hv] Cf. y\r. 18, 14. The suffix in i^y (if MT.nno is retained) is to be referred to individual members of the class mno, whom the poet, for the moment, mentally particularizes. There are many such cases in Heb. poetry, e.g. Jer. 9, 7. 10, 4. 16, 6^. 31, 15 end OaKs* ^3 n^Jn ^y omn njN;p). job 18, 5. 21, 19-21. 30. .//. 7, 3. 17, I if. 35, 7 f. 41, 6f. 84, 8: see further on II 24, 13; GK. § 145m. Bu. Now. Hpt. would read Dp; D^Ct^n jrb the Most High in heaven [but D^OC^D ^from heaven ' would be better ; on the inter- change of 3 and O see Introd. § 4. i C(5 y] will break them (i/^. 2, 9). 'h Ty |n^] i/^. 29, II jn> iny^ ry ^"\ Q"i^l] i.e., as pointed, that he viay exalt. But the sense is forced: and probably D'}^'! should be read. Cf. Tenses, § 174. 13^r:)] So i/'. 18, 51 ; ""a^O \p. 2, 6. — It is plain that this verse, at any rate, cannot have been spoken by Hannah, even granting that the allusion is to the ideal king. The ideal itself, in a case like the pre- sent, presupposes the actual (notice especially the expression His anointed) ; and the thoughts of the prophets of Israel can only have risen to the conception of an ideal king after they had witnessed the establishment of the monarchy in their midst. Far more probably, however, the reference is to the actual king. And indeed in style and tone the Song throughout bears the marks of a later age than that of Hannah. Nor do the thoughts appear as the natural expression of one in Hannah's position : observe, for instance, the prominence given to ' the bows of the mighty are broken :' and contrast in this respect the Magnificat (Luke i, 46-55), where though elements are horroived from this Song, they are subordinated to the plan of the whole, and the first thought, after the opening expression of thankfulness, is ' For * Comp. the insertion in ^. 14, 3 LXX from Romans 3, 13-18. 28 ' The First Book of Samuel, He hath regarded the lowliness of His handmaiden^ The presence of the Song here does not prove more than that it was attributed to Hannah at the time when the Books of Samuel were compiled : indeed, as its position in LXX and MT. is not the same, its insertion may even belong to a later period still. A sober criticism, while not asserting categorically that the Song cannot be by Hannah, will recog- nize that its specific character and contents point to an occasion of a different kind as that upon which it was composed. The central thought of the Song is the abasement of the lofty and the elevation of the lowly, which the poet illustrates in a series of studied and well- balanced contrasts, vv. 4-8. On the ground of some humiliation which, as it seems, has recently befallen his foes, he breaks out v. i in a tone of triumphant exultation, and bids those whose sole thought was how to magnify their own importance recollect that God's all-seeing eye was ever upon them, v. 3. He points vv. 4-8 to the instances which experience affords of the proud being abased, and the humble exalted. The poem ends vv. 9-10 with an expression of confidence for the future. Human strength is no guarantee of success. Such as set themselves in opposition to Yahweh and seek to thwart His pur- poses only come to ruin : those devoted to Him are secure. Yahweh judges the earth, and in so doing designs the triumph of His own anointed king. From the last words it was inferred by Ewald\ that the poet is a king, who alludes to himself in the third person. Bat the tone is national rather than individual ; and Smend^ may be right in supposing it to have been spoken originally in the name of the people, and intended to depict Israel's triumph over the heathen and the ungodly. iia. Read with LXX nnionn ^^bril; and connect with i, 28''i, as shewn on p. 22. ^y] Several MSB. read 7N. See, however, on i, 10. 11^. mtJ'D n\"i] was ministering (at the time in question, and with which the narrative is about to deal): cf. Gen. 37, 2. Ex. 3, i. 2 Ki. 6, 8: Tenses, § 135. 5. Cf. LXX rfv Xeirovpyw ; Luke i, 10 r/v irpoaevxoiJi.ivov. 4,20. ii, 14. 13, 10. Acts i, 14. 10, 24. 12, 20 etc. 1 Die Dichter des Alien Bundes, I. i (1866), p. 157 ff. 2 ZATIV. 1888, p. 144. //. 10-14 29 13-14- Is what is described here an abuse on the part of the priests, or a rightful due ? K 1 5 f. clearly describe an abuse ; and DJ at the beginning, which expresses a climax, shews that 57. 1 3 f. must describe an abuse likewise (We.). DDIJ'D, therefore, in MT. will denote merely custom, not right, and the clause will read, 'And the custom of the priests with the priests (was this)^ :' since Th., however, practically all Commentators (including even Keil) have followed LXX, Vulg. in joining 13''^ to 12^, and in reading with LXX (Trapo, tov Xaov), for Dyn n« D^^nan, oyn nxio [nbn (cf, on i, 24 : Pesh. Targ. and 9 Heb. MSS. also read nt> -|Dp] ' Let them bum (emph.) the fat first, and (then) take,' etc. The inf. abs. strengthens the verb in a manner which may often be represented in our idiom by the use of italics. In DV3, the consciousness of DV is lost, and it is used as a mere adverb of time, especially to express the present time, as contrasted with the future, i.e. (in our idiom)/rj/ 0/ all, first. So Gen. 25, 31 "^J ini"i23 nt< DV3 n-120 sell me /rj-Z (before I give thee the pottage) thy birthright, 33. i Ki. 22, 5 inquire, I pray, first at the word of Yahweh. See Ges. Thes. s.v., Lex. 409^ h, and We. p. 37 note. T.^2: mxri ik'w] Similarly II 3, 21 ^e's: niND ncN ^22, Dt. 12, 20. 14, 26. I Ki. II, 37 al. Both njN* (in Pi'el), and the subst. njN (23, 20), are rarely used except in conjunction with tJ'S:. inn nny •'3 1^ ~1DN"i] ' And he would say to him, " Thou shalt give it me now." ' With this reading, ""a, standing before the direct narra- tion, is like on recitativwn (e.g. Luke 4, 21), and ^1, > (constanlly), 32 77?^ First Book of Samuel, and cannot be represented in English except by inverted commas : so lo, 19 MT. Gen. 29, 33. Jos. 2, 24. i Ki. i, 13. 2 Ki. 8, 13 al. The Qre and 17 MSS., however, for 1^ read vh (so LXX) 'And he would say, No; for (= but) thou shalt give it now ' (cf. 12, 12 : II 16, 18 al.). The latter is more pointed, and deserves the preference. Targ. here agrees with MT. ; Pesh. Vulg. express boih readings ^ "•nnp^] The bare perf. in the apod, is uncommon and emphatic : Tenses, § 136 y : Nu. 32, 23. ' And if not, I take it by force ! ' 17. 'ai 1^*N3 ''3] 'for the men (viz. Eli's sons) contemned,' etc. : see Nu. 16, 30^ >"'• ns n^xn u^m^n i:fNj ^3. o'^jj^jsn (with the art.) denotes men who have been in some manner specified (e.g. 6, 10. Ex. 5, 9), not men in general. 18. "lyj] accus., as a youth, etc.: see GK. § 11 81, and on v. 33, na niDS] for the constr, in the accus. after llJn, see GK. § 121'^; and cf. 17, 5. On the 'ephod' see DB. (Driver), EB. (Moore), and the writer's Exodus (191 1), p. 312 f. 19. nn^yni , , , nti^yn] ' used to make . . . and bring up: ' Gen. 2, 6 nmxn '•js ^3 riwS* npt^'ni n!?^ ini. D''o\n nnr, as i, 21 : cf. on i, 3. 20. I3^ni . . . nnxi . , . 1"l3l] 'and Eli would bless . . ., and say . . ., and they ivould go to his place.' DC'^] LXX aTTOTtcrat, i.e. D?^^ make good: cf. Ex. 21, 36 (likewise followed by nnn). With MT. cf. Gen. 4, 25 (na'). 45, 7- ^XC^'] Difficult syntactically. As the text stands, the subj. can be only the implicit pXt^ii (see on 16, 4) 'which he that asked asked ' = which was asked : but the passage is not one in which this impersonal construction would be naturally in place. Either, with We., we must point as a ptcp. pass. /XC' asked for relent to (see i, 28: the masc. ad sensiwi, the npsi^ being Samuel), or we must suppose that PNt^ is an error for i^^^^ (' in lieu of the petition which she asked for ^ Yahweh '). The former gives the better sense, though "itt'N with a bare ptcp. is not very common (Dt. i, 4- i Ki. 5, 13). If the latter be right. 1 Similar variations occur in other passages : thus Jos. 5, 14 MT. Vulg. Targ. Xb; LXX, Pesh. 1^: i Ki. 11, 22 MT. Vulg. Targ. vh; LXX 1^; Pesh. both. Cf. on V. 3. 2 Inadvertently quoted by Jastrow {JBLit. 1900, p. 87) ' asked //-. 33, 1 2 [n^riJ? r? would here be heavy]. 132, 13. Is. 49, 5. Job 13, 24. 30, 21: Lex. 512b). The fact, however, that a family, and not an individual, is referred to suggests //. 2s-2g 37 that we should (with LXX lepareueiv) vocalize lO^p (Bu.). Ehrlich objects to this that we always have v |n3p (Ex. 28, 41. 29, i al.): but might not *•? be prefixed for emphasis? Otherwise the tribe (inN = /'/, not hini), as a whole, must be regarded as ' priest ' to Yahweh ; cf. the sing, numbers in Dt. 31, i6'^-i8. Is. 5, 26-30. 17, 13^-148', etc. T\'h^'\ is naturally Qal (LXX, Pesh. Vulg. Ke. Klo. Bu. Now.), though it 7night be Hif. (Targ. Th.) for m^yni' (comp, v. 33. II 19, 19 i^nyb; Ex. 13, 21 nnmb; Nu. 5, 22 ^^'b, nni'b; Dt. i, 33 Qinxi^; 26, 12 "'^r'V^); however, as the contraction is not common (about twenty instances altogether in MT.'), and there is nothing here to suggest or require the Hif., the latter is less probable. To go up upon the altar, i. e. upon a ledge beside it, as Ex. 20, 26 ; i Ki. 12, 33 ; 2 Ki. 16, 12 end ; 23, 9 : conversely, TT* is used of coming down from it, Lev. 9, 22 : cf. i Ki. i, 53. T:£iX riNC*?] ' to bear, — not, to wear, — the ephod before me.' So always. Cf. DB. i. 726^; Moore in EB. ii. 1307; the writer's Exodus, 313; and Kennedy's note here. For niiT" ^CN, cf Dt. 18, i, 29. fiyc] Untranslateable : if pyD is right, read ''3iym ; ""DiyD (RV., implicitly) is not sufficient '^. Jiyo is a word found mostly in poetry. » To those given in the text add II 18, 3 Kt. T'ty^ ; 2 Ki. 9, 15 Kt. T-jb; Is. 3, 8 ninob ; 23, II nJDtJ'^ ; 29, 15 -IDD^ ; 33, i (corrupt) "]ni^:? ; Jer. 27, 20 im^jn; 37> 12 pSn^; 39,7 N^nS; Am. 8, 4 D^aB'^; i/'. 26, 7 yCK*^ ; 73, 2o(?) Ty3; 78, 17 nnrob. Pr. 31, 3 nino^; Dan. u, 35 \zhb. Qoh. 5, 5 x^t^ni?. Neh. TO, 39 "ib'ya. 2 Ch. 31, 10 N''37. (In some of these instances the text may be doubtful, or the punctuation as Hif. unnecessary.) Comp. in the Nif. niyb Ex. 10, 3. i^tj'aa Pr. 24, 17. f^Dya Lam. 2, n. niN^ job 33, 30; and (as pointed) niXlP Ex.34, 24- Dt. 31, 11. Is. 1, 12: also T\T\'^ Ez. 26, 15. ^ n^3, or n^Bil (absol.), never means '/« the house:' by custom the use of the accus. to express rest in a place is restricted to cases in which a noun in the genitive follows, as ^^N JT-a, "J^DH T\''1^ •""> n''2. So "lyiD S"1N nDD {v. 22), vHX nns (Ex. 33, 10) at the entrance of his tent : but at the entratice (absolutely) would be nnSS , not nnsn simply. So pX'D''^ DnP"n'3 may denote ' in Bethel,' ' /« Bethlehem:' but 'in Gibeon,' 'in Dan' must be expressed by pyD:i3, p3 (see 2 Ki. 10, 29'^). Where a word like vti* DpCIT' seems to denote at Shiloh, at Jerusalem, it will be found that a verb of motion always precedes, of which the subst. expresses the goal: so e.g. II 20,3; Dt. 3, i; Jud. 21,12. Hence KHp ^. 134, 2 \s '■ to the sanctuary.' (Exceptions to what has been here said may be found in MT., but they are very rare : e.g. Is. 16, 2. 2 Ch. 33, 20.) 38 77?^ First Book of Samuel, and the more elevated prose (v/^. 26, 8 "]n''3 pyo, of the Temple; Dt. 20, 15 al. ']'\yip \'\V'0, of heaven) : so it would not be unsuitable. The objections that its absolute use is late (iJiyi? 2 Ch. 36, i5t), and that it is here superfluous, are not cogent. LXX (omitting ''JT'IV *^t^♦^{) have Iva. T6 tVe/SAci/'as . . . dmiSei d(}iOaXfX(^ ; i.e. J^^Si? (or t3"'2ri) and (Klo.) r.^y?' ' ^^'4>' '^^'^'^^ ^'^^^ /o£>^^^ (or, dost thou look) upon . , . with an evil eye?' lit. eyeing it (18, 9). So Bu. Sm. (not Now.). But piyo is a very doubtful restoration. D3xnnn^] Read probably either the Nif. D??^l?!?f' (Bu.), or Df l^nb (Ehrlich). ••JDy^] This again cannot be right. ' We might easily alter ^NIC'"' ■•oy^ to ""Dy ^N-lD'\ but the h appears also in 'Js!) of LXX' (We.). Perhaps "*33p, — or TVP, though efxirpoaOev does not elsewhere represent this, — is the true reading; it is accepted by Hitzig (on Amos 2, 13), Bu. Now.; the meaning will be, in full vieiv 0/ me, — aggravating the slight. 30. TinDN ni^:x] = '/ said' (emph.). The intention, which had afterwards to be abandoned, is emphasized by the inf. abs. ■•JS? 137nn''] To walk be/ore any one is to live and move openly before him (12, 2. 2 Ki. 20, 3); esp. in such a way as {a) to deserve, and consequently {b) to enjoy, his approval and favour. The expression is used chiefly of walking before God; and then sometimes one of these ideas is the more prominent, sometimes the other. Thus in Gen. 17, I, and prob. in 24, 40. 48, 15 the thought of (i?) predominates (LXX cuapeo-Tctv IvavTiov or evojTrtov) ; here, V. 35, and \p. 56, 14. 116, 9 [shall, not will] the thought of {b) predominates. (The expression is not so strong as D\n^Nn riN "jirinn Gen. 5, 22. 24. 6, 9.) 31. 'ai D"'X2 CO^ run] A formula occurring besides only 2 Ki. 20, 17 ( = Is. 39, 6), and in the prophecies of Amos and Jeremiah. "iy-iT ns "Tiynji] Cf. for the figure Jud. 21, 6 nnN £32^^ Dvn yn:j ^NT^^tt and Jer. 48, 25 rr\2m iyhn 2N1D r\p nyiJJ. LXX vocalized 10; but this by no means agrees so well as MT. ^pt with the figure implied in '»nyi:i. Pj metaph. of strength, as Job 22, 8 B'''N1 Y-^^r\ h ynr; yp. 10, 15 w'\ y"ir -13c'; 83, 9. 32. pyjD -i:»"] Again, if pyo is right (cf. on 29), we must read either '3iyD (RV.) or 'Jiyjp? (RV. m.). Eli, however, whose death is recorded //. 2g-s3 39 in 4, 21, did not survive any time when the temple at Shiloh was unfortunate, and Israel in general prosperous. The clause must consequently be corrupt. Bo. suggested tiyo IV ' and thou shalt look for a rock of defence : ' but D^an with an accus. is not to look for something non-existent, or not visible, but to look al, or behold, something actually in view. No satisfactory emendation has been proposed. "IK'S* ^33] lit. ' in the whole of (that,) as to which ...'=' in all w^herein . . .' "IC'X ^33 is commonly followed by a verb of motion, as 14, 47, in which case it = wherever. DN 3''D^''] 3''t3M with a personal object is usually construed with ^ or Dy (Gen. 12, 16; 32, 10. 13 al.): the construction with an accus. is chiefly Deuteronomic (Dt. 8, 16. 28, 63. 30, 5; so Jer. 18, 10. 32, 40. 41 ; also Zech. 8, 15. \p. 51, 20). A subject to 3'D^"' is desiderated. We must either suppose that nin" has fallen out after it (Bu. Now. Kit. : observe that EVV. supply ' God ' in italics), or read 3''D^N (Sm. Bu. alt., Dhorme). 33. 'Yet one I will not cut off belonging to thee from mine altar,' etc. "]^ is the dat. of reference, as often in similar phrases : II 3, 29. i Ki. 2, 4. 9, 5. 14, 10 al. {Lex. 512b 5). Dyo] Cf. Ex. 21, 14. 'y\ nibi?] Cf. Lev. 26, 16 (certain diseases) K'DJ ni^nci D^ry ni^rO; Dt. 28, 65 C'SJ P3NT1 D^ry jvb. 3nx^] for ^nNnlj (on v. 28), from [3nN] = 3NT. 31N, however, is not substantiated elsewhere, in either Hebrew or the cognate languages: it is probable therefore that X is merely an error for n, and that ^"'inpi (corresponding to n3nD in Lev. /.c.) should be restored. Cf. Jer. 25, 3 D"'3K>X for D"'3K^'n. Tw'DJ . . , T'^'^y] The C'"'X, no doubt, is Abiathar, who escaped the massacre of the priests ch. 22, was David's faithful attendant during his lifetime, but was removed from the priesthood by Solomon, and banished by him from Jerusalem, on account of the part taken by him in the attempt of Adonijah to secure the throne (.see i Ki. 2, 27). If MT. be right, the reference must be to the father, supposed to be conscious of the fortunes of his descendant, and suffering with him. Such a sense, however, seems to be one which is scarcely likely to 40 The First Book of Samuel, have been in the writer's mind (contrast Job 14, 21). LXX read 1L*'SJ . . . VJ-iy, the pronouns referring to Abialhar himself, the end of whose Hfe was passed in disappointment and vexation. This is preferable (so We. Th. Klo. etc.). n^3-itt] Ihe increase (viz. generally, so far as none are specially exempted). Or, perhaps, as i Ch. 12, 29, ihe greater pari. D^C'JN inin^] 'will die as men' (= in the flower of their age, AV.), D^-^JN being an (implicit) accus., defining their condition at the time of dying. So Is. 65, 20 nw njt^ HND p will die as a man 100 years old; Lev. 20, 20 {Tenses, § 161. 3; GK. § 1181). But, though the grammatical construction is unexceptionable, CB^JN does not signify adults, in contradistinction to men of any other age ; and LXX has Iv f)Ofxcf>aca di'Spu)v ; in all probability therefore a word has fallen out in MT., and D^K^JK nnna should be restored. 35. ':i 1t^^i3] for the expression, cf. 14, 7. II 7, 3. 2 Ki. 10, 30. The clause is attached to what precedes somewhat abruptly, but a similar abruptness may be observed sometimes in the Books of Samuel : e.g. 9, 6*; 19, 5 noj^^m n''N->. 35b. psj n^3] Cf 25, 28 (the hope expressed by Abigail). ^n-'K^D] The passage, like 2, 10, presupposes the establishment of the monarchy (^"^ n^^^D: 16, 6; 24, 7. 11 etc.). The original pro- phecy must have been re-cast by the narrator, and in its new form coloured by the associations with which he was himself familiar. The meaning is that the faithful priest will enjoy the royal favour con- tinually. 36. ':) n^^1] lit. 'and it shall be, as regards all that are left (= whoever is left) in thy father's house, he shall come ' etc. The construction exactly resembles Dt. 20, 11 ; II 15, 35: and whhout b, Nu. 17, 20 (cf 16, 7); I Ki. 19, 17 {Tenses, § 121, Ods. i). The force of b2 is similar to that in v. 13. Instead of Nia^ the sentence might with equal propriety have been resumed by the pf. and wazv conv. N31: see Nu. 21, 8 ; Jud. 11, 31 : the construction with the impf. is, however, somewhat more flowing, and less formal. ■•JnDD] nSD is to attach: 26, 19. Is. 14, i 2p]}^ n''2 bv inDD:i : Job 30, 7 Fu'al {= to cling together) t. (In Hab. 2, 15 read ^^^.) The interpretation of the entire passage, from v. 31, is difficult. In //. 33-3^ 41 MT. two troubles are threatened to Eli, (i) a sudden disaster -^x^ \ 33b, from which few will escape of his entire family (T^K n^3 v. 31): (2) a permanetit weakening of his family (32^" ' no old man in thy house continual!}' '). No doubt in 31^. 33b the allusion is to the massacre of the priests at Nob (22, 17-20): and Abiathar himself is the one alluded to in 33a, who escaped the massacre, and so was not 'cut off' from the altar, continuing to hold the office of priest under David, and only superseded by Zadoq (the faithful priest of v. 35) upon the accession of Solomon. The sign in v. 34 is of course the death of Hophni and Phinehas, recorded in ch. 4. But with reference to the passage as a whole, it is difficult to resist We.'s argument. As the text stands, v. 32«' expresses a consequence of 31 : it deals, however, with something which Eli is to witness himself: hence 31 must refer to something within Eli's own lifetime — which can only be the disaster of ch. 4, in which his two sons perished. This implies that the survivor in 33 is Ahitub (14, 3); and that 35 relates to Samuel (so Th.). But the 'sign' in 34 is also the disaster off//. 4: consequently, upon this interpretation, the death of Eli's sons is a ' sign,' not of some occurrence in the remoter future, but of itself ! F. 31 must thus refer to something subsequenl to ch. 4, and so, subse- quent also to Eli's death (the massacre at Nob, as explained above) : it follows that the text of 32* cannot be correct, — as indeed was already surmised above, upon independent grounds. LXX omits both 31^ and 32*; and We. supposes that 31^ and 32b are but two forms of one and the same gloss, due originally to an (incorrect) application of 31* to the disaster of ch. 4. Still, though it is true that 33*, expressing a limildiion of 31^, would form a natural sequel to it, it would follow it somewhat quickly and abruptly; and the omission in LXX is open to the suspicion of being due to the recurrence of the same words fpT '\T\^yi in both 31^ and 32^. What is really wanted in lieu of the corrupt words at the beginning of 32 is something which would lead on naturally to the notice of the permanent weakening of Eli's family — ^ This sense of the figure seems to be demanded by the limitation which follows in 33* (' Yet one I will not cut offio thee from mine altar'). V. 33'' cannot be a limitation to 32'*: for the sparing of a single individual, on a particular occasion, forms no exception to \\\z peryiianent weakening oi&fatinly. 42 The First Book of Samuel, vhich is the point in which 32^ advances beyond 31''. Did we possess 328' in its original form, it would yield, we may suppose, a suitable sequence : 31 would refer to the massacre at Nob, 32 to the after-history of Eli's family (comp. 36 'jn''33 "iniJn ?3), and 33 would revert to the subject of 31 in order to follow the fortunes of the survivor, Abialhar (22, 20). 3. I. np"*] precious = rare, as Is. 13, 12 TQO nJN n^l^*- )nS3] spread abroad = frequent : 2 Ch. 31,5 "'?"!Jl' P??]- 2. '31 33{J' vyi] From here to the end of v. 3 follow a series of circumstantial clauses, describing the conditions which obtained at the time when what is related in v. 4 took place. nini] fern. pi. from '^'^^., an adj. of the form expressive of bodily defects d)n, DDS, "iiy, K'-in (GK. § 84^. 21). Syntactically the adj. is to be conceived here as an accusative, deiining the aspect under which Eli's eyes 'began:' lit., therefore, 'began as dim ojies' ■= began to be dim. Cf. Is. 33, I *ni::> "jOTina when thou finishest as a devastator = when thou finishest to devastate. See GK. § 120^^; Tenses, § 161. 2, and p. xvi; and cf. Segal, Misnaic Hebrew (1909), p. 49. But the inf. riin3 would be more in accordance with the Biblical usage of ^nn (Sm. Bu. Now.): see Dt. 2, 25. 31. Jos. 3, 7 (Sm.). i^^V N^] expressing his cotitinued inability more distinctly than ^'y N? would have done: so Gen. 48, 10; Jos. 15, 63 Kt, 3^. Evidently Samuel was sleeping in close proximity to the ark — perhaps, in a chamber contiguous to the ?3\T in which it was, if not, as the Hebrew taken strictly would imply, actually in the paTl itself. 4. ^NlOtJ' ^n] LXX h>^'\'0^ ^NintJ', no doubt rightly : cf. v. 10, where we read 'as be/oretme, Samuel, Samuel.' In v. 6 LXX repeats the name similarly, not expressing Dp''! (which may have come in here as a gloss suggested by v. 8). The repetition can hardly have been introduced by LXX on the strength o{ v. 10 ; for there the name (both times) is not expressed by them at all. The only other similar duplications in OT. are Gen. 22, 11. 46, 2. Ex. 3, 4. 5. ^?] For the dagesh, see GK. § 20^. 1'2^ 31K'] ' return, lie down ' = lie down again : cf. Is. 21, 12 ^3t^ Vrx ; and see on 2, 3. 7. Vl^] DID followed by a perfect is very rare : Tenses, §27/3 note. ///. i-i) 43 Here, the parallel '"175^ makes it probable that the narrator himself would have vocalized VT. : cf. GK. § 107c. 8. N"?P] was calling : Gen. 42, 23 ; EVV. wrongly had called. 10. aVfT'l] Cf. the description of a nocturnal revelation in Job 4, 16. Dy23 oysD] So 20, 25. Jud. 16, 20. 20, 30. 31. Nu. 24, it; Dva DV3 ch. 18, lot; ny^"! nj::'D 2 Ki. 17, 4t. oysn oys does not occur alone ; but (on the analogy of n:D*3 nJC 1,7) would mean one time like a«cM^A- = generally : hence, with 3 prefixed, as generally, or, as we may substitute in a case like the present, ' as at (other) times.' 11. n;^y '•JJN njn] ^ Lo, I am doing=Lo, I am about to do:' the ' futurum instans,' as often in Divine announcements, v. 13, Gen. 6, 1 7. Ex. 9, 3. Dt. I, 20 (see Tenses, § 135. 3; GK. § ii6p). Cf. 10, 8. lib. The same figure 2 Ki. 21, 12. Jer. 19, 3t. In both passages, the form, from bb'i, is written nj^Jfn (GK. §67^). With the form here, cf. nr^Dri; and in explanation of the hireg, see GK. § 67P. For the syntax o()]}D\^~b2, see Tenses, § 121, 05s. i, note; GK. § 116^. 12. • does not mean to bring a curse tipoti any one, and is followed not by a dative, but by an accusative. There can be little doubt that LXX oTt /caKoXoyowTts ©cov have preserved the true reading, viz. CP^pD ''3 v:a D'^n'^X (cf. Ex. 22, 27 ^^pn N^ D^^^N). If the text be correct, DH^ can only be construed as a reflexive dative (Ew. § 315*; Lex. 515^ h) ' cursed ybr themselves = at their pleasure : ' cf. ^. 44, 11 end ; 80, 7 \rh IJy^"' ; Job 6, 19 irD^ llp. But this does not yield a satisfactory sense. nnsj Only here. Apparently (Nold. Mand. Grarnm., p. 72 ;/.) a by-form of Syr. \\s to rebuke (sq. o i Ki. i, 6 o»2> J^o ]Jo). In Mand. the form is sna. Cf. Arab, ij^ verbis dolore affecit (Freyt.), 14. p^] LXX ovK oiJtws (attaching the words to v. 13), strangely treating p^, as though contracted from p-N^. So elsewhere, as Gen. 4, 15 (also Pesh. Vulg. here); 30, 15 (1?? in these passages has an idiomatic force: cf. on 28, 2). i Ki. 22, 19. 2 Ki. i, 4. 6. 21, 12. 22, 20 al. With 1 41* cf. Is. 21, 14. DX] On nx after an ozXYi,^^ surely not, see GK. § 149^'''; Lex. 50^ "I2:)n''] LXX, rightly, iiiXaaO^creTai. The actual meanings, and usages, of *1S3 can be determined from the OT. itself : see the writer's art. Propitiation in D£. iv. (1902). Whether, however, as used to be supposed, and is assumed (though not confidently) in this art., the primary meaning of the root was (from Arab, ka/ara) to cover is now doubtful. 12? corresponds to the Assyr. kuppuru, which, whether its primary meaning was to zvipe away (Zimmern, KAT? 601 f ; cf. Syr. i^a), or to remove (Langdon, Exp. Times, xxii. (1910-11), pp. 320 fF., 380 f.) ^, in actual use denotes ritual purgation (e.g. from disease); and the word seems to have come into Heb. from Assyrian with this sense attaching to it, which was there developed so as to express the related ideas of to expiate (or declare expiated) sin, to clear the offender, and to appease the offended person. See the writer's art. Expiation in Hastings' Encycl. of Religion and Ethics. 15. 'In MT. Ip2| Q2^>1 (LXX) has been passed over after "ipnn-ny ' (We.). 16. bxiOC'-nx] 44 MSS. better, ^N1Dt^' ^X. 17. 01 nL"y^ na] A form of imprecation peculiar to Ruth, Samuel, ^ For a third view (that the root meant originally to brighten, and so io purify), see Burney, ib. 325 ff. ; Ball, ib. 478 f. ///. I3-IV. I 45 and Kings: 14, 44. 20, 13. 25, 22. II 3, 9. 35. 19, 14. Ruth i, 17. I Ki. 2, 23. 2 Ki. 6, 31, and with a //. verb (in the mouth of Jezebel and Benhadad) i Ki. 19, 2 : 20, 10 1. 19. 'ii ^^sn s*h] For the idiom cf. 2 Ki. 10, 10 ^"^ ^n^O ^S^ nS ^3 n^'"lX; and, in Qal, and without nviS, in the Deuteronomic passages Jos. 21, 43 (45). 23, 14. I Ki. 8, 56 : also Est. 6, 10. p has a partitive force, with a neg. = ' aught of,' as Dt. 16, 4 {Lex. 580^ 3 ac). 20. '21 19*^^] (^vas) one accredited or approved to be a prophet unto Yahweh. (The ptcp., not the pf ) N^3J^] as -Vlh 9, 16; 13, 14; -^rh 15, i; II 2, 4 al. 21. ""l^5"3!]_r'J So Jud. 13, 2it, for the normal riiNin : Stade, § 622^^; GK. § 75c. ■ On the clause at the end of 2 1 (see Kittel), restored by Klo. from LXX, Ehrl. remarks rightly (see all the instances on 6, 12) that wherever the construction h^XI "ll^n "i^"'! occurs, the second inf. is always used absolutely, and is never followed by an object. 4, i'^. This should stand as the concluding clause of 3, 21. 4, lb — 7, I. Defeat of Israel by the Philistines. Capture and restoration of the Ark. 4, i^. LXX introduce this section by the words Kat iyevrjOr] iv rat? T/yLiepats c/ccivais Kat crvva6poLt,ovT ai aW6<^vXoi €ts ttoXc/aov ctti 'I(rpa^X = bwSiK''' bv rv^rh'oh tirwih^ ivap'"i onn q-'ou m'"i. Something of this sort is required, if only for the sake of explaining the following nxip?, though the clause (taken with what follows in which the same word occurs) would be the better for the omission of T\t2rhty?. iryn ]2'J}\ and the battle was hard ; cf. II 2, 17 nK'j? HDn^on \nni : so Bu. 13^1] LXX, Pesh. Vulg. «.'1. 3-5. LXX read in v. 3 "I3^^^X jnx-nx, in v. 4^ nin'' jns ns (without msn^*), in V. 4I3 p-isn (for D^^i?N^ nnn ins), and in v. 5 m.T jnx, thus omitting nns each time, in accordance with the general custom of MT. in Samuel (j'!7. 6. 1 1. 17-22 ; 3, 3 ; ch. 5-6 ; II 6 throughout ; II 15, 24^/3. 25. 29 [on V. 24aa see note]). Probably it was introduced here into MT. at a time when the expression was in more general use than it had always been. 4. D{J'"i] LXX, Vulg. omit Dti' — no doubt, rightly. The point is not that Eli's sons were at Shiloh, but that they came with the ark into the camp (v. 11). The word may have been introduced ac- cidentally through a reminiscence of i, 3 (We.). 5. x'\\r\ onni : Ruth i, 19 n'^yn onni. On the form Dnril, see GK. § 72^. Din (usually Djon), however, is to confuse, discomfit, Dt. 7, 23 : what we expect is a form from 'IDn to be in com- motion, stir, of a city, i Ki. i, 41. Is. 22, 2 : so Ehrlich may be right < in vocalizing DlIIIII. 7. DNHPX X3] The Philistines would hardly speak of Yahweh as ' God ' absolutely : read probably DH^n; D^^•^■^^^ N3 (We.). nON"'l] Not to be omitted (LXX). Though the speakers are the same as in », the remark is of a different character : and in such cases the repetition of noNM is a genuine Hebrew idiom (We.): e.g. 26, 9-10. II 17, 7-8. nxD] LXX roiavTTi — a Hebraism: cf i//. 27, 14 ixiav ; 102, 19. 119, 50. 56 avrri; tijv fMOUoyevrj /x.ow^TlTri'' i//. 22, 21 al. ; also Jud. 7, 14; 1/^. 32, 6; 118, 23 (Matth. 21, 42), notwithstanding the fact that IV. 2-1) 47 in these cases there is a subst. in the Greek to which the fem, might conceivably be referred. 8. n^sn D''insn] DM^N construed as a pi. in the mouth of a heathen (cf. I Ki. 19, 2), as also, sometimes, in converse with one, Gen. 20, 13 (Ew. § 318* end). However, this limitation is not universal : see Gen. 35, 7 ; Jos. 24, 19 Nin Ct'np Wrh^a. ••3 (the plur. of majesty), II 7, 23 (but see note); x^r. 58, 12 (unless D^'^7N here=divine beings); and in the phrase D^^n □''H^S Dt. 5, 23 al. (Is. 37, 4. 17 Tl DM?N : in poetry also ^n ^N is used Hos. 2, i al.). Cf GK. §§ 1248, 132^, 145'. DH n7S] Gen. 25, 16 al. : Tenses, § 201. 3; Lex. 241^4. ri3D ^32] ' With every manner of smiting,' Kp., excellently, nao is not a ' plague,' though it may be a irX-qyrj, but rather denotes slaughter, V. 10. 6, 19. 19, 8. -|3n»3l] Probably •'"'9^?'' (We.) should be read. 9. Dn^^ni] carrying on . . . mi iptnnn : GK. § i i2r. D^tt^JN^ Dn''\ni is logically superfluous; but it resumes D''5i'iN-' Vni after the following clause, in accordance with the principle noticed on 17, 13 and 25, 26. 10. Yhr\^ j:'''N'] The Versions express l^nx^: but in this phrase, except Jud. 20, 8 (which is not altogether parallel), the plural is regularly found. i'S"'!] the sing, as Jud. 12, 6^: cf. on i, 2. "hyi] construed with tj^S as a collective : so ^'''X ^^^f, 133 ^^, etc. 12. lO''J3-:i'''N] It is the rule in Heb. (GK. § 127a), — though there are exceptions (§ 127®), — that a determinate gen. determines the preceding no?)ien regens : hence We. remarks here that '3 C'N means only Uhe man of B.,' — either a particular hiotvfi man (Nu. 25, 8. Jud. 7, 14. 10, i), or, more commonly, 'the men of B.' (so ^Nlt^'' B'^N, Dnsx K'^'X, nm.T ^^, etc., constantly): comp. Moore on Jud. 7, 14, p. 207. Accordingly, as '3 B'"'K is here not determinate, We. Klo. Bu. Now. would read, with LXX (dv^'Ic/tetvaros), either 'J'0:"i| C^-^N (cf 9, 21), or 'T^\ ^'^ (II 20, i). Ehrlich, cleverly, iD^J3 for Jr3^:3; cf v. i6. 13. ns^fD "JTI (Qre T") T"] The meaningless y is corrected by the Massorites to^! : but though we have ... T? 19, 3. \p. 140, 6 byo 1^^ ; . . . i: ^y II 15, 2 nyc^n x^'^ t i^y. Job i, 14 ; . . . i! ^x II 14, 30. 18, 4 "^yj^'n T' ?N; . . .T by itself is not used to express position (though such a use of it would not, it is true, be contrary to analogy : 48 The First Book of Samuel, see on 2, 2() footnote). The article also (the passage behig prose) is desiderated with TTi : so (i)the smallest change would be 1 Tin 'T'7 nSVI3 (= Pesh.). (2) LXX xapa T^v ttvAijv (r/coTrevwi/ ry]v oSov = 1v' TTin nsvo -iyt:'n (of. Pr. 8, 3 nnyti' T-^ and Nah. 2, 2 '^^"1 ns^*): so We. (cf. V. 18). (3) Targ, has N3D0 xyin nils* C'33 ^J? exactly as II 15, 2 (and also 18, 4). This rendering agrees with LXX in pre- supposing 'gate,' and would point to naVD "ly^'H "i-n T"^ as the original text. The supposition that "lyiJ'n has fallen out would most readily explain the absence of the art. with "i"n in MT. But probably the second of the suggested corrections is the best (so Bu. Now.). 15. nop] Vyy being conceived as a collective is construed with its predicate in K\itfem. sing. : so Dt. 21, 7 TOl^'V N^? IJ^i (Qre needlessly 1335^^). y\>. 18, 35. 37, 31 V-nC'S ny»n N^. 73, 2 Kt. etc. : see Ew. § 317a; GK. § 145^^. The Arabic 'broken,' or collective, plural is construed constantly in the same way: Wright, Ar. Gr., ii. §§ 144, 146. Dp recurs in the same sense i Ki. 14, 4 (of Ahijah). 16. N3n ''33s] Not ' I am come,' but ' I am he that is come' (6 ^kwv LXX) : surmising that Eli would expect some one with news, the messenger replies that he is the man. Cf. Dt. 3, 21. 8, 18. Is. 14, 27 {Tenses, § 135. 7 ; GK. § 126!^). Notice the order 'l^ ''3N1. nnnyi^n (first time)] It is an improvement to read, with LXX, Klo. Bu. Kit. Dh., ninen iJje camp. 17. "iC'non] The original sense of the word has been forgotten, and it is used for a bearer of tidings generally, even though, as here, the tidings be bad ones. 18. ^'^'2r\ /yo] We say simply, ^{€Afrom the seat:' Heb. in such cases says 'from upon:'' so \Th^r\ ^yo, r\1\r:T\ ^yo, etc. (see Lex. 758). n*- lyn] LXX cxo/acvos (cf. footnote on v. 13). We. considers T* and ny3 to be different corruptions of an original T^ : and, although 'VI in this sense is very rare (Job if;, 23. Zech. 4, i2t^; cf. "'T'n ^. 141, 6), the usual idioms being Tp, "!'"?>?, or T-^y (see on v. 13), it seems that we must acquiesce in it (so Sm. Bu. Now. Kit.). ^ It is true that elsewhere LXX render compounds of T" by avh. x«P«» or €xo>t€i'a : but absolute uniformity is hardly to be expected of them in such a matter as this, even in one and the same book. 2 lu Jer. 41, 9 Kin i?n: 1U is clearly to be read, with LXX, for NIH in''Pn3 T'3. IV. IJ-2I 49 19- '^It ^'^"^- ^''^"^ ['"""^O]' of the same form as HD^, nsj. n??] An isolated example of a contracted form of the inf. m?? : the original [^\2'\ becoming exceptionally To instead of 01^, just as [J!'"]!!'^] the fem. of *in? becomes regularly nns and not [^"JO- J- The form, however, in the inf. of verbs ^''a is without parallel ; so that in all probability it is a mere transcriptional error for ni^?, the usual form (so GK. § 69™). 7^i] wtlh reference to, about, as v. 21. Gen. 20, 2. i/^. 2, 7. < noi] the finite verb by GK.§ 1141". DD^l is, however, the tense that would be expected (cf. on i, 12). But riiJ0~,N1 and about the death ^(Sm., with 6 MSS.) would be better Hebrew. nnv ff^y ISSna] Dan. 10, 16; CTV also Is. 13, 8. 21, 3 f. Turned — came unexpectedly. 20. njimril nniO ny^l] The predicate, after a time-determination, being introduced by •\, as happens occasionally : 17, 57. Gen. 19, 15. 27) 34- 37. 18 al.: r^wj^i-, § 127/3; GK. § iii^ iT^y] 3y (lit. over") her: cf. Gen. 18, 2; and see on II 15, 4. na? nriB'] Ex. 7, 23. II 13, 20 al., in the same sense of vovv irpoa-ex^cv, am'mu?fi attendere. 21. 1U3 ''X] "•{< is frequent as a negative in the Mishnah, and other post-Bibl. Hebrew, and occurs once with the same force in the OT., Job 22, 30 (though the text here is very suspicious) \ It may have been current anciently in colloquial Hebrew. It is, however, very doubtful whether ' Inglorious ' is the real etym. of Ichabod : more probably it is a popular etymology, Hke those given for \' D^miD) : it is an ominous word in Hebrew, and expresses ' is gone ^ It is found also in Phoenician (Cooke, A^S/. 4, 4. 5, 5 ; CIS. 165, 18. 21. 167, 11) : and it is the regular and ordinary negative in Ethiopic. 1B65 E 50 77?^ First Book of Samuel, into exile' It is probable that this victory of the Philistines was followed by that 'desolation' of Shiloh, of which, though the historical books are silent, the recollection was still far from forgotten in Jeremiah's day (7, 12. 14. 26, 6), and to which a late Psalmist alludes (V^. 78, 60). 5, I. mntJ'N] Ashdod, now Esdud, one of the five principal Philis- tine cities (6, i), 33 miles due west of Jerusalem, and about half-way between joppa and Gaza, 3 miles from the sea-coast. 2. 3''^n] to station or stand an object (or person) : Gen. 43, 9. 47, 2. II 6, 17 (likewise of the ark). A more definite word than D^'C 3. nnnc^'N] Read onnt^^xn. JT^ncUD] 'Though in v. 4 the purpose for which the Ashdodites arose early is clear from what has preceded, and need not therefore be specified expressly, the case in the present verse is different : and no doubt pj"l n''2 1X3''1 must be inserted before n:ni with LXX. ... It will be best also to accept the following ^N"i*1 of LXX at the same time, in order to follow throughout one and the same recension ' (We.). VJS?] to fall 071 ones own face, is always in Heb. either VJD /'U (17, 49 and often), or else VDnIj (Gen. 48, 12 al.), or vax ^y (II 14, 4 al.) ; hence We.'s remark: 'For WS? here and v. 4, usage requires either VJS ^y (LXX^) or VSN?.' It is for the purpose of giving a rendering of the existing MT. in accordance with the general usage of the language that RV. marg. has the alternative ' before it,' the following niiT IliN ''JS? being regarded as an explanation of VJ27. But though such explanatory additions occur (Lev. 6, 8. Nu. 32, 33. 1 Ch. 4, 42. 2 Ch. 26, 14) they are exceptional, and are often under the suspicion of having been introduced as a gloss (Jos. i, 2 [^J3? h^'W not in LXX]. Jud. 21, 7 Dnnub. Jer. 41, 3 [vT^IJ nx not in LXX]). It is better here to restore VJD i'y. inp''l] LXX Kttt ^yetpav, i.e. 1^!?^ 'and raised up :' so Sm. Bu. Dh. A more expressive word than 'took.' 4. V^y "IXK^J fin p")] 'only Dagon was left upon him' (upon Dagon), which can scarcely be right. LXX ttAt/j/ rj pdx'-'s Aaywi^ vTreXeL(f>6r] — * It is not, however, certain that LXX read VJQ ?y rather than VDX? : the latter is rendered by them equally inl -npocwiTov aiirov in 20, 41 and II 18, 28. V. 1-6 51 according to We., reading probably nothing different from MT., but being led to pa;(is by the similarity to the Hebrew p"i (We. compares Bpeiravov for \2~\1 13, 21, TrapaTeivovaa for pn3 (|ri"l3) II 2, 29, i.a-)(api- T17S for nS'J'N ("I3C'N), II 6, 19 ; add hopa for mnx Gen. 25, 25 ; 7r77yai for D''p"'DN i/'. 42, 2 al., TOKOS for '^'^ (oppression) 55, 12 al., rpotf}!] for f)1t3 III, 5, TOTToi^iov for TS (gold) 119, 127). We. for |in would read W'l (supposing the \ to have arisen by dittography from •^N•L^'J) ' only his fishy part was left upon him.' This, however, is not very satisfactory ; and, as paxis means ' back,' and ttAt/v upon We.'s explanation remains unaccounted for, it is better to insert 12 back before pjl, or (Lagarde) to read il.a his back for pjl. So Bu. Now. 5. 13"n''] the impf, as II 5, 8. Gen. 10, 9. 22, 14 etc., expressing the custom. nfn DVn ny] LXX add on vTrep^aivovTe"'l (incorrectly) as DCb*^! : cf Ex. 15, 26. Ez. 39, 21 (We.). LXX continue : Kal H^^eaev avTOL? eis Tcis vaus, with a variant (in Lucian's recension) Kal iie^paaav CIS Tois vaOs avTwv, on which see We., and Aptowitzer, ZAW. 1909, 242 f DDt^M means (7«. Ex. 2, 23 D\-i^Nn ^N DnyVkT ^ym — the only other passage in which ^"^^^ occurs in prose. 6, I. Cli'lnJ LXX adds Kat e^e'^to-tv t) y^ avTuty /Avas = 0^*"]^] Dn33y ni-T^ (cf. Ex. 7, 28). See at the end of the chapter. 2. D^CDp?] On DDp as well as on the other principal words used by the Hebrews to denote divination and magic, the study of W. Robert- son Smith in the Journal of Philology, xiii. p. 273 fF., xiv. p. 113 ff. should be consulted. See also the writer's notes on Dt. i8, 10. 11. nD2] wherewith ? as Mic. 6, 6 (Keil). 3. cn^C'D DS] LXX, Pesh. Dns n^n^C'D DN. Analogy certainly demands the insertion of the subject ; see especially the similarly framed sentences, Jud. 9, 15. 11, 9. Jer. 42, 13 {Terises, § 137): with the ptcp. the subject is omitted only when it is indefinite, or when it has been mentioned just previously {ib. § 135. 6; cf. GK. § 116?' t). ITCn] returti, render as a due {air-ohovvai) : Nu. 5, 7 ; ij/. ']2, 10 ^2^'^ nmD : 2 Ki. 3, 4 (of Mesha's annual tribute to Israel), etc. Dti*N] AV. trespass-offering^ RV. guilt- offering (regularly, except Is. 53, 10, where AV. is not altered, but the correct rendering is given in the margin). On the nature of the Dt^'N see Oehler, Theol. of O.T., § 137, who shews that the cases in which the 'guill-offering' is following in LXX and Vulg., see the curious Midrash i^Midr. Sam. x. 4) cited by Aptowitzer, Z/UV. 1909, p. 242. 54 The First Book oj Samuel, prescribed in the Priests' Code always imply some infringement of another's rights, — either a positive injury done, or some right or due withheld. Doubtless Dt^'X is used here in a more popular and general sense ; still, the offering of the Philistines is designed as a compensa- tion for the wrong which they conceive has been done to the ark whilst in their territory. 4. '31 "IDDO] 'by, according to, the number of,' an accus. of limitation or definition. Cf. v. 18. Ex, 16, 16. Job i, 5; also II 21, 20; and Ew. §§ 204b 300c ; GK. § ii8h *^ay] i.e. v?>V- The Massorites mean v'SV to be r^(7(f ^">.'np ; cf on 5,6. ob^] either M^fj (8 Heb. MSS.) or M^ (LXX, Pesh.) must evidently be read. 5. D3^^Dy] i. e. D3\^2V : Qre £33nnt3. V. 5* (We.), or at least the words ^INH nx D^DTICK:!! (Dhorme), seems to be a redactional gloss : see p. 61. nna . . . onnJl] Jos. 7, 19 : and, differently, Jer. 13, 16. D3''i'y?D . . . ^p''] ''1?.'^ is construed similarly i Ki. 12, 10. Jon. i, 5. 6. n^an make the heart heavy, i.e. slow to move or affect, unimpres- sionable. It is the word used by J {Qal and Hif}j in the narrative of the plagues, Ex. 7, 14. 8,11. 28. 9,7. 34. 10, i. Comp. the writer's Exodus in the Cambr. Bible, p- 53. ^^ynn] So Ex. 10, 2. Not 'wrought wonderfully,' but ' made a toy of (cf. RV. marg.); see on 31, 4. Din^tTM . . . -ie'N3] So 12, 8 : see on 4, 20. 7. DHN] The numeral has here a weaker sense than in i, i, and is scarcely more than a; cf. Ex. 16, 33; ch. 7, 9. 12, i Ki. 19, 4. 22, 9. 2 Ki. 7, 8. 8, 6. 12, 10. DiT'^y] the masc. suff., according to GK. § 135"; cf. t'. 10. 8. TJ1N2] It is possible, of course, that an mx may have formed a regular appendage to an nby, in which case the art. will be prefixed to it as denoting an object expected, under the circumstances named, to exist (so probably 2, i'^ the prong : 18, 10^ the spear, almost = his spear: 25, 23 mcnn; II 13, 9 mB'r:n-nx, etc.); but there are many passages to which this explanation will not apply, and the rendering ' a chest ' is perfectly in accordance with Hebrew idiom. See more fully on I, 4 and 19, 13. VI. 4-12 55 9. 1S3J T^] the way to, etc., as regularly (Gen. 3, 24). On the position of l^u: T^l, immediately after DN, see p. 35. ',xh T\''7\ Nin nnpro] 'it is an accident (which) hath befallen us' (GK.'§i55. 12,17 "irr'a nxi D^h: D''^:: nyiEi ns '•'"« yari. 34. 29- 43,15-18. Ex. 29, 3. Jud. 21, lo'', I Ki. 5, 9. Jer. 27, 7\ 32, 29 : c. (analogous examples with preposi- tions) Gen. 28, 14". Ex. 34, 27" ^NlC"' nSI nn3 -[nX Tll^. Dt. 7, I4^ 28,46. 64* nND Jjym 13 "I"in ^'^^r\. 56^ Jer. 25, 12 MT. 40, 9\ The word attached cannot, in all such cases, be treated (Ew. § 339*) as subordinate. 12. nnC'l] {a) The 3 pi. fem. with the prefix \ as Gen. 30, 38, Dan. 8, 2 2t. In Hebrew, except in these three passages, the form of the 3 pi. fem. is always nj^nan : in Arabic, on the other hand, as also in Aramaic and Ethiopic, it is regularly yakttihiia, and the form lalituhna is noted only as a rare dialectical variety (Stade, § 534"^; GK. § 47'^). The most original form would seem certainly to ht yaktiibna (2 pi. nn^n, njanan: 3 pi. 13n3\ naani'): taktubm appears to have been produced through the influence of the 3rd fem. sing. an3n. The latter form, however, came to predominate in Hebrew, while in Arabic it only prevailed dialectically. * In illustration of the recourse to the guidance of an animal in cases of doubt, see Wellh. Keste Arab. Heidentutiies (1887), p. 147, ed. 2 (1897), p. 201. 2 See Fleischer, Kleinere Sc/iriflen, i. i (1885), p. 99. 56 The First Book of Samuel, {b) '"'i"]ti'»1 (with dagesh and short hireq) stands for a normal np^^^l : cf. ri5?l I Ki. 3, 15 for n^^M: Stade, § 121; GK. § 71. 12*. The main division is at CDK' n^l, the //.y/ occurrence of the zdqe/{seQ on i, 28) : what follows is a circumstantial clause, attached dcrwSeVws, defining more particularly how the kine went along (cf. I Ki. 18, 6, and Tenses, § 163). On Beth-shemesh, see p. 57. nns*] is here emphatic : the kine went along ojie highway, without attempting to deviate from it. Wl l^n l^bn] Exactly so (except that sometimes there is a ptcp. for the finite verb) Gen. 8, 5 (rd. '^^{{l for the wholly irregular 1"'n). Jos. 6, 9. 13^ Qre. Jud. 14, 9. II 3, 16. 2 Ki. 2, 11 (I3ni -j'^n D^abh)! ' : with the verb at the end, Is. 3, 16 m^i^n fpDDI '-['bn. Jer. 50, 4! : with the verb in the middle, ^. 126, 6 nb21 TJ^I T]pn. And with an impf. with waw consec. for the second inf. abs. ch. 19, 23. II 16, i3t; with a pf. with waw consec. (frequentative) in the same place, II 13, 19 (see note). Jos. 6, I3*t. Cf. GK. § 1138. Comp. an analogous idiom with an adj. (but see note) on 14, 19. iya for nya, GK. § 75^, There is another type, occurring twice, viz. Gen. 8, 3 2b'1 'Jvil 131K'''1. 12, 9 yiDJI ']'br\ VD^I t. With other verbs we have, of the type IJJJI ^I^H '^^''^, Gen. 8, 7 25^1 N'i^ Njf^l. II 15, 30 nbni ri^y 'hv\. i Ki. 20, 37. 2 Ki. 3, 24 (rd. with Luc. U'lPf^ N3 1N3M). 21, IS*' (rd. "qbn"! \nn9). is. 19, 22 J^iS-JI Plij . . . r\iy\. 31, 5 (rd. ^2fri1 and D\brDn'!). Jer. i2,'i7. Ez. i, 14 (rd. ab'i Nr NV"; ni>nn hijini). joei 2,26t. And'of the type ab'l "JI^H 13"lB'''1 : Jer. 7, 13 nnni DBK'n . . . "131X1 ; and similarly, always with WZtr} , 7,25. 11,7. 25,3.4. 26,5.19. 32,33 (rd. ID^NI for the first IdS). 35j M- ^S- 44) 4- 2 Ch. 36, I5t. 13. onvp e'nc' iT-ni] GK. § 145c. Cf. II 15, 23. pj^ya] An pcy, lit. deepening, is a ' highlander's term ' for a broad depression between hills, especially for a 'wide avenue running up into a mountainous country, like the Vale of Elah [see on 17, 2], the Vale of Hebron, and the Vale of Aijalon' (G. A. Smith, H. G., 384 f., 654 f. ; cf. the writer's art. in DB. iv. 846 with list of n''\>^V mentioned in the OT.). Here it denotes {EB. s.v. Beth-shemesh) ' the broad, and beautiful, and still well-cultivated Wady es-Sarar ' {EB. i. 567), up which the ^ Jer. 41, 6 riib^ Tji^n Tjpn . . . Si*|'_1 is anomalous; we should expect . , . Xi*M nbni T]5n Tj^n xinv Duhm, ComiU read, after Lxx, nbn=i •j'i'n D''D^n nni. VI. i2-i8 57 railway now climbs from Jaffa to Jerusalem. Beth-shemesh is now 'Am Shems, 917 feet above the sea, on the slope of the hills on the S. of this Wady, 1 2 miles SE. of Eqron, and 14 miles W. of Jerusalem. TheWady opens out on the N. of it, with Zor'ah (Jud. 13, 2 etc.) now Sarah, 2 miles to the N., on the hills on the opposite (N.) side of the Wady. niNI^] LXX CIS aTravT7]9eLp6vTwu rrjv yrjv). The additions of LXX in 5, 6. 6, i, and the redistribution of the DvDy and the mice in vv. 4-5, are accepted by Thenius. We. takes a different view. He argues with great force that vv. 4-5 MT. is right: the last clause ofz^. 4, 'for one plague was on you all, and on your lords,' he points out, is intended to explain that, although only //iree districts (Ashdod, Gath, and Eqron) were implicated in what had happened to the ark, all had suffered through the plague, and a// must accordingly share in the Dti'N : the number Jive being thus chosen, as representing Philistia as a whole, it was sufficient for the mice as well as for the D^7Dy ; and the cogency of the argument, * Conder's site (DB. s.v.) at 'Erma, 4 miles E. of Beth-shemesh, up the W. Ismaiii, is much less probable (cf. Buhl, Geogr. 167 «.). Notice (i) that there is no sufficient reason for supposing ' mount Ye'arim ' (' mount of the woods ') to have been contiguous to Qiryath-ye'arim; and (2) in so far as the identification rests upon the resemblance of 'Erma with Ye'arim, that the m is radical in one word, and merely the mark of the plural in the other. 2 On the destructiveness of field-mice, see Arist. Hist. Nat. vi. 37, p. sSo**, 15-20, who relates how they would sometimes in harvest time appear suddenly in unspeakable numbers, and destroy a crop entirely in a single night. VIL 1-2 6i ' for one plague ' etc., would be just destroyed, if it were to be applied to the number of the Dvsy alone. He concludes that 6, 4-5, as read in LXX, have been corrected for the purpose of agreeing with v. 18 ; and accepting vv. 4-5 MT., he rejects v. 18^ (to nisn), and with it v. 17, as inconsistent (in the number of golden mice offered) with v. 4 *. As regards the further point, the abrupt mention of the mice in V. 4, he considers the difficulty as apparent merely : the mice, he argues, are mentioned not because there had been a plague of them, but as emblems of a pestilence'^ : the double Dt^'X, like the double dream in Gen. 41, 25, relates to one and the same object, viz. the plague of DvSy : and v. 5* is a redactional gloss ^, due to the supposition that V. 4 implied that there had been a plague of mice. And accordingly he rejects the additions of LXX in 5, 6. 6, i, as made merely for the purpose of relieving the apparent difficulty of vv. 4-5, on the theory that these verses pre-supposed an actual plague of mice. He admits, however, justly, that if this explanation of the 'mice' in v. 4 be not accepted, there is no alternative but to treat the additions in question as a genuine part of the original text. 7, 2-17. Samuel's judgeship. Defeat of Philistines at Eben-ezer. 2. 'Jl CD'n m^] that the days were multiplied (Gen. 38, 12), and became twenty years. Not as EVV. 1.13^1] Only here, nnj in Heb. means to mourn or lament (Ez. 32, 18): so, if the reading be correct, it will be most safely explained as a pregn. constr., mourned or sighed after Yahweh = went after Him mourning or sighing (for the Nif. cf. mxj) *. It is doubtful if * The attempt has been made to reconcile vv. 4 and 18 by supposing v. 4 to relate the proposal of the priests, and z^. 18 to describe what was actually done. But had the proposal not been adopted as it was first made, it is natural to suppose that this would have been in some manner indicated : as it is, the phrase in t^. 10 is And the men did so. ^ Comp. the form in which the story of the destruction of Sennacherib's army reached Herodotus (2. 141) : field-mice gnawing the leathern thongs of the soldiers' bows and sliields. ' So in his Composition des Hex. und der hist. Biicher"^ (1889), p. 241. * So Ewald, Bist. ii. 602 (E. T. 427). )o»J is cited by the Syriac lexico- graphers (PS. col. 2294) with the meaning ingemuit. In Eth. the corresponding verb means recreari, respirare, in the causative conj. (II. i) to console, in the reflexive (III. 3) to console oneself (sc. by confession, as Lev. 16, 21) : Dillm. col. 632. 62 The First Book of Samuel^ Ges. is right in rendering were gathered. It is true that >njnN occurs in Targ. in a connexion which implies gathering, but it is always used with reference to some religious object, being often followed by inSs^ ''"^ or "'"'• rhtich, so that it is doubtful if it expresses to be gathered simply. Thus t/a 12, 14 jian^N ^"n NJnha nna . . . pmnni for ""^ nns n>n: Jer. 3, 17 ^"n no'lT^ . . . nn n^Do^ pnjn^i: 30, 21 ^:ni?iDij pn^a^i: 31, 22b xrinixn pn^n^ ^sn::'^ n^n xoyi: 33, 13 Nn^L"o n^ ^y Noy pnjn^ (for mm n> ^y nnayn); Hos. 2, 17 pnjn^i n»m^ pn, 18 ^jn^iD^ pnjriM, similarly 3, 3. 5. The use of pyn to be called together is not parallel: for nnj is not a synonym of pyr. Probably the Targumic usage is merely based upon the Hebrew word occurring in this passage, and the sense which it was there presumed to have, and cannot therefore be regarded as independent evidence of its meaning. Whether, however, \r\T\ is correct, is very doubtful. LXX have c7re/3Aei//€, whence We. conjectured ^32*1 (cf. Ez. 29, 16); but perhaps 1t2?l (Klo. Bu.) is better; cf. i Ki. 2, 28; and (with nb) Jud. 9, 3. As Ehrlich justly remarks, nnjil (Is. 2, 2 = Mic. 4, i ; Jer. 31, 12. 51, 44t) ap. Kittel is much too poetical for the present con- text: but his own ViTI (12, 14) does not read very well after vrfl just before. 3. 'Jl ITDn] The 'same phrase in Gen. 35, 2. 4; Jos. 24, 23; Jud. 10, 16. 133 \n7N is lit. gods offoreign-ness {^foreign gods): so naj (''J3) p = foreigneris). ir^n] 77iake firm, fix; cf. Job ii, 13. x\,. 78, 8. i Ch. 29, 18 (T^S Dnnb f^np. 2 Ch. 12, 14 al. Comp. |bJ fixed, of the heart, i/^. 57> 8. 78, 37, and p3: nn z.firm, unwavering, spirit, 51, 12. nirify] The pi. of nnriK'y, as the name is vocalized by the Massorites : but the Gk, 'Aa-rdpTr] (cf. also the Ass. Ishtar) make it practically certain that the real pronunciation was 'Ashtart, JTiriEJ'y (like Tl^b for 3/ill:) having been chosen for the purpose of suggesting TiK'a shame (cf. on II 4, 4). nin^]} is mentioned frequently in Phoenician inscriptions, often by the side of Baal. Thus Cooke, NSI. No. 5 (the Inscription of Eshmun'azar of Sidon), 1. i4f, '>)oxi jnai mnti'y njna mncryON and my mother Am'ashtart, priestess of 'Ashtart our lady; (1. i7f.) D^ px p-^a Dnv \bi6 003 pn K^K fnJNI bn Dk^ mn:^•y^ nni p^ ^V^^ nn and we are they who have built VII . 3 63 temples [D"''jij?] to the gods of the Sidonians in Sidon, the sea country, a temple [ri^3] to Ba'al of Sidon, and a temple to 'Ashtart, the name of Ba'al; 6, 5 ; 13, 3 (from Kition in Cyprus) an image [n70D]^ erected by one Yaash mn:ry^ Timb to her lady, to 'Ashtart ; 38, 3 (from Gaulus, i.e. Malta) mnry T\1 ::'npD the sanctuary of the temple of 'Ashtart; 45, i (from Carthage); CIS.\.\. 135, i; 140, i Tr^TW*^ [riK'Jm n2TD IIX to 'Ashtart of Eryx ^ an altar of bronze; 255 (from Carthage) mnsn nin&'y nay nnp^ronay "Abdmelqart, servant of 'Ashtart the glorious ; 263 (do.) ::'S* JJOn ^y3^ psh h^l fS T^^rh T\'2rb JT>n::'y :;'N nnya ^^ ninc'yDK [inj] to the lady Tanith, the face [probably = revelation] of Baal, and to the lord Baal Hamman, which \y^'^?\ Am'ashtart, who was in the congregation of the men \p*^ of 'Ashtart (i.e. among the people attached to her temple), vowed. In Sidon 'Ashtart appears to have been the presiding goddess (cf. I Ki. II, 5. 33 Dnx \n^X mn:^•y) : in Tyre she was subordinated to Melqart (mp^r:). A temple of 'Ashtart in the Philistine town of Ashqelon is mentioned in 31, 10 (see the note). The worship of 'Ashtart was very widely diffused : see particulars in the articles cited on p. 6j^/botfiote ; and cf. Head, HIkI. Numorum"^, Index, p. 941^. nincyn] The 'Ashtorelhs will denote either images of 'Ashtart, or (preferably) the goddesses of that name which were worshipped in different localities, just as Cpyan v. 4 are the local or other special Ba'als: cf. yn ^yi just cited; pn^ ^y3 Cooke, No. 54 a; yi h)32 36, I ; T*in ?y3 Baal of Tarsus on coins of that city, Gesenius, Monu- menta Phoenicia, p. 276 f., and Plate 36, VII. VIII. A, B, C, Cooke, pp. 343-346, \lt2id. Hist. Numorum, pp. 615, 616*; DDtJ> hv^ Baal of heaven, Cooke, 9, and often : pn ?y2 Baal Hammati, of uncertain meaning {EB. i. 402; Paton, as cited, p. 64«.. p. 287 f.), constantly on the Punic votive tablets from N. Africa, Cooke, p. 104; NDltD ?y3 (apparently) Baal the Healer, CIS. Li. 41 (from Kition) ; BaAyaa^/cws or BaA/MapKojSos, i.e. "ipltD 7y3 Baal of dajices, in inscriptions from the site of an ancient temple at Deir el Kal'a in the neighbourhood ' Heb. pOD (Ez. 8,3.5), often (masc. and fem.) in Phoenician inscriptions: e.g. Cooke, 13, 2 ; 23, 2-5 ; 25, i ; comp. above, p. 34 note. * ' Erycina ridens,' Hor. Carm. i. 2. 33. s Ed. 2 (191 1), pp. 731 f., 816. 64 The First Book of Samuel, of Beyrout \ And in the OT. itself, "iiys ^y3, nni ^y3, 3nr ^y3, and, as preserved in names of places, nj ?y3 ^«b cf. Lev. 6, 15 n9pn V^^i ^'"h Di?iy-pn 'a perpetual due, unto Yahweh as a whole offering shall it be burnt,' 16: Dt. 13, I?' 33) i°- LXX o-w TravTt Tw Aaw is merely a paraphrase; cf. Dt. 13, 17, where hh'^ = Travh-qixd (We.). "JvS occurs as the name of a sacrifice in the Carthaginian Table of Sacrifices and Dues, now at ^ CIG. 4536 ; Le Bas and Waddington, Voyage Archeologique, vol. iii. pt. 6 (Inscriptions de la Syrie), No. 1855 Ei'Aa^j ^loi, BaXfiapKws, KOipavs kwjjkov ; tb. 1857 Q(a> Ba^i^apKuiSi ; Clermont-Ganneau, Reaieil d'' Archiologie Orietifale (Paris, 1885 ff.), p. 95 \Kv]pla) \_'{\t[v']vaia) BaKfiapKuiSi . . .; p. 103 Alovvixios Topy'tov, SevTfpoaTArrjs 6fov Ba\f/.apKw5ov, dveOrjKf ret Svo. . . . For many other special Ba'als, see Paton (as cited in the next note), p. 285 ff. ^ The notices of the cult of both Baal and 'Ashtart, as attested by inscriptions and proper names, are collected and discussed by Baethgen, Beitrdge ziir Seviitischeii Religionsgeschichte (1888), pp. 17-29, 31-37, to be compared with Noldeke's review in the ZDMG. 1888, p. 470 ff. See also the articles Ashtoreth (Driver) and Baal (Peake) in DB., and by Moore in EB. ; and the very full articles, esp. the one on Baal, by L. B. Paton in Hastings' Encycl. of Rel. and Ethics, vol. ii. (1909). VII. 4-16 65 Marseilles: Cooke, NSI. 42, 3. 5. 7. 9 (so 43, 5), and in the ex- pression h'h:: rb'C^ 42, 3. 5. 7- 9. n (see the notes, pp. 117, 118). 10. n^yo ^Sir^w' \"T'1] The ptcp. marks the action in the course of which the Philistines drew near : so e. g. 2 Ki. 6, 5. 26 (the new subject in the principal clause following standing ^rj/ for emphasis). 11. ■i3-n"'3] Not elsewhere mentioned : Targ. |1TLi'n''a; Klo. con- jectures pn-nn (so Dh.). The Beth-horons were about 6 miles NW. of Nebi Samwil ; and the road down to the west from Nebi Samwil would pass 'under' them, about i^ mile to the south. 12. |C'n] We expect some known locality to be specified, cor- responding to nsvcn, not ' an unnamed crag of rock ' (We.). LXX T^s TraAatas* (similarly Pesh. ^*-) points to such, viz. ^X^^I^^ OJ" '^\^\ (2 Ch. 13, 19). If, however, this was 'Ain Siniyeh (Buhl, 173 ; EB. S.V.), 3^ miles N. of Bethel, it was 10 miles from Mizpah ; and not likely to have been named with it in fixing the position of Eben-ezer. r\ir\ ny] We.Bu.Now. Sm. ''3 N\n nnj; ; cf. Gen. 24, 30. Jos. 24, 27. 16. 'V\ •J^m] Observe the series ol perfects with 1 conv., descriptive of Samuel's custom (see on i, 3). nJtJ'a nJK' "inD] The same idiom — the idea of recurrency expressed by n^jyi nJB' (i, 7) being strengthened by the addition of HD — is found also Zech. 14, 16. 2 Ch. 24, 5 f (Is. 66, 23 is to be explained differently : C'ln ''1Q is there made more precise by the addition of WVr\1, on the analogy of ItDVn DV "im Ex. 5, 13 al.). ^^<"n^3] now Betttn, on a rising hill, 10 miles N. of Jerusalem. ^j^:n] ' The (sacred stone-) circle.' There were several ' Gilgals ' in Palestine, the most famous being the one in the Jordan-valley, a little E. of Jericho. The one mentioned here, though in DB. ii. 176^ identified with that, is however not likely to have been as distant, and is more probably the village now called filjiliyeh, 7 miles N. of Bethel. See further EB. s.v. On noin, see p. 3 f. n^NH mcilpcn ^2 TN] nx is very difficult. Grammatically, the clause is most easily taken as epexeg. of h^'W' ns ' he judged Israel, even all these places' (Keil) : but 'Israel' denotes naturally such a much wider whole than the three places named, that the limitation implied 1 For the translation of a n. pr. by LXX, see Jud. i, 15. 35. 4, u. 15, 17 al. F 1365 66 The First Book of Samuel, in this construction is unnatural. If such were the sense intended by the original narrator it would be best to treat ^Nlt^"' DN as a gloss, introduced on the ground of z/. 15 by one who conceived Bethel, Gilgal, and Mizpah as too narrow a sphere for Samuel's judicial activity. The alternative construction is to treat HN as the prep. = ?iear, as in the geographical phrase . . . nx "IC'X : Jud. 3, 19. 4, n. I Ki. 9, 26. 2 Ki. 9, 27 : the meaning will then be that the place of judgement was not in but near or beside the cides mentioned. It is doubtful, however, if the passages cited justify this rendering; for they are not parallel in form, and ns is not construed in them with a verb. AV. ifi is not defensible as a rendering of nx : DN only (apparently) signifies in or through, when it stands to mark the accusative after a verb of modon (Dt. i, 19; 2, 7). Ehrlich would read 7N, comparing Dt. 16, 6. I Ki. 8, 29^ 30. Judgement was regarded as a sacred act (cf. Ex. 18, 15, 16. 22, 7-8, with the writer's notes in the Camb. Bible) and administered at sacred places (cf. Qadesh, ' holy,' also called 'En-Mishpat, ' Spring of judgement,' Gen. 14, 7; and Jud. 4, 6 Deborah judging under a sacred tree) ; and from LXX ev TrScrt rot? iiytao-fieVois TovToit^•^< ^3^] with regard to all that. . . Cf 12, i. Jos. 1,18. 22, 2^ 7^. Notice the emphatic position of iriN and ^nx. Cf Is. 43, 22 IpV nsnp TIN* nS; 57, n {^is); and see further on 15, i. Tj'^er?] The IP as in 7, 8. 8. IC'V] LXX adds ifxoi = '•7, which seems indeed to be pre- supposed by "ib'Ui (' to thee also ') at the end of the verse (Th. We. Bu. etc.). 9. ""D is] (only here) = ' except that ' . . . : cf ""^ Dax by the side of DDK alone (Nu. 13, 28), ^3 D3»N (Job 12, 2), ^3 njn (^. 128, 4), ^3n (II 9, I al.), ^3 N^n (II 13. 28), ^3 i6 DX (Dt. 32, 30). Dn3 T'yn lyn] T"yn is properly to bear witness in a court of law, then more generally (like testari, fxapTvpofiai) to testify, aver solemnly, protest, — sq. 3, as usually directed against a person, — especially in connexion with a solemn charge or threat : Gen. 43, 3 133 T>yn lyn t>>>xn. Ex. 19, 21. 23. I Ki. 2, 42. Jer. 11, 7. \\f. 50, 7. 81, 9. 10. Wi ^'^^ i> 17). ti'm I Ki- 22, 7 al. (Z^x. 86t'). 11. np'' D3'':3 nx] Note how in vv. 11-17 the object is in each case placed emphatically before the verb. 'V\ h DtJ'l] ' and will place for himself (i Ki. 20, 34. Jos. 8, 2 ; cf Lex. 515^^ h, a) among his chariotry (collectively, as II 15, i), and among his horsemen.' For 'y\ "IV"\1, cf on 22, 17. 12. DIK'^l] ' and will be for making them,' etc. : an example of the so-called 'periphrastic future,' which occurs now and then in simple prose : see Tenses, § 206, GK. § 114P; and cf. Lev. 10, 10. 11. 13. ninziDp^ ninj^lpj The form nzip denotes one who possesses an established character (as HW given to butting, *<3i? jealous), or capacity (as nap cook [lit. slaughterer'], 333 thief 1**^ judge) : see GK. § 84 b^, and for a longer list of examples Kon. ii. 89 f , cf. 179 (4). Ehrlich would point ninnbpi ninjpipj remarking that 'the later language has indeed F 2 68 The First Book of Samuel, abstract nouns of the form nbtsj?, but at no time has Hebrew had a /em. from the form b^p.' 15. 17. I'K'V-] Read probably the Pi el (denom. : GK. § 52^) ife'SJ; : see Neh. 10, 38. And so Dt. 26, 12 (see 14, 22). Neh. 10, 39. 16. DDnin3] LXX D3-]i53 (Ehrlich) : no doubt, correctly. The ' young men ' have been dealt with implicitly already in z'. 1 1 f. (D3^J3) : in this verse the enumeration begins with slaves, and continues with asses. "ip3 is a collective noun, and may thus be construed with a plur. (II 6, 6 MT. I Ki. 5, 3. Job i, 14). The instances of Dnpn are too rare and doubtful (in Neh. 10, 37 unnecessary; in 2 Ch. 4, 3 D"'ypD must be read with i Ki. 7, 24; and in Am. 6, 12 read C "ip33), for Danpa (adopted in ed. i with We.) to be probable. 'J1 HB^yi] 'and use them for his business:' rQ^t2 as Ez. 15, 5. Ex. 38, 24. 17. OriNl] zx\(\ ye yourselves (opp. to the children and possessions mentioned before). 18. •'JD^Jd] a later usage, in such a case as this, than *i3D (contrast Ex. 3, 7) : see Lex. 818^- b. Ehrl. would read ''J30, supposing '•JD^D to have arisen from the following ^D in DD3^0 through a scribe's error. D37 Dmni] The reflexive dative in common with nn3: e.g. 13, 2. 17, 40. Gen. 13, II. Jos. 24, 15. 22. 19. N^ 'nnN''l] So Gen. 19, 2 : cf. ")•) ^ Hab. i, 6. 2, 6 al. The dagesh in these cases is probably designed for the purpose of securing a distinct articulation of the consonant (Delitzsch on xp. 94, 12). Comp. Spurrell's note on Gen. /. c. ; and add to the references there given Baer, Pref. to Liber Proverbiortwi (rules of Dagesh), p. xiv ; GK. § 20S; and Konig, Lehrgebaude der Hebr, Sprache (1881), i. p. 59 (where the subject is treated at length). DN ^3] = <5«/ (10, 19. 12, 12 ""J alone): so 2, 15. 21, 5 al. See Lex. 475a. 9, I — 10, 16. First {and oldest) account of Saul's appointment as king. Saul is anointed king by Saviuelfor the purpose of defending Lsrael against the Philistines (v. 16), ajid bidden '■do as his hand may find' when occasion arises. 0, I. pc^'pCi] That Kish was of Benjaminite descent is stated in the later part of the verse ; and we seem to desiderate here a statement VIII. ij-IX. 4 69 of the place to which he belonged (cf. i, i ; Jud. 13, 2). Perhaps, therefore, we should read, with We. Bu. Now. etc., }''D"'J2 nyaJO (see 13, 15). 'Gibeah of Benjamin' (13, 15. II 23, 29; cf Jud. 19, 14 po'-n^ "ICN nyajn), or 'of Saul' (11, 4. 15, 34), or nj?3jn alone (10, 26. 22, 6. 23, 19. 26, i), was the modern Tell el-Fill, — or, as there are no ancient remains here, Hawdml, 500 yards to the NW. {ZDPV. 1909, 2-13), — 3 miles N. of Jerusalem (cf. Is. 10, 29). 'J^D'" t'^N p] ' the son of a Benjaminite : ' the name of Aphiah's father was either not known or unimportant. There is force, however, in Smith's remark, ' "•J-'D"' t^^''^ p is not without analogy, at least '•J'^O"' :r''N is found II 20, I. Est. 2, 5. But it is unusual to terminate a genealogy by saying " so7i o/z. Benjaminite." It is probable that p is the error of a scribe who expected to continue the genealogy.' TD^] This occurs elsewhere as the patronymic of p^iJi: v. 4. 22, 7 ^J^D" "p.n; II 20, I ^ro^ ^>^ as here. b^n "1133] Here, probably, as 2 Ki. 15, 20 (Bu.), Ru. 2, i, a sturdy man oi substance (not of valour, 2 Ki. 5, i etc.), a sturdy, honest (cf. on 10, 26), well-to-do country farmer. 3. C^'V^] t^he dative of relation, going with nJ^3^?n1 : see v. 20 (l^); and cf. Is. 26, 14; ch. 13, 22 ('^ NVDJ). But perhaps t^>''p^ niDns* (some) ajj^i" ^ KisJis should be read (Nold. Bu. Ehrl.); cf 17, 8. I Ki. 2, 39(GK. § 129C). Dny^HD nnXTli^] nnx is so closely joined to, and limited by, D"'"iyjnD that it lapses into the constr. st. : so frequently, as Gen. 3, 22 WD nnS3, Jud. 17, II V33D nnN3, etc. (GK. § 130*). Respecting nx with a word not strictly defined see Ew. 2 77i^ pNl : cf. ch. 10, 14 (px >3), I Ki. 18, 10), and njp (Job 3, 9 pNI "ilN^ Ip; ; Is. 59, 1 1 r^^l t^D-J'D^ r\)pi ; ^. 69, 21). The 1 by GK. § 104?. 5. lt:x ^INB^I .... 1N3 ncn] On this graphic and idiomatic manner of expressing a synchronism in place of the more ordinary DNHD \T'1 \>^m} ir:N"'1 fiIV pxa, see Tenses, §§ 165-169 ; and cf. 20, 36 ; II 20, 8 ; Gen. 44, 3. 4 ; Jud. 15, 14 : also below v.w (with the ptcp.). 14, 27 ; 17, 23 ; 2 Ki. 2, 23. Ehrlich adds rightly that in this idiom the first sentence must only contain a single verb, with at most the addition of a negative circumst. clause, denoting time or place (as Gen. 44, 4) : the Old Lat. lXi*a xh (cited in Kit.) is thus not original. IX. 4-9 7 1 fJIV }*"in] the home of Samuel, in Ephraim (see on i, i), which, if the places are rightly identified, Saul must have entered again from the W. end of Benjamin. In lo, 2, when Saul leaves Samuel, he re-enters the territory of Benjamin from the North. JS*t] to be anxious or concerned: if/. 38, 19 I am concerned on account of my sin: Jos. 22, 24 nJNlD out of concern. The pf. and waw conv. in continuation of 7nn'' JD, as Gen. 3, 22. Ex. 34, 15 f., and regularly: see Tetises, § 115, s.v., GK. § 112P. 6. rfpy liDPn ■lt^'^{] ' on which we have started! i^T is conceived here as including the goal : for of course they would not need to be told the way they had already come. Gen. 24, 42 differently: ' which I am going Cn.?'"!) upon ; ' so Jud. 18, 5. 7. njm] 'And lo, we shall go, and what shall we bring?' etc. = And //"we go, what . . .? So JDj Ex. 8, 22: cf. on 20, 12, and II 18, II. ??n] only here in prose, and only altogether five times in Hebrew, mostly in the sense of going away, departing. The word is common in Aramaic, being in the Targums the usual representative of "|?n (which is not used with the same constancy in Aram, as in Heb.) : e.g. in the Targ. of this chapter, vv. 3^. 6. 10. X''2np~pN; niimi] ps, as pointed, must, as Ehrlich remarks, belong to the inf. {Lex. 34^ 5), and the meaning must be, ' and a present it is impossible to bring.' The sense required is 'and there is no present to bring,' for which we must read either ^5''n^P mitrn pN] (Ex. 17, i), or N^nn^ ps n-nerii (Gen. 2, 5. Nu. 20, 5 nu^c^'^ pt< d^di. 2 Ki. 19, 3 : Lex. 34^ tof). The latter is the natural correction to make here. nilCJTl] only here : comp. the use of the cognate verb "i^C* Is. 57, 9. The passage may be illustrated from 2 Ki. 4, 42 (the gifts offered to Elisha). 8. KXO3] there is found, idiom, for there is here (21, 4), or there is present {i-^, 16); d. Lex. 594*. ^nnJl] Read nrin:i with LXX, Th. We. Kp. etc. : the pf. with waw conv. with the force of a precative or mild imperative, as Jud. II, 8: ch. 20, 25; 25, 27 al. {Tenses, § 119 8). 9. An explanatory gloss, the proper place of which is evidently after V. II, where nsin first occurs in the narrative. 72 The First Book of Samuel, N"lp''] used io be called : GK. § loye D"'JD^] So Ruth 4, 7 (probably a similar gloss); Jud. i, 23. 11. 1NV0 ryorv\ . . . D''^y pIDH] Where, in this idiom (see v. 5), the subject of the two verbs is the savie, the pron. is repeated : as Gen. 38, 25; Jud. 18, 3. Hence 2 Ki. 10, 13 for Nin''1 read N"ini (connecting 12^ with 13a". NVC""!, suggested in Kittel, would not here be a Heb. construction). 12. tJ'"'.] So, alone, in answer to a question, 2 Ki. 10, 15. Jer. 37, 17 t. Cf. Lex. 441'' a. DVn ""D nny "ino "J'^D? run] LXX Ihov Kara Trpoa-oiirov v^oiv' vvv 8ia T7]v rjfxipav ktX., whence We., developing a suggestion of Lagarde', restores Di^n^ nny D3''psp nan < lo, he is before you : now, just at present, he is come to the city,' etc. In support of this restoration, We. remarks (i) that the st»g. 'J>JQ^ agrees ill with z^. 12, in which the pi. is used throughout : (2) against IMT. "inio, that no reason appears why Saul should hasten, if Samuel had just come into the city — not, as has been supposed, from some journey, but — from the neighbour- ing n02 (where he had recently been, v. 23, and given instructions — T'i'N TnjrN "IB'N— to the cook). The superfluous nn in MT. We. plausibly explains as a remnant of the ' explicit ' subject nN~in, which had been inserted by a scribe as a subj. for D^'^Jsi' (though, when the noun to which HJn refers has immediately preceded, the pron., whether Nin nan or (rare) isn, is not unfrequently omitted; cf. 15, 12. 16, 11. 30, 3. 16: Tenses, § 135. 6, 2). DVHD will have the same force as in V. 13^, where it is likewise rendered 8ta ri]v rjjjiipav by LXX. The expression recurs Neh. 5, 11, and means al once, just now, the force of DV, as in DIO 2, 16, being forgotten. 13. p] p often answers to D in comparisons [Lex. 486*); but to express correspondence in time, it is very rare. Cf. Hos. 6, 3, as emended very plausibly by Giesebrecht, ^nSifDJ |3 ^Jin^'S. Nil"! '•a] ' for he . . .' Notice the emphatic pronoun. nnx pNi'JDn DVnJ inx-^3] 'for him just now— you will find him,' the first inx not being subordinated directly to the verb, but being resumed ' Anmerkungen zur Griech. Uebersetzung der Proverbien (1863), p. iii (D3'':sb HNin for inrD y^zh). IX. g-ij 73 in iriN at the end, which thus becomes the direct accusative. The case is but an extension of the principle which is exemplified in Gen. 13, 15 mnns 1^ . . . Y'Mi,r\ h'2 nx O for all the land . . . . , to thee will I give it; 21, 13; ch. 25, 29 and often {Terises, 197. 6). The resumption only happens to be rare when the first object is a pronoun : but see 2 Ki. 9, 27 inDH ins* D3 Him also, smite him ! 'To omit [as Th. would do] one of the two ins* borders on barbarism ' (We.). Klo. Bu., however, regard the first "IDN as an error for nnj? (cf. v. 12). 14. Tyn vj;^l] The city itself then was on an elevation: and the non on a still higher elevation outside it (^ r\t22r\ Tihv^ : conversely, it is said, v. 25 T'yn nonno hti). "cyn ^^n^] Probably this is an ancient error for "lyc'n "]in3 ' in the middle of the gate :^ this agrees better both with z;. 18 and with the language of this verse (Saul and his servant were coming in., and Samuel was going out to meet them). iS- Twl ^"^1] An example of the manner in which the pluperfect tense is expressed in Hebrew. By the avoidance of the common descriptive tense ^'''^ i?r"l (i.e. lit. 'and Y. went on to uncover') the connexion with what precedes is severed, and the mind is left free to throw back the time of n?: to a period prior to the point which the narrative itself has reached. So regularly, as 14, 27. 25, 21. 28, 3 ; n 18, 18 etc. {Tenses, § 76 Obs.; GK. §§ io6f, 142^). For 'd |rN nx nb, cf. 20, 2. 12. 13. 22, 8. 17. II 7, 27. 16. inro riy^] 'at the time to-morrow ' = when to-morrow has come. So II 20, 12. Ex. 9, 18. i Ki. 19, 2. 20, 6. 2 Ki. 7, i. 18. 10, 6t. Cf. Gen. 18, 10. 14. 2 Ki. 4, 16. i7t i^^O ^^J/? i.e. (probably) 'at the time, (as it is) reviving '= in the returning year. "in» must not in these phrases be regarded as a genitive, since riyii has the art. In full, they would be "injD nyn nvna, .Tn nyn ni>n3 (Hitzig on Job 39, 1 7). T'ij] 'prince,' lit. one iri front, leader: used often in the more elevated prose (especially in the prophetic utterances in Sam. and Kings) for the chief ruler of Israel (10, i. 13, 14. 25, 30. II 5, 2. 6, 21. 7, 8. I Ki. I, 35. 14, 7. 16, 2. 20, 5 ; cf Is. 55, 4). 1 6b. ^Dy-nN] LXX ^roy ^Jrnx (Ex. 3, 7): no doubt, rightly. 'V\ nx3 ^3] Gen. 18, 21. 17. injy] njy as Jud. 18, 14. Is. 14, lo al., to answer, not some- 74 The First Book of Samuel, thing which has been said, but as the situation may require or suggest {Lex. 773a). T'i'N *mox ">K'N] ' as io whom I said unto thee, This one,' etc. ; cf. V. 23^. i^'j?^] here only in the sense of coercere imperio : cf. "l^'J? Jud. 18,7 (in a passage, however, where the text is very suspicious). 18. 7N1Ct^ HN] ' drew near io ' is evidently the sense that is intended, which riN with will scarcely express. No doubt both here, ch. 30, 21, and Nu. 4, 19 (as Jud. 19, 18^ after 'l-'n), riN is merely an error for 7N. 19. DD^Nl] LXX KoX dye, i.e. f?S'?f?l (or nn^3N^). 20. n''D\"l nc'bc' DVn] ' to-day, three days ' (read with We. Bu., GK. § 134™, D'^JD"'), i.e. /or three days, (Anglice) /^ree days ago. Cf. 30, 13 n^bv n1^^, where n''rD'' is omitted. nr\b .... nunNS] nnb resumes ni:nNb upon exactly the same principle as that explained in the case of the accus. on v. 13: cf. Gen. 2, 17 (p). II 6, 23 {h). 2 Ki. 22, 18 (^n) : Tenses, § 197 05s. i. 'J1 Db'n-^SJ The tone is drawn back by "^S (Tenses, § 70), as it is (GK. § 72*) by the waw consec, ; cf. 11 17, 16 |^J?"^>?. Ex. 23, i. The idiom, se/ the heart (mind) to (on), as II 13, 20 al. Cf. Lex. 523^' (3 c), 524^^ (3 c); and on 4, 20. 'y\ ''D71] Rightly rendered by LXX, Vulg. koX tlvl to. wpaia tow 'l is the form out of pause, |t2p the form in pause (cf. GK. § 29"). It is true, fbj? is always found with atJmah and soph-pasuq, and [Dp is always found with a conj. accent : but with the smaller disj. accents the pointing varies : thus we have fD|5 IX. ij-24 75 pD^32 ^D^K'] 'Unquestionably an error for O tDnC'' (Keil). How- ever, curiously enough, the same expression occurs Jud. 20, 12 h>^1 pCi''J2 ''ip^B'. We. Stade (p. 204) propose in both cases to point ''^y^, thinking that ' perhaps the archaic form of the st. c. (GK. § 90') should be here restored ; ' but this is hardly probable. With the passage generally, cf. Jud. 6, 15, where Gideon expresses, or affects, similar modesty. miysn] = the smallest: GK. § 133^. 22. ^n^t^6] See on i, 18. We should expect nnaK'^n. K'Nin] at the head or top : i Ki. 21, 9. 12. D"'N1"ip = those invited to a feast, as i Ki. i, 41. 49 ; cf. Nip I'b. 9. 10. 23. n:o] See on i, 4. 24. nvVni] There are three cases in which n has apparently the force of the relative^; (i) with a verb, (a) where the construction depends upon the consonants. This is well substantiated for late Hebrew (Ch. Ezr.), i Ch. 26, 28. 29, 8 al. : but the one example in middle Hebrew, Jos. 10, 24 '^j is so isolated that it rests probably upon a textual corruption (D"'37nn might easily be restored): {b) where the construction depends solely upon the punctuation, chiefly in the 3rd sing. fem. perf. Qal (as nNHH Gen. 18, 21; 46, 27 nJ^BTi Is. 51, lot"), or in the 3rd sing, masc perf. Ni/. (as in vlbl^n Gen. 21, 3 ; riNl^n I Ki. II, 9). Whether this punctuation represents a genuine tradition is extremely questionable : had n been in use in earlier Hebrew with the force of a relative, it is strange that it should appear once only with 3 pi. : its restriction to cases in which a different accent (nN3n) or punctuation ('i^l^'"', i^^'^^'"') would give rise to the regular construction ', and the fact that the Massorah itself does not 16, II al., but |t5i5 20, 2 al. ; ]^\> II 9, I2t, but (bp ch. 5,9. 20, 35. 22, 15 al. ; and |Dp Est. i, 5t, but |bp ch. 25, 36t. If the normal form were |bp, it is strange that we should find always the fem. flD^p, the //. D''2lt3p, and before a sf. the form D2^p. 1 Comp. Ew. § 331'' (i) and note: GK. § 138', ^ * For Jer. 5, 13 (Hitzig, Graf, Keil) is very uncertain; either 13^ is a subst. (Ew. § 156*; GK. § 52°), or, more probably, "a"nn should be read. » See, e.g. Is. 51, 9 nni'nOn ; Gen. 48, 5 1^ Cl^liH. And so in Ez. 26, 17 nbpnn , read as \Ty?T\T\, may be the ptcp. Ptial without "0, like bSN Ex. 3, 2 etc. (Ew. § 169^; Gk'. § 52»). 76 The First Book of Samuel, point consistently (see e.g. nN3n Gen. 46, 26 al.; nK"i:n Gen. 12, 7. 35, i), make it highly probable that the anomaly in these cases is not original, and that in fact n as a relative is unknown to classical Hebrew. (2) Before a preposition — as in the Gk. idiom to Itt avTrj^ ■ — it occurs here alone in the OT., though combinations of the type iT^y "IB'N arc of constant occurrence. The usage here is thus doubly exceptional, and entirely unsupported by precedent or parallel. Under the circumstances it can scarcely be doubted that Geiger {JJrschrift, p. 380) is right in reading i^Jp^i^l and the_/a/ tail (Ex. 29, 22 and elsewhere in the ritual laws of P). The HvX is the fat tail of certain breeds of sheep ^ (commonly known as ' Cape sheep '), and is still esteemed a delicacy in the East : when dressed and served at table it much resembles marrow (the writer has seen and tasted it in Syria). The allusion in the v. will thus be to certain choice pieces reserved specially {v. 23^) for those honoured with a place D''S"l"^pn {J'Nia^. ~irrN''l] The subj. is Samuel, not the cook. 'jl nyiD^ "3] ' because unto the appointed time [hath it been] kept for thee, saying, I have invited the people.' "IDX? is construed with "ilDt^ freely, Kara (Tvv(.(Tiv: cf. Ex. 5, 14 (where the subject of the preceding verb is not that implied in "IDN?). The sense thus obtained, however, is not good ; and Nin is desiderated after ~i1D!i' (though see GK. § 1 1 68; •nOK^, or (GK. § 144^) "IDB', for liDC' would also be an easy emendation). It can thus hardly be doubted that there is some corruption in the text (especially in TiS'lp Dyn IDN^). "iXt^J also does not mean ' reserved ' (Ew.), but left over. K 1 3 however suggests that Samuel and Saul did not take their meal after the others had finished, but that the other guests waited to begin their meal until Samuel had arrived : what we expect, therefore, here is a ' polite invitation to Saul, as the guest of honour, to begin the meal;' the others would then begin theirs. Sm. Now. suggest, for "iNK'Jr!, l^^fL" the flesh (of ' Comp. the notice in Hdt. 3. 13; and see in the Jewish Encyd. xi. 250 an illustration of such a sheep, with a small cart supporting the long and heavy ' fat tail.' * The shoulder and the ' fat tail ' are still the pieces offered by the fellahin of Palestine to the guest whom they desire to honour {ZDPV. vi. 98, cited by Nestle, Marginalien, 1893, p. 13 f.). IX. 24 — X. I 77 flesh prepared for the table, Ex. 21, lo. i/^. 78, 20), and Sm. Bu. Now., for 110'^', IJ^nN 0:-inN Gen. 32, 5, or IJ^nx Gen. 34, 19), or nns ; Sm. Now. also follow Bu. in reading D^S■;)ip^ Dy ?bN^. for IDX^ "TlNip Dyn : we then get, ' Behold, the flesh is set before thee ! Eat ! for we (or they) have tarried for thee unto the appointed time, that thou may est eat with them that are invited! But 'the flesh is set before thee' is rather a bald and graceless invitation ; and "inx always (even in Gen. 32, 5, where it is opposed to Tnj) has the idea of tarrying later than is usual, or might be expected ; though suitable, therefore, with lyiClTJD (II 20, 5), would it be suitable with 'to the appointed time?' Nothing preferable to D''X"^pn Dy \>'2\h has been suggested : but in the earlier part of the verse, it would be a smaller, and perhaps a sufficient, change to read, for "iNC'jn, ncc^in 'that which has been z^^/)/ (reserved)' (see V. 23^)), and for TiDC', as suggested above, 1""?,^ or "H?^ ', 25-26. 1»3B^"'1 :Jjn i'yhxt^'Dy nm^l] LXX koI liidrpwdov tw 'taovX em tJ; Sw/xari, /cat iKOt^-qd-q = : ^jDt^'n ^^ ^^ ^"^^t? (Pr. 7, 16) na-l?!. The sequence in MT. is so bad ("13'T'I and lo'^ni:''''! both being pre- mature, when '31 xnp''1 follows) that there can be little doubt that this is the true reading: 'And they spread a couch for Saul on the house- top, and he lay dow7i,' to which Samuel's calling to Saul on the house-top in the morning {^. 26 ':i NT"!) forms now a natural and suitable sequel. 27. DV3] =^ first 0/ all l^&iovQ going on): of. on 2, 16. 10, I. p^^'n-iD-nx] Cf. 2 Ki. 9, I. 3. ■•D Xli^n] 'Is it not that?' = 'Hath not?' is shewn by II 13, 28 ^ Ew. on the basis of LXX TrapoL tovs dWov; suggested for Dyn "ICN? "IJ^tS'O Dyn = 'above the rest of the people (whom) I have invited,' which We. is disposed to acquiesce in, though it is true that ~)X'.^ is not a word found elsewhere in the best Hebrew prose style (Ch. Ezr. Neh. Est., and of course in Isaiah); and the omission of "It^X before Oyn is questionable (on 14, 21). LXX for TlNIp have anoKvi^e nip off (= p7?3 Lev. i, 15 : 2ifp 2 Ki. 6, 6: f)t3p Ez. 17, 4. 21), whence Th. suggests SJ'l^lp cut off! {Atiglice Help yourself!), cf. Job 33, 6 ♦nx'np "\CnO OS D3. But it is not probable that a word so rare in Hob. as |*1p (and usually occurring in a different application — py liflp"") would have been used in this sense. It must however be admitted that in post-Bibl. Hebrew J^^p is used oi cutting up food into pieces : see Levy, NIIVVB. s. v. LXX ei'y /xaprvpiov of course presupposes nothing different from lyiJD, which the translators elsewhere connected wrongly with Tiy : cf. aitrjvfi toC naprvpiov for lyiD SlN. 78 The First Book of Samuel, to be a good Hebrew expression: but the long addition preserved in LXX and Vulg. has every appearance of being original. The insertion would read in Hebrew thus : iJSyby n^Jj!? ^"^ ^n^D] Xlbn ^3 rnixn -n^-n)") rn-'iN n^» isyt^in nnxi ••'"« oya ni^yn nnxi biXib'^'^y : '^''l'h in^m ^y i"^ ^^C'D. The circumstantiality of the account is here not out of place : the express mention of the signs at an earlier stage of the instructions to Saul than v. 7, is what might be expected : and the omission of the clause in MT. may be readily explained by the supposition that a transcriber's eye passed from the first nin'' "jnti'D to the second. So Dr. Weir. 2. Dy] = close to, near : Gen. 25, 11. 35, 4. II 19, 38 al. As Jer. 31, 15 shews, Rachel's grave must have been very near Ramah, i.e. the Ramah of Is. 10, 29, now er-Rdm. Er-Ram is 5 miles S. of Bethel, which, according to Jos. 18, 13 (P), was on the N. border of Benjamin : but at this time, it seems, Ephraim extended further to the S. (see esp. Jud. 4, 5). In Gen. 35, 20. 48, 7 nn^ n''3 Nin, identifying Ephrath with Bethlehem, is either a gloss (so Dillmann and most commentators), or (Delitzsch on Gen. 35, 20) embodies a different tradition. po-'n ^33] the Northern border : cf. on 9, 5. nv?V3] The word arouses suspicion. The locality intended seems to be so accurately defined by 7m ni3p Dy, that we are surprised at a closer definition following, especially in such an obscure form ; for, as nVPV possesses no meaning, it cannot designate any particular spot near Rachel's grave, at which the men were to be met. LXX have oAXo/xeVors /xeyctXa. 'AAXo/xcVous = ^0?^ (see V. 6) : but though n?V 7y may be rendered (metaph.) leap upon, xh*i absolutely cannot express the idea of leaping. fxeydXa does not occur elsewhere in LXX in an adverbial sense (We.); so probably here it is nothing but a Hebrew word written in Greek letters, and transformed into something signifi- cant in Greeks Many MSS. after Bevia/^etv insert iv Sr/Xw (= nif7i*3) ev BaKaXaO ; Lucian's recension after Beviafjuv and before dXX. fxey. * Cf. I Ki. 18, 32 BaXaaaav from n?yn ; Am. 3, 12 Upexs from tJ^'iy (as Jerome, cited by Field, points out) ; Jer. 8, 7 aypov ; 34, 5 'iais aSov KKavaovrai. For other examples, see the Introduction, § 4. la, 6; Thackeray, Gravim. ofOT. Greek <^\^o()) , p. 37 f. X. 2-4 79 adds fji€(rqiJilipia to come (or pass) on, usually with some swiftness or force : of a flood, Is. 8, 8; a tempest 21, i; a breath. Job 4, 15; of the Chaldaean conqueror compared to a wind, Hab. i, 11 ; of God, Job 9, 11. 11, 10; of days passing quickly away like skiffs down a stream, Job 9, 26. The word is hardly one that would be expected here : and Ehrlich would read for it Jl3>"n, D"'7y] Bethel (2890ft.) was itself on a hill; and the plateau on which the hill stands is considerably higher than most of the surround- ing country. ' To God,' Bethel being an ancient sacred place. nrh nnD3 ncr^C'] 13? \^ fevi. (Ex. 29, 23 al.); and though a fem. numeral is found here and there with a fem. noun (as Gen. 7, 13. Job I, 4: GK. § 97c J Konig, iii. 322), it is probably best to restore with We. tf'^B', Klo. Bu., remarking that two out of three loaves would be a large proportion to give as a present, would read (after LXX ayyCia) ^?1^3 basliets (Am. 8, i); Sm. would read \^3 (9, 7). 4. DvJi'? 1? vNti'l] arid shall ask thee with regard to welfare, — a common Heb. expression (17, 22. 25, 5. Gen. 43, 27 al.). Why the direct object is introduced by h, is not apparent: perhaps (cf. Konig, iii. § 3 27k) from assimilation to D1PC?. txh TlB'] the fem. TIC' may be on account of rii"i33 understood ^ ; ^ Which Klo. I3n. Dh. would even insert here, after LXX ^vh i.-napx^^ dpToiv, i.e., it is supposed, ni"123, misread nilbll ; but n"ll3ZI is nowhere else misrendered aTrapxoi. 8o The First Book of Samuel, or, as tirh is elsewhere construed as a masc. (on^ mtJ'y i Ki. 14, 3. nrh nc'on di. 21, 4 ; cf. d^cjs ^:^^, cc^jn nicj^y : GK. § 97^), >^^ should perhaps be restored. 5. D\ni?Nn ny23] identical, as the n"'nK'!?Q 3''V3 shews, with the y33 (rd. nynj) of 13, 3; and most probably the older name, marking it as an ancient holy place, of ' Gibeah of Saul.' Ram- Allah, 7 miles N. of Tell el-Fill (suggested in H. G. p. 250), is much too far to the north. On p -ins*, see GK. § 29?. "•3^*3] LXX, Pesh. Vulg. express a singular ; and, as the sing, occurs also 13, 3. 4, 3''i'3 should in all probability be read accordingly here. The accidental transposition of two contiguous letters is not unfre- quent in MT. : in the Ochlah we-Ochlah, § 91, there is a list of sixty-two such transpositions which have been corrected by the Massorah. Some few of the corrections may be questioned : but the majority are certainly authorized (e.g. ''J5:'JD\ni Jud. 16, 26; yoi^i^ Jer. 17, 23; priNTi Ez. 40, 15; n13^^^ Pr. 31, 27 cannot be original readings). As to the meaning, n^^j has the sense oi pillar in Gen. 19, 26, o^ prefect or deputy in IT 8, 6. 14. i Ki. 4, 19; possibly also it might be used to denote a post or garrison, like 2VJ0 13, 23. Which of these senses it has here, it is difficult to say ; versions and commentators are equally divided, {a) LXX here (one rendering') has avaarre^a, i.e. prob. a pillar erected as a symbol or trophy of Philistine domination : so (prob.) Pesh., and amongst moderns Th. Bo. We. {p) Vulg. has static, i.e. a military post, or garrison: so EVV. Ge. Ke. ( read ^'^t1. The explanation in GK. § 1 1 2« is artificial, and not probable. D^N3JnD nj:ni] a circumstantial clause, describing the condition in which the prophets would be as they came down from the nC3 : of. Jer. 38, 22 n'lOX njni = /key saying (Tenses, § 160 ; GK. § 141®)- The word, which is in the reflexive conj. and a denominative, denotes /o play or act the prophet, viz. by manifestations of physical excitement — not unlike those exhibited by the dervishes of the present day in the East* — such as are more evidently described, on the second occasion when Saul is seized by the contagious frenzy, 19, 20 ff. So I Ki. 22, 10 Ahaz and Jehoshaphat were sitting in the gate of Samaria D.T^Q^ CN^JriD D^'S^JH bl : comp. (of the prophets of Baal) ib. 18, 29. From this peculiarity, the prophet is sometimes described mockingly as VS^O 2 Ki. 9, 1 1. Hos. 9, 7 ; cf. Jer. 29, 26. 6. nn^^'l] the same word z'. 10; Jud. 14, 6. 19. 15, 14 (of Samson); ch. 11,6; 16, 13 (David); also 18, 10, where the subject is D'^n^s nn, but the direction in which the inspired activity displays itself is different. n^3Jnni] for riNnjnni; cf. v. 13. See GK. § vgnq. 7. T\'^^ , , . rrni] ^^'^1 would be resumed normally by rT'K'yi, or HK^yn (the latter less usual in ordinary prose). The uncommon imper. was chosen, no doubt, as more forcible: cf. Dt. 6, 10-12^. nywn] So Jer. 9, 16. Est. 4, 4. ij/. 45, i6t. The more usual form is njNnn (n times), or (Gen. 30, 38) .i^<3^l ; GK. § 76?. nn^ NVr^n nt^'S*] The same idiom in c/i. 25, 8. Jud. 9, 33^. Qoh. 9, 10. 8. Introduction to first account 0/ Saul's rejection (13, 7^-15*)- * And thou shalt go down before me to Gilgal ; and, behold, I am coming down to thee to sacrifice . . . : seven days shalt thou wait, until I come to thee, and declare to thee what thou shalt do.' . . , n^ni is a circumstantial clause (cf. Jud. 9, 33) and subordinate to m">''1, n3n throwing the idea which it introduces into relief, and giving it greater prominence than it would otherwise have: then b is supplementary to a, defining more closely what Saul is to do at Gilgal until Samuel meets him there ^ * Comp. Lane, Manners and Customs of the Modern Egyptians (ed. 5, T871), ii. 1 51-154, 174 f., 179 f.; W. R. Smith, Prophets of Israel^ pp. 86, 390 f. (^391 f.\ ^ Keil's construction of this verse is illegitimate. The verse refers evidently to 1365 ^ 82 The First Book of Samuel, mi^l] The Gilgal here meant is the one in the Jordan-valley {Jtljul or JiljiiUyeh), near Jericho, 600 ft. below the Medit. Sea, and consequently some 3350ft. below Gibeah; hence 'go down.' 9. iTni] See on i, 12. Due probably to a scribe, who judged in error, from the tense of the preceding verses, that another future was still to follow : \T'i is the tense which ought to be used, and which ought, no doubt, to be restored. yoy^ injsnDJ Cf. Piiy njsn (in flight), Jer. 48, 39. "jan] For the constr., cf. Zeph. 3, 9. 10. DB'] redundant before nny33n. Read with LXX {IkCScv) DB'P, i. e. either the place where Saul parted from Samuel, or the place mentioned in v. 3 f., the account of how the first two signs {t)v. 1-4) came to pass, having fallen out of the narrative after v. 9. The ' Gibeah ' will be the ' Gibeah of God ' of v. 5. inxipij . . . mm] So (without a verb) II 15, 32; i Ki. 18, 7 ; Pr. 7, 10. 11. INT'I . . . lynv ^3 ''m')] Exactly so, II 2, 23^^ HDV^I , . . snn ^3 \T1 : and analogously, with iTHI, oi future time, Nu. 21, 8 al., and of reiteration in the past, Jud. 19, 30. lyiV 73 is a ptcp. absol. 'and it came to pass, as regards all that knew him, that,' etc.: cf. GK. § 1 16^; Tenses, § 121, Obs. i. For ?"ir:riXD, see GK. § 20^1. 13, 8-14, whereas, in the Book of Samuel as we have it, Samuel and Saul appear together at Gilgal earlier, viz. on the occasion 11, 14 f. Keil therefore, seeking to exclude a reference to this occasion, and to interpret the verse as referring only to the subsequent one, presses the circumstantial clause introduced by njni, saying that this presupposes that the preceding words ' And thou shalt go down before me ' express merely a condition, in view of which, when it is satisfied, Samuel instructs Saul how to act. He construes, therefore : ' And if thou goest down before me to Gilgal, and lo, I come down to thee, etc., then thou shalt wait seven days until I come to thee,' etc. n^HI, however, cannot influence the sense of what precedes ; and (what is more important) PTT'I followed by bnin cannot express a condition. Had m"l"'1 expressed a (virtual) condition, it must have been followed by D^nini (so regularly, as 19, 3; Num. 14, 15 etc. : Tenses, § 149) : bmn CD' T^l^ being attached aavvhtrwi, shews that the preceding clause is cot7iplete in itself, i.e. that mi'1 expresses a positive command, and not a condition. The clause '31 m"!""! expresses what is to be done by Saul not necessarily immediately after 7**, but as soon after it as is convenient. The collision with 11, 14 f arises from the fact that this part of the Books of Samuel is composed of sources originally distinct : 10, 8 and 13, 7''- 1 5* are thus related to one another, but stand out of connexion with II, 14 f. X. 8-19 83 X33] Prob. the ptcp., was prophesying, with Nin omitted after njn {Tenses, § 135. 6, 2 ; GK. § 11 69). n\T nrno] Wha/, now, has happened to ... ? HT strengthens and gives point to HD; so Gen. 27, 20. Jud. 18, 24 al. ; similarly in HT ""O, nrnD7. Comp. in Arabic >£.,».I.ii Ij LI : and see especially Fleischer, Kleinere Schriften, i. 355 f. (who adduces from Arabic usage reasons in support of this explanation of the idiom); Lane, Arab, Lex., s. v. li, p. 948. Briefer explanations will be found in GK. § 136°; Ew. §§ I83^ 325*. 12. DrT'aN ''Ol] 'But who is their father?' i.e. is their father more likely than Qish to have had a son a prophet ? Prophetic inspiration is no hereditary possession ; and it is not more remarkable in the case of Saul, than in the case of any other member of the troop of prophets. Against the easier, but weak, reading of LXX, Pesh. "irT'^X, see We. nn\n] for the fern. (= it), cf. II 3, 37. Jos. 11, 20. i Ki. 2, 15: GK. § 144^ 1 3. nnan] With noan we should have expected ijy^l for Nl''1 ; the conversation, vv. 14-16, is also more likely to have taken place in a private house than on the Bamah. Hence We. and most read: nn^jnn for noan. Ehrl. objects that in'-a ^X or {V. 26. 23, 18) in^^i?, not niT'in, is said of a person going to his own house. However, in Gen. 43, 26 we have nn^n fjOr Nl'^l; and nn''3n here would be not so much his house, as the house, as opposed to the street (cf. Jud. 19, 15. Jos. 2, 18), where Saul had been playing the prophet. Bu. Dh., after LXX cis tov fSowov, read (see vv. 5. 10) ny^Jn: but that seems to have been reached in v, 10. 14. pN ^3] See on 9, 4. 16. i'NIttK' "ION -iB'N] a misplaced gloss, not expressed by LXX. EVV. conceal the awkward and unnatural position of the words : cf. their rendering of Ex. 14, 9. 10, 17-27*. Sau/ chosen by lot as king (sequel to 8). 17. ns^Dn] Nebi Samwil : see on 7, 16. 18. "'33N] emphatic, as II 12, 7. D"'Vn?n] construed with ni^^DCn /cara cruVconv; cf. Jer. 11, 2. 26, 2. 19. onxi] ' And>'n lU^X. Jer. 27, 9. Hag. I, 9. Ruth 4, 15 : similarly Ez. 43, 19. So also in Aramaic, pJ^{ '1 Dan. 7, 17 ; and in Targg., as II 20, 19. 24, 17. Is. 42, 18'. ^3 "b liONni] *3 with the direct narration, as 2, 16 MT. (where see note). Several MSS. LXX, Pesh. Vulg. express N7 (as 8, 19 MT., 12, 12 MT.), in which case *3 will, of course, = but. Either reading is admissible, but N7 is more pointed and forcible. '""• ^;a? Ui'Tin] Take your stand, presetit themselves : cf. Jos. 24, i. D3"'2^n] not 'thousands' (EVV.), but tribal subdivisions, clans; cf. 23, 23- Jud. 6, 15. Mic. 5, 2. 20. na?"")] viz. by lot : cf. 14, 14+. Jos. 7, 16-18. 21. ■""IDJOnJ LXX adds koI irpoa-ayovcn t^v cf)v\rjv Marrapi cis avSpas i.e. D^??b n^'Sn nns^o-nx 2-\p_\ (see Jos. 7, 17), which is required by the sense. 22. E>''X chn niy N3n] 'Is there still (i.e. besides ourselves) any one come hither ? ' The people are in despair ; and they inquire whether there is yet any one amongst them, of whom they are not aware. LXX, however, have Et Ipx^rai 6 dvrjp ivravOa ; and it is true, as We. remarks, that the answer ' Lo, he is hidden,' etc., agrees better with the question, 'Is the man come hither {'^''Hn D^n N3n)?' than with ' Is there still a man come hither ? ' Of course, with C'^xn, my must be omitted. There are several cases in MT. of an article having acci- dentally dropped out, some {e.g. 14, 32) being already noted by the Massorah {Ochlah we-Ochlah, No. 165 ; or the Mass. Magna on n 23, 9). uh'2T\ z'X] ?K, on account of the motion implied in X3n3 : 'he hath hidden himself ?'« among the baggage.' Cf. Jer. 4, 3^. 24. DJT'X'nn] When Dn''N"l is coupled with the n inter rog., the *i is regularly doubled (as signified by the dagesh dtrimens): so 17, 25. 2 Ki. 6, 32 : GK. §§ 228 (20*1), ioqI. "]^10n TT'] The same formula as II 16, 16. i Ki. i, 25 al. 1 Comp., in Phoenician, Cooke, NSI. 27, 2 ... nt^' XH L"X (= Heb. X'^H "IK'X t . . riJK'). And so also in Arabic (Qor. 2, 58. 43, 51) and Ethiopic (Gen. 5, 32. 14, 2 etc.). X. ig—XL 2 85 25. "ISD?] = ' in a scroll,' in accordance with the principle explained on 1,4. So, with the same word, Ex. 17, 14 ; Nu. 5, 23 ; Jer. 32, 10. Job 19, 23. Comp. GK. § 1268; and on 19, 13. 'v\ mn] Ex. 16, 33 '"^ ^Jsb inN rani. 34. 26. h^r\r\\ LXX viol Swa/Acwv i.e. ^•'nn '•Jn = the men of valour (see Jud. 21, 10). ''J3 has accidentally fallen out: ^"TI means not a mere ' band of men ' (AV.), but a military host — a sense that is not here appropriate. tV\ ^J3 denotes not merely men of valour, but men morally brave, loyal, and honest (Ex. 18, 21. 25): here the PTI ""jn and the pyvZl "'i3 oi v. 27 stand in evident contrast to one another. 27*. nt] contemptim: cf. 21, 16. i Ki. 22, 27. nn:o] of presents offered to a superior, as Jud. 3, 15. 2 Ki. 8, 8 f. 10, 27^ — 11, 13, (14-) 15. Saul 'does as his hand finds' (9, 7), wins a success against the Ammonites, and is made king at Gilgal by the people with acclamation {sequel to 9, i — 10, 16). 27^. t^'nriDS \"l''l] MT. may to a certain extent be defended by the use of '3 ^^^ in Gen. 19, 14^. 27, 12. Nu. 11, i. II 4, 10, though it is found mostly in connexion with "'J"'y3, which justifies and explains the 3. LXX join the words to 11, i, rendering koX iyev-qdr] w9 ficxa (Atjm i.e. B'"!|.n03 W1, This is preferable to MT. The combination of 3 with a prep, is most uncommon (see on 14, 14): but it occurs with |D in a phrase so remarkably similar to the present one as fully to justify it here : Gen. 38, 24 D'^K'in \ih^D2 VT1 and it came to pass a/ter about three months. 11, I. nyb ^y'\ The name d"" still clings to Wddy Fabis, which falls into the Jordan from the East, 9 miles S. of Beth-shean : but the site of the ancient town itself is uncertain. Robinson and others have identified it with ed-Deir, on the S. side of Wady Yabis, 6 miles E. of the Jordan ; but Miryamin, 2 miles N W. of ed-Deir, on the hills on the N. side of the Wady seems better to agree with Eusebius' description of it {Onom. 268, 81 f) as 7 miles from Pella, on the road leading to Gerasa (see DB. and EB. s.v.). 2. nxn] pointing forwards to "^IpJi : ' On condition of this will I conclude a covenant with you, on condition of the boring out to you,' etc.; so Gen. 34, 22. 42, 15. 33. Ex. 7, 17. Is. 27, 9. The 7 of 86 The First Book of Samuel, reference, as Gen. 17, 10. 34, 22; Lev. 26, 5. 26; Dt. 23, 3^. 4b; 1 Ki. 14, 13 (comp, on 2, 33): Lex. 512^ (5 a). nnax] nnn being understood, as 20, 16. 22, 8. "lp:3] so. Dnpun : GK. § 144^, e^ and on ch. 16, 4 (EVV. of course paraphrase). The same verb, also of boring out an eye, Pr. 30, 17, and (Pi.) Jud. 16, 21. H'TlOB'l] The fern, suffix = ii: see GK. § 135P. 3. 1i^ fl"in] See on 15, 16. IJns yno pX DNI] The ptcp. in the protasis, as Gen. 24, 42 f., Jud. II, pal. {Tetises, § 137). T'^S* 1JNV"'l] b^ ^T of going out to surrender, as Is. 36, 16 "•^N INV. 2 Ki. 24, 12 (with hv = ^n). For hs'tJ' ny3J, see on 9, i. 7. Jud. 19, 29 hi^-w hna ba n^^t^'>1 . . . n-^Dvy^ nnnj-'i. nn: is to divide by joints, esp. for sacrifice. Lev. i, 6. i Ki. 18, 23. CSK^JOn] LXX D^axi'D is better. "inxi] nnx is far more frequently said in such phrases: yet see 12, 14; and Lex. 29I*. '•""' iriQ] the awe or terror of Yahweh: cf. Gen. 35, 5 (D''nbN nnn). INVl] LXX ijiorja-av, a mistranslation of 1pyv*1: so Jud. 7, 23. 24. 12, I ; and even for npyrj 18, 23 : cf. avefiorja-av 2 Ki. 3, 2 l ; dvefiijaav (corrupted from dvefSoyja-av), ch. 13, 4. Jud. 10, 17; dveftrj (cod. Al. dve(36r](ra') for pV^)] 14, 20. ip^-*?! is probably to be restored here, IXVI having been suggested (Bu.) by the preceding N?f\ ma 5r"'N*2] a frequent expression: II 19, 15. Nu. 14, 15. Jud. 6, 16. 20, I. 8. II. Ezr. 3, I = Neh. 8, it. 8. pT3] now lizik, 1 1 miles SW. of Beth-shean, and just opposite to W. Yabis. miri'' B'^Nl] B'^N construed collectively, as often in this and similar phrases, e.g. 9*. 13, 6. 14, 22. 17, 2 etc. 9. nDN^l] Read with LXX nON'-l. nyicn] relief, deliverance: see on 14, 45 (nyitr''). Dna] Better, with Qre and 34 MSS., Dn3: cf. Gen. 18, i. II 4, 5. II. p»y] LXX, Pesh. express \\'C>'i ""Ja, in agreement with the all but universal custom of the OT. writers '. Except once in poetry (^. 83, 8), the Ammonites are always known either as ^"G^ ""Jlj or 1 Noldeke, ZDMG. 1886, p. 171. XL 2'is 87 (rarely, and mostly late) D^:iDy. On the other hand, 3N1D ^jaS P?Ciy ^J3 never occur; D"^^5 ""J^ occurs once, \^. 137, 7. IVD'^I nnN:^•J^ NTI] 'And it came to pass, as regards those that were left, that they were scattered.' An unusual construction : cf. however, 10, 11. II 2, 23: Tenses^ § l%noie; GK. § 116^. 12. n-'CJNn 13n . . . . nrsxn 10] 'Who is he that saith. Shall Saul reign over us ? give up the men that we may slay them.' A particular case of the idiom which may be most simply illustrated by Jud. 7, 3 ^^\ "lip] '<"C "'^ ' Who is fearful and trembling ? let him return ' etc. = ' Whoso is fearful and trembling, let him return ' etc. In this idiom ''D invites attention to a person of a particular character, in order after- wards to prescribe what he is to do (or what is to be done to him), or to state how he will fare. As in the example quoted, by a slight change of form in the sentence, *» may be represented by whoso : but it is really a more expressive, less ordinary usage than that of whoso, whosoever in English. Other examples : Ex. 24, 14 ; 32, 33; Dt. 20, 5. 6. 7. 8; Jud, 10, 18 ; Is. 50, 8 bis; Jer. 49, 19; and followed by an imperative, Ex. 32, 24 Ipisnn 3nt ''D? ' Who has gold ? Strip it off you!' cf. 26 "h^ nin"'^ ^O 'Who is for Yahweh? (Come) to me!' ip. 34, 13 f.'^ Comp. Lex. 567a g. ir^y I^D'' ^NK'] The sense of the words is indicated by the tone in which they are uttered — either affirmatively, in a tone of irony, or, more probably, interrogatively. So not unfrequently in Hebrew, as Gen. 27, 24 "-n nr nriN ; i Ki. i, 24 ; 21, 7 nai^D rvi^vn nny nnx h^~\'^'' hv- ch. 21, 16. 22, 7, II 16, 17. Comp. on 16, 4. 25, 11 and II II, II j and GK. § 150*. 13^ II 19, 23. 15. D''ID^5J' DTl^t] So Ex. 24, 5. The words are in apposition, the second having the effect of specializing the sense expressed by the first: Tenses, Appendix, § 188. i; GK. § 131^, ' Except once in late Hebrew, 2 Ch. 20, i. * Not to be confused (as is done by Delitzsch on ^. 25, 12) with the use of "'D in \li. 15, I. 24, 8. 10. Is. 33, 14. 63, I where the answer to ''D is a substantive, not a verb, and describes tkestkarader of the person asked about. This usage is a figure peculiar to poetry, "wbich.^Hjie examples shew, is not the case with that explained in the text. 88 The First Book of Samuel, 12. Scnmiel s farewell to the people {sequel to 7, 2-17; 8; 10, 1 7-2 7 a). 12, I. Cf. for the phrases 8, 7. 22. It is evident that two accounts of the appointment of Saul as king, written from different points of view, though fitted together so as to supplement one another, have been combined in our present Book of Samuel. 9, i — 10, 16 (in which nothing is said of the unwillingness of Yahweh to grant a king) is continued by 10, 27b (LXX). 11, 1-13. 15 (note in particular the connexion between 10, 7 do that which thine hand shall find oxid 11, 5 flf.) and ch. 13 : the sequel of ch. 8 on the other hand is 10, 17-27''* and ch. 12. The former narrative, with its greater abundance of details, is the earlier and more original: the latter in its main elements exhibits literary affinities with the Hexateuchal source E ', but it has probably in parts been expanded by a subsequent writer, whose style and point of view resemble those of the redaction of the Book of Judges, and to whom may be attributed, for instance, parts of ch. 12, especially the allusion in z^. 1 2 to ch. 1 1 (which is in fact a contra- diction, for the attack of Nahash was not the occasion of the people's asking for a king). The verse 11, 14 in the form in which it now appears seems intended to harmonize the two accounts, by repre- senting the ceremony at Gilgal as a reneival of Saul's appointment as king. The differences in style between the two narratives are very noticeable. 2. DD''J£^ l^nnJD] used here in a neutral sense : see on 2, 30. 3. Tiivn . . . Tipe'y] The two words appear often in parallelism, as Dt. 28, 33. Am. 4, I. pK'y is to oppress, in particular by defrauding a labourer or dependent of his due. n . . . 123] ">S3 is the price of a life, the money offered for the life of a murdered man to appease a kinsman's wrath (cf. DB. iii. 129). The imposition of a nS3 is permitted in the oldest legislation (Ex. 21-23) in a particular case of hofnicide (21, 30); but as compensation for a murder (the Gk. iroLvrj), the payment of it is (in the Priests' Code) strictly prohibited (Nu. 35, 31 IK'S nvn K'SJ^ ISD inpn xh 1 Budde, ZA TIV. 1888, pp. 231-236 { = Richter and Samuel, 1890, pp. 180-185), who, however (see the last paragraph on p. 248), does not claim to shew that the writer is identical v/ith that of E. Comp. LOT. 167-168 (edd. 6-8, 177-178). XII. 1-3 89 niD? W\ Nin). In the sense of an equivalent for a life conceived as forfeited, it occurs i/f. 49, 8. Is. 43, 3. In Am. 5, 12 the nobles of Samaria are denounced as "iSD Tip?. This being the uniform usage of the word, it follows that what Samuel here repudiates is that he has ever as judge taken a money payment on condition of acquitting a murderer brought before him for justice. U ^yy D^^ysi] 'that I might {Tenses, § 63) hide my eyes in it.' The sense of the metaphor is obvious: comp. D''J"'y n"iD3 Gen. 20, 16. LXX, however, has i^LXao-fxa Kal uiroSirifia ; dTroKpi0iiT€ kot' €(xou, kuI dTToSfocra) vyuiv i.e. "'? ^^V ^y^V'^) "iS^, The ' pair of sandals' is chosen by Amos (2,6. 8, 6) as an example of a paltry article, for the sake of which the Israelite of his day would ' sell the poor:' and Sir. 46, 19 (in the praise of Samuel, with plain allusion to this passage), koL irpo Kaipov KoifJLTrjcTiws atwvos iTre/xaprvpaTO evavTi Kvpiov kol ^^lotov XpT^/xara Kai Iws uTToSTjfjidTGjr aiTO TTcicrrjs aapKos ovk ^iXiq^a' /cat ovk iviKaX(.(T€V avria a.vOpoi7ro»y (f . 18, 44 Oy). So 4 MSS. + 2 Gi., and LXX. 6. nvT'] LXX Ma/DTDs Kv/3tos=''"^ ly, certainly rightly. nc^'y] A difficult and anomalous use of ntJ'y. The explanation which is best in accordance with the general use of the verb is that of Keil : made Moses and Aaron to be what they were as leaders of men, the word being used not in a physical sense, but morally, of the position taken by them in history. (Ges. rendered constituit, appointed; but nc'y has this sense only when it is followed by a word implying office or function, as to make priests, i Ki. 12, 31 ; to make (or set tip) D"'3yn^1 aiN 2 Ki. 21, 6 : similarly II 15, i to establish chariots and horses.) 7. nt2D::*N] The Nif., properly reflexive, as "inDJ to hide oneself, acquires sometimes a reciprocal force, as DD'^TJ to judge one another, ^ Not in The Massorah. 2 MSS. are cited from De Rossi, except where otherwise stated. XIL s-ii 93 i. e. to plead or dispute together in judgement ; so npiJ to set right one another, i.e. to argue or reason together (Is. i, i8): ^yi3 to counsel one another, i.e. to take counsel together (i Ki. 12, 6 and often) : cf. GK. ''' nipn^; ^D nx] LXX prefix koI dTrayycXw ifjriv = 'Oph n'l'"5N1. DD•l^•J is construed with an accus. in Ez. 17, 20 l^yo DB' iriN "TIDDB'JI ^3 ?yc "iCX. But the construction is harsh ; and in all probability either 1^y»3 (so 9 MSS.) or l^yo hv (so i MS.) should be read in Ez., and here the words expressed by LXX should be supplied. '' niplX is, no doubt, a reminiscence of Jud. 5, 11. 8. Ipyri . . . "IB'SD] as 6, 6b. D^IVD] LXX add koX IraTruvwa-ev avrovs Atyx;7rros = D^l^fO Q13yM. (not 0^33^1 Th. We.: see Ex. i, 12. Dt. 26, 6. II 7, 10 Hebrew and LXX). The words are needed on account of the following Ipyn : a copyist's eye passed from the first D''"iVD to the second. Dn''tJ'^l] expresses just what Moses and Aaron did not do. LXX KttTWKto-cv, Pesh. olo/, Vulg. collocavit = Q?''?'*! (the subject being God). The unpointed oac'M has been filled in wrongly in MT. 9. "i^DM] This figure is used first in the ' Song of Moses,' Dt. 32, 30 : and adopted thence by the Deuteronomic redactor of the Book of Judges, who uses it often in the frame-work into which he fits the narratives incorporated by him in his Book (Jud. 2, 14. 3, 8. 4, 2. 10, 7 [rather differently in the older narrative 4, 9]). Chapters 7, 8, 12 of I Sam. have affinities in style with the redactional elements of the Book of Judges. TiVn Nnv n^] LXX express TiVn I^O pT sn^f Itr, which is more in accordance with Hebrew usage. 10. 1J:n''1] Here, where Ipyn closely precedes, the sing, is corrected by the Massorah into the plural ('p "nDN''"l). 11. p2] No judge or deliverer of this name is elsewhere mentioned. Ewald regarded p3 as an abbreviation of p2y Jud. 12, i3flf. : but some better known hero is likely to have been referred to. LXX, Pesh. have p~i3. Baraq, it is true, is mentioned in Judges before Gideon ; but between Gideon and Jephthah no suitable name can be sugo^ested : and the order in v. 9 is not chronological. Targ. and Jews explain cf Samson, treating p2 fancifully as = p p. 94 The First Book of Samuel, ^NIDC' nxi] Pesh. and Lucian p::'^::' ns"! : probably a correction. The passage, of course, does not report the ipsissima verba of Samuel : the speech is the work of the narrator, and indeed, in this part, appears to have been expanded by a later editor, who has forgotten that it is Samuel himself who is speaking. The allusion is to the success narrated in ch. 7. nt33] An accus., defining the state, 'in confidence, security:' GK. § ii8 T nrr-ni] Cf. Ex. 9, 3. Dt. 2, 15. Jud. 2, 15. DDTllSN^l] Since ' and against your fathers ' gives an unsuitable sense, and the passages in which 1 means, or appears to mean, as ^ are dissimilar, there is no alternative but to accept LXX DDSppn^ in place ^ In the formulation of proverbs, where the relation _/r^/« which the comparison is deduced stands in the second place (rare) : Job 5, 7 For man is born to trouble a«af sparks fly upwards (i.e. both effects happen similarly); 12, 11. More com- monly the opposite order is employed : Pr. 25, 25 Cold waters to a thirsty soul and good news from a far country; 26, 3. 9. 14 A door turns upon its hinges atid a sluggard upon his bed ; 27, 21 : cf. •^. 19, 5 MT. i^Lex. 253* j). Even supposing that the passage could, on other grounds, be treated as an example of the first of these usages, the same verb will be must obviously govern both clauses : the substitution of it was in the second clause destroys entirely the parallelism of idea upon which the idiom itself essentially depends. XII. 11-22 95 of D3*ni3N31 : the mention together of ' you ' and ' your king ' agrees both with z'. 14 and v. 2'^. MT. will be a lapsus calami, perhaps due to a reminiscence of vv. 6-8. 16. nb'V] 'is about to do.' They«/. instans (on 3, 11). 17. ni7p] 'voices,' viz. of Yahweh, in accordance with the Hebrew conception of a thunderstorm (t/t. 18, 11-14) : so Ex. 9, 23. 28 al,: of. i/f. 29 throughout. PXK'/'] in regard to asking: in our idiom, */'« asking' (though -'NK'II would never be used in Heb.). So v. 19, and often, as 14, 33. Gen. 18, 19. 2 S. 13, 16 ; cf. GK. § 1 1 40. 20. Dnx] emphatic : 'ye, indeed, have done this evil : only ("jx) do not go further, and turn aside from Yahweh into idolatry.' 21. "i^] Intrusive and meaningless: cf. the similar untranslatable ""3 in 2 Ch. 22, 6 (2 Ki. 8, 29 rightly p). The word is not represented in LXX. Ehrlich, however, remarks that ''^^X "IID is nowhere said ; and suggests that '"3 may be a mutilated fragment of nrib?, — with "ilD, as Dt. II, 28. 28, 14. innn] The primary idea of inn is difficult to seize \ but probably the ideas associated with it were those oi formlessness, confusion, un- reality, emptiness: in the Versions it is mostly represented by kcvoV, ovSe'v, fidratov, inane, vacuum, vanum. It thus denotes the formlessness of the primaeval earth (Gen. i, 2 'and the earth wz.^ formless and empty'), and of a land reduced to a formless chaos (Jer. 4, 23: cf. Is. 34, 11), — in each of these passages being parallel to ^nla emptiness: in Job 26, 7 (inn pV |1D5f ilDb) eynpty space; it then comes to mean empty^ unsubstantial, unreal, and is used of a groundless argument or consideration (Is. 29, 21 p^'^?? ^'"ihn ^t3*l), of moral unreality, or false- hood (Is. 59, 4 1'"in b'i D^t^?), of something unsubstantial (Is. 40, i 7 'h inB'm ^nni dqno, 23 r\m inn? pN ^;?Qtf'); and so here o^ idols ; cf. Is. 41, 29 £]n^3D3 inni nn 'their molten images are wind and hollowness,' 44, 9 inn Dps bo? nir|'^ with 'profit not' in the following clause, exactly as here. See further Lex. s.v. v'^yv N? "irx] Jeremiah's expressions are similar: 2, 8 N^ nns I3^n i^'iyT' (cf. V. 11); 16, 19 ^''yio D3 pNi ^nn; cf. also Is. 44, 9. 10. 57, 12 — all of false gods or idols. 22. ^lUn IDB'] Jos. 7, 9 : also Jer. 44, 26. Ez. 36, 23. 96 The First Book of Samuel, 7''Xin] 'hath willed:' see on II 7, 29. 23. ""aJX] k casus pendens : cf. Gen. 24, 27, Is. 45, 12^; GK. § 135^. NtDno] The inf. after '•7 npipn, expressing the act deprecated, is regularly construed wilh fJD, Gen. 18, 25. 44, 7. ch. 26, 11: not 'Far be it (lit. Ad profanum sit : see Lex.) from me that I should sin ! ' but 'Far be lifor me ! so that I should not sin {y\i. away from sinning).' phnD is parallel with t<£3TO, and dependent like it upon h n^''^n. nniDH i"n] Comp. 2 Ki. 20, 13 mun pt? (but Is. 39, 2 jnij^n 31J3n) ; Jer. 6, 20 3lDn n3p. See above on 6, 18. But there is no reason why here we should not punctuate T!^^ (Klo. Bu. Sm. Now.; GK. § 126s). 24. Wn^] foriN^^ as Jos. 24, 14. \p. 34, 10. See GK. § 7500. ^Ijn] the ' inwardly transitive ' or ' internal ' Hif'il (GK. § 53d) hath she7vn or (?a:^/<5//f(in spite of D't^'J Ti'^) is not said in Heb. for ' two years :' we have indeed D'^"^ Q^^'^ II 2, 10. < 2 Ki. 21, 19 (= 2 Ch. 33, 2i)t; but the regular expression is Q'njU' (Gen. II, 10. II 14, 28. I Ki. 15, 25. 16, 8 al.). If with Keil we suppose 1 ^nnc'y to have fallen out, the form of D^JC' "TIC^ must be supposed to have been altered, and we must restore, in accordance with usage, ^3^ D^ri^'5 D''iE'y. The entire verse is not represented in LXX, and it is quite possible that it is only a late insertion in the Hebrew text, — originally perhaps a marginal note due to one who desiderated in the case of Saul a record similar to that found in the case of subsequent kings. 2. ^N">'i:"'0 D'2^S* r\^V&\ 'LXX, Syr. express men after 3000, 1 Three or four MSS. of LXX read vioj rpidKovTa irSiv : but in view of the age at which Jonathan, almost immediately after Saul's accession, appears, a higher figure seems to be required. 2 Not, as Keil writes, 3 . There is no ground for supposing (as is sometimes done) that in ancient times numerals were represented in Hebrew MSS. by the letters of the alphabet. If the numerals were not written in full, but expressed by symbols, the ancient Hebrews, it is reasonable to suppose, would have adopted a system similar to that in use amongst their neighbours, found equally in Phoenician, Palmyrene, Nabataean, and Old Aramaic inscriptions, and used also in Syriac. This system may be seen exemplified in detail in Euting's Nabatdische Inschriften aus Arabien (1885), p. 96 f., in the Table attached to Plate LXXIV of the Facsimiles of Manuscripts and Inscriptions {Oriental Series'), published by the Palaeographical Society under the editorship of Professor W. Wright (London, 1S75-S3), or in Lidzbarski, Nordsem. Epigraphik (1898), p. 198 ff., and the Table at the end of his Atlas of Plates. These Tables shew in what manner symbols which at first sight appear distinct, are in reality connected with one another by intermediate links. The first ten numerals in Phoenician are |, ||, |j| , \lll, mil, mill, \llllll, II III lib mill III. -^; 20 is =; or ^; 21 is 1=^ or \H'y 3° ^^ ~^H'^ 4° '5 HH'> 9° i'' ~^ H HHH> ^^'^' The notation by means of letters of the alphabet is found on Phoenician coins (but not the earliest), on the coins of Simon Maccabaeus, and since mediaeval times has been in general, though not universal, use (not, for example, in the Epigraph of the St. Petersburg MS. of A. D. 916, or in the Epigraphs of many other MSS.). 136& ^ 98 The First Book of Samuel, Perhaps B'^N has dropped out after D''3^N on account of its resem- blance to 'C^"'JD in i?Nie'^0 ' (Dr. Weir). b'ODOa] Michmas (Is. 10, 28), now Miihmds (1980 ft.), was 2 miles NE. of Geba' (see the next note but one), from vi'hich it was separated by the upper part of the valley, which a little lower down begins to have steep rocky sides, called now the Wddy es-Suwemt (see p. 106). f'S*"n'"3 "in] the hill-country of Bethel, now Beitin, 4I miles NW. of Michmas. The road from Mulimas makes an ascent of 900 ft. through Der Diwan (2370 ft.) to Beittn (2890 ft.). prD"'33 nynja] Read pO''3n ynb, as v. 16. Gibeah (see on 9, i) was the modern Tell el-Fill, 3 miles N. of Jerusalem : Gebd (which Is. 10, 29 shews was distinct) was the modern Jebci (2220 ft.), on the south side of the Pass of Michmas (13, 16. 14, 5), 3 miles NE. of Gibeah ; and the two places, owing to the similarity of their names, are several times confused in MT. X^yil y33 recurs i Ki. 15, 22. 3. 2^V3] See on 10, 5. j;33n"i] Read with LXX, Targ., ny333 : see 10, 10 (cf. 6). D"'"i2yn "lyiSti'"'] Let the Hebrews hear ! viz. the news, and the order, implied in the proclamation, to come and join Saul in the war, which of course must now follow. V. 4 then describes how the report spread among the people, and induced them to respond to Saul's invitation. But Dnayn is strange in SauVs mouth : and LXX express W^ "IJ^^*.? Cinyn 'saying. The Hebrews have revolted' (2 Ki. i, i). This, if correct, will of course be in its proper place after DTltJ'^D lyDC'"'! in a, and pNH ^D3 "iDIK^n J?pn i'lSt^'l will connect, and connect well, with V. 4 (see Jud. 6, 34^^). So substantially We., who, however, instead of assuming a transposition of the words from clause a, regards their incorrect position as indicating that originally they were a marginal gloss. This conclusion, however, is not necessary (Sm. Bu. Now.). 4. '1 B'XSJ] lit. 7nade itself malodorous agaifut (= was in bad odour with) : so II 10, 6 ; sq. nx {with, i.e. towards) II 16, 21. 5. D''K'i'i^] The number of chariots is disproportionately large : no doubt DK'^^ is an error for T\fhf (so LXX (Luc.) and Pesh.). 'y\ ^ina] Jos. II, 4. Jud. 7, 12. 317] in regard to muchness : 7, as often, introducing the terlmvi comparaiionis (Lex. 5x40, d); cf. Gen. 41, 19. Ex. 24, 10. XIII. 2-7 99 l^y'^l] from the low-lying Philistine plain ; presumably up the Vale (p»y) of Aijalon, past the two Beth-horons (on v. i8), and across the elevated plateau on which Bethel stands (G. A. Smith, H. G. 250; cf. 251, 2 1 o f., 291). pN"n''2 nonp] Belh-aven was W. (NW. : see the INIap) of Michmas, near Ai, E. (SE.) of Bethel (Jos. 7, 2), and the N. border of Judah ran up from it to Bethel (Jos. 18, 12 f.); but its exact site is not known. 6. 1N"i] the plur. after the collective tl'^X is in itself unexceptionable (Jud. 9, 55. 15, 10. 20, 17. 20^. 33. 36^ 48. 2 S. 20, 2^: but LXX have the sing, in 9, 55. 20, 33. 36^, 2 S. 20, 2^) ; but LXX cTSev presupposes nX"i, and this is supported by the following li? nv. The sing, after the collective is also very common: Jud. 7, 23. 2\^. 12, i. 20, 20*. 41 {ler). 21, 1. I S. 14, 24, 17, 25 al. (but LXX have the plur. in Jud. 7, 23. 20, 20*. 41, second and third times). Cninai] Thistles (2 Ki. 14, 9) are unsuitable: read with Ewald {Hist. iii. 44 [E. T. 31]), Th. We. etc. Dninni, as 14, 11. Caves abound in the rocky sides of the lower part of Wady es-Suwenit. D''nnv] Only besides in Jud. 9, 46. 49, of some part of the temple of n''"i3 i'N, in which the Shechemites took refuge, and which was burnt upon them, though what part precisely is not clear. In Arabic 11^ means a tower or lo/ty building (Qor. 40, 38), '^j^ (with ^) a narrow excavation for the body at the bottom of a grave {Moore, fudges, p. 266)': the former suggests an idea which is here not probable; but if n"*")^ had some less special sense than '■J^•i, such as under- ground cavity, it would suit at least this passage. 7^. D'^iayi] We.'s objections to onny are well-founded. The word does not express ' some of the Hebrews ; ' and as v. 7 carries on the thought of V. 6, there is no ground for the repetition of the subject Dnay, and its emphatic position before the verb: a verb coordinate 1 Also used similarly in the Nabataean Inscriptions (Earth, AJSL. July, 97, 273) found at Madain-Salih by Mr. Doughty (No. 8, lines 4, 5), and (re-)ediled by Euting, Nabataische Inschriften (1885), of a sepulchral chamber: see No. 15 (= Cooke, Nsi. No. 91), line 4 np^Hi Nnnvi NiDD ,0 pin pn^n hdsdinS NTIIJI SnjlO N^ni3 p ' and to Arisoxe belong two-thirds of the tomb, and the sepulchral chamber ; and her share in the niches is the east side, with the niches there,' etc. ; with Noldeke's note, p. 55. See also Cooke, No. 94, i (from Petra). H 2 TOO The First Book of Samuel, with 1N3nn''1 V. 6 is what would be expected. For n3y Onnyi p~lM~nN he conjectures accordingly, with but slight changes, liayi pINt ni"13]^P ' and they passed over the fords of Jordan.' This is a decided improvement, except that nayi should be nnyi. This, however, lessens the similarity to D''l3yi : hence Klo.'s clever suggestion ^1 Dyi for D''"i3yl is probably best : ' and much people passed over Jordan ' (so Bu. Sm.). For the frequent confusion of 2. and D in old Heb. MSS., see Introd., § 5. 2. yb-jga. First rejection of Saul at Gilgal {comp. lo, 8). i^. i^J^n] See 10, 8. Vinx mn] pregnantly (cf. nxip^ inn 16, 4, ^N 'n Gen. 42, 28) = followed him tremhlmg. We. conjectured plausibly l"*")!!}^^, which is also expressed by Luc. (diro o-n-LcrOev avrov) : trembled/ro/^ after him = forsook him trembling: so Now. Dh. Bu., however, prefers MT., pointing out that VnnSD is tautologous with 8^. 8. !?n^M] The Kt. is bn*\ {Nf.) as Gen. 8, 12 (not the P^el hrv^ which is confined to poetry). The Qre is ?ni*l {Hf), as 10, 8 ; II 18, 14. ^NIDty nc'N] ^-(cLSo*,? is good Aramaic, but h^yo^ "W^ is not good Hebrew, in the sense ' of Samuel.' A verb has dropped out. lyj or ny) (see II 20, 5") is suggested by Ges. [Lg. p. 851) and Keil : "'1''^ (Gen. 21, 2) or "IDX (ib. 22, 2^), the latter of which might easily fall out after "yyi^ , is expressed by LXX, Targ. : but the word which might drop out most readily is D'^ (see Ex. 9, 5) before ^NIDK' (so 5 MSS.); so also Dr. Weir. Comp. Ew. § 2 921* note. ^2^1] The Hif. of pa is always causative, except here, Ex. 5, 12. < Job 38, 24. Probably Qal should be read each time, i.e. here ^2*1, IvVd] from beside, frojii with: so 2 Ki. 25, 5 with the same verb. Cf. 28, \\ footnote; Lex. 759*. II. '•3] recitativum : see on 2, 16. r??] Nif. from }*^*S, which does not occur, but is assumed to be a parallel form of p3 : GK. § 67dd. But probably X^ (Nif. from the ordinary form, pS) should be read. Notice the emph. nnxi. UUyd] not at Michmas (on i, 24), but to Michmas, □'•SDN: im- plying motion. XIII. J- 1 J loi 12. m^] Gilgal (lo, 8) being in the Jordan-valley, some 2600 ft. below ]\Iichmas {vv. 5. 11). PSNDNI] GK. § 54K 13. nny ""3] nny ''3 as a rule introduces the apodosis after I7 (e.g. Nu. 22, 29 : Tenses, § 144), nny having the force of z« Ihal case : and hence Hitzig, We. Bu. etc. would point here nyr^B* Np (so II 18, 12; 19, 7) for nyrsc' N?. This is preferable, though not perhaps necessary; for nny might presumably refer to a condition implied, without being actually expressed. Cf. Ex. 9, 15 where, though the context is differently worded, nny equally refers to a condition which must be inferred from v. 14: 'For in that case (viz. if such had not been my purpose), I should have put forth my hand, and smitten thee and thy people,' etc.; and Job 3, 13. ^n] = by, which would be more usual : comp. 2, 34. 3, 12. 5, 4. 6. 6, 15- 14, 34 (contrast 33). 16, 13 (contrast 10, 6). 23 (16 ^y). 17,3.51. 18, 10. 19, 9. 16. 20, 25 (by the side of 7y). 22, 13 (8 7y). 27, 10 (^N after bv tw-ice). II 2, 9 (thrice ^N followed by thrice by in the same sentence), 6, 3. 8, 7 etc.: 20, 23^ (23^ and 8, 16 by). 24, 4. So sometimes in other books, esp. in Jeremiah. Cf. Lex. 41^. 7y where 7X would be more usual is less common : but see on 1,10 and add II 14, i. 17, 11. 14. U3^D C*''X] So Jer. 3, i5t, of the ideal rulers of the future: "ab cyi D3^ TinJi. 15. ^yi] See onv. 12 ; and cf. Jud. 2, i. After bibjn p something appears to have dropped out of the narrative. In v. 4 Saul is at Gilgal, and remains there during the scene 9-14; \nv. 16 he appears suddenly abiding (ati'V) at Giheah. A clause describing his departure from Gilgal and arrival at Gibeah is thus desiderated. LXX has such a clause, continuing, viz. after 7:7jn |a [^ eis oSov avTov ^, koX to Kard- Xifxjxa Tov Xaov ave/Sr] oTricro) SaouA ets dTravTTycriv ottictw tov Xaov tov TTokefJua-Tov. avTOiv Trapayevo/xivojv Ik FaAyaAwv] ci? Tafiaa lieviafieiv, ktX. This may be accepted in substance, though not quite in the form in which it here appears, (i) 131*17 following, as it would do ?])''), * These words do not stand in Tisch.'s text, but they form part of the text of B, and are printed in Dr. Swete's edition. We.'s conjecture, therefore (made in 1871), that ' els obbv aiirov has probably fallen out,' is entirely confirmed. I02 The First Book of Samuel, would give rise to a phrase not in use (1::^^ "j?''! is always said). (2) eis aTrdvT-qcriv omcroi represents a non-Hebraic combination (though adopted, without misgiving, by Th.). (3) avrutv Trapay., if it repre- sents, as it seems to do, D^N3 Dn must be followed by npD ^NC^I, not as MT. by piNC' "ipD"*! (so always : see Tenses, § 169). The following text will satisfy the conditions of Hebrew style: ^yi ^jnid::' Dp'1 \^pi^ or] Dyi nxipb h'^^f ■'inx rbv oyn inii ns-inS tiS';!] ^3^3n-p '31 pD>33 nyn: [baijsn j?p W3^i nDnbsn. The omission in MT. is evidently due to the recurrence of ^3^:n"p. 16. The Philistines had expelled Saul from Michmas (v. 5^^; cf. V. 2), and he had retired to Geba", where Jonathan already was {v. 2). 17. n^nti'cn] So 14, 15. Probably a technical expression, denoting {ZAW. 1907, 59) the part of an army employed in ravaging and destruction: cf. esp. Jer. 22, 7 (cutting down trees); also 46, 22. Ez. 9, it", 21, 36. Ew. {^Hist. iii. 33 n.) compared^.;^.i^ 1 , of a body of raiders (Lane, 2307). D^K^N"* n'k^^CJ'] as three columns, an accus. defining the manner in which r\^rwi2r\ issued forth: Ew. § 279c; GK. § iiSq. Cf. 2 Ki. 5, 2 DnnJ "IS^"' D1N1 came out as marauding bands. nnj<] the numeral without the art., being definite in itself: see GK. §§ 126^, 134I ; and cf. on i, 2. Notice the frequentative n3D\ nisy] According to Jerome, 'Ophra was 5 miles E. of Bethel, whence it has been generally identified with et-Taiyibeh (2850 ft.), 4 miles NE. of Bethel (2890 ft.), and 5 miles to the N. of Michmas (1980 ft.). Cf. Jos. 18, 23 ; and on II 13, 23. i'yiD' I'in] LXX SwyaA. Unknown. 18. Upper Beth-horon, now Bet-'iXr elf oka (2020 ft.), was 10 miles, as the crow flies, W. of Michmas. Lower Beth-horon, now Bel-ur et-iahta (13 10 ft.), was i| miles WNW. of Upper Beth-horon. The ' way ' to Beth-horon from Michmas would be to the NW., past Der Diwan (2370 ft.), up to Bethel (2890 ft., — 900 ft. above Michmas), and then on to the west. i'UJn] The north border of Benjamin ran up from Jericho to ^ non^JOn Cti'iN or^ DJ? is a phrase that occurs in Joshua, but not elsewhere in I-II Sam. This, however, is not decisive against its originality here. XIII. i6-2o 103 near Ramah (on 10, 2); so it would pass, presumably, near Michmas'. But Tin ' the way to,' suggests a particular place, not a line ; and 51PL":n {that leans out over : see Nu. 21, 20. 23, 28) would be more naturally said of a height than of a border. LXX Ta^Ste points to nynsn ' the hill ' (not the place of that name) ; and this ought pro- bably to be read, with HDi^K'jin for P,iTkr:n. The 'wilderness' meant will be that consisting of the hills and wadys sloping down eastwards into the Jordan-valley (see the next note): cf. Jud. 20, 47 'into the wilderness, to the crag of Rimmon ' (3^ miles N. of Michmas). D''y2Xn ^l\ the Ravine of the Hyaenas. The Wady es-Suwenit (see on v. 2), at about 5 miles below Michmas, on the SE., runs into W. Farah, and 2 or 3 miles below the point of juncture, there is a valley called Wddy Abu-Daba', running from the SW. into W. Farah. This, however, seems an insignificant valley : perhaps (Buhl, Geogr. 98) Q^yav ''3 was the ancient name of W. Farah itself (which to the east of this point is now known as W. Kelt). There is a road, about 2 miles north of W. Farah (see the large PEF. Map), leading straight down from Michmas into the Jordan-valley, which may be the road here meant. The j;33 (or rather r\'!i2l) may have been a hill near this road, overlooking W. Farah or W. Kelt. Cf. H. G. p. 291 n. 19. NVO''] frequentative, just as (e.g.) Gen. 31, 39, . , , |Q "112X ""3] the same idiom, implying always that steps are taken to prevent what is feared from taking place, 27, 11. Gen. 31, 31 (comp. 26, 7). 42, 4. Ex. 13, 17. ./.. 38, 17 al. "IDNJ Qre nDN. See Ochlah we-Ochlah, No. 119 2, where eighteen cases of an' omitted T at the end of a word are enumerated, several (e.g. Jud. 21, 20. I Ki. 12, 7) similar to this. See further in the Introduction, p. Ixii f. 20. 11"|*.1] Point rather, with Klo., ''"''],'','!, with a freq. force (on I, 3), in agreement with N^'D'' v. 19, and inn\'l1 v. 21. DTlk^'^sn] 'LXX tis y^v &kXo^v\(av. Ought we not to read ^K DTlD'^Dn (from !?NnK''') or possibly [so Bu. Sm.] n^l^ ? ' (Dr. Weir.) 1 2 Ki. 23, 8 ' from Geba' to Beer-sheba ' implies that Geba' was on the N. border of the Southern Kingdom; cf. Zech. 14, 10. * Or, in the Rabbinical Bibles, the Mass. ma^'na on i Ki. 1,1, or the Final Massorah, letter 1, No. 18. 104 The First Book of Samuel, in"^'i.n^] LXX render this by hpiiravov, Pesh. by U«»^ (ox-goad), both words being used in v. 21 to represent plin. Probably, there- fore, I33"n should be read here for 'iriK'"}np, The two verses will then agree in the implements enumerated ; and the repetition of almost the same word (in^ino^ Wt^'l^n) in one and the same verse will be avoided. Symm. StKeXXa, maliock (so EVV.), 21. Ca m^van] These words are hopelessly corrupt. They are rendered conventionally hhininess of edges: but (i) the plur. of ns is elsewhere nvs ; (2) the meaning bluntness, viewed in the light of the sense which the root ~iVD elsewhere expresses, is extremely doubt- fiiP; (3) the construction is grammatically inexplicable (m''^*3n for n-i^VD). D''?l1 "i^VSn (inf Hf. with the force of a noun— rather ^'ii'Sn, Ew. § 156c), suggested by Keil, would lessen the grammatical anomaly, but does not really remove the difficulty which the words present. LXX 6 TpvyrjTos for m^xan presupposes almost the same word ("T'VDn) ; but their rendering of the clause kol r]v 6 TpvyrjTo? hoifios tov 6epLt,€iv supplies no basis for a satisfactory restoration of the text. AV. f/e is derived immediately from the Jewish commentators, Rashi, and David Kimchi : its ultimate source is merely the conjectural rendering of Targ. Pesh. (N3"'D1t:*). \)C'bp vbc'b^] Another crux. ])\ybp occurs in the Targ. of Qoh. 12, II (=Heb. nilD^C): but possibly it may be only borrowed from the present passage: it is not cited as occurring elsewhere in Aramaic, or post-Bibl. Hebrew. Still the root (see Levy) has in Aramaic the sense of deing thiii (hence Nu. 7, 13 Ps.-Jon. a silver charger C'vp N^?"'J'^ of thiji plate), so there remains the possibility that Jlt^7p may have been in use to denote a fine point. In that case (VC'^P ^h^ will be a sort of compound = iride7is. But such a com- pound in Hebrew is by no means free of suspicion ; and we expect naturally to find a reference to the same implements that are named V. 20. LXX saw in the words the high price which the Philistines * The combination of "lifD with Jas to cleave, hence as applied to a sword, to hack, AW i « a->yli a hacked i.e. blunted sword (Schultens, 0pp. Mhi., p. 168), is altogether questionable, the interchange of consonants being against rule (lifD should correspond to an Arabic Jai, not JaJ ; see the list of examples in Tenses, Appendi.x, § 178). XIII. 20— XIV. 4 105 exacted for sharpening the tools of the Hebrews : to. 8e dKevt] {= DTiX in V. 20) ?,v rpeh o-ckXol eh rov oSovra, i.e. 1^6 D^J'I^K' n\y%'2. This reading will of course presuppose that the corrupt words D^3 nT'VDn expressed originally the idea of sharpening: — 'And sharpening used to be obtained for the mattocks and for the coulters a/ three shekels a ioolh,' etc. But DTlS and nVj>"inD are not constructed with teeth : and the price stated appears to be incredibly high. : in-iin (Bomberg, Ginsb. Kit.)] : |3"i^n (Baer, with Qimhi, p. 99). The "^ is peculiar ; but in spite of the following 3 (not 3), dor-, not da-r^, is intended : GK. § 9^. On the form, GK. § 85"; Stade, § 52a ; and comp. \'pj> qorbhdn Ez. 40, 43 (Baer, Gi. Kit.) ; H?? Est. 8, 6 {st. c\ 22. HTil] M""! would be expected (cf. on i, 12) ; and perhaps n\Ti is an error for it, due to the preceding njiNII. ncn^D] the form is cstr. Probably ti'MD should follow ; so LXX. 23. The garrison of the Philistines moved from Michmas itself (y. 16) to the ' Pass of Michmas,' i.e. to the point on the north edge of W. es-Suwenit, where the ' pass ' across (not dowri) the Wady began (see the Map; and cf. on 14, 5). 2^'d] LXX TuTToVrao-is, attempting, no doubt, to render etymologically. However, ^Trocrrao-ts was used by Sophocles in the sense of eve'Spa (Hatch, Essays in Biblical Greek, 1889, p. 88). 14, I. DVn NTl] See on 1,4. riri "ayo] 'off — i.e. on; see the note on v. 4 — this side-across (or this opposite side).' T?n this recurs 17, 26; 20, 19 LXX; Jud. 6, 20; 2 Ki. 4, 25; 23, 17 ; Zech. 2, 8; Dan. 8, i6t: cf. n]^n Gen. 24, 65; 37, i9t; '^'^^'} Ez. 36, 35t. All are akin to the common Arabic (jjll who, which {Lex. 229^: Wright, Arab. Gramm. i, § 347 ; Compar. Gramm., p. 117). Everywhere else, however, the noun to which T^n is attached has the art. : hence (Bu.) we ought perhaps to read either \)\^ "^V.k}^ (cf. v. 4), or t^n 'l^pO "^^VD ' across this pass.' 2. nti'V] was abiding, — at the time. Notice the ptcp. ni"p3] 'at the outskirts (lit. extremity) of:' so 9, 27. Nu. 11, i. 20, 16 al. It is a pity that the obscure archaism 'in the uttermost part of has been retained in RV. nyajn] Ready^i: see 13, 16; and cf. 14, 5. 4. niiayon] the form is absolute (Jos. 2, 7), not (Sm.) construct. io6 The First Book of Samuel, 'y\ "13j;no] '■\1'^ = side, as V. 40. Ex. 32, 15 Dnnay ''Jt^'O 071 their two sides. |JD, as constantly, in defining position, lit. ojf, — in our idiom, from a different point of view, 07i I^Lex. 578t>). njo . . . riTD the repetition has the effect of placing the two identical words in contrast with each other : hence they acquire the sense ' off here . . . off there: So often, as 17, 3; 23, 26 HtD ^r\T\ Isp . . . niD inn n^*p. II 2, 13; Nu. 22, 24 nriD "n:i nra "nj. 32, 19'; and similarly (in Ezek. only) n'2Jp . , . n'sp ^Ez. 40, 10 al.) ; and in analogous expressions (e.g. nt . . . HT = hie . . . iile). Render, then, ' on the side, off here . . . , on the side, off there ' = ' on the one side . . . , on the other side.* 5. LXX 6S0S can only be a corruption of oSov's (cf. in v. 4 the second version koI oSous TreVpas ck tovtov) : hence the Gk. text here must have sustained a double corruption ; first, 68ov m i^^ ^\^iy. '•ji '^/. ^ / HI/6 // '^C^. v\Vi\^^ .,11 ;//// ' />=: IkV \ — ^l-Miktara ■;204o m ifed^Duwer ?<^ '^- >«ll#''-"»^ ^^^7n\^ B.V.T?. 2 I a, b, Bu^ef ami Seiich, accurdiiig to Robinson. c, d. Bo^e/ and Seneh, according loDalman in 1904. (Dalman now places them a mile further down Wady cs-Suwen!t, to the SE. : see above, p. 106.) C| S* 6' 8- i'resent route between Jcba' and Michmis for passengers with animals. c, f, e. Shorter route lor foot -passengers. f. Steep descent into Wady el-Medineh (the 'Wady of the City,' i.e. leading to Jerusalem). r. Ras el- Wady ('Head of the Wady' cs- Suwentt). (Reproduced, by permission, from Plate VI, at the end of ZDMG, xxvii, with slight corrections made in accordance with ZDMG. xxviii. 161 ff. THE PASS OF MICHMAS to Beittn -^^. C c ,Duwer English Miles l XIV. 4-9 ^°7 PIVd] ^2i^ fixed firmly, or was a pillar (2, 8). But the word seems superfluous (contrast clause ^); and it is probably only a corrupt anticipation of p2V0. ?1D] in front of , on the same side with: Jos. 8, 33 in front (?/" the two mountains; Ex. 18, 19 in front ^ God, i.e. representing Him. See W. A. Wright, in ihefournal of Philology, xiii. 1 17-120. 6 resumes v. i, after the intervening parenthetical particulars. iTj^y] TS^"!) is used here absolutely, in the full and pregnant sense which it sometimes has, esp. in poetry: i Ki. 8, 32 n^^JJI and act, Jer. 14, 7 "p^ |y»i' nb'y, ^. 22, 32 nsj^y '•3, 37, 5 al. {Lex. 794a 4). Jud. 2, 7, which has been compared, is quite different : nt^^y there has an object, i^'N, referring back to mn' .TJ'yc ^3. IIVJ/'D] Not as ivy 9, 1 7 ; but in the sense of constraint, difiicidly : ' There is no difficulty to Yahweh, in regard to saving (either) with many or with few.' Cf. for the thought 2 Ch. 14, 10. i Mace. 3, 18 (cited by Th.). 7. 1^ nt2J] The reflexive '^, as elsewhere (e.g. Dt. i, 7. 40), with verbs of motion. A difficulty in MT. arises however from the use of nuj ; for in II 2, 2 1 "j^NOC ^y 1t< iro"* ^y 1^ nt23 it preserves its usual force of incline, which here seems not to be suitable. LXX express \b n^b -yilh IC'N b r\^V do all unto which thine heart (i.e. mind) inclineth: cf. HDJ with 27 Jud. 9, 3. i Ki. n, 9. 123^3] Cf. i/a. 20, 5 pa^n "^ |n\ But here also a phrase, which in this connexion is more idiomatic, is suggested by LXX tSoii cyw jaera o-oD, «s 1^ KapSi'a crou KapSta fxoG, i.e. ''^^^ 1?-??? (so Ew. Th. We. Bu. etc.). 8. nnay "l^mx mn] Notice the idiom, use of the ptcp., more delicate and expressive than the Engl, 'we will pass over.' Comp. similar sentences in Jud. 6, 37 (also followed by DN) ; Gen. 24, 13 and 43 (followed by n^m). 9. nOi<"' n3 DN] The n3, pointing onwards, is idiomatic : see Gen. 31, 8. II 15, 26. DID1 and nny are synonyms, as Jos. 10, 13 DT*! noy nT"! cnDCi^n (cf. 1 2^ dh). UTinn] idiomatically = ?■« (?wr //ari?, where we are: as Jos. 6, 5 n'nnn 'i"'yn riDin n!?D3i will fixll /« its place; Jud. 7, 21 vnnn c^n noyi and they stood each in his place ; Hab. 3, 16 M"\N ^nnni=^and I tremble where I stand ; Is. 25, 10. Cf. Lex. 1065^ 2 a. io8 Tlic First Book of Saumcl, 10. DJriJ] will have given ihtm. : 20, 22; II 5, 24. 11. ':i onny njn] 'Behold Hebrews coming out,' etc. Ci''133yn (see Kitt.) Ihe tnicc — a term of contempt (cf. Judith 14, 12 Vulg.) — was proposed by Hitzig {Gesch. Isr., p. 135), and is favoured by Bu. ; but it is not probable. 12. n:iVDn] Read 3 Jfl^n, as elsewhere in r^^. 13-14: LXX Mccro-ac^. 13. "i^a^l] LXX IISM (cf. Jud. 20, 42). Against this, see We. nnv^JD] intensive, as 17, 51. II i, 9. The Philistines fell down, smitten by Jonathan's sword ; and his armour-bearer, as he went along, despatched ihe?n after him. The ptcp. represents vividly the armour-bearer's activity on the occasion. 14. 'y\ ""VnaD] 'as it were within half a furrow, (of) an acre of field.' ^)yi as Is. 5, 10 *. If the text be correct, we must imagine the narrator to be thinking of a field, of a size such as the expression mK' lOV would suggest : he says, then, that in a space equal to about half the distance across it, the twenty men were slain. mK' lUi defines in effect the length of the ^jyo, and is hence construed in apposition with it (on the principle explained in Tenses, § 192 : cf. HDN DH-'y TjDO ' a veil, twenty cubits '). Nevertheless the MT. excites suspicion, if only by the combination of D and 3 in ''^*n33 ^. LXX has eV (SoXtai^ Kttt Kox^aiLv Tov TreStov = m:^»n ? 2) CVna. However, if the words ^ The area which a ~\t2)S of oxen could plough in (presumably) a day. * Which elsewhere occurs onty in the expression ^Jt^'^<"l3^ (five times), and in n?nn33 once (Is. 1,26), in parallelism with ilJti'KI^D. ]ip'2 occurs (including 10, 27) three times (the third passage is 3in ''JSOD Lev. 26, 37). As an ordinary rule, such combinations are avoided in classical Hebrew (GK. § 118'""). Even bV^ = ^s Jipon occurs only in the latest Hebrew, ^. 119, 14 ; 2 Ch. 32, 19 : and in a different sense, as a strengthened 3, Is. 59, 18 (first time ; the second occurrence must be corrupt) ; 63, 7f . ^ Tisch.'s text adds koX Iv iTfTpoPuXois. But on this We.'s acute note, written in 1871, deserves to be transcribed. Comparing LXX with MT., he wrote: 'The first letter of MT. 3 is not expressed in LXX, the following five agree, but are combined to form one word (CiTia) : at the end of the verse LXX agrees also in rnK*. It remains to refer, if possible, IJDif Hjy and nal (v -rreTpoPoKon koi ev Kox^^a^i to a common source. When the six letters on the one side and the six words on the other are compared, and when further the meanings of the two principal words in the Greek are taken into account, it is natural to suppose ev irerpoPuXots (= y/p ''33N Job 41, 20) to be a gloss explanatory of «oxA.af(j/ pebbles (i Mace. 10, 73), which appear here strangely as a weapon,' We.'s XIV. io-i6 log contain some notice of the weapons used, they are certainly out of place at the end of v. 14, and (We.) will be a gloss on z/. 13, intended to explain, in view of 13, 22, what weapons the armour-bearer could have had ; under the circumstances, also, pebbles, at any rate, do not appear likely to have been employed. On n:yD, the furrow (cf. i/c. 129, 3), at the end of which the ploughman turns, see Dalman, ZDPV. 1905, p. 27 ff. Dalm. regards HTkJ' HlOV as an explanatory gloss. llL^ still means z. furrow in Palestine : the average length of one seems to be (p. 31) 20-30 yds., so that half a furrow would be 10-15 yds. 15. 'y\ n:nC3] ' in the camp, and (so LXX) on the field, and among all the people,' i.e. in the camp (13, 17), among the men posted in the fields around, and among the people generally : even the garrison (13, 23) and the ravaging band (13, 17) trembled as well. ':i ^^m] 'and it [GK. § 144^] became a trembling of God,' i.e. the affair resulted in a general panic. D\17X n*T>n denotes a terror without adequate apparent cause, and therefore attributed to the direct in- fluence of God. Comp. the later Greek use of TravtKov (from Ildv : see Liddell and Scott, s. v.). Cf. 11,7 nin'' nna. Gen. 35, 5 DM^X nnn : also 2 Ki. 7, 6 ; Ez. 38, 21 LXX (n'J-in-^aS' for mn ^m b^b). Whether T3"l is hyperbolical, or denotes an actual earthquake, is uncertain : t^'J;"l is the word regularly used to express the latter idea. rmn] from nn"}n ; the dagesh is abnormal (GK. § 95^). 16. 7lNk^v CS^'n] GK. § 129^. Saul's watchmen, or scouts, would follow what was taking place on the other side of the valley. < ny3:3] Read V^^^: see 13, 16, and cf. 14, 2. 5. nbr\) lb'') :ioJ pcnn nni] Q^ni is untranslateable. AV. ' and they went on beating down ' connects the word with D?n lo hanuner (so Targ.) : but besides the word being unsuitable, and one never used in such a connexion, the construction is an impossible one (the inf. abs. would be required : Dpni ipr\ 'p'^X). LXX has *cai i8ou y] TrapefjiftoXr] TeTapay/xo'77 evOev Kal tvO^v, i.e. Ci'^ni D^H y\)2^ nJn»n njni, which yields a thoroughly satisfactory sense. *]7^1 is a corruption of tbn : reasonin'^1'\r\ Ehrl. would read ''inN ppT (as 17, 53) ^=go hotly after. This is plausible here and Jud. 20, 45, but difficult in i Ch. 10, 2 : when we find twice ^"inx "ip^Til for nx IpmM, is it likely that Ipan""! would be twice an error for \'^'V'\ .? 23. iix-n''2-nN n-iny] passed over B., — nny with riN, as Dt. 2, 18. Jud. II, 29: some MSS., however, have ly. Beth-aven was a little E. of Bethel (13, 5), 4 miles NW. of Michmas, and 1000 ft. above it. Luc. reads ph"n^3. The natural route from Michmas to Aijalon {v. 31) * ?"lCnXD (19,7) is rendered wael «x^"j j-;Vm/ heri. 2 See LOT.^, p. 537, No. 30; and add 2 Ch. 1,4. * Conjunctional phrases such as \^'0 , ?y = ICX'PV, Di''3 II 22, i being excepted. The relative is also omitted regularly after TlTH n7"^X i Ki. 13, 12, 2 Ki. 3,8. 2 Ch. i8, 23. Job 38, 19, 24t. And comp. below, on ch, 25, 15 (^D^). * Comp. also Jud. 8, i. 20, -\^. c/i. 6,9. 26, 14. 112 The First Book of Samuel, appears to be first up to Bethel (4 miles), then SW. to Bireh (2 miles) ; after this, to judge from the map, either due W., by a bridle-path across the mountains (8 miles), straight to Lower Beth-horon (1310 ft,), — or, by a better road, first 4 miles SSW. to el-Jib (Gibeon), then 5 miles WNW, to Upper Beth-horon (2020 ft.), 2 miles to Lower Beth-horon (1310 ft.), — and lastly 6 miles down the valley to the SW. to Aijalon (940 ft.). As both Beth-aven and Beth-horon would thus be passed on the way to Aijalon, either reading would suit. 24. Ninn DVn ^ll ^NltJ'^ C^'•'N1] m'^ will mean had beeti driven, hard- pressed hy \ht enemy (as 13, 6): but it is not apparent how this con- dition would be relieved by Saul's measure 'y\ 7N''1. (The rendering of AV. 'had adjured,' is contrary to Hebrew grammar.) LXX has here a variant, which, at least to Ephraim, seems original, and suits the con- text. For the words quoted it reads : Kat ttSs o Xaos y]v /xera SaouX ws SeVa ■^iXidS€<; dvSpMV' Koi rjv 6 ttoXc^os SiecTTrap/xevos eis oXrjv ttoXlv ii' toj opct TW E<^/3at/>t. Kat '!S,aovX rjyvo-qa-^v dyvoiav fj.€ydX.r]v iv rrj 'r)ixipa iKeivr], Kal apdrai ktX., i.e. (as We. rightly restores) b'Oif Di? n^n Dyn-^DI T : TT : T T T : -it ; v - ; V T T T ; • - - I " • * T : ••.--:" ii\r]n Di*?. Ets oX-qv ttoXlv is doubtless a doublet of iv tQ opci : for in confused with TV see Jos. 15, 10^ ; 2 Ki. 23, 16; 2 Ch. 21, 11 ; Is. 66, 20 (Trommius) : oAr/v is merely amplificatory. rii'isj is applied to a battle in II 18, 8 : nac' is found in ch. 26, 21 (LXX rjyvoTjKo). ' Committed a great error,' however, agrees poorly with the context : in the sequel Saul is in no way condemned, and Yahweh is displeased {v. 37) at the curse being unheeded. Klo. conjectured, very cleverly, that Tjyvorjaev dyvoiav was an error for ^yviatv dyvf'iav, which (Bu.) would express "ip "l^^n ^ (cf. Nu. 6, 2 dcpa-yviaaaeai dyveiav = inn^ l^^ [? "173 1"'-Tl'p], 3 dyvtaerjneTai = IT) separated a great (ceremonial) separation, i. e. imposed a great absti7ience. ">p , and (Nu. 6, 2. 3. 5, 6. 12) 1"'^n, are chiefly (Nu. 6) used of the vow of separation, or abstinence, made by the "lip (the ' Nazirite'), but at least the Nif. 1^3 is used more generally (Lev. 22, 2. Ez. 14, 7. Zech. 7, 3 ; Hos. 9, lot) ; and with this reading the meaning will be that Saul, perceiving by Israel's success that Yahweh was with it, laid upon the people, in accordance with the religious ideas of the time, a ' taboo ' of abstinence, hoping thereby to secure His continued assistance. The conjecture is clever, but rests (Now.) upon a precarious basis: '\)l "I'-in, also, though it might perhaps have borne the meaning supposed, does not actually occur with it. 1 Though here LXX may have paraphrased, treating Ony in as = D'>iyi n^lp. ^ na 113 (Sm. Kenn.) is less probable : this expression is followed, not by a curse, but by a promise dependent on a condition : ck.i, 11. II 15, 8. Gen. 28, 20. Nu. 21, 2. Jud. 1 1, 20. ^ ^' \ \p , I^Jss— XIV. 24-26 113 i'N'l] Hif. of n^N (for bsil) made io swear : GK. § 76^; more fully Konig, i. 578f. "iJiropjl] in continuation of liyn ny: Tenses, § 115, GK. § 112^; similarly Jud. 6, 18 ; Is. 5, 8. 25. 1X2] Comp. II 15, 23 D"'3U pxn ^531; Gen. 41, 57. 25-26^. 26* merely repeats 2 58', though the verses stand too closely together for a resumption to be probable. LXX has koL 'laaX Spv/jib'; rjv yu,€Ato"(rwvo9 Kara Trpocrwrrov tov aypov' koL cl:q ^y n^n i-iy:^. In v. 26% LXX agree with MT., except in expressing nm for CJ^m. The connexion leads us in "im to recognize dees, and (observing the 1 in pNl) to read njni n2T l^n, vocalizing ''''"5^"] ^^^\}, or more probably i"i3'^ ^?i^ [its bees had left it '^]. From the text thus presupposed by LXX, MT. arose as follows, "ly, which was ambiguous, was first of all explained by Cai V. 25; afterwards, however, it was forgotten that ^21 was only intended to explain "ly^, and ~\y\ rendered superfluous by the explana- tory {j'aT, and understood in its common sense as wood, was detached from its original connexion, and united with the fragments of the variant of 24 end, preserved in LXX [Kat Tracra rj yyj rjpLo-Ta = ?31 Dn^ DyD p^n]. In view of the beginning of v. 26, the sentence was thus formed which stands now in MT. as v. 2^^. ^21 for nm v. 26 is no doubt an accidental corruption, though the fact that 131 as a collective term ^ does not occur elsewhere in the OT., might con- 1 li)" = honeycomb, as Ct. 5, i itJ'aT DV nV'. ^ The sense stream postulated by MT. for Tj^H is unsupported by analogy. ^ D''13'1 in i\iQ plural {bees) occurs Dt. 1,4^ al. 13G5 ^ 114 The First Book of Samuel, tribute to the mistranscription.' Read, therefore, for vv. 2^-26^ : ' And there was honeycomb upon the face of the field, and the people came to the honeycomb, and lo, the bees had left it : but no man,' etc. VS b^ n"- ytTD pS'l] rC'n is lo overtake, reach, obtain ; with T* as subject, it occurs often in the Priests' Code (e.g. Lev. 14, 21) to express the idea of the means of a person sufficing to meet some expense. Here Klo. is undoubtedly right in restoring n^::*D: y^?\ ns 7N T" is the usual Heb. phrase for the sense required: see z*. 27 and Pr. 19, 24. Dr. Weir makes the same suggestion, remarking ' LXX eVto-T/3€^wv as in the next verse : ' so also Targ. aTlti. Hitzig (on Am. 9, 10) proposed {^"'310. 27. nrtN] Read nhiN (on II 2 1, i): nno and ^•^•^ are both masc. (Ehrl). nJNini] Kt. nJKiril a^id his eyes saw: Qre nJ"]J ''^T^t the verdal sufhx should be used, is uncertain: cf. GK. § ioqp, ^3 . , , DN '•3] The first '•3 introduces the terms of the oath : the second ""^ is merely resumptive of the first, after the intervening hypothetical clause. So often, as II 3, 9. Gen. 22, 16 f. [Lex. 472*). 41. D^nn niii] AV. 'Give a perfect (lot):' RV. 'Shew the right:' Keil, ' Give innocence ' (of disposition, i. e. truth). All these suggested renderings of D'"l3n are without support. Cr^n is ' perfect,' i. e, in a physical sense, of an animal, unblemished ; in a moral sense, inno- cent ^ blameless. D^JOn n^n might mean 'give one who is perfect:' but this is not the sense which is here required : Saul does not ask for one who is perfect to be produced ; and though he might ask for the one who is in the right to be declared, this would be expressed by pnx (Dt. 25, I ; I Ki, 8, 32), not by D"'Dn. LXX has for the two words : Tt on ovk a.TreKpL$7]<; tw SorAo) (tov cnrjfjiepov ; r/ iv ifjiol t] iv 'liDvaOav Tw vlio fxov 7] dSiKta ; Kupte 6 ©cos laparjX, 86s 8yjXov (TOv 'laparjX, 86s Srj oaiorrjTa, whence the following text may be restored : IN '^'^l DN Di»n T^nrnx n^jy i6 n^b *'\; ^T , I . ^ . If . ; • T T " t; • " v: V~ ' T V • ; ' T T : D'^sn T]2T\ . The text thus obtained is both satisfactory in itself, and at once removes the obscurity and abruptness attaching to MT. The first clause corresponds with LXX exactly : in the second clause iav TttSe etTrrj 86s 817 cannot be followed ; but 86s 8^ (omitted in A) seems to be merely a rhetorical anticipation of the 86s Srj following ; and considering that LXX render IJK'"' in v. 39 by a verb {d-n-oKpiOfj), there is nothing arbitrary in supposing that raSc elirr] may represent i:ir' here. For ^V^l CN cf. 20, 8. A-^Aoi stands for Cllt* c/i. 28, 6 and Nu. 27, 21 (as 87^Awcrts, in Ex. 28, 26. Lev. 8, 8). The cause of the omission in MT. lies evidently in the occurrence of the same word ^Niir'' before both i6 ni^b and D''Dn nan. The restored text (which is now generally accepted by scholars) shews (what has often been surmised independently) that the D^cnni nniNH DDB'D was a mode of casting lots: cf. l^^sn v. 42, and note that "l??!!, which 1 Innocent, that is, not of a particular offence, but generally. ii8 77?^ First Book of Samuel, immediately follows in v. 41 (but which in MT. stands unexplained), is the word regularly used of taking by lot, 10, 20 f, Jos. 7, 14. 16. 42. After '•Jl LXX has an addition, which in Heb. would be 133 in^V pil IJ'^n 1^''2''1 oynD. But although its omission could be readily explained by homoeoieleuion, its originality is very doubtful: see We. and Now. 43. Tiroyu oyo] ' I did taste : ' GK. § i is^*. nitDN ''33n] ' Here I am ; I will die,' — Jonathan thus not complaining of the fate to which he has involuntarily rendered himself liable, but declaring his willingness to meet it. For ^Jjn as an expression of resignation, cf. 12, 3, and esp. II 15, 26; also Gen. 44, 16. 50, 18. EVV., in 'And lo, I must die,' neglect the suff. in "Jan. 44. n^J^y HD] LXX adds 'h, which at least is a correct explanation of the phrase ; the curse being invoked naturally upon himself. Possibly, however, this was understood; at least, the phrase recurs I Ki. 19, 2 without 'h (where LXX similarly yu,ot). The oath followed by ^3, as II 3, 9. 35. I Ki. 2, 23. 19, 2. 45. nyiti^'] The passage illustrates the material sense of the word : so Ex. 14, 13 ; II 10, II ; and nyi^i'n ^ (the more common word in prose), as Jud. 15, 18; ch. 11, 9. 13. 19, sal. The root yK'^, as Arabic shews, means properly to be wide, capacious, ample (e. g. Qor. 29, 56 iX-.lj -pjl ^°,^ behold. My earth is broad ; Matt. 7, 13 (Lagarde) %-^\\ = TrXaTcia ; 2 Cor. 6,11 (Erpenius) f-i-iir = TreTrAa- Twrai; Gen. 26, 22; Ex. 34, 24 Saad. jLIJ = 3"'mn) : hence ]}''\:^'\n is properly to give width and freedom to (opp. "^^D), and nyiK'^ is ' safety ' in the sense of space to move in, freedom from enemies or constraint (opp. ">S narrowness, angustiae). Etymologically, then, the idea of the root would be best expressed by deliver, deliverance ; and in a passage such as 11, 9 nyit^^n D3? n\nn "iriD this sense appears to be clearly distinguishable. By the Prophets and Psalmists, however, 1 Formed as though from a root yiB' on the ground, probably, of a false analogy. Similarly HDipn, ^.iS{^'^l, HCnn as though from [fjip, K1B', ^T\\ though the verbs actually in use are Plp3 nX5J' ND~i. Comp. 01. p. 401 ; Stade, § 266"=. XIV. 4^-45 1 19 the idea of deliverance o^^ freedom which nj?1D*\ nyiCTI connote, is enlarged, so as to include spiritual as well as material blessings. These words seldom, if ever, express a spiritual state exclusively : their common theological sense in Hebrew is that of a material deliverance attended by spiritual blessings (e.g. Is. 12, 2 ; 45, 17). In some passages, the temporal element in the deliverance is very evident, e.g. i/r. 3,9 (RV. marg. 'Or, Victory:' see v. 8); 20,6 (cf. 7); 28, 8 (note ry and nyo) ; 62,3 (note the parallel figures mv, ^ajSJ'D); 74, 12, etc. : cf. nyVi;'n, ip. 33, 17. 60, n. The margins in RV. on several of the passages quoted (including those in the historical books) serve as a clue to the manner in which the Hebrew words represented by the English ' salvation ' acquired gradually a higher and fuller meaning. Vl:'N'"1 nnyi:'0 ^S"- m\ ' If there shall fall even a single hair of his head to the ground!' myK> is a single hair, see Jud. 20, i6 nr ^^3 iS"Dn^ N'h myi^'n-^N* pN*a yhp : the fem. being the so-called ' nomen unitatis,' Ew. § 176*; GK. § 122*. So ^3N a fleet, •TJX a ship (Jon. 1,3). p is to be understood here as in TD^ *^D^^ Dt- 15, 7: lit. • starting from one of thy brethren ^ ' = even one of thy brethren. This use of (0 is elucidated by Arabic: see Ges. Thes., or Lex. 581* (where illustrations are cited); Ew. § 278"^ ; GK. § 119^ {note): also Ewald, Gr. Arab. §577; Wright, Arab. Gr. ii. § 48 f <5. Comp. Qor. 6, 59 L^.» I.^ ^1 Ai.j' "ya Jaal.1 UJ even a single leaf (nom. unit.) falleth not without His knowing it. — The proverbial expression itself recurs II 14, 11, and with ah for DX i Ki. i, 52. Dy] r= in conjunction with, aided by (uncommon) : cf. Dan. 11, 39. ns'^l] redeemed : literally, by the substitution of another (Ew. Hist. iii. 51 [E. T. 36]; We.), or metaphorically? Had the former been the sense intended, the fact, it is probable, would have been stated more circumstantially, instead of its being left to the reader to infer it from a single word, ms is the technical word used of the redemption of a life that is forfeit ; but the redemption may be made by the life of an animal, or by a money payment, Ex. 13, 13. 15. 34, 20, cf. 21, 8. 30 (all JE); Nu. 18, 15. 16 (P). ^ Or, according to others, a rhetorical application oi 'Ca.t partitive sense. I20 77?^ First Book of Samuel, 47. "'3^1321] LXX "l^oni, probably rightly: see II 8, 3-12. yen"*] yc'in is to pronounce or treat as wicked, i. e. to condemn (Dt. 25, i); hence MT. has been supposed to mean condemned in fact (Keil), punished ; and in support of this rendering, the analogy of the Syr. »aIL prop, to treat as guilty, to condemn, but occasionally used in the sense of y]Tra.v to put to the worse, overcome (Ephr. i. 325; ii. 318; ap. PS. col. 1 2 1 3), has been appealed to. But such a usage would be quite isolated in Hebrew : and the absence of a suffix or other object to yt^^n^ is strongly against it here. LXX has eo-w^fTo = y???? : — ' And wherever he turned he was victorious,' a reading in every way satisfactory and suited to the context. For the sense of the Ntf. cf. Pr. 28, 18 yt^T D^ron -i.^in ; Zech. 9, 9 WSl\ pnj? lit. just and saved, i. e. successful and victorious. The impff. denote reiteration or habit in the past, just as in Pr. 17, 8 etc. they denote it m present time. LXX ov av i(TTpd(f)r} ecrw^eTO : on ov av comp. 17, ^^^ footnote. 48. PTl C'y^l] lit. made might, i. e. achieved prowess, performed deeds of valour: Nu. 24, 18. «'as for irT'JO")"' , 'lecrcrai for "'tJ'^ , 'letpOat for nnS^, etc.), but several pr. names beginning with S are so represented, as 'IfPoaet for riK'n-C^^N II 2, 8 al, 'U^a^eX regularly for ^?rN, 'l((etr]K for ^Xnb'N ^ Or of V:J'''N, in'^B'-N. C* cannot be derived phoneticalty from B'N, only the reverse change from yi to '/ being in accordance with analogy (cf. in Syriac, Nold. Syr. Gr. § 40 C). But if ^ was pronounced softly [i, noXyi: GK. § 47*^ and «.), B'^ might be written incorrectly for CK. XIV. 47— XV. 2 121 Jos. 17, 2, 'le^f/SaaX for !)y3nX i Ki. 16, 31, 'le/iT?/" for 1?N Neh. 7,61, 'Ifpo/3aa\ (AQ») for !5{33, though the error is as old as LXX. But already Josephus says {Afi/. vi. 6, 6) Nt^os Kal Kcio-os 6 SaovAou Trarr/p d8eA<^ot ^crav utoi Se 'A^it^Aoh. 52. riNIl] frequentative : ' and Saul ze;<)«Af see, etc., and would take him to him ' = and when Saul saw . . . , he used to take him to him (Tenses, §§ 120; 148. i : so II 15, 2. 5 etc.). "inSDNM is irregular for iDDNI: see on 2, 16. 16. Saul and Amaleq. Second rejection of Saul. (Jntroduction to history of David.) 15, T. rh^ TIX] Position as 14, 35 (see note). Gen. 42, 36 nnbsB' >nK Dt. i, 38 pm inx. 10, 20. ./.. 25, 5 >n^ip inx. Jer. 4, 22 IJJT \/b TIN. 30, 14; also (not at the beginning of a sentence) Gen. 24, 14 Jyin^n nriN. jud. 14, 3 "h np nnw. ch. 18, 17. Is. 37, 26 Ti^ti'y nms*. f. 27, 4 s^'P^n* ^nis*. For other cases of TlX^ ION, etc. rendered emphatic by being prefixed to a verb, cp. {a) after 1, Gen. 12, 12 "iTT' "jnSI "TIN IJim. Lev. 10, 17 , , , |n3 riDXI. II, 33. Dt. 4,' 14. 6, 13 "inyn inxi. 13,5- 20, 19 m^n \h inxi. 2 s. 12,9 pjoy ^ja ainn nnn inxi. i Ki. i, 6". 35 . . . i^y T'jj nvn^ Ti^i^: inxi. n, 37; Is. 57, II ri-\3T N^ TIINI and PN'TD N^? *niN1. 58, 2. Jer. 9, 2 lyT «^ "riNI. 16, II. 46, 28. Ez. 22, 12 nn^ti' TlNl (of. I Ki. 14,9). Hos. 2, 15'^; Lev. 26, 33 rriTN D3nS<1. Dt. 4, 20. 6, 32. Ez. h, 7 ; Ez. 12, 13. 23, 10. 33, 31 ; Job 14, 3 : {b)'Gtn. 41, 13 rbn "int^l -33 i?y 2''K'n '»nX. Nu. 22, 33 : (O after DJ1, 2 S. 2, 7 'J1 intTD ^riN D21 ; DJ 2 S. 8, ii : {d) after N^l, fA. 20, 9. Is. 43, 22 TIN N^l riNIp: (e) after O, Gen. 7,1 pHi" Tl'-NI IDS ''2. 37,4 nnN inS' "i^. I Ki. 5, 13. Jer. 4, 17 nnnO "TIN '•D ; ch. 21, 10; H fjer. 5, 22 INTn n!? 'niNH. 7, 19!. A pronoun in an emph. position should always be noted by the student. ^^K'r^i5] sho- (not -shd-)-. GK. § 9^; and for the metheg § i6f (8). 2. Tinps] ' I will visit,' i. e. punish — the pf. (though unusual in ^ See further examples in the Supplement^ containing the Proper Names, to Hatch and Redpath's Concordance to the Septuagint (1900), p. 77 ff. 122 The First Book of Samuel, prose, except in ''Pinj) as Jud. 15, 3, expressing determination {Tenses, §13; GK. § 106™); and npa being construed with an accus. of the sin visited, as Hos. 8, 13 = 9, 9 = Jer. 14, 10. The sense mark (RV.), ansehen (Keil), is not borne out by usage : npS means to visit in fact (Ex. 3, 16. 4, 31), not to observe mentally, or to 'direct one's look at ' (Keil). 'y\ Db' T^n] Db' in a military sense, as i Ki. 20, 12 1J0''C' "10N''1 *T'yn i?y 1D''tr"'*), and '\T\^ in i//. 3. 7. Is. 22, 7. In Dt. 25, 18 (of the same occurrence) the expression used is "l"n2 T% "'^^. 3. Dnonnni] LXX, independently of kox 'lepet/x /cat, has two transla- tions of this word, viz. Kat e^oAe^pci'o-tis auroi' and Kai di/a^efAariets aOTo./ Kai, both pointing to '^ IB'N b DX] intpinni (ti for D). Though the Hebrew is poor, the combination nevertheless occurs (see on 5, 10), and as the sequel shews that the nation, as well as its belongings, was ' banned,' it is best to adopt it. 3^ pjv nyi bi'iVD] 22, i9t. nti'N nyi t^>''Nn ih. Jos. 6, 21. 8, 25 al. *7yi . . . O] _/ro/« . . . even unto, i. e. including both, as often. 4. JJO::'''")] The Pz'V/, as 23, 8t. So i Ki. 15, 22 al. the Hif'il. DW^ua] To be pointed probably QJ)! Job 32, 11; ^'^'^^ (as generally understood) Ez. 21, 33; ri? Pr. 17, 4. The omission of X is somewhat more frequent (though < rare even then) in Qal : 28, 24 inani ; II 6, i ^D'1 (from flDS) ; < 19, 14 1"^9{1; 20, 9 Tnriv i^. 104, 29 ^IDh (from fiDN); GK. § 68K 6. On the Qenites, and their former friendly relations with Israel, see Nu. 10, 29 f. Jud. i, 16, where Budde {ZATW. 1887, p. loi, and in his Commentary on Judges, ad loc.) is certainly right in reading, after MSS. of LXX, "-p^Dyn nx for Dyn nx. ^T)] so 35 (=Bomberg's Rabb. Bible of 1525), Kitt. : Baer and Ginsb. =n^^: cf. Gen. 19, 14 ^NSf 'lOp ; and see GK. § 22^ (208 1), and the Addenda. 1 Where, in 1. 6 of p. 73 of the Engl, translation, insert 'hitherto' (i.e. in previous editions) after ' When we.' In 1. 2 also ' a question ' would be better than ' doubtful ; ' for, though the note reads somewhat obscurely, Kautzsch does mean to explain the cases quoted in it by the principle of § 20'. XF. 2-9 123 "'P^DJ?] Except here and v. 15 I\IT. has throughout the chapter p7Dy. As the determined noun is needed, it is better in both these passages to read with Luc. ^y:)^. ^??^] Th*^ nieiheg, shewing the hireq to be long, appears to indi- cate that ih.Q punctuators treat the verb as Hi/. But the Hif. of PjDX does not elsewhere occur, and the metheg rests, no doubt, upon a false theory as to the nature of the word. Read without metheg, it will be the impf. Qal ^DX (as i/^. 104, 29), with ^^ shortened to -^ when the syllable is rendered toneless by the addition of a suffix (so in the ptcp. ^DDN* ^J:n 2 Ki. 22, 20 1, ^3^N' ch. 24, 5 al.; and in Pi'el MSDNO Is. 52, 12. D^^SN^< Job 16, 5 etc.). Comp. Konig, i. 382 f. ; GK. § 68^ flDN, as Jud. 18, 25. i/^. 26, 9. Ehrl. suggests '^SDS (Gen. 18, 23. 24). nriNl] Note the emph. pronoun. ''J''p] Read either '{"^^ (as Nu. 24, 22. Jud. 4, 11), or (LXX) >y^n (as V. 6^, 27, 10. 30, 29). 7. "11^ "ixn n^''ino] On Shur, see DB. s. v. It appears to have denoted the district on the NE. border of Egypt, which gave its name to the TiC' "1310 Ex. 15, 22. Where n^"'in was is uncertain. In Gen. 2, 11, 10, 29. 25, 18 the name most probably denotes a region in the NE. of Arabia, on the W. coast of the Persian Gulf ; in Gen. 10, 7 it may denote the 'A^aXtrai, on the African coast, a little S. of the Straits of Bab el-Mandeb: but even a region in the NE. of Arabia is too remote to define the starting-point of the defeat inflicted by Saul upon the Amaleqites. Either np'^in is here the name of a place in or near the country of Amaleq, otherwise unknown, or we should simply (with We.) restore D^t?'? {v. 4) : ' the error may have arisen through a reminiscence of Gen. 25, 18,' where the phrase occurs, closely resembling the one here, i33 bv "IK'N "W ly n7''inD DnVD, but where D^^in, as has just been said, appears from the context to denote a place more distant than is suitable here. "•JS ijy] i'n front of, in geographical descriptions, commonly means to the east of {Lex. 818^) : so Gen. /. c. 1 Ki. 11, 7. 9. D^JB'tsn] Explained by Kimchi {Book of Roots, s.v.) in the sense * In the parallel passage, 2 Ch. 34, 28 (Baer and Ginsbnr|T, but not 93, Kittel), in exactly the same phrase, '^SDN is pointed as here, with metheg, i. e. as an impf, Ilif. ! 124 ^'^'^ First Book of Samuel, of 1^30 Q''*3K', i.e. young of a second birth, such as had the reputation of being superior to firsthngs (see Tanhum, quoted by Roed. in the Thes. p. 1451*)- So Roed. himself (p. 14511'), and Keil. But the text reads suspiciously, and the position of ^y before Cian (instead of before the pair of similar delicacies Dnani Citi'Dn) suggests error. We. for Dnan \>Vt\ D'-JD'oni would read t:^'''y^'^\ Ci"'3CK'n ' and the best of the flocks and the herds, (even) the fat ones (comp. Ez. 34, 16), and the Iambs,' etc., which undoubtedly forms a better Hebrew sentence, and nearly agrees with the rendering of Pesh. Targ. (n''D''DS1 N''J''Cl"1), neither of which, at least, appears to have had either D''JD'D, or ^y before D"'"i3n. D''"i3 are mentioned in terms implying that they were a delicacy in Am, 6, 4 ; Dt. 32, 14. IDnnn nnx DDJI HDOJ nax^Dn bl] nas'^o means business, occupa- tion (Gen. 39, 11), and so property on which a person is occupied, Ex. 22, 7. 10: here and Gen. 33, 14 specially of property consisting in cattle (cf. 'I^jpp). ntaCi is a grammatical ?)iofistrum, originating evidently in the blunder of a scribe. The text had D)0J1 nr2J : the scribe began by error with the second word, wrote the first two letters d:, then discovered his mistake, but not wishing to make an erasure, simply added the letters nD. (There are similar monstra in Ez. 8, 16. 9, 8.) The words present, however, other difficulties, nnx , resuming n^S'^ron ^3, is indeed defensible by Dt. 13, j. 14, 6. Ps. loi, 5 al. {Tenses, § 197. i, 2) : and for the change of gender there are at least parallels which can be adduced (e.g. i Ki. 19, 11 : see GK. § i32s^ o, Targ. TOm, Vulg. et reprobum: and there can in fact be no reasonable doubt that '^9?'P?1 must be restored, either for nns DIDJ1 or for D?:5J1 alone (retaining nriN ^). Indeed, AV. RV. appear both to have adopted implicitly this emendation ; for ' refuse ' is no rendering of DD3, though it obviously expresses DNtpj (Jer. 6, 30 7narg.) or ^ ' The fern, termination of the adj., once used, can in a way operate forwards, so that the second adj. is left in the simplest, most immediate form.' =■ Which is expressed by Pesh. Targ. LXX (Luc), Vulg., and as stated above is fully defensible. XV. g-i4 125 n??'?^. The omission of the art. with the ptcp,, after a subst. defined by it, is a further difficulty. The text as it stands expresses the sense 'But all the nasbo, being common ^ (lit. despised) and refuse, they banned "^ : ' but this contradicts the context ; for some of the HDX^D was good, and was spared. The sense demanded by the context, viz. ' but suc/i of the nas^D as was common and refuse they banned,' requires either the presence of the art. in both cases, or its absence in both. 11. nnxo] Lex. 30a. 12. nN"lp7 . . . D^C^^l] In thorough analogy with Hebrew usage (see on 6, 13). LXX, Vulg. express l^-ii, which Th. declares to be a ' necessary ' insertion : but the renderings of these versions are merely accommodations to the idiom of a different language. See besides Ct. 7, 13 D^Oiaij nO''3B'J; and Ges. Thes. p. 1406^ (referred to by We.). ^0"i3n] 'The garden-land' (Is. 10, 18 al.), — the word, like other proper names with the art. (as nynjn), retaining its appellative force. It was a place in the 'hill-country' of Judah (Jos. 15, 55 ; see v. 48), mentioned also in ch. 25, 2 ff. ; now el-Kurmid, 7 miles S. of Hebron. mm] without the suffix, as 16, 11. But the ptcp. 3''VD 'is setting up' does not agree with the sequel (which states that Saul had left Carmel) : and doubtless 3''ifn ' hath set up ' must be read (so LXX aviiJTaKfv). t] lit. hand, i.e. sign, monument, trophy of the victory: II i8, 18. hhin nTl] Cf. on 10, 8. 14. ntn] See on 14, 29. The correction ^\^ (ZAW. 1895, p. 317) is unnecessary. 1 'Vile' (EVV.), unless understood in the old sense of the word {common, looked dowjt upon ; Lat. vilis), is too strong, as it is also in Jen 15, 19. Lam. i, 11 EVV., and in AV. of Job 40, 4. Phil. 3, 21. See the 'wniGr's, Jeremiah, p. 362; Minor Prophets, vol. ii (Nahum to M.ilachi), in the Century Bible, p. 25. * So ^. 18, 18; 92, 12 Cy^JD vy D*??!?? ngainst those who rise up against me (as) evil doers; 143, 10 H^ID *]ni"l thy spirit (being) good; Jer. 2, 21*' (but rd. |Sa); Ez. 24,13; Hag. i, 4 (cf. GK. § 126'). The adj. without the art. forms a species of predicate : cf. on 2, 23. (II 6, 3'' is corrupt : but even were it not so, the grammatical rendering ' drave the cart, being a new one' would be consistent with the context, which, in the case of the phrase here, is just what is not the case.) 126 The First Book of Samuel, 15. "iti'x] It^'N is a link, bringing the clause which it introduces into relation with what precedes : here the relation is a causal one, m that, forasmuch as: 20, 42. 26, 23^. Gen. 30, 18. 31, 49. 34, 13 (cf. on II 2, 5) : elsewhere, "it^K may be resolved into the expression of a consequence, so that, as Gen. 13, 16; 22, 14; i Ki. 3, 12. 13 ; 2 Ki. 9, 37. 16. f]"in] Dr. Weir thus appositely illustrates the usage of this word : 'Dt. 9, 14 D^^r^•l^•^*"l '•jod cj-in. ch. n, 3 d'^o'' nyna^ ^h fi"in. II 24, 16 IT Pj-in. i//. 37, 8 ^i^fD f)nn. 46, n lyni iDin.' n?''Sl] //^^ night (that is just past) = last night. Elsewhere always of the coming night, as Gen. 19, 5 ; 30, 15 etc. : comp. on 14, 34. nDN''l] Qre 10N''1, a necessary correction. The opposite of the variation noted on 13, 19. See Ochlah we-Ochlah, No. 120 (eleven instances of 1 at the end of a word ""Ip N71 ^Tl^ cited : among them Jos. 6, 7; 9, 7; I Ki. 12, 3. 21; 2 Ki. 14, 13). 17. 'Though thou art little in thine own eyes, art thou not head of the tribes of Israel .? And Yahweh hath anointed thee to be king over Israel ' (i. e. thou art in a position of authority, and oughtest to have restrained the people). < < 18. nriDinni] but v. 20 ''^91[!|'^. In the pf. Hif. of verbs primae gutl., -^;^ __ of I and 2 ps. is changed to -^:- -^^ after waw consec, whether the tone is thrown forward by the waw or not: so ^I^^NH Job 14, 19, but ''^']?^l'"1 Lev. 23, 30 and often ; "'JjlppKn Ex. 16, 32, but 'ri^j^Nni Is. 49, 26 ; ^ripinn is. 45, i, but 'riiptnni Ez. 30, 25 ; =iJri;i3j?n Nu. 20,5, but Q^V^!'!'^ Ex. 13, 19 : and, with no change in the place of the tone, ^'^1?^? Is. 43, 23, but T'Fi"]?^ Jer. 17, 4; n^J'JJn Ex. 33, I, but n^S5j;ni Dt. 27, 6; ^'ri|'??r)aav\ So Targ.^ Aq. (dTTo rpvct^epia?, i.e. riJiyC), Symm. (aySpos), We. But this is not probable in view of the context. ((5) Others compare riii)iyp in Job 38, 31, which can scarcely be explained otherwise than by metathesis from nnjyiD bmids : hence, here, in fetters. So Kimchi. (r) LXX render rpe/xwv, whence Lagarde very cleverly, merely by a change of punctuation, suggests JT'^'iVo (of the same form as JT'jlinK backwards, IT'lllIp moiirniiigly), totterhigly (GK. § iocs). So Sm. Now. Dh. Ehrlich, probably rightly. niion ID "ID pN] px in an exclamation, with asseverative force, as Gen. 28, 16 nrn nipon ^"^ ^^ pN; Ex. 2, 14 lann jjnij ps*. It is a stronger word than ^5?, which is also used somewhat similarly (see 16, 6). nn] a subst. bitterness, as Is, 38, 15 "•B'aJ 10 7y. ID is departed, gone by, as Am. 6, 7 D^miD nno "1D1 ; and Is. 11, 13 of a state of feeling (nwp). LXX, Pesh. omit ID, expressing merely the platitude. Surely death is bitter ! ^ (In LXX d ovTia implies the misreading of pN as pn .) 33. D^K^JD] Jud. 5, 24. f)DB'''l] Only here. Aq. Symm. SteWao-ev, Vulg. in frusta concidit, Targ. Pesh. nC'Q; LXX more generally €(rcf>aiev. Of the general sense intended by the narrator there can be no doubt: but whether the word used by him has been correctly handed down may be questioned. Etymologically C]Dti' stands isolated: the Syriac ^^^ fidit (Roed. in Thes.) does not correspond phonetically. Should we read VDK'p (Jud. 14, 6al.)? 34. n^y] from Gilgal : cf. 5y. 12 Tl\ The D"in referred to in this chapter, is well explained by Ewald in his Antiquities of Israel, pp. 101-106 [E. T. 75-/8]*. The word itself is derived ' Comp. □"'jnyo EJ'Ct:>n-n''l, etc.; see on 6, 14. ''^ . . . TlVSl] Gen. 22, 8. 2. ijnni hsB' V^^'(] II 12, 18 would support the construction that treated these words as under the government of *]^x {Tenses, § 115, p. 130), though they might in themselves be construed independently {ib. § 149 ; GK. § 159?;: Gen. 44, 22 noi VnSTiN 3Tyi). TiN^ ''"'h nnr^] Note the order: Gen. 42, 9. 47, 4. Nu. 22, 20. Jos. 2, 3; Jud. 15, 10; ch. 17, 25. 28^ 3. nnn] Read nnri?, as v. 5^. . "•3JN1] Note the emph. pronoun. T'^N "IDN "i{;^] "IDX = /t> name, designate, as Gen. 22, 2^. 9. 26, 2 ; 43, 27; II 6, 22; 2 Ki. 6, 10. Vj^, 4. "ins"lp7 , ♦ . mnil] See on 6, 13; and cf. 21, 4. "IDNl] sc. "l'?^<'7. When the verb appears in Heb. without a subject expressed, the implicit subject is — not ojie, as in English or French — but the cognate participle 1t?Nn. The explanation is confirmed by the fact that cases occur in which the cognate participle is actually expressed, Dt. 17, 6 n»n T\\o\ 22, 8 ^sjn ^3'' JQ. II 17, 9 yoc'n yO'^1. Is. 28, 4 nriN nx-in ns-i"- -i'J'n*. Ez. 18, 32 nnn nim. 33, 4 ynti'i nsiErn ^Ip riN y?01t^•^; cf. Jud. u, 31 ':n ^, cf. Jud. 9, 23. 17, I — 18,5. Second account 0/ David's introduction to Saul. David, a shepherd youth from Bethlehem, attracts the king's attention by his victory in single combat over Goliath. 17, I. n^lb'] One of the towns in the Shephelah (Jos. 15, 35), generally identified with esh-Shuweikeh (1145 ft.), on the N. slope of a range of low hills running E. and W., 14 miles W. of Bethlehem. The ' Vale of Elah ' {v. 2) is immediately below it, on the N. It is (Bu.) strategically important, as it is close to a number of valleys and roads leading up to Hebron, Bethlehem, and elsewhere; the large PEF, Map marks a Roman road leading up to Bethlehem. LXX have 2o/apfj.€Lv, etc., which, however, lead to nothing. Aq. iv Trepan Aop,€tp, agrees with MT. (for Trepas = DDN in Aq., see Is. 5, 8. 52, 10 al.). In view of i Ch. 11, 13, and of there being no support from Aquila, CDH "i2y2 (Kitt.), of the stream running down the Wady, is a very doubtful emendation. 2. nf'Nn pny] The 'Vale of the Terebinth' {v. 19. 21, lot), the ' broad depression between hills ' (on 6, 1 3), formed by the junction of two valleys, from the S. and E., which unite on the E. of esh- Shuweikeh ; the valley then narrows to form W, es-Sant (the ' Wady of Acacias '), which afterwards runs down westwards, past the shining white rock of Tell es-Safiyeh, very probably Gath (on 6, 1 7), into the Philistine plain (see further Cheyne, Devout Study of Criticism, 85 f. ; EB. s. v. Elah ; and Photograph No. 443 of the Pal. Expl. Fund). 3. Dn"'J''3 N"'jni] 'with the ravine between them.' The ravine is probably the deep and narrow gorge cut out by the stream running down the vale on the N. of esh-Shuweikeh, mentioned in the note on V. 2 (//. G. 227 f. ; Conder, Tent Work, 279). The ptcpp. describe the continuous position of the parties during XVII. i-y 139 the incidents about to be related. The IsraeUtes would be on one of the hills NE. of esh-Shuweikeh, on the opposite side of the poy. 4. D''J3n B^"'N*] i. e. the man of the fif^raixp-iov, who came forward as the ^io-L-nq-i to bring the warfare to a close. Kimchi : NW n^nc' *a^ D''j3n •^"'N xipj n131yr:^^ tic' pa cv Dv ^ n^73j The same fem. termination occurs in other old Semitic (mostly Canaanitish) names: ^l5^^{ (m.) Gen. 26, 26 (Philistine); npb'2 (f.), nbno (f.), mj23 (r/^. 9, i), na^ja (i Ki. n, 20— perhaps Edomite), nnj and nnjD Gen. 36, 13. 23 ; and in Nabataean, Euting, Nabatdische Itisckri/ien, pp. 73, 90-2, as nmn (= 'ApeVas 2 Cor. II, 32), nnn (m.), n^nj (f.), nyjo (m.), nio (m.), nT3y (m.), al. (several of these similarly in Arabic) ^ 5. In MT. the giant's weapons of defence are of bronze, those of attack are of iron. Here there is undoubtedly a consistency, which is badly disturbed in LXX (We.). D^b'pb'p] 0/ scales (of fish, Lev. 11, 9 al. ; of a crocodile, Ez. 29, 4), i. e. scaled armour. For the form, cf. D'?ysy, D^h^l Is. 18, 5. D^^ri_^n Cant. 5, II. D'^Jyinnn Qoh. 12,5 (Kon. ii. 91 f., cf. 181, 452 «.). 5000 shekels of bronze was probably c. 220 lbs. av. (Kennedy, DB. iv. 904 ff.). 6. nn>-r2!|] nhvo^ (We.) is preferable. '31 pT^l] Keil quotes appositely (from Bochart) II. 2. 45 al. ajj-^tl S' ap w/jioia-Lv (3dXeTo |t<|)os apyvporjkov. \'n''2 ^= javelin : see z'. 45 and Jos. 8, 18. 7. I'm] Read, with the Qre, and the parallel, II 21, 19, |'yi, i-e. and the shaft. D"'nK 11:0] LXX in II 21, 19. I Ch. 11, 23. 20, 5 ovt'iov', i.e. (Kennedy in his interesting art. Weaving in EB., iv. 5284 f.) the weaver's ' shaft,' or ' leash-rod ' (Lat. haatonum), used for holding ^ Some of the Jews imagined fancifully that the word described Goliath's mixed parentage : Lagarde's Prophctae Chaldaice, p. xvi (from the margin of the Cod. Reuchl.) : ''Hd T'^Tl'-NT (no\eiMpxos) N^niDI^ID XIDJ .■'JD^C'll^ D13in ICK'. (PD''33 pi. of D''33 = ffvos.) The same tradition evidently underlies the Vulg. vir spurius. Cf. Aptowilzer, ZAIV. 1909, p. 244. ''■ And in many names oi places. Comp. Tenses, §181 note. 140 The First Book of Samuel, the threads of the warp apart, while the shuttle, carrying the weft, was passed between them. 8. n:h n3] In all probability this is an error for DD^ nn2 (as I Ki. 18, 25. Jos. 24, 15: and "^ inn II 24, 12 ||), n-|3 in Heb. means to eat food: and the meaning select, choose, is not substantiated for it by either Arabic or Aramaic. (So also Dr. Weir.) 9. 10. ''JN] Notice the emph. pronoun. ID. TlDnn] ^^n is to reproach (sc. with taunts), i.e. to defy. 12-31. We here reach the first of the considerable omissions in LXX as compared with MT. These verses are not in cod. B; and though they are supplied in cod. A, they form no part of the original and genuine LXX. This may be inferred from the different style of the translation, which (i) adheres more closely to the existing MT. than is the case in the book generally; (2) deviates in the rendering of particular words, as KotA.us t^s Spvos 16 against KoiXa? 'HAa 21, 9 ; /Aecraios 23 instead of Swaros 4 for D"'33n C^^N, FoXta^ 6 ^iXio-rtaios ib. against YoXiaQ 6 a\X6Nn : but the word this is out of place, — for the paraphrase (Vulg.) de quo supra dictum est (i. e. Jesse, in ch. 16) is inadmissible. Still, as the verse, being really superfluous after ch. 16, only stands here as introducing a narrative originally unconnected with ch. 1 6, it is possible that nfn is a late and unskilful insertion made with the view of identifying the ^mDN t^^N here mentioned with the ''C''' of ch. 16. Or it might be an error for riM (Pesh. : so Dr. Weir, comparing II 4, 4), though in point of fact no verb is required (see 25, 2. i Ki. 11, 26). Ehrlich thinks it a corruption of NVI, and makes the plausible suggestion that n"'3D Xin 'm'^r\'' t^rh is a gloss, intended to shew that ''m^^< did not mean Ephraimite (1,1 al.), but Bethlehemite. Wn T\VO^ li^l] Cf. on I, 2. XVII. 8-1 s 141 D''C'3X2 N3] The text was already the same, when the translation of cod. A was made : but ' and the man in the days of Saul was aged, entered in among men ' — which is the only rendering that is justifiable — affords no intelligible sense. The most obvious correction is the omission of N2 (Hitzig); CC'^xn JpT will then mean 'aged among men.' Gratz, after Pesh., would read D'^^b Ni ' entered into years ' (so LXX (Luc.) ik7]Xv9w<; iv erea-Lv). Against the first, We. argues that the parallels n^'cn ns^n, Am. 2, 16, eV^Aos iv avSpdaiv etc. are incomplete, fpT not expressing a distinction among things in other respects similar, as ns^ and eV^Ao? do. Against the second proposal is the fact that the phrase in use is always D''0''n N3 P (Gen. 18, 11. 24, I. Jos. 13, I. 23, I (of. 2). I Ki. I, it). In face of this constant usage, it is extremely questionable whether D"'Jr2 N3 can be regarded as a legitimate and idiomatic alternative for cn^n S'3. Klo., for ID^M : D-u'JNn N3 tpT, conjectured very cleverly r\'orh'Or\ VJSn Sno |pT was too old to enter in among, etc. (with, naturally, nc^t^n for the follow- ing nc^B') ; and Bu. accepts this. It may well be right. 13. 137n . . . 13?''l] One of the two verbs is superfluous. The theory (Ew. § 346^;/.) that I37n is annexed for the purpose of giving 13^''"i the force of a plupf., is artificial and contrary to analogy. No other example of such a usage occurs in OT., cases of resumption, after a long intervening clause, being readily intelligible, and resting upon a different footing : e.g. Dt. 4, 42 D31 ; 18, 6 N31 ; Jer, 34, 18-20 ^nnJI, etc. (see on 25, 26). Unless the conjecture mentioned in the last note be accepted, IDpn here may be due to a copyist's eye having glanced by error at the following verse, where the word occurs (rightly) between the same words. 14. Nin] Gen. 2, 14; 9, 18 etc.: Tenses, § 199. 15. ^K'l Tj.pnj 'Speaker's Comm. "was gone," quite arbitrarily' (Dr. Weir). Was gone would be expressed, of course, by "^2*^ *ini nK'M. (see 9, 15): the participles can only be meant to describe David's custom at the time : RV. rightly, weiit to and fro. The verse is no doubt an addition made by the compiler of the Book for the purpose of accounting for David's absence from the court of Saul, after 16, 21 f. In fact, however, according to the narrative embodied in this chapter, David was still unknown to Saul {vv. 55-58). See the note after 18, 5. 142 The First Book of Saimiel, 7!?»] from alietidance on Saul : see Jud. 3, 19. Gen. 45, i. Mr. Deane {David: his Life a7td Times, p. 14) has omitted to notice ^yo. 17. ii.'h\>r\\ with N otiosum: GK. § 23'. See on II 17, 28. nrn on!? ni^'yi] nrn cannot belong to nitJ'y (contrast 1 8 n^xn), and nrn nrh is not Hebrew (Jer. 40, 3 nrn nnn is corrected in the Qre). nrn on^n must therefore be restored (cf. the Addcfida)'. after mtry, n might readily have dropped out. Y-\r\=take it quickly: Gen. 41, 14. 18. 2!^nn ^i-nn] lit. cuts 0/ milk, i.e. probably {EB. iii. 3091), fresh-milk cheeses. Luc. rpvcf^aXiSas, sofl cheeses; Vg. 'formellas casei.' Dl^::'^ npsn] A variation for the usual wb'^\> '^h^ ^S'Ji' (z). 22). Another (uncommon) variation is Tf^^^ '^''''^ ^N ns") Gen. 37, 14. npn Dnaiy nxi] ' and take their pledge,' i. e. bring back some token of their welfare. Of the Versions, LXX (Luc), Targ. Pesh. hit the general sense most nearly : koX eio-otcrets //.oi ti]v ayy(.XCav avTS)v, riM 20. ^y] _ Cf. vv. 22 (t b])). 28; and bv fnJ Is. 29, 12 (n bn). Mic. I, 14. — n^jyon (n loc.) to the round enclosure {czmp : EB. i. 636) : bvi'O as 26, 5. 7t. Some edd. read \}c\Qfem. form npjyon {milra). N^i'"'!] yni] Cities and countries, regarded as the molhers of their inhabitants, are regularly in Heb. construed with a fem. sg. ; and occasionally the name, even when it denotes the people, is construed similarly (Ew. § 1 74^5; GK. § i22t. i) : Ex. 12, 33 oyn bv Dn>;D pinni. II 8, 2. 5. 6 (in the parallel i Ch. 18, 2. 5. 6 altered to VrTI, NT1, "'H'^l). 24, 9 bxiC'^ ^nni (in I Ch. 21, 5 \Ti). Is. 7, 2. 21,2. 42, 11. Job i, 15 Dnpni i^y^ ^Dm. By poets the principle is carried further : and they love to personify the population of a nation or city, as a woman : e. g. Is. 54, 1 ff. ; and in the frequent fV^' T\1, bl2 T\2, etc., |V^ nnu'l"' Is. 12, 6 etc.: cf. Mic. i, 11-13- Jer. 10, 17 etc, 23. . . . njni . . . ian?D Xim] A special case of the idiom noticed on 9, 5 : I Ki. I, 22. 42. Gen. 29, 9 are closely parallel. niiyOD] An error, already noted in the Qre. LXX, Vulg. Targ. agree with the Qre in expressing the pi. rib"jy?3p : Pesh. has the sing. npiy'?'? ; and one of these must be right. 24. 1D2''l] "1, as 14, 19^. Gen. 30, 30 {Te?ises, § 127 a; GK. § 111^). 25. nn'^N^n] See on 10, 24. n^y] without subj., as Gen. 32, 7; Is. 33, 5 : Tenses, § 135. 6 (2); GK. § \i6\ 'ai n\"n] and it shall be, as regards the man, etc.: see on 2, 36. For the JJif. '\l'^W, see GK. 53°; and cf. 1p2T1 14, 22. 26. ^yo] Cf. Jos. 5, 9. I Ki. 2, 31. II 24, 2 1. 25 {Lex. 758I'). fjin ""^l not Ihal he should reproach (^IC^)) but that he should have reproached (as a completed fact) : xp. 44, 20 that thou shouldest have crushed us in a place of jackals. Gen. 40, 15. fiin^ would no doubt be more usual (18, 18. Ex. 3, 11: cf. Lex. 472^ f): but are we entitled to say (Ehrlich) that the pf. here is ' absolutely un-Hebraic ? ' C'Tl D''n^N] the plural of ' majesty : ' GK. 132*1. 28. nann] fx:*' is construed regularly as z. fem. pi., e.g. 25, 18; Jer. 33. 13; Zech. 13, 7. ••jn] Note the emph. pronoun: cf. II 7, 8. Jos. 23, 2. 2 Ki. 2, 3. 29. Nin nm ^T^] 'Was it not a word?' i.e. I merely asked a 144 The First Book of Samuel, question : that was all. So Ki. rightly : nnCNT Xin DJns si^n lOinnD 1310 '•jNtr '•D bv ^IN niti'y!? ''31V-1 PN1 "inn Ti-'t^'y vh 'rr-ian d^s noi^n . 30. nns* hro ^x] ' to the front of another.' "12*7 Dyn inac'"!] lit. turned him back with (GK. § 117^^) a word = replied to, miswered : see on II 3, 11. 32. DIX 37] LXX, We. "P?!^ 3?, which is undoubtedly more pointed, and is recommended by the ^iny which follows : of. v. \\ (which immediately precedes in LXX). ' It is the custom, when the king is addressed, to say " my lord " in place of what would be the first thou ' (We.). vby] as ij/. 42, 5. 6. 7. Not ' within him' (=i3"l|?2), which suggests an incorrect idea, but ' upon him.' py in this and similar expressions is idiomatic : it ' separates the self, as the feeling subject, from the soul' (Delitzsch). So t/^. 131, 2 as a weaned child is my soul upon me. 142, 4. Lam. 3, 20. Jon. 2, 8. Jer. 8, 18 >n '•3^ ""^y my heart upon me is sick. See Lex. 753^ d; Parallel Psalter, p. 464. 34. 'V\ n\"i nyn] Form of sentence, as 2, \\^ (see note). 3"i"in"nsi ''"isn] It is strange that here JiN should be a redundancy, while in v. 36 31111 DJ nxn DX D3 it is rather desiderated before the same word for the sake of symmetry. As it is, nxi stands according to Ew. § 277'^ end. Lex. 85* 3, to mark a new subj. in a sentence : but though several instances occur, they are not mostly in passages belonging to the best style, nor can this use of the particle be counted an elegancy. Here nx is quite superfluous. It would seem as though a copyist's eye had actually interchanged 31in here with 31in nx in V. 36 (so Now.), n^l ' and even a bear ' (Gratz, Klo. Bu. al.) is plausible : but was a bear more dreaded than a lion } The poet. nriXI (Perles) is not probable. The rendering in GK. § 154a n. {d) is very forced. nb'] Many edd. read HT, with the note np nt^: but the note is not a Massoretic one; and in fact ilT is no part of the Massoretic Text, at all, but is simply an error, first occurring in the Rabbinical Bible of 1525, edited by Jacob ben Hayyim, and perpetuated in subsequent editions. See De Rossi, Variae Lectiones, ad loc, who states that all MSS. known to him (184 of Kennicott's, and 64 of his own, besides others) read correctly nb'. XVII. 30-38 145 34^-35- The series o[ perfects with "i, instead of the impff. and waw conv., which is the usual narrative tense, is remarkable. A series of pflf. with waw, in an historical book, has the presumption of being designed by the writer in a frequentative sense ; and such is in all probability the case here, though, as the accentuation shews, the passage was understood otherwise by the punctuators. If the sense suggested be adopted, TlPVni must, of course, be read ^rip^fni (see Jer. 6, 17; Am. 4, 7), and ^"TlpTnm — though not quite with the same absolute necessity^ — ^npTPim. The solitary Dp''^ is not decisive against the interpretation proposed (see Jer. I.e., and on 14, 52). In this case, further, as the allusion will be no longer to a single particular incident, the art. in nxn and 3nn will be generic (GK. § i2 6r): 'And if a lion or bear came, and took a sheep out of the flock, I would go out after him, and smite him, and rescue it from his mouth : and if he rose up against me, I would seize hold of his beard, and smite him, and slay him -.' (So also Dr. Weir.) 35. VDo '•nWm] Am. 3, 12. vrT'tpniJ 'The dagesh is an indication that 1''JJ1'?l]1 would be the correct form; cf. GK. § 72^' (Bu.). 37. in "1JD^<''1] In accordance with Hebrew idiom, though omitted in LXX. It is 'a recapitulation of the substance of a preceding longer speech, entirely in the manner of popular narrative, and of repeated occurrence in Hebrew' (We.): cf. v. 10. Nin] resuming the subj. with emph. : Lex. 215^2. 38. V^D] [id] is used chiefly of the outer garment of a warrior : ^ On account of the pashta : see Jer. 4, 2 {Tenses, § T04). * So LXX in V. 34 orav Tjpxero Kal fKa/x^avtv : in LXX (Luc.) the impff. are continued, as logically they should be, to the end of v. 35. (On the frequentative force of vrav, rjfiKa av, tair, ws av, with the impf. indie, and even with the aorist, in Hellenistic Greek, see Winer, Grammar of N. T. Greek, § xlii. 5 ; Blass, Gramin. of N. T. Greek, § 63. 7; Moulton, Grammar of N. T. Greek, IQ06, p. 16S : and comp. Gen. 6, 4 [wrongly explained in Winer's note ib. ; see the Hebrew : in 27, 30 for tus av Tisch. must be read either w? with codd. AD (so Swete) and 10 cursives, or oaov with E and 18 cursives (also Philo) : see Hatch, £jjaj/5 in Biblical Greek, 1889, p. 163 f. ; and Brooke-McLean, ad loc.']. Ex. 17, 11. 33, 8f. 34, 34. 40, 30. Nu. 21,9. Jud. 6, 3. II 14, 26 (where Lucian, as here, has also consistently the impf. iara for iaTT]aev), etc. ; and Mark 3, 1 1 in the Revised Version.) ia65 ^ 146 The First Book of Samuel, V'no, as here, v. 39. 4, 12 O'^ynp VnD"!. 18, 4. Jud. 3, 16; DnnnD (from [nnp or ^6] ; but see note) II 10, 4= i Ch. 19, 4 ; HO II 20, 8 [rd. rro-]: Lev. 6, 3 (of a priest), ^^. 109, 18 i"=ip3 rhbp mb'^; vnno j/'. 133, 2 (of Aaron); P"^© (?) Jud. 5, lot. Cf. EB. i. 1137. V31p] So Ez. 23, 24t; V. 5 and elsewhere yai3. 39. Ehud Jud. 3, 16, for purposes of concealment, girds his sword u7ider his D''1D (V*1JD^ nnno). On ? ^'yo (chiefly late), v. Lex. 759* e. T\2hb i'N^l] The words admit of no rendering consistent at once with the meaning of b''Xin, and with the following causal clause HDJ vh "'3 : for assayed (AV.), which (as HD: nI? ""3 shews) must mean ' endeavoured unsuccessfully,' is not a sense that is ever possessed by ijVSin. In Targ. Pesh. the difficulty is felt so strongly that the positive clause is transformed into a negative one (bro? n3N N?1 : "%.))oci^ Ui Uo)! LXX have eKOTrtWcj/ = N^*l 'And he wearied himself io go (with them),' i.e. he exerted himself in vain to go with them, which agrees well with the following clause 'for he had not tried them.' Cf. Gen. 19, 11 nnsn NVD^ 1S^''1 and they wearied themselves to find the door, i. e. exerted themselves in vain to find it. The reading ^^''1 is accepted by Luzzatto // Profeta Isaia [ed. i. 1855] on I, 14 (who states that it was first suggested to him by his pupil Abraham Meinster), and Geiger {Urschrifi, p. 377); it is adopted also (in each case, as it would seem, independently) by We. and Dr. Weir. nn mD'^'i] LXX D^DII. The original text had no doubt simply D"1D''1, which was read by some as a plur., by others as a sing.; by some of the latter in was added. 40. D'Jax 9^n] srtiooth ones of stones = smoothest stones : GK. § 132". Cp^^m] either read ^V^^ (We. Now.), or (Ehrl.) it:^pS':f and delete 1^ "itJ'N n''J?"in "'^'3 , as an explanatory gloss ; or (Sm. Bu. ; cf. LXX Tw ovTt avTw €is o-^AXoyV) read U^p|':5' 'h n\T it^'K ' his shepherd's bag which served him for a (sling-stone) wallet.' 41. 3-1.^1 ^.^n ♦ • • l^'l] Contrast 14, 19. Cf. II 15, 30^ t. 43. ^3JN] in pause with zdqef: cf. on i, 15. nii'pon] the plur. is the generic plural. LXX put into David's mouth the singularly vapid reply : kuI cTttc AavetS, Oiyl, aXK t) x^piov Kwds. XVII. ^8-S4 147 46. -1:3] collectively, as 'DPaJ Is. 26, 19. But read probably with LXX njsi "|-i:3. pNH ^D lyT-i] ^INH construed with a plural, as Gen. 41, 57; and, more frequently, in late poetical style, as >\i. 66, i. 96, 1.9. 100, i al. i'N-iL"*^ D\n^N ^'^ '•d] ' that Israel hath a God.' C'^ asserts existence with some emphasis; cf. \\i. 58, 12. 47. y^t'in^] The retention of n of the Hifil, after the preformative of the impf., is rare and usually late: Jer. 9, 4; Is. 52, 5 ; t/^. 28, 7; 45, 18 ; 116, 6 (as here); Job 13, 9; Neh. 11, 17; Ez. 46, 22 (Hof. ptcp.). These are all the examples of the uncontracted verb that occur in Hebrew: cf. the n. pr. ^Din^ once \\i. 81, 6; ''?in^ Jer. 37, 3 (38, I ''?^^). The form occurs also regularly in Biblical Aramaic, as Dan. 7, 18. 24. Comp. GK. § 53a; Stade, § 113. 2; Konig, i. 294*'.^ But Klo's. nyitTM for nin'' yc'ini (so Bu.) both removes the anomalous y'krin\ and yields a better antithesis to what follows (':i rw-ph ^3). 48. iTHl] See on i, 12. 50. ... T^. ^"ini] the emph. word before pN: 21, 2^ (see note). II 15, 3. Jud. 14, 6 iTn px r\-o^'m\. 16, 15. 18, 7. 28. 19, I al. 51. innnD^] See on 14, 13. 52. N''j] The ••; in v. 3 was the ravine which separated the op- posing forces ; but this could not also be the goal of their flight : moreover, if a particular N^3 were meant, the article would be required. The word must thus represent some proper name : LXX have n3 (cf. h), which is accepted by both Keil and Commentators generally. If Gath was Tell es-Safiyeh, it was about 10 miles W. of Sochoh, down Wady Sant ; Ekron was 16 miles NW. of Sochoh : Sha'araim is mentioned in Jos. 15, 36, next to Sochoh and 'Azeqah, as a town in the Shephelah, so that it was presumably some place down the valley between Sochoh and Tell es-Safiyeh. Its actual site can, however, only be conjectured. Tell Zakarlya has been suggested : but we must first satisfy ourselves that this is not either Sochoh or 'Azeqah (cf. on v. 2). iyi is preceded naturally by |D : so D'^'^yK'jp T]"l'n3 (Sm. Kitt.; Bu. alternatively) is a very probable correction for Dnyti' "l"n3, 54. D^'^^'n''] An obvious anachronism, Jerusalem was still a Jebu- site stronghold ; see II 5, 6-9. 1^nN2] Keil (following Th.) : 'an archaism for dwelling, as 4, 10. * So with the art., the non-syncopated form D^DKTIQ ^. 36, 6 (except in D)M3) is nearly always late: comp. on II 21, 20. L 2 148 The First Book of Samuel, 13, 2 etc' But ?nx has (apparently) this sense only in the phrase Ivn^i' C'^N, inherited from a time when the nation dwelt actually in tents. The meaning can only be that David put the armour in the tent occupied by him, when he was on duty with Saul (18, 2-5 etc.) : afterwards, the sword at any rate was removed to Nob, and placed behind the ephod (21, 10). Ehrl. ''[^i*^ (i Ki. i, 39). 55. 1?DN . . . mN~l3l] Not a common type of sentence, in early Hebrew. ' It is the tendency of the earlier Hebrew, in the case of temporal or causal clauses, which Greek often places early in a sentence, either (a) to postpone them somewhat, or (3) to prefix ^T1 : it is the later Hebrew, that is apt to introduce them at the beginning. Compare ad (. 33, 12. 34, 14. Dan. 10, 9. II. 15. 19; and ad {b) (D)m?33"i 2 Ch. 7, i. 20, 23b 24, 14. 29, 29. 31, I against some fourteen times in earlier books with \nM prefixed \' e.g. ch. \'^, \; i Ki. 8, 54 (\T'1 omitted in the parallel, 2 Ch. 7, i). 9, i. "ly^n nr'^^'p] Not as AV. RV. ' Whose son is this youth ? ' but 'Whose son is the youth?' nr is enclitic, and belongs to ''JD, as Jer. 49, 19 ; x\t. 24, 8 etc. (GK. § 136c; Lex. 261a 4 b). In v. 56 EVV. render correctly. '3 "•[!] so always in this expression, and in other oaths not by God (ny-lD '•ri; 11 15, 2t; Am. 8, 14): in oaths by God always nin"" '•n, < ''?? ■'n. Either "'[' is the si. c. of a subst,''n, an old sing, of the usual C^D {Thes., Ke. Kon. ii. 42), = (^) the life of . . . ! (so the Massorites : cf. Targ. of I 20, 3 al. T^S^ \*n'i ni.T Nin csi^) ; or, in spite of the fern. t^'DJ, we should vocalize 1^'S3 "n. The explanation of ''H in GK. § ()^^^ n. as a contracted form of the st. ahs. ^H is not natural. 56. nns bNC*] Note both the position and the force of nriN 'Ask ihou:' Ex. 20, 19 W^y nnx'nan speak thou with us; Dt. 5, 24; ch. 20, 8 ; 22, 18 nns* 3D ; Jud. 8, 21 in y:D1 nnx Dip {Tenses, § 202). D^yn] 20, 2 2t. The masc, of which the corresponding fem. is njD^y Is. 7, 14 al. For np''1 v. 57, see on 4, 20. ^ Quoted from a letter of the writer by Prof. Franz Delitzsch in TJie Hebrew New Tcstatnent of the British and Foreign Bible Society, A co7ttrihtition to Hebrew Pliilology. Leipzig, 1883 [written in English], p. 19. X VII. js—X VI 11. s 149 18, I. ':i r\-\^'^i\ Gen. 44, 30 vj'Dja mvii'p vj'd:i. 13nNM] The Kt. is i^'I'^i!!! (a rare form: Ew, § 249^; 01. p. 469; Kon. i. 224, 621 ; GK. § 60^: Hos. 8, 3 i^mv i/^. 35, 8 ina^n. Jer. 23,6 iNip"" ; Qoh. 4, 12 ispn^ ; Jos. 2, 4 [corrupt]; see also on 21, 14 and II 14, 6): the Qre substitutes the more usual ^nanxsi. 2. 3Vw'^ \iT\l sh] The same idiom as Gen. 20, 6. 31, 7. ch. 24, 8 etc.: and Nu. 20, 21. 21, 23 without 7. 3. nni] as inJin* is the subj. to the end of the verse, Sm. Bu. Now. Kit. read Tin^ for nni. But 'h nna m3, with the rarest exceptions (2 Ch, 29, 10. Ezr. 10, 3), is used only of a superior, especially a conqueror, prescribing terms to an inferior (ii, i. Jud. 2, 2. Is. 55, 3 al.), so that it would seem here to be unsuitable. Unless, there- fore, \ (Ehrl.) is the waw of 'concomitance' (Ex. 21, 4 : Lex. 253*; above, p. 29), it is better to read TiT nx for nni. 4^. VlDl] = and also his (warrior's) garment : cf. on 6, 11. Without the usual |rD (before ny: Lex. 581^ 5), as Lev. 11, 42. Nu. 8, 4. 5. ^OC^*] defines how David fared when he went out : ' And David went forth, wherever Saul sent him he prospered ' = prospering wherever Saul sent him. Jer. 15, 6 ''3^n iinx TlX r\^U^ 'Thou didst forsake me, thou wentest ever backward ' = going ever backward. Comp. Tenses, § 163 with Obs. The impff. have of course a frequenta- tive force. ^iDtJTI is lo deal wisely with the implied consequence of success : in other words, it expresses not success alone, but success as the result of wise provision. No single English word expresses the full idea conveyed by the Hebrew : hence the margins in RV. here, Jos. i, 8 ; Is. 52, 13. Success alone is denoted in Heb. by nv^n. The narrative 17, i — 18, 5, precisely as it stands, it appears impossible to harmonize with 16, 14-23. The two narratives are in fact two parallel, and, taken strictly, incompatible accounts of David's introduction to the history. In 16, 14-23 David is of mature age and a ' man of war,' on account of his skill with the harp brought into Saul's service at the time of the king's mental distress, and quickly appointed his armour-bearer {vv. 18. 21). In 17, i — 18, 5 he is a shepherd lad, inexperienced in warfare, who first attracts the king's attention by his act of heroism against Goliath; and the inquiry 150 The First Book of Samuel, 17> 55-58 comes strangely from one who in 16, 14-23 had not merely been told who his father was, but had manifested a marked affection for David, and had been repeatedly waited on by him (tT. 21. 23). The inconsistency arises, not, of course, out of the double character or office ascribed to David (which is perfectly com- patible with historical probability), but out of the different representation 0/ his first introduction to Saul. In LXX (cod. B), 17, 12-31. 41. 50. 55 — 18, 5 are not recognised. By the omission of these verses the elements which conflict with 16, 14-23 are greatly reduced (e.g. David is no longer represented as unknown to Saul) ; but they are not removed altogether (comp. 17, 33. 38 ff. with 16, 18. 21^). It is doubtful therefore whether the text of LXX is here to be preferred to MT. : We. (in Bleek's Einleitung, 1878, p. 216 = Comp. des Hex. u. der hist. £b., 1889, p. 250), Kuenen [Onderzoek'^, 1887, p. 392), Bu. Dh. hold that the translators — or, more probably, perhaps the scribe of the Heb, MS. used by them — omitted the verses in question from harmonistic motives, without, however, entirely securing the end desired ^ On the other hand, W.R.Smith {OTJC? pp. 120 flf., 431 ff.), Lohr (p. xxxiv), Cornill, Introd. § 17. 6, Stade {EB. iv. 1276), Sm. Now. Kennedy (p. 121) maintain the superior originality of the shorter LXX text. In either case, however, 17, i — 18, 5 will, • And so Kamphansen, Theol. Arbeiten (Elberfeld), vii. 'Bemerkungen zur alttest. Textkiitik,' pp. 16-18. — Dr. Weir views the Hebrew text similarly, though accounting in a different manner for the omission in LXX : ' " Whose son is thisT' In 16, 21 it is said that Saul loved David, and he became his armour-bearer. To reconcile the two statements, it has been conjectured {Speaker's Cotntnentary) that 16, 21 records by anticipation what did not really come to pass till after David's victory over Goliath. But how can this be reconciled with 18, 9. 10, and especially with 18, 13 ? Or, again (Keil), that the question " Whose son is he ? " has relation not to the name, but to the position of David's father (but see v. 58) ; or that Saul's madness accounts for his having forgotten David. But all these explanations are insufficient. Are the verses wanting in LXX a later interpolation in the Hebrew text? This cannot well be: for an interpolation would not insert anything at variance with the narrative interpolated. We seem therefore shut up to the conclusion that the verses omitted in the Vat. MS. belong to an independent narrative, which was in parts incorporated with the older account, but not in all MSS. existing when the LXX translated the book. The Greek translation of the added verses [in cod. A] is very exact and must have proceeded from a later period, when the Hebrew text was fixed as at present.' XVIIL s-9 151 more or less, have been derived from a different source from 16, 14-23 (notice how David is introduced in 17, 12 ff. as though his name had not been mentioned before), and embodies a different tradition as to the manner in which Saul first became acquainted with David. 18, 6-30. Saul's growing jealousy of David {in continuation 0/16, 23). 6. ni^nr^ni (Qre) n^C'i?] The two words correspond in form so im- perfectly that the text can scarcely be in its original form. The least change is to read with Bu. ni^hD3 (cf. Ex. 15, 20 Ci'^i^jn ^D fNVJni rbhm^ D^ana nnnwX; jud. 1 1, 34 ni^noni o^ann insnp^ ns*r inn r\iTv\ ; 21, 21 ni^nG? b^rh r\V^ ni32 isi'^ dx). LXX, omitting 6^ (see p. 155) as far as Ticri^sn-nN , express then in riN"ip7 ni!)pinDn n:Si*m ':i D'sna ^NTl^''' ''"ly i'no, which is adopted by Sm. Now. (though b^''\^'' ny ^DO should precede nn n^npi5), at least as the text of what is regarded by them as the main narrative here (LXX, cod. B). m?n?33 is obviously the right correction of the Massoretic text, as we have it : the question of the relation of the Massoretic text of this verse to the LXX is one belonging to ' higher ' criticism, which cannot here be considered. "I^on 71NC'] The order is late: see p. 305 n. 7. n:''jym] So Ex. 15, 21 nnro nn^ jym. nipnt^'Dn D''t:^3n] ' the women which made merry.' Illustrate from II 6, 5, where David and the Israelites, as they bring the ark up into Zion, are described as "'""' ^^si? D''i?n'^D : also Jer. 30, 19 ^1p1 r\'r\T\ DVnti''3; 31, 4 (in the promise of Israel's restoration) ^^?n nyn Tiy DVnB'O ^inm nsif'l.— On the omission in LXX, see at the end of the section. 8. nuni] Read with LXX nnmn, to correspond with D^D^Nn (We. Bu. Sm. etc.). roi^cn "IX h Tiyi] ' and there is still only the kingdom {sc. to give) to him.' The correction h (Klo. al.) is unnecessary. 9. |iy] The Qre \yi is right. Ti'"! with the plcp. expresses at once origination and continuance — ' and . . . came into the condition of one eyeing:' so Gen. 4, 17 Ty n:3 NTi ; 21, 20''; Jud. 16,21 152 The First Book of Samuel, jniD NT1 ; 2 Ki. 1 5, 5. The verb is a denom. from I^J? , ' to eye ' (sc. enviously : LXX, cod. A {»7ro/3Ae7ro/i.€vos), the ptcp. being perhaps that of Qal, but perhaps also that of Po'el (Ew. § 125a), with the prefix D omitted (Stade, § 229; GK. § 55c), as sometimes in Pual (Ew. § 169*1; GK, § 528). The omission of O is no doubt irregular: but there is a presumption that for the sense in question, the conjugation which Ew. (§ 125a) has well characterized by the term 'Conjugation of attack ' would be in use. Cf. |??'v to be-tongue, i. e. to slander, i//. loi, 4', and GK. § 55^'*'. The verb, however, does not occur elsewhere ; and Ehrl. would read Nib' (the N dropped by haplography, and ^ then taken as iy). 10. X23n""i] played the prophet, viz. by gestures and demeanour, as 10, 5. p3D IITl] ' as (or while) David was playing : ' a circumst. clause. n''3] See on 16, 16. DV3 DV3] only here. See on 3, 10. DV3 DV itself does not occur till the latest Hebrew : Neh. 8, 18. i Ch. 12, 22. 2 Ch. 8, 13. 24, 11. 30, 21. Ezr. 3, 4. 6, 9 (Aram.)t. 11. ^li^""!] i.e. cast, from ^"it3. But it does not appear that Saul actually cast the javeUn on this occasion; hence Th. We. Kp. al. following LXX {rjpiv) and Targ. (D"'ix) would punctuate ^t^?! and took up, from ijlpi, Is. 40, 15. T'pni '^\^2 n^x] ' I will smite David and the wall,' i. e. I will smite them together, I will pin David to the wall: so 19, 10. Cf. Dt. 15, 17. 12. "'JD^JO] elsewhere, to express the source or cause of an act or feeling, mostly late (for the earlier '•JBd) : see Lex. 8i8a: and cf. ch. 8, 18. 13. I. e. Saul removed him from his circle of immediate attendants, and gave him duties with the army. Dye as 14, 17. 14. "li'^Ti'S^] ^with regard to (7, 7) all his ways.' But 13"lT^33 is better; so 18 MSS., and many Rabb. quotations ap. Aptow. I. * So ''t^Sb'D Job 9, 15 not my judge, but lie that would assail me in judgement, i. e. my opponent in judgement. The conjugation is in more regular use in Arabic, where its signification is also distinctly seen (Wright, Ar. Gr. i. § 43) : thus J>::jj to kill, JJU to try to kill = to fight with : ^J-^.-. to outrun, jJjLj to try to outrun = to run a race with. XVIII. 10-21 153 15- TC'N] for the usual ^3 {Lex, 83^ 8 a^). Cf. on 15, 20. VJSO in] and stood in awe (Kp.) of him. A stronger expression than N1M in z'. 12 : Nu. 22, 3. 16 Nin ^d] Notice the emph. pron. in a causal sentence (p. no «.); and also the participles in this verse. 17. "^ friN nriN] Note the emphatic position of nnx. Cf. Jud. 14, 3 >? np nniN; and see on 15, i. ••"•• nicn^D] 25, 28. Nu. 21, 14 ('"'• non^D isp)t. "ICN] said menially =^ thou g hi : so jj. 21. 25, 21. 2 Ki. 5, 11, and frequently (Zf.v. 568^ 2). 18. '*n] Punctuate ^jn 'my folk' (Kirkpatrick). The word is the same as the Arabic ^^ (so We. Keil, etc. ; cf. Thes. 471*), explained at length by W. R. Smith in his Kinship and Marriage in Early Arabia, pp. 36-40 (^ 41-46), and denoting ' a group of families united by blood-ties/ moving and acting together, and forming a unity smaller than the tribe, but larger than that of a single family. The word is in frequent use in Arabic ; but was rare — perhaps only dialectical — in Hebrew, and is hence explained here by the gloss "•^N nnDtt'lO. The punctuation as a pi. ('my life') shews that the meaning of the word had been forgotten. ''D (not no) is used with reference to the persons of whom the ''0 consists: cf. II 7, 18 Ti'^l ''D, Gen. 33, 8 T\\n njncn-^D i^ ■'O. 19. nn] 0/ giving, — though the action is (and, in the present case, remains) incomplete: cf. 2 Ki. 2, i. Hos. 7, i. For the omission of the sufF., sometimes, as here, indefinite, sometimes definite, cf. Gen. 19, 29. 24, 30. Ex. 13, 21. Jer. 41, 6; and GK. § 115® n. 21. B'pID?] K'pID is some kind oi /owling-implefucnt, — certainly not a ' snare * (i. e. a noose ; Germ. Schnur, a * string'), but probably the trigger of a trap with a bait laid upon it (see the illustration in the writer's Joel and Amos, p. 157, and p. 158). Hence it is often used metaphorically of that which allures a person to destruction, as here, Kx. 23, 33. Dt. 7, 16. DTIK'U] The expression recurs Job 33, 14; lit. with two, i.e. a second time (RV.) — not, however, excluding the first, but (as the literal rendering shews) together with it. Hence the phrase, as used here, must contain an ironical allusion to David's loss of Merab. Still, the 154 ^^'^ First Book of Samuel, expression remains strange. Ehrlich conjectures may b^ hsc^ "lOXM DVn 'h |nnn^ D-ntif^D]! * with the help of the PhiHstines {v. 25a) shall he make himself to-day my son-in-law.' AV. ' with (one of) the twain,' is derived from Rashi, Kimchi, and ultimately from the Targ. (piriD NTn3). A rendering which has to supply the most crucial word in a sentence, it might have been supposed, could have found no defenders: the Jews, however, discover a parallel for it in the OT.— Jud. 12, 7 and he was buried *iy?jn ny3 in (one of) the cities of Gilead ! 23. rh[>:ir\] the inf. abs. construed as a fem., as Jer. 2, 17. The C is of course the interrogative. fi?i??] Cf. Is. 3, 5 where this word is opposed to 1333 (of. 16, 14. Hos. 4, 7. Pr. 3, 35). 25. ino] The technical word denoting the price paid, according to ancient custom, by the suitor to the father or family of the bride \ See Gen. 34, 12 ; Ex. 22, 15. 16 (which speaks of the nhri3 "ina, i, e. the sum usually paid for a wife). Cf. the Homeric 'i^va or eeSva, II. 16. 178 (of a suitor) iropw^ a-rrepucria Ihva ; Od. 21. 160-2 "KWtjv hrj Tiv' €7r€tTa A.)(adahMV evireTrXwv Mvao-^&i ie8voLi.' So Kp. Klo. Weir, etc. XIX. )-i3 157 II. "ip^a in^irn?! niCC'/] The messengers, it would seem, were not commissioned to kill David (see vv. 14. 15), but only to watch the house where he was : hence doubtless 1 must be omitted with LXX, and the words rendered, ' to watch it (cf. t/^. 59, i), that he might slay him in the morning.' So Th. We. Klo. etc. noi» nriN nno . . . "irx ox] The use of the ptcp., especially in the protasis, is very idiomatic : Tenses, § 137 ; GK. § 159^. Cf. Ex. 8, 17 ; 9, 2 f. (where, as here, the apodosis also is expressed by a ptcp.). 13. D^Dinn] See on 15, 23. CTyn T'33] The exact sense is uncertain, '"'l?? is a sieve ; "i33P is the coverlet with which Benhadad was smothered by Hazael, 2 Ki. 8, 15. The phrase appears thus to denote something made of goats'- hair in the manner of net- work, — probably a quilt. Ew. Hist. iii. 107 (E.T. 77) and Keil suggest z. fly -net {KwvaiTreiov), such as might be spread over the face whilst a person was asleep. (The Kwi'ojTretov of Judith 10, 21. 13, 9 was, however, suspended on o-tvXoi — the posts of the bed.) m^^'NlD does not define whether the DVyn n^aD was placed adove or under or round the head : it merely expresses proximity to the head, see 26, 7. 1233] So bna Jos. 2, 15; D'1"? 2 Ki. 10, 7. To be explained on the analogy of what was said on 1,4, and 6, 8 : the garment, the cord, the pots, are each not determined by some antecedent reference or allusion, but are fixed in the writer's mind, and defined accordingly by the article, by the purpose to which it is, or is to he, put. Comp. Gen. 50, 26 |i"it<^; Ex. 21, 20 tjatra with a rod: Nu. 17, ii nnnr^n-nx ; 21, 9 and he put it D3n"?y on a pole: Jud. 4, 18 nD''rpt:'3 ; 7, 13 \>V^t-va\» is thus the ordinary word for lest, |D being not in use''. The punct. HDp (instead of the usual '"i?^), on account of the gutt. (other than n) : cf. 28, 9. Jud. 15, 10 etc., and before ninj (i.e. ''J^^<) xp. ID, I etc. See Lex. 554^; GK. § 102°. 18. n''"i33] Qre rii''J3. The origin and meaning of this word, which occurs six times in the present context, are alike obscure. Miihlau-Volck * derive it as follows: (_^j in Arabic is to intend, propose, conceive a design, make an aim for oneself, hence the subst. ^jli is not merely intention, project, but also the goal of a jonrttey. Upon ihis basis, M.-V. con- jecture that the root may have come to signify to reach the goal of a journey, to rest there, bleiben, bestehen ; hence niJ^ ^ in Hab. 2, 5 shall not abide, and m3 place of rest after a journey (Ort der Niederlassung, spec, fiir den Nomaden), and in a different application fl'l!) dtvellings, of the Coenobium of the prophets. The explanation is in the last degree precarious, the process by which a secondary and subordinate sense in Arabic is made the origin of the primary sense in Hebrew being an incredible one, and the number of stages — all hypothetical— assumed to have been passed through before the age of Samuel being most improbable. All 1 And so elsewhere in LXX, as Gen. 47, 19 ; Ex. 32, 12 ; Joel 2, 17 (otto;? ix-q) ; ^t. 79, 10; 115, 2. ' In OT. nD?"''T Ezr. 7, 23. In Phoenician tD (i. e. D?) by itself has the force of lest (CIS. 2 [= Cooke, JVSL 5], 21 DJ^N DJnjD'' D^ = ne tradant eos Dei) : in Hebrew it is not clear that riD? alone has acquired this force, for Qoh. 7, 17. 18. Neh. 6, 3 are sentences in which the sense of why? wherefore? appears to be distinctly present to the writers. ^ In the nth ed. of Ges. Handwbrterbuch (1890). In Buhl's editions (1895- 191 o) of the same work the explanation is not repeated. XIX. iy-2^ 159 that can be said is that, if the text of Hab. 2, 5. ^. 68, 13 be sound, Hebrew must have possessed a verb iTlO with some such sense as to sit quiet (which does not, however, appear in the cognate languages) ; and that ni3 may perhaps be con- nected with it. niJ , however, does not signify ' habitation ' in general, it denotes in particular 2^ pastoral abode (see especially II 7, 8), and is only applied figuratively to other kinds of abode in poetry Ex. 15, 13, or the higher prose II 15, 25. The application is so different that it seems doubtful whether a word closely allied to this would have been chosen to denote a residence of prophets. Ewald, Hist. iii. 70 (E. T. 49 f.), starting from the same root follows a different track, and reaches accordingly a different goal. l?*J is ''^ intend, propose, direct the mind upon a thing; hence — here begins the process of conjecture — to study ('for what is study but the direction of the mind upon an object?'), and the subst. a place of study, a college, a school! Again, not merely is a hypothetical change of meaning postulated : but a very special sense, unsupported by analogy, and unheard of afterwards, is assumed to have been acquired by the word at a relatively early period in the history of the Hebrew language. The Kt. should probably be pointed n:i 33 (cf. LXX kv AvaO ^) with the original fern, termination, preserved in many old proper names {Tenses, § 181 «.: comp. e.g. ns-JV, ni3T, n^^3). The form HMJ is rare (rT'U, n^oy, n'SV: 01. p. 412). It is just possible (on the ground of the masc. ni3) that the word in itself might have signified dwelling (although, as Dr. Weir remarks, the absence of the art. is an objection to its being supposed to have any such appellative sense here) : more probably it is the name of some locality in Ramah, the signification of which is lost to us. 20. yil *l?3y] 'standing as one appointed over (i Ki. 4, 7. Ruth 2, 5. 6) them.' Both ptcpp. are represented in LXX, but the com- bination is peculiar and suspicious, \^\ 33'K' 26, 7 being not quite parallel. Omit prob. nr^y (Sm.). For N'T'I read IXIM (Versions). 22. "IDtJ'3 ~\'^^ Pnjn "113 ny] LXX cws toG <^pia.ro^ ">i2 ny, no doubt rightly. The article in \>\'mt\ is irregular (on 6, 18); and a ^DB' or bare height (often in Jeremiah) is a natural site for a p3 . 22I5. nos''l] so. ICINH, as 16, 4. The more usual nON''l is a T3D (cf. 12, 5, with the note). 23. Dtt'] LXX UCSiv = DK'r?. So Th. Klo. Weir, Bu. etc. 1 V having dropped out in transcription; comp. Jud. 16, 4 iv AKawprjx, for ^n33 plB'. Am. I, I (V Pi-KKapun for D^TpJ3. i6o The First Book of Samuel, N'nin^l 'yhr\ l!?^!] Irregular: comp. II i6, 13 ^.^P^l '^r\ T] Vn ; and with the pf. (as a freq.) 13, 19 ' i^iJ^J"! T^n "l^ril. Jos. 6, 13a D"'3^n nnsiCQ !iypn^ !]i7n. These four are the only irregular cases. The normal type would be Na^nni ll^n ■j^'"! (on 6, 12^); and this should doubtless be restored in each (so Ehrl.) : notice the regular type in Jos. 6, 13'! (yipni -iii?n . . . ihn). 24. Diy] i.e. as Is. 20, 2. Mic. i, 8 without the upper garment, and wearing only the long linen tunic, which was worn next the skin. The passage records another explanation of the origin of the proverb D\S''n3n ^IN'C' DJn, which refers it to a different occasion from the one described in 10, 10 f. 20, i-io. David entreats Jonathan to let him know if he can dis- cover that it is really Saul's purpose to kill him, and suggests to him a plan by which he may do this (vv. 5-7). 1. C'paD ■•3] with no subj. expressed: cf. on 17, 25. 2. HD'y li?] The Kt. can only be pointed n'^J? 'h i. e. 'If my father had done . . . ,' which, however, yields a sense unsuited to the context. The Qre N? is therefore to be preferred. As for the verb, nb'j; would be grammatical {hath not done = doth not do : Tenses, § 12) : but the impf., which is expressed by the Versions, is preferable (Am. 3, 7) : * My father doth not anything great or small, without revealing it to me' (lit. uncovering my ear: 9, 15). 3. y3K'''"i] my is no doubt an accidental dittograph of y and *i : but ynti*^! seems sufficiently justified by the nin'' ^n which follows : David strongly protests that there is ground for his suspicion of Saul's intentions. There is thus no occasion to follow We. al. in reading with LXX {koI aTreKptOr)) y^l\ for y3t^'''1 : 2^'^n alone for nan 'a 2'<\yn (II 3, 11) is found only in poetry, and late Heb. (see on 12, 3). DblNl] a strong adversative: dtit indeed, as Ex. 9, 16 {Lex. 19^^). ■•a] introducing the fact asserted in the oath, as 14, 44 etc. yc^'Ds] 'the like of 2i footstep is, etc' 3 is properly an undeveloped subst., the like of^ : for instances of a subst. compounded with it forming the subj. of a sentence, see Lev. 14, 35 n^an ''b nN"li yjJD. Lam. I, 20 DIM n^an, ^ See Zcx. 453"^ ; and especially Fleischer, Klcinere Sch)-iften, i. 2 (1885), PP- 376-381. XIX. 2^— XX. J i6i y'tra] only here : the meaning is clear from the Aram. Nl'D'D, I vmg) . Comp. the cognate verb in Is. 27, 4. 4. Jonathan offers to test his father's state of mind, in any way that David may suggest. 'J1 -lONn no] lit. 'what doth thy soul say? and T will do it for thee : ' = whatsoever thy soul saith, I will do it for thee : similarly Est. 5, 3. 6 : Tenses, § 62. Cf. on 11, 12. ^w'SJ] The {i'B3 in Hebrew psychology is the usual seat of the emotional impulses: hence •]l^'a3 ('•C'D:, VJ'SJ) is used as a pathetic periphrasis for the simple pronoun: Gen. 27, 4. 19. 25.31; Nu. 23, 10 and Jud. 16, 30 (obliterated in AV., on account of the difference in the Hebrew and English conception of the 'soul'); ch. 2, 16 (comp. note) : in poetry (often in parallelism with the pronoun), T'3S* "IJy-nD 1X] ' if perchance Q) thy father answer thee with something harsh.' If the text is correct, IK must have here the unusual sense of if perchance (RV.). There is no difficulty in the indef. n?D (19, 3), or in the position of T\Z'\> in apposition to it at the end (see on 26, 18): but i^^ means as a rule or or or //" (Ex. 21, 31 al.); and if perchance is so different from or or or if, that it is very doubtful if it is sufficiently supported by this passage and Lev. 26, 41. Most probably we should read here DN for no IN, and in Lev. TNI for TNiN (Bu. Sm. Now.). 11-17. Jonathan renews his promise to let David know, if he finds his father's evil intentions towards him confirmed (vv. 12-13. 17). In view of David's future accession to the throne, he implores David's kindness for himself, or, in case he should not survive, for his children (yv. 14-16 : cf 2 S. 9). It will be noticed that whereas in vv. i-io David entreats the help of Jonathan, the roles are here reversed, and Jonathan entreats the favour of David. 12-13. This difficult passage is best rendered: ' Yahweh, God of Israel [be witness] ! when I shall sound my father to-morrow [(or) the third (day)], and behold there is good toward David, shall I not (n?1 , as t'. 9, though again Nbn would be better) then send unto thee, and disclose it to thee ? Yahweh do so to me and more also : if one make evil towards thee pleasing to my father^, I will disclose it to thee ' etc. (so RV., the sentence being merely somewhat more closely accommodated to English idiom). It is true that commonly a more emphatic particle follows ':i ncy TO, and that the analogy of other passages might have led us to expect 'Ji n^JS* '•3 . , , , 3''D"'' DS "'3 (II 3, 9) or 'l\ n^:s .... n^D*^ ••D N^ DS (cf. II 19, 14) ; but the types of sentences with '3I riK'y na are not perfectly uniform, and there 1 It is difficult to think that Haupt is right in identifying N? {Id) here with the Arabic asseverative particle J {AJSL. xxii, 1906, p. 201, cf. p. 206). * Or, with Klo. (see p. 164, note on 3D''"'), inserting N''2n? after ''3N, ' if one make it pleasing to my father to bring evil upon thee.* M 2 164 The First Book of Samuel, seems to be no necessity for such a particle to be used, if the sense is sufficiently plain without it. At the beginning, if nin'' is a vocative, it agrees badly with the speech following, in which the second person is throughout Jonathan, and in this case '^V. has probably fallen out after nn (so Pesh. RV.)'. On -in» ny3 see on 9, 16; and on ITS rhl, 9, 15. JT'ki'W'n is as perplexing and intrusive as in v. 5, and is no doubt, as there, ' a correction ex eventuJ njm] lit. arid behold, used similarly in the enunciation of a particular hypothetical alternative, Dt. 13, 15; 17,4; i9> 18; and in Lev. 13 — 14 frequently. Comp. above, on 9, 7. no''"'] The punctuation {make good or pleasing to) implies as subject Tt2''J2n (on 16, 4). Perhaps, however, the word ought to be read as <2^/3D''^ {he pleasijig to), construed with riN* as yiL"! H 11, 25, where see note (though Klo.'s N'^nn^ after ''aN would remove even this irregularity). But the Heb. idiom for seem good to is not ^N a^""^ but "ri'a np^^ ; so 3tp^;| after all may be right. 1 4-1 5a. Another difficult passage. 'And wilt thou not, if I am still alive {sc. when thou comest to the throne), wilt thou not shew toward me the kindness of Yahweh, that I die not ? ' The second xijl must be treated as merely resumptive of the first : cf. ""D i Ki. 20, 31 ; "'H'^l Gen. 27, 30; n\-i1 Dt. 20, 11. But most moderns prefer to point nS (II 18, 12) for X^l twice: 'And oh that, if I am still alive, oh that thou vwuldest shew toward me the kindness of Yahweh ! ' (on niDX S^l see the next note). Resumption, however, of either N^l or N^l would be very unusual (see on 25, 26) ; and what we should expect is simply 'Ji r\z'VT\ N^n ^H ^Jiiy Ds^^. >"■> non, as U'rh^ non 11 9, 3. mr:s N^i] This clause does not in itself cause difficulty : nevertheless LXX, Vulg. both render as if it expressed the opposite alternative to ■•n ■'niy D5< {koI lav Oavdrw oTTo^avw, si vero morttiiis fuero). Accepting this view, we must either (Sm.) read niDN nio nS for niCN N^] (though >^ would be unusual in such a connexion), or (Bu. Nov/.) read mcs* niro DN"), supposing N^I to have come into the text by some 1 Ehrlich, however, regards '"• 'K Hin^ as an accns. expressing an oath ( = By !) : cf. in the Talm. D'H^XH = By God! Htn pyOH = By the Temple! {Kandglossen, i. 216). XX. i)-i6 T65 error — DID DN1, for instance, having dropped out, nil^N being con- nected with V. 14, and N71 being needed to complete the sense. Render then (connecting with v. 15), 'And, if I should die, thou wilt not cut off thy mercy from my house for ever \' Or, with a slighter change in IMT., but at the cost of another ' resumption,' we might read '31 nnan xh niCK niD DN vh\ 'And thou wilt not, if I should die, thou wilt not cut off,' etc. But again, what we should expect is 'ji -jiDn nn^n n^ didn' ma ns*i. 15^-16. 'J1 m^na N^i] A third difficult passage. V. 15 will just admit of the rendering, ' And thou wilt not cut off thy kindness from my house for ever, and not (= yea, not) when Yahweh cuts off the enemies of David,' etc. But the repetition of sbl is very awkward ; and in v. 16 not merely is the covenant concluded with the house of David strange, but clause b is anacoluthic, and what is expected is not that Yahweh should require it from the hand of David's enemies, but from the hand of David himself, in case he should fail to fulfil the conditions of the covenant. LXX points to another and preferable reading, uniting 15^ and 16, and treating the whole as a continuation of Jonathan's speech in 15a (as rendered in the last note) : kox d ixi], iv Tw i^aipitv K.vpLov tovs ix6pov<; AavetS eKacrrov airo irpo(T3^N HK nin> mann 2^^^ nn ma Cyo jnnn^ n^ = < And when Yahweh cutteth off the enemies of David, each one from the face of the ground, the name of Jonathan shall ViOX. be cut o'S. from the house of David.' The clause 'jl ti'pil, which was incongruous in MT., is now in its appropriate place, in Jonathan's speech, as a final wish expressed by him on behalf of his friend : 'and may Yahweh require [Gen. 31, 39. 43, 9. Jos. 22, 23; cf. II 4, 11] it at the hand of David's enemies!' (viz. if they presume to attack or calumniate him). The reading is also supported by 24, 22, where Jonathan says to David, ' Swear to me now by Yahweh that thou wilt not cut off my seed after me, nor destroy my name out ' We.'s n''"lDn N? rntDN DS Xpl is a form of sentence against analogy. 2 We. Bu. i<^^^ = he was nearly melting ; >. ^ '.aj .)«Xj ^ there shall not have been left (Wright, Ar. Gra/nnt. ii. § 10) ; and in Ethiopic ^OO^ti'. 0A°: he is about to come, W^hl fi'i'ttC'. it hath finished to lie = it is already laid, Mt. 3, 10 (Dillm. Eth. Cr. § 89. 2, Eth. Lex. col. 932 f.). i68 The First Book of Samuel, time, there is the presumption that 7^^ was in both passages followed by some similar word. Restore, therefore, here (^ lN?n or) T?n naisn and in v. 41 ^H^t ''^'^^ : '-''"' has occurred before in 14, i, and is expressed here also by Pesh. (««) : 3J1K is a word which (cf. 3n.) would naturally signify a mound of earth. 20. "•JNl] Notice the emphatic pronoun. miN . . . >:ni] LXX nniN [nny] D^vnn tr?E?^{ ^jsi, the claims of which are well stated by We. t^.?^^^ will be construed as in v. 19, to which Jonathan's promise now forms the counterpart, 'And I on the third day will shoot to its side with arrows.' It is true, of course, that Jonathan in fact shoots but one arrow, and the boy at once runs to fetch it ; but in the first general description of what Jonathan will do, the expressions ' shoot with arrows,' ' find the arrows that I shoot ' are naturally used. As a nyiD, however, must evidently be carried out in accordance with the terms arranged, the fact that in v. 35 ff. no mention is made of the three arrows of MT. is an indication that they were not originally part of v. 20. m:f, though omitted in LXX, may be retained, but must be pointed nMif (i.e. "Wif, referring to 33"iNn : see on II 21, i). In MT. njiT (not mv, with n Uc.)^ is for n^^^y (referring to \'yi:f.T\), the mappiq being omitted, as occasionally happens (about 30 times), e.g. Ex. 9, 18; 2 Ki. 8, 6; Is. 23, 17. 18: Ew. § 247(1(2); Stade, § 347c; GK. §§ 9ie (under ^'^rdfem:), 103?. V npC'?] so as to send it for me etc. The reflexive "h, implying that the TVV is done tvith reference to the speaker, or for his pleasure, cannot be properly reproduced in our idiom. Comp, on II 18, 5. 21-22. D^vnn] LXX throughout have the sing., i.e. '"ifni!', an unusual form (see on v. 361*), which might readily be changed errone- ously into a pi., as in MT. 21. NVO ■]?] Either prefix lOX? (which is required in prose), or (Sm. Ehrl.) read SVJD^. nN31 IJnp] As the text stands, ijnp is addressed to David, the sufiix relating to the lad : ' Fetch him and come.' We. reading with LXX ■•^ifnn (sg.) makes I3np the end of the words addressed to the boy, 'fetch it,' and treats nxai as beginning the apodosis. But though ' Like the sporadic DNi^, 3N'^, CsS, K'N"] (II 12, i) : GK. §§ f, 23^ 72P. XX. 20-2g 169 'irnn may be right, for the apodosis to be introduced by 1 and the imperative is most unusual, if indeed it occurs at all in the OT. ; if, therefore, this view of IJnp be adopted, it will be necessary to read < < either riN^I or (Bu. Sm.) HNa, for HNbl; the latter is favoured by the corresponding "i^ in v. 22. With nan PN, cf. Nu. 20, 19. 22. "jripC'] ' will have sent thee away ' {sc. in the case supposed). The pf. as 14, 10; Lev. 19, 8; II 5, 24 {Tenses, § 17; GK. § 1060). 23. ... nc'N inni] the casus pe?idefts : GK. § 143a. The refer- ence is to David's promise to shew kindness to Jonathan and his descendants in the future {vv. 14-16). 24-34. Jonathan, adopting the plan suggested by David {vv. 5-7), discovers what his father's intentions towards him are. 25. iriJIiT' Dp'l] LXX Kai 7rpoe(f>6a(Tev tov 'Iwva^av (Luc. more correctly auTov 'Iwva^av), implying Dlp^i . J^ose up is out of place : the relative position of those at the table is described, and Jonathan was in front, opposite to Saul : the seat opposite to Abner was vacant. True, CUp commonly denotes to come or go infroiit; but not perhaps necessarily, and the use of the word here would closely resemble that in \^. 68, 26 □ns' 1D"nip the singers were in front. 26. ninu Tl^^] The only passage in which W2 is used to negative an adj. (as elsewhere — at least in poetry — 'hi, e.g. Hos. 7, 8). It negatives a subst. once, Is. 14, 6. See Lex. 116^. "IIHLD XP"^3] LXX oTt ov KeKaOdpia-Tai = ^D't^ ^•'"^P, which relieves the tautology of MT. : ' he is not clean ; for he hath not been cleansed.' As thus read, the clause will state the ground why Saul supposed David to be still "iinD Thl. 27. ""Jt^n C'nnn nnncn ^T^J Keil: 'And on the morrow of the new-moon there was the second (day),' — a fact so patent as hardly to be worth recording. Better with LXX (and substantially RV., for the word cannot be understood) insert D^'? before ""JKri, 'on the morrow . . . . , even on the second day.' A slight redundancy of expression is not out of harmony with Hebrew style, especially when, as here, the ' second day ' will suggest to the reader a repetition of the scene described, v. 24 f. On JTinrDD, see GK. § 80^ n. 29. ""nx h-r\\i Nim] Cf. x\i. 87, 5 JV^y hjjid^ Nim 'and He will establish it, even the Most High.' The unusual form of expression 170 The First Book of Samuel, may have been intended to suggest that David had received the command from one whom he would not wilHngly disobey. But it does not read naturally. We. Bu. would read ^^n"! and lo (Gen. 47, 23. Ez. 16, 43t; cf. Aram. Nil). For the words quoted LXX express >ns 'h ^\T^_. This, or ^ns 'h lis Nni, is most probable (note 'my brethren ' just below). ^ns] in pause for V^: see GK. § 29^ So nnnri, but n-inn. 30. rmiJ^n niyj p] Commonly rendered ' son of a perverse ^ woman {r))V^ being ptcp. Nif. fem.) in respect of rebelliousness.' The expression is, however, peculiar, and excites suspicion. The genitive is attached commonly to a descriptive adj. for the purpose of defining it (Ew. § 288C; GK. § 128^'y) : thus (a) lb "in pure of hear I, D'23 V^ clean of hands ; {b) ri'li*5^ 13N perishing in regard to counsels ; """ICJ V^^ forgiven in respect ^transgression ; (c) 'Dyi^ ^1[? (Pr. n, 22) a woman turned aside in respect (^/"discretion (= turned aside from discre- tion); i'K'D '''I'p (Is, 59, 22) = those turned back from transgression; T\'crh'a ''niC' (Mic. 2, 8) = averse from battle. niT]n, however, does not define Hiyj, but repeats the same idea under a different form. Further, niTip, if derived from "nro to rebel, ought by analogy (cf ni^pD, nnb:, nn::y: oi. § 219*; GK. § 86^) to be pointed ran-ip (with aspirated "i). On these grounds, Lagarde, in a note on the expression {Afittheilungen, i, 1884, p. 236 f.) contends that rilTiD is not derived from TlID, but corresponds to the Syr. !.o?ij» discipline (from )?» to discipline) ; and connecting myj with ^J'A to go astray, leave the right path, he renders the phrase ' son of a woman gone astray from discipline,' comparing the Arabic expression (Lane, p. 2305^) iiji jJj son of a woman gone astray, i. e. son of a whore. But though Lagarde's argument is philologically just, the distinctively Syriac sense which it postulates for nn"iO is not probable '^. ^ Used (N. B.) in EVV. not in its modern sense, of contrary, but in the etjm. sense ol perversus, SucTTpafj.fj.fi'os (Prov. 11, 20 PSiXvyf^a Kvpicv SuaTpafinevat oSoi), i.e. twisted, crooked; of one pursuing crooked and questionable courses (cf. tlie writer's D enter oiioiny, on 32, 5, p. 353). ' But Lagarde is unquestionably right in maintaining that in Hiy and its deriva- tives two roots, distinct in Arabic, have, as in many other cases (see Tenses'\ § 178 (PP- 230-232); and cf. on 15, 29), been confused in Hebrew, viz. (jjj; to bend (e.g. in Is. 21, 3 yCC'D "JT'iyj ; f. 38, 7); and ^jji. to err, go ast)ay XX. 2()-)} 171 The text must be at fault. It is best, with We., to follow LXX (i'i€ Kopaaiiov avTOfjioXovvToiv = OiTib^n) H^y^ p), at least as far as the "1 in myj goes, and to read nnisn n"}y3 p son of a rehellioiis girl, i.e. of a girl who has contumaciously rebelled against her master, and left him, — in other word?, of a runaway slave-girl. We. compares Judith 10, 12 vioi KopacrL(i)v KaT^Kivrrjcrav aurov?, /cai w? 7rat8a9 avrofxo- XovvTuiv iTLTpma-Kov auToi.'?, in the Syriac version )l^.vi*^.v^» j*( nra] LXX fjieToxo<;, i. e. "l?n art a companion of, which agrees with the following 7 (see Pr. 28, 24), "in3 is construed with 3, not with 7. ' LXX good ' (Dr. Weir). So Bu. Sm. etc. 31. niD p] 26, 16. II 12, 5. Cf. the poet, nnion ''J3 (t/'. 79, n. 102, 2it) ; and DID "•tJ'JX II 19, 29; nitD ti"'N i Ki. 2, 26. 33. i?^*!] Read probably ^t2»1, as in 18, 11. n^on? . . , NVT n73 ••j] For this use of NNT (which is uncommon), cf. 2 Ki. 18, 36. Jer. 50, 15. 25. 51, 6. 11. n73 is, however, else- (Qor. 2, 257. 7, 143. 19, 60 and often : especially, as Lagarde abundantly shews, opp. to J>-^ , to go straight, to keep on the right path), which is found in Hiyn to act erringly , II 24, 17 al., and in the common subst. jiy iniquity, TproTpexly error. The idea expressed by Hiy (= tjlji) and its derivatives is thus not that of crooked- ness, ' perverseness' ( = K'py), but deviation from the light track, error: and this sense is still sometimes expressed by the ancient versions: as Is. 19, 14 (though here probably wrongly) Cyiy riH irreC/ia irXavficreajs, |1^.^J l^'xO); Pr. 12,8 •^.? '^?i'!5 )wl*.i^> ; . -.« = one deficient in understanding, Vulg. vanus et excors (as though lit. one gone astray ft-om understanding). The conventional rendering of the frequent jiy by words of general import, such as abiKia, afiapria, iniquitas, iniquity, tends to conceal from those to whom the Hebrew term is thus familiarly represented, the metaphor which originally underlay both Jiy itself, and the cog- nate verb. ^ In Lucian's recension of the LXX there is a second rendering of the phrase in question, viz. -^waiKOTpaip^, i. e. (as it seems) woman-nourished, effeminate. Symm. has dnaiSevTaji' a-noaTaTovvTcuv , Theod fifTa/ciuov/xfi'aju. Vulg. substitutes another disparaging comparison, based upon an old Jewish Haggadah (see Rashi ; and Aptow. ZAIV. 1909, p. 245), Uli mxAx^xx'svirum ultro rapicntis, which seems to stand in some relation to the first part of the paraphrase of Chrysostom (X. 301 D, quoted by Field), as the second does to the rendering of Lucian : vW TropviSicuv tnt/xaivo/xivaiv avSpaaiv, fTnTpfx<''yTcuv roh naptovdiv, kKVivtvpiafxivi Koi jxaKaKt Hat //7;5fv (x'^f avSpus. — Pesh. Ho>i.>3 I ; - ^v' " ^s (comp. the rendering of Pr. 12, 8 cited in the last note : hardly JTnyJ). 172 77?^ First Book of Samuel, ■where confined to poetry, and expresses the idea of consu?nption, destruction (usually with niJ'y, as Is. 10, 23), not that of complete determination. "^Cri? (LXX, We. etc.) for NM n^3 is certainly a more idiomatic expression (cf. vv. 7. 9), and is to be preferred. 34- \rh^'T\ Dye] Cf. 2, 33 {Lex. 769a). 35-39. Jonathan acquaints David with Saul's intentions. 36. . . . 1 p nyjn] See on 9, 5. For the idiomatic fut. instans, mio, cf. 10, 8. 24, 5. I Ki. 2, 2 ; and on 3, 11. ^i*nn] So 37 bis, 38 Kt., 21 f. (LXX), and 2 Ki. 9, 24 MT. Probably a genuine alternative form of }*n (Ew. § i86e). Though the pi. in Hebrew is Cl'^brn, the form in Arabic (spi^a.) and the plural in Eth. {hth%\ hctA^'. Dillm. col. 134) shew that there is a parallel form, the root of which is a n"? verb. 38. HK'in mn?o] mne before the verb which it qualifies, as 2 Ki. I, II mi mnD, . 20, 4 Tmi^_. See GK. § 90' {e7id); Ew. § 216C; Stade, § 132. Nob, as Is. 10, 32 shews, was a place between 'Anathoth (now 'Anata, 2| miles NE. of Jerusalem) and Jerusalem, whence the Temple hill could be seen; perhaps a spot on the Rds el-Meshdrif, i mile N. of Jerusalem, a ridge from the brow of which (2685 ft.) the pilgrim along the north road still catches his first view of the holy city (_2593 ft.). See Nob in DB. XX. 34—^^1- 4 173 IPcnx] 'LXX AfSeifieXex, as also in cA. 22. 23, 6. 26, 6. if/. 52, i : on the contrary, A;^6t/i,eX6x 30, 7. II 8, 17. The same mistranscrip- tion occurs in i Ch. 18, 16 MT., where LXX has rightly A^et/xcXex,' We. (the readings of LXX as given by Swete). nxip^ . . . linn] as 16, 4. iriN ps B'^si] Cf. Gen. 40, 8 ink px "inbv Jud. 13, 9. 16, 15 'm px "^aiji (but Nu. 20, 5 : n'\mh px d^c? [p. 71]). See Lex. 34b ^/. 3. yi"" ^N C'"'X] The same expression, Jer. 36, 19. 38, 24. HDIXD as regards anything = at all. "nynv] Po'el from yT, according to E\v. § i25«', 'to make a person know a thing in order to determine him to act accordingly ' = /o direct. But this explanation requires more to be supplied than is probable. LXX Siafji€iJiapTvpr)fj.ai, which points to a reading *'!l"]yi'', Po'el from "ly^ (see p. 77 bottoni), in Qal to designate or appoint (a place, II 20, 5; a person, Ex. 21, 8. 9): hence in Po'el with a sense in which it is difficult to perceive the characteristic force of the 3rd Arabic conjugation (Wright, Arab. Gr. i. § 43 : comp. above, p. 152 «.), but which is at least that of the corresponding form (from jij to promise^ in Arabic, as sXcir Arnold, Chrestom. Arab., p. 197, 10; Qor. 7, 138; 20, 82 ^j.Si\ j^^\ «-^W *SlJAcljj and we appointed you to the right side of the mountain. So here, ' the young men I have appointed to the place of such and such a one.' The Hif. T'yin is used in a similar, but specially yir^wj-zlr, sense Jer. 49, 19 = 50, 44 ; Job 9, 19. Dr. Weir however writes: *Is it not rather ''I!l"]y^? comp. Jer. 47, 7 nny^ D'^ D'H ?]in PX.' The Qal would certainly seem to express all that is required. ■•JO^X ^J^s] So Ru. 4, it: in Dan. 8, 13 '•JO^D — the one example of a real contraction which the Hebrew language affords. ^^5li (Qor. 25, 30) and ^iis are used in the same sense, perhaps derived from the root of i^^2, and meaning properly a separate, particular one. ^JJD^X perhaps signifies one whose name is withheld (from D?X to be dumb). Ew. § io6c renders, ' ein gewisser verschwiegener.' 4. '31 no nnyi] Keil, RV. and others : * And now what is under thine hand ? Five loaves of bread give into my hand, or whatsoever there is present.' But this leaves the emphatic position of Dn7 nc'on 174 "^^^^ First Book of Samuel, unaccounted for : and how could David ask specifically for five loaves, when his previous words had just implied that he did not know whether Ahimelech possessed them ? Read, with LXX (A, Luc.) €1 eiViv (in B the first d has dropped out), DX for DD ('And now, if there are under thy hand five loaves of bread, give them into my hand, or whatsoever there is present ') ; or else (Ehrlich), nnn C'*"np '31 n>3 njn On^ ^l DN y^\ n^'djh lit. thai which is found, i.e. that which is here present, as 13, 16. Gen. 19, 15. Jud. 20, 48. An idiomatic use of the Nf. of NVD. 5. ''T' nnn 7N] The use of ^N here is destitute of analogy. In Jer. 3, 6. Zech. 3, 10. Ez. 10, 2 nnn 7N of course expresses motion under. Here it is simply a corrupt repetition of ?n. B''' trip Dn^] The position of C^ after t^'np nn^ is partly for variety (after the preceding clause with px), partly for emphasis: comp. Is. 43, 8 ^l Q'2''};'!; and pSi similarly. Lev. 26,37. Mic. 7, 2 X*n f\S DnN3. Pr. 17, 16. 25, 14 (cf. Gen. 2, 5. Is. 37, 3 al.)- 6, nx ""a] apparently, as Jud. 15, 7, with the force of an oath: see Ges. s.v. who renders hercle. HC'N] a good example of a sing, term used collectively. For other rather noticeable instances see Gen. 30, 37 ^pD (note the following |n3). Jud. 19, 12 Ty (followed by n3n). 21, 16 (nK'N as here). Jer. 4, 29i> Ty (note jn3). Cf. GK. § 123'^ Also in bvr\^^ tJ'''S, etc. (14, 24, and often); and with certain numerals (as ^^'^ D''t^'?Ci'), GK. §134^-1^. IJPTlli'y] kept away (viz. by a religious tahoo, on account of war being a sacred work) in reference to us, i. e. (Anglice) from us : cf. ? construed with verbs of removing or withholding in \\;. 40, 11 ; 84, 12 ; Job 12, 20; and in the Syr. X »p. War was regarded as sacred; and the prohibition of women to men engaged in it is wide-spread {DB. iv. 827'^; W. R. Smith, Rel Sem? 455). 'y\ DC^tJ' 7icn3] ' as heretofore (i. e. on previous occasions), when I have gone forth (viz. on a military expedition), so that the gear (clothes, arms, etc.) of the young men is holy, even though it is a common (i. e. not a sacred) journey ; how much more so \Lex. 5]N 2], when to-day they will be consecrated with (their) gear .'' ' — a distinction being drawn between expeditions of an ordinary kind, XXI. j-8 175 and campaigns opened by consecration of warriors (cf. the Heb. expression to ' consecrate ' war, and warriors : Mic. 3, 5. Jer. 6, 4. 22, 7. 51, 27. 28. Is. 13, 3. Joel 4, 9), and David hinting that his present excursion is of the latter kind, and that the ceremony of consecration will jtake place as soon as he joins his men (so W. R. Smith, J^el. Sem} 456 ; Now.). U^h^ ^Dn3 always means as hereto/ore (e.g. Gen. 31, 2. 5. Ex. 5, 7), not (as EVV.) 'about these three days ; ' and for the rend, here adopted (which places the greater break at ' gone forth '), we must move the zaqef qdton from U^h^ to ^nx^'3. Read also 1t^'■^p' (LXX, Pesh. We. al.) for C'np''. Kennedy, however, renders the last clause, ' how much more to-day will they be consecrated with (their) gear ? ' (viz. by the consecrated bread being put into their wallets, and so, according to ancient ideas (Lev. 6, 27 [for be read beco7ne\ Ez. 44, 19; see DB. ii. 395), conveying the contagion of ' holiness ' to them) : Lex. ''3 ^IS 3. 7. D^JSn Dn?] Presence-bread, i. e. bread set out in Yahweh's pre- sence, and designed originally as His food. See the writer's note on Ex. 25, 30; and DB. s.v. Shewbread. DnDlon] The plur. might be explained as a reference to the separate loaves (cf. DH^ ntJ>Dn, nnry): but this does not accord well with inp/H at the end of the verse. It is better, therefore, either to read there ^^vfj^ with LXX, or to suppose that the final D in Dnoio has arisen by error from the first JO of the word following, and for ■'Jsi'DO-iDlcn (cf. on I, 24) to restore '•JS^O "iDlon. Comp. Jer. 29, 9 (read D''Ppn) ; 36, 21 (rd. 7y, in accordance with idiom); Jos. 10, 21 (C'"'S); 2 Ch. 28, 23 (rd. D'lp); Hab. i, 16 f. (rd. Nnn) ; Job 27, 13 (rd. ^Wt>)' See further instances in ZAW. 1886, 211-213 (some doubtful). On the other hand, sometimes a repeated letter has dropped out, as <:-^. 17, 17. II 3, 22. Is. 45, 11 (read ^J1^x:^'n with Hitzig, Weir, Cheyne, al.). Dt. 15, 14 (p. 133 «.) ; and probably \\i. 42, 2 (n!5''S), 45, 7 (DM^XD 1ND3 : Edghill, Evid. Value of Prophecy, 252). 8. "ivyj] i. e., probably, detained in the precincts of the sanctuary, and precluded from entering it, by some ceremonial impurity. Comp. Jer. 36, 5 nin'» n^3 sn^ ^31N n^ iivy '•JN ; Neh. 6, 10. D''yin "I'axJ '^''?^ is not chief (RV.), but mighty, which, however, does not well agree with D'^yin, might or heroism being hardly a 176 The First Book oj Samuel, quality which in a shepherd would be singled out for distinction. Read, with Gratz, ^^T^J) for D''J?"in, 'the mightiest of Saul's runners! or royal escort (so Now.) : Saul's D''^"J are mentioned afterwards, 22, 17. In a runner, strength and size, such as T^N — elsewhere, it is true, only used in poetry — connotes, would be a qualification which the narrator might naturally remark upon. LXX has vffiojv rdy rjfiiovovs SaouX, whence Lagarde (Bildnttg der Nomina, p. 45 «.) would restore D'''1''yn ?''3N manager of Saul's young asses (Jud. 10, 4. 12, 14) : cf. P''3iX, the name of an Ishmaelite, the overseer of David's camels (D vJDJn 7y) I Ch. 27, 30. 'Ihil in Arabic is a herd of cajnels, 'abila (denom.) is to be skilled in managing camels, and ^abil (adj.) is skilled in the matiagemefit of camels ; hence b"'IlX, more generally, manager (of animals). The suggestion is ingenious : but the strong Arabism is hardly probable : and the n. pr. /''3'IN is not Hebrew, but Ishmaelite. 9. ^.1 P'*!] The combination ^l PN occurs i/^, 135, 17; hence P'* here is commonly regarded as an anomalous punctuation for i''^? ; cf. HTy Gen. 49, II. ST\'^ Is. 10, 17. niJ^J? Pr. 8, 28 (for what, by analogy, would be nVj;, in^, riiJ^y : Ko. ii. 483 ; GK. § 93^). So Kimchi, Ges. Ew. § 213^, 286li; Stade, § 194*' (2). Delitzsch, how- ever (on )//. /. c), treats PX as equivalent to the Aram. pN nw?i ? PN occurs in the Palestinian Targums = ?/■ (i//. 7, 4. 5 etc.), also = H in indirect questions, and = DS, where the answer No is expected. Job 6, 12 •'^''n S"'J3S' T'T N^^n PN. 10, 4^ 5b II, 7b. 13, pb; and JT'N* PN' (=z Heb. ^\ DN) occurs (e. g.) simply = if there is ... if/, "j, 4^. Job 33, 23a. 32a; Job 6, 6b ^ji Dyu n''N ps or is there taste in the white of an eggi in an indirect question, if/. 14, 2 IT'N PN ''JOnDP ?''3C'D. Lam. I, 12. But though the punctuators may have thought of this, or (Ko. ZAW. 1898, 242 f.) of the '/« underlying the later 1?N, such a pronounced Aramaism is not probable in an early narrative, clearly of Judaic origin ; and it is better to read simply D*?'!, — DX having the same interrog. force as in Gen. 38, 17. ''SI and where . . ..'' (Klo. Sm.) is not probable. Ehrl. v^^<"! and perhaps. pinj] only here. ^Jo^':> is stated to mean institit ursitque rogando ; so possibly p^na may have vae^cni pressed on. But the root is a doubtful one in Heb. ; and perhaps piW urged on, from p^X to urge (Ex. 5, 13), should be read. XXL 8-14 177 10. nm^] Is. 25, 7. I Ki. 19, 13 in-i-^N3 VJ3 cbji; II 19, 5 oN^t. np -j^-npn nas-ns] if thou wilt take Ihal for thyself, take it. Cf. for the position of nnx, Ex. 21, 8 Qre 1^ (opp. to in^, v. 7), and p. 35; also on 15, I. n?3j Elsewhere always pointed nT3. 11. nj] See on 6, 17. 1 2. "Jto] an anachronism, generally explained now as is done by Bu. Sm. Dh. Kenn. Ehrlich, however, would read nap (18, 27). 14. loyUTiN ^y\y'''\] 'And he changed it, (even) his understanding (25, 33).' The anticipation of the object of a verb by a suffix is common in Aramaic; but, though cases occur sporadically in Heb., it is not a genuine Heb. idiom ; and while there are no doubt instances in which for distinctness the original writers explained the sufF. by the addition of the object, there are others in which the combination is open to the suspicion of being due to a faulty or glossed text, or, in late Heb., to Aramaic influence. Comp. Ex. 2, 6 Ip'TITIX lilSim and she saw him, the child, 35, 5 (P) '"' nronn nx nsn^ (?rd. n^2^), Lev. 13, 57" yjjn n "i::'^ nx '^ikn^n ^ic^, I Ki. 19, 21 -ib'ari nb^-2. (Lxx om. -iB/an). 21, isniarns; .... ^nnri, 2 Ki. 16, 15 Kt. Is. 29, 23 (render, with Hitzig, 'when his children see it, the work of my hands,' etc. ; but many regard in^"" as a gloss). Jer. 9, 14 Db''3ND ''JJn njy^ nin nyn ns (lxx om. mn Dyn ns). Ez. 3, 21 (read mmn). 44, 7 *n''3-nN ib^nb (cm. Ti'-n nx with lxx). Pr. 5, 22. ^. 83, 12 imn: iDri'^B' ' make them, (even) their nobles,' etc. ^. Here the emphatic anticipation of an object such as lOytO is not probable, and the form of the suffix — rare even in strong verbs (see on i8, i) — is found only once besides with a verb T\"b, II 14, 6, where there are independent grounds for questioning its correctness. No doubt UC''') is an error of transcription for nStt'^l. So 01. p. 547 ; Stade, § 143" ; Kon. i. 546. ^ Comp. Ew. § 309"^; GK. § 131™' °. There are also other types, as Jer. 48, 44 cmpD njtt' nsin b>^ r\'h^ xns* ""d. 51, 56 -niB^ h^i bv n''^y n:i ^3 (so often in Syr., as II 1 1, 3. 12, 5 Pesh. ; comp. above, on 5, 3) ; and with the suffix in the genitive, as Ez, 10, 3. 42, 14. Job 29, 3 (GK. § 131°) ; and in Ch., in a form recalling strongly Syriac usage, i Ch. 5, 26 '7 DpJ^I. 23, 6. 2 Ch. 25, 10. 28, 15. For the Mishnic usage, see Segal, Misnaic Hebrew, p. 82 ff. Only with one word, the interrog. ^N, does the apparent pleonasm appear to be idiomatic: Is. 19, 12 •]"'03n N12N* D''N Where are they, then, thy wise men? 2 Ki. 19, 13 n?On "J^D V^< 'y\ nSIt? -J^DI (in the ||, Is. 37, 13 n''X). Mic. 7, 10 I^H^N HIH^ VN. 1365 N 178 77?^ First Book of Samuel, Dn''3''y3] Read DH^ry^ : 'd >yya, as Ehrlich rightly observes, is used always idiomatically to denote in the opinion o/{so even Pr. i, 17). 77nn''l] and he behaved himself madly. The word recurs, applied metaphorically, Nah. 2, 5. Jer. 25, 16. 51, 7. DT3] in their hands, i. e. as they sought to restrain him (Th. Ke.). ''Ojl] Pi el from njri, with anomalous qamez,hr IH^l, \.q. scratched, made meaningless marks. But LXX i-rvf^Trdvi^ev i.e. ^nfl and he drummed on the doors of the gates, — ' a more suitable gesture for a raving madman ' (Kp.). So moderns generally : cf. GK. § 751^^. 16. 'ji non] 'Am I in lack of mad men?' — The question is indi- cated by the tone of the voice : see GK. § 150b Cf. on 11, 12 ; and 22, 7. 15. nrriN] See on 10, 27. ■•py] lit. upon me, i. e. to my trouble : Gen. 48, 7 'h'H ^m nn)D. 22, I. ohy myD] So II 23, 13 = i Ch. n, i5t. It is remark- able that the m)}''^ is afterwards, both here, vv. 4. 5, and in the other passage, II 23, 14 = i Ch. 11, 16, spoken of as a mixo. Can a myo be also termed a miVD ? A miSD is a mountain-stronghold {\p. 18, 3) ; and in Jud. 6, 2. Ez. 33, 27 nnyo and at least nnp (Is. 33, 16) are named side by side as different kinds of hiding-place. We. answers the above question in the negative ; and believes that both here and in II 23, 13 = I Ch. II, 15 D^ny myi: is an old error for rh'^V mVD the stronghold of 'Adullam (so Bu. Now. Sm. Kitt. Kennedy ', Buhl, Geogr. 97, Ehrlich). 'Adullam is mentioned in Jos. 15, 35, next before Sochoh and 'Azekah, among the cities of the Shephelah. This at once shews that it cannot be Khareitim, about 4 miles SE. of Bethlehem, with which, since the twelfth century, tradition has iden- tified it. Clermont-Ganneau identified it in 1871 with ' Id el-miyeh, 2| miles SE. of esh-Shuweikeh (see on 17, i), supposing the ancient name to have been trans- formed by a popular etymology into one of similar sound, significant in the vernacular {PEQS. 1877, P- '77)- 'W el-miyeh is ' a steep hill, on which are ruins of indeterminate date, with an ancient well at the foot, and, near the top. caves of moderate size' {EB. s.v.). The site is suitable, but not certain {H.G. 229 f.). As regards the meaning of 'y4(/«//a;«, Lagarde {Bildungder Aomina, 54) derives It plausibly from JJ^ to (urn aside (^. 1 19. 157 ; Lane, p. 1973), with the formative * ' The expression cave of Adullam, which has passed into a proverb among us, is due to a corruption of the similar Heb. word for "stronghold " in v. 4 ' {Century Bible, ad loc). XXL 14—XXIL s 179 affix D (Ol. § 2i6»: Stade, § 293; Earth, Nominalbildung^ zi2i.\ cf. GK. § 85*), found frequently in proper names (Dy?2, D^IO, &c.)i so that the word would signify originally a retreat. Heb. proper names have in many cases pre- served roots not otherwise found in the OT. nTl] 'Adullam being in the Shephelah, and David's brethren, presumably, on the high ground of Bethlehem (2550 ft.), 12 miles to the ENE. So Gen. 38, i. II 23, 13. 2. Vi:^l 1^-n:J'N C>''N"^3] Cf. Is. 24, 2 D NK'i "iB'Na 'as (one) who has a lender (creditor).' t^'D3 "id] Jud. 18, 25 ; cf. Job 3, 20 ; and on i, 10. 3. 3N10 nsvo] There are several places in Palestine, both E. and W. of Jordan, called HEVsn, or HB^sn^ 'the outlook-point;' and the situation of this one is not known. Dans . . . NV] If the text be sound, these words can only be rendered ' come forth (to be) with you.' But the case is not one in which such a strongly-marked pregnant construction would be expected. LXX yivea-Ouio-av , Pesh. oko, Vg. matieat. Read probably, not "^^^ (Bu. al.), but 35f^ (Ehrl.), which is closer to NVS and is used specifically of being left behind m a place, Gen. 33, 15. Ex. 10, 24. For D3nN LXX has irapa. (rot — "^^^ ] SO Sm. Bu. (cf. v. 4^). 4. Onj^l] 'led them (so as to be) in the presence of the king of Moab.' Another pregnant construction, hardly less expected than the last. *3D nN is not used in conjunction with verbs of motion ; and in Pr. 18, 16 ^snr D"'bn3 "'3d!'1 the prep, is different. Targ. pjnB'N'i, Pesh. »aajk.o point to the punctuation Dn3^1 (see Jos. 6, 23 Targ. ; II 16, 21 Pesh.) and he left them, which is altogether to be preferred. (LXX KoX TrapeKdXeae = nn:%) mivroa] i. e. the 'hold' of 'Adullam: see on v. r. 5. miVJOa] Pesh. nsiim (cf. v. 3), which, as the ' hold ' was in the land of Judah, seems to be correct. n^n] The site of H^reth is not known. LXX has (v ttoXu 'SapuK. Conder's Khards, a village on a wooded mountain, 4 miles SE. of 'Id el-miyeh {Tent Work, 243), does not agree phonetically. The suggestion that mn is an Aramnism for B'Vn wood is very precarious: in Targ. N'^")in corresponds to B'lh (14, 27 al.) ; and the rare NnilH '^Levy, C/ilVB. 2^6^) does not mean ' wood.' I^Tixni] The reflexive b {Lex. 515^ bottom; GK. § 119''). Cf. N 2 i8o The First Book of Samuel, "P JT'JDI I Ki. 17, 3; and often in the imper., as Dt. i, 7 D3^ 1S?D. 40. 2, 13 DD^ naj?. 5, 27 03^ 131C': Is. 40, 9 ^^ ''5'S(. 6. ynu] known = discovered: cf. Ex. 2, 14. Jud. 16, 9. II 17, 19. D^:^>JN1] Read with LXX D'^tJ'JNni . ny3J3] i.e. in Gibeah of Saul: see on 9, i. ^t^•N] 3i» 13- Gen. 21, 33t. riDin] RV. ' in Ramah,' which is inconsistent with ' in Gibeah.' RV. m. ' in the height : ' but r\12^ is not used of a ' height ' in general (Ez. 16, 25 forms hardly an exception); and it is better to read with LXX cv Bajita (= '"I???) ^'^ ^^^ high-place (cf. 9, 12). Saul held his court under a sacred tree (cf. Jud. 4, 5 of Deborah administering justice under a "i?'^), and in a sacred place. Ivy D''3VJ] stationed by hi?n, i. e. standing in attendance on him, hv 3VJ (and similarly ^y loy) is said idiomatically of one standing by (lit. over: Lex. 756*0) another (Gen. 18, 2. 28, 13), esp. of servants, or courtiers, in attendance on their master {vv. 7. 17. Gen. 45, i; cf. with nroy Jud. 3, 19), or the people standing about Moses, as he sat to judge them (Ex. 18, i4t>: cf. ^V T^y 13b). In clause b the series of ptcpp. describe the situation, as (e.g.) I Ki. I, 40; 22, 10; 2 Ki. 6, 32. 7. 03^3^ (2)] is most probably an error for 03^31; otherwise it will be an example of 7 marking the accus., on which see 23, 10. 8. 'y\ m33] 18, 3. 20, 8. 16 : without rm3, as 20, 16. •I^n] is sick because of me. This can hardly be right. In the poetical passage Am. 6, 6 the apathy of the boisterous revellers of Samaria is well described by the words ^DV n3K^ hv ^^n3 N^JI 'and feel no sickness by reason of Joseph's breach : ' but the passage here is different. LXX irovwv, which represents !?nn in the passage of similar import 23, 21 'hv DD^DH ^3. Hence Gratz, Klo. Bu. al. ^l?n ; 'and none of you hath compassion on me.' Dr. Weir makes a similar suggestion : ' Is it npjpn ? [" and there is no cotnpassion on your part upon me:" cf. Gen. 19, 16] comp. 23, 21 LXX.' 3-lN^ . . . D^pn] Cf. 13 3-lN^ ''^N Dip^ 'to rise up against me into (= so as to become) one lying in wait;' Mic. 2, 8 (reading, for nrDip\ mp\ or ^Opri) 3'ixb Qlp^ ^ny. LXX (in both verses) as ex^poV, XXIL 6-18 181 which Dr. Weir prefers, remarking that ' D''pn is not suitable to 27>S, but is so to 3>\' So Sm. Now. Ehrl. 9. 71? Di^] 71? 3VJ may mean here either merely stmidmg by (Gen. 18, 2), or {i\ 6) stmiding in atiendajice on Saul's Cl^l? (courtiers). 10. "17 iriJ riT'Vl] the variation in order is pleasing in itself, and also gives a slight emphasis on rn^^i. Cf. 6, 141'. 7, i^. Gen. 27, 16. 32, 17b. 43, 12. 13. I Ki. II, 18 •b ncN nnh, etc. 13. 1^ hs'k^^l] the inf. abs., according to GK. § 113® (cf. § 113^), Ew. § 351°, Kon. iii. § 218^. After an inf. c, as 25, 26. 33 ; cf. Ex. 32, 6. 14. inyrDti'O 7X "1D1] RV. is taken into thy council, following Ges. (qui deveriere solet ad colloquium tuum, qui interioris apud te admis- sionis est), and Keil. This, however, assumes an unusual sense for "IID, which is hardly justified by the parallels quoted, Gen. 19, 2. 3. Jud. 4, 18. 19, 12 (to 'turn aside' to visit a person). Probably for "ID we should read with LXX, Targ. (apx^v, 11) "^^ ' captain over thy body-guard' (7N for 7y; see on 13, 13), which would imply a posi- tion of responsibility, and close attendance upon the king. For this sense of ni?D!i^'0 (lit. obedience, i.e. a body of men bound to obedience), cf II 23, 23 (= I Ch. II, 25) 1nyr:t^'o (Ch. bv) i'x *in inD^t:'''i: the word is also used in a concrete sense in Is. 11, 14 UTW'O^'O poy ''331. So Ew. Bertheau (on i Ch. /. <:.), Then. etc. 15. Tlbnn] 'Have I begun?' The question is indicated by the tone (11, 12). im nayn , , ,tl^^ ^n] 'a n'^-^ lit. to lay in, i. e. to attribute to, as Job 4, 18: so 'h CC:^ Dt. 22, 8, ••IN n^n ^Dl] LXX, Pesh. 'J1 ^331, which is required. 17. D''V"in] the run?iers, or royal escort of the king: so 21, 8 (emended text), i Ki. 14, 27. 28 (= 2 Ch. 12, 10. 11). 2 Ki. 10, 25. II, 4. 6. II. 13. 19: cf V3D^ CVl II 15, I. I Ki. I, 5; and ch. 8, 11 in33"lO '•32^ 1V~i1. If the emendation on 21, 8 is correct, Doeg will have been the most stalwart of Saul's ' runners.' Dy dt] I Ch. 4, 10: II 14, 19 (dn); Jer. 26, 24 (hn). 18. yn] Ew. § 45"^ nyo [2 Ch. 10, 15 n3p;i] nap nn^n "-s lit. 'for there was a turning about (i. e. a turn or change of affairs : LXX /xerao-rpoi^^) from Yahweh that he might establish his word,' etc. : in the philo- sophical Hebrew of the middle ages, it acquires the sense of cause. Hence this passage has been rendered, 'I have been the cause in (the death of) all the persons of thy father's house.' The legitimacy of this rendering is questionable. There is no evidence that n3D possessed the sense cause in Biblical times ; nor is it probable, if it did, that 33D (in Qal) would be a denominative of it ; and thirdly, even though there were a verb 33D to be the cause, its use with ellipse of the crucial word death is more than is credible. It is best for ''7130 to read, with Th. We., ''^3n / a7)i guilty in respect of all the persons, etc. : cf. Pesh. i«.^**.i( . The construction with 3 as '3 Ntsn 19, 5, where Targ. has the same word in the Eihp. with the same construction, viz. '3 3"'^nnN. 23. "iK'DJ .... 'tJ'Di] The suffixes must have been accidentally transposed : ^tJ'SJ .... 'it^aj (Th. We. Bu. etc.). noy nriN mOKno "•3] ' For thou art a keeping with me,' i. e. shalt be jealously guarded with me. The abstract for the concrete, according to a usage of which there are many other examples in Hebrew {Tenses, § 189.2): comp. Is. 11, 14 ^^W^ poy ^331 1. LXX on Tr€cf>v\a$ai av Trap ^/>toi = ''IDy nnX Ftipf: *3 (3 for O, the two letters being very similar in the old character), — which has nothing to recommend it. 1 And the remarkable parallel in Moabitic : Mesha, line 28 DyOK'D |3'»T ^2 '♦3 /»'/. for all Dibon was obedience. XXII . i8— XXIII ) 183 23 — 26. David as an outlaw, in the Shephelah, the Hill-country, and the Wilderness of Judah. 23, I. nb'yp] In the Shephelah (Jos. 15, 44; see v. 33); now Qild, a ruined village on a hill, on the E. side of W. es-Sfir, 3 miles S. of 'Id el-miyeh, 'the terraced sides of which are even to-day covered with corn/ so that we can understand why the Philistine raiders should have swarmed up the Vale of Elah and the Wady es-Sur, past Sochoh and 'Id el-miyeh, to rob the threshing-floors (cf. Cheyne, EB. s. v, ; H. G. 230). D^DB' noni] robbing (without ' and they are '), — a circ. clause, like Gen. 15, 2. 18, 8 etc. {^Tenses, § 160), and following another ptcp., as 28, 14. II 15, 30. 2 Ki. 2, 12. Jer. 38, 22. 2. ri''3ni , , , ^n""3ni] There is considerable irregularity in the punctuation of the i and 2 pers. of the conjugations (other than Qal) of rfh verbs : but the following points may be usefully noted : — '__ is found always in Pn. Hof. (as ri"'N"in Ex. 26, 30), and Nif. (except once. Gen. 24, 8 rT'ipJI) ; ' is found always in i pi. (^3__), and before suffixes, and in 2 sing. Pi. ; and almost always in 2 pi. (as Dri''inriS'n), probably the only excep- tions being Dri''3in Ez. 11, 6, and Dri"'j;nn Jer. 42, 20 Qre (Kt. D^nynn). The irregularity is greatest in i and 2 sing. Hif. and Hithp. and in i sing. Pi. ; but here '' is very common in the first person, and ''__ in the second (as always in Pi.; see above) : thus we find WSH 15 times, but 0^3 PI 17 times; ^H^inriB'n (3 times), but H^inFlK'n (4 times) ; W^VH (10 times), but ri^^VH (6 times; also n\^yn Ex. 32, 7. 40,41); ^n^^in (12 times), but n"'3"!n (4 times; but 2 fem. n'3"!n). A notable exception is ^ri^lif 5 times, but '•rT'-'lif 30 times; comp. also ''h'h'2 4 times, but W?? Nu. 25, iif : '•ri^DS twice, but "'11*133 4 times. See Bo. i. pp. 410 f., 429; in GK. § 75'i*® the usage might have been stated more clearly. 3. '•3 f]Xl] = and how much more, when, as 2 Ki. 5, 13. ni3"iyr3] Cf. 4, 2. 12. 16; 10 times in ch. 17 ; and II 23, 3. 4. n^'iyp nn] Not from 'AduUam, — at least if this was at 'Id el-miyeh (1468 ft.), which is lower than Qe'ilah (1520 ft.), — but presumably from the 'forest of Hdreth ' (22, 5), which will have been somewhere in the higher, central part of Judah. fri3] they«/. installs: see on 3, 11. 5. jnn] The word used as 30, 2. 20, like the Greek aycii/. 184 The First Book of Samuel, 6. There is some disorder in this verse : Abiathar fled to David, be/ore he reached Qe'ilah ; and clause b cannot be construed so as to yield an intelligible sense (as it stands it can only be rendered ' (the) ephod came down in his hand^)^. The simplest course is to read after nn ^N* either, with LXX (B), 'iT'3 TiDN(n)l '^'V r\Vv\> in Dy Nim (so Bu. alt.), or (of. Now., but not'LviC?) n''2 *i1Dx(n)i rh''V\> T^"'. Even this change does not entirely relieve the verse of difficulty; for the sense required is a/ier Abiathar fled, which is not strictly expressed by "in"'3N m33. AV. RV. ' that he came down with an ephod in his hand.' This (irrespectively of the difficulty in clause a) yields an excellent sense : only it should be clearly understood that it is no rendering- of the Massoretic text (IT'3 1"i^ HIDN). AV. (and occasionally even RV.) sometimes conceals a difficulty by giving a sense that is agreeable with the context, regardless of the fact that the Hebrew words used do not actually express it : i. e. they implicitly adopt an emendation of the text. Comp. on 17, 20: 24, 20; 25, 30: and see Jer. 19, 13. Ez. 45, 21 RV. 48, 29 (ni^mn for n!'n3D). Ley's proposal to read nx for ijN (ZATW. 1888, p. 222) does not touch the real difficulty of the verse. 7. "123] LXX TTeTT/DaKcv = "i?9 (comp. Jud. 4, 9). Sold, however, is here scarcely suitable. If the text be correct, the sense will be to treat as strange = to alienate, reject (cf. Jer. 19, 4 "^TH DlpJ^n HX 1"*33^1), construed here pregnantly with "Vl. But the context in Jeremiah is not parallel; and the figure here would be rather a forced one. Ch. 26, 8, in a similar context, we have 120, which, however, would here give rise to an inelegant alliteration with the following -|3D:. Perhaps Krochmal is right in suggesting "i3p, which is construed with TS in Is. 19, 4 in exactly the sense that is here required, and only differs from "13J by one letter. The Versions, other than LXX, render only by a general term deliver ("IDO, cn^aaX*,/, tradidit), from which nothing can be inferred as to the reading of the text which the translators had before them. ^ It is moreover out of connexion with clause a : for according to all but uniform usage \"1"'1 would be resumed by either TlSN IT" or nT" TiDNI or IISX iy\, but not by lir HEN {Tenses, § 78 end). * Luc. omits KoX avrus /xera Aatietd, but otherwise agrees with B. XXIII. 6-ii i8 J ^^o i<\2b "13 Di] hath shut himself in (Ez. 3, 24) i?i (by) entering etc. nnai dti^i] Dt. 3, 5. 2 Ch. 8, 5; cf. 14, 6. 8. mi?] presumably from Gibeah of Saul (22, 6), 2\ miles N. of Jerusalem (on 9, i). 9. ti'"'"ino] was fabricating ^forging. Apparently a metaphor derived from the working of metal: cf. n'J'nj ^~\n Gen. 4, 22. i Ki. 7, 14. Elsewhere in this figurative sense only in Proverbs, and only there in Qal (3, 29 ny-i -jy-i ^y B'inn ^X. 6, 14. 18, 12, 20. 14, 2 2t). The position of Vpy makes it emphatic, against him (and not some one else): comp. Jer. 11, 19, and on II 15, 4. 10. ^■^ yD^i'] See on 20, 6. Ty^ nnw'^] So, with h, Nu. 32, 15. r\n^ is construed so constantly with an accus. that, though there is a tendency in Heb. for Pi'el, and especially for Hif.\ to be construed with 7, expressing the dativus commodi (or incommodi), this is probably an instance of the use of p to mark the accusative, such as is regular in Syriac, and occurs in Hebrew, rarely in the early and middle periods of the language, and with greater frequency in exilic and post-exilic writings. See 22, 7. II 3, 30 Ijas^ mn (see note) ; Jer. 40, 2 iTDT^ . . . np"'1 ; i/'. 69, 6 ^n^N^ nyn^ nnx; 73, 18 \ob n^'z^n al. : Ew. § 277^; GK. § 117"; Lex. 512*. 1 1 f. np^yp vya] This use of D"'7y2 to denote the lords or citizens of a town is rare: Jos. 24, 11 (of Jericho). Jud. 9, 22 ff. (Shechem). 20, 5 (Gibeah). II 21, 12 and 2, 4 LXX (Jabesh of Gilead)''. 13. iD^nn"' nt^'xz i2^nn''i] Cf. 2 Ki. 8, i nijn nt^'Na nui; II 15, 20 l^in ^jx -ij^'N* bv l^in "'3N1; comp. also Ex. 3, 14. 4, 13. 16, 23. 33, 19. Ezek. 12, 25. A Semitic idiom, copiously illustrated by Lagarde, in a note at the end of his Psalterimn Hieronymi (1874), p. 156 f., especially from Arabic authors, and employed where either ' E. g, '7 n^nn to give Hfe to. Gen. 45, 7 ; ''? ^Tnn to give width to, \j/. 4, 2 al. ; 'b n^jn II 7, i; O nmn Hos. 10, i; '~> pnirn is. 53, n to give right to. Comp. Ew. § 282''; Lex. 511'' 3 a; and Giesebrecht's careful study on this preposi- tion, Die Jlebrdische Praeposition Lamed (Halle, 1876), p. 80 f. 2 Comp. in Thoenician CLS. i. 1 20 TlJTS ri?y3 7yT\X\ ' Irene citizen of Byzan- tium ' (in the Greek 'Ep-qvr^ Tiv^avria) ; and Cooke, J\^SI. p. 50. 1 86 The First Book of Samuel, the means, or the desire, to be more explicit does not exist. ' And they went about where they went about : ' in the present case, no doubt, the vagueness of the expression corresponds with the reahty. From Lagarde's instances may be quoted : D2"!'!^K'"nD D3"!ri Dvp3lN (Rashi on Gen. 20, 13, and elsewhere) Onqelos renders as he does render ; ,jl5^ l-o ^jl5j fuit quod fuit = missa haec faciam ; Lo jU-oU AJLo (ji^-il age quod agis = non euro quid facturus sis, et liberam agendi ut volueris potestatem tibi concedo ; xlL ^^.^ x.]\> emersit [ex undis] qui emersit = non attinet exponere qui et quot emerserint ; i-As- juBj ^jlS U_^ Hi 7^.' ^j^ (J^ J^j ^d regem Persarum Par- wezum profectus est eo consilio quo profectus est = nil attinet explicare quaenam itineris causa ac ratio fuit : Arnold, Chrestoniaihia Arabtca, p. 143, 7 nisi forte --a^ L* ^ajIs- mutaverit eos quod eos mutavit = nisi forte nescio quae res eos mutaverit. Sm. quotes also Qor. 53, 16. 14. 131133] i.e. in some part of the rocky and desolate region called the 'wilderness of Judah ' (Jos. 15, 61-62, where six cities belonging to it are enumerated; Jud. i, 16 [text very doubtful]; Ps. 63 title), bearing down by steep and rough descents to the Dead Sea, and extending some 15 miles from W, to E., and some 35 miles from N. to S. {H. G. 312, — followed by a vivid description of its wild and barren scenery). It begins in about the longitude of Ma'on and Carmel (23, 24. 25, i), but becomes wilder and more desolate as it descends towards the Dead Sea. nin^ca] {moMWizm-) fastnesses; of. Is. 33, i6 D'y^D nn^'O. So TV. 19. 29. Jud. 6, 2 ; and (in the sing.) i Ch. 12, 9. 17 [al. 8. 16]. nn^] the elevated central 'hill-country' of Judah (Jos. 15, 48-60). f|''T 13103] probably an intrusive anticipation of z;. 15. 15. Nil] 'Here, in spite of 26, 3, we must with Ew. Hist. iii. 127 (E.T. 92) vocalize ^1*1, not only in order to secure a connexion with what precedes, but especially to obtain a motive for what follows: cf. z'. 16 "strengthened his hand," and v. 17 "fear not"' (We.). And so Dr. Weir: ' Rather, was afraid ; see next verse.' f)"'T] now Tell ez-Zif a conspicuous mound, 2882 ft. above the sea, 4 miles S. by E. of Hebron, on a plateau of ' red rolling ground, XXllI. 14-ig 187 mostly bare, partly wheat and barley, broken by limestone scalps partly covered by scrub, and honey-combed by caves/ which begins soon after Hebron is left {H. G. 306 w.). This plateau is the 'wilderness' of Ziph. Jos. 15, 55 mentions Zif as in the min^ "in. nK^'ina] The prep. 2 and the n /oca/e combined. So v. 19 ; 31, 13 ^^^'nu; jos. 15, 21 r\2:p; u 20, 15 nijaxn; jer. 52, 10 nnbna. And even with |D, as Jud. 21, 19 v njis^rp; Jos. 15, 10 njiaso ; Jer. 27, 16 nb32D. Here the n was already read by LXX (though wrongly understood) eV rrj Kaivfj = i^^"jn?. The word is pretty clearly (notice ntJ'^n, not HCnnn, in v. 16) not an appella- tive ('in the wood'), — Conder {T.IV. 243) observes that trees could never have grown on the dry porous formation of the plateau of Zif, — but the name of a place, Horesh or Hor^shah [on H loc. in names of places, see Tenses, § 132 Obs?\, — perhaps the ruin Huresa (or Khoreisd), \\ miles S. of Tell ez-Zif (Conder; Buhl, 97 ; //.(?. 307 «.). 16. n^ riN pin^l] fig. for encouraged; so Jud. 9, 24. Jer. 23, 14. Is. 35, 3. Ezr. 6, 22. Neh. 2, 18. 6, 9 al., always with the pi. hands (so LXX here) : cf. with the Qal II 2, 7 al. 17. ixvr:n] Cf. with "v Is. 10, 10. t/^. 21, 9. But NVO does not correspond phonetically with Aramaic ^^"Q, with which Miihlau-Volck, in the loth edition of Gesenius' Lexicon^ compare it: NSD = \^ = ffoJV/i; advenire : NtpJD = aDfTKD; — in conj. I 2 i^= Pi'el) porrigere, praebere. See Noldeke, ZDMG. 1886, p. 736. p] j£», in accordance with what has just been stated. Cf \\/. 90, 12 ^ so — i.e. in accordance with v. 11 — teach us/ etc. 18. Cf. 18, 3. 19 — 24, 22. A doublet to ch. 26, beginning with almost the same words, and containing a different version of the same occurrences. 19. I^ri] Tell el-Ful (2754 ft.) = Gibeah (see on 9, i) is lower than Ziph (2882 ft.); but the road from Ziph to the N. would ascend considerably (Hebron, 3040 ft., Halhul, N. of Hebron, 3270 ft.); and though it descends again to Jerusalem (2593 ft.), it rises again to Gibeah (2754 ft.), so that there would be considerable ascents between Ziph and Gibeah. The parallel, 26, i, has, however, 1N2M for l^yM. D'-arj Read D"'Drn, as 26, I. i88 The First Book of Samuel, pD''::'^n . . . ncnnn] These definite localities are inconsistent both with the preceding indefinite nn\*D, and with the need of searching for David, expressed in the verses which follow. The words from riy3J3 seem to have been inserted here from 26, i, and ^t^'"l^3 added to agree with vv. 15. 16. 18 (Sm.). On Hachilah and Jeshimon, see on 26, I, 20. ':i nix hy?\ b=-in accordance with [Lex. 516''): elsewhere (Dt. 12, 15. 20. 21. 18, 6t; comp. Jer. 2, 24) the phrase is used with 1: comp. on 2, 16. With the rhythm or run of clause a, cf. Qoh. 9, 10 (accents and RV. margin). ITjon IJPl] 'and ours (will it be) to deliver him,' etc. Not a common use of 7. Cf. Jer. 10, 23 (reading jsn"! ^^i^) ; and (with b before the inf.) Mic. 3, i ; and, in late Hebrew, 2 Ch. 13, 5. 20, 17. 26, 18. Comp. "hv in II 18, 11. 22. *iiy IJ^jn] certainly not 'make yet more sure' (RV.), but most probably, if the text is correct, ^Prepare further;' cf., in a military sense, Nah. 2, 4. Jer. 46, 14. Ez. 7, 14. 38, 7. 'Give attention still,' with ellipse of 37, is a very doubtful rend. : not only is the ellipse uncertain elsewhere (see Moore on Jud. 1 2, 6), but 27 p^n elsewhere has only the sense of fixing the heart firmly in a given direction, esp. towards Yahweh {ch. 7, 3), or to seek Him (2 Ch. 12, 14 al.), cf (absol.) \^. 78, 8. Job 11, 13 (Lex. 466^). DK' iriNI ^c] The Hebrew is abrupt (comp. on 2, 35). LXX for ins'l '»D has iv Ta;(€i, whence Th. We. al. restore •^")'!1't'l' — ' know and consider his place where his fleetiiig foot may be.' "inp as an adj., however, is a doubtful form : it occurs only Zeph. i, 14, where it is explained questionably (see esp. Schwally, ZAW. 1890, p. 176) as a Pi. ptcp. ("^nP'?) '^^'^^ aphaeresis of D (GK. § 52^); and it is better to read in Zeph. "'OP'?' ^^^^ h^""^' ^^^'^ Ehrl., nnnsn (from i"''??). IDX] sc. iDlxn (16, 4). Nin nny my] Ex. 4, 14 Nin -|2T im ; ch. 22, iS^ : cf. also 27, 2 ; 28, 8; Qoh. 9, 15. For the inf. Qal, see GK. § 113^. 23. lyii 1N"i] In this order, only here and Jer. 5, i. Elsewhere regularly INTI lyn {v. 22. 12, 17. 14, 38. i Ki. 20, 7. 2 Ki. 5, 7), ••N-ii ''yn (25, 17. Jer. 2, 19), HNi"! yn (24, 12. II 24, 13. i Ki. 20, 22). 25 MSS. have here 1X11 lyil. XXIII. ig-24 189 ^30] Very hard. . , . 730 may mean any o/"(Lev. 11, 24), esp. with a neg. or DX {Lex. 580*^) ; but this does not suit here : it cannot mean everyone (Now,); and 'take knowledge of (EVV., Dh.) gives to p a sense which it does not possess. '2. yT* does, however, occur with the meaning know about (Jer. 38, 24. Job 37, 16, perhaps t/f. 31, 8; cf. ch. 22, 15); and as D and 3 are often confused in the old characters (Introd. p. Ixvii), we may, in default of anything better, read ^33, and then we may rightly render * take knowledge 0/.' Dn3t'l] a7id return. Neither this (We.) nor D^3;j'ni (Bu. Now. Kit.) can mean bring back word: see on 12, 3. |13J ^x] ^N must here be used as the equivalent of hv, which is joined sometimes with substantives to express an adverbial relation ; i/f. 31, 24 "ini py upon (the basis of) abundance = abundantly; Jer. 6, 14 n?i53 7y = lightly; Is. 60,7 p^n i?y = acceptably. Here on a certainty = assuredly {Lex. 754^). min"" ^S^n] not ' thousands ' (EVV.), but cla?ts of Judah ; see on 10, 19. 24. pyD "I3n»] Ma'on, in the ' hill-country ' of Judah (Jos. 15, 55, — mentioned beside Carmel and Ziph), was identified by Robinson with Tell Ma' in (2887 ft.), on a 'great hump of rock' (Conder, Tetit Work, 244), 4^ miles S. of Ziph. The 'wilderness of Ma'on' is an extensive steppe, E. of the Tell, consisting of ' waste pasture-land, rough rocks with that dry vegetation on which goats and even sheep seem to thrive ' {EB. s. v.). ri3iy3] The 'Arabah (or Steppe) is the alluvial floor of the deep depression through which the Jordan runs, and in which the Dead Sea lies. It is difficult to understand how any part of the wilderness of Ma'on (2887 ft.) could be described as being 'in' the 'Arabah (in which the Dead Sea is 1292 ft. below the Medit. Sea). If the text is in order, we must suppose that the wilderness of Ma'on extended sufficiently far in the E. to reach a point which could be reckoned as 'in' the 'Arabah. pD^e'M pD"' h^] ' on the South of the Desolation ' (AV. Jeshimon ; RV. the desert is too vague). pD^!i'\"I (notice the article), though it is used as a general term (Dl. 32, 10; Is. 43, 19 al.), is here and v. 19, 26, I. 3 (cf. Nu. 21, 20. 23, 28) used specifically of some part of the wild and desolate 'wilderness of Judah' (see on v. 14), — if pn"! b^ iQO The First Book of Samuel, is correct (26, i has ^J3 ^y), of the part South of about the latitude of Ma'on. 25. C'pn^] 'Read itj'pn^ with LXX' (We.). 1 has dropped out before the '•I following. So Klo. Bu. Sm. etc. y^Dn TT'l] In illustration of the fact, Dr. Weir refers appositely to Jud. 15, 8 Dt:^y y^D sj^yon nc^i; 20, 45. 47 ny3-ij< pon yi?D3 lae-^i D"'Bnn: D^y7D are also mentioned as hiding-places in ch. 13, 6. The ' crag ' here meant cannot be identified ; but it must have been in some part of the "^'^■0 imo lower than that meant in v. 24. 3^^^] LXX IK'X : ' and came down to the crag which is in,' etc. This is probably right, y^JDH not being a proper name (We.). X^'^'O 131D] ittto the wilderness, etc. ; not in, as EVV. 26. h\^^'\ LXX VK'JNI ^INK^: probably rightly. About 4 miles SE. of Tell ez-Zif there begins a deep and narrow gorge, with rocky sides, called first W. el-lVar and then VV. el-Malaqy, which runs to the E. for a distance of some 6 miles; and it is a plausible suggestion of Conder's {Tent Work, 245) that this may have been the scene of the incident here recorded : there is, Conder says, no other place near Ma'on, where cliffs, or crags {Sela', v. 28), can be found. But it is precarious to support the identification by the phonetically imperfect resemblance of ' Malaqy ' to nipi?nD {v. 28). IDHJ Tin \Tl] ' And David came to be (on 18, 9) hurrying in alartn, . . . and Saul and his men were surrounding David and his men to take them," — the ptcpp. describe the situation, into the midst of which the message, v. 27, came. For the idea expressed by TSm, cf. II 4, 4 (Qal), 2 Ki. 7, 15 (Nif.). nny is, however, a very rare word, found otherwise only once in poetry (i//. 5, i3t, of surrounding protectingly with a shield); and Klo. proposes D't:y (14, 32. 15, 19) v^Qxt flying c/ David (so Bu. Sm.). This, however, cannot be said to be probable. Ehrlich, more probably, suggests Qnny were crossing over to the other side of the mountain to take David, when the message arrived. 28. n^ip] with dag. f. implicitum (GK. § 22c end) in the n, as in ^I-^T,-? Is. 14, 3 Baer and Ginsb. (GK. § 228 end). So SS and Kit. Baer and Ginsb. read fjl^O : cf. i, 6. 10, 24 (see the Addetida). nip^ntDnJ prob. 0/ divisions'^, Saul and David there parting from » Though r0no is elsewhere used only in a concrete sense, of the divisions XXIII. 2s~XXIV. 4 191 the neighbourhood of one another: cf. the Nif. in i Ki. 16, 21. Gen. 14, 15. A popular explanation of the meaning of the name. 'Dathe, Ges., De Wette, "rock of escapes;" but Th. objects rightly that the sense of escaping is not established for p7n ' (Dr. Weir) *. LXX TreVpa 17 ^eptcr^eicra = ^i?^'!!!9- ^'^9 • ^arg. has the characteristic paraphrase, ' the place where the heart of the king was divided to go this way and that.' 24, I. /'Vl] Very surprising, in the present context. 'En-gedi, in the 'wilder- ness' of Jndah (Jos. 15, 62), the modern 'Ain-jidi, is a spring, bursting out from under a great boulder on the rocky precipitous descent to the W. shore of the Dead Sea, and 612 ft. above it (cf. G. A. Smith, EB. s.v. ; and the writer's note on Gen. 14, 7) : it is 680 ft. below the Medit. Sea, and consequently some 3560 ft. below Ziph (2882 ft.), and considerably below any place which could reasonably be included in the 'wilderness of Ma'on' (v. 25); David could not therefore have * come up ' to 'En-gedi from any of the places mentioned before. Either something has been omitted (so that DK'D does not refer to nip?non y?D in the ' wilderness of Ma'on,' v. 35), or the verse is due to some redactional confusion. 3. ^3D ?y] The expression is ambiguous. ''JQ by may denote either (i) on the surface of, Gen. 11, 8. Ex. 32, 20. II 18, 8 ; or (2) on the front ^(usually in the sense of 07i the East of; see on 15, 7). In sense (i) '•JS ?y is commonly used with words of scattering or casting : nor does it appear why here the surface of the rocks of the chamois-goats should be so particularly specified. Probably, therefore, (2) is preferable : though, as Ges. remarks, there is nothing here to guide us as to whether the ' front ' definitely means the East. Wild goats still abound in the neighbourhood of 'En-gedi; and the Dvy^"l """ilV must have designated some locality in which they were particularly apt to congregate. 4. fNVn nmj] Cf. Nu. 32, 16. 24. 36. Zeph. 2, 6. Low stone-walls (' build,' Nu. 32, 16), forming enclosures for sheep. D''T^^] 'were in the recesses (Am. 6, 10. Is. 14, 15. 37, 24 al.) of the cave, sitting down.' of a people (Jos. 11, 23. 12, 7. 18, 10), or (especially in Ch.) of the divisions (i.e. ' courses') of priests and Levites. ' It is assumed (though very questionably) by the Rabbis, and even favoured by Gesenius, for the Hif. in Jer. 37, 12. 192 The First Book of Samuel, 5. 1»X ItJ'N] Do these words mean of which he said — the allusion being to some previous assurance of deliverance from Saul, which David's followers apply to the present occasion (Kp.) ; or on which he says, — the occasion itself being interpreted by them as an indication of Yahweh's purpose to deliver Saul into his hands (Th. Ke. We.) ? In order to answer this question properly, the nature of ntJ'N and its use in parallel cases must be considered in some detail. '^t^'^{ is properly not a relative pronoun, but a relative sign, indicating generally and indeterminately the idea of relation = 05 to which : it is followed in strictness by a pronominal or adverbial (DB') supplement, defining more closely the nature of the relation which it is used to express — "l''by "13T "ItJ'N C^Xil the man ^5 /o ■whom he spake concerning him = the man concerning whom he spake. There are, however, certain cases — besides the familiar one, in which the pronominal supple- ment is the direct object of the verb — in which the pron, or adv. supplement is dispensed with, {a) with "IJpX "liJ'S, followed by the words used, where, however, its place is really taken by a pronoun in the speech which follows, as Gen. 3, 17 the tree as to which I commanded thee, saying. Thou shalt not eat from it, Dt. 28, 68. I Ki. 8, 29. Jer. 32, 43; ch. 9, 23'': ib. 17 the man as to whom I said unto thee, This one (nt) shall rule my people Israel ; Jud. 7, 4 (exactly similar) and (where the noun repeated takes the place of the pronoun) Jud. 8, 15 Behold Zebah and Zalmunna', as to tvhom ye reproached me, saying, Is the hand of Zebah and Zalmunna' now in thine hand? etc. In 2 Ki. 17, 12. 21, 4 a term nearly equivalent to the antecedent of "IK'X follows similarly in the speech. The pron. or adv. supplement is dispensed with (^) when a word denoting ti}7ie ox place or manner has immediately preceded "ICN : thus (a) Dt. 4, 10 mJOJ? "Iti'X DV the day on which thou stoodest, Gen. 45, 6. i Ki. 9, 10. 22, 25 and frequently : {fi) Gen. 39, 20. Dt. 8, 15. Is. 64, loal.i; (7) in , , . "Iti'N "IDIH riT this is the matter as to which (or, account how) . . . Jos. 5, 4; i Ki. 11, 272. It is dispensed with (c) in a few extreme instances, in which it is left to the reader's intelligence to define the relation intended: as Nu. 21, 16; Dt. 7, 19; Is. 8, 12 inN'' "IK'N ^3^ "IB'p jnOND ^ "IB'p rWP^ D5?n, where ION'' would normally be followed by lb ; 31,6 "IK'N^ laiB' mo 1p''Dyn Turn ye to (him, as to) whom they have deeply rebelled. Applying the principles that have been thus determined to the passage before us, we shall see that presumption favours its being regarded as analogous to b (a). Had the sense intended by the 1 And regularly after "1"'X3, nB'N ^533 [ch. 14, i,-j) = %vherever, "IK'ND (Ex. 5, 11. Ru. 2, (f)fro7n the place where — whencesoever, "IK'N (/N) bj? whithersoever, II 15, 20 al. - Comp. the use of ~13T in the phrase . . , 12"] ilTI Dt. 15, 2. 19, 4. i Ki. 9, 15 ; and in the first line of the Siloam Inscription. XXIV. s-8 193 narrator been, ' Behold the day, as to which Yahweh said to thee, I will etc.,' we should have expected (on the analogy of a) DVn n:r] ':) [nx "'3:n ionrTovH T'^x hiiT -ion TwN*. As it is, nc'N has the presumption of being determined by the preceding DVn : ' Behold the day oti vohich Yahweh saith unto thee. Behold, I am about to deliver etc' Compare the very similar passage, Jud. 4, 14. T3"'ix] The Qre is right (notice h). Cf. on II 24, 13. 5^. 6. To produce a logical sequence in the narrative 5^. 6 should be transposed so as to follow 8*. 6. P133 n^] ' After fjja eight MSS., and LXX, Pesh. Vulg. insert P"'yisn, — necessarily, as the art. is wanting' (Dr. Weir). So We. 7. mn^O 'h n^"'ijn] ' Ad profanum sit mihi a Dorimio ' — the usual V n?vn (12, 23) being strengthened by the act being represented as deprecated on Yahweh's part: cf. i Ki. 21, 3; and see on II 23, 17. DN] After nPvn with the force of an oath, as II 20, 20 : more impassioned than the more ordinary constr. of n?vn with jD of the act deprecated (e.g. 26, 11). See GK. § 149 ; Zex. 32 1^. {"ilH) nj.T n^'^m] See GK. § i6h. So v. 11. 26, 9 al. 8. n''im3 . . . yDt:'"'l] ' And David /are his men with words.' ' J?D"^ is /o cleave: in Qal only ptcp., of the cloven hoof, Lev. 11, 3. 7. 26. Dt. 14, 6. 7 ; in Pi'el, Lev. i, 17. Jud. 14, 6 ^Ijn yDC'3 inyocj'n and he rent it (the lion) as one would rend a kid. It follows that the Heb. text here yields no sense ' (Dr. Weir). We. defends MT. on the ground that the addition omiS (cf. Job 32, 4) implies that the verb is a figurative one ; but if MT. be correct, David — to judge from such knowledge of the Heb. word used as we possess — must have expressed himself with singular violence, and in terms which would be suitable rather to an abusive and malicious attack by words (comp. the Lat. proscindere = to satirize, defame), than to a simple rebuke or ' check ' (so RV., but not fully representing yDC'). None of the emendations that have been proposed is, however, satisfactory (Th. r\3fl\; Dr. Weir, 'Perhaps V^m or ^Tr^'A;' Klo. "ibN^l). Bu. agrees, '^^^l\ is a word that would be appropriate to the context (cf. II 18, 16); but yoti'^l could scarcely have arisen out of this by the ordinary processes of transcriptional corruption. The renderings of the Versions are : LXX eireure, Pesh. wSl" made to repent, Targ. 1365 O 194 ^^^ First Book of Samuel, D»Q persuaded^ pacified, Aq. o-uvcKAao-ei/ (hence Vulg. con/regit), Symm. TT^pLtcnraa-ev, Theod. ^Trarr/o-ev. 10. C'P^Id] is seeking, — much more expressive than ' seeketh ' (EVV.). 11. "113X1] The tense is irregular: the pf. with simple waw is improbable : the pf. with zvaiv conv. is out of place, the idea of reiteration being evidently not what is here intended to be expressed. Jerome's "^lONI {et cogitavi ui occiderem te), of course, cannot be right. Either "IDS'*! and one said must be restored, or we must follow LXX KoX ovK TjfBovXrjOrjv and read l^9?:?1 and I refused (We. etc.). 1^,?/'^] -og-: cf. on 15, I. Dnni] Elsewhere followed always by py (Dt. 7, r6 and frequently). The ellipse, considering the standing usage of the word, is not probable. Sept. Targ. Pesh. express the first person DllNI : onm may have been ' written in error by a scribe, who expected ''J^y to follow ' (We. Sm. Now.). Or (Bu.) ''J"'y may have dropped out after Dnni : it is expressed by Vulg. 12. HN"! D2 riNn] The repetition of the imper. after D3 is certainly very un-Hebraic : and Ehrl. would read — as Hupfeld did long ago {Comm. in quosdam lobeidos locos, 1853, ?• '^i) — ^^1, ^^ '"'^''5 — the inf. abs. (see on i, 6). Tnnn N^] carrying on "Tl")?! : GK. § 114''; Tenses, § 118. rriiif] liesi in wait (not huniest, lli*) : see Ex. 21, 13 ; also Nu. 35, 20. 22. 'LXX 8co-/Aei;et? (= 1"?.^), translating from an indistinct text' (Dr. Weir). 13a. Cf. Gen. 16, 5^ 31, 53. For '•JtDpJi, see GK. § 112^. 16. , , , nTil] The pf. and waw conv. with the force of a wish : cf. Tenses, § 1 1 9 8. "IT'JD ''JLiSt^^l] and judge me (and free vc\q) from thy hand: see on 25. 39- 19*. mjn] viz. by thy action in sparing me. But Klo.'s nPlJn ' hast magnified {cL Gen. 19, 19) that which thou hast done to me (as) good ' yields a better sense ; so Sm. Bu. Now. Kitt. Ehrlich. "•JjiN] after r\^^, as II 2, 6b; cf. with non. Gen. 24, 49 al. 39b "W^ riN] IB'N alone r= forasmuch as (15, 15): the ON is out of place, and is doubtless a scribal error, due to Tk^'N DN just before. XXIV. 10- XXV. 2 195 20. inbt^^l] will he send him away? For the question thus intro- duced, cf. Ez. 15, 5^ : Tenses, § 123 y8 ; GK. § 150a. Klo.'s ^t?=i (GK. § \\2^^ n.), with ' the general subject limited afterwards to the specific t:'^N,' is highly improbable, — though of course without t!'^S it would have been quite suitable. 'y\ nnn] ' in return /or this day — the sense being explained by what follows — wherein (on v. 5) thou hast wrought for me! But as Klo. remarks, such a use of DVn is un-Hebraic. Klo. reads ^'itan this good (Nu. 10, 32) for DIM; and we must either do the same, or adopt the transposition followed tacitly (cf. on 23, 6) by EVV., and read ntn DVn h nn^L^'y TiTN nnn. Against LXX (dTron'o-ci aurw, and Iv OXiif/eL) and Th. see We. 21. HDpl] = and be confirmed, as 13, 14 ; Gen. 23, 30. Nu. 30, 5. 23. mivron by iby] from 'En-gedi (23, 29), 680 ft. below the Medit. Sea, up past Hebron (3040 ft.) and Halhul (3270 ft.) over the high backbone of central Judah, and then down into the Shephelah to the 'hold ' (22, 4) of 'AduUam (if = 'Id el-miyeh, 1160 ft.). 25, I. TTilJ The place from which David 'came down' does not appear. The intention of the note seems to be to state that David, on hearing of Samuel's death, came down from some unnamed higher spot in the min^ in to the wilderness of Ma'on {c. 2500 ft.). PND] Read }iyo (23, 24. 25. 26), with LXX, as the context {;pv. 2. 4) requires. The wilderness of Paran (Nu. 12, 16) is much too far to the south. 2. K'"'Nl] without a verb: see on 17, 12; and cf. i Ki. 11, 26. int:^yoi] of work in the fields: cf. Ex. 23, 16 T'^ryo n^sa. 70n33] now el-Kurmiil, i mile N. of Ma'on, ' on the edge of the wilderness of Judah, but to the west the land is broad and fertile, not unlike scenes of upland agriculture in Scotland. The name Carmel ("garden-land") is therefore suitable' (G. A. Smith, EB. s. v. ; cf. on ch. 15, 12). pnj] So II 19, 33 of Barzillai; 2 Ki. 4, 8 of the Shunammite woman. TUa \T'l] apparently = and he was (engaged) in the shearing of his sheep, — a most unusual type of sentence, tp ^^''1, or rather tp Kini, 2 196 The First Book oj Samuel, is what would be expected in that sense. For the unusual form of the inf. (in y"y verbs), X\\ (so Gen. 31, 19 : 38, 13 Tib), see GK. § 67CC. 3. \>y^^ insight, shrewdness : Pr. 16, 22 V^yn ^"2^ D''^n "lIpJD. C^^yD] elsewhere only in poetry, and in prose written in the elevated style of Dt. (Jud. 2, 19. Neh. 9, 35). (Dn)Q3''7?yo y^ occurs in Is. 1,16, Dt. 28, 20, and often in Jer. (as 4, 4). 1373] Qre "'?!'■?, a Calebite, the ^ being the usual patronymic termination. So Targ. (n^D JT'mo) Vulg. {de genere Caleb), Rashi, Kimchi (p i^np 3!?3 nnD'j'crD n\nti' ^th .on:^ T'l^n). Nabal belonged to the Caleb-clan, a clan originally Histinct from Judah, but afterwards incorporated in it, which had settlements in the country about Hebron (see 1 Ch. 2, 42-49, where Ziph, Hebron, Tappuah, Joqde'am [so read ioxjorqo'ai)i\. Ma' on, Beth-zur \_\\ miles N. of Hebron], are specified as some of its settlements), and also in the Negeb (see ch. 30, 14 the 3^3 333). See further DB. and EB. s.v. Caleb ; and Kittel's Die Biicher der Chrotiik, pp. 13 f., 19 f. 5. l7y] Carmel (2887 ft.) is considerably above most of the sur- rounding plateau. n^DiD] Cf. Ew. § 216C; GK. § 9oi. rirh^^-] GK. §§ 44d 64f 6. "'n?] A most perplexing and uncertain word, {a) The text can only be the pausal form of '•n? = io him that liveth (GK. § 29^). But the rendering, 'And ye shall say thus to him that liveth, Both thou,' etc., affords a poor sense ; hence it is thought by some to be a form of salutation, of which no other instance occurs, ' And ye shall say thus, To him that liveth ! Both thou,' etc. So substantially Ges.^ Ke.. the former comparing the common Arabic formula of salutation jJiJl e)Lli God keep you in life ■= grant you good health. (I!) Vulg. renders frairibus meis (\n?p), following which We., admitting the difficulty of the passage, thinks that relatively the best explanation of it is to punctuate '■n? 2, and to render 'And ye shall say thus to my brother^ (cf. II 20, 9 TIK HDN DI^EiTi, where Joab uses the same term 1 Thes, 469 f. The rendering In vitam is, however, doubtful, the sing, ""n life occurring otherwise, at most, in a particular form of oath (p. 148). ^ In this case, however, it is almost necessary to read ''TWO (so Bu.). It is true, cases of the elision of N occur (GK. § 23'), but none after a prep, with __, XXV. s-io 197 in addressing Amasa, and i Ki. 9, 13 Hiram addressing Solomon) \ This seems the most probable (so Bu.). (c) Sm. would read DmCNI ':i nnx i*npi r? ' And ye shall say /NaX. For ""n = clan, see on 18, 18. □li?C' nriNl] Lit. Both thou (be) peace: cf. II 20, 9 nriK Dli'K'n; and see on ch. 16, 4. On 1 = both (rare), see Lex. 25^^ h. 7. lb onn ^d] Cf. II 13, 23. 24. Dlit^P^n N'^] So V. 15; cf. Ruth 2, i^end. For the irregular n, cf. nxnn Gen. 41, 28 al, rh^T} 2 Ki. 17, 11 : GK. § 53P. Dnb] h> after the pass, verb, as Ex. 12, 16 al. : Lex. 514"^. 8. 310 DV ^y] i^y of time is most unusual. 3"it3 D"i> recurs in Esther (8, 17. 9, 19. 22). IT" NVr^n "ICX r.NJ Cf. (though in different connexions) ch. 10, 7. Lev. 12, 8. Jud. 9, 33. Qoh. 9, 10. 10. Ul] irregular: see GK. § 67^6. D'^'iariDn onay] The combination of a ptcp. with the art. and a subst. without it occurs sporadically in OT., often (but not invariably) where the subst. is definite in itself or defined by the context. Thus Gen. I, 21. 28. 7, 21 (with .Tn'^D and nt^'a-b3) : Dt. 2, 23. Jud. 14, 3 (with a n. pr.): 16, 27. Jer. 27, 3. 46, 16. Ez. 2, 3^ 14, 22 \ Pr. 26, 18. «//. 62, 4 (read iT^ni n"in3). 119, 21 (accents) ^ Here the ^ Dr. Weir : ' Or is it TlXp to my brother? But see v. 8 thy son David. n3 may follow the verb, as Ex. 5, 15, though rarely,' Against the viewr that treats ' o»^ l^^«o ; Vulg. (after Symm.) aversatus est eos. Th. considers that these renderings point to t^i^M (cf. i/r. 95, 10); on which We. remarks: ' Dp"'1, even if Pesh. etc. read it, would be of no help : all turns here on the expression of Nabal's feeling.' But J^yn^l (We. al.) is hardly probable. 15. 13D^nnn ''lO^'ba] So (in the si. cstr.) with a finite verb Lev. 14, 46 \ \j/. 90, 15 (riitt^): with -iti'N, Lev. 13, 46. Nu. 9, 18 (GK. § 130*^). Elsewhere the inf., as vv. 7. 16. 22, 4. 17. nn^D] 20, 7. hv and ^N here interchange in one and the same clause : for other remarkable instances of the same variation, see V. 25. II 2, 9 ; 3, 29 : Jer. 26, 15. 28, 8. 1 But some treat "T'^On here as an inf. (GK. § 53'), though in that case it should no doubt be pointed "I^JpH (see Driver on Dt. 3, 3. 4, 15. 7, 34. 28, 55). XXV. 10-2) 199 "m'^pj GK. § 133^. The implicit subj. is "^Sl^jl : see on 16, 4. 18. ''^3J] skins (so RV. w.), as 10, 4 etc. : the do-Koi of the NT. niVJ'y] i.e. 'asuwoth. So Kt. On the form, see Ew. § iSq^I; Stade, §§ 119b 319C; GK. §§ 24'', 75V: and comp. nilt33 Is. 3, 16. The Qre substitutes the normal n^Ty 'asuyoth. D^ND] the nXD (= adrov, Mt. 13, 33) was J of an ephah, or 2f gallons. On ''bp, see on II 17, 28. DV^^] dried grapes, or clusters of raisins (30, 12. II 16, i. I Ch. 12, 4 it). The root signifies to be dry or shrivelled: in OT. only Hos. 9, 14 (D'^pDlT D^K') ; in the Talm. (v. Levy) of dried figs, grapes, etc. In Ps.-Jon. CE'?''') cn? D'^jy (Nu. 6, 3) is rendered by Pi5^??>'^ p-'DI pary. Cf. Kennedy, EB. ii. 1568. Dvm] pressed fig-cakes {JEB. ii. 1570): 30, 12. i Ch. 12, 41 (with CplDV, as a present to David's warriors). 2 Ki. 20, 7 = Is. 38, 2 if. 20. iTm] The tense is incorrect (on i, 12). Either read M"'1 (constr. as 2 Ki. 2, 11), or (though kox ly^v-qBt] stands in the LXX) delete it as an early corrupt anticipation of the following KNT (comp. then, for the form of the sentence, 9,14: Tenses, § 169). mT*] to meet David, on his way up (vv. 6. 13). 21. "iDN 111")] Note the plupf. (on 9, 15). The clause expresses David's thoughts as he went along before he met Abigail. "]S] as Jer. 5, 4; see on 16, 6. 22. in "'2''n!'] LXX Tw AavetS = '^^r', certainly rightly. Analogy (cf. e.g. 20, 13) requires the imprecation to be uttered by the speaker against himself. The insertion of ''2''N is probably intentional, to avoid the appearance, as the threat in b was not carried out, of the imprecation recoiling upon David himself. 23. iTiiD ^y nn ''DK^] We have the types, (1) HXIN D"'DS* innC'''1 Gen. 19, I and often ; (2) 'X VDxS '1 Gen. 48, 12. 2 S. 18, 28t, and VDxb alone, Nu. 22, 3it ; (3) '^ VSi* ^y '1 2 S. 14, 4. 33. I Ki. I, 23t ; (4) 'N VDX '1 2 S. 24, 2ot ; also (5) (i-linX; VJD (^Nj^y ^S"'"l Jos. .s, 14. 2 S. 9, 6. 14, 22. Rw. 2, 10; (6) nV"lX VDN^ ^D^l I S. 20, 4it : but never ''DN^ another. H^DX ^y in ^JD^ would therefore here be more in accordance with usage (We. al.). 1 Comp. similar instances in the Talm., Dalman, Graimn. des Jiid.-Pal. Aramdisch (1894), p. 78; ed. 2 (1905), p. 109. 200 The First Book of Samuel, J^IN*] 7 I\ISS. have the more usual nviX, which is also a T-aD (on 12, 5). 24. rhi ^y ^sni] Cf. 2 Ki. 4, 37 (Bu.). "■JX U] Cf. I Ki. I, 26 ; and see GK. § 135^; E\v. § 3n«. 25. b2j] 'Fool' is an inadequate rendering. The word in Hebrew suggested one who was insensible to the claims of either God or man, and who was consequently at once irreligious and churlish : see esp. Is. 32, 5 f. (where v. 6 unfolds the character of the ^3: in terms which recall at once the conduct of Nabal described in this chapter ^). See further Lex. s. v. ; Parallel Psalter, Glossary, p. 457, Here the best rendering would be churl—'- Churl is his name, and churlishness is with him,' — or, as we might say, ' is his nature.' 26. nnyi , . , nnyi] The word repeated after the long intervenino- clause. Resumption is a frequent characteristic of Heb. prose style. The case of "i^ . . .13 has been noticed on 14, 39 (cf. Lex. 472*) : see also on 17, 13. The following are other examples, derived partly from my own observation, partly from Kon. Siilistik (1900), p. 129 f. : Ex. I, 15-16 O^N'1 . . . "1?0N''1). 4, g^ 12, 41 (Vltl . . . \T1). Lev. 13, 3 oHN-^i . . . n^-ii). 17, 5 ON^ani . . . ix'-a^ jyo^). 27, 3. nu. 5, 19-21. 10, 32 (.Tni: so Dt. 20, II. Jud. 11, 31). 14, 36-37 (D^E'JNn). Dt. 4, 42 (DJ1 . . . D^jbi. 18, 6 (Sm . . . W^). Jud. 9, 16--19'' 01 riKDNa DN). ch. 29, 10 (ipiin Dn?03L"m). 11 1, 1-2 on^i). i Ki. s, 41-42 (n21). 12, 10 (,1:3 . . .-icxn n^ "lanjl). Is. 7, 22 (iT-n^). 49, 5-6 HDN'M . . .-1?0N). Jer. 3, f-i (reading in 8 Nini, with most moderns). 20, 5 (|nN). 29, 25''-3ib (-|{>>j^ |j;>)_ ^^^ 2. 10. 18-20. Ez.' 21, 29 (fv^). 24, 25-26^ (Ninn Dvn . . . orn). 28, 2»-6'' (|y^). Hag. 2, i3''-i5\ Zech. 8, 23. For some examples from later books, see Kon. I.e. Comp. also the cases of the resumption of a noun by NIH, NTl, etc. ( Tenses, §§ 123 Obs., 199; 198), and of a casus pendens by a suffix (§§ 123 a, 197, with Obs. 2). """' "jy:» -IC'n] The antecedent ••"•' is repeated in the relative clause, because it is separated from "IK'S by the addition 'jK'Da "Til : contrast 7^. 34- "V TT* y??'i'^l] The inf. abs., in continuation of an inf. c, as 22, 13^ (see the note) ; and followed by a subst. standing to it in the relation ' In EVV. 733 is here rendered unfortunately vile person, and (vS) ^^''3 churl. Render : (5) ' The churl will be no more called noble, nor the knave said to be gentle (i.e., in modem English, a gentleman). (6) For the churl speaketh churlishness, and his heart worketh naughtiness, to do profaneness, and to utter defection {lit. going astray) against Yahweh, to make empty the soul of the hungry, and to cause the drink of the thirsty to fail;' and knave for churl in v. 7. XXV. 2)-2() 201 of subject (rare), as v. 33, Lev. 6, 7. i/^. 17, 5 (E\v. § 328" towards the end; GK. § IJ3??). The phrase itself, implying an exploit or success, achieved against opposing obstacles hy force, recurs vv. 31. 33. Jud. 7, 2. Job 40, 14 (^yD*), and with reference to Yahweh, Is. 59, 16. 63, 5. r\;. 98, I ; cf., with VHT, 44, 4- 27. riDin] i.e. a present, called a blessing from the feelings of good will, of which it is the expression: 30, 26. Gen. 33, 11. Jud. i, 14. 2 Ki. 5, 15. N-an] An error for ns'i^n, as v. 35. So 26 MSS. njnJi] As in II 14, 10. Is. 9, 4, the waw conv. with the pf. intro- duces the direct predicate {Tenses, § 123; GK. § 143*^): here, as 20, 5. Jud. 11,8, with a precative force, 'And now this present, . . . , , let it be given,' etc. "'jnN 'hyyi] at the feet of my lord = following him, Ex. 11, 8. Dt. II, 6. Jud. 4, 10. II 15, 16. 17 al. 28. pNJ nu] Cf. 2, 25. II 7, 16. I Ki. II, 38. nini niDn^o] As 18, 17. Cf. Nu, 21, 14. T'CD] An idiomatic expression = all the days that thou hast lived, since thy birth: i Ki. i, 6 ran:) vns u:»'y ^ih; Job 38, 12 1"'D"'Cn ^ npa nrT'l^*. T'n''» having this sense, the pf. HNVOJ N^ would be the tense naturally used with it : probably NVDD N? is chosen with the view of generalising the statement as much as possible, so as to allow it to include a possible future,-—' is not to be found in thee,' etc, 29. nriNm , , . np^] ' And man has (as a fact) risen up, etc. . . . : but the soul of my lord shall be,' etc. If it be thought that the sense, ' and should a man rise up . . . then may the soul of my lord be,' etc. is required, ^\>\ must be read (Is. 21, 7 ; Tenses, § 149 ; GK. § 159^'): so Sm. Bu. Now. Dh. 'ai mnv] bound up for safe custody in the bundle of life. nx] with = in the care and custody of, as Lev. 5, 23 ; Dt. 15, 3 ; Is. 49, 4. n^y^P"' . . . riNl] The object resumed, and connected directly with the verb by the suffix ; a frequent elegance of Hebrew style, as Gen. 13, 15. 21, 13: Tenses, § 197. i, 6; GK. § 143c. * Cf. .Oovi^cu ^^C) Wright, Apocr. Acts of the Apostles, p. 88, 11, 15-16. 202 The First Book of Samuel, 30. ':i ^3D] EVV. ' according to all the good that he hath spoken Goncerning thee,' which in Hebrew ^ would be "i31 "itJ'K naiDH 73D "]^!?y. 24, 19 nniD TlX nn''C'y nci'S* n>{, cited by Bu., is not parallel. The text is evidently in some disorder, though it is not certain how it is to be corrected. Either this or "]''^y 131 nL''X naiDH ^D nx might be the original reading : but in either case it is not apparent how naiun nx would assume its present place. Perhaps naiun nj< was originally a marginal gloss. 31. 'Then let not this be to thee a (cause of) tottering {or staggering), or a stumbling of heart, (viz.) to have shed innocent blood,' etc. Both expressions are peculiar : but the meaning appears to be, ' Let David avoid the difficulties which shedding innocent blood might hereafter involve him in, and the qualms of conscience which will inevitably follow it.' The kind of 'tottering' expressed by the root pID may be learnt from a comparison of Is. 28, 7 ; Jer. 10, 4; and Nah. 2, 11 (do"!^ P''D). The ancient translations seem merely to have conjectured for npl3 a meaning more or less agreeable with the context : LXX f^8eXvyix6y3 is subject : ' And there was the like often days, and,' etc., 3 Ihe like ^ being an undeveloped substan- tive {Lex. 453^). For the art.. Dr. Weir compares 9, 20. Is. 30, 26. I Ch. 9, 25. Ezr. 10, 8, But CD'' is certainly better in accordance with analogy (so GK. § 134™). ' And it came to pass after ten days,' would, of course, be D''D'' mi^y }^pD ^^"''l (Jer. 42, 7). Comp. i Ki. 18, i D''»'' ^n''l DU"i, where D''^'' is similarly the subject oi \T1 (for the sing.^ see on i, 2). 39. hll I'D . . . ni] pregnantly : cf. y\/. 43, i TDH ^ '•iilD un nnn; and . . . TQ DSC' 24, 16. II 18, 19. 31. »"-> a^C^Tij The subj. repeated, the "itt'N at the beginning of the sentence having been forgotten. IJ^Nin . , . a-'ti'n] as Jud. 9, 57. I Ki. 2, 44 : cf. i::'K-i3 IDT Jos. 2, 19 al., and the phrase in i Ki, 8, 32 and often in Ez. IB'Nia 13^1 T\Tb. 204 The First Book of Samuel, ?''3''3N3 *13T'l] 'and spake concertting Abigail/ i.e. (as the phrase was understood to mean) asked her in marriage. Cf. Cant. 8, 8. 42. DD^'nn] Read T\2% (the n dittographed from nTiiyj): the word must be the predicate — she rode, and they walked in attendance behind her. nbjib] is not quite the same as "'7J13 &. 27 : the ^ is the so-called b of norm, ' going according to hex foot,' i.e. guided by her foot=attending upon her. Comp. for this sense of brh Gen. 30, 30 hath blessed thee "hyh at w)'/o^/= whithersoever I turned (RV.) ; 33, 14 and I will lead on softly n^SPJon byy? according to the pace of the cattle {Lex. 516^). 43- Ahino'am is mentioned before Abigail in 27, 3. 30, 5; she was also the mother of David's firstborn, Amnon (II 3, 2) ; so probably he married her shortly before Abigail, as the Heb. here permits (not '"[ np''1, but , , . Hp? DyjTlX HNI). V. 44 hints at the reason why David took now these two wives ; he had been deprived of Michal (18, 27). ^XJ?"iT^] Not the ^NyiT'' in the N. of Palestine, but one in the hill- country of Judah, Jos. 15, 56, evidently not far from Ma'on and Carmel (mentioned there in v. 55, as in v. 2 here). inTlti' D:] The D3 is idiomatic in this phrase, = ' both alike:' Dt. 22, 22. 23, 13. Ru. I, 5. Pr. 17, 15. 20, 10. 12. 44. jn^ PINC'l] ' had g\ver\:' see on 9, 15. "D^d] abridged from ^N^iD^D, II 3, 15. DvJ] The situation of Gallim is not known ; but it was plainly (Is. 10, 30!) a little N. of Jerusalem. 26. I. The V. is largely identical with 23, 19 (where see the note); and the narrative following in ch. 24 exhibits such numerous points of resemblance with ch. 26 that the two have been held by many scholars to be in reality different versions of the same incident. If this opinion be correct, the more original version will be that contained in the present chapter. nnyajn] Gibeah of Saul, 2\ miles N. of Jerusalem (see on 9, i). r\V'2nr\ nynn] Perhaps the long ridge called Dahr el-KolA, ^\ miles E. of Ziph, 10 miles W. of 'En-gedi, and i mile N. of Wady Malaky (on 23, 26), ' running out of the Ziph plateau (see on 23, 14) towards the Dead Sea desert, or Jeshimon ' (Conder, T.W. 244; Buhl, 97). XXV. 39-XXVI. 7 205 'sO'^VT] ^:3 7y] ' in front o/i\\Q Desolation ' (see on 23, 24), i.e. over- looking it, which, if the 'hill of Hachilah' is rightly identified, it would do. The passage is one which shews that ""JD hv does not always mean East 0/ {com^. on 15, 7): cf. Lex. 818^. 2. Ti^i] Cf. 23, 20, Ziph is actually higher than Tell el-FQl (see on 23, 19); but there is a descent from Tell el-Ful (2754 ft.) to Jerusalem (2593 ft.), and from Hebron (3040 ft.) to Ziph (2882 ft.); so no doubt 'came down' is used with reference to one of these. On the fj^T "13*10, see on 23, 15. 3. Saul encamped, near the ordinary route, on the particular hill of Hachilah ; David remained somewhere in the wilderness around it. aii'V] not ' abode ' (EVV.) but ' was abiding.' So v. ^^ 'was lying,' and 'were encamping;' v. 7 'was lying asleep,' and 'were lying.' The reader of the English versions, till he refers to the Hebrew, does not realize how much is lost by the frequent rendering of the participle by a finite verb. 4. |"iD3"?n] The same somewhat singular expression in 23, 23. Here, however, immediately following N3, the name of a place is expected, — and the more so, since the text, as it stands, adds nothing to what has been already stated in 3^, — unless indeed it can be argued that yiM marks any more certain knowledge than Ni"*!. It is probable therefore that p33 here is the corruption of the name of some locality, though what that may have been it is impossible to conjecture. LXX €K KctXa, as We. points out, is too vague. 5. i'ayoa] See on 17, 20. 6. Tinn "I^OTIN] This Ahimelech is not mentioned elsewhere. For his nationality, cf. 'nnn nniN. TT" ""O] David must therefore have been in some part of the wilder- ness that was higher than n^''3nn. ■•JX] For the pron. in such a sentence, cf. on \1 21, 6 (p. 352). 7. iriw'Xio] prop, the parts at or about the head, hence construed in the accus. adverbially (GK. § 11 8*?), like ni3''3D and the corresponding vni^nD, Ru. 3, 8. 14. So Gen. 28, 11 vn:;'N">JD nc''*') ///. and placed (it) at the parts about his head. 2o6 The First Book of Samuel, 8. We have had before i8, ii Tpni nn3 n2N* ; 19, 10 JT'^na ni3n^ "VpD *n"l3 to smite with the spear into David and into the wall, i.e. to pin him with the spear to the wall. The analogy of these passages shews that here 'p^{31 is co-ordinate not with rTiJIin, but with the suif. in 1J3N ' (We.). ps3 and the sufiix are, however, very unequally coupled; and it is better to read with Krenkel {ZAW. 1882, 310) pN3 in'':nl ' with his spear {v. 7) to the earth ' (so Sm. Now. Dh. Ehrl.). With 1^ nj^TN i6) cf. II 20, 10. 9. npJi . . . n7K' "'O] npJl is the pf. with waw con v., and n^{i> has a modal force (cf. the pf. in Gen. 21, 7. {J/. 11, 3. 60, 11 = 108, 11): ' who is to have put forth his hand, etc., ajid be guiltless ? ' The sentence is of a type that must be carefully distinguished from that of Job 9, 4 D^f n yh^ ntJ'pn ^O who (ever) hardened himself [as a fact] against Him, and escaped sound? Dt. 5, 23 (it is cited wrongly in GK. § 1 12b). Comp. Tenses, §§ 19. 2; 115 (p. 115). Still, in spite of the parallels, it is probable that a '' has fallen out after ''0, and that we should read rh^'' ^^3. 10. DN "i::] i^ here cannot, as often, introduce the terms of the oath ; for this (with DX following) would yield a sense the very opposite of what is required, viz. Surely Y. will not smite him ! DN ""J must therefore be construed together, though not in the manner adopted by Th. Ke. {^Except Y. smite him, or his day come, etc., far be it from me to put forth my hand against him ') ; for this both implies an un-Hebraic inversion of principal and subordinate clause, and yields an improbable sense : David cannot have meant to imply that if one of these contingencies happened to Saul, he would then be ready to put forth his hand against him. Either DX ''3 must be under- stood to have the force of surely (as above, 21, 6), or (Ges. Dr. Weir) the negative (such as usually precedes it) may be supposed to be suppressed : (minime ego Saulum caedam,) sed Deus caedat eum : cf. II 13, 33 Kt. (minime,) j^(/ solus Amnon mortuus est. 13SJ''] by some sudden stroke, cutting him off prematurely (25, 38. II 12, 15. 2 Ch. 13, 20 al.), 1DV denoting what would be considered a natural close to his life. nSDJ] not ' perish' (EVV.), but be swept away; see on 12, 25, and cf. 27, I. XXVI. 8-1 6 207 nT non7D3] The position of ncn^D2 gives freshness of expression, and force, to the new alternative. In Ti^ David has in his mind a combat with the Philistines. 11. For nin^D, see on 24, 7 ; and for n"7^p, on 12, 23. inL"NiD] The accus. of place (v. 7), after ItJ'N, as Dt. 17, 14 It^K ^nU''3D : cf. Qor. 42, 5 l^JIi °jJ^ whoever is round about it, 19, 5. i:b"n3^Jl] 'and let w?, gel us away:' so 12 nrh la!'"'! {Lex. 515^). 12. ''riti'»^l^] Read '•riB'NlQrp : a tt has fallen out between the two others. The * at the end, if correct, would be the one instance in OT., parallel to "'D^^^ , of that letter attached to the st. c. of the fern. pi. before an independent word (otherwise only before suffixes) ; Stade, § 330^; GK. § 878. But LXX has o-vrov: so We. may be right in arguing that 'the ^ at the end confirms the reading Vri-'NIDO of LXX, instead of ^is't^ TlC'NIDD ' (so Sm. Bu. Dh.). In this case, of course, the anomaly will disappear. ^"^ niDTin] a slumber so profound and unusual that it was regarded as sent directly from Yahweh. Cf. wrb^ m"in in 14, 15. 13. "I3yri] to the side across (cf 14, i. 4. 40); i.e. to the opposite side of the valley at the foot of the hill (y, 3). 'y\ m] a circ. clause (Tenses, § 161 ; GK. § 156c). Cf. Gen. 12, 8. 14. nN"]p nriN '•»] in the third ps. comp. Is. 50, 9 ^jy^c^-c Nin-iD ; Job 13, 19 "'^oy T"i^ N'ln"''^ {Tenses, § 201. 2): unless I am mistaken, no parallel in the second ps. occurs in the OT. (the sentence Is. 51, 12 is framed differently). 15. ^X mDw'] In z;. 16 7y. An unusual construction: yet see Pr, 6, 22 ■j"'7y "iDwTi 1335^3, and {of watching in a hostile sense) II 11, 16. (In i/^. 59, 10 nncTN yba vy, as in v. 18, must certainly be read.) 16. 'J1 ab -|:^'XJ See on II 2, 5. D3"'nN] the plur. of ' excellence ' (GK. § 124'); cf. Gen. 42, 30. nnsv nxi] If the text is correct, nx must be explained either as marking the fresh subject (see on 17, 34), or (Sm.) as an accus. under the governing force of ''S : but the last ex pi. especially is unsatis- factory. We expect either nxi . . . ns* or ■'Nl . . . ^X. As the time is night, nx is improbable (We.) after nxi; it seems best, therefore, to regard nxi as an error for ''XI, due to a scribe influenced involun- tarily by the recollection of nx"l at the beginning of the sentence. 2o8 The First Book of Samuel, So GK. § 117"^ 71. (the citation of the verse in § 117' must be due to an oversight). 17. vIp] In Hebrew, the repetition of a word is a mode of signifying assent (i Ki. 21, 20) : LXX, for "iplp, express ']^3y, which is used for the same purpose, as II 9, 2, cf. v. 6 "inny rijn. 15, 15. The one is thus just a synonym of the other : ' the more courtly ' — that of LXX [cf 27, 5 in lieu of the pron.] — 'is the less original' (We.). 18. nyi "'T'iTIDl] The order is idiomatic : cf. 20, 10. II 19, 29. 24, 13; I Ki. 12, 16. Jer. 2, 5. Qoh. 11, 2. Est. 6, 3 (^Lex. 552^). 19. nmo HT] Cf. Gen. 8, 21 -"'' HTI, followed however by nn flN niT'Jn. Dr. Weir writes: '^1), perhaps KT ^s Am. 5, 22. Jer. 14, 12. Mai. I, 10.' On nariDn, cf on 2, 36. '31 "I^ "itDxb] For the god of the country, according to ancient ideas, could be properly worshipped only in his own land : hence banishment was equivalent to being told to go and serve foreign gods. Cf. Hos. 9, 3. D^ins DTI^n] With the possible exception of Ex. 23, 13, probably the earliest occurrence of this afterwards common Deuteronomic expres- sion (see LOT. p. 92, edd. 6-8, p. 99 ; or Deut. p. Ixxviii). 20. '•"'' ''iD n:3D] Cf T:''y *ij:o Am. 9, 3. i/^. 31, 23. "inx :^'y■l^ ns] For ns*, cf on 9, 3. nns* cyia appears, however, to be derived here from 24, 15: LXX express ''tJ'S?, — no doubt rightly: for (i) the comparison within a comparison (to seek 2, flea, as when one hunts a partridge) is not probable; and (2) MT. agrees but imperfectly with clause (?,— the ground (13) for n:»"iX ^DT 72'' i?N being only fully expressed in the reading of LXX, ' for the king of Israel is come out to seek my life.' ^111''] sc. ^'t^'^ (on 16, 4). The art. in N~lpn is generic, such as is often found in comparisons, where a class, not a particular individual, is naturally referred to (GK. § i26l'0): so II 17, 10 rv'\^r[ 3^3: Jud. 8, 18'' i^nn '•33 nxn3; 14, 6 ''1?n WS; i Ki. 14, 15 m:^ nc'N3 D"'rD3 T\:i\>n; Nu. n, 12 \>yr\ ns |cxn ^^^ -ic\v3, etc. Klo. for "1tJ*X3 would read "1^33, — 'like a griffon-vulture (see on II i, 23), (which) pursues a partridge on the mountains,' — which is adopted by Sm. Bu. The construction is common in poetry (e. g. Dt. 32, 11. \p. 42, 2 : Lex. 454*) ; but in prose comparisons are expressed either by 3 with the inf. (as Jud. 14, 6, cited XXVI. I J— XXVII 209 above), or by n:i'ND (see ib.)—\.e. in the present case, NIpnTIS* ItJ'Jn P|n"\'' ^B'NO D"'"in3. LXX KaOuJi KaTaStwKci 6 vvKTiKupa^ (v rots vpeatv, cited by Klo., is not evidence that LXX read ^li'iD : vvKxiKopa^ corresponds here to NIpH, and repre- sents DiS {o%vl) in Lev. 11, 17. \p. 107, 6; and in Dt. 14, i7t some other bird, hut not the "1C3. It is also a question, though it must be left to a naturalist to answer it, whether the "ICJ, or griflfon-vulture, being a carrion-feeding bird, would * pursue a partridge on the mountains : ' Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 172 ff., speaks of its keen sight, and of its swooping down from afar upon a carcase (Job 39, 29 f.), but says nothing of its pursuit of the living animal. 2 1. 'y\ mp''] Cf. 2 Ki. I, 13. 14; also 1/^. 72, 14. 116, 15. njC'Sl] Cf. 14, 24 LXX. Lev. 4, 13. Ez. 45, 20 al. nSD nnin nr^-XI 'nb^on] The accents treat nain as qualifying bolh the preceding words. 22. "i^cn n^Jnn mn] Kt. 'behold the spear, O king!' Qre 'behold the spear of the king,' which is better adapted to the context, n being repeated accidentally from njn. 23. B^'^Np] The art. has a distributive force: i Ki. 8, 39. 18, 4. Gen. 41, 48^. Ijn] nj3 would be more agreeable with general custom (comp. on 19, 9): for the cases in which T3 occurs without a suffix are mostly those in which the reference is general (II 23, 6. Is. 28, 2. Job 34, 20 : similarly "I'D Pr. 6, 5), not, as here, specific. However, it is possible that T'i may have been here written intentionally, for the purpose of avoiding the assonance (which is here an awkward one) with the following ^T. i Ki. 20, 42; Ez. 12, 7 (though here LXX, Pesh. omit Tl); 2 Ch. 25, 20 would support the text. But some 50 MSS. have n"'3 ; and it is better, with Weir and most moderns, to read this. 25. ntJ'y] used with a pregnant force, such as is more common in poetry: Is. 10, 13. i//^. 22, 32. 37, 5. Ez. 20, 9. 14. 22 {^Lex. 794** 4). by\T\ by d:i] Cf. i Ki. 22, 22 ^jdid dji. 27 — 31. David seeks refuge in the counlry of the Philistines with Achish. The Philistines resolve to attack Israel ; their army advances to Apheq. David is released from the necessity of fighting against his countrymen through the opportune suspicions of the Philistine lords: his vengeance on the Amaleqites who had 1365 ^ 2IO The First Book of Samuel, smitten Ziqlag. Saul consults the witch of 'En-dor. Death of Saul and fonathan on Mount Gilboa' . 27, I. ni? ^n] Gen. 8, 21. 24, 45; and with h)3 = ^X ch. i, 13. nSDN] 12, 25 (see note); 26, 10. nna D^"*] ma unemphatic as Gen. 33, 13; and (of the past) ch. 9, 15. (Not as Is. 9, 13 al. a single day.) '':i ID 2)D "h pN] can only be rendered, * I have no good : for (=but) I must escape into,' etc. The first clause is, however, harshly and abruptly expressed; LXX have ovk ean /jlol ayaOoy eac fiT) aoiOS), i.e. 'I have no good t3?BX DN ^3 except I escape,' etc., which is preferable. ""J^DD K^N13l] a pregnant construction, occurring with this verb only here, but analogous to that of t^"'"inn, noticed on 7, 8. 2. na] If Gath was at Tell es-Sdfiyeh (see on 6, 17), some 28 miles NW. of the presumable site of Hachilah (see on 26, i). 3. JT'^rDn^n] LXX ■'i'Dnan, in agreement with 30, 5. II 2, 2. 4. fjOV xb"!] So Kt., the impf. having a frequentative force, as 2, 25 (see on i, 7). The Qre substitutes the more usual tense ^p^ N?1 (^5) 35 ?■ Jud. 13, 21 al.) : comp. a similar case in Jos. 15, 63. 5. S*:] NJ belongs logically to lirT" ; but it is thrown back into the protasis and attached to DN, as regularly in this formula (Gen. 18, 3 ; 33, 10 al.), for the purpose of indicating as early as possible that the speech is of the nature of an entreaty. 6. 3?pv] Supposed by Conder to be Zuheliqeh, 22 miles SW. of Tell es-Safiyeh : but the consonants, except 7 , do not correspond phonetically, so that the identification is very uncertain. p?] p~bv is regularly used, when the origin of a name or custom is assigned (Gen. 10, 9. 11, 9 etc. : Lex. 487) ; hence the p bv "VID (see on 12, 5), though not supported, so far as appears, by any MS., is prompted by a sound literary instinct, and may be correct. 7. U^iyin nymxi Ct^'^'] D^D\ by usage, suggesting a year : see i, 3, and, more distinctly, Jud. 17, 10 D"'??'!' ^DD mtrj?; Lev. 25, 29. 8. ?y''1] Either into the higher ground on which the tribes raided by David lived (which would suit Gezer) ; or, in the uncertainty whether this ground was higher than Ziqlag, in a military sense (Now.), of an attack in general, as Jud. 20, 18. Is. 21, 2, Nah. 2, 2. XXVII. 1-8 211 (Qre nuni) ni:ni nVJ'jn] LXX have Travra tov r€o-«/3i, reading, therefore, only one name (viz. mC'jn; see Jos. 13, 11. 13 LXX), so that the two are presumably doublets. As the better-known Geshur, on the Easi of the upper Jordan, is evidently out of the question, the name here and Jos. 13, 2, if the text is correct, is probably that of a small tribe between the Philistines and Egypt (Bu, Dhorme, Kenn.). We. Now., preferring the other doublet, read "^"W^, i.e. the Canaanites who till the time of Solomon occupied Gezer (Jud, i, 29 ; i Ki. 9, 16), 1 2 miles ENE. of Tell es-Safiyeh : but this appears to be too far to the N. Hommel {Anc. Heh. Trad. 242 f.) would read both here and Jos. 13, 2 '"lIB'Xn (cf. Gen. 25, 3 : Homm. 238-240 D'lC'Nl, corresponding to the "11CNX mentioned in two Minaean inscriptions as living apparently near Egypt (p. 249 f.), and Gaza (p. 252) : but that N should have become corrupted into 3 in two passages is hardly likely. 'J1 T\\1U^ T\ir\ ""3] Very difficult. In the first place, the fem. is extremely anomalous. If the text be sound, this must be explained on the analogy of the usage noticed on 17, 21, by which sometimes a country, or the population of a country, is construed as a fem. : but no case occurs so extreme as the present, in which the fem. is used with immediate reference to a gentile name, expressed in the masc. And even the poetical use of n^K'i* (noticed ihid}^ is not extended to the plural. Nevertheless, as the text stands, nothing remains but to explain the passage in accordance with this poetical usage, and to render (with We.) : ' For those were the populations of the land from ' etc., — the gender of 'isn being naturally determined by that of the predicate (m^'C''') following. But this extension of a purely poetical usage is extremely improbable : and what we should expect is simply 'ji jnsn "•nti'V r\'Cir\ •'3. In the words which follow, -I'li'x ':") xhy^'O, there is a further difficulty. "]NU is used regularly to denote the direction in which a land or tract of country extends (15, 7 al. ; similarly in ^SU ly Jud. 6, 4 al.) ; hence (since ' as thou comest to the land which is of old ' yields no suitable sense) it follows almost of necessity that in D^iyo must lie concealed the definition of the limit in the opposite direction. LXX in Cod. B exhibits a doublet twice over ((xtto dvrjKovTwv [apparently := Qpi'Pj r} ciTro TeXaiJuj/ovp p 2 212 The First Book of Samuel, [= D?y again + 11C'] TCTeixto-fjia'Mv [clearly a second representative of "IIK' zval/J) ; but the reading TeXa/A, found in many cursives ^ in place of TcXa/ji, points to OptDjp for oVy^ — ' for those were the populations inhabiting the land which is /"rom Telam as thou goest to Shur, even unto the land of Egypt.' From Jos. 15, 24 it appears that Telam (pointed there D^^) was a place in the Negeb of Judah (see on v. 10), seemingly towards the border of Edom : in ch. 15, 4 it is named as the spot where Saul assembled his forces before attacking the Amale- qites; so that it would seem to satisfy sufficiently all the conditions required of the present verse. In form, the sentence, as thus restored, will almost exactly resemble Gen. 10, 19; comp. 25, 18. Respecting niC', see on 15, 7. ■ 9. np7l , . . nani] In a frequentative sense, describing David's custom whenever he engaged in one of these raids. Notice the impff. interchanging here (n'-n'' X^) and in v. 11. EVV. {smote, saved, etc)' fail to bring this out, either here or in z^. 11. N3>l] :^hrl. N?;i: cf, 11 T\l N>nn^. 10. DnDt^'^ 7N] Either we must suppose that a word has dropped out, and read ''»"?^ with LXX (eVi rlva. ;), Vulg., or, which is perhaps better, we must read |N (see 10, 14) with Targ. Pesh. {)^, W*]). The text is untranslateable. It is a sinj^ular fallacy to argue that because ^^ in Greek may ask a question, therefore bX in Hebrew may do the same : for the two words are not in the least parallel. M^ is a particle expressing generally the idea oi subjective negation, from which its interrogative force is at once readily deduced (/<^ Te'ei/77«6r'; = 'he is not dead, I suppose?'' — implying that a satisfying answer is expected). ^N has no such general signification, but is simply a particle of dissuasion or prohibition. In other words, the interrogative use of \x.t\ is dependent upon an element in its signification, which does not attach to the particle 7X at all. 333] prop, the dry country, the root 21J3 (n''33, »a^) to lie dry is in use in Aramaic (e.g. Gen. 8, 13 Onq. x^D niJi). Hence, from the dry country /car' lioyy\v being on the South of Palestine, the word acquired generally the sense of South, and geographically was applied in particular to a district in the S. of Judah (see Gen. 12, 9 RV. • TeXa/x-^ovp XI. 44, 55, 71, 106, 120, 134, 144, 158, 245; TeAaifoup 29; re Aapiipovp 64, 119, 244 ; re Aa/^jpovv 74 (from Holmes and Parsons). Section of NORTHERN PALESTINE 35°30' of Galilee? K^frKmna Cath Hepfref?^-ifefe > I By pertsission of the Palestine Exploration Fund and of Messrs. John Bartholomew & Co. XXVII. g—XXVIIL 3 213 inarg, \ Jos. 15, 21-32, where the cities in it are enumerated. In RV. in this special geographical sense, always with a capital S : e. g. Jos. 15, 19. Is. 21, i). See Negeb in EB.; and H.G. p. 2783". Here other districts in the same neighbourhood are called the Negeb of the Yerahme'elite, and the Negeb of the Qenite, from the names of the clans settled upon them (cf. 30, 29 'the cities of the Yerah- me'elite and of the Qenite'): in 30, 14 also we have the Negeb of the Cherethites, and the Negeb of Caleb; and in Jud. i, 16 (MT.) the Negeb of 'Arad (9 miles S. of Ma'on). Yerahme'el was the name of a clan allied to that of the Calebites (cf on 25, 3): both were afterwards absorbed into the tribe of Judah ; see i Ch. 2, 9 [read CaleF\. 25-33. 42- The Qenites were connected with the 'Amaleqites, 15, 6; Jud. I, 16 (see on ch. 15, 6) : cf EB. i. 130. 11. The athnah would be better placed at Til, what follows ('i1 lOS'C'D n3l) being obviously no part of the speech, but the remark of the narrator (so Now.), It must be admitted, however, that nn rwV ns, and ':i IDDCJ'O nai, naturally go together: it is better, therefore, either to omit "idn!? (Vulg. Sm. Dh. Ehrl.) or to read for it K'"'3N^ (Klo. Bu.): ':i r\^'l] /;a ns'lpj? ^!) npi nnnp i?iN^. vyo id] Cf. z'. 16. Dyo is, however, more natural in this con- nexion (16, 14. 18, 12): for in Jud. 16, 19. 20 the use of ^J?D is evidently determined by the fact that Samson's strength was regarded as resting upon him in his hair, in Nu. 14, 19 (cf. Neh. 9, 19) it is determined similarly by the figure of the shade, and in ch. 16, 23 by the common thought of a spirit coming 07t a person (see v. 16). Here probably by denotes the idea of protecting accompaniment (cf. i/^. no, 5 irn'' ^l?; 121, 5 •]:^D'' T ^y); and byo no expresses the cessation of this. byO is used in several idiomatic applications ; not only as signifying from attendance on (comp. on 13, 8. 17, 15), but also/r^';;? attachment to (Jer. 2, 5 ^byoipn-i; 32,40 ^byrD-iiD ^nbb; Ez. 6, 9 ^byro id onb ; 8,6; 14, 5; 44, 10); from companionship with (Job 19, 13) ; from adhesion to (2 Ki. 17, 21 ; Is. 7, 17 ; 56, 3 ; Hos. 9, I ; and twice, for the more usual |!D, in the phrase JllNtin ?yD "ID 2 Ki. 10, 31. 15,18) ; from standing over or beside (Gen. 17, 22. 35, 13 : cf. 18, 3. 42, 24); from being a burden upon (see on 6, 5. 20), esp. of an army retiring from a country, or raising a siege (see the passages from 2 Sam. 1-2 Ki. cited on ch. 6, 20; and add II 10, 14. Jer. 21, 2. 37, 5, 9. 11). r\vppii'\'] Very anomalous: Ew. § 228c; Stade, § 132; GK. § 48<1; Konig, i. 608, who suggests that the -^ may be due to dissimilation, after the preceding unusual -^; cf. on 21, 2. Read HNnpSV. 16. Tiy >n''')] Is there a Hebrew word iy with the signification adversary or €?iemy ? The common Heb. "li? (root "^l^) corresponds to Arabic JJ to harm (Qor. 2, 96. 3, 107, etc.): and this (according to rule-) corresponds to the (isolated) Aramaic "IJ? Dan. 4, 16, The same word may also possibly be found in \p. 139, 20 — the Psalm is a late one, and is marked by several other Aramaisms — but this cannot be affirmed with certainty, the verse being a difficult one, and * The supposition that the form is 'conflate/ from XlpXI , and nnpXI, is not probable : ' and I met ' does not suit the context, nor does"^ Nip in' 'Qal mean to ' meet.' * See on 1, 6 (p. 9 footnote). XXV III. 1S-17 217 probably corrupt. At any rate, philology forbids imperatively the assumption of a Hehrav word "iJ? adversary, the equivalent of 1^ ^ Can, however, a sense, suitable to the context, be rendered probable for IJI, from any other source? {a) Symm. renders oi'tiXt^Xos aov, and in Arabic ,Lfr (vied, i) means actually to be jealous or a rival (.a.Ai = t^3i2 Ex. 20, 5 Saad.; i« jLiJ = ^riKovTi 1 Cor. 12, 31 Erpen.). Still there is no other trace of this root in Hebrew : nor would the idea of Yahweh's becoming Saul's rival be probable or suitable. Kp') Ges. Keil seek to explain "ly by a reference to Arabic Ic {incd. M)ferbuit (one of many meanings), it?ipeUim fecit, spec, excursione hostili adortus fuit (aliquem), IV (Lane) JLc jlil to make a raid ot predatory incursion upon (comp. 13, 17 note) : is .Lc a raid or hostile incursion : hence, the cognate subst., it is supposed, ' would properly have the sense of aestus (sc. doloris, curae, soUicitudinis), whence in Hebrew "l^y Hos. 11, 9 aestus irae ; Jer. 15, 8 aestus doloris [this explanation of l^y is, however, very uncertain: see Lex. 735''; and my Jeremiah, p. 360 f]. But the sense of hostility expressed by the Arabic root is, it will be observed, a special and derived one : is it likely, or indeed credible, that from a root meaning ferbtiit a simple participial formation should have acquired the definite sense of etumy ? The etymology proposed is well intended : but it cannot be said to have probability in its favour. It follows that if "iiy has here the sense of Ihy enemy, it must be an example of a strong and pronounced Aramaism, such as, in pre- sumably early Hebrew, is in the highest degree improbable. Only two alternatives are open to us. Either "]"iy is an error of transcrip- tion for ^j^.if ^ (cf. in that case, for the thought, Lam. 2, 4 ; Is. 63, 10), or, with LXX and Pesh., J^P"Dy "''"T'l 'and is become on the side of thy neighbour ' must be read (cf. Vl with reference to David, v. 17, and 15, 28, and for the thought 18, 12 "ID ^iNtJ' oyoi itsy nin^ HM ••3). nyn ny is accepted by most moderns (Th, Hitzig, Noldeke, Gralz, Reinke, Kp., Dr. Weir [' LXX seems to be right ']), Now. Dh. : Klo. Sm. Bu. prefer "["iv. 17. 1^ '«""' K^yi] 'And Y. hath wrought _/or himself, according as' etc. Or, if ^y-l Dy be adopted in v. 16, the suffix may be referred naturally to ^y-| {for him). However, the point of the ' Nor can this be the meaning of "ly in Mic. 5, 13 (AV.) or Is. 14, 21. ^ It is possible that this was read by Symmachus. At least a.vr[^r)\o'i as used elsewhere in the Greek Versions expresses the root "l~llf : Lev. 18, 18 LXX ; ch. i, 6 LXX (Luc). 2, 32 Aq. (but ^. 139, 20 Aq. for T'ly). 2i8 77?^ First Book of Samuel, sentence lies in what is done to Saul, rather than what is done to David : so, in all probability, '^^ to thee, expressed by 5 MSS., LXX, Vulg., is the original reading (so Sm. Bu. Now. Dh.). With 17b comp. 15, 28. 1 8b. For the order of words, see Tenses, § 208 (i). So v. 19^. 19. In MT. clauses a and c are almost identical; and the verse is decidedly improved by the omission of one of them, and by the adoption in b of the reading of LXX, viz. D'J'Qi ^^V ^^311 nriN ino 'J1 D3, i.e. (immediately after v. 18) ' To-morrow thou and thy sons with thee will be fallen ; yea, also, the camp of Israel will Yahweh give into the hand of the Philistines.' As We. remarks, a is out of place where it stands, neither Da nor ^r^y being properly understood, until after it has been said that Saul himself has fallen. 20. "inD''l] LXX (.cnT€va-€v, not only here, but also mv. 21 for 7n33 ; so doubtless they read the same in both verses. A man would not (actively) ' hasten ' to fall down : ''HZiM is thus more suitable than "IGP^I- "in^M (Klo. Sm. Dh.) does not seem to express the right nuatice. 21. ''D33 '"C^s: D^jrxi] 19, 5. 23. 1Y"lS^l] '}*"1D is translated pressed in II 13, 25. 27 and urged in 2 Ki. 5, 23, but elsewhere break forth, burst forth, etc. Ought we not to read l^'D?' (Dr. Weir). So 20 MSS. (de Rossi, App. p. 39), Sm. Now. Dh. ; Bu. (either so, or }*"1D a ' Nebenstamm ' to nxs). 24. . . . nC'xh] Cf. on II 3, 7. P2"ID] 'four times, always connected with i^jy: Jer. 46, 21. Am. 6, 4 p2~iD "JIDD Dvjy. Mai. 3, 20. The root is not found elsewhere in Hebrew, but in Arabic JoJ fir miter alligavit' (Dr. Weir). insni] for inSNni : cf. on 15, 5 ; and GK. § 68^. 29, I. pas] Probably (see on 4, i) some place in the Plain of Sharon, commanding the entrance to the Plain of Dothan(f. 32° 24' N.), and so the route up to Jezreel and Shunem (28, 4). D"'3n] ' were encamping ; ' not ' pitched ' (EVV.), which would be ^3n*1. Contrast 4, i (^JH). ^xyiT'in ^t^'^< pya] Generally supposed to be 'Ain fdlud, at the foot of Mt. Gilboa', on the N., if miles ESE. of Jezreel, and looking across the Vale of Jezreel to Solam, the Philistine position (28, 4), 4 miles N. by W., and 568 ft. above it. 'Jezreel' will denote XXVIII. iS—XXIX. s 219 here, not the town, but the Vale (31, 7). As Ehrl. remarks, however, if py means a spring, Heb. idiom requires ^y (Gen. 16, 7. Jud. 7, i al.), not 1, so that a genitive would seem to have fallen out (cf. pT^ pVIl II 17, 17). 'En-dor, however (LXX, cod. A and other MSS.), on the NW. slope of J. Nabi Dahi, and 4 miles behind the Philistine position, is too far off to be probable. 2. D^^y (twice)] were passing by. The participles suggest the picture of a muster or review of troops taking place. niND?] according to, by hundreds: 7 as II 18, 4. i Ki. 20, 10 xihwh. Jos. 7, 14 Dn3j^. 3. CO' nt] not ' these days ' (EVV.), except as a paraphrase : HT is here, as in many similar phrases, D^.py? I^.t, D*J?ys nb'y riT, etc. an adverb, meaning properly here (cf. "^.^3) : see Lex. 26 1^. So in D''JK' nt. D''JC is, however, strangely indefinite ; and as D''J3* suggests a. year (on i, 3), it is probable that Q^CJ^ two years should be read, with LXX (Sevrepov Itos), Bu. Sm. Now. Kitt. Ehrl, 1?DJ] LXX adds tt/dos /ac = vJ? or vy, which is needed. Fa/ting gives no sense : falling to me agrees with the usage of (^y) 7X ^DJ elsewhere (Jer. 21, 9. 37, 13 al.) to fall over to = to desert to. The nearer definition cannot, as Keil supposes, be supplied from the context. (Dr. Weir agrees.) 4. it] It is remarkable that in v. 9 D/y is used for exactly the same movement. It seems that the narrator must here allow the Philistines to speak from the Israelite point of view (cf. v. 6, where Achish is represented as swearing by Fahweh), who would ' go down ' from the mountainous country of Judah to fight against the Philistines in their plains, and so might say nDn^D2 '^'V quite generally (cf. 30. 24)- iDtJ'?] ' as a thwarter or opposer,' viz. of another man's purposes ; cf. the same word in II 19, 23; i Ki. 11, 14. 23. 25; also Nu. 22, 22. 32. I Ki. 5, 18. So ptrn is in the OT. the name of the angel, whose function it is to oppose men in their pretensions to a right standing with God (see A. B. Davidson's note on Job i, 6 in the Camb. Bible ; and the writer's note on Zech. 3, \ in the Century Bible). 5. See 1 8, 7; and cf. 21, n. 220 The First Book of Samuel, 6. '•3] after the oath, as 14, 39. 7. Dl^ca 1^] as II 15, 27. The usual expression is uh^\>. 8. "'n"'L*'y riD '•3] ""^ states the reason for a suppressed (Why do you say this?): it recurs in a similarly worded expostulation, i Ki. 11, 22. 2 Ki. 8, 13. 'TT'^n "it:*N D"i''J3] As We. remarks, we should expect naturally either ••n^^n nv"g (Jer. 36, 2 : cf. II 22, i. Dt. 4, 15), or, as would be more usual, ^nrn ni»e {v, 6, ^/z. 7, 2. 8, 8. II 13, 32 etc.), or (Di*0"i'?) Di*n» W^n n^X (II 19, 25. I Ki. 8, 16. 2 Ki. 2 1, 15). However, Dr may have been conceived as being in the construct state before "itt'N (GK. § 130^), and so defined. At least TC'X DT' recurs similarly, Jer. 38, 28, and (in late Hebrew) Neh. 5, 14. But Dl'nn would certainly be better. Ticn^Jl] The ivaiv being consecutive, the tone should properly be viilrd ^rUDii^JI : but it is held back by the distinctive accent zdqef, as happens occasionally (Dt. 2, 28: Ez. 3, 26: Tenses, § 104). As a rule, only atJmah and soph-pasiiq imply a sufficient pause thus to hold back the tone of i and 2 sing, pf with waxv consec. 9. D\n^N "INvD^J The same comparison, in popular speech, II 14, 17. 19, 27. n^y^J Here (contrast v. 4) the Philistines speak from the point of view which would be natural to them, when they were invading the high central ground of Canaan (e. g. Jud. 15, 9. 10), cf. v. ii^. 10. 'jl n2yi "ipaa DD^'H nnyi] 'And now, rise up early in the morning, and also the servants,' etc. The text may in a measure be defended by 25, 42. Gen. 41, 27. Nu. 16, 2^. 18^; but the sentence halts considerably, and the omission of the pronoun before nnyi is contrary to standing Hebrew usage, when the verb is in the imperative (e.g. Gen. 7, i. Ex. 11, 8. 24, i). LXX, Vulg. express rightly HFIX before ''nayi. The only parallel to the present passage would be Jer. 19, i ; but there also it can scarcely be doubted that the reading of LXX is what Hebrew idiom requires, viz. ''JptD ^^\i^\ 'y\ Dyn . In this verse, further, clauses a and b are nearly identical : but, as We. observes, the repetition of the same thought would become perfectly natural, if only words of different import separated the two similar clauses. Such words are expressed in LXX (after XXIX. 6— XXX. 3 221 ins), viz. Koi iropivecrOe eh tov tottov ov KaTeo-nycra vyu.as ckci- koI Aoyov Aoi/xov /A-^ ^■^s €V KapSui (TOV, oTi dyaOo'i crii ei'coTrtov ^od = Dv^-H- 3in ^3 "n^D^ja Db'n-b5< byba imi nt:' D^nx "mpsn -IK'S nipisn-^s ^jsb nrx. The sentence is in style and form thoroughly Hebraic, and may well be assumed to have fallen out accidentally in MT. AoLfxos is often the rendering of bvh^ (e. g. 25, 25): for the combina- tion of -|3n and bv^b2 see Dt. 15, 9 (where they occur in apposition). Ehrlich proposes 1i?3n ny 2p (followed by nnN) for -ip33 D2B^n (keeping otherwise jNIT.). ID^l] Unusual. The normal construction would be D^3?l]1 227 -i1S"l (on the analogy of Gen. 33, 13 inrsi ins* DV Dipsni, 44. 22 nryi ntDI V3X, etc.: Tenses, § 149); but cf. 2 Ki. 9, 2. liN* is, of course, the verb: Gen. 44, 3 -ilN* "1p2n ; and, of the eyes, cL 14, 29. II. I^y] Viz. from Apheq in the Sharon [v. 11). ' Jezreel' is here, not the town, but the Vale (as v. i). 30, I. ibp'^] David goes back to the city which Achish had given him ; see 27, 6. ""pb^Vf] Read with LXX pb^V- cf. &. 18; and the note on 15, 6. 33:] Unless (Now.) Tnan or (Ehrl.) nb has fallen out {v. 14), we must read a:in (Bu.), in conformity with usage, except when 233 denotes merely the southern quarter of the compass. 2. na Til's n'^:n ns] Read with LXX (cf, RV.) -nsi D^u'3n-ns* na i:i'N~i'3 : we thus obtain a suitable idea to which to refer the following i?n3-nyi fupo ; see also v. 3 (Dn''n3ni Dn''32'i). B'''S "UT'Dn N^] A circumstantial clause, connected do-wSerws with the clause preceding, and defining /ww n^T"") was effected, viz. (Anglice) 'without slaying any.' Cf. Gen. 44, 4 \h "l''yn nx 1X^' IpTnn; Jer. 7, 26'^; 20, 15b (see RV.): Tenses, § 162; GK. § 156^ 13n3''l] of leading captives, as Is. 20, 4. 3. n3m] without suffix {Tenses, § 135. 6, 2), as v. 16: cf on 10, 11. U'iT:] wi?r^ /a/^'^« captive. nntT is to take captive, n3E'3 to be taken captive : n^3 is to go into exile, n^3n to carry into exile. The distinctien between the two words should be noticed. Though they may be often applied to the same transaction, they denote different aspects of it : n^3 migration from one's own country, exile, n3C^ capture by another, captivity. The rendering of ni^3 in Jud. 18, 30 222 The First Book of Samuel, by * captivity ' (EVV.), instead of ' exile,' has led to strange misunder- standings of the meaning, — as though, for instance, the word referred to the Philistine domination! 6. "rrb ~ivni] The fem. as Jud. lo, 9: cf. Jer. 7, 31 nn^Jy xh >3^ ^y; Mic. 3, 6 HDt^n; Am. 4, 7 (unusual) -i^oon ; \\r. 50, 3 nso myb'J: Ew. § 295a; GK. § 144b This use of the fem., especially with words denoting a mental condition, is particularly common in Syriac : "^ \>Z\:^, "^ \J^, "^ l^T (Noldeke, Syr. Gr. § 254). vpD7 . . . noN'] 'spake of (AV.) stoning him: ' or with the sense of 'thought' (25, 21), as Ex, 2, 14. II 21, 16 "in TWzrh "irDN"'! ; I Ki. 5, 19. 8, 12 : comp. Ez. 20, 8. 13. 21. i/^. 106, 23. h noN in the sense oi coinmand occurs II i, 18. 2, 26: but more frequently in later books, especially in Chronicles, as I 13, 4; 15, 16; Est. I, 17, etc. (comp. Ew. § 338^). mo] 7«//V/(GK. § i5^"«., p. 60), and consequently perf. from "IID, not fem. of the adj. "iD. For the use of the root with B'SJ, cf. on I, 10; and add II 17, 8. Job 7, 11. 10, i. 21, 25. prnnM] i.e. took courage: cf. 4, 9. II 10, 12; and similarly in Qal (Jos. I, 6. 7 al.), and Pi'el, 23, 16 (see note). 8. f)"'"'^] Though n can be dispensed with (11, 12), the parallel IJrC'xn supports the reading P|*nNn (so many MSS.) : cf. 14, 37. 23, 11. nnj] of a marauding or plundering band: see 2 Ki. 6, 23. Hos. 6, 9. LXX here (mis-reading) ycSSoiip : elsewhere rightly Treipar-^piov (Gen. 49, 19 ; »//. 18, 32), or //.ovd^wvot (2 Ki. 5, 2. 6, 23 al.). 9. Ilb'^n bn3] The name has not been preserved : and as the site of Ziqlag is uncertain, and we do not know what the point was which David desired to reach, any identification is very precarious. J/ Ziqlag was at Zuheliqeh (on 27, 6), W. csh-Shert'a, 4 or 5 miles to the S., would no doubt suit : but that is all that we can say. 10. Ilis] only here and v. 21. 12. D-'pD^* . . . nbm] See on 25, 18. inn arm] The spirit (of life), which seemed to have left him, returned, i.e. he revived. So Jud. 15, 19. 13. '\> nny] See on 16, 18. ViW>^ DVn] See on 9, 20. Here Qi^D^ must be understood, or read. 14. ajJ IJDC'D] ?y, which is expressed by LXX, must have acci- XXX. 6-ij 223 dentally dropped out. t3'Li'3, when an object follows, is always construed with py (or the alternative i'N); and here the restoration is still more commended by the two hv following. ^m^n 2JJ] A district in the south of Palestine (see on 27, 10) inhabited by the ^mD, who, from a comparison of v. 16^, appear to have been closely connected with, if not a sub-tribe of, the Philistines. In poetry the name is used synonymously with PhiHstine : Ez. 25, 16. Zeph. 2, 5. A contingent of ''m^n formed afterwards part of David's body-guard, II 8, 18. 15, 18. 20, 7 (cf. OTJC.'' p. 262). It is quite possible that the name may be connected with Crele : the Philistines themselves are expressly stated to have been immigrants from Caphtor, i.e. Crete, Am. 9, 7 (see also Gen. 10, 14, where in accordance with this passage D^inSD riNI should no doubt be transposed so as to precede DTiC'i'D DC'D IS^ IK'N). min^i' ^:^•^<] i.e. the min"- 3J3 of 27, 10. 1?3 23J] mentioned only here. A district of the Negeb, occupied by a detachment of the Caleb-clan (see on 25, 3). 15. '•JTiinn] So V. 16. 16. D''j:ni] Ki. nncca piDnsDi prTani \'''-\p'yo ntoi^a. Whether, however, the sense of dancing is really expressed by the word is very doubtful. Modern lexicographers only defend it by means of the questionable assumption that 3Jn may have had a similar signification to 3in, which, however, by no means itself expresses the sense of to dance, but io make a circle Job 26, 10: in Syriac (PS. col. 1217) circumivit, especially, and commonly, with ^:«, circumivit ut vitarei-=- reveritus est, cavit. The Aram. 33n to dance is of course an altogether different word. It is best to acquiesce in the cautious judgement of Noldeke {ZDMG. 1887, p. 719), who declares that he cannot with certainty get behind the idea of a festal gathering for the common Semitic JH. Here then the meaning will be ' behaving as at a Jn or gathering of pilgrims,' i.e. enjoying themselves merrily. 17. cnin^?] of their following day. The expression is unexampled. Read probably Dn^nn!? (We. Bu. Now. etc.), or (Ehrl.) DD-)n*l, which is better (after D3M, as Jud. i, 17), though it does not explain the h. nyj ^''V(\ used collectively — after the numeral. So n^inn myj Jud. 21, 12; "i.ty 'n^^ I Ki. 20, 16; Jud. 18, II. 17k Cf. on 21, 6. 224 T^^^ First Book of Samuel, 19. b/Cr:;"!] The sJi/^ should stand rather on mini. But probably the word is displaced, and should follow 7y\::\^, as in LXX. Dn^ inp^] The reflexive b, as Gen. 15, 10. Lev. 23, 40. Am. 6, 13; and often in the imper. "I?"np Gen. 6, 21. 14, 21 etc. {Lex. 515^). 20. ':i 1113] The text is evidently in disorder. The least change that will suffice for the requirements of style and sense is to read for ^jsi? i:n3 with Vulg. VJS^ lanj""! 'afid they drave be/ore him that cattle (the cattle viz. named in clause a), and said, This is David's spoil.' But LXX, Vulg. do not express nil after np''1, and for r^l^^r^ Ninn LXX have twi' o-kvXwv i.e. ^^KTi, the variation seeming to shew that both are alternative (false) explicita, added after ViS^ had been corrupted into ''3D?. It is quite possible, therefore, that we should go further, and with We. Now. Dh. read the entire verse thus : in hh^ nr hdn'"! vjd^ i:nyi npnni jx^n-^n-ns inp^i. This text states undoubtedly all that the verse is intended to express, and states it at the same time more naturally and simply than the reading pre- supposed by the Vulg. 21. n'^t^^JXn D'nS'O] 'the 200 men;' cf. Jud. 18, i 7^* : GK. § 134!. nn^K'M] It is better to vocalize, with 6 MSS., LXX, Pesh. Vulg. Bu. Sm. Now. Dh. Dn''"k:"'1 (the subject being David). 'y\ C'J^l] riN can only mean with (on 9, 18), and Dyn can be only the 'people' just mentioned (cl.*^) as being with David. On the other hand, the men left behind would be the ones to ask for the welfare of those who had gone into the battle (We. Sm.); and this agrees with 22, where the men who reply are those with David. The context requires imperatively ^'h^ DH^ "l/NtTM Dyn ^5^ 'lt^»:''1 (Ehrl., with We, Bu. al.). in is the false ' explicitum ' of an original ^V'\ = 1t^•3^1 (Introd. § 5. i): "itJ^ri is the natural sequel of 21b nn nsip^ INVI : for ns* LXX have cw?, and 7 MSS. bn: LXX have also rjpwT-rjaav for ^NiJ>^1. 22. bv^by\ yi] For the adj. + subst. (GK. § 131^), cf Dt. 25, 15. ■•cy] The group regarded as a unity, and spoken of accordingly in I ps. sing. The usage is thoroughly idiomatic ; and there is no occasion, with Gratz, Die Psalnim, p. 134, to substitute litoy. See on 5, 10: and add Gen. 34, 30 naoJD ^no ''3N1; Jud. i8, 23 '•D "J^-nio npyrJ (of Micah and his neighbours). XXX. iq-2'] 225 23. -|C\S* nx] Ewald (§ 329a: comp. Hist. iii. 145 [E. T, 105]) would treat the words introduced by DN as an exclamation, explaining ns as an accus. with reference to a suppressed verb, — (Think of) that which . . . ! and comparing Hag, 2, 5, where, however, as also in Zech. 7, 7, the text is very uncertain. LXX for Tkl'N nx ^nx express ■^^^ """ID^*, which is no doubt right (We. Bu.): 'ye shall not do so, after what Yahweh hath given unto us, and {Tenses, § 760) preserved us,' etc. 24. nrn -Mib] Cf. on 8. 7*. ... 31 ... 3] A variation for the more common type, 3 ... 3 : Jos. 14, II. Ez. 18, 4. Dan. 11, 29. Ez. 42, 11 f. (Smend)t. 25. n^yoi] as 16, 13. t22"J'Dh prh] Cf.Ex. 15, 25. Jos. 24, 25; andpn alone, Gen. 47, 26. Jud. II, 39. 26. inyn^] 'to his/nends.' =^4. (for ^'"1>^ : GK. § 91^) attached to Siplur. as 14, 48 'iHDb' (Stade, p. 355 ; GK. § 91I). In this order, however, the double b is scarcely Hebrew, though min'' ""JpT? inj?"i7, with the more general category first, would be possible. LXX inyipl, followed by Sm. Klo. conjectured Qi^'''?Vr ky ^^^^^ cities (see z/. 27 ff.); so Bu. Dh. : but the correction is rather violent. nam] =di present ; see on 25, 27. 27. ^X"n"'2] i.e. not the better known Beth'el, 10 miles N. of Jerusalem, but the place in the Negeb of Judah, called Bai0»;\ in Jos. 15, 30 LXX (MT. corruptly i>^D3), hn3 in Jos. 19, 4 MT., and ^X^inS BaOovr^K in i Ch. 4, 30, in a list of cities belonging originally to Simeon (Jos. 19, 2-8, i Ch. 4, ^^8-33), but afterwards incorporated in Judah (Jos. 15, 26-32). The name has not been preserved; and the approximate site can only be inferred from the known places with which it is associated in this list, Beersheba, Moladah (very possibly^-see EB. s.v. — the Malatha of Euseb. Otiom., 4 miles from 'Arad, now Tell 'Arad, 17 miles S. of Hebron, and 20 miles E. of Beersheba), Hormah (also pear 'Arad; see on v. 30), Ziqlag, and 'En-Rimmon (now, probably, Umm er-RumdniTn, 10 miles NNE. of Beersheba). LXX have here Baieai/p ; but the situation of nii'T!''! (Jos. 15, 58 al.), 4I miles N. of Hebron, is less suitable than that of ?'N~n''2 (We.). Ill mJ3"\] Ramoth of the South: see Jos. 19, 8, in the list of Simeonile cities (1j3 nipn). LXX here also read the sing. : 'Pa^a voTov'=iyi np"). The site is unknown (/?/>'. iv. 198*; Buhl, 184). in''] in the hill-country of Judah (Jos. 15, 48), mentioned also by Pas a priestly city (Jos. 21, 14=1 Ch. 6,58 [EVV. 73]yt- According to Euseb. Onom. 266,43, a large village 20 miles from Eleutheropolis. It is now generally identified with 1365 Q 226 The First Book of Samuel, 'Atlir, a village situated on two knolls, ii miles SW. of Ziph. The change from * to y is explicable (Kampffmeyer, ZDPV. xvi. 45, cited by Cheyne, EB. s.v.) : LXX have remarkably here (but not elsewhere) Tf99op (="iny; see p, 136 «.). 28. "iy"iy2] LXX have here a double rendering: itai toTs kv 'ApoTjp koI tois 'A(ji|Aa8€i. ' It is clear that LXX after 'lyiy {='Auna5) read still another letter, viz. n. The form my"iy, now, is confirmed not only by Jos. 15, 22 ' — where, to be sure, LXX conversely omit the H — but also by the present pronunciation 'Ar'drak' (We.), the name of a place in the Negeb of Judah (Jos. /.c), 11 miles SE. of Beersheba: see Robinson, Bib/. Fes., ii. 199*. niJ^QC] Only mentioned here. Site unknown. yonU'S*] In the hill-country of Judah (Jos. 15, 50 [MT. here nbDtl^Kt]), men- tioned by P as a priestly city (Jos. 21, 14=1 Ch. 6, 42 [EVV. 57]), mentioned also I Ch. 4, 17. I9f. Now probably the large village es-Semii', 10 miles S. by W. of Hebron, and 4 miles W. by S. of Ma'on. The form of the name is noticeable ; it is the inf. of the Arabic 8th conjug. ; and it seems therefore to shew that the place must have been originally an Arab settlement. Eshta'ol is another name of the same form. See further Burney in \.h.t Jottrn. of Theol. Studies, 1911, p. 83f., who supposes plausibly that the names suggested originally the ideas of being heard, and asking for oneself, and that they marked the seats of ancient oracles. 29. b3"l3] LXX btD"133 ; no doubt, rightly. Carmel, now el-Kurtnul, was in the hill-country of Judah (Jos. 15, 55), 4 miles NE. of es-Semu', and 3 miles S. of Ziph. See further on 25, 2. vNDniTl ''"ly] cities belonging to the Yerahme'elites settled in the Negeb : see on 27, 10. ■•JVn ny] See on 27, 10. 30. njOin] In the Negeb of Judah (Jos. 15, 30), but originally Simeonite (19, 4. I Ch. 4, 30): mentioned also in Nu. 14, 45 = Dt. i, 44; Nu. 21, 3. Jud. I, 17 (two divergent traditions of the origin of the name); Jos. 12, i4f. In Jud. 1,17 the original name of Hormah is said to have been Zephath. The site is unknown ; but Nu. 21, i. 3 appear to shew that it was not far from 'Arad (see on V. 27). The identification of Zephath with Sebaita, 27 miles SSW. of Beersheba, is precarious, the names not agreeing phonetically. JCyinn] This, not ftI'y""11D3, found in many edd., is the Mass. reading: the 3 is recognised both in the BrjpaaPtf of Cod. B, and the Bcopaaav of Cod. A. The ^ MT. myny. But 1 and 1 in the old Phoenician characters are seldom distinguishable, and the context alone decides which is to be read. In proper names, unless the orthography is certain upon independent grounds, either letter may often be read indiscriminately. ' The identifications given here in the RV. with marginal references (taken over from edd. of AV. with marginal references) are extraordinary. Beth-el in z^. 27 is identified with the Beth-el N. of Jerusalem ; and 'Aro'er with the 'Aro'er N. of the Amon, on the E. of the Dead Sea ! Those responsible for these 'references' might have learnt better from the Speaker s Commentary on Samuel, published as long ago as 1872. XXX. 28—XXXL 2 227 place may be the same as fK'y of Jos. 15, 42 (in the Shephelah). 19, 7 (Simeonite). If this is the case, it will have been situated approximately in the same region as iny (see the next note). "jny] In the Shephelah (Jos. 15,42); and mentioned in the same group with Libnah (site unknown), 'Ashan (see the last note), Nezib, now Beii Nazib, 2 miles SW, of Qe'ilah (see on 23, i), Qe'ilah, Achzib {^^Qx\z.■^%' Ain el-Kezbeh, 2 miles NE. of esh-Shuweikeh = Sochoh ; see on 17, i), and Mare'shah {Merdsh, 6 miles W. of Nezib). Its site cannot be more closely determined. It 'is called in Jos. 15', 43 MT. "iny, but in LXX ']T\V {'WaK). In 19, 7 on the contrary both have "inV. A decision between the two variants is not possible' (We.). LXX (B) Noo, other MSS. No^jSe (Luc. Naye^); hence Klo. would read 2iV (Jos. 11, 21), still the name of a place 14 miles SW. of Hebron, while Gudrin thinks of /Viidd, 8 miles NW. of Hebron, near Qe'ilah (I 23, i). See Cheyne's art. Athach in £B. 31. fn^n] In the hill-country (Jos. 15, 54). The most important town of the entire district, where David, shortly afterwards, was first proclaimed king (II 5, 3). 31. The chapter is excerpted, with slight variations, by the compiler of the Chronicles (i Ch. 10). The variations are partly, it seems, due to accident, partly they are to be attributed to an intentional change on the part of the compiler of Chronicles, partly they have preserved the original text of the passage in a purer form than it has been transmitted to us in Samuel. 1. D^onijj] C. lon^j. "'K'JK ID^l] C. B'^N D^l. ya^jn] C. yn^j. 2. Ip?*!*"!] See on 14, 22. v:3 nn) bin'^f nx] C. na nnxi hxtJ' nnx. p'Z'in sq. accus. occurs here, II i, 6. Gen. 31, 23. Jud. 18, 22. 20, 42t; ^"inx p'^lin occurs in the parallel, i Ch. 10, 2. c^. 14, 22. Jud. 20, 45t. P''2in sq. accus. means undoubtedly io overtake (so p''2nx often in Targ. for both pimn and 2''ii'n, as Gen. 44, 4. 6) : but 'overtake ' is a relative term ; and in II i, 6, vv. 7-10 shew that the archers had not actually come up to Saul. We can hardly therefore say (Bu.) that ^"inx must be here the original reading. inji.T'] C. }njv. 2nJ''3N] wrongly identified in RV.;;/. here, and on i Ch. 8, 33, with '•"iK'S 14, 49 : in I Ch. 8, 33 = 9, 39 Saul's four sons are given as Jonathan, IMalchishua', Abinadab, and Eshba'al; and there can be no doubt (see on 14, 49) that ^W corresponds to Eshba'al. Eshba'al (cf. II 2, 8) was pretty clearly not present at the battle. Q 2 228 The First Book of Samuel, 3. n)3n^»n naani] Cf. Jud. 20, 34 nnns nron^roni; is. 21, 15 ™ h\^^ ^s] C. ^ixB' ijy. insvo'")] not ' overtook ' (EVV.), but found him in the fight (Now. ; Bu., comparing i Ki. 22, 30-34). NVn io find = \.o hit (Ehrl.), might be said of the weapon (Dt. 19, 5), but hardly of the archers. T\^\>2 D''t^•J^* DniDn] C. r\^p2 onion. The rendering of LXX, however [ol aKovria-Tai, ai-Spcs To|oTat), appears to presuppose D''K':s ; though, as it is difficult to construe nc^pl D''tt'3K together — ' men with the bow' being hardly a Hebrew construction — the word must be misplaced. Probably the order r\^p2 (Bu. DniD) Omton D''C3N ' men, shooters with the ho'N'=some shooters with the bow, should be restored. Comp. Q^^no D^K'JX Gen. 37, 28; ^y^b'^Jn D^'kJ'JN Dt. 13, 14; and for the art. 25, 10. Sm. Now. Dh. would omit nC'pl n"'K'JK, as a gloss explanatory of Dnion : Bu. (alt.) would read as C. nmono ind ^n>i] C. onrn-jD ^n^i. ^n'^l] from ^in(^in), 'was in afiguish from (Ru. i, 13. Is. 6, 4. 28, 7 : Lex. 580a) the archers.' But h>^n is confined elsewhere to poetry or elevated prose ; '•JSO for p would be the regular construc- tion : and the sense does not seem strong enough. Read probably, with LXX {irpavfjiaTLo-Orj), ?n>1 and was wounded by the archers (}D with the passive verb, as Gen. 9, 11. Nah. i, 6. Job 24, i : Lex. sSoa). What LXX €ts TO. vTroxovSpia presupposes is uncertain: K'^'^ is rendered in LXX (II 2, 23. 3, 27. 20, 10) i{/6a. 4. iiu:b] C. am-bii. ''?x^T] C. omits,— as it seems, rightly (We. Bu. Ehrl. etc.). What Saul dreads is mockery while alive, not mutilation after death, which, indeed, would not be prevented by his armour-bearer killing him. ''2 l^^ynm] and wreak their caprice upon Vi\Q = mock or abuse me. See on this word Fleischer ap. Delitzsch on Is. 3, 4, who compares in particular the Arab, lj JJiiJ prop, to engage oneself with, then to entertain, divert, amuse onesef with, in Heb. in a bad sense, to make a toy of, to abuse or mock. See Nu. 22, 29 ; Jud. 19, 25 : and (where it is applied anthropomorphically to Yahweh's treatment of the Egyptians) Ex. 10, 2, and above 6, 6. 5. mn-^y] C. annn-^. i»y] C. omits. XXXI. )-g 229 6. nn'' Ninn ova rc'jx-i'3 dj v^d nk'ji] C. mo nn^ in^3-b"i — a generalizing abridgement of the text of Samuel. LXX in Samuel do not express VD'^N ^3 DJ. VC'JS will mean the men specially about Saul (23, 25. 26), not the whole army (the hi^'W'^ ^C'JN, v. 7 second time). 7. ''K'JN] C. {J'^N-b. piM "i2y3 nc'Ni poyn layn ic'x] C. P^V^ "IK'^« (for the six words). The pcy — a wide avenue running up between hills (see on 6, 13) — is the ^S*y~ir proy (Hos. i, 5), i.e. the broad vale running down from Jezreel, on the N. of Mt. Gilboa, in a SE. direction, past Bethshe'an (12 miles from Jezreel), into the Jordan valley {H. G. 384 f., 357 f. ; EB. s. V. Jezreel). The sense of the text appears therefore to be that the Israelites dwelling on the other side of the poy (i. e. on the N. of it), and (more than this, even) on the other side o/" Jordan, fled through the panic. pTTl "i2y2 is used regularly to denote the territory east of Jordan. The statement respecting p"i\n *i3ya "IC'N may be exaggerated : but we are hardly in a position to question the correctness of the text; and "'IV? (twice) for "inya (Klo. al.) is a somewhat violent emendation. ■•Dl . . . ^3] So, whether in the sense of that or because, Gen. 29, 12. 33, II. Ex. 3, II. 4, 31. Jos. 2, 9. 7, 15. 8, 21. 10, I. Jud. 6, 30. ch. 19, 4. 22, 17. II 5, 12. I Ki. 2, 26. II, 21. 18, 27 al.; and even (though this can hardly be reputed an elegancy) ''J'l , . . "lON^ Gen. 45, 26. Jud. 10, 10. The remark of Stade, p. 14, that "i^"! is ' unhebraisch,' can be due only to an oversight. ^N-iC' ''C^jn] C. omits. cnyn-nx] C. nnny. jna] C. ona. 8. v:n nc!?c'-nNi] C. vjn-nxi. '^':hlT\'\ C. yn^: (as v. i). Except in these two passages of Ch., always with the article. 9. rSa-nx iljc'dm iiJ'K-i-nx im3"'i] c. ic'NTnN* in::>m int2"'*c'S"'i ^inpB'^l] The object can be only the head and armour of Saul (cf., for the sense of the Pi el, 11, 7. Jud. 19, 29). It is a question whether the word should not be pointed Qal inpK'M, in which case the meaning would be that they sent messengers throughout the land 230 The First and Second Book of Samuel, of the Philistines. And this would agree with the aim of in7C'''1, viz. to tell the tidings iyD'^P) to their gods and people. Dn"'nvy n-n] C, on-'avy-riN. ns* ('to acquaint their idols with the news') is (We.) much more original than n^2 ('to announce the tidings z« the house of their idols '), is supported by LXX here, and agrees with the riK"i following. So Bu. Sm. Now. 10. nnntt^y n^n] C. on^n^K nn.— ninriK'y n^n will hardly be the pi. of nnn^yrr'a, as Keil suggests, on the analogy of ni2N T\yi (Ew. § 270C; GK. § 1241'): in all probability the frequency of the plural in other connexions (e.g. 7, 3. 4. 12, 10) led to the sing. mnC'y here being incorrectly read as minK'y. LXX d% to 'Ao-rap- rixov. It is, no doubt, this temple of the Phoenician goddess 'Ashtart (see on 7, 3) in Ashqelon, which Herodotus (i. 105) mentions as T-^s ovpavLT]^ 'A^poStVr^s to Upov, and which, as he tells us, his inquiries shewed him to be the most ancient foundation of the goddess: the one in Cyprus (probably at Kition), he adds, was reported by the Cyprians themselves to have been founded from Ashqelon, and that in Cythera [Pans. iii. 23. i] was built by the Phoenicians. The proper name of a native of Ashqelon, compounded with mnc'y, occurs in an Inscription {CIS. I. i. 115): ':bp^i< nnncyiny p Dti* : in the Greek parallel text 'AvrtTrarpos 'AfppoSio-tov 'Ao-KaX[a)vn->;s]. The head of Astarte also appears on certain coins of Ashqelon {JOB. i. 169, «.t). Here, 'Ashtart seems to have had the character of a martial goddess, of which there are other indications ; see Ashtart in Encycl. of Rel. and Eth. ii. 116 ; Ashtoreth in DB. i. p. 1708'. IB' JT-n jiDina lypn in^irriNi] C. pn rr-a lypn in^ab-nxi. On the originality of the text of Samuel, and against the view of Ew. and Bertheau that the original text embraced both readings, see the convincing note of We. '3 ypn is to strike or fix in, as a tent-peg or nail, Jud. 4, 21. Is. 22, 25, a dart, II 18, 14 : it may also have denoted to fasten to, even though the object fastened was not itself actually 'struck' in. We. Gratz (i. 439), Bu. and most follow Lagarde ^ in reading '^^\>J\ ; but as it is uncertain what exactly this ^ In his instructive Anmerkungen zur Griech. Uebersetzung der Froverbien (1863), page iv. A« XXXL 9 — /. I 231 denotes (see on II 21, 6), and as on the only two other occasions on which it is used, it refers to the Itvhig body (Ehrl.), it may be doubted whether it is safe to restore it here. iC^"n^2] So z'. 12. II 21, 12: elsewhere iN^"n^3 ; in the Greek period called Scythopolis (2/cu^wv ttoXis ; Jud. i, 27 LXX, 2 Mace. 12, 29), now Beisdn. An important fortress, standing on a natural mound, artificially strengthened by scarping the side, and commanding the entrance from the E. up the Vale of Jezreel, and so into N. Palestine generally (/T. G. 357 f . ; EB. i. 566 f). For long after the entry of the Israelites into Canaan, and no doubt even at this time, it was held by the Canaanites (cf. Jud. i, 27. Jos. 17, 11). 11. ny^J C"3^ "'3B''' V^n] C. *1J?^3 ^^y^ i?3. V^N* is very intrusive. icTN ns*] C. -ii^s-b ns*. 12. rh'hrrh'^ o^^i] C. omits. inp^i] C. inc^'-i. n'l? . . . mv\ c. nb^a . . . ns^a. (nau only here in OT. A word belonging to Aramaic and the later Hebrew.) IB' JT-a ncino] C. omits. HK'T ^K3M] C. r\^^y Dl>«^?:i.— Probably IN'TI here should be vocalized ^N?'l (so LXX, Pesh.) : the suffix, though added by the Chronicler, is not needed (see e.g. 16, 17). DB' Ons ISlb'^l] C. omits. 13. 'nip'^ Dn^njovynx inp"'i] C. Dn^nic^*y-ns' nap-'i. nB'Ta ^c'NH] c. ^I'^i n^sn. On nc'T3, see on I 23, 15. ICV^l] C. 1D1V''1. (Fz'. 13-14 in Chronicles are an addition, made by the compiler of Chronicles himself, and exhibiting throughout the marks of his style : cf. LOT? pp. 526, 535 ff., Nos. 3, 40.) II 1 — 5, 16. Lavient of David over Saul and Jonathan. David made king at Hebron over Judah, and subsequently, after the murder of Ishbosheth, over all Israel. Capture by J cab of the stronghold offebus, which David heticeforth makes his residence. 1, I. nt^M , , , 2^ nm] a circ. clause, = 'when David had' etc. (as RV.) ; cf. I Ki. I, 41 {Tenses, § 160; cf GK. § 141^, though here the cases quoted are of a ptcp.). Wl is resumed (see on I 25, 26) by v. 2 \T1, and the main sentence is continued by ''Jl n:m. 232 The Second Book of Samuel, \hl2V^^ is altogether isolated, the art. being used only with the gentile name. According to usage elsewhere, either p^ny (LXX, Vulg. ; cf. 30, I note. 18) or '^\h)2)3r\ (6 MSS, Pesh.) should be restored (We.). So Dr. Weir : ' Is it not ''p^oyn ? ' 2. h'iii^ Dyo] nvo as I 14, 17. it^NT bv nons'i as I 4, 12^ 4. imn n\TnD] I 4, 16^. On -ik'n, see on I 15, 20. nmn] Almost = C?!. Strictly, of course, n3"in is an inf. abs. in the accus., qualifying 7Q3 , lit. ' with a much-making there fell.' 6. innpJ N"ipj] The inf. abs. as I 20, 6. N"ip3 is for nnpj, verbs n"b and N^'b being not unfrequently confused (GK. § 75"). fVK^J] ptcp. : was In the condition 0/ one leaning = was leaning. Ci"it;nsn "hv^] bv^ means owner, possessor (as IT'^n bv"^, "WT) bv^)- so D"'t^"i2n vV3 would mean oivners of the horsemen (but not captains, or getierals, of the horsemen [= LXX i7r7rap;>(at], which would be D^t^nE^ nb'); and D'^^i^ian ipya would mean owners of the (war-)horses (on the confusion in MT. between K'^S horse [pi. 0^1?], and K'"JS (for K'^.Q [GK. § 84<5b]) horseman, pi. D^tJ'lS, see Zf.r. s. v.). If the text is correct (see on v. 18), we must point D'^C'lSn vW, and suppose it to be an unusual expression for horsemen. Bt). -iDN^l] Qre ^Pi^*,"! , evidently rightly. So Zech. 4, 2. Neh. 5, 9. 7, 3 (Ochlah w^Ochlah, No. 133). ■•^JNJ »2z7V/ in pause; see on I i, 15. 9. ''Jnno")] and despatch me (I 14, 13. 17, 51). prn] Only here. What exactly is denoted cannot be ascertained. The root denotes some kind of interweaving (Ex. 28, 39) : ,_;l^-lo is quoted by Freytag, apparently as a rare word, in the sense of ' per- plexus fuit {de arbor ibus).' It is not apparent what meaning, suitable to the present passage, a derivative from such a root might express. The Versions afford no real help. LXX o-koto's Setvov (perh. a corruption of ctkotoSivos, dizziness; Trendelenburg, ap. Schleusner, cited by Sm.) ; Targ. NDTn terror; Pesh. \j'i vy3, of which, as v. 6 and v. 18 may have stood opposite to one another in two parallel columns, 'hv'^ may have found its way into V. 6 before CB^ID, and nt^p into v. 18. By the adoption of this explanation, both verses at once would be relieved of an encum- brance' (so Now.).— With IId!?^ cf. Dt. 31, 22 ; xj/. 60 title DH^n nc'\n] Cf. Jos. 10, 13 iyi?>r\ -idd bv nnina ^{^^ s*^n); and the original text of i Ki. 8, 13 (see LXX of v. 53, and recent Com- mentators). The text of v. 18, however, excites suspicion. Not only is T\^p intrusive, but, as Klo. remarks, 1?3N''1 ought to be immediately followed by z/. 19 (cf. 3, 33 ; 22, 2), and 18'^'JI n^in^ run (on run without a pron. suff., see on I 16, il) would form the natural sequel to 17. Upon the assumption that 18'' is misplaced, and was intended originally to follow 17, JltJ'p min'' ""Jl will immediately precede ». 19 ; and it has been supposed that these words really conceal the first words of the dirge. Thus Klo. Bu. would read for them Tk}\> min'' '':3 (the/t'w., Judah being personified as a woman, Jer. 3, 11 al., called to lament, Jer. 9, 16. 19 al.) ' Vernimm, O Juda, Grausames,' ' Hear (or Learn), O Judah, cruel tidings : ' but, though n'K'p is good Heb. for hard things (Gen. 43, 7. 30), p3 does not mean hear or leant, but consider (Dt. 32, 7. ^. 50, 22. 94, 8), and the thought itself is prosaic. Sm., better, omitting n5^'p, proposes min"" *p3 ' Weep, O Judah ' (for the sequel, in either case, see the next note). "Hup? remains, however, as an awkward and inexplicable residuum. 19. ''3Vn] Ew. and Stade, following Pesh., Le Clerc, Mich. Dathe, De Wette, 'The gazelle,' supposing this to be a name by which Jonathan was popularly known among the warriors, on account of his fieetness (cf. 2, 18; i Ch. 12, 8 '-\r\rh onnn ^y D''N3V3). But there is no trace of such a name in connection with Jonathan : and /. i8-2i 235 throughout the poem the two heroes are consistently spoken of (Dm33 five times), — only in vv. 25b. 26 the singer's thoughts turning more particularly to Jonathan, — so that it is unlikely that he would begin with a word that was applicable to only one of them. The text must therefore be rendered, ' The beauty, O Israel, upon thy high-places is slain.' Saul and Jonathan, the two heroes who formed the crown and glory of the nation, are called its beauty. The expression The beauty (not Thy beauty) is singular, and Ehrlich hardly goes too far when he says it is not possible : but LXX must have already found the same consonantal text. By their rendering o-T77Xa)crov (= ''?Vl')} which agrees with the reading ITIO (see the next note but one), they appear to have understood the passage as an injunction to erect a pillar in commemoration of the two departed heroes: of. 18, 18 (where 3V1 is rendered koX i(iT(]Kuiae.v) \ ■•njfn being thus unsatisfactory, Klo., followed by Bu. Sm. Now., conjectures ^IJ^i'n ' Be grieved (I 20, 3. 34 ; and esp. II 19, 3), O Israel,' to which miH^ ""Dil (above) would form an excellent parallel : the fem. (though not elsewhere used in poetry of Israel), as in rmn"' ^D3. If this conjecture be accepted, '3 must of course be pointed ^""jriiDS ; and the clause must be rendered, Upon thy high places {lie) the slain, — P/H being construed collectively (Klo. Bu. Sm.). It reads, however, somewhat abruptly : and 777\ as a predicate, as v. 25, would be more natural. Now., following the genuine rendering of LXX (see the next note), and omitting ??n, would read, 'Be grieved, O Israel, _/cr thy dead:' but ?pT\ "2 ?y is strongly supported by v. 25'' (as indeed Now. owns). On the whole, though, in themselves, miH^ ''D3 and 7X">tJ>' ''3i'yn would both be suitable, it is impossible to feel satisfied that they really express the original text. Some corruption seems to underlie ^32rn : for the rest, it seems best, with our present knowledge, to leave vv. 18-19 substantially as they are, merely, with LXX, omitting nCp in v. 18, and, with Luc, prefixing "IDit^l to v. 19. ^^n Trnm ^y] LXX has a doublet: virlp twv T^Ov-qKOTw (= hv "ITlCi) eVi Ttt v\l/-q crov (= MT.) rpaD/xttTtaiv : ' the first is shewn by the io\\o-w\r\Q getu'tive Tpav/xaTLwv, and by the divergence from MT., to be their genuine rendering ' (We.). 21. yi733 '•in] ya73n was the name of the range, extending in the ' Aq. and MSS. of LXX aicpifiaaai (whence Vulg. considera) presupposes the same text : cf. uKpiffeia for N2''5f^ Dan. 7, 16 LXX Thcod., and i^aKpi^waaaeai for narb Dan. 7, 19 LXX, cited by Field. 236 The Second Book of Samnc/, arc of a circle for some 8 miles, and containing several independent peaks and heights {£B. 1723 ; of. jDB. s. v.): hence the pi. nn, and the '3?, which there is no reason to change (Bu. Sm. Now.) to 'SD. Klo., cleverly, but needlessly, V^bi ""nin (Is. 44, 27 in pause) 'Bty up, O Gilboa" (Is. 42, 15). So far as the /orm goes, V^bn nn is a fusion of two constructions yn^n onn and yn^JH nn, combining the greater definiteness of the former with the superior compactness and elegancy of the latter. In such an expression as y3^n Win, Dnn is virtually qualified by ya^:n in the same degree as if it were an actual genitive, and is expressed accordingly in the construct state (cf. Is. 9, 2 T>*^? nnc^l : GK. § 130a). mDltn nc'l] HDlin is lit. something /aken off from a larger mass, and set apart for sacred purposes ; and it seems to have been first used (Dt. 12, 6. II. 17) of gifts taken from the produce of the soil, esp. first-fruits (see more fully the writer's note on Dt. 12, 6, or his art. Offer, Offering, in DB., p. 588^) ; and fields of offerings is commonly interpreted to mean, fields bearing produce from which first-fruits are offered. But the expression is somewhat strange : the ridge of Gilboa', except on its S. side, is bleak and bare {EB. ii. 1723); and, as the text stands, the verb, such as come, which we must understand with "iDn ^N1 b'd i'N, must be carried on to fields, which it does not suit. It is a great improvement (with Klo. Now. al.) to insert 1?..''. in a, and to omit (with Luc.) 1 before '^"W ; we then get a well-balanced distich — bt: nn'' ba ^3^33 nn ni»nn nb Q2^bv it^D !?ni The principal suggestions made by those who are dissatisfied with mnnn nb' are nj.^n "'in (Now. Bu., after Luc. 6pr] Oavdrov) ; nilK' nisn (Sm. Bu. alt.); n>r?-| nil'f (Klo.), or rm'\r\ nb' (Dh.: Jer. 14, i4t), 'ye fields of deceit!' — the fields on which the two heroes lost their lives being represented as having deceitfully betrayed them ; G. A. Smith {H. G. 404) niD^HD n'B' 'ye fields oi discomfitures r ?yi3] bvy is to reject with loathing, Jer. 14, 19. Ez. 16, 5 (^V^). 45 3z!r. Lev. 26, 11, 15. 30. 43. 44t. (Job 21, 10 Hif. differently.) LXX here irpoa-ioxOicrOy] (as Lev. 26, 15. 30. 43. 44: Ez. 16, 45 /. 21-22 237 a.irui(Ta\i.€vr\). The meaning defiled is less probable : for this sense is only borne by 7W in Aramaic, and is not common even there (Is. I, 6. 6, 5. 28, 8 Targ. Not in Syriac). n^C'O v2] ' not anointed with oil.' The shield of Saul is pictured by David as lying upon the mountains, no longer polished and ready to be worn in action, but cast aside as worthless, and neglected. Shields, whether made of leather or metal, were oiled in antiquity, to keep them in good condition. Cf. Is. 21, 5 f.^a IHB'p i.e. prepare for action \ and Verg. Aen. 7. 626 Pars laeves clypeos et spicula lucida tergunt Arvina pingui. v3] Used alone (except Gen. 31, 20) exclusively in poetry; especially to negative a subst. or adj., as Hos. 7, 8 naiDH v2; Job 8, II nn:) hi. ^^"k^'D] The form expresses -d. permanent state (GK. § 84 a'; K5n. ii. 130-133): what is required here is rather the ptcp. mc'O (so 23 I\ISS.). An original n^'O (i. e. D^9) ^^s probably been read incorrectly as D?'?' which ultimately became D'^^O, 22. Jlb^j] Exceptionally for ^iOJ (so some 50 MSS.). Comp. PSB' Dt. 33, 19; 3V I Ki. 18, 27; i^i^ Is. 17, 11; "^"p ch. 18, 9; -m Hos. 9, 12 (MT.); nW [Pdel of r\^^) Is. 10, 13 ; -W ib. 28, 2; b'y:) always (four times) in Job for Dy3 ; CjnV Lam. 3, 9; b'py Neh. 4, 11; bnD / "iB'X, would be the form in which the subject should be expressed : see on I 4, 16). We cannot be sure where the fault lies. "iti'X (which is not really wanted) may have crept into the text by some error ; or it may be taken as = thai, as in I, 4, and, as there is no apparent reason for the emphatic position of ny^: K^''^"' ''K'JX before it (see on I 20, 8), as having been accidentally misplaced from following "iDX^ (cf. LXX ; and '»3 '^'ovh I Ki. I, 13). Klo. would read nhx-^^y for loxi? (cf Gen. 26, 32); Ehrl. supposes words such as ""Jioyn t^'^: T'D ^1XB> Dy''::'in to have fallen out after IC'X. 5. '•tJ'JN] LXX rjyov(j.ivov<; = 'hv'^, as 21, 12. I 23, II. 12 ; prob- ably rightly, ""^ya might easily be changed to the more usual '•D'JX, especially under the influence of v. 4K mrT'^J for h with the passive see GK. § 121''; Lex. 514* d. 240 The Second Book of Samuel, "iK'N] ye who . . . implying, however, a reason ( = oLTLve<;), and so equivalent to in thai ye . . . Comp. 6^. I 26, 16. Gen. 42, 21. j/^. 71, 19 Thou who . . .! 139, 15 / who . . . ! (Germ. Der du . . . , Der ich . . .). nin TDnn] LXX (Cod. A: B is here, for two verses, defective) TO cAeos ToO Oeov = miT IDU : cf. I 20, 14 MT. naonx] the plur. of ' majesty : ' GK. § 1 24'. 6. nsin] There is nothing in the context for this word to be referred to. The impf. nc'yN, not less than the position of the clause ay/er '}) nin* C*yS postulates an allusion to something _/M/«r(?/ and does not permit the reference, assumed by Th. Ke., to the message of greeting sent at the time by David. The proposal of We. to read nnn for natn removes all difficulty: 'I also will shew you good, because ye have done this thing.' 7- Wl^ n:pTnn] fig. for. Be ericouraged: so 16, 21. Jud. 7, 11, Zech. 8, 9. 13. Cf. '2 T* ptn I 23, 16, with note. ^''n ''jni? rni] 13, 28 end. I 18, 17. "•nx D:i] For the emphatic position of TiK, cf. on I 15, i. 8. , . . '^:^'N N3V nC'] Usage requires ':i N3Vn nti* {ch. i, 10; I 24, 6). n:i'3"K'''N] Cod. 93 Holmes ELo-/3aaX; so ol XolttoI (i. e. Aq. Symm. Theod.) in the Hexapla ; comp. Isbalein of the Itala. See i Ch. 8, 33 = 9, 39 ?y3^5<, which leaves no doubt that this was the true name of Saul's son, changed at a later period into Ish-bosheth for the purpose of avoiding what was interpreted then as a compound of the name of the Phoenician deity Baal. The change, however, was not carried through consistently : the original Ish-baal (i. e. man 0/ Baal — a title of Yahweh (see on 4, 4): comp. at Carthage nJDB'N ma7i of Taniih ^) remained in the two genealogies in i Ch., and here in particular MSS. or recensions ^ D''JnD] on the border between Gad and Manasseh (Jos. 13, 26. 30): 1 Euting, Punische Steine (1871), No. 227 = CIS. I. ii. 542 (n3n[C']K). ^ LXX has in ch. 3-4 the strange error Mencpi^oaOe for riK'l'C'^N. So Lucian's recension throughout, except 4, 4, where the form Mfjx(pipaa\ occurs. //. s-9 241 see also vv. 12. 29. 17, 24. 27. 19, 33. Gen. 32, 3. Jos. 21, 38 (= I Ch. 6, 65). I Ki. 2, 8. 4, i4t. The site is uncertain. The narrative of Jacob's route from Haran to Shechem (Gen. 32-33) points to a site near the ford ed-Damiyeh, such as Deir 'alia, 7 miles to the NE. of it (see the writer's Genesis, p. 301 f. ; more fully the Exp. Times, July, 1902, p. 457 ff.) : the notices in 2 Sam. seem to suggest a site further to the N. Thus Buhl (257 ' perhaps '), Budde (but admitting that the site seems too far from the Jabbok for Gen. 32), and others, think the name is echoed in Mahnd, 13 miles N. of the Jabbok, and 6 miles E. of Jordan, at the top of W. el-Himar (but conip, on V. 29) ; Merrill [^East of Jordan, 436 f.) points out objections to this, and pro- poses Stileikhat, a large ruin 7 miles SW. of Mahna, and i mile E. of the road N. and S. through the Ghor [not marked in G. A. Smith's Map, but just under the figure 500 in this position] : this, though it would agree with 2 Sam. iS {DB. iii. 213''), does not suit Jacob's route (see my Genesis, 301). Further exploration may discover the site of Mahanaim : for the present, as Gen. 32 and 2 Sam. point to different sites for it, it is better, with Dillmann, to leave it undetermined. 9. niJJ'Nn] The name is recognised even by Keil as corrupt : for neither the Assyrians (">1^i?) nor the Arabian tribe of Dl'iE'X (Gen. 25, 3) can be intended; and the name of a tribe so insig- nificant as not to be mentioned elsewhere is not in this connexion probable. Pesh. Vulg. express ''"ilt^sn (so Th. Ew. We.). The situation, in agreement with the position of the name next to that of Gilead, would suit excellently (see Jos. 12, 5. 13, 13): but Keil objects that Geshur at this time (see 3, 3^*) possessed an independent king, so that Ishbosheth could have exercised no jurisdiction over it. Kohler, Kp. Klo. read ^7«?'^n (Jud. i, 32): cf. Targ. ntJ'X n''m ^y. So Nold. Bu. Sm. Now. etc. n?3j The original form of the suffix of 3 sg. masc. is retained in this word eighteen times (Is. 15, 3. 16, 7. Jer. 2, 21. 8, 6. 10 bis. 15, 10 MT. [but read ^^l^J?!? Dnb]. 20, 7. 48, 31. 38. Ez. 11, 15. 20, 40. 36, 10. Hos. 13, 2. Nah. 2, I. Hab. i, 9. 15)^; and sporadically (see on 21, i) in other cases. Eor the position of 7D with a suffix after the subst. to which it refers, giving it greater independence and emphasis, comp. i Ki. 22, 28 ( = Mic. i, 2). Is. 9, 8. Jer. 13, 19. Mai. ' The orthography i^3 seventeen times: Gen. 25, 25. Ex. 14, 7. 19, 18. Nu. 23, 13. Lev. 13, 13. Is. I, 23. 9, 8. 16. Jer. 6, \ibis. Mai. 3, 9. ^. 29, 9. 53, 4. Pr. 24, 31. 30, 27. Job 21, 23. Cant. 5, 16. 1365 R 242 77?^ Second Book of Samuel, 3, 9, »//. 8, 8. 67, 4. 6; and especially in Ezekiel, Ez. 11, 15. 14, 5. 20, 40. 29, 2. 32, 12. 30. 35, 15. 36, 5 (^'e). 32, on^-nn] 9 MSS. Qni'"n^n2: but see p. 2,"] footnote 2. Dn? "1N*1] The expression seems a natural one ; but it occurs only here. Cf. D3^ "li^«1. (the verb) I 29, lof ; "llN '^[i^n Gen. 44, 3t. 246 The Second Book of Samuel, 3, I. naiN] 'Job II, 9 ('"lij^). Jer. 29, 28. The masc. (which would be ^^^?; GK. § 93'^^) does not occur. LXX liri rroXv, reading nans {^If]^),' Dr. Weir. n^^ii D''3^n . . . pini "J^n] See on I 2, 26. 2-5] =1 Ch. 3, 1-3. List of David's wives and sons. 2. in^M] The Kt., as We. suggests, might be pointed 'ilp'l (for ''"'h^^-)' ^^ ^^^ analogy of the contracted forms which now and then occur in Ft'e/ (Nah. i, 4 IHK'B*!. Lam. 3, 33 na»1. 53 ^'^l\, 2 Ch. 32, 30. Qre *"1E'*1: GK. § 69"). However, the contraction is in all cases against analogy, and therefore probably nothing more than a clerical error ; nor, in Pu'ai, is there any instance of it at all. No doubt, the Qre ^"^P,"^!! is here right. DyJTlS^] belonging to, the dat. of reference: cf. i Ki. 14, 13 (^Lex. 512^ 5 c). On Ahino'am, see on I 25, 43. 3. 3N^3] Ch. ?^<*J'^; LXX here AaAorta, Aq. Symm. Theod. A^ta; in I Ch. 3, I B ^aii.vvr]\ A and Luc. AaAovia. Klo. al. regard AAAOYIA as a corruption of AAAOYIA=nm, and W'^ri^ of ^^?^1''^, — two alternative forms of the same name. It is impossible to say what the original form of the name was : but 2N7 in 3XP3 is open to the suspicion of being a dittograph of 2N? in 7^2X7. '•i'Diin] See on I 25, 2, Tltra] A petty Aramaean kingdom on the E. of Jordan, N. of Gilead; cf. on I 27, 8. 5. ^^ T\^vi\ By analogy (see v. 3^) the name of 'Eglah's first husband would be expected : doubtless, therefore, in is due either to a lapsus calami or to some transcriptional corruption. 6. 'F. 6b is the continuation of v. i. Vv. 2-5 have been inserted subsequently, and v. 6* conceals the juncture ' (We.). '1 pinriD iTTl] ' was making or shewifig himself strong in ' [noty^r] etc., i.e. was gaining power and importance in connexion with the house of Saul. The verb is not used elsewhere in a bad sense (cf. 2 Ch. I, I. 12, 13 etc.), except sq. bv {id. 17, i); but in the light of V. 8 fif. it is probable that it is used here to suggest the idea of acquiring undue power, and presuming too much. 7. 5J*3^S ^INli'^l] For the form of sentence, cf. 4, 4. 13, 3. 14, 6 n'^n '>:^ ^n^SB'h. I 28, 24 etc. ; cf. on 1 I, 2. ///. I-I2 247 IDK^l] As IshboshetK has not been hitherto named in the present connexion, the insertion ^isyp (^yac'X) n^l B^'N is necessary : cf. LXX /cai eiTrev Me|U<^t)8ocr^e (p. 240 n. 2) vios "XaovX. 8. min''^ nti'X] ' belonging to Judah.' The point lies in the refer- ence to i\ie Judaean 3^3 t^•S'^ (cf. Ewald, iii. n6«.). LXX, however, do not express the words ; and many moderns omit them, on the doubtful supposition that they are a gloss added by a scribe who vocalized 2^1, in order to explain that this was the name of the Judahite clan (see on I 25, 3). DVn] with emphasis, io-day, at this time. Abner protests that at the very time at which Ishbosheth is bringing his charge against him, he is doing his best for the house of Saul. ni^^yN] I do, — the impf. expressing present habit. Klo. Bu. nb'yn, putting the segolta on DVn. ^•^ni?] ^plural form : cf. on I 30, 26. in^Vcn] So, sq. *l*a, Zech. II, 6. NVO or nVD to arrive, come to, T\'i'0'r\ to cause to come to, with 'V2. place into the hand of, hand over to. npsni] = and (yet) thou visitest, etc. For the adversative sense, sometimes implied in •\, cf. 19, 28. Gen. 32, 31 : Tenses, § 74 j8. r\^^r\ |iy] LXX rw^ |iy ' a fault concerning a woman ' (and nothing more). So We. Klo. Bu. etc. 9. ""^ ... ''3] The second ^3 is resumptive of the first (I 14, 39). 11. nm "iJaN JIN 2''t^n^] nai 'a 2*trn is properly to ttim one back with (GK. § II 7 f*') a word; hence, in a weakened sense, reply to, answer : so I 17, 30 and often. If the lit. meaning were 'bring back word to,' we should, by all analogy, require ^N or h for ns (cf. the Arab, idiom, cited in Thes. 1374^). 12. innn] Generally explained 2i&=where he was (2, 23). But the use is singular : for the suffix would refer naturally not to 111 but to the subject of ni't^'M (see 2, 23 ; and on I 14, 9). Lucian has ci? Xi^puiv ( = p?n), of which innn is prob. a corruption; see below. pN'^D^ nON^] At least pXH-iob would be required, if the words were meant to express Whose is the land? but even so, they are incompatible as they stand with what follows, ""nx nnnn nmD "IDN^, which is also the purport of the message, and which according to 248 The Second Book of Samuel, Hebrew usage ought to follow innn ivimediately . The least change that will suffice to produce an intelligible sentence, is to read psn"iJ3?, and to omit the following "ir:jS7. At the same time, it must be admitted that the proposal 'V\ "TIN ^TT'ia rim3 is complete without any prefatory introduction; and probably "IDN^ |'"IN ""D? is merely a double dittograph of the preceding "IDN^. LXX Trpos AauetS cis ©aiXa/x ov riv Trapa^ijfjia XcytDV AidOov ktX., where Trapa^^jua^^innD, so that £ts ©atXa/x, ov rjv (cis ©v^Xa/xou 7171/ Cod. A) must be a subse- quent insertion, in the ivrong place, representing "iDnn again (=£ts 0ai) and )nN ""D^ "lOS^ [pN (lDi')''D^ = Xafxov yr/v, hence Xajx ov -qv]. Ilapaxprjfxa Ae'ywj/ AlulOov appears to shew that in the Hebrew text used by LXX nm3 nON^ innn stood together : if with Luc. pan be read for innn, this would yield an excellent sense (so Now.). Bu., simplifying a suggestion of Klo.'s, would read (after *in) ''^C"? "^J^N? 'Jl nn-|3 n^-iS ^r?^ nn^ pxn < saying, The land is under me (at my disposal) to give to whom I please : ' but the Heb. idiom for under a person's authority or control is not 'd nnn (except of a wiye, Nu. 5, 19 al.), but 'S T nnn (I 21, 4. 5. 9, Jud. 3, 30. Is. 3, 6: Lex. 1065 d ; notice also 'S T nnntp 2 Ki. 8, 20. 13, 5 al., td. 1066*). •]0y n''] Cf. Jer. 26, 24 (ns); rather differently, c/i. 14, 19. 13. 3"it2] i.e. Good! {^ I agree): cf. I 20, 7. 1 Ki. 2, 18. Note the ^3N (see on I 26, 6). '}\X'2.7\ '•JD? DN '•3] ' except be/ore thy bringing ' — an unintelligible construction. DN "•3 and ^JD7 exclude one another; and we must read either ']X''an ''JD^ i^^cr^ thy bringing, or (cf. Gen. 32, 27) DN '•3 riN^n except thou bring. The latter is expressed by LXX {lav /xi] dyayr/s). 14. See I 18, 27. 15. B'''N Dyo] 'from a man!' Read, of course, with LXX riB'^N. For nyjo, cf. I 10, 9. 18, 13. ^^b (Qre)] See I 25, 44. 16. Dnn3] On the way between Jerusalem and Jericho (16, 5. 17, 18), not improbably (Buhl, 175; £B. s.v.), at either Buke'ddn i| miles, or Rds ez-Zambi 2\ miles, ENE. of Jerusalem, near the old Roman road, leading down to Jericho. Targ. nJD^'y (^^^V ^ Ch. ///. I2~2J 249 6, 45 = n^py Jos. 21, i8, now 'Ahjiit 3^ miles NE. of Jerusalem), — no doubt from riDPy having apparently a similar meaning to Dnn3 (cf. %j'cJ«M/ and D^O^j;, Dnn2, bothjw////«/ o^^^). 17. iTH , . . nmi] '//a^ been/ a plup. : for DJJ lan cf. Jud. 18, 7. I Ki. I, 7. d::'^*^' D3 hen dj] Cf. Ex. 4, 10. f/^. 5, 2. D^typDD Dn''\n] '^(21/^ (5(fm (continuously) seeking.^ Cf. Dt. 9, 7. 22. 24: T^w^j, § 135. 5 ; GK. § iier. 18. y"':^•1^] 'Evidently a clerical error for yc'IN, which many MSS. have, and which is expressed by all versions ' (Keil). 19. mo] 310, after "itTK, will be the verb {Lex. 37 3*^). 20. n'':rJN* nntry] Ehrlich would read 'N* '"Tjb'J? (Jud. 20, 10). K'^S Dntry is correct (GK. § 134®); but the type D''D'J^< W's^V is very rare and anomalous : 2 Ki. 2,16 (perhaps due to the following pTl ""^2 : Herner, Sytiiax der Zahlw. 106). Jer. 38, 10 (Ew. al. riK'?K')f . n'l'trjspi] The men being definite {20^), D''t:^:N^ is certainly what would be expected: comp. i, 11. 17, 12. nntJ'O] For the position, see on 14. 12. 21. n?.???1] Notice the pausal form with the small distinctive accent, pazer (Tenses, § 103 with n. 2). On i:j'23 niND, see on I 2, 16. 22. N3] No doubt, ' Joab is the principal person for the narrator' (Keil) : but, with 2NV1 "in nay preceding, N3 by Hebrew idiom ought to be plural. Read D''N3 (i. e. in the older orthography J2N3) : a D has dropped out before TIIJUD. 1X2 n''2D (see on I 12, 5). 24. "il^rt ^hl] ' and he is gone (with) a going' = 'and he is gone off,' — very idiomatic and forcible, not to be abandoned in favour of the more ordinary expression here offered by LXX nyT Nvn .*T]7'i 'J1 {Iv clprjvr) is manifestly derived merely from vv. 21''. 22^. 231": but while the narrator, and reporters, use the common QVU^l p^l, Joab characteristically expresses himself with greater energy "jp'^i yh^). At the same time, z'. 25 would doubtless be more forcible as an interrogative ; and it is very probable that Nvn has fallen out after '^hr\. 25. N3 inins? '•3] The regular order in such constructions: cf. Gen. 42, 9. 47, 4. Jos. 2, 3. Jud. 15, 10. 12. I 16, 2. 5. ^xurp] Why the abnormal (and incorrect) form ^^2^0 should be 250 77!^ Second Book of Samuel, substituted as Qre, unless for the sake of the assonance with ■JK^:1r^, is not apparent, 26. HTDH -in] The 'cistern of Sirah.' There is an 'Am Sarah, about a mile N. of Hebron, on the road to Jerusalem, which may be the place meant {DB. and EB. s. v.), 27. -lytJTi "iin ?n] The middle of the gate would scarcely be the place in which Joab could converse with Abner quietly. LXX Ik TrAayiW t^s TrvXrj'i = "lyt^H 'll'i,^ pN (see Lev. I, II. Nu. 3, 29. 35 Hebrew and LXX) ' to the side of the gate,' which is favoured also by the verb inD"'1 ' led aside.' v'CQ] a usage approximating curiously to the Aramaic : comp. )>I\^2> m quietude, quietly, in the Pesh. I 12, 11 al. (= '^Pl'). Is. 8, 6 (= ^W). Job 4, 13 (of the quiet of night). Ehrlich, however, for in^M 'h^l conjectures "^T^r) ''EmKi ; cf. v. 30. B'ronn m? in2''l] Probably ^K should be restored before K'Onn, in conformity with the construction elsewhere (2, 23. 4, 6. 20, 10). 28. p nnND] 15, I. 2 Ch. 32, 2 3t. "'"'' Oyo] Dyo, the acquittal being conceived as proceeding from Yahweh: comp. Nu. 32, 22 ^N1B'"'D1 nin''D D''''pJ Dn^^ll. 29. I^n''] Comp. Jer. 23, 19 = 30, 23 (of a tempest) D''yK>n K^Ki h^ ^in"-; Hos. II, 6. ^Nl] by"! Tno (see on I 12, 5); so 10 MSS. )o ma'' ^Ni] Cf. Jos. 9, 23. *I?D3 p'^inc] eUi is to be globular or round (especially of a woman's breasts): hence dii is M^ y/z^fr^ in which a star moves (Qor. 21, 34. 36, 40), and ixJj //^^ w/;o;7 of a spindle, Lat. verticillus, as ^?3 in Hebrew, Prov. 31, 19 (see EB. iv. 5277 f.). Here "1^3 was formerly (LXX (jKvrakT]\ Rabb. ; EVV.) commonly supposed to denote a staff : but (a) other words are elsewhere used in Hebrew to express this idea (see 2 Ki. 4, 29. 31, and especially Zech. 8, 4 i^ijy&'O B'''K1 D'*J3'' 3"iO nn), (3) there is no trace of such a meaning in the cognate languages (see Levy, Freytag, Lane), (c) the transference of the term to denote an object lacking the characteristic feature (the whorl) which it properly denotes, is improbable, and {d), even if it were so transferred, as the ' spindle ' was not more than some 1 2 inches long, it is not likely to have been applied to a walking-stick. Aq. Symm. ///. 26-)s 251 {arpaKTov), Jer. {/usutti), Pesh. ()Ijji.a:!o) render spindle ; and philo- logy and usage agree in supporting this rendering : the word, meaning properly ' whorl,' will have come naturally to suggest the spindle as a whole. David's words are an imprecation that Joab may always count among his descendants — not brave warriors, but — men fit only for the occupations of women. Comp. how ' Hercules with the distaff' was the type of unmanly feebleness among the Greeks. 30. -iJ2X^ lann] ^ as I 23, 10 (see note), and with 'i,'\r\ itself (in later Hebrew) Job 5, 2. The verse interrupts the narrative; and the 7 may be due to its being in fact (We. Bu. Now. Sm.) a late gloss. Ew. Klo., on the ground of LXX 8ta7rap€T7?/)oi}i'To, prefer to read ^^IfJ laid ambush for : but this would scarcely be a just description of the manner in which Joab actually slew Abner: nor does the preceding narrative imply that Joab and Abishai had done previously anything that could be so described. 31. HDD] wail; see on I 28, 3. ■IJ3X ''JS/'] i. e. preceding the bier in the funeral procession. 33. niDDn] not 'Z>/fl' Abner die?' (ni?n), but ' Was Abner on the way to die ? ' was this the end reserved for him ? For the impf. cf 2 Ki, 3, 27 his firstborn "J^D'' ^t^'^? who was to reign after him: 13, 14 the illness 13 niD'' ~\^ii which he 7oas to die of: Tenses, § 39/3; GK. § 107k. t. For the dagesh in 3, see GK. § lool. 34. nnDN"N?] N7 with the ptcp. is unusual, and to be imitated with caution: comp. Jer. 4, 22. \\i. 38, 15. Job 12, 3 (Ew. § 320^). Ez. 22, 24. Dt. 28, 61 : Tenses, § 162 n.; Lex. 519*^ b c. D^riB'm] 2. pair of bronze fetters : Jud. 16, 2it (GK. § 88^). ^1D:d] sc. ^Dun; comp. I 2, 13 t^^lli). On ^33, see on I 25, 25. Abner, David laments, has experienced a death that was un- deserved: he has died the death of a 733, a reprobate, godless person, whom an untimely end might be expected to overtake. There was nothing to prevent Abner from defending himself, had he suspected Joab's treachery (34*^); as it was (34^), he had succumbed to the treacherous blow of an assassin. 35. nn3n^] The verb is confined to this book (12, 17. 13, 5. 6. 10): so n"'"i3/bo^ 13, 5. 7. lot. nh3 occurs Lam. 4, 10; and ni"^3 1/^. 69, 2 2t. 252 The Second Book of Samuel, ON ""a] not =^ except, as v. 13: the two particles are to be separ- ated, ''3 introducing the oath, as I 14, 44, and DN expressing it {if . . ..' = surely not). HDIND b^ : Gen. 39, 23!. 36. 'y\ 733] ' as whatsoever the king did pleased all the people ' (EVV. ) would require i?3 "1C'N3 for h'2'2 (3 never having the force of a conjunction). The text can only be rendered, ' Like all that the king did, it (viz. his conduct on the present occasion) pleased all the people' (2ID being the verb, as v. 19). ?3 for 73D (LXX, Bu. Now.) yields a very abrupt sentence, not in accordance with Heb. style. 37. i!?Dno] So "1^ nn"'n nin'-D i Ki. 2, 15: cf. Jud. 14, 4 ■»"''» ^3 N-'H {Lex. 579^(1); and riND, as HDM mn^ JiND Jos, 11, 20 al. {Lex. 86b 4 b). 39. ']~i] tender, weak, opp. to b''t;'p, I^O niC'Dl] The contrast which, in virtue of the contrasted ideas connected by it, is implicit in the copula 1, would be expressed in English distinctly by and at the same time, and yet, or though (cf. Cant. I, 5). Ew. rendered, 'And I this day live delicately and am anointed as king,' etc. The sense thus attached to "J"! is defensible (Dt. 28, 54 i:yni 13 "l~in. Is. 47, i) : but the rendering labours under the disadvantage of obliterating the antithesis, which, nevertheless, seems to be designed, between "|1 and D''£i'p. MT. (so far as the consonants go) is presupposed by LXX (o-uyyev-^s = Tl misread as T^, see Lev. 18, 14. 20, 20: /cat Ka^eora/xeVos v-ko ySacrtAews = •qbp niK'Di). 4, I. Sn'^~P] 'LXX rightly inserts ntr3-::'^X before h'Wf,^ p: the omission in the Hebrew may perhaps be explained by the resemblance between (^j;3CN) nc'3K^^N and yc^M ' (Dr. Weir). VT "I3i''l] as Jer. 6, 24. Is. 13, 7 al., fig. for lost heart: the masc. as Zeph. 3, 16. 2 Ch. 15, 7 by GK. § 145P. 1^n33] a strong word, more than ' were troubled,' were alarmed, \}/. 48, 6. Jer. 51, 32 al. : elsewhere in early prose only I 28, 21. Gen. 45, 3. Jud. 20, 41. 2. Qnnj] guerilla bands; cf. 2 Ki. 5, 2 ; also I 30, 8. i Ki. 11, 24 ; and Gen. 49, 19 'As for Gad, a trooJ> may troop upon him; But he will troop upon their heel.' ///. j;—/V. 4 253 PINw^'P Vn] The text, as it stands, is not translateable. Read with LXX ^ixtt'-p (i?j;x'x!?) ri'ira-c^-vs^ vn. nnN3] i.e. Wells; mentioned as closely associated with Gibeon, Chephirah, and Qiryath-ye'arim in Jos. 9, 17, as Canaanite towns which long maintained their independence in Israel, and with Qiryath-ye'arim and Chephirah in Ezr. 2, 25 ( = Neh. 7, 29); and after Gibeon and Ramah, and before Mizpeh (Nebi Samwil) and Chephirah, in the list of Benjaminite cities in Jos. 18, 25 f +. It is generally identified with el-Birek, a village with several springs or ' wells,' 4 miles NNE. of Gibeon, and 9 miles N. of Jerusalem, on the great northern road : Buhl {Geogr, 173), however, and Now., on the strength of Eusebius' statement {Onom. 233, 83 f.) that it was 7 miles from Jerusalem on the road to Nicopolis {Amims), — which, if this were the present Jaffa road, would be at a point about 3 miles SW. of Gibeon, — prefer this site (which would also bring Be'eroth nearer to the cities with which it is associated in Jos. 9, 17. Ezr. 2, 25). Robinson (i. 452), however, placing the ' road to Nicopolis' more to the north, thinks el-Bireh compatible with Eusebius' description. hv 3C^•^n] Cf. Lev. 25, 31 2^n\ Y'\)Xr\ mtr hV; and with b, Jos. 13, 3 y^nn ""jyisb. 3. Dna DE' ViT*!] Ona is the ptcp. : ' and they continued (on I i8, 9) sojourning there,' viz. as D''"!!!, or protected foreigners (on i, 13). The Gibeonites, with no doubt the inhabitants of their dependent V towns (Jos. 9, 17), Chephirah, Be'eroth, and Qiryath-ye'arim, were not Israelite, but Amorite {ch. 21, 2); and the Beerothites had, for some reason, fled to Gittaim, — presumably the Gittaim mentioned Neh, II, 33t in a list of Benjaminite cities, next after Ramah, — where they sought and obtained protection as gerim. 4. ':i N22 ^^^ CJC' k'dh p] mc' k^dh p xini (without rvT\) would be excellent Hebrew ; but it is not supported by LXX, as Bu. claims : LXX connects W^T^ C'Dn p with what precedes, and then for riTn has (cal oStos. With MT. cf. 2 Ki. 8, 17. 14, 2. 15, 2. 33. HTSna] Ehrlich would point nTpn3=niQnn3 (see p. 37 «.), remarking that the Qal (Dt. 20, 3. i/^. 31, 23. 116, 11. Job 40, 23t) is used of hurry and alarm in general, but the Nif. (I 23, 26. 2 Ki. 7, 15 Kt. i/r. 104, 7t) of hurry and alarm m flight. nc'Tso] In I Ch. 8, 34 {bis). 9, 40^ by? nnjp, in 9, 40^ bymo. One of these forms is certainly the original name. There was a time when the name ^yn owtier or master (of the place or district)^ was 1 See art. Baal in DB., EB., and (most fully) in Hastings' Encycl, of Rel. and Ethics, ii. 283 ff. Cf also above, p. 63 f. 254 The Second Book of Samuel, applied innocently to Yahweh \ as Owner of the soil of Canaan : but, in consequence no doubt of the confusion which arose on the part of the unspiritual Israelites between Yahweh and the Phoenician god ' Baal/ the habit was discountenanced by the prophets, especially by Hosea (2, 18), and ultimately fell out of use. Proper names, therefore, in which ^ya originally formed part had to be disguised, or otherwise rendered harmless. This was generally done by substituting T\^2. shame'^ for l?ya, as in the case of Ishbaal (above, on 2, 8), and of Meribbaal the name of Saul's grandson here, and of one of his sons by Rizpah in 21, 8. In the case of the latter name the change to n::>3nno (or njJ'nntt) appears not to have been thought sufficient ; and the name was further disguised by being altered to nB'3''QD, which was probably taken to mean 'One who scatters or disperses (cf. Dt. 32, 26 DH'^NDN, — though this word is certainly corrupt) Shame I' Jerubbaal (Gideon), ' the Master contends' being interpreted to mean ' One that contends with Baal' (Jud. 6, 32), was suffered to remain, except in ch. 1 1, 21, where it was altered to ]QX\^besheth. In less read books, however, the names remained sometimes unchanged : thus ^yaC'N and byanno are preserved in Ch., as also yn^^ya, 'the Master knotvs,' the name of a son of David, called in ch. 5, 16 j?n>^N ' God knows*,' and the name of David's hero T^hvi i Ch. 12, 5, and of his officer pn^y3 27, 28 ^ It will be observed that these names are particularly frequent * See DB. i. 210''; EB. i. 403 ; Encyd. of Rel. and Ethics, ii. 291 f. 2 For T^l shame as a designation of Baal, see Jer. 3, 24. 11, 13. Hos. 9, 10; comp. in LXX i Ki. 18, 19. 25 ol trpocpTJTai rijs alaxvvrjs. Dillmann, in an elaborate essay devoted to the subject in the Monatsberichte der Kon.-Pretiss. Acadeinie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, 1881, June 16, observing the strong tendency shewn not only in LXX, but in other ancient versions as well, to obscure or remove the name of Baal, thinks that the habit of substituting oXaxivt] for it is the explanation of the strange jj Baa\ of certain parts of LXX (e. g. Jeremiah constantly,— 2, 23. 7, 9. 11, 13. 17. 19, 5 al. Hos. 2, 10. 13, i : so Rom. 11, 4): BaaX was left in the text, but the fem. of the art. was an indication that alaxvvr] was intended to be read. No traces of an androgytious Baal have been found in Phoenician Inscriptions. ' Lucian has throughout (except 21, 8) the intermediate form Mf/i^/ySooA. Perhaps this is a survival of the first stage in the transforming process. * Comp. Jud. 9, 46 nna ^n for nnn ^yn 8, 33. 9, 4. * Comp. also 7y3 itself, as a pr. n., i Ch. 5, 5. 8, 30 ( = 9, 36). IV. 4-10 255 in the families of Saul and David, both zealous worshippers of Yahweh (comp. among other things in the case of Saul the name of his son fDJiri''). ^yaa^D will be a name of the same form (a rare one in Hebrew: above on I i, 20) as the Nabataean i'NC'po (Cooke, NSI. 78, 2), and bxaT^C'D, ^S'3t:^nD (above, p. 18 noie). 5. nrn Dnj] Gen. 18, i; I u, 9 Qret. Dnn:*!"! a^t^'D riNj The cogn. accus. 23K^O is here not the place of reclining {■=couc/i), but the aci of reclining (as in the expression 13? aSK'D Jud. 21, II al,, and ck. 17, 28 [see note]), in the present context =jz'.?j/a; 'was taking his noon-tide rest.' 6. c'Dnn-^N in3''T D"'Dn 'nn^ (' to whom it was for my giving') must be explained on the analogy of 2 Ki. 13, 19 ntanp percutiendian erai quinquies aut sexies, — an extension of a usage more common in present time, Hos. 9, 13 etc. {Tenses, § 204). The clause can hardly express David's view of the transaction : he could not think that the Amaleqite really deserved a reward for his tidings: it must express what David ought to have done in the judgment of the Amaleqite himself, or of men in general unable to appreciate David's regard for Saul (hence ' forsooth '). Keil : * that I might give him a reward for his good tidings ' (ironically), treating IK'N zs— namely (Ew, 338^) : so substantially RV. But such a sense of ItJ'N cannot be substantiated : so that, if this be felt to be the meaning of the passage, we must follow the suggestion of We. to ' omit "IC'N, as due to a false interpretation of 1^ Tin^, which in its turn arose from a mistaking of the ironical sense of mc>2.' So Now. Sm. ; cf. GK. § 114^ n. Ehrl. the impossible meaning ' get up.' The following words, 'y\ D''nD3n nxv as they do not make a sentence, must in some way be emended : and we may either, with AV., read Hlini 'and smite the lame and the blind who are hated (Qre) of David's soul ' (on account viz. of what is said of them in v. 6), or (though the connexion is then poor) read HXib' for IW^, i.e. 'and (= for) the lame and the blind David's soul hateth.' The last words of the v. can only mean (RV. ;«.) 'The blind and the lame (i. e. mendicants) shall not [or do not] come into the house,' i. e. into the Temple (so LXX): the origin of a common saying (cf. Gen. 22, 14; I 19, 24) about mendicants being excluded from the Temple V. 8-g 261 is thus explained. But the saying is unrelated to v. 6 in its natural and obvious sense ; and in fact v. 8^* seems to be an old gloss, added by one who supposed 6^' to mean 'Except thou remove the blind and the lame (in the Israelite army) who say, David will not enter in here : ' comp. the Targ., which paraphrases : ' Thou wilt not enter in here except thou remove the simiers and the guilty, who say, David will not enter in here ; ' and in 8, ' And the sinners and the guilty David's soul abhorreth : therefore they say, The sinners and the guilty enter not into the house/ Dhorme takes the same view of 113if, though he restores the text differently : 'And David said in that day, \Vhoso smiteth the Jebusites, and reacheth . . . [And the son of Zeruiah went up (of. 1 Ch. 11, 6'^)] by the water-channel . . . (Gloss on v.d: As for [GK. § 117'] the lame and the blind, they are hated of David's soul : therefore they say, The blind and the lame shall not enter into the Temple).' Budde, regarding the words in v. 8 as spoken after the capture of Zion, and observing that we have a right to expect some thought worthy of a king (which hatred of enemies is not), and that David actually (24, 18) spared some of the Jebusites, conjectures: 'Whoso smiteth a Jebusite, toucheth Ids ozv?t 7ieck (i.e. brings his own life into danger) ; the lame and the blind David's soul hateth iioi ' (nS n(K)-l^|I for nXI mJVn ; and nNrC* N^ for •IXJ:^') : cf. G. A. Smith, Jerti- salem, ii. 32. The conjecture is clever: it gives '1 yjj its proper sense ; and it attributes to David a fine and chivalrous thought ; but it is too bold to command acceptance. The Chronicler (I 11, 6) for the whole of v. 8 has H^O ^3 T'n IDN^I \^^-b ^n>i nn-iv p ^NV mic^Nia i^y^i n^^i trxi^ n\T' ^J1t^♦N-Q '•Din"' Whether, however, this interpretation is correct, and words such as tJ'X"17 HTl"' "W^^ have fallen out in Sam., is very doubtful. riDD ^3 is ' every one who smites ' (cf. 2, 23. Nu. 21, 8. Jud. 19, 30. I 2, 13. 36. 10, 11), not, as would be needed if such a reward as "icSl t^'N■^? n\n^ were promised, 'any one who smites : ' Gen. 4, 16 hardly proves the contrary; and where, in such sentences, an individual is in view, the wording is different (as Jud. i, 12 . . . ~IDD"n^"lp JIN HD^ "Iti'S. II, 31. 1 17, 25 -j^Dn inti'y "i^a"" ic'i^ t^'^sn iThi. nu. 16, 6. 17, 20). 9. nn P"'"i] I Ch. II, 8 n-^yn p""*), which is supported by LXX here (/cat w/co8oV7/o-ev aurr/v ttoAiv = "i''y ^h^l, Bu.,' — the words being differ- ently divided), and may be the original reading. Nibon] So in the ||, i Ch. 11, 8. i Ki. 9. 15. 24. 11, 27. 2 Ch. 32, 5t : NI^D n''3 near Shechem, Jud. 9, 6. 20 ; and also 2 Ki. 12, 2 1 f. Targ. for this Millo has always NlT'^D, the word which also represents 262 The Secofid Book of Samuel, ^?^, the mound of earth cast up by the besiegers of a town. The word NI^O means apparently Filling ; and probably denotes a mound or rampart of earth. Cf. G. A. Smith, Jerusalem, ii. 40 f. < nn''3l] nri^? housewards = inwards, as Ex. 28, 26 al. 10. SnJl] for the construction, see on I 14, 19. 11. ^E'-in] the form being for '•^^ri: GK. § ^^b"^. 11-25=1 Ch. 14, 1-16. 13. D^C'IT'O] I Ch. 14, 3 D^cn"i''3, the more probable reading. 14. CI'??!]] "li^^ 12, 14. Ex. I, 22. Jos. 5, 5. Jen 16, 3t. The punctuation in all these cases is irregular : by analogy the picp. Tipjn, Dnb^n is what would be required by the syntax. On the form, cf. Ew. § 1^$^; Stade, § 224; Kon. ii. 148 f ; GK. § 84^6. 24: the parallels have all a substantival force (""133, liSE^, "1133, etc.). It is not clear with what right Hitzig (on Jer. /. c.) says that ' in virtue of passages such as 2 S. 12, 14 the punctuation "l^^^ is correct;' and the explanation adopted (apparently) by Dillmann on Jos. /. c. that the form is meant to express ' in contradistinction to 0^1?^ the idea of succession ' (' soil das " fort und fort, nach und nach " ausdriicken ') is incompatible with ch. 12, 14 (of a single child). In i Ki. 3, 26. 27, and even in the parallel i Ch. 14, 4, in each of which passages (notice in Ch. the following 1^5 vn IK'n) the substantival form would have been in place, the word is pointed as a ptcp. ("tv*!?, Cinp^n). The explanation in GK. /. c. is artificial. 14^-16. The list of David's sons, born in Jerusalem, is repeated, I Ch. 3, 5-8, and also 14, 4-7, with the following variations: — 2 Sam. 5. I Ch. 3. T Ch. 14. 2-5 (naiK^, fnJ, n»!'K>, '•\ny) without variation. 8. ' nj: « ^33 9-1 1. (JS3, yss yDB'''^t<) without variation. 12. i« yT'^N ^ yn^^K ^ yT^ya 13. D^D'^^X t:^2"'^iS D^D^^N yit3^ is perhaps an abbreviated, 'caritative' form, for r\'>)i'Q'^ (Lidzbarski, Ephemeris, ii. 21 ; Pratorius, ZDMG. Ivii. (1903), p. 774). V. ()-20 263 Cf. above, p. 19. In No. 12 y*T'^y2 is evidently the true name, changed for the sake of avoiding i?y3 to yn^^N (comp. on 4, 4). LXX in I Ch. 14, 7 read with MT, yi^^ya (Swete, i.e. Codd. B and Sin., BaAeySac; Cod. A BaXXiaSa ; Lucian BaaAtaSa ; other MSS. BaAiaSa). In the existing LXX text of 2 Sam. there are two renderings of the Hst ; and in the second, which appears to be derived from Ch., the form with 7y3 is Hkewise expressed (BaoAci/x-a^ : so Luc. BaaAiAa^). 5, 17. David and the Philisiines. 17. vyi] from the low-lying Philistine plain; cf. on I 29, 9. mi^T^n ^N ^^'y'^\ The verb Ti> shews that the miVO referred to cannot be identified with the n"il^*0 of Zion, v. 9 : for that lay on an elevation, and the phrase used in connexion with it is always n^y. This miVD is no doubt the one in the wilderness of Judah, which David held (I 22, 4), — probably, in fact (see on I 22, i) the 'hold' of 'Adullam (cf. II 23, 14, comparing 13). The natural position of 5, 17-6, I is immediately after the account of David's being anointed king at Hebron (j'. 3) ; and here, or before v. 6, it no doubt originally stood (Kennedy, pp. 215, 218). David would of course both 'go down' from Hebron to 'Adullam, and also (tj. 19) 'go up' from 'Adullam to the Vale of Rephaim, close to Jerusalem on the SW. 18. 1N3 CnC'^ai] ' Now the Philistines had come ' (cf on I 9, 15). IK'OJ'l] were let go, spread abroad, as Jud. 15, 9. Cf. D''^t:jl I 30, 16. D\S*S"> poy] Probably the broad upland plain, el-Baq'a, rich in cornfields and olive-gardens (Is. 17, 5 f.), with low hills on each side, which extended from a hill at the west end of the valley of Hinnom (Jos. 15, 8) for some 3 miles SW. of Jerusalem. 19. n^yj^n] from the miVtD oiv. 17. 20. O'l^lD ^y3] Perhaps originally (Paton, Encycl. of Rel. and Ethics, ii. 286a) 'Ba'al of the breakings forth,' the name of a fountain bursting forth out of the hill-side, so called from the local 'Ba'al,' who was supposed to inhabit it (see on the local Ba'als supposed to inhabit trees, mountains, springs, etc., DB. or EB. s.v., and esp. Paton's learned art. just referred to ; cf. also above, p. 63 f. ; many names of places embody this belief, as Baal-Hermon, Baal-Meon, Baal-Tamar, etc.). As the name of the place is explained here, however, Ba'al 264 The Second Book of Samuel, does not denote the Canaanite or Phoenician god of that name, but is a title of Yahweh (cf. on 4, 4) ; and D''^"iD ^yn, in the sense of ' Master of breakings forth ' (upon the foe), is understood as commemorating the victory (comp. '•DJ niiT' Ex. 17, 15; ryh^ n'ln"' Jud. 6, 24). The explanation, ' Place of breaches ' (Keil ; RV. 77iarg.), is not probable : not only are the analogies quoted against it, but i?y3 in the sense of owner, possessor, though often used of human beings (e.g. "i^^ ^V"^ 2 Ki. I, 8) is very rarely applied to inanimate objects (Is. 41, 15 : Lex. 1271^), '31 )*"ID] ' hath broken down my enemies before me, like the breaking of waters ' through a dam. Cf. of breaking down a wall, i/^. 80, 1 3 nnnj mns ntzh; and '2 ps ('make a breach in'), Ex. 19, 22. 24; '2 |'-i.3 na ch. 6, 8. 21. Dn"'3VyJ LXX Toi>s Oeovs avTwv, and Ch. (I 14, 12) DHM^S', — doubtless the original reading. l^tJ'JwSI -in m\y')~\ See £B. ii. 1918 an illustration of an Ass. warrior bearing in his hand a captured idol. The Chronicler, in order to leave no doubt as to what David did with the idols, sub- stitutes Um "ID-|L^''1 Tin "ID5<''1. 23. rhvn i6] Add DDNipi? LXX, which is required by the sequel. 3pn] The Hi/, is anomalous. Either n has arisen by dittography from n^yn, and the Qal 3b (cf. LXX a-rroa-Tpicjiov) should be restored ; or (Bu.) the word is used in a military sense. Lead round (thy men) : cf. the seemingly intrans. W'^ and n"'LJ' (on I 15, 2), and "j^'o Jud. 4, 6. 20, 37, and perhaps 5, 14. nnnnx ^n] So 2 Ki. 9, 18. 19. Cf. nun ^n 2 Ki. n, 15 : pno ^x Dt. 23, II ah ; nnn h^ i Ki. 8, 6. Zech. 3, 10. 'y\ nN3l] and come to them off the front of (m our idiom : in front of) . . .: cf. Nu. 22, 5 \bi3p nt^'r Nim. n\X32] Read, with LXX and i Ch. 14, 14 D^X32n. 24. \Tl] and let it ht . . . : a permissive command : Tenses, § 121 Obs. ; and I i o, 5 note. my\* ^ip ns'] ' the sound of a stepping.' hp may be sufificiently defined by the gen. my^f (cf. Lev. 7, 8): but i Ch. 14, 15 has mv'^n (cf. GK. § XI 7d). pnn IX] 'look sharp is our colloquial equivalent' (Sm.). In V. 20 — VI. 2 265 Ch. paraphrased, with much loss of originality and vigour, by NVn IN N^y will have gone {ox\}i\ (GK. § 106°). '3 ni3n7] The 1 is partitive, ' to make a smiting in ' {Lex. SSt"). 25. y33tD] LXX airb Va^awv, Ch. fiy^JD. This is better than ynj (on 1 13, 2), which, being 5 miles NN^. of Jerusalem, is in the wrong direction altogether; but Gibeon {el-Jib, 5 miles NN^F. of Jerusalem : on 2, 12) is not much better : as Sm. remarks, ' Both Geba' and Gibeon are too far from the Vale of Rephaim for the pursuit to begin at either one.' To judge from the large maps, also, there is no natural route down from el-Jib to Gezer. If, however, Geba' were the name of a place, not otherwise mentioned, near Jerusalem, on the road to Qaryet el-'Enab (Qiryath-ye'arim), the site would suit excellently ; for this road leads straight down to Gezer. The allusion in the second clause of Is. 28, 21* (Dp^ D^lf"lD "IH^ '•3 T^T py^n proya nin^) may be not to this event, but to Jos. 10. ~in] Now Tell Jezer, 19 miles WNW. of Jerusalem, and 12 miles below Qaryet el-'Enab. The site, as is now well known, has been recently most successfully excavated : see, for some account of the principal results, the writer's ' Schweich Lectures ' on Modern Research as illustrating the Bible (1909), pp. 46-80, 88-98. 6. Removal of the Ark to the ' City of David! 6, I. fjOM] for P]DN^V, as ^Dh i^. 104, 29 (GK. § 68^) : cf on I 15, 5. Whether this verse (with the omission of "liy, which may have been added by a scribe, who inadvertently supposed fiD''1 to come from ^iD'') is really the introduction to v. 2 ff., is uncertain. It may form the sequel to 5, i 7-24 (in its original position : see on 5, 17), and perhaps at the same time (without Tiy) the introduction to 5, 6-10, See Kennedy, p. 218. 2-12^=1 Ch. 13, 5-14; between 12''^ and 12^ the Chronicler inserts 14, i — 15, 24; 12^-14 is expanded and varied in i Ch. 15, 25-27; 15-193 = 1 Ch, 15, 28 — 16, 3 (with variations); i Ch. 16, 4-42 is another insertion; 19^-20^^=1 Ch. 16, 43 (tdv. 20^-23 being omitted in Ch.). The variations between the two narratives are here remarkably striking and instructive. In particular the earlier narrative makes no mention of the Levites; the later authority is careful to supply the omission. 2. mi.T 'hv^'o'] In I Ch. 13, 6 miiT^ iK^N Dny* nnp W nn^ya; and this is the sense which is required : Qiryath Ye'arim is called 266 The Second Book of Samuel, nbp Jos. 15, 9. 10, and ^yaTinp tb. 60. 18, 14 (and 15 LXX): doubtless, therefore, rniiT' hv^ io Baal of Jiidah must here be re- stored, the description ' of Judah ' being added to distinguish this Ba'al from other places of the same name (in Simeon, Jos. 19, 8, in Dan, ib. 44 : cf mi.T Dn^TT'n). min^ ^y3 seems first to have been miswrilten mirT" h"^"!; and then, this being interpreted as = ' citizens of Judah,' the partitive •>? was prefixed, in order to produce some sort of connexion with the preceding clause. The place must have been originally sacred to Ba'al. On its site, see on 16, 21. Ivy . . . I^'N] ' over which is called a name, (even) the name of etc. The phrase used betokens ownership: see on 12, 28. Omit one DC' with LXX. The distance of V^y from TC'N suggests that the clause is glossed: read probably V^y '"i '•• DE' NnpJ It^^X. In I Ch. 13, 6 Xl^ N"ipj "iK^x is misplaced strangely to the end of the verse. 3^-4. The words v. 3 end-i^^ nc'x nniUN* n^no ins&"'i :nt^in T\'), ran away (Maurer, Roed. in Thes.), or (by conjecture) slipped (Keil, Klo. : RV. stumbled) ; these renderings are, however, philologically questionable. LXX on -rrepiicnraa-ev avrrjv (^'^9?') o fioo-^os (in l Ch. 13 1^€kXlv€v avTTjv); Targ. both here and i Ch. \Ti:i» {^. threw it down: ? TiliJO as 2 Ki. 9, 33); Vulg. calcitrabant^ (probably based on Aq. or Symm., whose renderings here have not been preserved) : in I Ch. bos quippe lasciviens paullulum inclinavernt earn. 7. ^{i'n ^Jy] n^K' is a very rare root in Hebrew : in Aramaic it has the sense of to act in error or neglect Job 19, 4 Targ. = Heb. rWE' (cf. the ]S!if. in 2 Ch. 29, 11) ; in Af'el, to cause to act in error, mislead Job 12, 16 ''i5K'n = Heb. nsB'P (cf. 2 Ki. 4, 28 Heb. do not mislead me): the subst. v^ means error, neglect Ezr. 4, 22. 6, 9. Dan. 3, 29. 6, 5 : in the Targ. = n3^r? or njjip Gen. 43, 12; Lev. 4, 2. 5, 18. Nu. 15, 24. 25 al. ^tiTi here is commonly (since Targ. vnc'NT ?y) explained from this root ' because oi the error :' but (i) TV^ is scarcely a pure ' The Clementine text adds * et declinaverunt cam ;' but this is not found in the best MSS. of the Vulgate. 268 The Second Book of Samuel, Hebrew word : where it occurs, it is either dialectical (2 Ki. 4) or late (2 Ch.) ; so that its appearance in early Hebrew is unexpected ; (2) the unusual apocopated form (^K' for "h^) excites suspicion ^ Ewald explained k'^T^y in the sense of the Syriac JJi*^ ^_"» suddenly (e.g. Nu. 6, 9. 8, 19 Pesh.); but this is open in even a greater degree to the same objection as the explanation error ; and though ^y is used in Hebrew in the expression of certain adverbial ideas (as ipB' ^y, jlifi ?y : on I 23, 23), the word associated with it is expressed generally, and is not provided with the article. Ch. has ■lt^'X i'y pisn py n* ^7:^• ; and when the strangeness of the Hebrew expression here used is considered, it will hardly be deemed too venturesome to regard it as a mutilated fragment of the words cited from Ch., w^hich were either still read here in their integrity by the Chronicler, or (as the sense is sufficiently plain without them) were introduced here as a gloss from the parallel text of Ch., and afterwards became corrupted. D\ni:Nn piN' Dy] Dy as Jud. 19, 11 etc. LXX add evwTriov roO 6€o{'. = D^^^^* •'js^ which in i Ch. 13, 10 (Heb. and LXX) stands /// place of n\n^Nn p-iN Dy. Perhaps that was the original reading. 8. Nipi] As 2, 1 6. LXX Ktti iK^Bri, reading ^^.i^!! (or para- phrasing). 10. "T'DH^] Cf. "11D of turjiwg aside into a house in Jud. 4, 18. 18, 3. 19, II. 12. 15. by] Read 7N, as i Ch. 13, 13 ; cf. on I 13, 13. n^3 inL:)''l] and turned it aside to the house, etc. Exactly so, Nu. 22, 23 linn nnbn!? pns*n-nx nyba 71, DIN nay] The analogy of ^^X^;^)^, nnny, bsnny, bxnny (cf. EB. iii, 3284), and of the numerous Phoenician, Aramaic, and Arabic names compounded with Tny and s^ and the name of a deity ^, create ^ LXX (Cod. B) omits the word : Cod. A and Luc. have km tt) -npoireTdq, whence Jerome ' super temeritate.' But j-ashness is not the idea expressed by the root. ' Cf. the Phoen. nnn:^'y^ny, mp^may, pc'Nnny, ^ymny (see further instances in CIS. I. p. 365 ; Lidzbarski, Nordsem. Epigraphik, 332-5 ; Cooke, NSI. 373). For Aram, names, see Lidzb. and Cooke, as cited : for Arabic names, Wellh., Reste Arab. Heideniums'^, pp. 2-4. The pr. n. DHNnny occurs at Carthage {CIS. I. 295. 4) ; but without any further clues to its meaning than we possess for VI. y-iy 269 a somewhat strong presumption that, though nothing more is at present known definitely about a god bearing this name, mx in mx 13y is the name of a deity ^ : Obed-edom, it will also be remem- bered, was not an Israelite, but a Philisii7ie. It is true, there are some names of this form, in which "I3y, XjC is compounded into the name of a king " (as nmmny ' servant of Aretas,' Cooke, NSI. 82. 5, cf. p. 224): mx does not, however, seem to be a likely name for a king; and 'servant of men' is not a Hkely explanation of the name. In a few cases the second element in such names is perhaps the name of a tribe ^; so there remains \hQ possibility that this is the case with ms* nny. II. JTia] JTiaa TDD (see on I 12, 5); and so II 13, 20; but in each case unnecessarily : see p. 37 n. 2. 13. As both We. and Keil rightly observe, the Hebrew states only that a sacrifice was offered, when those bearing the ark had advanced six steps : as soon, namely, as it appeared that it could be moved from the resting-place with impunity, the sacrifice was offered, partly as a thanksgiving that God's anger had been appeased, and partly as an inauguration of the ceremony that was to follow. In order to express that a sacrifice was offered at every six steps, the Hebrew would have read nnn . . . (nyv or) ny:^"' DN ^^^1 (Gen. 31, 8; Nu. 21, 9: Tenses, § 136 8 Obs.). 14. "I3"I3D] Only here and v. 16 : was circling about. 13 mSN] See on I 2, 18. 15. C^yo] were bringing tip : note the ptcp. naiK' hp3i nynnn] Cf. Amos 2, 2 naic^ h'\p2 nyinnn (of the shout of victory) : also Jos. 6, 5 for a similar combination, i/^. 47, 6 (though the Psalm itself belongs to a much later date) appears to be based on this verse : -ID'IK' h^pi nw nyinnn D'-n^'X n^y. The nsitr was not a metal 'trumpet,' but a horn: see the writer's Joel arid Amos (in the Cambr. Bible), pp. 144-6. the Ileb. DIX "iny. The title DnS* I^^D, applied to a /cing {CIS. I. p. 365), does not throw any light upon it. 1 Comp. W. R. Smith, I\cl. Sent} 42 f. ; EB. iii. 3462 w. 2 Noldeke, in Euting's lYabat. Inschriften (1885), p. 32 f. ; Wellh. I.e. p. 4. 3 Wellh. /. c. ; cf. Cooke, p. 224. 270 The Second Book of Samuel^ 16. riMl] I Ch, 15, 29, correctly, Tlil. Cf. on I i, 12. n^y] Prefix IV with LXX (?a)9), and i Ch. 15, 29. "iDintDI TTSo] leapifig (lit. shewing agility^ and circling about. Both uncommon words : TTQ Gen. 49, 24t in Qal ; as Arabic shews, to be active or agile, i Ch. 15, 30 substitutes more ordinary words, np"i» pnCDI : skipping (i//. 114, 4. 6 ; Job 21, 11) ^mA playing {v. 5). 18. n^iyn] Collectively (comp. D'-^Dn Ez. 33, 21 ; nsnn often, etc.): cf. the plural, v. 17. 19. ... C^^ND^] In the || 1 Ch. 16, 3 the more ordinary C"'NO T\'V^ "lyi (I 22, 19 al.) is substituted. The idiom jrD7 is, however, fully justified, not only by Ex. 11, 7. 2 Ch. 15, 13, but also by its use in other analogous expressions, for the purpose of denoting the iermitms a quo in space or time (7, 6) ; see Thes. s. v. fo ; Lex. 583*'. n^n] Elsewhere only in P, Ex. 29, 2 etc. (13 times). "IDw'n] The meaning of this word, which occurs besides only in the II I Ch. 16, 3, is quite unknown. As Lagarde points out ^ so-called ' tradition ' is here remarkably at variance with itself — {a) LXX in Sam. ea)(apLTr]v "^ , in Ch. (aprov eVa) apTOKOiriKov (Lucian KoWvpiryv ^) ', [b) Aq. Symm. afxvpLrrjv * ; (c) Vulg. Sam. assaturam bubulae carnis unam, Ch. partem assae carnis bubulae ; {d) Pesh. Sam. iauu {frus- tum carnis^\ Ch. ]•«. jlisxso {portio una); (c) Targ. Sam. "tn 31^2; Ch. (late) Nmnn Nnc'N p in :% (= a sixth part of a bullock) «; (/) Abu'l Walid, col. 742 (Rouen gloss) J». ixia^ {segmentum carnis) ; {g) Rashi (in agreement with Targ. Ch.) "isn nc'tJ'D int< ; {h) Kimchi "1C^3D *inx p?n, but mentioning also as a possible explanation the view of the Rabbis [Pesahifu 36^), also found in Targ. Ch. and Rashi, that it is a compound word (^SlllJi ^}^) signifying "iM n'tri;*3 iriN. It is evident that these renderings are either conjectures based upon 1 Mitthcilungen, i. (1884), p. 214. "^ 'lati'J^ probably read as 131^^ : cf. hpkiravov for p"n I 13, 21 ; tokos for "jri »|/. 72, 14 al., etc. (comp. p. 78 «.). * Or Xar^avov Trjyavov. But the renderings of IDCX and nt^'^JJ'X have apparently been transposed: for \ayavov dvij Trjjuivov = i^^^l^ii in Samuel. * ' Vox aliunde incognita, cuius loco dixop'iTtjs ( = ntJ''C'N i Ch. LXX) ex duopa (quod Hesychio est (refxlSaKis e<(>6fj avy ixekirt, Athenaeo autem neKiroj/M irfnefj.- p.ivov) fortasse reponendum ' (Dr. Field). ^ =nn3 Ez. 24, 4 (Payne Smith, Thes. s.v.). « Cf. the marg. of the Reuchl. Cod. (Lagarde, p. xix, 3) Nlinn XH^K' fD "in. VI. 16-20 271 the context, or depend upon an absurd etymology, as though "i£"j'X were in some way compounded of c^ and *13 and meant the sixth part of a bullock ! Upon Kimchi's explanation are based the render- ings of Seb. Munster (1534-5), 'frustum carnis unum;' of the Geneva Bible (1560), 'a piece of flesh;' and of RV. AV. 'a good piece (of flesh) ' depends evidently on a combination of "iStJ'N with IDC'i; but the application of the root, in such a connexion, is ques- tionable; granting that *isc*N = ' something fair,' its employment to denote in particular 'a fair piece of flesh' is not a probable specializa- tion of its meaning. Lud. de Dieu, perceiving the impossibility of the Rabbinical etymology, endeavoured to reach the same general sense by a derivation from the Ethiopic t\L.l:, sa/ara, to vieasiirc, ffofl^C^'; mas/art, measure (Matth. 7, 2 al.), supposing "IDC^N to have thus denoted ' dwiensam sacrificii partem unam, quantum nempe unius sextae partis, in quas sacrificium aequaliter dividi solebat, mensura continebat.' Ges. and Roed. (in Thes.) adopt the same derivation, though not limiting the 'measure,' as was done by De Dieu, to a particular fraction of the sacrifice. But irrespectively of the fact pointed out by Lagarde that Eth. rt<{.d: = Heb. "IDD (not IDC')) the sense obtained is insufficient and lame : between two words denoting distinctly two kinds of food, the narrator would have placed a word denoting simply ' a measure ' — ' a cake of bread, a measure, and a cake of raisins' — both the amount, and the nature, of the substance measured being left undefined. Under such circumstances, it is wisest to acknowledge that we do not know what the word means, and cannot propose for it a plausible etymology ^ n*;:'''C'S] li, Hos. 3, I. Cant. 2, 5t. Either raisin-cakes {Thes.), or (Kennedy, EB. ii. 1569) cakes of dough kneaded with grapes. 20, n333 no] How the king hath got him honour to-day ... I (Not ' How honourable was . . . ,' which would be the ptcp. "^I^J. ' Glorious ' of EVV. destroys the point of David's reply at the end of v. 23, where the same verb is rendered ' had in honour!) For the medial sense of 1 Cf. in the Michlol Yophi (Dan. 4, 24) T-^y IDC''' "'^bo |D HD'' p^H ^'1 IN. 2 Ewald's roast meat {Hist. iii. 127), from "IDti' ^ fllK*, is very improbable, both on account o£ the E' = B', and because f)"l'tJ' is not to roast, but to bum up. 272 The Second Book of Samuel, n33J, to get oneself honour (GK. § 516), cf. Ex. 14, 4. 17. 18. Ez. 28, 22 al. niriDN*] n^X is the one noun in Heb., in which the plur. is enlarged by the addition of n (nin^N). In the cognate languages we have ^ — ]t<;^Lr, V^r, ^^^^^.\ ^\:^A fathers. Jl'opo?! '"l^OW, ^^4--t 7nolhers. )l'o*:so('^ nnnos (but Arab. <^\}^\) hojidmaids. Jo^aa*. husbands' mothers. jr©)^/ hands (in fig. sense, supports). )lc»:sa*., 5;, etc. Ewald, however, § 240^', supposes the nf. ads. to have passed into the wf c. by a species of attraction, under the influence of the preceding 3 ; and this is not, perhaps, impossible. No other case of the inf. c. being strengthened by the inf. abs. seems to occur : so we are not in a position to say whether HP?? ni73n3 or riiP33 ni72n3 is more in accordance with usage. GK. § 75y treats nibj as a faulty repetition of ni^jn. D^pin] So Jud. 9, 4. II, 3. (LXX Twv 6/3xovyii€Vcoi/=D1i?^n.) For iriN, see on 2, 18. 1 Cf. Noldeke, SBAlz. 1882, p. 117S f. ^ Comp. ^^^N viyfattm-s, Cooke, NSl. 63, 16 (from Zenjirli). ^ Cf. Noldeke, Mdnddisciie Gramm., pp. 171, 172. VI. 20-22 2'J'^ 2 1. nin> ^:sh] LXX after m.T expresses nin> -im nj^lX (Luc. niiT 'H). The words will have fallen out of MT. by o/xoioreX^vTov (Th, We. etc.). Tpnx is needed for the sense ; and the whole may be sj^enuine : but neither '^ "jni nor 'i »n seems required ; and the variation between them rather suggests (Klo. Bu. Kit. ap. Kautzsch) that each was a later addition, made in different MSS. : the scribe of the archetype of ]\IT. and the other versions passed from '^ to '', and omitted both the genuine ipiN and the addition 'i (\-i) in3. T3J] Some 30 MSS. and LXX (et?) Ty^b, which is better; cf. I 25, 30. 22. The verse is difBcult. It is best to begin it with 21^ ^np^t^'^. {a) Ew. We. Now. : ' And if (Jer. 20, 9 : Tenses, § 148 ; cf. on 19, 3) I play before Yahweh, 22 I count myself still too small for this (to play before Him), and am abased in mine own eyes ; and with the bondmaids (slave-girls) whom thou hast spoken of, with /hem should I seek (?) to get me honour ? ' David says that he is unworthy to play and dance before Yahweh, and the opinion which the slave- girls entertain of him is of no consequence, {d) Th. Sm. Bu. Dh., and substantially EVV. : 'And I will play before Yahweh, 22 and will be yet more looked down upon than this (more than I have been to-day), and will be abased in mine eyes (LXX, Th. Sm. Bu. Dh., more pointedly, " in /h'ne eyes ") ; but with the bondmaids of whom thou hast spoken, with them I shall be had in honour.' Michal's taunt that he had degraded himself in the eyes of the bondmaids, David says, is unfounded : he might be still more despised by her, and they would nevertheless, he feels sure, continue to honour him. {d) is preferable. Both renderings require 1?3'< for m32X : the cohortative is out of place ; in (a), though retained by Ew. We. Now., it is inconsistent (in spite of Now.) with the questioit, in (J)) it is inconsistent with the fact that not a wish, but a conviction, is what the context requires. For Tl^pJ, cf. 77\> in Qal to be looked down upon (Gen. 16, 4. 5; I 2, 30, opp. *12?^, cf. here m3Dj<), and in Hif. to contemn (Is. 23, 9 H?'? ^"I!???"^? 'I^V'r')- ''??' i^ abased, brought low: cf. Job 5, II, and the verb in Ez. 21, 31(36). Dj? wHh= before, in the sight of, almost=in the judgement of (I 2, 26). "ik'K niDN, cf. on I 24, 5. DCy . . , Dy, the resumption for the sake of 274 The Second Book of Samuel, emphasis, exactly as with nx Dt. 13, i. Is. 8, 13; |D Lev. 25, 44*>; 2 Ez. 18, 24 al. {Tenses, § 123 Obs.). N.B. EVV. by vile in this verse do not mean morally detestable, but simply common, looked down upon: see on 15, 9 (p. 125 «.). In the same way base does not mean ignoble in character, but merely low in position, as often in Old English ; so e.g. in Ez. 17, 14. 29, 14. Mai. 2, 9. 2 Cor. 10, i AV. (RV. lowly). See further Base and Vile in DB. 23. n^ n\T N^. . . ^3''D^'i] n^ resumes ^3''0^1, as DDJ? resumes Dy in ?;. 22, but in an //^emphatic position, and merely for the purpose of lightening the sentence : see on I 9, 20 ; and cf. Lev. 25, 46^. I^i] The Oriental text has 1^1, which is also found in some Western MSS. and edd., and is the general reading in Gen. 11, 30t. If in either of these passages it is correct, the primitive form with 1 {lly (D^A\) will have not entirely fallen out of use in Hebrew. 7. Nathans prophecy to David. David's thanksgiving and prayer. Ch.n = i Ch. 17. 7, I. V^iN ^3» 3''3D?D l!?"n''3n] A Deuteronomic expression: Dt. 12, 10. 25, 19. Jos. 23, I (in a section of Joshua belonging to the Deuteronomic editor): cf. 2^300 'h n'':n Jos. 21, 42. i Ki. 5, 18. 2. nyTn] collectively, as n!?iyn 6, 18: in i Ch. 17, i niyn'' (We.). 3. *l33b "ItTN i?3] I 9, 19. 14, 7 (MT. ; see note): cf. also 2, 35 (•inn^a -IB^ND), and 2 Ki. 10, 30. 5. . . . nnxn] shouldest thou . . , ? Chron., explicitly, nnx N7 ; so LXX, Pesh. here. 6. Dl"iob] So, with infin., Jud. 19, 30. Is. 7, i7t. . . . TkJ'S DVH JO^ z'. II. Dt, 4, 32. 9, 7. Jer. 7, 25. 32, 31. Hag. 2, i8t. Comp. on 19, 25 ; and see Lex. 583'' 9 b. pt^'cm bns3 ni^nriD ^^^N^] i Ch. 17, 5 pcroni bnx ^n ^nso n-'Hsi. But LXX in Ch. has only *cai y][Vf]v Iv aKrjvrj Kol iv KaXvfxjxaTi. n\nX"l lirino expresses forcibly the idea of continuance. 7. ""DaCi^] Read, with i Ch. 17, 6, ''|?S*t^. There is no indication of any tribe having been commissioned to govern Israel. Keil, object- ing that, had ''DDtJ' stood originally in this passage, the substitution of ^DSB' would be inexplicable, does not sufficiently allow for the VI. 22 — VII. 12 275 accidental confusion of letters, — a confusion against which even the best-preserved text is not invariably proof: I 14, 18 Keil himself is not unwilling to accept ^^aij instead of IMT. ^:31. 8. nun] See on 15, 25. Notice the separate pron. 'JK. nnsio] 'The very rare inso (instead of ^-iHiSD, cf. i Ch. 17, 7 [nns'p]) is remarkably confirmed, just for the present passage, by \lf. 78, 71 in^n3 ^NT^'^i loy npra niyn^ vs^nn ni^y "insD' (We.). 9b. incyi] The prophet here turns to the future. ' ^nj after DB' is absent rightly in LXX, and i Ch. 1 7, 8 ; for it weakens the force of the following words, out of which it might easily have arisen ' (We.). 10. vnnn]=?>/ Us place: see on I 14, 9 ; and cf. Is. 25, 10. 46, 7; Zech. 12, 6 (Klo.). TaT"] be disquieted. Be moved (RV.) suggests a wrong sense, which has misled the author of the note in the RV. with marginal references to refer to 2 Ki. 21, 8 (where the verb is "'''?'!])• nbiy ""n] 3, 34, and in the citation i/^. 89, 23 (ijay x^ n^iy pi). 11. p^l] 1 is not expressed in LXX; both the sentence and the sense are improved by its omission : ' shall no more afflict it as afore- time from the day when I appointed judges,' etc. As the text stands, the reference in lo^ will be to the sufferings of Egypt; but this is a thought alien to the context, in which rather the blessings secured by the settled government of David are contrasted with the attacks to which Israel was exposed during the period of the Judges. T'a-'X'baJO n^ "'nn"':ni] Ew. We. etc. va^x-bao 1^, ' and I will give it rest from all its enemies,' in better agreement with the context. 11**. Here Nathan comes to the main subject of his prophecy — the promise relating not to David himself, but to his posterity, and the declaration that it is not David who will build a house for Yahweh, but Yahweh who will build a house (i.e. a family) _/br David. nin"' 1^ "fJill] The pf. w^ith simple waw is not what would be expected, i Ch. 17, 10 has 1? '^??^J; a slighter change would be (Kit.) nin"" 1^ n^api. 12. n^C IN^tt'' ^3] Prefix n\ni, reading either (LXX) n\ni O^ nB'y% or (i Ch. 17, 11) .Tni :mn> ^^ rwvi"'- T'yDO XX^ ntrx] 16, II. Gen. 15, 4t. T 2 276 The Second Book of Samuel, 13-15. Though V. 13 was fulfilled by Solomon, the terms are general — even in this verse Nin points back not to "]32 but to ^J;"lT — and the reference is to the line of David's descendants, of which it is said that if, in the person of any of its individual members, it commits iniquity it will be punished, as men in general are punished, but Yahweh's favour will not be withdrawn from it permanently, as it was withdrawn from Saul. Hence j^. 16 the promise of perpetuity is conferred upon it. Comp. i Ki. 2, 4. xp. 89, 31-38. 132, 12, where the terms of Nathan's prophecy are expressly interpreted of David's sons ^. 14. 'y\ C'k^'^N D3C'2] i.e. with punishments such as all men incur when they sin, and from which the seed of David will not be exempted. Comp. the poetical paraphrase, \j/. 89, 31-34. 15. "ilD"" vh'] LXX and i Ch. 17, 13, more pointedly: T'DN N^. TJS^O Tn'-Dn -IK>N /INK' nvo TliDn ItrNS] LXX here *n~i"'Dn IK'ND ^JS^D ^riT'DH ntJ'ND : Ch. 'T'JS^ iTH "IK'XD ^DT-Dn "it^'ND. The repetition of "Tli^Dn is not an elegancy, and the non-mention of Saul's name would seem certainly to be original : on these grounds Berth. We. Bu. etc. prefer the reading of Chronicles. 16. T^S^] LXX, better, ''Jsp; cf. vv. 26. 29; and x^. 89, 37b. 19. Pn] ivith reference /£>, as I 3, 12. pimD?] from afar, i.e. long before the history of "J*l2y n^3 was completed: comp. 2 Ki. 19, 25 (=Is. 37, 26). 'It was not enough in Thine eyes to honour me : Thy regard extends also to my house, and even in view of the distant future.' p? as v. 6. mxn n~nn nsil] As the text stands, the best explanation is that of Hengstenberg and Keil : 'and this is the law for men,' i.e. to evince such regard for me is in accordance with the law prescribed 1 F. 13 is in any case parenthetic, even if it be not, as We. supposes {Comp. des HexP' 257), a subsequent insertion in the prophecy. Elsewhere in the promise house has the sense of 'family' {vv. 11. 16: and on vv. 18. 19. 25. 26. 27. 29), and the point of the whole prophecy is not that Solomon rather than David is to be the builder of the house for Yahweh, but (as stated above) that it is not David who is to Imild a house for Yahweh, but Yahweh who will build a house for David. V. I4 ff. describe how David's descendants will be dealt with in such a manner as to give effect to this promise ; and the reference to the material temple in z*. 13 interferes with the just sequence of the thought. VII. I3~2) 277 by God to regulate men's dealings with one another (not as Kp.) ; displayed by God, therefore, it argues unwonted condescension and affection. (' This is the ?nanner — mos, consuetudo — of men,' Ges. Th., gives to mm a sense which it never has, and which would rather be expressed by DD'J'D.) But Hengst.'s explanation is artificial: and there is no doubt that the text is incorrect. Ch. has "iIDD ^:n^N*"i1 npycn rnxn, which is more obscure than the text here, and indeed cannot be intelligibly construed. We., following a suggestion of Ewald's, Hist. iii. 180 (E. T. 132), would read D>sn mn ^^Nini 'and hast let me see the generations of men,' i.e. given me a glimpse into the fortunes of my descendants. But if descendants had been meant, would not the idea have been expressed distinctly? No satisfactory emendation of the passage has been proposed. 21. la^SI "]">3T "I13y3] The combination of two such disparate ideas is very un-Hebraic. LXX here, and i Ch. 17, 19 have ^"^^y for "jiai. This is certainly an improvement. We. would also drop '\ypy\, remarking that the fact that in LXX (8ia tov lovXov o-ov ■jmroirjKa^ [Kat Kara ryjv KapStav aov £7rot'r;(ras] ktX.) TreTroirjKas has no obj., is an indication that the bracketed words are a later addition, so that the original LXX did not read "]3^31. Nestle {Marg. p. 16), retaining •jl^ai, points out that in i Ch. 17, 18 {=v. 20 here) there are found between yW and JiNI the words "Tl3VnN li^Dp (which, as thus read, cannot be construed : RV. is a resort of desperation) ; and, supposing them to be misplaced in Ch., utilizes them as a beginning for z^. 21, viz. n^m 12^31 ri->3^ "jiDy-nK n|3|5,_Ti2n nuvn being a corruption of m21 "Il^y: so Sm. Bu. This reads excellently; and 7?iay well have been the original text : we can hardly say more. nijnj] The word does not occur besides except in late Hebrew (i Ch. 29, Esther, 1/^. 71. 145). The meaning of the expression ' done all this greatness ' is here (unlike v. 23) obscure; and the verse is greatly improved by the transposition proposed by Reifmann : nxin n^n:n-b ns inny dn v''^^^^ {^^V absol., as Is. 48, n al.). 22. DM^N niiT] 'This stands in Ch. everywhere for ni.T •'JIN of our text : here and v. 25 it has found its way into this as well, as in I 6, ir. 17 onno ' (We.). 23. Geiger {Urschrift^ p. 288) and We., partly following LXX 278 77?^ Second Book oj Samuel, and I Ch. 17, 21, suppose the original text to have been: "[DyD ^Dl h Dic!?i nyb 1^ nns^ (i^n^x or) cn^s* T]bn ib'n px3 inx -"la ^jj^ik''' 1 vn^Ni ^13 itsy *:Dn iri.jij niN-iiJi nSin? Dnb niB'y^i D-tJ'. < On the one hand, the reference being to heathen gods, the sing. "iSl was changed to the pi. "lD?n; on the other hand, a difficulty was found even in supposing that another god had chosen and done great things for a nation, and all was referred back again to the true God, hence "]^ TiW? in Ch. while Sam. has preserved "h, hence also DD? and IViN^ in Sam., "joy with the addition Dn!;?DO (l^) nns itTN [based on 1^ nns? just above] in both, and finally, as not one nation merely but several were driven out before Israel, D''1J for "'"13, which, however, is not certain in the case of Sam. [on account of the suff. in 1\17X] ' (Geig.). Bu. Sm. Now. agree. It will be observed that while the question itself implies a reference to false gods, the terms in which it is put allude covertly to what has been done by the true God : hence the endeavour to accommodate them to it, if possible, explicitly. As regards the changes in detail, "j^n for ID^n is strongly supported by the h following ^ : Dn? and ^137 are both imperative — the former, because a word addressed to Israel is here out of place, the latter (as Chr.) in order to restore ''3DD to its right \before in AV, RV. gives to ''3£i?0' the sense of ''JS^ or ''3''y^!], niNi131 n/'n3n is a combination as indifferent in style as ni^nom "IIC'^ in I 18, 6 (in support of the restored text see Dt, 10, 21: also \\r. 71, 19. 106, 21), and the enallage of numbers in IMbxi D''13 is alien to the practice of Hebrew prose. As regards the other expressions in the verse, with the opening question, comp. Dt. 4, 7. 34; with DK' 1^ DVki'7 Jer. 32, 20; Is. 63, i2t>. 14^; Neh. 9, 10; Dan. 9, 15 (all with nc'y: for XW cf. ch. 14, 7); and with ^32D :^n3 Ex. 34, 11. Jos. 24, 18. \\i. 78, 55. ' Or DTl/NI CIJ, after LXX iBvt] xal o-KtjvunaTa (i.e. DTI^X, misread • ' • L- 2 LXX wS-riyrjaev airToi' = iD7n has nothing to recommend it, and does not harmonize with the following DnS?. ' In ''320 the sense of JD is never lost : Lev. 19, 32 DIpH na^ti' *3DD not merely to rise up r'n the presence of ('"33?) the hoary head, but to rise up from before it, out of respect for it ; Is. 26, 17 "J^3D0 13''^^ p so were we — not in, hvX— through Thy presence. VII. 2)— VI 11. I 279 27. n? HN , . . NVD] found his heart, i.e. took courage (RV. m.): cf. Lex. 3? and 337 10, and phrases in Jer. 30, 21. Est. 7, 5; and for Ni'JD i/^. 76, 6. 28. ... Nin nnx] Is. 37, 16. 43, 25. i/r. 44, 5 al. {Tenses, § 200). Vn^] arf habitually : but a verb is not here needed; and Ehrl. may be right in reading ninv nos] truthfulness, — the abstract subst, instead of the adj. : so i3nn {was) iTH nox Dt. 22, 20. I Ki. 10, 6; without n\n, I Ki. 17, 24; also i//. 19, 10. 119, 142. 151 al. {ib. § 189. 2; GK. § 141°). 29. 7Nin] be ivilling. piNin is to will (I 12, 22), — with different nuances, as to be willing, agree (Ex. 2, 21), to resolve, undertake (Gen. 18, 27. Dt. I, 5), to be determined (Jud. i, 27. 35. Hos. 5, 1 1). Comp. ^looxQ, Judges, p. 47 ; Lex. 384*. "103130] \'0-= through, from, in consequence of: Ges. Thes. 803^; Lex. 580a. Cf. Is. 28, 7 pm-;d lybi 8. Summary of David's wars; and list of his ministers. (Close of the history of David's />«^/z'c doings ; comp. I 14, 47-51 of Saul.) Ch.S^i Ch. 18. 8, I. ncxn jno Dn] The expression is peculiar : but apparently, if the text is correct, the meaning is, ' the bridle of the mother-city ' (so Ges. Ke. Stade), i.e. the authority of the metropolis or capital. DN in Phoenician has the sense of mother-city or capital ; see the coin figured in Ges. fesaia, i. p. 755 {=Motium. Phoen., Tab. 34 N ; p. 262) nnv DS 1^^'; Cooke, NSI. pp. 350, 352 B 15; Lidzbarski, Nord- sem. Epigr. p. 219. «/ has the same meaning in Syriac (PS. 222). DK in ch. 20, 19 may also be compared: and it may be remembered how ni33 is often used in the sense of dependent cities or villages (Nu. 21, 25 al.). Comp. also Jos. 14, 15 LXX /Ar/rpoTroAts rZiv EvaK€i/x (similarly 15, 13. 21, 11), i.e. P^V^ DN (regarded by some as the original reading : Moore, fudges, p. 25). n^5< appears here to be the fem. of D^?, and to be used in the same metaph. sense. :no bridle, metaph. of authority, jurisdiction ; cf. in Arabic the use 1 In |y333 DX X3TN^7 {Moti. PJioen., Tab. 35), also cited in the first edition, the true reading appears to be Ct^ (^' which ') for DN : Cooke, <7/. cit. pp. 46;/., ?,49. 350- 28o The Second Book of Samuel, of III; a nose-rein, bridle: Schultens, on Job 30, 11 (quoted by Ges. s.v. nCN), cites from Hisl. Tarn. [II 228 Manger] l^llj J^^..il1 holding the bridle of those (countries), with other exx. ; see also Lane, Arab. Lex. p. 1249. i Ch. 18, i for noNH jno has HTllJai n3, * Gath and her daughters ' (dependent villages), apparently reading, or interpreting, 3nO as n3, and supposing 'Gath the mother' to include her dependencies. The Versions render no help. LXX t^v d(^wpi- o-fxiv-qv (?'1^'13n??; to. d<^w/3to-/>ieVa=D^^"!3J? Jos. 1 4, 4 al.) ; Aq. tov XaXLvov Tov vSpaywyLov (from the Syr. sense of HON Sir. 24, 30 : cf. Theod. vSpayoyyov in c/i. 2, 24); Symm. Ti]v i^ovaiav tov 6pov, M'hence NvAg.frenum trihiiii ; Targ. NnON ppD ; Pesh. l^-^^s. '^'^'' 2. ?^n3] On the art., see on I 19, 13; and on they^w. \"ini (cf. i)v. 5. 6), on I 17, 21. 3355^1] The inf. abs.. defining how David ' measured ' them, as I 3, 12 : Ew. § 280a'; GK. § 113''. r\r\y6\ Cf. i Ki. 5, i. The word denotes properly a complimenlary present, — in different applications. As a sacrificial term, of the parti- cular gift known as the ' meal-offering : ' in a connexion such as the present, of gifts offered to a prince or other person, whose good-will it is desired to secure, whether voluntarily (Gen. 32, 14. 43, 15. 2 Ki. 8, 8), or as something expected or exacted (as here), so that it nearly = tribute. 3. "lTJ?Tin] Some 50 MSS., many edd., LXX (ASpaa^ap), Pesh., Vulg., read itynn. That "iTyTin is right ' appears from a recently found Aramaic seal with the inscription ITyTin?, in which T and 1 are clearly distinguished ^' Comp. also the Assyrian equivalent (Schrader, KAT? p. 201 ; cf.' p. 446) Dad'idri, ''^)T\T\T\ Zech. 12, 11, and the n. pr. Tirrp. Hadad was the name of the chief deity of the Aramaeans, identified by the Assyrians with Ramman, and hence probably the god of storm and thunder (Cooke, NSI. pp. 164, 360). This name, therefore, as pointed, will signify Hadad is help : cf. i.W*'' Yah is help, and ">.]J'\''.^. The vocalization of LXX would suggest the form IVI^^H (like t^DK^in^, etc.) Hadad helpeth. ^ Baethgen, Beitrdge etc., p. 67 ; Euting, Berichte der Bert. Akad. 1885, p. 679 ( = Epigr. Miscellen, p. 11). See CIS. II. i. No. 1 24. Cf. PRE? vii. 288-391. VIII. 2-9 281 r\2Xi] here and v. 5 [ = 1 Ch. 18, 3. 5]. 12. 10, 6 and 8 (n*31V). 23, 36. I 14, 47. I Ki. II, 23 (nai^f n!:!o irynn). i Ch. 18, 9. 19, 6 [ = Naiv r/i. 10, 6]. 2 Ch. 8, 3 (nnii* non). ^. 60, 2 (from ch. 8, i2)t. '2 n'' a''::*n^] The phrase is difikult, and affords no satisfactory sense. 7y 1' y^r\ means to turn one hand agamsi {hm. i, 8. i/^. 81, 15; Ez. 38, 12), and though '3 T Ttrn might have a similar sense, this would not suit with the object "inj2. And though n* in itself might be used metaph. = nn^Dr D^yj; and see Ew. § 291*; GK. § 135°. LXX appears to express -m-T^rht v.'^r^ niDn^o K'\s ^3; but n"iDn!?D K'''N (Is. 42, 13. I Ch, 28, 3) is merely a warrior, not an ajitagofiist. 12. d^ND] 9 MSS., LXX, Pesh. Ch. D'lND, probably rightly. 13. DC' . . . tryi] Cf. Gen. II, 4 DC' "i:^ nC'yJI, where Delitzsch argues that DC, from the context, requires a more concrete sense than 'name,' and would render — in accordance with the supposed primary meaning of Dt^, something lofty, conspicuous — 'monument,' comparing the present passage (as also Is. 56, 5. 55, 13) for a similar sense. But whatever the primitive meaning of DC', it is in actual usage so largely and constantly 'name,' even in conjunction with nc'y (see the references on 7, 23), that it is difficult to think that it can have a different sense here. It is safest, therefore, to render ' gat him a name,' comparing the similar phrase PTI cyi used of Saul, I 14, 48. It will be observed that in the text as emended (see the following note) DC cy^l is connected with David's victory (either over Edom, or over Syria), not as in MT. with his return after the victory, when his 'fame' would have been already made, and the erection of a monument to commemorate it might have been rather supposed to be referred to. rh'Q N^:3 DisTiN ini^no oca] i Ch. 18, 12 nan r\'^r\^ p ^C3Ni nbon N-'n Dins-riN ; \\f. 60 title n^D N^n Dnts'-ns y\ axr nc"'i. Dns (supported also by LXX, Pesh. here) is unquestionably the true reading before n^DH N': : for this valley was near Edom (see 2 Ki. 14, 7), VIII. g-i-] 283 and far from the scene of the Syrians' defeat. Even, however, with DHN for D"iN, the text is still defective : for y. 1 4 presupposes a positive statement of the victory over Edom in v. 13, and not merely a notice of what David did when he returned from smiting it. Keil would read n^D X'3n D-lN-ns* y-\ DiX-nx im^no n:;*a, supposing the three words added to have dropped out through the (virtual) homoioteleuton : Bu. Now. Dns-nx nan Dix-ns nisno nubi; \Ve., with LXX (iv Tv, KarevOvvwv Jer. 15, ii; fvOrjvla, (iirjUfpia, fvirpayia) : which Fleischer seeks, with questionable success, to connect with the supposed root-meaning to stand (as though properly ' wolbestellt," • Wolstand '). '•' 'Aeitschr.fiir kirchl. Wissenschaft umi kirchl. Leben, 1880, p. 63. ' Notice in 20, 26 the words 'and also^ which likewise imply that Ira, as ' priest,' stood on no different footing from the D''3n3 of v. 35. 286 The Second Book of Samuel, Solomon) ; 13 circumstances which led to the murder of Amnon ; 14 — 19 rebellion and death of Absalom ; 20 revolt of Sheba {an incident springing out of the revolt of Absalom) \ 9, I. "'jn] Gen. 29, 15. Comp. on ch. 23, 19. 2. ':i b^iW n>3h] 'And the house of Saul had a servant,' etc.: not as EVV. *]n3y] See on I 26, 17. 3. DDNn] except in the sense of save that only {Lex. 6';^), DDN occurs in prose only here, 2 Ki. 14, 26. Am. 6, 10. Dn. 8, 25. • D"'n^N *iDn] Cf. '•"•' non 1 20, 14. 4. T'arD n*2] ' in the house of M. : ' see p. 37 n. -im 1^] 17, 27 (im i6), Jos. 13, 26 (nm^), on the E. of Jordan, probably not far from Mahanaim, Ish-bosheth's capital. 7. T3N* ^ixi^] 'Cf. yy^^ p v. 9 f., ^nk^ p n:j'3^D» 19, 25. narpos 7raTp6 29. 9, 8). •'JI03 alone would read badly. 10. riN'nni] 'and thou shalt bring in (the produce) :' cf. Hag. i, 6, and nxinn, of crops, properly what is brought in. •ibDNl Virh TJnx \±> .Tm] Read prob. with Luc. Bu. Sm. Ehrl. ^^DNi nnb -j^jiN n^a!? n^i. • 11^. The words are unsuited to the mouth of Ziba: and the ptcp. will not permit the rendering of EVV., 'As for M., said the king, he shall eat,' etc. — to say nothing of the awkward and improbable position for such a remark on the part of David, after Ziba in ii* has signified his assent. LXX for '•jn^^j' express "tn \^^, and render 73N ya-Ouv. With this reading, which is adopted by Keil, We. Bu. Sm. ^ 1 The sequel to this group of chapters is i Ki. 1—2, which has every appearance — except in the verses 2. 3-4 vi^hich must have been added by the Deuteronomic compiler of the Book of Kings — of being by the same hand, and which narrates the .failure of David's ^/n'rd son Adonijah to secure the throne, and the confirmation of Solomon as his father's successor. IX. i—X. 6 287 Now., the words are a remark of the narrator : 'And M. ate at the king's table, as one of the sons of the king.' We. indeed observes that they are even then out of place, anticipating z\ 13 ; however, z^. 13 states the new fact that Mephibosheth dwelt at Jerusalem, his eating at the king's table being merely referred to as the ground of his residence there. 12. n3"'D] See I Ch. 8, 34 ff., where his descendants through many generations are enumerated. Ch. 10 = 1 Ch. 19. 10, I. |loy ""ja ^^tt] i.e. Nahash {v. 2): see I ir, i. 3. . . . nn niaon] Gen. 18, 17 . . . onnaxD ^jn nDDon; Nu. n, 29 'h nriN ^m\}: Tenses, § 135. 4. -i^yn] i.e. poy "•^3 nm (12, 26 al.), or T\^1 (u, i); called by the Greeks (from Ptolemy Philadelphus, 285-247 B.C.) Philadelphia, now 'Amman, with extensive Roman remains of the age of the Antonines, on the left (N.) bank of the Jabbok, 25 miles E. of the fords of the Jordan near Jericho. See the description in the Survey 0/ East Pal., p. 19 ff. 4. Dn^lio] So I Ch. 19, 4 : but the form (in the sing. p""?]. from a -v/'ino, GK. § 93^) is very unusual, and the only root otherwise known is nno. Read probably Di^^"!!? ; and see on I 17, 38. 7n3] ^n is in pause for ^^n (QK. § 93y), on account of the Tifha ; cf. Ex. 25, ID 7r!J • • ''^nj • • • 70]; and see on I i, 15. 18. The 'half is not half in length, but half in breadth, one entire side, to make them look ridiculous. Dn^niDK^ ny] Cf. Is. 20, 4 n^ (rd. ^??itrn) 'sVK'n. 5. iny] So always, according to the Massorah, in Nu. Dt. Sam. Ezr. Neh. Chr. and once in Kings (2 Ki. 25, 5; but in the ||, Jer. 52, 8, *"^'!^ !) ; '^y. or 'y. in Jos. Jer. and six times in Kings ( + once 'IHT)- 'y, ny] See on I I, 22. niyi}] In (2*^< 1?N1 (the \ of 'concomitance:' p. 29). The 32,000 of i Ch. 19, 6 have been supposed to shew (We. ai.) that the Chr. did not read B'''K 5)^X here, and they have hence been regarded as coming in by error from the end of the verse ; but their omission leads to fresh difficulties and improbabilities in connexion with 31D K'^N. For 31£3, see Jud. 11, 3. 5 ; and cf. TovySiov i Mace. 5, 13. 7. Dnn:n Nnvn] EVV. 'the host ^(!) the mighty men.' Read 'y^\. The X2V was the army in general, the D''"iU3 a corps of select warriors (16, 6. 20, 7. 23, 8 ff.). 8. nyk^Ti nns] at the opening of the gate (p. 37 «.). 9. nn''n] non^on ""JQ being treated as a collective (GK. § 145'') : comp. Job 16, 16 Kt. nnoinn >3a ^ and see on I 4, 15. 7N"it!'''2 ^"iinn (Kt.)] See on i, 21. The combination is, however, unusual in prose: Jud. 8, 11 C^nsn '•JIDK'n is very strange. True, as Th. remarks, it is more admissible here than it would be in I 26, 2 : but no doubt 1 Ch. 19, 10 preserves the original reading "iinn 73D i-NiB'^a. The Qre is ^NIC^ nin3 bo, which is read also by some 50 MSS. ; but the 3 is supported by the text of Ch. : see also ch. 6, i. 11. prnn] Cf. I 17, 21, r\'^^^'h for deliverance (I 14, 45). 12. P^nnJi] GK. § 54k 'i^ ni,Ti; cf. I 3, 18. 14. ijyr:] from attacking: 2 Ki. 3, 27 V^VD iyD''1 ; 18, 14 •'^yo 31K'. See on I 28, 15. 16. nrynn] Both here and in ch. 8 there is much variation in MSS. between "iTyTin and nryinn. Here MS. authority preponderates in favour of iryinn, as in ch. 8 it preponderated in favour of nrynnn. The name must evidently be the same throughout. Both in Inscrip- tions (Phoen. and Hebrew) and in MSS. 1 and 1 are often not distin- guishable, and only the context enables the reader to know which is intended. For the reason stated on 8, 3, the correct form is "irymn. D^^n] V. 17 DN^^n. Taken rightly by LXX, Pesh. Targ. as a pr. n. Perhaps to be read in Ez. 47, 16 after Dn3D (where LXX add HAia/^). X. 6— XL II 289 18. n"''ky"i3] Probably a lapsus calami for e«X : cf. i Ch. 19, 18 hy^ tyx. The number of horsemen is disproportionately large. Ch. 11, 1 = 1 Ch. 20, i^ {^ch. II, 2 — 12, 25 is passed by in Ch.). 11, I. C^N^r^n] =D''3i5Cn, as is read by some 40 ]\ISS., Qre, Ver- sions, and I Ch. 20, i : comp. 10, 17 beside 16 ; and p. iGS/oohwle. 3. ynw'Tin] i Ch. 3, 5 yi^'Tia, no doubt to be pronounced yV^^'"^l3, and probably merely an error for y3C^"n3. LXX has everywhere the strange corruption Brjpcra^f.€. nvhii] in I Ch. 3, 5 ^N''Oy, which (We.) supports MT. against LXX 'EAta^. — -iDX^i sc. -it:iNn (on I 16, 4). *nnn nms] one of David's famous Dnua (23, 39). 4. ':i ri'jnpna N^'Tl] A circumstantial clause, defining the state of Bath-sheba at the time of noy a^k^"'1 = 'a^ she purified herself from her uncleanness' (cf. 13, 8). This is the only rendering of the words consistent with grammar. To express, ' and when she was purified .< etc., she returned . . .,' the Hebrew M^ould have been ^^^\ • • • tC'jIgnrn., or (Jud. 18, 3 etc.) ri2^ N>m . . . nK'^pnn N^n ; in other words, to express anything subsequejit to "^^V 3I^'*1, a finite verb, not the ptcp., would have been employed. The athnah is thus in its right place (against Th. \Ve.)^ Comp. Tenses, § 169 nofe. 6. rb^ 3SV ^N . . . n^CJ'^l] ' Without nCN^, as 19, 15, cf. Nu. 23, 7 before r\:h ' (We.). 8. -i^K:n nXD'D] Comp. Gen. 43, 34. 10. N3 nnx yrm Nli'n] Notice the position of "jnno: cf. Gen. 16, 8. 11. ''n''n ^X XUN '':iNl]='and shall /enter into my house?' etc., the juxtaposition of two incongruous ideas, aided by the tone in which the words are pronounced, betokening surprise, and so suggesting a question. So not unfrequently, as Jer. 25, 29 1p3n npsn DHNI, 45, 5. 49, 12 npsn r\\>i Nin nnxi. Jon. 4, u Dins* s^ ^:ni. Ez. 20, 31 DD^ BH-HN ^iXI. 35, 25b. Jud. 14, iC^O^JS Tjt'l. Zech. 8, 6. ch. 15, 20. Comp. on I II, 12 and ch. 18, 29. ^W? by GK. § 45''- ^ nnXDD'S is explained rightly by Lucian «f atpibpov avrijs, Pesh. o^ re\° iD ^."iO (see Lev. 15, 19. 20. 25 LXX and Pesh.) : Rashi nmJD. The remark is added to shew why conception followed: the time indicated was fnvour.nble for it. Cf. W. R. Smith, Marriage and Kinship in Early Arabia, p. 276, ed. 2, p. 133. 1365 ^ 290 The Second Book of Samuel, ^B'SJ "Til "j^n] This form of the oath does not occur elsewhere, and the tautology implied makes it improbable. LXX for T'n 7rws=^''??. ' But thus absolutely, as it seems, ^""K could at most stand — at least that is the case in Arabic — when what here is placed before at the beginning of the verse followed as a circumstantial clause with \. Either, therefore, read for ^n, nin'' ''n [followed by •]:^'D3 'ni, as I 20, 3. 25, 26 al.], or omit "jlTDJ ^ni as an explanatory gloss on the un- common yn' (We.). For T"S3 ""ni, see on I 17, 55. 12. mnODi] 'and on the morrow' (not as Th. : see Lev. 7, 16). A specification of time is, however, desiderated in v. 13 for 1^ Nip'l ; and as even in MT. the promise "jn^C^N "inoi is not carried out by David, it is better to end v. 12 at Ninn DVa : K">p^1 ninODl will then begin z'. 13 {•\ as I 4, 20). So We. Bu. Now.: also LXX (Luc.) and Pesh. mnon M''1 (Ehrlich) would, however, be better; •"H"' might easily have been lost after 1 Ninn. 15. 13n] if correct, "i3n give,^set (like |n3) : but the case goes beyond other usages of an, lan {Lex. 396^); and perhaps N?n (LXX tto-ayaye) should be read (Klo. Bu. al.). 16. ?N . . . "ilDti'a] Comp. (in 21. friendly sense) I 26, 15. 17. 'l^ Dyn JJd] from the people some of {v. 24. Ex. 16, 27), etc. 19. "^5"!.''] preceded hy lis object: comp. Dt. 28, 56. Lev. 19, 9, and the Aramaic examples cited in Tenses, § 208. 3 Obs. 21. riB'aT'] For ^yai'' (Jud. 7, i al.). Unlike Ishbosheth and Mephibosheth, however, the alteration in this case has been made only in a single passage. 22. asr "in^cr -ic's'-^a ns] LXX continues :nnn^Dn nan-^a ns Ni^n ^ynii p n^jous nx nan "-d rnDinn ^y?o isn Tki'N ns* nnyT' ^K Dn'j'jj no^ pnn riD^i noinn ^yo 33-1 ni^D vhv r\'2'h\^r\ n^rx (z*. 23) '31 -10N''1 :n»^inn: in other words, the text of LXX describes in detail how what Joab anticipated vv. 21-2 look place. The addition is a necessary one : for as the text stands, the terms in which the messenger speaks in v. 2^'^ are unexplained (notice especially his opening words. Because etc., which presuppose a question to have been asked). 23. 1133 ""a] as the text stands, ""i is the *3 recitativum (on I 2, 16); XL II— XII . 8 291 with the insertion from LXX (see on v. 22), it will be ' Because,' intro- ducing the answer to Davids question. Dni^jy iTn:i] 'appears to be correct. Comp. e.g. the use of n'^n with nnx I 12, 14. Ex. 23, 2: the stress rests upon the preposi- tion, the idea of which it is simply the purpose of n\n to render verbal' (We.). 24. D^snnn IvSi^l (Kt.)] as if from Ni: (cf. N'l'^^b for niT!) 2 Ch. 26, 15); Qre D'lil3[i 1"^'!, the regular form, from HT : GK. § YS". 25. r\]r] -imn ns* . . . yTi-^N] nin nmn, though grammatically a nominative, is construed Kara truVeo-iv as an accusative. Comp. I 20, 13 (if 2\^'<) be read); Jos. 22, 17 ; Neh. 9, 32 : Ew. § 277^1 efid; GK. § 117I; Lex. 85*0. njDI nb] So Jud. 18, 4. I Ki. 14, 5t. inprm] 'strengthen — i.e. encourage (Dt. i, 38 al.) — him (Joab).' 27. nsDN^i] RDN as Jos. 2, 18 nn'3n r^ii ^atpxri, Dt. 22, 2; Jud. 19, 15 (Pi.). 12, I. K'X"!] for K'") (as 7.'. 3) ; see GK. §§ 23?, 72P. 2. "T^w^'y!?] T'lJ'y^ would be expected, and should prob. be read. 3. C'l'.ri^l] and kept alive : Ex. i, 17. 18. i Ki. 18, 5. "31 ^rxn] The impflf. expressing significantly its habit. 4. Tt^'yn B'^xSj] The punctuation (for ^^^) is anomalous. Comp. on I 6, 18 ; and Ew. § 293^ ; GK. § 126" (read ^'^). 5. niD p] See on I 20, 31. 6. D^nyniN] LXX eTTTaTrAao-tom^iD^riyn^, in all probability the original reading. As Th. remarks, David speaking impulsively is more likely to have used the proverbial 'sevenfold' (cf. Prov. 6, 31), than to have thought of the law Ex. 21, 37: DTiyniN will be due to a corrector who noticed the discrepancy. ^cn ^ -^^ i^yi] SchiU {ZAW. 1891, p. 318), Ehrlich, Bu., attractively, though not necessarily, 'h for N^ 'and spared that which was his own! 7i>. Observe the emphatic ""DiS* : compare — likewise in a reproach — Amos 2, 9. 10. 8. T^""^ ri'^ "^] Possibly T^IN nn nx (Pesh. 'n mJ3 HN) should be read (Sm. Bu.), with allusion to Michal : 'n n^3 ns certainly does not harmonize with the following "jp'^nD. u 2 293 The Second Book of Samuel, 'X'TX^ '•u'J riNl] Not elsewhere recorded of David, though it would be in accordance with Oriental custom (16, 22. i Ki. 2, 17; cf. ch. 3, 7). miiTil i^NiC^* nn nx] Pesh. "•"! "• rii:3 nK, perhaps rightly (Sm. Bu.): the meaning of course would be not that they were given to him actually, but that he could choose his wives from them as he pleased (3, 2-5). nSDNl] ' then would I add ' (not ' would have added' AV.), There is a similar mistake in AV. of ^\i. 81, 15. 16. The 1, as thus used, is rare: but see Gen. 13, 9 {Tenses, § 136 ;8*). njriDI njpna] i. e. other similar marks of favour : cf. nTDI nT3 (11,25). riNDI T\iAX2 (17, 15), said where details need not be specified. 9. ~i3n] Probably to be omitted with Luc. and Theod. : cf. esp. V. lob. Notice the emph. position of nnix nx, in::'^ nsi, and IDX. 1 1. Ti'"'-'] ^^^ y^^ '^ ^'^'^ ^^ y^^ o^ ^^^ plural, but is due to the fact that y"l is properly nj?"! re'ay (cf. ^nyn ; comp. •^''JJSD alluring her Hos. 2, 16: r\>p Is. 22, II (Ew. § 256b; 01. p. 250; GK. § 9333). 12. njj] in front of, expressing more strongly than '»JS7 the idea of being conspicuous before: comp. Nu. 25, 4 ; i Ki. 21, 13. 13. nvT DJ] Yahweh, also, on His part: the D3 correlativum; cf. on I I, 28a. T'lyn] The same figure, lit. to make to pass away, in 24, 10 : comp. Zech. 3, 4 ']:iy T-^yo Tnayn. Job 7, 21 ""Jiy nx n^nyni. 14. ''"'' "•^''N' ns] I'XJ does not elsewhere mean to cause to blaspheme : so doubtless Geiger is right {Urschrift, p. 267) in supposing the original reading here to have been '»"'' nx : cf. the insertion of "'a''N in I 25, 22. For "li??!!?, see on 5, 14. 15. K^3N^1] for this pausal form of K'P.-, see GK. §§ 291, 51^; and cf. on I 15, 23. 16. 'V\ sm] A series of perfects with waw conv., indicating that David acted as here described repeatedly. aD^'1 j!?")] LXX (B) omits iy^^; Luc. omits ]h, and expresses pl'3 23tJ'l (i Ki. 21, 27), — not (Sm. Bu. Now.) pea f)\ for Ka\ Ua.- OevSev represents 33ti'1, not pv 17. Xia] Read, wiih many MSS. and edd. m3 ; see on 3, 35. 18. nyi nt^'yi . . . 1»NJ ya] The two verbs are coupled together XII. 8-2^ 293 under the government of y^, exactly as Gen. 39, 9 [Tenses, § 115 s.v, y^), though the change oi subject makes a literal rendering hardly intelligible in English. RV. text and margin are merely two different paraphrases, designed to meet the exigencies of English idiom. 20. ^DM] The ^//: only here; cf. GK. § 73f. Read ^D^i (Ehrl.). 21. ""n n^\n nuyn] for the sake of the child (when) alive: LXX rightly cveK-a tov Traihapiov trt ^wvTos. But 1]!2 (as V. 22) for "13y3 (t = -1, and 2 repeated by error), as We. conjectured in 187 1, and as is confirmed by Luc. Pesh. Targ., is much more probable (so Sm. Bu. Ehrl. etc.). (In Jer. 14, 4 read, with Duhm, ^rin nr:)liir\ nay for nnn n'O'Min inyn.) 22. "'^sn) ynT< 'D Kt.; "JSm ynv "-d Qra] w/io /f«owj/=peradventure. The correction of the Qr6 is unnecessary : the Kt. is exactly like Joel 2, 14. Jon. 3, 9. In Esther 4, 14 we have . . . DX ynv ""D. 23. DV ''JS nr r\^b] nr adds point to n'ob (on I 10, n): cf. Gen. 25, 22 ''33X nt nob to what purpose should I yet be ? 25. rh'^^l] We. Bu. iniobK'si (Now. chp^\) and /le (David) delivered him into, etc., viz. for his education. But to make wholly- over to, to deliver up, is an Aram, sense of h'ht'T\ (e.g. Dt. 32, 30 Onk. pj^D^^K^N for D^??'!^; and jaiijw/ constantly for TrapaSo^i/ai), in Heb. found at most in late poetry (Is. 38, 12. 13 LXX, Duhm, al. ; Is. 42, 19 0?lp9 by conjecture for Df^'9) ; so it is not a very likely word to have been used here. With n^Ci'^l, it is an improvement to begin the verse with ')3^^< niiT'l. 1"'' maya] Luc. •'"'' nma, — perhaps rightly (Sm. Now. Dh.). 12, 26=1 Ch. 20, i^ (abridged); 12, 30-31 = 1 Ch. 20, 2-3. 26. nai^cn "i>y] The 'royal city' would be Rabbah itself, whereas (27) Joab had taken only what was called the lVater-citj>, and (28) invited David to take Rabbah itself. Read therefore, probably, as V. 27, nv^n T]} (Bu. Sm. Now. Dh.). 27. □''JOn T'y] No doubt a fortification, or part of the city, which protected the water-supply. Polybius (v. 71) relates that when Rabbah was besieged by Antiochus III in B.C. 218, he was unable to enter the city till a prisoner revealed the underground passage by which the besieged used to descend to fetch water. The remains of a citadel are on a hill about ^ mile N. of the Jabbok, 200-300 ft. above the valley, and connecting by a saddle with hills further to N. ; on this saddle there is a fine rock-cut tank, 20 ft. by 90 ft. ; and just inside the entrance 294' Th^ Second Book of Samuel, to this tank there begins an underground passage leading in the direction of the citadel, which it has been supposed was the one mentioned by Polybius (see G. A. Barton, yi9Z. xxvii. (1908), p. i47ff., esp. 149 f. ; and Conder, Survey of E. Palestine, p. 34, with the Plan facing p. 34). The fortification surrounding either this or some other water-supply was doubtless the ' Water-city ' men- tioned here. 28. '•JX na^N is] 'Lest / (emph.) take the city,' etc.: comp. Ex. i8, 19. Jud. 8, 23. 2 Ki. 10, 4. Is. 20, 6. Jer. 17, 18. \\i. 109, 28 al. ch. 17, 15 ""JK Tivy; and comp. on I 17, 56. 23, 22. n>7y '•DtJ' NipJl] ' And my name be called over it ' — in token viz. of its conquest by me. The passage shews the genuine sense of the phrase, often occurring (especially in Dt. and dependent books) with reference to the nation, the city, or the Temple, ' over which Yahweh's name is called,' in token viz. of the right of possession or ownership by Him (generally paraphrased obscurely in AV. ' called by My name^'). See Am, 9, 12 DiT^y ''DC' N~ipj nc^S* (in allusion to the nations embraced by David in the dominion of Israel). Dt. 28, 10 l*^y Nipj ^"^ ^■^ ^3 psn ^Dy b ism. i Ki. 8, 43 (n^nn ^y). Jer. 7, 10. II. 14, 9. 15, 16 (of the prophet). 25, 29 al. Is. 63, 19 we are become as those over ivhom Thy name has not been called (i. e. whom Thou hast never owned). 30. DDi^o] LXX D3bo (i Ki. ir, 5 al.)— probably rightly. In the whole context, no allusion is made to the king of Rabbah ; nor has there been any mention of the people, but only of the city, so that, with the Massoretic punctuation, the suffix D^^ is without an antecedent. mp^ pN^] Read, with Pesh. Targ. here, and i Ch. 20, 2 : ps* nn^ mp\ A 'talent' of gold weighed 65, if not 130, lbs, av. (Kennedy, DB. iv. 903IJ), 31. h'\-\ir\ ^:f-in] Cf. Am. I, 3 ^nnn rwisn, p?03] So Kt., which Th. following Kimchi defends, supposing the meaning to be the place in which victims were sacrificed to Molech (punctuating either 03^9^ in their ' Molech,' or Dbl>S3 in the Molech-image). But such a sense for either "^p or D3^0 is highly improbable ; and the Qre P?522 rnust be adopted. The meaning of \l,t:i, how-ever, has only recently been cleared up. From its form ^ Which really expresses a different phrase, ''DB'3 N"1p3 Is. 43, 7 : cl. 48, i. XII. 2S-)i 295 (with D prefixed), it would naturally be supposed to denote either a place (like iJ'Jf^^D) or instrument (like D^'r'P) of making bricks, but not the one rather than the other. It has, indeed, been commonly rendered as though it meant the former, viz. brickkiln: but this rendering lacks support either in the use of the word elsewhere or in the renderings of the ancient Versions. In an elaborate study on the word ^, Georg Hoffmann has shewn that in post-Biblical Hebrew, it is used firstly of a hxxokmould, and then metaphorically of different objects of the same rectangular shape, such as the frame of a door, sofa, window, or again, of a garden-bed, but not of a brick/('//«. In Arabic and Syriac the corresponding words are used similarly : ^^^ denotes a brickmould (Freytag), and occurs also in Saadyah's version of Is. 6, 4 of the framavork of a door ; jui^tN.'^ signifies a brickmould (PS. col. 1887), as also a quadrangle or square (Hoffmann, p. 65) : but for neither language is the meaning brickkiln quoted. Nor is this meaning required for either of the two other passages in the OT. in which \':^'0 occurs. In Nah. 3, 14 p^O ""p^rnn the rendering ' lay hold of the brickmould ' (in preparation for a siege, immediately following 'go into the clay, and tread the mortar ') is as suitable as ' make strong the brickkiln ; ' and in Jer. 43, 9 a ' brick- kiln ' in front of Pharaoh's palace would be by no means so suitable a spot for the prophet to deposit in it his symbolical stones, as a square, or open quadrangle, in the same position, especially if, as appears from v. 10, the stones were to mark the site upon which Nebuchadrezzar's throne was to be erected. Nor again, is the mean- ing brickkiln recognized by any of the ancient Versions. Here, LXX have 8i7^yay€V avTOV% 8ia tov ttXivOlov , Luc. inpL-qyayev avrovi; iv Ma8€;8j8a, Pesh. ='Jfc^Q_AXir> yC^I i^vlo, Targ. N''p15^•a pnn^ "njl • ZATW. 1882, pp. 53-72. See also Levy, Neuhebr. Worterbuch, s. v. 2 ' Led them through the brickmould,' the sense being, at least, not worse than that of Jerome's ' traduxit in typo laterum,' or of countless other passages in the LXX Version. TlKivO'wv has been supposed to mean ' brick/'//« .- ' but no such sense is recognized in the last edition of Liddell and Scott's Lexicon. * Made them pass through the measure, — meaning, perhaps (PS. 2237), some arrangement for allotting them to different forms ot punishment {ch. 8, 2); cf. Nestle, Margin. 17. Comp. also »:i^/ JI^Qj^jso j^s^l, in a Mace. 4, 12 (cited PS. ib.). 296 The Second Book of Samuel^ and he dragged them through the streets, Vulg. et traduxit in typo lateruvi : in Nah. 3, 14 LXX KaraKpaTrjaov virkp ttXCvOov, Pesh. i.ifc N to U^:i»j« (brickmould), Targ. "i''j''''yn ''D''PnN* (thy building), Vulg. tene later em: in Jer. 43, 9 p/02 D7tD2 LXX probably omit\ ol Xonroi Iv Tw Kpv(f)Lii} iv Tw TrXivOm, Pesh. jkjjx^.viA ).^!::^jA.;3 (in the qtmdrangle), Targ. t?y^J3 i'2D3 in the mortar of the building, Vulg. in crypla quae est sub muro latericio. Thus usage, whether of Hebrew or of the cognate languages, or as interpreted by ancient authority, offers no support to the meaning brickkiln for ppD. Hence Hoffmann, in the article referred to, holds the common interpretation of this passage to be incorrect, and reading "I^.V.'!} for 'vyiT\ would render, 'And he brought forth the people that were therein, and set them to saws, and to harrows of iron, and to axes of iron, and 7nade them labour at the brickmould:' in other words, instead of torturing them, employed them in different public works ^ This view of the passage is accepted by Stade {Gesch. Isr. i. 278), We. Bu. Now. Sm. Konig, NKZ. 1891, p. 667, Nestle, al., and is represented on the margin of the Revised Version. '2 U'\^ in the sense of to set atnong-=.to employ about^ may be illustrated from I 8, 11 in23"tD3 1^ D^l. i Ch. 20, 3 has indeed "lb**! and sawed for DB'^l : but this may be either a textual corruption, or a mistaken interpretation of the compiler. Certainly, if we could honestly relieve David of the act of cruelty, which the Hebrew text here appears to attribute to him, we should be glad to do so : no doubt, it may be shewn to be in harmony with the manners of the age (Am. i, 3 of the Syrians of Damascus), but it is alien to all that we know of the personal character and temper of David. Hoffmann's view is unquestionably an attractive one ; and the only ground which may occasion hesitation in accepting it, is the circumstantiality in the mention of three separate kinds of instruments, ' saws ' and ' harrows ' and ' axes,' and the character of the instruments themselves, ^ Or express by iv irpoOvpoi's. But iv rtpodvpois iv TrvXri are more probably a double rendering of nnSH, — the former in accordance with the rendering elsewhere in Jer. of nnS (i, 15. 19, 2. 26, 10. 36, 10), and iv -nvKri a correction. 2 Cf. how Mesha' employed his Israelite prisoners (Inscr. 11. 25-6). ^ Under (AV.) is a paraphrase of '2, in no way necessitated by the Hebrew. XII . 31— XIII. 9 297 both of which might have been expected to be somewhat more general, had the narrator merely intended to state that the Ammonites were put to forced work by David. On the other hand, it is true that the sense brickkiln cannot be shewn to be expressed by p70 in any other passage where it occurs in either Biblical or post-Biblical Hebrew, or even in the cognate languages. The correction of "i"'ayn into Tiayn is, of course, no source of difficulty. The terms employed in the first part of the verse favour the common interpretation of the passage : the term p?D — so far as our knowledge of it goes — favours as decidedly — not to say more so — Hoffmann's view. The state of our knowledge is not sufficient to enable us to arrive at a decision with entire confidence. But those who refuse to allow the meaning brickkiln for p7JD may at least claim to have a sound philological basis for their opinion. n'L^'y''] Luc. rightly eiroiei. Comp. the same tense in the description of the behaviour of an invading army, 2 Ki. 3, 25. 13, 2. nii?nnn^ pJCN^ nv''l] ' And Amnon was distressed (Josephus ;(aX€7rws SteKetro : cf. I 13, 6. 28, 1 5), SO that he made himself sick,' etc. The athnah would stand better at "inriN (Th. Ke. We. al.), what follows stating the reason why Amnon felt such distress : ' Because she was a virgin, and (this being so) it was hard,' etc. 3. nyOK'] See on I 16, 9. Jonadab was cousin both to Absalom and Tamar and to Amnon. nan] 'subtil' (A v. RV.) is scarcely a fair paraphrase: the text says that Jonadab was wise. {Si(blil=QT\)} Gen. 3, i.) 4. 2nx ^JX . . . "ir:n ns] The regular Older with the ptcp. and pronoun: Gen. 37, 16. 41, 9 etc. {Tenses, § 208. 3; GK. § 142'' ((/) no/e). 5. ^nnm] 'and make Ihyself sick' — here and v. 6 in pretence (GK. § 546), V. 2 in reality. — On rnONI . . . T3N N31 see on I 19, 3. 9. met}] Only here. The etymology is not apparent: but the meaning appears to be established by the Aram. n^iDD, which clearly signifies //a/^ or pan (Lev. 2, 5 ; Ez. 4, 3 al. Targ. : for nnnp). LXX Ty]yavov, as always for nnn?:?. Kon. ii. 184 thinks it may be an old corruption of n3no, and, as such, the source of the Targ. n''iDD. For p'lfni, see GK. § 71. 298 The Second Book of Samuel, ''b]}^ t:'\S* ^3 1X''^'in] So Gen. 45, i. b]!^=/rom attendance on. 10. ^"*'"1'!}] The lengthening of the D of n"]"|nn in pause involves the change of the preceding n to n, the collocation nn being avoided. So "'!!'?:> becomes in pause not ^nN, but ''HX; see GK. § 29^. 12. p rrcy^'N? '•n] The impf. as Gen. 34, 7; cf. 20, 9. rimTrb^-] GK. § 75^11. Ew. § 224c ; Stade, § 143'^ (3); Delitzsch on Is. 64, 3; Konig, i. p. 531. n^a:] Jud. 19, 23 nsnn n^ajn nx ic^yn h^\ and comp. the phrase ^Nitr^n n^3J nti'y Gen. 34, 7; Dt. 22, 21 (nn'vJ'yj); Jer. 29, 23 (each time of a sexual offence); Jos. 7, 15 (of Achan's impiety). The word expresses more than 'folly.' Just as 73J (2, 33: see more fully on I 25, 25) denotes one who lacks all regard for God or man, so TVIl means godlessness, impiety. It is applied, both here and elsewhere, to immorality, but it does not specifically de7tote immorality. The ideas which the Hebrews associated with the word appear with especial distinctness in Isaiah's description of the ^3J (32, 6); see on I 25, 25. 13. D''!?3in nnx^] For the form of the comparison, comp. 2, 18. 14. mjDO pTn''")] 'and overpowered her.' Cf. I 17, 50. ^n^< a^ti'M] When 23B' is used of illicit intercourse, the pronoun with ns is regularly pointed by the Massorites as though it were the object of the verb in the accus. (Gen. 34, 2. Lev. 15, 18. 24. Nu. 5, 13. 19. Ez. 23, 8). It is doubtful whether this is not an arbitrary distinction on the part of the punctuators, and whether in all cases the word was not originally intended to be the prep. ^^^^ '. (i) There is no other indication of 2DtJ^ being construed with an accus. — the Qre in Dt. 28, 30 nj3Dt^'» obviously proving nothing as to the usage of the living language ; (2) Dy "2.2^ is used constantly in the same sense (11, 4; Lev. 15, 33; Dt. 22, 22-29, etc.), and if so, Dy and ns being closely synonymous, there is a strong pre- sumption that ns 22^ was understood in a similar sense. 15. nhnj nx2K> . . . hnjc'm] GK. § 117^. nanSD] Read nanSTO, which is needed. 16. 'J1 nnX'i'N] The text is untranslateable : neither RV. nor 1 In Ez. the form is indeed riniS ; but in this book (as in Jer.) the prep, is constantly written -Jl^.N instead of -DN (e.g. 3, 22) : see on c/i. 24, 24. XIII. g-i8 299 RV. m. is a rendering of it. The text of LXX has been corrected to agree with the Hebrew : but what is evidently the fragment of a genuine rendering has been preserved out of its place in v. 15, viz. yxet^wv -T] KUKca rj iax'^rrj ^ rj 7rpw7T/= '"IJ^^^Ii^P ^IC^t '^^'^ H^nj . Lucian's recension of LXX has Mrj, dSeX^e* on fieydXr] rj K-a/cta 17 e(r)(aTT] VTrep Tr]v irpwTTjv rjv ■ireTroirjKav do-TpayaXwTos (i.e. reaching to the ankles) ; Aq, in Gen. x- aarpayaXoiv, here ;^. KapTrwros ; Symm. in both places x- Xf'P'^<^Tos (i-e. sleeved: Hdt. 7. 61); Jerome in Gen. (following I>XX) tunica polyinita, here (as Aq. in Gen.) tunica talaris. Targ. Onk. and Jon.' *E?1 Win^a, transliterating. D3 in Aram, means the palm of the hand (Dan. 5, 5. 24 ; cf. i\\e /em. I 5, 4 al. Targ.), or sole of the foot (Dt. 2, 5 Pesh.). Thus both alternative renderings have ancient authority in their favour. On the whole, however, as the explanation 'parti-coloured tunic' implies a sense of 1 Targ. Jerus. and Ps.-Jon. on Gen. (T^'^O or) T»1i'D TlJ"lD a variegated tunic. 300 The Second Book of Samuel, D"'D2 {patches), which has no sufficient philological basis, the other explanation ' a tunic reaching to the hands and feet' ('a long-sleeved tunic/ Sm.; 'a long garment with sleeves,' RV. 7narg) — notwith- standing that wrists or ankles might have been expected to be named, rather than D''DD (if the word be rightly explained as = Aram. DD) — is the more probable. 1 8. nic^a^n p ^d] Cf. Gen. 50, 3 D^o:nn ^?d^ is^d> p ^3. ti^h'^VO] We. Bu. Now. Sm. Ehrl. D^^VO. The ^'•yo was distinct from the n:n3 {DB. i. 625^ 3 a; ; ^^. Mantle: cf Ex. 28, 4). ?yjl] so Jud. 3, 23. Cf. on I I, 12; and GK. § 112**. 19. m''] Read r\'''3N, m^'J'ax and Dvc:'''3X). In Arabic, the ^ is used to form diminutives (as kalb dog, kulaib little dog: Wright, i. § 269), even in pr. names; and it has accordingly been supposed (Ew. § 167% Bo.) that the form Aminon here is a diminutive used intentionally by Absalom, for the purpose of expressing his contempt for Amnon ^ It is true, as We. remarks, that ' the Arabic inner diminutive-formation is akin to ten- dencies in that language which are foreign to Hebrew : ' nevertheless, there are examples of forms and constructions occurring in isolation in Hebrew, which are idiomatic only in Arabic ; so that this explanation of pJ"'t2N must not be pronounced altogether impossible. The alternative is to treat ^ as a clerical error. — Dy riTl, as Gen. 39, 10. 14 (Th. Ke.). ^ Not (Bu.) npytl, which would require a preceding nSpil (I 17, 41): koX Kpa^ovaa is no proof that LXX read npytl : see 15, 30. Jud. 14, 9. ^ So also Wright, I.e., who adds, with Ew., as another example from Hebrew p£'>2K', remarking that the "• in these two words must be regarded as a weaken- ing of ''__ (orig. ^^-), as in X}:^. ^'^^] in Heb., and Kva.A'^v. a youth, in Syr., are almost certainly diminutives; perhaps nCJO^ Job 42, 14 (for nD''D^ a tittle dove, from Arab, ycfudtnah, a dove) is another. See further GK. (Engl, transl.) § '^d^ footnote ; Lagarde, Bildung der Aom. 87-89; and on diminutives in the Mishnah, Segal, Misnaic Hebrew, p. 64. XIII. i8-2) 301 'b 2^ nc'] See on I 4, 20. .i^?^^"!] ' and that desolate.' The 1 is peculiar, though just defen- sible (GK. § 154a note {b); Lex. 252b): but probably it should be deleted. Or an adj. may have fallen out before it; but not ^'^\ (Bu.), for an adj. only follows ^^n (see on I 14, 19). In form nODb' is a ptcp., either Qal (Siegfr.-Stade, Heb. WB.; Lex. 1030^), or Po'el (Kon. ii. io6) with the O dropped, as happens sometimes, esp. 'where the ptcp. becomes a mere adj. or subst.' (Ew. § i6oa: cf. \}}V (beside iP.iy^), ^.^iy (beside ^.^iVO), n'Tf^\^ (from l^B^) tmidwus eyers, often in the Psalms ; and Kon. /. c). The fern, with pre-tonic sere is found both in an ordinary ptcp. in pause, even with a minor disj. accent, as here and Is. 33, 14 n^Dvs C'wSI, and in a ptcp. used as a subst., as ^i?% iTjnb a buckler, if/. 91, 4 (Stade, § 214°; GK. § 84 a^). The forms noDiC^, CODiK' etc. recur Is. 49, 8 nittob' ni^nj. 54, i D"»31 nooiB' ^33. Lam. I, 4. 13 nm'^ >:2ni 16. Dan. 9, 26 (all with disj. accents). QPC3N n''^] r\''22 "I"'2D (see on I 12, 5), quite needlessly: see p. 37 no/e. 21. nxo )b nn^] LXX after these words express nnTiX nxy N^l : Wn inbn ^3 bnx ^3 iJ3 |^3CN which are accepted by Ew. Th. We. Bu. etc. as part of the original text. For 3ify see i Ki. i, 6; and Is. 54, 6 nil n3!|ifi? (Th.). The words, if a gloss, are at any rate an instructive one. 22. 310 nyi yiD^ ... inn N^] i.e. anything at all. Cf. Gen. 31, 24. 29 ; and also Vy^ N-'l "■ y^'''' N? Zeph. i, 12 ; similarly Is. 41, 23. Jer. ID, 5. pb in yiK:^, as 6, 19 {Lex. 5831"). TJ'N 13^ bv] Dt. 22, 24. 23, 5: GK. § i3oc«. 23. □''O'' DTIJ::'] 'two years, days.' So 14, 28. Gen. 41, r. Jer. 28, 3. lit: for the pleonastic n''n\ cf CD^ ^m, D^D'' HT, and (in late Hebrew, Dan. 10, 2. 3) D^?^^ D^y^'^tj': and see Ges. T/ies. p. 585b; Tenses, §192.1; GK. § 131'^. The ^, to denote the end of a period, as Gen. 7, 4. 10. Ex. 19, 15 (rare): Lex. 5i7*b. nnn] Gen. 38, 12. Ba'al Hazor is probably Te/I 'Asur, on an elevated height 4I miles NE. of Bethel (Buhl, 177 ; EB. ii. 1979). For Ba'al, see on 5, 20. DnSK Dy] n]3 = beside is used to denote proximity to a town or 302 The Second Book of Samuel, other spot, as DU"" DV DD Jud. 19, 1 1. i Ki. i, 9, but not to a large area such as ' Ephraim : ' were the tribe intended, as Th, rightly observes, the phrase used would be Dnax!? njrs (I 1 7, i etc.), not Dnax ny i^'N. Either CiaN is the name of some place not otherwise named, or the text is false. The supposition (Bo. Th. Ke.) that the place meant is P"1SV 2 Ch. 13, 19 (P^SJ/ Qre) derives support from LXX (Luc.) Tocjipaifji (Klo.), though it is true that the y in 2 Ch. is not repre- sented by r. 'Ephron is mentioned close after Bethel and Yeshanah (cf. on I 7, 12) ; and has been thought to be the same as 'Ophrah (I 13, 17 ; LXX Tofpa), prob. (see note) et-Taiyibeh, 4 miles NE. of Bethel, and 2\ miles SE. of Tell 'Asur, in the valley below it. Whether this distance is too great to be denoted by Dy, will depend on whether Ba'al-Hazor was so much less important than 'Ephron that it was necessary for its position to be thus defined. But it is odd that the site of a conspicuous hill, such as that on which Ba'al-Hazor was (3318 ft.), should have to be defined by its nearness to a place (2850 ft.) nearly 500 ft. in the valley below it. 25. pSM] Read "1YD''1: see on I 28, 23. So v. 27. in^l^M] = bade him 'fare-well,' as Gen. 24, 60. 47, 10. ch. 19, 40 al. 26. NJ"]7'' N7I] 'Precisely analogous examples of the same con- struction are Jud. 6, 13. 2 Ki. 5, 17. 10, 15: the latter demonstrates incontrovertibly the correctness of the punctuation, and obliges us to render: And if not, let Amnon go with us,' We., excellently. Observe the disjunctive accent at sh \ Cf. Tenses, § 149 end. 27. ii?Dn ""jn-^a] LXX adds "i^nn nncca nnc^D Di^tiQN tryi. The words may, indeed, be an addition, suggested by a reminiscence of I 25, 36 : at the same time an express notice of the feast prepared by Absalom is quite suitable, and their omission may be due to homoioteleuton. 28. ^rilOXI . , . niD3] 3it3 with D is of course the infin. of the verh 3in (I 16, 16. 23 etc.; Est. i, 10, as here). The tense ^niDSI as I 10, 8. I Ki. 2, 37 etc. {Tenses, § 118; GK. § 114''). 2\'0, applied to the heart, as in Jud. 16, 25 02^ nit: ^3 (Qre ^^^ 2it33); 19, 22 DH Dni? riN D''n''D''n; and comp. on I 25, 36. ^ And so in 2 Ki. 5. In 2 Ki. 10, however, the accentuation expresses a false interpretation and is misleading. Render, ' And Jehonadab said. It is. And if it is, give thine hand.' Xlir. 2)-34 303 ■•3 VCT\\ Cf. ^3n 9, I. Observe ihat / is emphatic. 'y\ iprn] Cf. 2, 7. 30. 1 ima ncn] See on I 9, 5. 3ii>. Read with LXX Dnn:3 lyip v^y D^avjn vnay !?3v 32. nD"'C^ . . . •'D~^y''3] , . . ""S ^y may denote according to the mouth (i.e. the appointment, commatidment) of (AV. : see Ex. 17, i etc.), or upon the mouth ^ (Ges. : cf. Ex. 23, 13. \\f. 50, 16): nO'B' (Kt.) will here be the ptcp. pass, of QB' (cf. Nu. 24, 21), with the sense of settled. The sense thus obtained is not unsuitable, though ""D by is not, perhaps, quite the phrase that might have been expected to be used with ^D^:^', and some clearer statement of the nature of the intention then harboured by Absalom is certainly desiderated (cf the addition rT'On? 3, 37). Ewald's suggestion respecting the word. Hist. iii. 234 (E.T. 172), deserves mention. Comparing the Arabic 'l£ sinister et infaustus fuit alicui, 111. inauspiciousness, ill-luck, he sup- poses it to signify an inauspicious expression, an expression boding misfortune (Anglice, a scowl), — 'For upon the mouth of Absalom there hath been a scowl since the day when Amnon humbled his sister Tamar.' The suggestion is an exceedingly clever one : the only doubt is whether a word meaning in itself simply unluckiness (Lane, p. 1490) could be used absolutely to signify a token of un- luckiness (ein Ungliickszeichen) for others. It is accepted by We., W. R. Smith {Eficycl. Brit., ed. 9, art. David, p. 840^ note, cf. ed. 10, p. 858b), Now. Sm, Bu. does not decide between this and Ewald's alternative suggestion niDb* (Ezr. 4, 6t). 33. laT uij bx , . . D'w''' bx] ' let not my lord the king take aught (im, not ~imn) to heart, saying' etc.: 37 PN DB' as 19, 20. In form, as well as in the use of "i3n, the sentence resembles I 22, 15 ••as nu ba im nnya li^Dn nc'^ bx. DN "'D] So Kt. : ""^ Qre. "'3 is sufficient (cf. 32) ; and DX may have arisen by dittography from the following word : but DX U is defensible, the context suggesting the negative to be understood : Ges. (minime,) sed solus Amnon mortuus est. Comp. on I 26, 10. 34. Dibc'QX ni3"'l] The words interrupt the narrative, and are an awkward anticipation of 37^. We. Bu. Now., unable to suggest anything better, excise them: Elirlich, very cleverly, suggests ann3 304 The Second Book of Samuel, D1^L"3N* (forming the end of v. 33). No doubt, the narrator ?}ughi have written the words there; but they seem somewhat superfluous. Klo. Cli^^ VriN '\m (constr. as I 16, 4), which Bu. accepts. V"ins "Jlic] The text cannot be right. "i"n cannot be in the St. c. : and ' from //le way ' would need the art. EV V. ' by the way of the hill-side behind him ' is no translation of the Heb. LXX has an insertion (^-at TrapeyeVero 6 o-kottos kol uTnjyyeiXev tw ftaaiXel /cat ctTrev AvSpas ewpaKa e/c t^? 68ov ttJs Opcov7/v €k fJiepov<; tov opous), which enables We. both to restore a text satisfactory in itself, and at the same time to remove the difficuUies attaching to MT. The text as thus restored reads as follows : '^'y\m D^Jnh ^^ina D^D^n ni DV n:ni inr[ nsD Di'ph Tjn-no "•n'-N-j d''B'JX itom r[biih 12*1 nsi-n xn^i.. imn is now provided with the desiderated genitive; and Vinti is seen to be a corruption of D''nn ^ The omission in MT. arose from a copyist's eye passing from Cjnn "im^ to D^Jin ']'M)2. The i?"kr 51? '•rfl intelligible. 37b. ^asn"'!] Insert after this wordTn li^on, with LXX. 39. I^rrn in ^ani] Untranslateable. The connexion with 14, i shews that the verse must describe the preparatory or initial stage in the desire which Joab soon afterwards perceived to be stirring in David's mind towards his absent son. Ewald, Hist. iii. 234 (E.T. 173), conjectured pJ^n in non 7201 'and David's anger ceased to manifest itself towards Absalom.' On this conjecture, We. observed : ' Though it satisfies the conditions imposed by the context, it is open to the objection that the sense assumed for nsv is not substantiated, and that in ncn ought not to be combined. For the unusual order "I^cn Tin (i Ki. 2, 17. 12, 2. 2 Ki. 8, 29 = 9, 15^) shews that it must be in nn that the feminine required as the subject of 73m lies con- cealed. It follows that instead of combining "in nan, in should have been changed into non, if no other feminine subst. is to be found which more closely resembles TIT graphically.' The acuteness and justice of this criticism were brilliantly confirmed, when We. discovered subsequently (p. 223) that Codd. 19, 82, 93, 108 (i.e. the recension of Lucian), as well as many others, actually expressed the substantive nn ! Read, therefore, '^1 l^'^n nn ^3ri1 ' And the spirit of the king longed"^ to go forth unto Absalom.' 14, I. JJT'l] came to know=-^t\z€\stdi: I 18, 28. Jer. 32, 8. 2. nj;ipn] Teqoa' (ypJil), the home of Amos (Am. 1,1), now Tekua, was in the hill-country of Judah, just 10 miles S. of Jerusalem, '^2snn] 'feign thysef to be a mourner : ' cf. npnnn 13, 5. D'nn D-D"" nr] The nr is very idiomatic: I 29, 3 {Lex. 261^). as 1 And in late Hebrew, as i Ch. 24, 31. 29, i. 9. 24. 29. 2 Ch. 26, iS. 2T, etc., re};ularly in Aramaic (NB^D B'lm, etc.). ^ IaI. failed vi\\>A. longing to ... : comp. f. 84, 3. 119, 81. 82. 123. X 13G5 3o6 The Second Book of Samuel, 3. .Ttsa D-nann-DN ^nv n^^)] Ex. 4, 15. Nu. 22, 38. Ezr. 8, 17 al. 4\ -inxni] Clearly ii^m must be read, wiih LXX, Pesh. Targ. Vulg., as well as many MSS. I^on] LXX express Hytrin a second time, after 170n, — perhaps rightly. The repetition would be ' in thorough harmony with the affected emotion which the woman displays in speaking to the king' (Th.). 5. -'^^J verily, of a truth: Gen. 42, 21. i Ki. i, 43. 2 Ki. 4, 14. (In late Heb. with an adversative force : Lex. 6*.) non^K n^J'N] So I Ki. 7, 14. 17, 9: comp. ch. 15, 16 ti'^'^h^ C'^*:!. I Ki. 3, 16 ni3T D''::'^ Titr; N''aj ^^^, jna c'-x etc. "•JNJ Observe the pausal form with Tfha, where a pause in the voice is appropriate to the sense. So 18, 22 : cf. Gen. 15, 14 ^I^V* ; Dt. 13, 5 13^ri ; Hos. 8, 7 iy">T>; v. 7 below innStT, and nnNB'J (perf.), etc. ; and regularly in ''3N"''n. Cf. Tenses, § 103. 6. nnxn-ns nnxn i3*1] 'And he smote him— the one (namely) the other.' Such an anticipation of the object by the pronoun, rare altogether^ (see on I 21, 14), produces here, however, an intolerable sentence. Read, with Luc. {koX cTrara^cv 6 els toi' d8e\4>oi' auroG), Vr^{"^N; "insn !]^1 : probably 13^1 was meant to be read 13!1, and arose from a false interpretation of 'j1 inxn (as though this meant otie another '^). ■ 7. K'sn] the 1 pretii : cf. Dt. 19, 21 ^Ull C'S3. Lam. i, 11; and see GK. § 119P; Lex. 90^ 3 b. Ti^nj] Ges. compares ^wTrvpov ' de spe generis ad paucos redacta, V. c. de iis qui diluvio erepti erant, Lucian, Timon, § 3 ' (^wTriipoV n Tov avOpwTTLvov aTTepjxaTO'i,- — from Plato, Legg. 677 B). nnN'tTi n^'] Cf. -in*^i U'^ Is. 14, 22. 8. "JNl] Note the emphatic pronoun. 10. iriNnni yb^ imnn] As a woman is addressed, in^?ni should be read (We. Bu. etc.). The construction is exactly as Ex. 4, 21. 12, ^ From Gen. to 2 Sam. the only examples are the few quoted in the note on I 21, 14. The usage is somewhat more frequent in later books; in genuine Hebrew it was never idiomatic except in the one expression 'I'Xj D*N (see ib.). ' Cod. B has the doublet tov tva tov a.de\".ryi; 8, 15 end; I \(i,\end; 20, 34^^ ; ch. 3, 20''; 10, 2; 12, 17''; 13, 33"; 17, 13. i4>>; .//. 15, 3; 24, 4; 25, 15"; 26, 6. 9; 33, 7b; 105, 14; Mic. 2, 3 (not 'abnormal,' J. ]\T. P. Smith), etc. Comp. on I i, 4. 13. -13^01] = ns^.npi (GK. § 54C), as Nu. 7, 89. Ez. 2, 2. 43, 6t, according to the punctuators. DB'NS] 'as one guilty' — in thus speaking the king condemns himself. X 2 3o8 The Second Book of Samuel, Tl^a^] not ' VI not bringing back ' (Keil), but in order not to . . . The clause is epexegetical, not of DtJ'tO, but of riND— the explanatory inf. at the end, as 13, 16. 19, 20 (We.). in-n;] See GK, § 92b «. 14. The application of the truth is to Absalom. Life may end at any moment: when it is past it cannot be recalled: thou mayest find this to be too true in the case of thy son, if thou leavest him in banishment. ' And God doth not take away life, but deviseth plans in order not to banish (further) from him one that is banished,' i.e. and even God acts more mercifully than thou art acting. But the text of clause l> is doubtful. The antithesis is imperfect (doth not /ake away life, but recalls from banishment) ; and the expression thinketh thoughts (in this connexion^) is of doubtful propriety (We.), as applied to God. Ewald's emendation (iii. 174) is easy (3K'in for n^'m 2)^ and yields a decidedly better sense : ' but God will not take away the life of him that deviseth plans not to banish from him one that is banished,' — the words being understood as an encouragement to David to take steps for recalling Absalom. So We. Now. Bu. Kennedy, — the last two, however, understanding ' from him ' to refer to Yahweh, who will visit with His favour the man who exerts himself to restore to Yahweh and His worship one who, while in exile, is banished from it (see I 26, 19). m'' Tl^n^] Ti^n^ with the impf. (virtually, of course, a relative clause), instead of the usual inf. c, as once besides, Ex. 20, 20^. Cf. pJ^^priP once, Dt. 33, 1 1, in place of the normal D^pt?^ 15. "lt^'N nnin] 'and now (it is) that I am come,' etc. The con- struction is very unusual, "itJ'X being in fact superfluous. See, however, Zech. 8, 20 . . , -it^N* ny. 23 ... "itTN r\i2nr, D''D''3. * Jer. 18, 1 1 is evidently different : so also are Mic. 4, 12 ; Is. 55, 8. 9. ^ For the misplacement of 1, cf. Jer. 2, 25 Kt. 17, 23 Kt. 32, 23 Kt. al. s Either UlkJ^'", INn'', or 31^", N13, must also be read in Jer. 23, 14. 27, 18, for 12K', ^Sb, after Tl^ab. * D^DD, Targ. K^m NH, which illustrates Dan. 4, 43 N^PD ^D XH. The pleonastic use of NH behold in comparisons is frequent in the Targums : Gen. 49, 4 N'lO:: NH. Dt. 32, 33 ^>T'^r\ m?OD NH. ch. 23, 4. is. 5, 28. 9, 4. 18, I. 21, 3. 10. 29, 16. 32, 6. 35, 6. 59, 5. 6. 60, 8. Nah. 2, 12 etc. XIV. 1^-26 3^9 1 6b. n^JDK'n?] The Heb. cannot be rendered ' ihai zvouM desiroy me ' (EVV.) : restore ^\?.^^^_ (LXX) before ^n^. 17. DTi^sn *]N7rD3] The comparison as t'. 20. 19, 28. I 29, 9. V^\i^b] to understand, or discern ; cf. i Ki. 3, 9 ycb' 3.b. 1 1 : cf. Z^jv. 1033'' g, h. The ? = «« regard to : see on I 12,17; ^^^ cf. v. 25. 19. nns* as'V Tn] Cf. Jer. 26, 24. 2 Ki. 15, 19; and with Dy, 1 Ch. 4, 10. pcn^ C'X Qn] tJ'N* softened from ^l: comp. I\Iic. 6, 10 t^'^•n f (text dub. : ? nt!'Xn) for tJ'_"'_n. There are analogies for the softening in the mtdd/e of a word in Hebrew (e.g. D'N^tp, D>'ns for D^^bp, D»^3>- ; Stade, §122; GK. § 93^^) : but the softening at the beginning is very anomalous, and has really no analogy^ except in Syriac (as fcs-.( itself = K'.l : "^yllea^i, '^^■V.ao.A.. / ; Nold. Syr. Gr. § 40 C). Ew. § 53c cites as a parallel '•t^'^N i Ch. 2, 13 for ^^) (as the name is written in v. 12). Probably both there and here the N is not original, but due to a late transcriber-. Cf. p. I20«. The construction of '? ('k^'*) U'K, as 2 Ki. 4, 13 {Tenses, § 202). ^arb] for p»?''n.5': cf. Gen. 13, 9; and see GK. § 701^,0. b^m^rh] for i'^N^fi'S': GK. §§ 53S, 23*". Nini . , , sin] emph. : cf. 23, 18. 20. Dt. 3, 28. 9, 3. 20. inyab] 17, 14. Ex. 20, 2ot. 21. "Tl^K^y] I have done=l do (GK, § 106™). 25. IND ?7n?] lit. '/« respect of praising greatly:' the clause defines the teriium comparationis : Gen. 3, 22 ye shall be as one of us J^y*iP in respect 0/" knowing, etc. Is. 21, i as whirlwinds in the South ^^> in respect of sweeping up, i Ch. 12, 8 Dnnn ^y D''N3V3 "iniop (^Tenses, § 205; Lex. 514* e IJ). hb^, as Gen. 12, 15 (Ehrl.). 26. ':i in^:3l] The constr. is involved: 'And when he shaved his head — now it used to be from time to time when he shaved it, because it was heavy upon him, that he shaved it — he would weigh,' etc. riMI after an intervening temporal or other clause, is always resumed ^ According to Kimchi, however, /'Cp^ was pronounced iklol (and therefore, to avoid confusion, the ist pers. was vocalized 7L3pS) : GK. §§ 24" end, 47'* end. But the examples (including K'N) cited § 47'' «. are in all probability textual errors. 2 The Massorah has here the note K''' T^D : above, jx 90. ' ) 3IO The Second Book of Samuel, either by the bare impf., or by the pf. and waw conv., so that , , , n^^1 n^:'' IC'N cannot be rendered ' And it used to be from time to time ihat he shaved it : ' .Tni can only be resumed by in^:"). It is true, eilher 1173'' "1C*N or in7:i is logically superfluous ; but the case is one in which the tautology would not be un-Hebraic : cf. Lev. i6, i. CO"'!? CC] = every year. So only here: cf. Tra^'O' n^iyo I i, 3 al. xyh\>V^ D^riND] = c. 3f lbs. av. {EB. iv. 904a). "]^r:n pS3] For the standard, cf. the Asf. ?nanu sha-sharri ; pjo ^7?^ *T3 (so many) tmnas by that of the king on the lion-weights from Nineveh (8-7 cent, b.c), Cooke, NSL 66; CIS. II i. 1-14; and almost the actual corresponding Avords in Aramaic (ND7D ''J3N3) found often in the Jewish Papyri from Elephantine (Sayce and Cowley, Aram. Papyri from Assuan, A 7. B 14, 15. C 15 al.), with reference to the Persian king. ]2i< = weight, as Dt. 15, 13. Pr. i6, 11 al. 27. nn^n N^"l] as Gen. 4, 20. 10, 8 : cf p. 108 «. 28. D'*D^ DTIJC^] as Gen. 41, i al. See on 13, 23. 30. •<']'• ba] See on I 4, 13. WIW DK' 1^1] See on I I, 2 ; and cf 17, 18. 31. ''b "IC'N np^nn] See on I 20, 40: GK. § 129I1. 32. n^-'>:ii ny 'h nio] 'it were well for me (that) I were still there.' D^ ''3X "W defines that in respect of which Absalom says >b 2)12. Com p. Ew. § 338c. But "•any would be better than ^3N ty in ear/y Hebrew {Zex. 728^). Kon. (iii. 558) would read ^3^< "iV. py '•2 ly* DSl] Cf I 14, 41 LXX. 20, 8. 33. )b'] insert with LXX ^2>i. 15, I. 'J1 CTl] Cf, of Adonijah, i Ki. i, 5^ See on I 12, 6; 22, 17. 2. noyi . . . n^3K^m] Notice the pff. with waiv conv., indicating what Absalom used to do. From 2^ to 4, however, the narrator lapses into the tense of simple description, only again bringing the custom into prominence in v. 5, and t^ (1^<2^)• N^pM . . . "IK'S t:'''Nn h2 ^T1] Exactly as 2, 23b, except that a subst. and rel. clause takes here the place of the ptcp. and article. e^'Wn ^3] The collective singular, as Dt. 4, 3; pn ^3 Ex. i, 22; Dipr^n ^2 20, 24; N2n \>2 ch. 2, 23. 20, 12; nsnn \>2 Jud. 19, 30. 3, *]n3*l] i.e. thy statements, arguments =^ihy case: Jos. 20, 4. XIV. 26— XV. II 311 l^on DND] 'thou hast none to hear oti the part of the king.' AV. excellently, ' deputed of the king.' Comp. nxo of a gTznt/rom, or due rendered by, a person; Gen. 47, 22. Lev. 7, 34. Nu. 3, 9. 8, 11. 4. '•JOC^ ""D] rr>^(? will make me . . ..? = that one would make me . . .! so 23, 15 □'•D ''jpc^^ "'0 = that one would give me to drink water, etc.! and constantly in the phrase 1^^ ^^ : GK. § 151''"'^. KT "'i'yi] ' that to me might come ' etc. Note the position of ^^y : I Ki. 2, 15; 2 Ki. 5, II behold, I thought loyi Nir Nr \bx that he would come out to me, and stand, etc.; Gen. 30, 16. 43, 16. vnpn^'iTl] The pf. and waw conv. in continuation of an impf. with the force of a Latin imperf. subjunctive ; exactly so Amos 9, 3. 5. "h p^rnn] Read n pnnn with some 30 MSS. 6. 3b nx . . . 335^1] ' stole the understanding (Jer. 5, 21. Hos. 4, 1 1. 7, II etc.) of,' i.e. duped: so Gen. 31, 20 P^ 3^ riN 2py^ nb?'!. 7. D^yanN] LXX (Luc), Pesh. (D?^^) ^iiy.— forty years evidently cannot be right. — The accentuation in 7b, placing the greatest break after "l^on at nin"'^ rather than at niJ, connects jnana rightly with xh^^\ W na^N, not with "rnn: (see V. 8). 8. 'J3K''' a"'K'^ DS] Kt. "y^V^ ' if he brings back, brings me back,' — an utterly un- Hebraic sentence. Qre ^i^J, from ^^) to dwell, unsuit- able beside ''33K''' will bring back. LXX tav cTrto-T/ae^wv cVifrTpc'i/zTj /i.€, Targ. '•JJ^n^n"' N2nN DN, Pesh. uoaSop Qa.3o»J» y/, i.e. ''J3U''' QK'n DN in entire accordance with idiom (e.g. 1 i, 11). mn"" HN "m^yi] add probably with LXX (Luc.) pinna (see v. 7). 10. n^t:'"'l] 'The sending out of the spies is to be regarded as taking place simultaneously with the departure of Absalom for Hebron, .so that n^t^""! is used quite regularly, and there is no ground for rendering it [as Th. had proposed to do] as a pluperfect,' Keil, rightly. To render by a plup. would be indeed contrary to grammar : the plup. (see on I 9, 15) would have been expressed by vb^ Di7t:^3N"i. 11. D^Xip] as guests to the sacrificial feast at Hebron: cf. I 9, 13. 22. 24. 16, 3. 5. I Ki. I, 9. □tsn^] The same idiom in i Ki. 22, 34 \orh nt:»p2 ^E^'0. The h is expressive of norm or standard (Ew. § 217^; Lex. 516 i): comp. 2-in •'D^ etc. "laT^a lyT" N^'>]='and knew nothing at all.' 312 77?^ Second Book of Samuel^ 12. 'y\ rh^''^] It is clear that Absalom did not, as he would do according to I\IT., send Ahitophel out o/ GWoh, but that he sent/^/- \\\m /ro?n Giloh. nx vhv, however, cannot be rendered 'senty^r' (EVV.); and a word must have dropped out after D1^C'3S*, — either Nn>1 (cf. I 1 6, 12 Bo.) or, better, N'-Jpn (We. with LXX (Luc.) Kal tKctXeo-f). 'b t«"ip^1 is more common than DX N"ip''1 : but flN is per- fectly admissible: see the similar passage I 22, 11. Ahitophel was Bathsheba's grandfather (cf. 23, 24 with 11, 3), which no doubt explains his hostility to David. nb» . . , "':^'':n] The form of the gentile adj. shews that n'^a stands for an original p?, and that the root, therefore, is ^'•J or i?ij, not n^3 (from which fi""??, Pp?, or th^ might be formed, but not n$3). So >Jlb''L*' from n^V, root ht^ or b^^, not rh^. Giloh is mentioned in Jos. 15, 51 among the cities of the hill-country of Judah,— perhaps Jala, 5 miles NNW. of Hebron. mi ^h.■|] See on I 2, 26'. 13. nnx , . . iTn] is come lo be (Jud. 17, 13: here —is gone) after . . . ; cf. on I 12, 14. 14- ri3^^ inno] GK. § 114^,11. nnm] set in motion, drive, impel evil upon us: comp. the Nif in Dt. 1 9, 5 |rn:3 n^ nmJI. Usually the Hif. signifies to fxpel (especially of Israel expelled from their country). 16. I^!?n3] as I 25, 27. nx] out of place before an indef. obj., and no doubt introduced by some error (cf. GK. § ny'i). I7f. We. points out how here the genuine LXX rendering of 17^-18 stands ' wedged in' between the two halves of another Greek translation agreeing closely with MT., the concluding words of ihe first half being repeated at the beginning of the second : [Kai lur-qirav ev otKO) Tw Maxpav. 18. kol ttcivtcs ol TratSes avTOv di/a X^^P^ avTov Traprjyov kol ttus Xerrei kol ttSs 6 €AcT^ci,] Koi etrrr/o-av inl t^s iXaia<; iv T77 iprjfxii). I 8. KOL ttSs o Aaos irapeiropev^TO ixop-evos avTov, kol ttcivtc? 01 Trepi avTov Koi Travre? ol aSpol kol Travres 01 fxax^Tai, k^aKocrioi av8/3ts, /cat Trap^a-av eVt X^^P"- olvtov. [kol ttS? 6 XepeOOa kol ttus 6 ^eXSO^i Kai TravT^s ol TiOOaioi, ol efaKocrtot avSpcs ot iXOovra rots ttoo-Iv avrdv ets V^6, KOL TTopevo/x^voi eVi TrpocruiTrov rov /JacrcAews]. The unbracketed XV. 12-20 3^3 words in the middle are the genuine version of LXX, in which, however, the close of z^. i8 has dropped out, for koI Traprja-av eVi x^'^P" avTov is merely a doublet to Trap^TropeviTo ixop-evos avTov. The only variation, however, with a claim to be preferred to MT., is V12V for Dyn in 17a, and Dyn for m^y in 18*1. The "ibr^n i*l3y are influential persons, in immediate attendance upon the king, and distinguished from 'the people' generally (cf. e.g. 16, 6). Hence 'the reading of LXX is right. The king and his attendants (may ^3) remain at the last house of Jerusalem, in order to let the people (oyn 73) and the body-guard pass. Only in v. 23 does David with his attendants resume his progress.' 17. pn'^}2n n"'a] the Far House (RV. w.),— probably the last house of Jerusalem in the direction of the Mt. of Olives. 18. Notice the ptcp. Dn3y (twice). Cnan ^D1] prefix (Ehrl.) '•ns'). As We. pointed out, 'after him from Gath,' as the te.xt stands, can refer only to David, which can scarcely be right, whereas a notice of Ittai is needed here, as an introduction to 19. With TlXt, the sf. in lb"ia (rd. r^n2 as 16. 17) will naturally apply to Ittai. 19. njj] a foreigner, as always, e.g. Jud. 19, 12. Of course ' stranger ' (from Lat. exlraneus) meant this formerly : but it is a great pity that this now misleading archaism has been retained so often in RV. Similarly 13?. P (22, 45. 46), 133 \n^N (I 7, 3), etc., should be always rendered ' foreigner,' ^foreign gods.' See Strange, Stranger in DB.; or my Nah.-Mal. in the Cejitury Bible, pp. 313, 314. The archaism is particularly obscuring in 'strange gods,' the point being that they 2iX& foreign gods. niDipib^ nns* nb DJI] 'going in exile to thy i)lace,' explained by Keil as meaning in search of a resting-place, — an improbable idea, and also unnaturally expressed. AV. renders as if 1D1pC7 followed 1\^ (!) ; RV. supplies ' return ' in italics. In fact IDIpoi' is simply a copyist's error for 1?^ipi:» (LXX, Vulg.). 20. ^y*3N DVm] ' and to-day shall I make thee wander with us in going } ' For yi3 in the sense of wandering up and down (properly, with an unsteady, uncertain gait : see my note on Am. 4, 8) with no settled home, cf. Nu. 32, 13 -syyoi Dyri. Am. 8, 12. ^\r. 59, 12 lDy^:n 314 The Second Book of Samuel, IDTnini li'Tin (where Gen. 4, 12 njl V3 makes Lagarde's iDT'jni for lOinini {Proph. Chald., 1872, p. xlviii) highly plausible). ^h^ ''3N IB'N ^y ^b1^ ""JNl] = am going whither I know not. See on I 23, 13. nosi non] Explicable grammatically as an adverbial accusative, ' and take back thy brethren in mercy and faithfulness : ' but such a use of the accus., except in two or three familiar expressions (as nXD, t:yp, VX^li; Ew. § 279c; GK. § 1181), scarcely occurs in prose. Keil and RV. (neglecting the Tifha at l^V) render : ' with thee be mercy and faithfulness.' Though not impossible, however, the construction which this rendering implies is harsh : "joy is almost demanded by TTIN ns as its complement, and \T is desiderated with riDNI HDn. The difficulty of the verse is at once solved by LXX: ns 3trn"i 1W nONI ion "fjisy nb'y: r\)y\-'\ l^y T-HN 'Return, and take back thy brethren with thee; and Yahweh shew toward thee mercy and faith- fulness: ' comp. 2, 6. The three words supphed have simply dropped out of MT. by homoioteleuton. 21. 'jl DN ^3] The Qre is here right: '•3 has been changed into DN ""^ by a scribe, who omitted to notice how the sentence ended. Without DX, the sentence following the oath is in form (. . . U\\>yyi ''3 'J1 Dt:' ^3) exactly like 3, 9. 23. D''313] Kara (rvVco-tv, as Dt. 9, 28 {land, as here): cf, on I 17, 46 {earth). For the syntax of ^Hi hp, see GK. § 117^. -imcin riN nm '•JD ^y] "imnn HN pn is an unparalleled and un- translateable expression; '>J3 ^y, also, does not mean 'toward' (EVV.). We. in his note on the passage suggested "imnn "j-n VJD ^y, but added ' It is probable that between the st. c. *]"n and the genitive nanon another word once stood, of which nN is a fragment.' Again, his conjecture was found afterwards to be confirmed by Lucian's recension, which reads Trpo Trpoa-ay-rrov airov Kara T-qv oSbv ttjs eXaias T^s ev rf) ^p7?/Aw="i3nm -)m n]Vr\ Tji-n VJS-^y, or, with less deviation from MT., "13^D^ n\1 (Sm. Bu.). This reading may be unreservedly accepted. The route must have lain across the Qidron valley, up the N. part of the Mt. of Olives, by the then usual road to the Jordan (cf. on 2, 24); and the "imon nn must have been some conspicuous tree near the spot where the uncultivated land began. "i3y 1?Dm just XV. 20-2 S 315 before, should, however, in all probability be T^V l/^ni. This is required, not merely by the restoration T»J2 ^y, but by the context, especially vv. 24-29. David stood in the valley of Qidron, while the people passed on before him : amongst them came Zadoq and Abiathar, who set down the ark while the rest of the people passed on; there followed the conversation with David, vv. 25-28. All this presupposes that David was stationary at the time. (On the inter- change of 1 and O, see the Introduction, p. Ixvii.) 24. Zadoq is mentioned here (except in the list 8, 17) for the first time. iriN D''vn 73l] A mention of Abiathar is greatly desiderated the first time that Zadoq is mentioned ; ' Zadoq and Abiathar ' in v. 29 suggest strongly that "inusi originally stood here, but that Cl^n 731 inx was substituted by a later scribe, whose point of view was that of the Chronicler (Bu. Sm. Now. Kit. Dh.). nnn] Prob. a later insertion : notice D^"l^^< jnx just afterwards, and also in 25. 29 ; and comp. on I 4, 3-5. So Bu. Kit. {ap. Kautzsch), Dh. etc. < ipn] ' z.wA poured out' (!). Read ^3i'!l, and set down (6, 1 7. I 5, 2). In Jos. 7, 23 DpV-1 may be correct; cf. '^''^'^ 2 Ki. 22, 9. nrf^K ^yi] The words are obscure (' went up ' whither .?), and where they stand interrupt the connexion (' they set down the ark until all the people,' etc.) : Luc. does not express them. Unless it might be supposed that nibj? (6, 17. i Ki. 3, 15) had fallen out after "inUN, the text would seem to be imperfect: perhaps the name of Abiathar was once more prominent than it now is, and the words quoted are a misplaced fragment. We. and others suppose its present imperfection to be due to an attempt, made in post-exilic times, to eliminate the name of Abiathar from it. 25. '•JDti'ni . . . XVCN' DN] Tenses, § 136a. So Gen. 18, 26. Ex. 23, 22. Nu. 21, 2 etc. imj nsi] >^\^, as 7, 8 shews, properly denotes an abode 0/ flocks ; comp. Is. 65, 10 }N^- m;S) \\-\Z'T\ n\-ii: Ez. 34, 14 3iD nm njv3-in. it is, however, of frequent use in poetry in the sense of abode generally : thus Ex. 15, 13 '^K'li? ni: of Canaan, Is. 33, 20 iJ^^K' ni3 of Jerusalem, Job 5, 3 of the abode of an individual person. In prose, the word 3i6 The Second Book of Samuel, occurs only in 7, 8 (r= i Ch. 17, 7) and in the present passage, where it is used in the same general sense that is othei*wise confined to poetry. 26. "lON^ rlD ns")] See on I 14, 9. For ''jjn, cf. on I 14, 43. 27. nnx HKinn] 'Seest thou?' (Ez. 8, 6) i.e. dost thou see how matters are ? But the text excites suspicion ; and many attempts have been made to correct it. Keil would read nxnn and render T ' O seer: but the priest is never identified with the prophet; nor is the term seer ever applied to him. LXX has tSere, which may either represent -IN*"*, or be a misreading of HN"] (15, 3. Gen. 41, 41 etc.); and as the plural pronouns at the end of the verse and in v. 28, shew that Abiathar and Zadoq are both present, either nX"! (Bu.) or ^N"> (Now. Dh. Kit.) may have been used here, according as David began by addressing Zadoq in particular, or both together. With the text otherwise as it stands, nriN must go with what follows, 'return Ihou:' but in view of the plural following and esp. of v. 29^ it is highly probable that for HT^ nns* we should read 13^ TJvHSi nnx (Bu. Now. Ehrl. Kit. Dh.). 28. mi^y^] at the fords of So Kt., which ch. 17, 16 shews to be more probable than nU"lj;3 in the steppes (Jos. 4, 13) ^(Qre and Verss.), and which is preferred, after Bottcher, by most moderns (Th. Ke. We., etc.). The word occurs only here, 17, 16, and 19, 19 (see note), the usual term being nayD, nnnyJD. The fords meant are probably Machddat {\\\Q ' ford') el-HaJlah, and Machddat el-He7iit, 4 and 3 miles respectively from the mouth of the Jordan (Kennedy), 29. UK'^l] LXX, Bu. Now. Sm. aB'*!, referring to the ark. 30. David here commences the ascent of the Mount of Olives. The ptcpp. serve to represent the scene vividly, as well as state what was happening at the time when David received the intelligence related in t^. 31. r\'pi n^y . . . ni^y] Cf. I 17, 41. isn . , . ^isn] The word is an uncommon one. It recurs, joined with t^'X*^, Jer. 14, 3. 4. Est. 6, 12. nbll ri^y l^yi] GK. §1138; and on I 6, 12a. 31. T:n nni] Read T^an nnh (sc. T?'?n), or, following LXX, nan in^l -. T'an is never construed with an accus. of the person to whom a thing is told. \ ■ XF. 26-^7 317 32. N3 in M^l] Cf. on I 7, 10 ; and add i Ki. 20, 39. 40. D^ ninnc'^ -iC'wS] The subj. may be either n1nn'k^•C^ or IM—' to the place where men were wont (or he was wont) to worship God : * the former is more probable. The reference is to some spot at the top of the Momit of Olives, which was frequented as a sanctuary, or place of worship, insipi? n^ni as I 10, 10; ch. 16, i. "^isn] LXX 6 apxteraipos Aau€i8=nn nyi ""J-ixn {d.v. 37; 16, r6), no doubt rightly, the title being added naturally on ihtfirsl occurrence of the name. In LXX the gentile name has been strangely Graecized — either by the original translators, or by a scribe, too anxious to improve his author's text (cf. p. 78 n.) — and combined with eratpo?, so as to produce the compound ' C>^/^ companion.' The '•^iNH ^U3 was a little W. of Bethel (Jos. 16, 2). in:n3 yn^] 'torn as to his tunic;' GK. §§ 116^ 121^^ {d). 33. ^zrh "h^ n^ni] Is. i, 14 nno^ "hv vn. Job 7, 20. 34. aim Tyn DNI] For the position of -|iyn, cf. on ch. 17, 13. ':i TiUy] The accents must be disregarded, ' If thou returnest to the city, and sayest to Absalom, " Thy servant, my lord, O king [see below], will I be : I was thy father's servant formerly, and now I will be thy servant," thou wilt defeat for me the counsel of Ahitophel.' Read for ''JJ<1 (i), introducing the subJ., "JN (Bu. on Job 4, 6^), and probably also, in spite of Gen. 40, q. 16 (Tenses, § 125 Obs.; GK. § i43<'3»1 ; cf. on I i, 12. D^nnn] See on 3, 16. NIJ] Probably the Benj. clan of this name (Gen. 46, 21); cf. Jud. 3, 15 N-13 p ni.-iN. ^^pa^ Xir Nr] Comp. Jer. 41, 6 HSbl -|l^n TjVn. The type is unusual: b.^pl. Nlif J^if" would be the ordinary one: see on I 6, 12. For the inf. abs. after the ptcp., see also v. 13. Jos. 6, i3a,b, ig. 22, 17^ nby ^DV"!. Jer. 23, 17 111DN* DnCN (GK. § ii3r fwfl'; Kon. iii. § 220^). 8. iny"l3 ^jni] 'and behold, thou art in thy calamity,' 9. nrn n?::n abn] Cf. 1 24, 15 no ab; II 9, 8. ID. Kt, '?\ ^k '?; Qr6 ^3 ^k^ '"13] The QrS gives the best sense: So let him curse, for, tic. The Kt, is, 'If he curseth, and if Yahweh hath said to him, Curse David, who, then {Tenses, § 124), shall say ,,,.?' so We. Now, But this is not very natural. LXX have Kax a dx nm ■]-ip\-i. Dt. 8, 2 iroi-nn X^ DX TTIi'D. Jud. 2, 22: we have also vh DX in Gen. 27, 21 ' battle is an Aramaic word, in Hebrew mostly, if not entirely, confined to late writers (i/^. 55. 68. 78. 144. Job 38. Qoh. 9. Zech. I4t). No doubt Q|"lp3 in their midst should be read with LXX, Pesh. Vulg. T'iDj^thy presence: comp. Ex. 33, 14. Dt. 4, 37 brought thee forth VJD3 with His presence. XVII. g-i6 323 12. nbipon nnxa] The Qre nns*31 must be right. DIpD is so constantly masc, that in the three exceptions the text can hardly be right. In Gen. 18, 24 iT3")i?2 may well be the original reading, or the suff. in l^3"i|?3 might refer to T'yn : in Job 20, 9 iJilttTl might easily be an error for IJTIEJ'S due to the preceding fj^Din ; and nnX2 here, and in many MSS. (v. Kitt.) in v. 9, is probably due to the following fem. termination of nbipro. Ijrijl] 'and we will light upon him.' Others take 13113 as=^jn2K (as Gen. 42, 11. Ex. 16, 7. 8. Nu. 32, 32. Lam. 3, 42t) ; but a verb is desiderated. The verb ni3 is chosen on account of the comparison with dew: it is used also of locusts (Ex. 10, 14) and flies (Is. 7, 19). 712'' IK'Na the impf. in a comparison, expressing what is usual, as regularly, e.g. 19, 4. Dt. i, 44. Is. 29, 8 etc. i3""ini3 X?1] _- for -^^, on account of the tone leaving it (GK. § 29"""^). The jussive form is unusual: I 14, 36 {Ttnses, § 50 Obs.; GK. § 109'^). Read probably 13 iniJ. 13. . , . T*!? ^N DXl] Ty 7X immediately after DX for emphasis. Cf. I 2, 25 (nin-'b DXl); Ex. 21, 9. ^Dii'' = wi/Mraw himself: cf. Ex. 9, 19 ; and f]DX of withdrawing or receiving into a house (Dt. 22, 2 ; Jos. 2, 18 ; ch. II, 27). 1N"'b'ni] The Hif.onXy Lev. 22, 16 besides, in a different application \\)i DniN 1X''{yni cause them /o bear guilt. Here ra'/^j^ (men) to brifig ropes = cause ropes to be brought. NV?2J] The fut. perf. after ly, as after DX ly Gen. 24, 19 ; IC'X *iy DX z<5. 28, 15 al. 14. iinyn^] 14, 20. Ex. 20, 2ot. 15. nxT31 nXD] So Jos. 7, 20. 2 Ki. 5, 4. 9, i2t. Cf. II, 25. "i^X "TI^T] '/(emph.) counsel : ' 12, 28. 2 Ki. 10, 4 ijniX noyj TX1. Is. 20, 6 i3mx D^DJ T^i. Ez. 16, 60. 62. 16. i^J^i"^^] The tone is drawn back by PX : see on I 9, 20. -int:n nnnyn] See on 15, 28. "1?J0? y?2^"|D] 'lest it be swallowed up to the king' = lest the king be swallowed up {i.e. Jig. undone, destroyed: 20, 19. 20, and often in poetry). Impersonal passives occur, though rarely, in Hebrew : Nu. 16, 29 On-Sy npE^ Onxn b^ n-nps ox if // be visited upon them with (cogn. accus.) ... Dt. 21, 3 ^3 "l?y X7 "ID'X wherewith it had Y 2 324 The Second Book of Samuel, not been worked. 4 12 "IZIJ!"; X? '^t:•^<. Is. 14, 3 the hard labour "IK'S ^■?"'?y wherewith (accus.) it was worked with thee. 16, 10. 53, 5 \h NS-)3. Ez. 16, 34 r\f\ ^ ^nns'i. Lam. 5, 5 iJ^-m^n-^^ ijy:^ we are wearied, // is not respited to us = we are not respited, v W^\ would be the passive of h yb (as '^ rain in Lam. of '^ D^JH), the 7 being the «f?/a accusativi, as I 23, 10. 17. 'y\ nspni . , . D''1?oy] 'were staying at 'En-rogel, and a maid used to go and tell them, and they (emph.) would go and tell the king ; for they could not, etc.' The tenses are all frequentative, and express how communication was regularly maintained between David and his friends in the city. nnSKTl the maid — defined in the narrator's mind by her being chosen for this office : from our point of view, a maid (comp. on I 19, 13). ?i"i"pj?] mentioned in Jos. 15, 7. 18, i6t as on the boundary line between Benjamin and Judah, and evidently at the foot of the valley of Ben-Hinnom. In all probability the present Bir 'EyyUb, the 'Well of Job' (? for ' Joab'), S. of Jerusalem, at the junction of the Valley {i?ra) of Kidron from the N., and the Valley (x"'i) of Ben-Hinnom from the W. See G. A. ?)V[\\i\\, Jerusalem (1907), i. 108 ff. 18. N1''l] On this particular occasion, however, a lad saw them and told Absalom. The tense used, unlike those in v. 17, describes a single act. Comp. the similar change to n33ri1 in I i, 7^. mni -i><3 iS] Cf. on I I, 2. 19. T|D?2n] GK. § 1261": cf. on I 19, 13. niDnn] Prov. 27, 22 ^ niann -jinn ti'riDm ^''i^^n ns jnnan dn inbiN V^yo ilDn.t The meaning is uncertain. No \/ein or fjn with a suitable meaning is known. LXX apa(jio)0; Luc. Theod. TraXa^as (cakes of compressed fruit); Aq. Symm. Trrto-avas (peeled or pearl- barley); Aq. Theod. in Prov. iv fxeo-w l^Trrio-do^ivuiv (things peeled or brayed: see TTTtWw in Liddell and Scott); Vulg. (both times) ptisa7ias ; Pesh. U-o** (hordeum decorticatum, PS.); Targ. yh^"^ dates: in Prov. LXX oddly iv /xeVw avv^lpiov (cf. Tg. Pesh.). Something that could both be pounded (or be the result of pounding) in a mortar, and be dried in the sun, must be intended : but that is about all that can be said. Kimchi bruised corn: so RV. Pointed ^is"), the word might =iLli;' (from c^ij) broken or crumbled pieces (Lane, 11 18): XVII. ij-23 325 but the sense Abfdlle (Schulthess, ZAW. 1905, p. 357 f-) does not seem probable. ■•JD] ''2 n^no (see on I 12, 5), as Nu. 33, 8 m^nn '2JD (so Sam. Onq. Pesh. Vulg.) for m^nn ^:so. So Tg. Vg. and 10 MSS. : several other ]\ISS. also have ''S on the margin. 20. 73''D] The word is doubtful. Jxl, even supposing that ^3^tp were a legitimate formation from it, is a word used of a well, meaning to contam black and muddy water: not only, however, is hyo not a legitimate formation from a root .'3'?) but the sense obtained would be questionable and unsatisfactory: Ges. rivulus paruni aquae continens is arbitrary. Friediich Delitzsch {Ass. HWB. 718^) compares the Assyrian mekaltu, a word not hitherto found in a connected text, but explained in a syllabary as meaning a water-trough or water- cha7i7iel: but such a derivation is precarious. The Versions render no help. LXX TraprjXOav fj.iKp6v Tov v8aT0<; ; Luc. SuXrjXvOacTL cnrev- Sovres; Targ. N:m^ nay ina; Pesh. Iisl^ ^ooCii. oui.i>- (' they have passed on hence,' continuing ' because they sought water and found none '} ; Vulg. (cf. Luc.) Transierutit /estmanter, gustata paululu7n aqua. If the word be not corrupt, it is one of which the meaning is unknown. PN '\\)'Ofrom. here to (Ehrlich) is a plausible emendation. Bu. suggests iTjnP. 22. "in5< lyj Anomalously for "l^? • so Gen. 48, 22. Is. 27, 12. Zech. II, 7. Obviously the form, though in appearance that of the st. c, cannot be so really; though why in these four instances the vowel of the ultima should remain against custom unlengthened in the St. abs. (and so the pathah of the penultima be preserved) it is impossible to say: the passages do not resemble each other in any other common feature; and the form ^nx occurs elsewhere too frequently in 'the flow of speech' (Ew. § 267^'; cf GK. §§ 96 Rem. on nnx, 130^), for it to be reasonably attributed to that cause, as Ew. suggests, in these four passages. As in many other cases, the anomalous form is due in all probability to an accidental corruption in the tradition which the punctuation represents. "l%3 N7] the pf in pause. The case is not one in which x? might, exceptionally, be construed with a ptcp. [Tenses, § 162 «.). 23. in"'3 /X 1i*''l] i.e. gave his last directions to his family: cf. 326 The Second Book of Samuel, 2 Ki. 20, I (= Is. 38, 1) lT\>2h Xi. In New Heb. HNn* is a will. It is a pity that the obscure ' set his house in order ' has been retained in RV. P^C.'^.] In pause for p?.n?.l: cf. on I 15, 23, The word exemplifies well the reflexive sense often expressed by the Nifal. 24. na^jno] On Mahanaim, see pp. 241, 245. 25. N'k^'Dy nxi] Notice the order: N'^i'Dy is put first for emphasis. Knn"'] In I Ki. 2, 5. 32. I Ch. 2, 17 "^n^ *^X~lb'\n] The Israelite! r^'\ (i)] parched corn, — a common food in the East {DB. ii. 27^): I 17, 17. 25, 18. Lev. 23, 14. Ru. 2, i4t ; cf. Lev. 2, 14 ti'N3 ^^b\^ 3^2K. Jos. 5,11 0% 71D] beans (Ez. 4, gt); and Cti'iy lentils (23, 11. Gen. 25, 34. Ez. 4, 9t): see DB. iii. 28. vpl (2)] not expressed in LXX, Pesh. ; and evidently repeated by error. 29. Ipn niD^] 'B' only here: LXX craiisci^ <:^^^j^j of kine (so EVV.). ' Cheeses' would be not unsuitable : but how niDCJ* would come to mean this, is not apparent. Wetzstein {ZA W. 1883, p. 276), upon doubtful grounds, would render cream ; Kennedy {EB. iii. 3091) emends niSNB' (from ^^ = C]lti' to crush), which he conjectures to have meant dried curds, which, ' rubbed down ' and mixed with water, form a refreshing beverage. 18, 2. nPC'^l] Luc. erptWtvo-e = K' X'^1 : which, as the less common word, is the more likely to be original (Sm.). So Klo. Bu. Ehrl., etc. 3. 3^ \Th^ yiy^'' x^] Cf. on 19, 20. 'y\ nny "'ij ' for now there are ten thousand such as we/ — which yields no sense agreeable to the context. Read with LXX, Symm. Vulg. ^'P''^ for nriy : ' for Ihou art the like of us (being) ten thousand ' 328 The Second Book of Samuel, :=for thou art worth ten thousand of us., nny and nnx are elsewhere confused, cf. i Ki. i, 18. 20 MT. and Versions. -l-iUo] the art. is needed. Read either ^''V'^^, or "T'VS (LXX), followed by either "lij;!? or "ibi?^. Try^ Kt.] i.e. "I'lK^^inynSj (as I 2, 28). But a Hif. of iry is doubtful (on 2 Ch. 28, 23, cf. on I 21, 7), and the yod may have readily found its way into the word through the influence of the preceding T'y. Read with the Qre the Qal "li^V?- 4. niND^] Cf. I 29, 2. 5. ■'b-Dsb] b in \2i6=gcnlly, as in nu^lb (on ch. 15, 11). '•^ lit. for me=l pray: comp. 2 Ki. 4,24321? "'^""ivyn ?N slacken /«(? not the riding, except I tell thee; and above, on I 20, 20. 6. Dnsx] Luc. Maaivav=D^3TO, which Klo. adopts. However, a "iy\ even on the E. of Jordan, might, from some circumstance unknown to us, have been called the D^IDX ly (cf. H.G. 335«.). 7. . . , WC* ^^n1] ' And the slaughter was there great on that day,' etc. (not, as RV., ' And there was a great slaughter there that day : ' notice the art.; and cf. I 4, 10). The DC', however {together with \^\r\T\ DVQ), overweights the clause, and is not expressed by LXX. Probably it was introduced here by error from the line below where it is in place.— After fj^N D^'^y add, with LXX, ^^. 8. mva:] The punctuation rili*D3 is hardly probable : it is better to follow the Qre riVIDJ, and to suppose that 1 has become misplaced : cf. on ch. 14, 14. 9. ''JD7 . . . Ni]5M] 'And Absalom happened by chance (i, 6 : with "•33^, Dt. 22,6) before . . . ,' i.e. came in front of them accidentally. 3D1 Dl^t^'iNl] a circumst. clause: cf. on I 19, 9. \Tf\\ and he ivas set or put. LXX koL iKpefidaOr], Pesh. Targ. w^Ulo = ?J;i?1 (cf. 10), perhaps rightly (so Bu. Sm. Now. Dh.). At least 1^1^ does not occur elsewhere in a similar connexion. 10. nnx D''^<] I i, i. 1 1. yilDI JT'Nl nim] ' and to, thou sawest . . . ,' a more vivid way of expressing ' and tf thou sawest : ' comp. on I 9, 7 N"'33 noi j?2 njril ^'ab ; and jni Ex. 4, i. nn? vyi] ' and it would have been incumhent on me, would have devolved upon me to give:' ?y as Neh. 13, 13 DHTIN-' shvo DHvyi ; ^y .TH I Ki. 4, 7b; cf y\,. 56, 13 imJ '% etc. {Lex. 753 c). XVIII. 3-14 329 mi:n] a girdle would be a welcome present ; for it was a necessary part of a soldier's accoutrement. Comp. i Ki. 2, 5 ; and notice the phrase for doing military service, 2 Ki. 3, 21 npyJOl n'lbn "i?,h ?3?D, and I Ki. 20, II nrispa -\yr\ hbr\n^ ^x. 12. rbt'^ S*^ . . ,b^^ ':djX wX^I] 'And though I were weighing' etc. The sequence of tenses exactly as i/^. 81, 14-17; 2 Ki. 3, 14 (with 'bv): Tenses, § 145. We. Bu. Now., on the ground that the payer, not the receiver, ' weighs ' the money, would read ^'PK' (^jD^ ^)f. the subj., and ""DJN casus pendens, GK. § 145*): but the construction is forced, and (Sm.) the meaning seems to be, ' If I were to feel the weight of the money paid into my hand.' LXX l(TTr]\x.i ( = ^i?.'K'). \ is used as in v. 11, to subjoin an emphatic exclamation : see on 24, 3. irJTNa] immediately follows ^3, as the emph. word in the sentence. "iyJ2 ■•DTit^c] 'Have a care, whosoever ye be, of the young man.' Such, if the text be correct, must be the sense of ""P, on the analogy of no V. 22. I 19, 3, though no example occurs even of DO entirely parallel. LXX i^vXa^ari ij.01, Pesh. ^^^ oio.?//, i.e. ^b-'nDK': "h as V. 5, probably rightly (so Bu. Now. Sm.). 13. npC' 1:^•SJ3 TI'^C^I? 1X] ' Or if (GK. § 159™) I had dealt against his life falsely (lit. had wrought falsehood against his soul) — and nothing is hid from the king — then {Tenses, § 124) thou wouldst stand aloof (i.e. wouldst do nothing to shield me). LXX joins the first three words to v. 12IJ, reading /^^ TrotrjaaL ktX. i.e. T*^ IC'D^n nib'yD — * Have a care, I pray you, of the young man, even of Absalom, so as not to deal against his life falsely.' But this does not agree with what follows : for (i)1J:jd a^'Tin nnxi cannot mean ' and thou wouldst have to stand before hiin (the king) : ' IJJD never means simply in the presence of, but either 'from the presence of (Is. i, 16) or (absolutely) at a distance (Gen. 21, 16. 2 Ki. 3, 22. 4, 25), aloof. 14. T'Ja^ rh^niA p'N^] 'Not so would I fain wait (I 10, 8) before thee,' i.e. I will not delay here in your presence — while you are making up your mind — on any such pretexts as you allege. N'7 must be regarded as negativing p, not joined with the cohort, (which would require 7N). The sense thus obtained is not, however, very good. LXX, in the fust of its two renderings (Sta touto eyw ap^niJiai — the second being oix ovtw; /acvw), which is the only one in Luc, and Targ. express npriN '•jbN pS 'Therefore (see on I 28, 2) / will 33° The Second Book of Samuel, begin before thee ; ' so Bu. Now. Kit. Dh. Ehilich's conjecture yields a thought more in accordance with Joab's sturdy independence : p N^ '''J? '""^n^^ ' Not so will I court his (the king's) favour ! ' D^U3Cj }-och or clubs (II 23, 21 ; \p. 23, 4\ which, however, would not be thrust into the heart. Read, with LXX [iiXy], ^^rbf darts (so Th. We. Bu. Now. etc.). 'n Uniy] Cf. 12, 21; i Ch. 12, i -. Tenses, § 161 Ohs. 2; GK. § 156c. Bu. rightly objects lo beginning &. 15 with "-n miy (Th. Now. al.). To express the sense ' While he was yet alive, ten young men surrounded him,' Heb, idiom would require (though in the examples we have of the construction, my is usually followed by a ptcp.) ■'31 laao . . . onyj nnryi (not >n my Nim, Sm.) >n miy (not =i2bM): see Nu. 11, 33 Dyn mn '"'"' fjxi . . . dh^jk' pn ijmy nc'an. ^. -^s, 30 f. : cf. on I 14, 19; and see Lex. 7 29a; Taises, § 169. nPNn 372] 2b as in the phrases 0^-2^3 Ex. 15, 8 al. in the heari of the sea; D'-D'' 2^3 i/^. 46, 3 al. : D'-OlJ'n 2^-ny Dt. 4, 11. 16. fl'Tip] See on I 23, 28. 17. ')2''V''lJ 1D''p''1 would be better (Bu.): see Jos. 7, 26, 8, 29. 18. np^] For this use of np^, cf. 17, 19. (In Nu. 16, i Dj^'^. must be read : so Bo. We. Dillm. etc.) n2VD nx] Elsewhere, except Is. 6, 13 (in a different sense), the abs. form is always n2^p. The absence of the art. is irregular (on I 24, 6; ch. I, 10); and no doubt n2Von should be read. n2i'0 in the sense of a sepulchral stele occurs Gen. 35, 20; and the corres- ponding Phoen, form 02^*0 occurs often in this sense, as Cooke, NSI. 15, I (see the note). i6, i. 18, i { = CIS. i. 58) UH Wnz n2V0 Nn21K^ ^2n!' "lDNn2y NJD'' • The pillar among the living (the cippus inter vivos, also, in CIS. i. 59) which 'Abd-osir set up to his father, to Archetha,' 19, i (all from Kition in Cyprus). No. 16 is an instance of a pillar, like Absalom's, set up by the person himself whose grave it marks. ' I Abd-osir ... set up (this) pillar in my life-time over my resting-couch for ever.' ^^0^ ploy2] Gen. 14, i7t. \0^ ?y] according to his name : Ex. 28, 21 al. {Lex. 754*^). DvC2N T"] Ti as I 15, 12 in the sense of sign, moJiument. Cf Is. 56, 5 ^"^x "i:. 19. V2^N TD m.T 1DDt^' ''2] Cf. V. 31, and on I 24, 16. XVIII. 14-23 33^ 20. hv ""^J p ^y ^3 (Gen. i8, 5 al. : Lex. 475^) must be read with the Qre : p has fallen out before the following p. 21^. "'tis] No doubt 'U'l^n should be read, as vv. 21*. 22. 23. 31. 32. The reference is to some particular Cushite (i.e. Nubian) slave, or negro (Jer. 13, 23), among David's attendants. 22. -ICK^I . . . fjOn] GK. § I2I<3. no wi] n» as Job 13, 13 no 'hv nayi "•:« nnnnNi •'jidd it:'nnn= and let come upon me whal will [Lex. 553^0). p nnx nr nc^] 12, 23 dv "jn nr r\xh. n3?l] Merely an orthographic variation for ^p^: see on I i, 26. riNi'b rilB'a pN] Probably ' no message finding or atlaining (aught),' i.e. no message that will secure you a reward (cf LXX ets w^eAtav). But the expression is peculiar : and other suggestions have been made with regard to it. RV. m., Ehrl. ' no sufficient message : ' but it is doubtful whether Ni*o itself means to ' suffice,' and whether in the three passages (Nu. 11, 22 bis. Jud. 21, 14) in which Dnp (l)x^'?D is so rendered, the rend, is not a paraphrase, the lit. rend, being ' one (or they) found {qx them' (cf. the Nif., lit. be found, Jos. 17, 16. Zech. 10, 10: the emend. Q'^C'li^ ^3^i''[' HN^CX ib. 12, 5 is very doubtful). We. Bu. Now. punctuate ^NifD (Hof.) ' no reward for good tidings (as 4, 10) will be brought forth {—paid out) to thee:' cf. t^^J, N''i:in 2 Ki. 12, 13. 12, and %a3/^ Jisri/ , frequently. 23. no ^T^] Prefix, with LXX, "iON''1, as Hebrew idiom requires. "I33n Tn] by the way of(}.Q. here through) the Oval, viz. of Jordan. The word bears a specific geographical sense, and denotes the broad, and somewhat elongated plain into which the Jordan-valley expands N. of the Dead Sea': Gen. 13, 12 -|33n ny. 19, 17. 25. 29. Dt. 34, 3 ; -i3Dn pN Gen. 19, 28; \T\''n 133 Gen. 13, 10. 11. i Ki. 7, 46. "IDD means properly a round ; but as this plain is not circular, perhaps we might represent the word by the term Oval. The meaning of the passage will be that, while the Cushite went straight across the moun- tains from the * wood of Ephraim ' to Mahanaim, Ahima'az made a detour, coming down into the Jordan-valley, and then following the high road through it, and up whatever wady it might be (see , ^ In Genesis it seems indeed to include more: see my note on 13, 10; and cl. DB. iii. s.v. Plain, 4; iv. s. v. Vale of Siddim, and Zoar (pp. 986''-987''). 332 The Second Book of Samuel, pp. 241, 245), which led to Mahanaim. The route, though longer, was easier and quicker than the one taken by the negro. 24. nny:;'n '•JC' pi] i.e. in the space between the outer and inner gates of the city gateway. 25. 2"ipi Ti^n n^-il] See on I 14, 19. 26. "iJ/E'n ^N] 'to the porier: LXX, Pesh. Vulg. vocalized i?N nyE'rij which is accepted even by Keil as preferable to MT. : the king was sitting within the gateway, v. 24, the watchman called out directly to him, V. 25, and here, v. 26b, receives from him an immediate reply : he called, therefore, not to the porter, but itjto the gate, addressing himself directly to David. c'-'X r\':r\ noN''i] Add, with LXX, "in«. 28. N^pM] We. cleverly ^IpM, — evidently unaware that his con- jecture was supported by Lucian koX -irpoo-riXGei' 'A;!(i/i,aas. In 27, Ahima'az is still at a distance : his drawing near is just a point which a Hebrew narrator would mention, before stating that he addressed the king. VDX?] In spite of Gen. 48, 12. Nu. 22, 31. I 20, 41 (see on I 25, 23), V^^« should probably be read, the 7 being repeated by error from the preceding ^po? (cf. Is. 32, i^). 29. D17L*'] The Massorah (see Norzi, Minhath Shai, ad loc.) has a note DvCn P'T'nD 'J (above, on I 12, 5), viz. here, I 16, 4, and 2 Ki. 9, 19. So 16 MSS. (see de Rossi). And we have Dvti'n in V. 32. But see note on I 16, 4. 'y\ ^rfNi] Keil : ' I saw the great commotion at Joab's sending the servant of the king and thy servant.' But the position of nxv makes this rendering impossible. In all probability "jbon niy nx is a correction, intended as a substitute for the less courtly second person '^^2y DN. The correction found its way into the te.xt, in a wrong place, by the side of the original reading, and the conjunction 1 was added, for the purpose of producing the semblance of a coherent sentence. Read, therefore, "N 3NV (nV?) n^K^i? ^HSn pTOnn ^D^sn 1"l3y. So We. Kp. Stade, Klo. etc. — For no, cf. Pr. 9, 13. I 19, 3. Bu. Sm., however, suggest NirrriD TiVT' N7. Thwf\ Though i? with the inf. is used in certain phrases, as niJD^ XVIII . 24— XIX. 8 333 3iy, to denote time (GK. § 114*" «.; Lex. 517* 6 a end), in a case like this analogy strongly requires '2 or '3. So Bu. etc. 19, I. Mi''"i] MT is to skah or ^^ agitated with some force, e.g. of mountains, Is. 5, 25 : it is also often used of strong mental agitation, sometimes in anger (Is. 28, 21), more often fear (Is. 32, 10. 11: comp. the Wl 3? of Dt. 28, 65). Here, not so much definitely in grief, as through the shock which paralysed and unnerved the king. lytJ'n rivy] The nvy, or roof-chamber, was a chamber built on the flat roof of an Oriental house (see illustr. in Moore, Judges, SBOT. Engl, ed., p. 59), Jud. 3, 20. i Ki. 17, 19. 2 Ki. i, 2 al. Here of a similar chamber on the top of the gateway. '31 10372 1DN n3l] The entire narrative is remarkable for both its minuteness and its vividness; but especially so just here. We. (Compos, des Hex., p. 262) calls attention to the graphic in3?3. Luc. and other i\ISS. of LXX, read, however, in333, which Bu. Sm. Ehrl. prefer. Observe in what follows the feeling which David throws into the expression of his sorrow by the addition of ihe pronoun TllIO jn'' ""D ''J3 "'J3 Di^:;'3X TTinn ^ (GK. § 135^). On ••niD |n^ •'O, see GK. § 151^; Lex. 678^1 2. bxn*1 n33] Tenses, § 80. 4. N13^ . . . 33in''l] Very idiomatic : see GK. §114° (with «.) ; and cf Gen. 31, 27. n"'D^3:n Oyn] The art. is generic, as constantly after 3 and ~IK'N3 (GK. §1260). 5. tDSp] Only here: comp. t3=i7, t3^^n I 21, 10. i Ki. 19, 13. Is. 25, 7t. Prob. £2X7 should be pointed (We.): cf. p. 168 «. 6. ni:'3in] from 5jn3: GK. § 78b 7. ''3 . . . xp ■•3] The second 13 is resumptive of the first (on I 14, 39). For "1^ the verb '^^\ must certainly be read (Ehrlich). 8. 3^ ^y -|3n] as Is. 40, 2 al. '3] as the text stands, •'3 \s\^ = if{Lex. 473*; cf. I 20, 13) : but the ■l'3D (on I 12, 5) DX ""S that, if \% more in accordance with analogy: DX and the ptcp. in the protasis, as I 19, n. Gen. 20, 7. 24, 49. Ex. 8, 17 al. {Lenses, § 137). ny-11] the 3 pf. fem. of the verb yyi (as Dt. 15, 9) : b, as xp. 106, 32. 334 T^^^^ Second Book of Samuel^ 9. "p^^iT] ""iS?] The verse should end here. With the following words the scene changes, and a different subject is introduced. 10. piJ . . , TIM] 'And all the people were m a stale of muhial sinfe! The N'f. of jn is not found elsewhere : but such would be its force (GK. § 5i3yn is not found elsewhere with the ■mtz.mx\g ferry-boai ; and probably we should restore with We., after LXX (which here has a doublet, the first rend, being koI iXeirovpyrja-av Tr]v XeiTovpyLav = r]12V^ nnjJM) ^I^V^ ^"^^Vl], or better 'Vn ^IIV] (freq.), 'and they passed to and fro over the ford (15, 28) in order to bring the king's household over, and to do what he thought good.' The words will then describe the purpose with which Ziba and his attend- ants, V. 18^, came down to the Jordan. — On 'i'^^V?, for "I'^ayn^, see I 2, 28. '•i;r:C"i] F. 1 9 should begin here (see above). ]1'V2 nsya] = ' as he was aboui io pass over Jordan ' (so RV. marg.): cf. on I 18, 19. It is plain from vv. 34, 39 (Kimham shall pass over with me), 40 that David did not cross until a/ier the con- versation with Shimei. '2 ~iay as Is. 43, 2. i(/. 66, 6. ^ In Arab, nbi* is rede se habtiit : in Aram, to cleave (I 6, 14 Targ. Pesh. ; ^' 13'') '3 Targ.); whence Ges. (after Abu-'lWalid) fiderunt iranseundo (RV. went through). But such a sense would be isolated in Heb., and imply a rather violent metaphor. * Had gone over (Keil) would have been n"i3y n")3ym. 336 The Second Book of Samuel, 20. ':i n^^n' ^x] Cf. \j/. 32, 2. For niyn, see p. lyow., and cf. 7, 14. 24, 17. 13^ i?N . . . mb'^] Cf. 18, 3. I 9, 20 (sq. \>). 25, 25 (!7^<): Z^.r. 524^30, 523^. 3 c. 21. ^JN] Note the emphatic pronoun. mi^] to the Jordan. 23. ^NTL^"'n K'-iN nov m''Ti] Comp. Saul's reply, I 11, 13 nor sb nin Dm r^\V. The question indicated by the voice: I 16, 4. *nyi>] Luc. Bu. Sm. Dh. D^^VIl- 25. ^1N^ p] a good case o^ \2=grandson : cf. ^5^03 p NVT. I"!''] from Jerusalem, c. 3760 ft. above the ford el-Hajlah. n^']}] as Dt. 21, 12!^. iCQ'kT] 'his moustache:' Lev. 13, 45. Ez. 24, 17. 22. Mic. 3, 7t. n^on riD^ DVn-iO^] ' from the day, the going of the king,' nsi? being in apposition with Dm. An unusual construction : but another instance, exactly similar, occurs Ex. 9, 18 (where, however, the Samaritan text has Dwb) : cf. also 2 Ch. 8, 16 ; and see GK. § 127^. 26. Di'EJ'n"'] Di'::'n''D (LXX) must obviously be read. Not only is RV. m. ' when Jerusalem was come ' very forced and unnatural, but after 25% some statement about Mephibosheth is desiderated in 26*. 27. ''Ji2"i] ncn here=<5f/r^_>'.- cf. i Ch. 12, 18. h n-^'anx nnny -icx ^d] LXX, Pesh. Vulg. ib inay -icx ^a 7"nEPn. The text might express merely what Mephibosheth thought: the reading of the Versions makes it clear that the command was actuilly given to Ziba, and affords a more substantial ground for in3y2 ^n^l in v. 28. ■ iT'ijy] ninn is here used exceptionally of the female ass, which is properly priN : cf. GK. § 122^. 28. D^'^!?N^ ^s•^D3] Cf. 14, 17. 20. I 29, 9. 29. npTi' . . . nm] See on I 26, 18. 30. "jnm . . . "I3nn] speakest thy words, with a touch of contempt, — go on talking (not, as EVV., ' speakest any more 0/ thy matters ') : otherwise, of course, in the/rj/ person, Gen. 24, 33, and in Jud. 11, 11. Luc. for nnnn expresses 'l^l^? which Klo. Bu. Dh. adopt, and which, though not exactly a necessary change, may -well be original. XIX. 2o-3y 337 "niDN] I have said (viz. this moment) =/ jay (GK. § io6i): this is my decision. 32-41. The interpretation of this passage is uncertain on account of the ambiguity in the force of nay: does it mean pass over (the river), or orvXy pass on P and the uncertainty is increased by a various reading in v. 40, which leaves a doubt as to whether David took leave of Barzillai before, or after, crossing the Jordan. 32. )'n^^] passed on to Jordan (Jos. 16, 7), — not (EVV.) 'went over Jordan.' Sm. Bu. Dh., however, thinking (see on v. 40) that the sequel will not permit B. to have yet reached the Jordan, delete pTn. in?l^7] to escort "tivca. {TrpoirefjiTreiv), as Gen. 12, 20. 18, i6al. n"l"'2"nN] A mixture of two readings p"i\n~nx (as vv. 37. 40) and pTQ {v. 19). Probably the less common 2 is original. The Kt. is destitute of all philological analogy, and, in fact, meaningless. 33. in3''*C^3] Obviously an error for iriaK'Zi. nTp implies a most anomalous aphaeresis from nni^^, a form, in an abstract sense, itself most improbable in early Hebrew ; and the "• may have been intro- duced accidentally into the word through the influence of Ti^j?^??', while it still stood in v. 34 (We.). On 7113, see on I 25, 2. 34. -\2]} nriN] The emph. pron., as 20, 6. Ex. 5, 11. Gen. 24, 60. IMore commonly a//er the imper. : see on I 17, 56. inn] LXX, Ew. We. Bu. Now. Dh. ^rin^b-nt*: see Ru. 4, 15. 35. ^7y^{] from the deep Jordan-valley. 36. 7"ip2 . , . yoti'K] iis/en to the voice, with satisfaction or enjoy- ment ; more than ^ip ynC' ' hear the voice.' Cf. '1 HNI. ^n] = ^y : see 15, 33 ; and cf. 8, 7. 37. 'V\ Dy03] DyD3, lit. like a little, often occurs with the sense of within a little of, abnost, but not elsewhere with the sense of with but a Utile more, Just [^Y ^. If this rend, is legitimate, the verse occasions no difficulty. Modern scholars, however, generally suppose DyQ to be intended, either reading DyD (the 3 dittographed from ^?0^), or (Luc.) LDyO *3, or (Kimchi, AV.) treating D as pleonastic (cf. Is. i, 9. i/^. 105, 1 2 r\2 D''~iJ1 DyDD). The sense in this case, however, cannot, it seems, be (AV.) go a little way over (i.e. beyond) Jordan, for this, by the analogy of 16, i, would be \'y\''?\ \'0 oyo : those, accordingly, who take this view, delete pTTi nx as a gloss, due to the supposition that 13C5 ? 338 The Second Book of Samuel, "lay meant ' pass over,' whereas, if t3y>D3 means a Utile way, it must mean, 'will pass on a little way with the king,' i.e., as B., v. 32, is already at Jordan, across it, — or, if \'yy'r\ in 32 be omitted (Sm. Bu. Dh.), so that B. is not yet at the Jordan, towards it, or (retaining pn\n, with ^N for riN) to it. 'J1 'i^Jor] ' recompense me with this reward,' i.e. reward me for my former hospitality to him (17, 27-9; not, as EVV. 'it', the crossing over Jordan), with this invitation {tj. 34). 38. Dy] near or by : cf. I 10, 2. 3VJ "l^N nx] 31t3 is the verb ; see on 3, 19. 39. ""JXI . . . ^nx] Both words are emph. : for ^riN cf. on 15, 4. ^^y inan] choose (and lay) upon me : cf. Gen. 30, 28 ^^y ■J13K' 7\1X>'^. 34, 12 jnm nno ind •'by ia"in. 40. pB'''1 "I3y] implying clearly that David took leave of Barzillai after crossing the river. Luc. here expresses "lOy for "13y (cf. 15, 23), implying that David halted \i\i\\z the people passed over Jordan, and that he took leave of Barzillai before crossing himself. This, with the omission of JTl^n in 32, and of pi\T nX in 37 (to enable B. to go some way (37) with David, before parting from him (40) at the Jordan\ is adopted by Sm. Bu. Dh., on the ground that the king's crossing is first narrated in v. 41; and certainly 16''. 42'* do support the view that Dy 731 ")?0n nx IT'Dyn min^ in 41'' refer not, as they must do, if the king crosses in 40, to the people escorting him from the Jordan to Gilgal, but to their escorting him across the Jordan. This argument, however, can hardly be temied decisive ; and, as just explained, the adoption of llDy in 40 involves the rejection of words in 32 and 37, though, it is true, these are glosses which might readily have arisen from a misinterpretation of "13^1 and "l3y^. It seems that, to judge from the data we possess, each view of the passage must be allowed to be possible. 41. 'J1 nay^l] If nay in 40 is right, 'And passed on (from the Jordan) to Gilgal.' Or, with HtDy in 40, ' And passed over (the Jordan) to Gilgal,' "I'T'^yi] Kt. ''1, defensible in the abstract (I 14, 19), but impro- < bable : read either Qre ''"^"'^V.;!, or, better (LXX), ^''l^y * were passing on with the king ' (viz. from Jordan to Gilgal). Or, as before, with *lDy in 40, ' were passing over (the Jordan) with the king.' 43. ''^x] Cf. V. 44, and on I 5, 10. 'y\ PIDXn] i.e. have we obtained any advantage from our tribal connexion with David? A side-glance at the Benjaminites, who, XIX. ^7-^i 339 it may be inferred from I 22, 7, had been benefited by their connexion with Saul (Th. from Michaelis). 1:^ N'J'J ns'J': DX] Difficult. Three main views have been suggested, (i) 'Or has anything been carried away by us?' i.e. gained, acquired by us (Th. Keil). HNB'a is then regarded as an inf. abs., formed on the analogy of the inf. abs. in n, which occurs occasionally in verbs n"? (on 6, 20): but the form is unparalleled in verbs N? (Kon. i. 632 f.); and if an inf. abs. is thought to be needed we must simply correct to ^^^r^ hath been brought: cf. Gen. 43, 34) might be read: 'Or hath any portion (from his table) been brought to us ? ' — like the preceding clause, fig. for. Have we derived any advantage from what we have done for the king ? The Versions mostly paraphrase. LXX has a double rend., the first being free, the second literal : t\ dofw. (SojKev ^ dpo-iv -ripfv T||i.iv ; (cf. dpais for nxb'p in ^/i. 11,8); Pesh. ' Or has a gift been given us from him ? ' Targ. NJ^ ''30 NjnO DK 'Or has he apportioned us a gift?' Vulg. Aui munera nobis data sunt? Cf.' AV. RV. ' Or hath he given as any gift ? ' which must be understood also as a paraphrase, not as a lit. rendering; for SB'S (Fi'el), though it means to lift up, support, assist a person (with wood, money, etc.), i Ki. 9, 11. Ezr. i, 4 al., never means to give, nor does JINK'J ever mean a gift. Z 2 340 The Second Book of Samuel, 44. nn''] Metaph. (note the/^;«. Y>^.)=parts : so Gen. 43, 34. •]0» ""JX nnn DJI] 'and also in David I am (more) than thou.' Dai, however, points to something additional ; whereas the sentence as thus understood adds nothing to what has been just said >7 nn'' "IK'S? I^JOn: for it is evidently impossible to draw a distinction between ■]^ori and nn, as though * David ' expressed or meant more than ' the king.' LXX Kat irpwroTOKOS cyw r\ (Tv (the following words Kai ye cv tw AaveiS 61/xi vnlp al are a doublet representing the existing MT.), i.e. ">i3|i for inn ' and I am also the firstborn rather than thou : ' see i Ch. 5, 2. So Th. Ew. We. Stade, Klo. It is not true that p "iDn is ' a phrase incompatible with the meaning of "1132 ' (Keil) ; for it does not imply that Judah was in some measure a firstborn : |0 may be used to express the idea of rather than, and not: ij/. 52, 5 yn n2nx 21Dn ; Hab. 2, 16 T)3Dro p^p nyia' thou art filled with disgrace rather than glory. HM N/l] Either read ^7n, or render, 'And was hot . . ..?' (on I 16, 4). AV. RV, (text), 'should not be,' would require imperatively "•i?] After nnT this seems superfluous. It may have arisen by error from the following ^TV. 20, I. nsn] perhaps=133, the name of the Benj. clan. Gen. 46, 21. I Ch. 7,6. 8, 8. Cf. Jnj p ^yoc' (16, 5). ':i V^nx^ K'''N] i.e. Resume your old tribal independence ; cf. i Ki. 12, 16. This is one of the 18 passages in which, according to the Jews, there has been a Onsb ppn, or 'correction of the scribes,' intended to remove some expression derogatory to Yahweh, alleged to have been the original reading. Here VbnX? is stated to have been altered for this reason from VH^X? ^0 his gods. The other passages (the alleged original reading, where not stated here, is given by Kittel) are Gen. 18, 22. Nu. 11, 15. 12, 12. i S. 3, 13 (^b, ''h). 2 S. 16, 12 (originally, it is alleged, i^p). i Ki. 12, 16 = 2 Ch. 10, 16 (as here). Jer. 2, 11. Ez. 8, 17. Hos. 4, 7 (orig. T\'''ar\ \b'^'2. ni33). Hab. i, 12. Zech. 2, 12. Mai. i, 13. ^p. 106, 20. Job 7, 20. 32, 3. Lam. 3, 20 (orig. "JC'DJ). The probability of the alleged original reading must be decided in each case on its own merits : in some it may be con- siderable, here it is quite out of the question. See more fully Ginsburg, Introd. to the Heb. Bible, p. 347 ff. ; Geiger, Urschrift, p. 308 ff. 2. byi] \d:\Qm. = withdrew: cf. 23, 9; and esp. from a siege, I Ki. 15, 19 al. I^Lex. 748b ©). Cf. on 2, 27 nn>?0 n^J|3. XIX. 44— XX' 6 341 3- mcc'D n^2] 'd in this sense only here: elsewhere ")9^'?j Gen. 40, 3. 4 al. ; 42, 19 DSIOC'D n^3. nvn n^JDPNj ^(^{n) widoivhood of Uvingness' — the English is not more singular than the Hebrew. The punctuation can hardly express the sense intended by the writer. The apphcation of the adverbial accus., which it implies, is unusually harsh; and the idea which the entire expression is supposed to convey is difficult, if not impossible, to seized We. Bu. Now. al. point rii*n niJDps<, supposing that being treated as widows, although their husbands were alive, they are called by a figure of speech, not without parallels in other languages, ' living widows ' (so LXX ^pa.i ^wcrai). 4. CD'' nc^PC'] As the text stands, this can only mean for three days ; and there is nothing to shew, or suggest,, that ^oy HD nnxi is only to come at the ejid of the three days. As We. observes, r\^bu D''»'' and noy ns nnxi belong together, and fix the lyiD of v. 5. The athnah must thus be transposed to H'lin'' ; we then get, spoken in the tone of a command, ' Three days, and then stand thou (present thyself) here ! ' For 1 cf. Ex. 16, 6 Dnyn^l 3ny ' At even, lhe7i ye shall know,' etc. 7 01 Dn''N"i^ "^j^bl (^Tenses, §§ 123/8, 124). (The transposi- tion (Kit. Btbl) to the end of the v. would yield a wrong sense, and must be an oversight : it is not followed in the transl. in Kautzsch.) 5. "in"'''l] Qre ini>l, which may be either Qal (so 01. § 241c : cf. inni V. 9 from Tns) from ID? ^ or Htf (not elsewhere) lit. shelved, exhibited delay (so Ges. Lg. p. 377; Stade, § 498°; Konig, i. 397^). The Kt., unless (Kon.) the "» is a mere error for 1, is probably to be read in^'l, for inSM (cf. xn"! for N'ns»l Dt. 33, 21): Stade, § 112c, cf. GK. § 68i. lyiDn p] p before a noun with the art. is much commoner in all books than ^no : before other words it is most frequent in Chr. (Kon. ii. 292; Lex. 577'^; GK. § 102^ n.). 6. 13I5 yv] '7 Vl is not used in the sense of ' be harinful to : ' read 1 EVV. living in widowhood yields an excellent sense ; but unfortunately is neither a rendering, nor a legitimate paraphrase, of the Hebrew. 2 This is indeed "iriNI in Gen. 32, 5, but both SHNI and 3nX occur from 3nN_ * In Aram, the Afel IHiN, ^o/^'is in use, which might support this view. 342 The Second Book of Samuel^ with EVV. (though the change of text is not admitted by them openly) Vl^ NXD js] 'lest he have found . . .:' cf. 2 Ki. 2, 16, and Tenses, § 41 06s. But the following ^'•i'ni (perf. with waw conv., which regularly follows |a with the i'mpf, e.g. 12, 28. Ex. 34, 15 f.) suggests that NXD is simply a clerical error for S'VD'' (GK. § 107^ «.). In 2 Ki. 2, 16 the past tense is defended by the following in3''7ip?1. 1J:''y ^^Vni] Difficult. LXX Kal aKida-eL Tovs 6<}>6aXfxovs rjfjiw : Pesh. ^Jiliw ^-|-Ljo and pluck (/?'/. dig) out our eyes: Targ. (paraphrasing) nib p''S?^l and distress us: Vulg. e/ efftigiat nos. b^'in is properly to pull or fake away (see Ges. : J.^ exemit, eduxil rem, v.c. festucam ex oculo, dentem), Gen. 31, 9. 10, Hilhp. Ex. 33, 6 to pull or j/r//> off oneself, though it is mostly used in the sense oi pulling away, i.e. rescuing, deliveritig, from an enemy. Hence the text can only be rendered either and deliver our eye, which here yields no sense; or pull out our eye, either lit. (Bo. Th. ; cf. Pesh.), as an expression meaning harm us irretrievably, or metaphorically, as Ges. ' Singulare est 'd "'J'^y ^""Vn auferre oculum alicuius, i.e. eumfallere, subtrahere se oculis eius ' (cf. RV.). AV. escape us, with marg., ' Heb. deliver himself from our eyes ' (cf. Rashi i:>3'>yo IDVy b'^'irb) ; but to ' under- stand ' a couple of words in this way is of course quite illegitimate. Ewald, Hist. iii. 262 (E. T. 193), Keil, We. Bu. Dh. follow LXX, deriving ^'''^n, — or rather b'^J}, — from 77s to be shadowy or dark (Neh. 13, 19), i.e. ' be-shadow ox becloud o\xx eye,' metaph. for 'occasion us anxiety.' For the eye, as the organ in which the Hebrew saw changes of emotion, or mental states, expressed, comp. I 14, 27. i/f. 6, 8. 88, 10. Job II, 20. 17, 7 etc. Sm., following Luc. {a-KiTraa-Ofj d«|»' r\ii-C)v), reads ^S'S'? b'S^] and escape (Nif. : Dt. 23, 16 z\.^ from us, obtaining thus, by legitimate means, exactly the sense which AV. obtained by illegitimate means. Now., retaining -'"'^n, and take them (b''Vn, as Gen. 31, 9. i(>)from us. Bu., though adopting ??fn, makes a clever suggestion, to read viz. "lJ''J''yp 7^31 and escape before our eyes, defiantly (Dt. 28, 31). 7. 3XV •'K'3x vinx] Read 3NV ''tr"'3S nnx. 8. N2 XC^yi . . . Dy Dn] exactly as Jud. 19, 11 ; cf. on I 9, 5. XX. 6-8 343 DiTJS? N2] came (=appeared) in front of them (accidentally). ' Came to meet them ' (RV.) would be DDXnp^ N3. 'y\ Sm-lh no nijn ^NVI] 'and Joab was girt with his warrior's dress, his clothing, and upon it was the girdle of a sword fastened (i.e. the sword) upon his loins in its sheath.' The sentence is involved and obscure : though the fact is effectually concealed in the free rendering of RV. ICU^ 110 is a strange combination ; 6^37, not "Mn, would be the verb naturally used with no (read prob., in the sense ivarrior's dress, HD; see on I 17, 38); "li^H also (the fern. moVD referring only to the sword) appears to be superfluous. The text must be in some disorder. Lohr, Now. (improving on We.) : ^XT"^ 3-in (LXX irepieJicoafxeVos) ^«n (cf. I 17, 38. 39) vbv) V'i^b HD n-iyna V^no bv moVD ; this deviates but little from MT. Dhorme : '21 movD 2-in vbv) Sm^bb bvi2 li^n 3nvi (Dh. writes )m2b i^yo: but see I 17, 39). According to the view expressed in these restora- tions, Joab had one sword only, which afterwards {v. 8 end) fell to the ground, and was then (though this is not mentioned) picked up by Joab with his left hand, in such a way as not to arouse 'Amasa's suspicions. Klo. Bu. Sm. Kitt., on the other hand, think that Joab had /wo swords, an outside one in its usual place, which fell to the ground, and was left there, and another concealed under his dress on his left, the existence of which 'Amasa had no reason to suspect. Klo., accordingly, supposing two words to have become corrupted, and one omitted, reads (insert NIH) V^yi )m2bb nnm nj2 3nn asvi ':i mC2fD ain n^jn ' and as for Joab, a sword was in his hand underneath his dress (cf. Jud. 3, 16), and upon it (i.e. outside) he was girt,' etc. (so Sm. Kit.). Bu., thinking that Joab would hardly have kept his left hand, holding the concealed sword, under his dress, as he approached 'Amasa, would read '^'''^9? rinno ann Ti:n aNVI ':i mJOVD nnn imni? bv^ (Jud. 3, 16). As Joab's right hand was otherwise employed (v. 9), the 3XV T» of 10 must have been his left hand: and Klo.'s ITi^ for HD explains, as MT. does not explain, how the sword came to be in this hand. On the other hand, Klo.'s emend., — and still more Bu.'s, — differs considerably from MT. : z^. 10, also, in saying not that 'Amasa did not see the sword in Joab's hand : but that he did not guard /limselfzg^mst it, rather implies that he saw 344 The Seco7id Book of Samuel, it ; and if so, this will have been the one sword which he had, which had fallen to the ground, and been picked up by him. It seems best, on the whole, to follow Lohr and Now. ^sni N^-^ Nim] Read, with LXX, ^sni r\^T^ N^ni and it (the sword) came out, and fell. The text is contrary to idiom. With the emph. Nin, the form of the sentence would be (N^•^1 or) 3-inn') nx^ Nini : .\^33 (see on I 9, 5). 10. '1 "IJDtJ'j] rQ?iQx\\e\y, guarded himself : so 2 Ki. 6, 10. 1^ nJK' N'h] I 26, 8. 1 1 . V^y] over or by him, i. e. by 'Amasa, nxr nns nn!j...X'K >»] in form as Ex. 32, 26: cf. on I II, 12. For the exclam., cf. also 2 Ki. 3, 23 3S1D bb^h; Jud. 7, 18. 12. mt^r\ , . . aOM] into the field: cf. on 6, 10. noyi Ivy Nnn ?3 nsi "iK'ND] * when he saw every one who came by him, and stopped.' n»yi is the pf. with waw conv,, carrying on (GK. § ii6x), as a frequentative, the ptcp. N^.Ti'S ( = whosoever came) in past time, just as it does in present time (e.g.) Jer. 21, 9 bDJI N*i"rn whoso goeth out and falleth to the Chaldaeans. etc. {Tenses, § 117). But 1)0jj for noyi (Now.) would be an improvement: 'When he saw every one who came to him stopping! ' When he saw that every one . . . stood still' (EVV.) would require IPP *3 (Gen. i, 4). The clause stating the reason for the man's acting as he did, would, however, stand naturally before N"i"'1; and perhaps, with HMI (freq.) prefixed, it should be transposed there: 'And it came to pass, when every one who came by him saw him ('Amasa), that he stood still' (cf. Jud. 19, 30). 13. mnj Hof., for nj^H: GK. § 69W. But the root (Syr. o^^^o/" to drive away, remove) occurs in Heb. only here ; read prob. either nisn (Bu.), as 3, 27, or r\^r} (in Qal, Pr. 25, 4. 5 ; Isa. 27, 8t). 14. n^yjD n^ai rhia] Read n^yo n'l nbnx 'to Abel of Beth- Ma'achah ' with Ew. Th. We. Klo. etc., as vv. 15. 18. i Ki. 15, 20. 2 Ki. 15, 29. Now Abil, a village on a hill (1074 ft.), overlooking the Jordan-valley, 2| miles W. of the river, and 4 miles W. of Tell el- Kadi (Dan). For nayo, cf. on 10, 6. □nan-?Dl] No place or people named onnn is known : and after the mention of Abel of Beth-Ma'achah as the goal of Sheba's movements, XX. 8-ij 345 the words and all the Berites, if treated as coupled to them, yield no intelligible sense. The athnah, then, must be moved back to nsyo. The sense of what follows turns upon the meaning of inns fj^ "IX3''1. nnN Na is not a mere synonym of either nriN l^n (to /allow), or nns ^ITl (to pursue) : it means to enter after some one into a place, as Ex. 14, 17 Dnnns 1N3^1 viz. into the sea (as vv. 23. 28, explicitly); 1 26, 3 Saul came in after him into the wilderness; 2 Ki. 11, 15; 2 Ch. 26, 17 ; so "inx sa Nu. 25, 8. Hence ':i IXSM will mean, 'and went in after him,' viz. as is required by the context, into Abel of Beth-Ma'achah. This shews that the subject of 13^1, as well as the object in V"ins, is Sheba; and lends at the same time plausibility to Klo.'s proposal to read, instead of the obscure Dn^n 73, after LXX Kai TravTcs Iv Xappet, DnD3n-bl and all the Bichrites (the following -1 as I 14, 19)^ Sheba is described in v. i as "'"133"P; and the meaning of the verse will then be that the members of his family or clan took part with him and went in after him into the city in which he had taken refuge ^. The narrative reverts to Sheba's pursuers in V. 15. pin] P|N simply=D3 (not z.'s,=-how much ?nore : on I 14, 30) is very unusual in plain narrative, being confined chiefly to poetry, and where it occurs in prose having generally some rhetorical force ^. Here it does not in fact appear to be required, and perhaps arose by error out of the first two letters of Vins : it is not expressed by LXX. Bu., followed by Kenn. Dh., supposes that a transposition has taken place, and suggests, very cleverly and plausibly : ^22 "iny Nini inns isn onnan ^31 T\2ivr:i rr-n nbx n3''i (Kt.) ^n^p^i h^'s^'' ^D3t^. ^npip^l = treated him with contempt (see 6, 22. 19, 44). 15. n^yo n^3 n^Ss] bs meadow, unlike ^J^N* (adj.) mourning ^ Though it does not usually follow the subject immediately (Jer. 44, 25). 2 The reading (Th. al., after Vulg. oww^j-^m^ virielecti) DnnSH'bsl and all the young men (viz. followed after him [Joab] ; or pursued after him [Sheba]) is inconsistent with the meaning of """iriN N3. ^ F|Nn Gen. 18, 13. 23. 24: with a pron. ^JN ^N Gen. 40, 16 and with singular frequencyinLev. 26(7^2^. 16. 24. 28.41, and f]N1 w. 39. 40. 42. 44) ; Dn f]N NNT f)N Dt. 2, II. 20, Sin C]N 2 Ki. 2, 14 : alone, Nu. 16, 14. Dt. 15, 17 and here. These are all the occurrences of P]N alone (i. e. not in the combination ""D f]N) in prose from Gen. to 2 Kings. 34^ The Second Book of Samuel, {f. 35, 14), does not change its form in sf. c. (Kon. ii. 438; iii. § 285^): so onifD ^?N* Gen. 50, 11, nbin» i>3N i Ki, 4, 12: cf. K'?J nyi?:. The n- he. in St. c. : GK. § 90c. IDSK^M] alluding to the earth, ' poured ' out of baskets, of which the nb^D was constructed. So regularly, as 2 Ki. 19, 32. Anglice, ' threw up. ' ?n3 IDyni] The 3 is difficult, pn is explained to mean the smaller outer wall — HDin p or N"1V^ 13^ as the Jews define it — or 'outwork,' — • 'rampart' (RV.) is not sufficiently distinctive, — surrounding a city, between which and the principal wall there would be a space, con- sisting, at least partly, of a moat. It has been supposed (Ges. Keil) that the word included this space; and so Keil renders, 'And it (the n!?^D) stood in the moat.' But this is hardly likely. hrO. noyni must belong, somehow or other, to noan HK'S in v. 16. hni "iDyni 'S'^rK p no^n nc'N Nipni might suffice : but ■T'yn p nn^n nc'x Nvm Nipni ^n3 nroyni is more what we should expect, though it is not apparent how the present text would be derived from it. riDinn ■J'^sn? oriTitrCi] ^were destroying, to cause the wall to fall,' i.e. were battering it. Cf. Ez. 26, 4 "iv nioin inntjn : the ptcp. here of course implying that the action was only in process, and not completed. The expression is, however, a little peculiar; and Ew. Bo. Th. Dh. treat the word as a denom. of nnc pit — were making a pit to cause the wall to fall, i.e. were undenninittg it (RV. marg). LXX have hoovaav, and Targ. pnt^'ynD, which no doubt represent D^Q^TID Prov. 24, 8 (We.) — ' were devising to bring the wall down.' Perhaps this is the true reading : it is adopted by Klo. Bu. Sm. Now. 18-19. '31 "nai^ ~im] ' They were wont to speak aforetime, saying, Let them but enquire at Abel, and so they finished (a matter). I (consist of) the peaceable (and) faithful ones of Israel,' etc. ; i.e. Abel was famed from of old for the wisdom of its inhabitants, hence a proverb arose advising people to consult them in any difficult under- taking. In 19* the woman, in saying ""aJN, speaks in the name of the community : hence she uses i ps. sg. (as I 5, 10), though the predicate is in the plural (referring to the individual members of it : comp. Gen. 34, 30 ISDO TID *3Xl). ''JDN ^"ob^ is a ' suspended ' st. c, to be explained on the principle of aiK n^yn ntJ'X I 28, 7 where see XX. 1^-22 347 the note. LXX have ■qpiM-nqjxivo'; rjpoiTrjdrj iv Tj7 'A/JcX Kal €v Aav cl iieXiTTOv a eOevTO ol ttiotoi tov ^laparjX [f/Dwvrcs eTrepwr-^a-ovaiv €va iv A/8cA Koi ovT(oX DX), Nestle, Sm. Now. IT'lon cannot be rendered ' destroy ' (EW.). DX] *an important and venerable city with dependent villages, called in Heb. idiom its " daughters," Nu. 21, 25 al.' (Kenn.). Cf. on 8, I. 21. j?^D , . , njn] The fut. instans. with a passive ptcp. : cf. I 19, 1 1. — On b]}^, here and v. 22, see on I 28, 15. 22. Dyn , , . xnni] 'In LXX there is a doublet: kol dcnjXOe Trpos TrdvTa TOV Aaov and /cai i\dXr](re 7rpo9 Tracrav r^v ttoXiv ', the latter is 1 We. 10''b'n. But a Hif. DW is so rare and doubtful (Ez. 14, 8. 21, 21), except at most in the participle (Is. 41, 20. Job 4, 20-t"), that forms of it cannot legitimately be introduced by conjecture into the MT. (Nbldeke, ZDMG., 1883, p. c^^o-= Beitriige zttr Sem. Sprachwissenschaft, 1904, p. 37). ^ "yrO, might indeed be inf. abs. Pi'el (as NQl) ; but this is elsewhere '!I"ia. 34^ The Second Book of Samuel, genuine, and the Hebrew text to which it points 0'V9"^r^? "'?"!'^1) is preferable to I\1T. Cf. the interchange of N'3m and IDXni 14, 4' (We.). So Now. Kit. Klo. Bu. Dh. prefer T-yn ks] nt^NH NUni 23-26. See 8, 16-18. 23. ^x] a strong case of fjN=!?y: contrast 23^ and 8, 16. bvr\^^ Kn^n-?3] Of course ks-i:j''> cannot be a genitive after Nnvn : it must therefore be in apposition with it. This appositional con- struction, however, 'all the host, Israel' is harsh, and, since no relation of identity subsists between the host and Israel, unsuitable. Grammar will only admit one of two alternatives : ^NHC''' Nnif^^, or simply N3^'n-^D: the latter is preferable (cf. 8, 16 h^ HMnv p 3N"I''1 N3Vn. 17, 25. I Ki. 2, 35 al.). "iDn] "'isn (Kt.) recurs 2 Ki. 11, 4. 19 (n'>'inn') ^■^■^li), where it probably signifies Carians. The king's body-guard appears to have consisted of foreigners. But here no doubt the Qre is right in reading ■'JTlifiD, as 8, 18, w^here see the note. 24. Dnj{] LXX A8a)V€i/3a/A, as I Ki. 4, 6. 5, 28 DT'jnx. The form D-ns' occurs also i Ki. 12, 18 where LXX Cod. B 'Apa/x, Cod. A 'Ahwvipafx; in the parallel passage 2 Ch. 10, 18 Q-iin (LXX ASwvLpa/j). The variation is not greater than attaches to many less familiar names, when they occur in parallel texts: see e.g. Nu. 26, or Ezra 2 passim (RV. marg.). The true name here is probably DI^JIX (cf. DT^^JO, D"i1"') ; ffTin is a I/a mat/lite name (see on 8, 10). D?2n by] over the labow-gangs (or the corve'e\ — gangs of men doing forced labour, such as an Eastern monarch is wont to exact from his subjects. The DO appears first as an institution in Israel at the end of David's reign : it was more fully organized by Solomon, who needed it for the purpose of carrying on his buildings : Adoniram was the officer who superintended it: how unpopular it was, may be inferred from the fact that the populace, disappointed at Rehoboam's refusal to relax his father's imposts, wreaked their vengeance on Adoniram and stoned him (i Ki. 12, 18). Phrases used in connexion with it are i'NnEJ''»» D» n^yn to bring up (=to levy) a DO out of Israel I Ki. 5, 27 (cf. 9, 15); 1?y DOS' nbyn to levy (them) for a toiling labour-band i Ki. 9, 21 : DD^ n\T Dt. 20, 11 al. to become a labour- XX. 2) — XXI. I 349 band; "l?J? opp ^^■I Gen. 49, 15. Jos. 16, 10 to become a toiling labour-band. In Jud. r, 28. 30. 33. 35 certain Canaanites are described as reduced to ' labour-gangs ' by their Israelitish conquerors. Ex. I, II D'^BO '•"IK' overseers 0/ labour-gangs {or gang-masiers). See Lex. 586 f. The rend, tribute depends on a baseless Rabb. derivation from D3^ (Z^'.r. 493^): it suggests a totally incorrect idea; and it is greatly to be regretted that it should have been retained in RV. 26. nXTi] i.e. of Jair, a Gileadite family, Nu. 32, 41 al. But Pesh. i-k^ ^» (cf. Luc. 6 leOep), whence Th. Now. Dh. would restore >"iPi»n 0/ Vattir, in the hill-country of Judah (see on I 30, 27). It is observed that in notices of this kind the /io??ie, not iht fafnilv, is usually mentioned; and I 30, 27 shews that David had friends in Yattir. Yattir may also have been an old priestly settlement (cf. Jos. 21, 14). In any case this 'Ira will not be 'Ira the warrior of 23, 38. Klo. Bu. Sm. retain n'X!i^. 21-24. An Appendix to the main narrative 0/ the Book, 0/ miscellaneous contents: {a) 21, 1-14 the famine in Israel stopped through the sacrifice of the sons of Saul by the Gibeonites ; (b) 21, 15-22 ex- ploits against the Philistines ; (c) 22 David's Hymn of Triumph { = i(/. 18); (d) 23, 1-7 David's 'Last Words;' {e) 23, 8-39 further exploits against the Philistines, and list of David^s heroes ; {f) 24 David's census of the people^. [a) 21, I- 1 4. Saul's sons sacrificed by the Gibeonites. I. 'J1 CpTi] Vulg., interpreting rightly, 'Et consuluit David ora- culuni Domini.' Cf. Ex. 33, 7. The technical expression is 'O ijNK' (I 22, 10 al.). D'lOin n''3 ^Sl] ' and for his bloody house ' would require impera- tively "h IIJ'X D''D'in n*!! i^NI : the pron. could not in a case like the present be dispensed with. LXX /cat hrX rov oTkov ainoO dSiKta 8ta to 1 In this Appendix, a and / in style and manner are closely related, as also d and e. Further, as the Appendix interrupts the continuous narrative ch. 9-20. I Ki. 1-2 (p. ^^dnote), it may be inferred that it was placed where it now stands after the separation had been effected between the Books of Samuel arid Kings. Its compiler, presumably, thus lived at a later date than the compiler of the maia narrative of Samuel. 350 The Second Book of Samuel, avTov Bavarta ai/x.aTwj/ = Cl^^T nh''3"?N1 ^ 'upon Saul and Upon his house {rests) dlood {d. i6, 8. Dt. 19, 10), because he slew the Gibeonites.' The words in MT. have simply been wrongly divided (cf. t'. 12 ; 5, 2): nn''2 is the old orthography for IJT'a, no doubt once written uniformly in Hebrew (as in Moabitic), but afterwards, except in a few sporadic instances, modernized. See the Introd., p. xxxii f. 2. HDn . , . xb] Lex. 2i6a3b, 24it)3b; Tenses, § 198. 3. non] Cf. Mic. 6, 6 m,T mpX nm._In la-mi, the imper. is used instead of the more normal voluntative, for the purpose of expressing with somewhat greater force the intention of the previous verb: cf. I Ki. I, 12; Ew. § 347a; Tenses, § 65; GK. § no'. 4. Kt. v] Qr^, assimilating to the next clause, ^3^. But see on I 5, lo- 30, 22. 'J1 13b"pNl] (against the accents) 'and it is not open to us to put any man to death in Israel.' 'b pN, as more frequently in the later language, Ezra 9, 15. 2 Ch. 22, 9 al. : Tenses, § 202. i. Cf. 'b (k^'') B'N eh. 14, 19. n:h HK^yK onON nriN no] 'What say (think) ye (that) I should do for you?' So Ew. (§ 336^; cf. GK. § 120c), Keil, ^3 being (unusually) omitted. The constr. ' What do ye say ? I will do it for you ' = whatsoever ye say I will do for you (so in effect EW.) yields a better sense : but nc^yxi (which is actually expressed by LXX) would in that case be more in accordance with usage (cf on I 20, 4). See, however, Jud. 9, 48 ^i03 ItJ'y -nno ''n^'i:^]} Dn"'S1 no (lit.) ' What have ye seen (that) I have done ? hasten and do like me.' (riD must not be treated as if it were equivalent to the late ^"Hlp /ha/ which.) 5. ''3']^?'?] ' that we should be destroyed ' (EW.) is no rendering of a perfec/ tense: '(so that) we have been destroyed' (RV. marg.) would require "ID'N *iy to be expressed: moreover 1J^ noi does not mean ' devised against us.' Read with Ew. We. ^'^T^f^)> nm I^J'NI ' and who meditated /o destroy us that we should not,' etc. So LXX (one rendering) os ■KapiKoy'ia-a.To e^oXeOpeCaai i^fjias. (What follows, viz. a^avia-oiixev avrov, merely expresses MT. differently vocalized, viz. ^S'lnK'i, — contrary to the sense.) v n^'n as Jud. 20, 5. 1 dSi/cia aluarcov is a paraphrase of CDT : Sta to avTov Oavdrqi is a partial doublet to nepl ov kOavaToiaiv in the following clause. XXL 2-6 351 6. uij'iw] Kt. 1J^"rn3\ Qre 13^1?'. Both conjugations are in use: the Hof. is perhaps somewhat more elegant (i Ki. 2, 21. 2 Ki. 5, 17). The construction as below, v. 11. niiT'^ nijypini] VY*r\ only here, vv. 9. 13. Nu. 25, 4 DHIK vi^in ^y^T\ "IJJ ninv (of. on I 31, 10). The exact sense is uncertain. «J. is Xo fall (Qor. 15, 29. 22, 64): hence W. R. Smith, Rel. Sem. 398 (^^419), comparing ypin with /«5jl, thought that precipitation from a rock was intended : this would suit 172^1 v. 9, but hardly in^ ib.', and 2 Ch. 25, 12, where that form of punishment is mentioned, the expressions used are different. (D^'O: (rare) is to beat (Dillm., Lex. 913). Elsewhere in Heb. yp^ means to be separated^ dislocated, of a joint (Gen. 32, 26t), fig. to be severed, alienated (Jer. 6, 8. Ez. 23, 17. i8t) ; hence Ges. to impale (cf. Aq. a.vairr]yvvva.i), ' because in this form of punishment the limbs were dislocated.' Other versions express the idea of expose (LXX here l^riki6.t,f.tv, in Nu. TrapaSety/iart^etv ; Pesh. in Nu. >flOi3); or render crucify (Targ. here 2P2»; Vulg. cruci- figere, affigere ; Saad. in Nu. ^^JLo), or hang (Symm. Kpeixd^eiv ; Vulg. in Nu. suspendere). Targ. in Nu. has merely 70p h'll ; and Pesh. here w«.s? sacrifice. Perhaps crucify (in late Heb. 3?^), implying at least an unnatural extension of the limbs (cf. 'i\i'^ Gen. 32, 26), is as probable a rend, as any : in this case, however, it would be better, for 172'' V. 9, to read with Klo. ^^'J^'l and they were hung (and DK' there, with Luc). ' Expose,' though a natural consequence of either impale- ment or crucifixion, can hardly be the actual meaning of U^pin : it is weak, and has no philological justification. Cheyne remarks justly {Exp. Times, x, Aug. 1899, p. 522) that the word 'seems to be a religious synonym of n7n : ' but it must also, it seems, have denoted some special form, or method, of hanging. •'"'' Tna hstr nynn] ' The hill ("inn) on which according to v. 9 the sons of Saul were hung can hardly be any other than the hill by Gibeon itself. If however |ynJ3 (LXX Iv Ta/Sawv) is thus to be restored for nyan (cf. 5, 25), i""- Tn2 hxi^ falls through of itself. >"'' nnn (cf. v. 9) became corrupted into ''"'' "in2 (E. Castle ap. Then.), and ''"'' "ina |y3:2 was understood in the sense of "'"'' "iTi^ hxc ny^n ' (We.). Read accordingly mn^ inzi |yaD3 (so Bu. Now. Dh. etc.). 352 The Second Book of Samuel, The r(\!V "in will have been the sacred hill on which the ' great high- place of Gibeon' (i Ki. 3, 4) lay. |nN '3N] With the pron, expressed, as in a reply a slight emphasis is not unsuitable: cf. ch. 3, 13. I 26, 6. Jud. 6, 18. 11, 9. i Ki. 2, 18. 2 Ki. 6, 3. Comp. Tenses, § 160 Obs. ji. 7. ''"' nyaC'] See I 20, 42. 23, 18. The expression as Ex. 22, 10. I Ki. 2, 43. 8. rfS TO. na^n] Saul's concubine, ch. 3, 7. byi^] a lapsus calami for 3"ID (so Luc, as well as other MSS. of LXX, and Pesh. [oj->, which, however, stands regularly in Pesh. for 3"in]): see I 18, 19 \ 9. mn^ >:ih] Cf. I 15, 33. Kt. Cnyn^J ' they fell seven times together,' which is defended by Bo. Keil, and interpreted to mean ' they fell by seven similarly.' But the thought would be expressed most illogically: for though seven men fell together, this is by no means tantamount to a group 0/ seven falling seven times, which is what the Hebrew would signify, the subject of li?2"'1 being the seven men. Read with Qre DJ^V?^ 'and the seven of them fell together : ' and cf. XlVw^^ ' the three of them ' Nu. 12, 4 al.; DJ?V?"!^ 'the four of them' Ez. i, 8 al. D^Jt^^N~l3] So already LXX eV Trpcorois, but D'':t^'K'^n is what would be expected. No doubt the 3 is a lapsus calami. On the sing. "jriJ, see on I i, 2. 11. ns . . . 13>1] So Gen. 27, 42. See GK. § 121*; Ew. § 295^; and i\\Q founial of Philology, xi. 227-229. 12. Dl^n] Kt. DI^J? the regular form: Qre DlX^n, as though from Nbn (GK. § 75rr; Konig, i. 539, 544): cf. n^Nli'n Dt. 28, 66. Hos. II, 7 ; also \'^'^V, Fomd 3, 9, Pe'dh 2, 6 ; i>533 ' Abodah zarah 3, 7. n^ntr^JSn m Kt.] D^nt^^S nsB' QrS. W^m^ occurs much more frequently than DTl^^'l'Dn : but the latter is found (e.g. I 4, 7. 7, 13). 13. IDDN'"")] In the same connexion, Jer. 8, 2. 25, 33 al. 14. ija] add with LXX D^yj^isn niDiT"?]. yp?f] presumably =^^^?n ypy, mentioned in Jos. 18, 28 among the ^ But Targ. explains characteristically 73"'D {brought uf) nX''I11"^ 3"ID ''J3 : so [Jer.] Quaestiones, ad loc. ; Satih. 19'' (see Aptow. ZA IV. 1909, p. 251). XXL 6-16 353 cities of Benjamin, next before Jerusalem, Gibeah, and Kiriath-ye arim. Its site is unknown. "iny"'l] ' and let himself be entreated ' (so. successfully) : the Nifal tolerativum (GK. § 51c). So Gen. 25, 21 al. The Arab. J.£c is to slaughter for sacrifice (Wellh. Held? 118;/., cf. ii2n.; Rel. Sem. 227 f.) : so fy) ^N (iTiyn) nny (Gen. i.e. ; Ex. 8, 4. sal.) will apparently have meant originally to sacrifice to, weakened afterwards to make entreaty to. (V) 15-22. Exploits against the Philistines. i5f. 'From vv. 18, 19 [nn non^DH Tiy ^■ln"l] it is probable that V. 1 5 also speaks of a battle in Gob : observe in those two verses the article rnonpsn, which is absent, so soon as the scene changes, in v. 20. No one, now, would read the words 332 \y:?"''\ v. 1 6, regarded by them- selves, otherwise than as ^i? ^2^*1 ; and it will be granted that 33 and 33 are readily interchangeable. As, however, a notice of the place at which the contest occurred is here required, the reading 333 13D'''1 and abode in Gob is in fact the correct one; the words are misplaced, and stood originally after "iDy v. \^. By their removal ItJ'X "in fiyi '31 ''*lv''3 stand in juxtaposition : in in Pjyi is concealed the name of the Philistine, and perhaps a verb as well, such as Dp''l, of which "ICNM 1 6b would be the sequel. It is no loss to be rid of the name Yishbo- benob, and of the statement that David grew wearied ; and, as has been remarked, the scene of the battle can least of all at the begin- ning remain unmentioned' (We.), Read, therefore (after D^ncPD) : nsin nv^3 Ti'K . . , Dp'l, the name of the Philistine being no longer recoverable. The site of ' Gob ' is unknown. 16. n^-^n n^^''3] So V. 1 8 (in I Ch. 20, 4 D^Nann n'W:i). 'i?l^l, not of an individual, but, as the article shews, collectively, of the race (cf. the plur. in i Ch. 20, 4): so vv. 20. 22 (^rNS^n i Cli. 20, 6. 8). The sing, is found only in these passages. The pi. D\s*S"\ occurs in the names of certain parts of Palestine reputed to have been the abode of a pre-historic giant population: Dt. 2, 11. 20. 3, 13; 3, 11 ('Og D^X2"in "iri'D : so in the Deuteronomizing sections of Joshua, Jos. 12, 4. 13, 12); Jos. 15, 8 al. (see on 5, 18) the D''NSi pDy SW. of 13G5 A a 354 The Second Book of Samuel, Jerusalem; 17, 15; Gen. 14, 5 (E. of Jordan). 15, 20. — With the unusual •"T^"' cf. the p:yn '•T^^ Nu. 13, 22. 28. Jos. 15, 14. i:"'p] from p.i5, only here, explained as meaning spear (so LXX), from Arab. J,L5 to forge iron, ,*^ an iron-smith (but not a ' spear '). Klo. conjectured iy21p his helmei (I 17, 38 ; in v. 5 y213): so Bu. Sm. Now. (notDh.). 300 shekels of bronze would weigh about 13 lbs. av. (cf. onl 17, 5). ntrn: i'pB'o] Read nt^n: h>\>'^. (AV. RV. are obliged to supply shekels in italics !) nc^in] ' a new . . . : ' either a subst. with which nt:>in would agree has dropped out, or, which is more probable, ncin is a corruption of the name of some rare weapon, which the Philistine wore. LXX Kopvvqv a chcb. 17. i'NIC''' irriN*] The lamp burning in a tent or house being a figure of the continued prosperity of its owner (i/^. 18, 29. Pr. 13, 9. Job 18, 6) or of his family (cf. the "1? promised to the house of David, I Ki. II, 36. 15, 4. 2 Ki. 8, 19 = 2 Ch. 21, 7t). 18-22 = 1 Ch. 20, 4-8. 18. 3:3] Ch. 1TJ3. S]D] In I Ch. 20, 4 ^SD. On the varying terminations of one and the same pr. n. in parallel texts, comp. p. 4, and Wellh. De Gentibus, etc. (cited ib.), pp. 37-39. 19] ^njn n^^3 nx ;on^n n''3 D'^ns nj?'» p pn^sTii. Ch. '»n:n n^b "'ns* ^i^rh ns ^ niy"" p pn^N t^- It is evident that CJIX has found its way into the text here by accident from the line below, though the error must be older than LXX'^; and that Ty must be read for ny% with LXX, Pesh. and I Ch. 20, 5 Qre. But what of the other variants ? Is nx ''Dn^n n"'3 the original reading, and mN ^Dni? DX a corruption of this, or cor- rection made for the purpose of harmonizing with I 17 (where it is 1 Qre Tiy as LXX, Pesh. (Jerome ' filius saltus' [cf. Aptowitzer, ZAW. 1909, p. 252], i.e. "ly, without iht plena scriptio). ^ Or, at least, than Codd. BA (ApLwpyun). Some twenty others, however, have Apojpi ; and Lucian reads koI 'fnara^iv E.\\avav vlos laSSeiv vloO tov E\fiu rbv ToXiaO. XXL 16-20 355 David who slays Goliath), or is TIN "'On^ nx the original text, and ns ""Dn^n n"'2 a corruption? When the character of the two alter- native readings is considered, it is difficult to resist the conclusion that the former is the more probable. It is scarcely credible that a scribe having before him a text identical with that of Ch., even supposing that some letters in it had become obliterated or obscure, could, with the knowledge of I 17 that he must have possessed, have so altered or emended it as to make it state that 'Elhanan the son of Ya'ir the Beth-khemite slew Goliath of Gath!' It is not merely the case of a word "TIN 'brother of having dropped out of the original text (which could readily be imagined), which the latter supposition involves, but the siihsiituiion of HN for ^riN, and the still more remarkable one of ''J3n^n"n''3 'the Beth-lehemite ' for ^DH^JTIN ' Lahmi.' On the other hand, a motive for the correction of the text of Samuel by the Chronicler — or even by a copyist of the Chronicles — is obvious. So even Bertheau (on Ch.), as well as Ewald {^Hist.\\\. 70), Thenius, Wellh. {^Hisi. of Israel, p. 266), Kuenen {Onderzoek, §§ 21. 10; 23. 4)^. Upon the historical question in- volved, if the reading of Samuel be accepted as original, this is not the place to enter. See Kennedy, p. 122. D^nx -nJD3 irT'Jn J^yi] See on I 17, 7. 20. Kt. piD] i.e. probably PI?? vtr mensurarum : cf. riiTO '^^M Nu. 13, 32 : the I of the pi. might be defended by pj"ix i Ki. 11, 33. This J, however, is rare (25 times, including PpO 13 times in Job), and chiefly late (GK. § 87^); and the masc. form of the pi. does not occur elsewhere. Qre Tno, so read already by LXX [koX 7;v avr^p MaSwv), but of uncertain signification. It is best to read •"I'lO with I Ch. 20, 6; cf. HTO ''k^'JN Is, 45, 14. — Observe that here r\orh'0, unlike vv. 18. 19, is without the art., in agreement with the fresh scene of battle nj (We.). nSDJD] adv. accus. ' m number : ' cf. on I 6, 4. nsinb] So V. 22, and in i Ch. 20, 6. 8 (NEnn^). The unusual ^ Gratz {Gesck. i. 427) would explain the divergent readings by assuming as the original text Tijn v^hi '•ns -"Dn^ HN •'j^n^n JV2 Ty p pn^N 71. A a 2 356 The Second Book of Samuel, retention of the art. after the prep.^ may arise from nsnn being treated as a proper name. 21*. fjin"!] Cf. I 17, 25, of Goliath. 2 lb Kt. ^VOB'] So LXX (26)ac£i) : Qre m^P. See on I 16, 9. 22. ^"tp.^ ♦ • •riN] Ew. § 277(1 compares Jud. 20, 44. 46. Jer. 45, 4 : ns having nearly, as it seems, the force of as regards (' as regards these four, they were,' etc.), and being used sometimes ' in the transition to something new,' sometimes, as here, ' in the brief repetition of a thought:' comp. Z^.r. 85* 3 a ; and see also Kon. iii. §§ 108-110. But probably n?^ (GK. § 121^^) should be restored; cf. v. 11, above. {c) 22. David's Hynm of Truimph. This recurs (with textual variations) as y\i. 18, and has been so adequately dealt with in Commentaries on the Psalms accessible to the English student, that a fresh series of explanatory notes does not appear to the writer to be required. [d) 23, 1-7. David's 'Last Words.' I. DN3] The genitive which follows is usually niiT (occasionally a synonym, as jnNn Is. i, 24, 19, 4): except here, DXJ is joined with the name of a human speaker only Nu. 24, 3. 15 (with "i3jn in the parallel clause, as here). 4. 16 (of Balaam). Pr. 30, i (l2jn) : i}/. 36, 2 the gen. is yt^'a personified. Di2^] The tone is thrown back from the ultima on account of the tone-syllable immediately following: the retrocession, however, takes place, as a rule, only when the penultima is an open syllable, as here (GK. § 29®; for exceptions, see § 29^; Kon. i. 475). The P, found in many edd., is contrary to the Massorah. Py] 7y is here a substantive (as in ^Vt? Gen. 27, 39 al.), construed in the accus. after npn 'raised up on high' as Hos. 7, 16 i5y s!? \y\^ they return, (but) not z^/wards; 11, 7 inNIp'' 7j;"7N they call it w/wards, if the text of these two passages is correct. * Elsewhere (except in DVn3) rare, and mostly late : ch. 16, 2 Kt. (the 7 an error) ; I 13, 21 ni?Dl"lpn71 (also probably an error : notice the following 'n?'!) ; 2 Ki. 7, 12 Kt. ; Ez. 40, 25 ; 47, 22; ^. 36, 6; Qoh. 8, i; Neh. 9, 19; 12, 38; 2 Ch. 10, 7; 25, 10; 29, 27 being all the examples that occur. Cf. GK. § 35°. XXL 2I—XXIIL 2 357 fjNIK'^ nn^Dr O^yj] Lit. the pkasatit one of (the) songs of Israel. Cyj is pleasant, agreeable (cf. i, 23 (of Saul and J.), Cant, i, 16, and the verb ch. i, 26 nXD ■>!? nroyj) ; and nn''f2r means jow^i' (not necessarily 'psalms'), Is. 24, 16. 25, 5 (my^ C^^ny TOT), i/^. 95, 2. 119. 54- Job 35, lot. Does, now, tlie whole expression mean {a), The pleasant one of songs (= The pleasant singer) of Israel (so Ew. § 291a)— niTOT D^yj, like I 25, 3 n'^^^vp n, Jer. 32, 19 r\':i)ir[ ^ina, j/^. 119, I "j-n ^o^OT etc. (GK. § 128X; Kon. iii. § 336^), and ^NTJ'^ limiting, not nn''DT alone, but the compound idea r\V\^'Q] D''y:, like Dt. I, 41 W'P-:'? ''•^I; iiot 'the weapons of his war,' h\x\. his weapons-of- war ; Is. 50, 8 ^DSK'D ^ya ; 28, i D''1EN* n'l3B' niX3 nntpy the croxvn of pride { = ihe proud crow?t) of the drunkards of Ephraim ; and the parallels cited on ch. 8, 10 (''yn mon^D C'"'X), and GK. § 135°.? Or does it mean ((5), ' The pleasant object of the songs of Israel, the "joy " (Sm.) or the "darling" (Klo. Bu. Kenn. Kit.) of the songs of Israel?' If (a) be right, David will be alluded to as the writer of graceful and attractive poetry (cf. Am. 6, 5^'), — not necessarily either including, or excluding, religious poetry, though the rend. ' the sweet psalmist of Israel' suggests much too strongly the unhistorical David of the Chronicles and the titles of the Psalms ; if (3) be right, it will allude to him as a popular favourite, whose achievements in war were celebrated by the poets of his people (cf. I 18, 7 = 21, 12 = 29, 5). Konig (iii. § 281^ ; Stilistik, 284) supports (a), and it is, grammatically, a perfectly legitimate rendering : but most moderns prefer (^b). The explanation of D^yj from 'io, as meaning j-?>/^^r (Now. Dh. ; Lex, 654* 'perhaps'), is precarious. 2. '•n "I3n] '2 "13T is used similarly, of God (never of men ') speaking with a person, Nu. 12, 2. 6. 8**. i Ki. 22, 28. Hos. i, 2a. Hab. 2, I ; and in the phrase ''3 "in'in n^'^b'On Zech. i, 9. 13. 2, 2. 7. 4, I. 4. 5. 5, 5. 10. 6, 4. The usual expression, even when the subject is God, is i?N* nan (e.g. Ex. 33, 11. Nu. 12, 4. Hos. i, 2^^)^; and it is a question what is the exact force of '2 nan. In some of the passages the meaning in or through ^ would be admissible ; ' Except in other senses, as against, about (I 19, 3; 25, 39). 2 Or sometimes DN nm, as Gen. 17, 3. 22. 23. Ex. 25, 22. Ez. 2, i. 3, 23. 24. ^ Though through would be more properly n^a : Is. 20, 2. Hos. 12, ii** al. 35^ Tiu Second Book of Samuel, but these will not suit the phrase in Zech. Ew. (§ 2i7f) understood the phrase on the analogy of '3 pnK* to play with, 'i ^ny to labour with (=to use as a labourer, Ex. i, 14 al.), in the sense of to speak with, but with the collateral idea of a superior speaking with an inferior as his minister (Now. Hosea (1880), p. 3 ; cf. C. H. H. Wright on Zech. i, 9). Others regard the '2, as having the force of a strengthened to (cf. '1 ns-i, '3 D^nn to look at: 'l yct')^: others, again, suppose it to express the idea of speaking into a person (/^/wmzreden) -. On the whole, the explanation of Ewald appears to be the most probable. But, however it be explained, the phrase certainly appears to imply closer and more intimate converse than the ordinary 7N 131. "in?Ol] rh'O is properly an Aramaic word, in Heb. used only in poetry, \^. 19, 5. 139, 4. Pr, 23, 9 and thirty-four times in Job. 3. ^NIB'^ ^^^N] Luc. Sm. Bu. Now. Dh. 3pj;^ \n!?X. The variation, as compared with 3^', is an improvement : cf. v. i . ^Nnc* mv] Is. 30, 29: cf. ch. 22, 3. 32. 47; Dt. 32, 4. 15. 18. 31. 37. '31 h^\'6\ ' When one ruleth over men, as a just one, When one ruleth (in) the fear of God, {v. 4) Then is it as the light,' etc. b^D is a ptcp. absolute; cf. on I 2, 13; and Jud. 7, 17. 9, 33 {Tenses, §§ 126; 135. 6; GK. § 116^): for 1, marking the pred., comp. Job 4, 6 (Dehtzsch); Pr. 10, 25; ch. 15, 34 {Tenses, § 125 05s.; GK. § i43<^l). The accents must be disregarded: the chief break in clause d should be at p^iv. For nxi'' as adv. accus., GK. § 118^. 20 MSS., however, read '"• nKT3. 4. ' Then is it as the light of morning, when the sun ariseth, A morning without clouds, [earth.' That maketh the young grass to shoot after rain out of the The beneficent operation of a just and gracious rule is compared to the influence of the sun, on a cloudless morning after rain, in refreshing and invigorating the growing verdure of the earth. ^ Konig, OffeftharungsbegriffdesAT.s, ii. (1882), p. 179. ' Riehm, Messianic Prophecy (ed. 2), 1S91, p. 41. XXHL 2-s 359 npn "11N3"l] LXX KoX Iv 0eou <^wTi, which is adopted by Th. We. and Stade {Gesch. i. 297) : ' Then is it as the light of God (of Yahweh, We.), in the morning when the sun ariseth/ etc. But "IIX and "ipn are often conjoined in Heb. ; and it is doubtful if the addition is an improvement. nny X^] vh and '•^3 in poetry, and pN in prose as well, are con- strued with a following subst. as a circumstantial clause, in which case they become equivalent to the English without: Ex. 21, 11 pjDD ps D3n nx^''") she shall go out free, without money; Job 24, 10 naked, they walk up and down C'n? "hi without covering ; 12, 24 TIT N^ inn3 = in z pathless waste {Tenses, § 164). '31 "iDCD n:JO] 'Through brightness after rain the young grass (springeth) out of the earth.' ^3 J of a brightly shining light, as Is. 62, I. Pr. 4, 18; and fO of the cause, as Job 4, 9. 14, 19 nno nia^ D^p (cf. on 7, 29). But there must be some error here. A verb is imperatively required ; and the two nouns with JO ("IDDD njJCi) are not an elegance. X'^'^ '^?'P^ (cf. Joel 2, 22) the earth springeth might be a sufficient change : but Klo. Bu. al, may be right in thinking that a ptcp. is concealed under njJO. Klo. suggests D^DlfD (i/^. 104, 14), ■^J.D^? or ^v^n ^^^^f (Zech. 9, 17); Sm. proposes ''!i''?P making to gleam (viz. in the sunlight after the rain). 221JC, to judge from the Qal, and 3^3, suggests the idea oi fruit too much to be suitable for Ntri. n''mD would be the best ; but the ductus litterarum differs a good deal from that of rw:rD. 5. * For is not my house thus with God ? For he hath appointed for me an everlasting covenant, Set forth in all things and secured. For all my welfare, and all my pleasure, Will he not cause it to spring forth ? ' In V. 5^, as the text stands, '•D is explicative {Lex. 473^ c), intro- ducing an example of the general truth expressed in v. 3^-4 : the blessings of a righteous rule, described in general terms in v. 3''-4, David in v. 5 anticipates in particular for his own dynasty, on the ground of the covenant established with him by Yahweh, and of his assurance that the welfare which he desires himself for his house and people will be promoted by God. p points backwards to the descrip- 360 The Second Book of Samuelj tion in v. 3^-4. In 'ai ih '•3 the question is indicated by the tone (on I II, 12). The case is, however, an extreme one; and ^^.T! for N^ "ID (Bu.) would be an improvement. Still '•3 was read by LXX. obiy T\'^~\2. is an allusion to 7, 12^16. Nestle {Marg. 21), comparing 7, 26b {■|"'JD^ p33 .T'n'' nn inny rr'm), would indeed read 11^5 for p N^ (so Now. Dh.), 'Surely [Lex. 4*^2^ e) my house is established with God,' etc. niDC^'1 733 n^ny is an expression borrowed probably from legal terminology, and intended to describe the nn^ as one of which the terms are fully and duly set forth (comp. the forensic use of 1"iy in Job 13, 18 al. io state in order or set forth pleadings), and which is secured by proper precautions against surreptitious alteration or injury, yc^ welfare, as Job 5, 4. 11. Is. 17, 10, and often in the Psalms, as 12, 6. 18, 3. 36. 20, 7 etc. For |'Dn read ''V?[} : to under- stand ihe suff. from '•yK'S — in spite of Ex. 15, 2= Is. 12, 2 = 1//. 118, 14 (where either render JTJpt ' a song,' or, better, read TiT?-)' — is contrary to idiom. For the following N? ""j read probably N?l] (We., GK. § i5o^«.); as the text stands, ""D will be resumptive of the ''3 just before, nm* is used figuratively: comp. II Isaiah 45, 8. 58, 8. 61, lit". But Hyif!! 'cause it \.o prosper^ would be a good emendation. In vv. 6-7 the poet contrasts the fate of the wicked, whom men spurn and extirpate by force, with the love and honour awarded by his people to the righteous rulers described in vv. 3-4. 6. ' But worthlessness — as thorns chased away are all of them : For not with hand do men take them.' ^y^a is a cas. pendens (as Is. 32, 7 ^'^T\ "Iv3 "751, \p. 89, 3 and often: Tenses, § 197. 2), and the suff. in Dn?3 refers to the persons in whom the byv2 is conceived implicitly to inhere. The form Dn-)3 (GK. § 9 if) is to be explained on the analogy of DD?^?, ^'^Vi^, etc. (Stade, §§ 350*. 3; 107^. i): this uncontracted form of the suffix of 3 pi. does not occur elsewhere with sing, substantives in MT. (except in i\iQfeni. ''^'^'^f^ i Ki. 7, 37 ; •!^^r'9'^n2 Ez. 16, 53 ; and in a few forms such as in'^?S'Gen.2i,2 8. jna^DEz. 13, 17: Stade, §§353^10,7, 2,353^'), but it must be assumed in Jer. 15, 10 [see p. xxviii]; cf. 0^313 once, < < Job II, 20, for DH^^ also ^\}'^^ (5 times), D^y often, both in and out of pause [the sign t in Stade, § 350^ 4; 377^ is an oversight], DQp always. "ij!p is the passive either of ^^J} to chase aivay (Job 18, 18 XXIIL s-y 361 ^rn}) bnpi: 20, 8 rh'b nnn^ nTj), or of i^?n to put lo flight {f. 36, 12 ^Jnjri ^x D>y:^••^ n^i : 2 Ki. 21, 8 nonsn po irsTj-^ ^n Tjn^). But the word excites suspicion : for it is not one that would naturally be applied to t/iorns. Klo. proposes 13"ip Y^^p (cf. Jud. 8, 7. 16); so Sm. Bu. (alt.) Now. Dh. For ^2 see on I 26, 23. The subj. of inp^ is, of course, D^npl!?n (on I 16, 4). 7. 'But the man (who) touches them arms himself with iron and a spear's shaft ; And with fire are they burned utterly.' ^'.^?^ on the analogy of T)fm n> S*.>'» 2 Ki. 9, 24, lit.///.f /imsel/, viz. in so far as the hand using the weapon is concerned. ' ^Tj'! lit. m the sitting, which is interpreted to mean ' in (their) place,' or ' on the spot.' But the expression is a very singular one; and the sup- posed meaning is destitute of analogy, Drinn being the idiomatic word for expressing it (Job 40, 12 Dnnn D^yc^""! Tinni; cf. I 14, 9). Nor is cessation, annihilation (from ri?^'), proposed by Delitzsch on Pr. 20, 3, a more probable rendering. The word is in fact otiose after tr'xni ISIti''' Pjnc'; and, it cannot be doubted, has arisen in the text by error from T\2\y2 in the line below. Conjectural restorations of 5'^-7 : — Now. (agreeing with Sm., except in the part left vacant) lano }*ip3 | bvh^ \r\^i2'i^ \6 ''3 || 13 ''vsn bi ''yc^ b ^:) I II nnn y^''^ vh t^'-'Ki | ^oip.^; n"'2 vh ''3 || nn^3 •''^i?.^! ^'^'^^ t^f^^l (':i vh ''2 For they are not picked tip by haiid, neither— How. omits the N7, but it is needed — dotli any waw labour tipon them, i.e. they are worthless). Bu., though not very confidently, suggests: || 13 ^iTCrTl ''yC*^ ^3 "'3 N^ ■'3 II Dn^3 (or n-^j pj23) "i3nrD pp3 I h\i'hi (n^S'V:) nor x^ "-s c'N3 '•3 I jT-jn ]>yi ^n3 (or ^y') L3.^D^ s<^ || nn3 y?^ tr^x n^i | ini?;; n^3 :iDn|'^ fjnC'CJI N^ ^3 /w not by {huvian) hand {] oh 34, 20) are they taken away, nor dot li man touch them ; iron and the shaft of a spear doth not deliver (or profit^ them, Imt, etc.). On this poem, comp. Ewald, Die Dichter des Alien Biindcs, i. i (t866), pp. 143-145; Orelli, Old Testament Prophecy, § 20. The central idea is the prophetic thought, expressed by David in the near prospect of death, that if his successors upon the throne are guided by righteous principles of government, his dynasty ('house,' as 7, 16), under the blessing of God, will be established and prosper. 362 The Second Book of Samuel, This thought is developed in the three strophes {vv. ^^-^, 5, 6-7) which form the body of the poem. Observe the finished parallelism of the exordium {vv. 1-3^, forming a strophe of eight lines). {e) 23, 8-39, Further exploits against the Philistines (comp. 21, 15—22), and list 0/ David's heroes. 23, 8-39 = 1 Ch. II, 11-41*: twelve of the names recur also in I Ch. 27, 2-15, as those of the captains of the twelve divisions of David's army. Here are the three lists, as they stand in MT., — the names in several instances vary, nor is it always possible to determine which form is original, or whether both may not be corrupt : — 2 Sam. 23. I Ch. 11. 8. '•jMnn n2c>n ny^"' n. "•jirosn p nvyz'^ 2. 9. ""nnN p m p iry^x i2."'ninNnnn piry^x 4. II. mn t<3N p HDB' I Ch. 27. 18. nsv '•nN ''K>^3N* 20. 3N1'' '•nx ""trnN 20. y'T'in'' p i.Tjn 22. yT")n> p n^j3 24. asv ^nx ^NHK^y 26. 3XV ■'nx ^Knti>y nn p pnl?N* nn p pn^K 25. 27. '''yr\r\r\ nis'j' 26. "•D^an I'^n ^Ji^JDn i^^n ^ypnn c'py p xn^y 28. ^yipnn ^pv p Ni^y 27. ^nnjyn nry^as' ^mnjyn nry^ax 29. Ti'^nn ^33D 28. "'nnsn ito^v •'ninNH ''^j-'y ^nsDjn nno 30- ^nsiDjn nno 29. "TiaDin njyn p n^n 1 nsiDjn njya p n!?n ^an p *riN 31- ^nn p ^n^x 30a. ^jnyiD m^jn •'jnyian n^J2 5. yn^in^ p in^n 7. 3N*v "nx ^xniry 8. nnr\n nincc^ 10. ''Ji^an }>!jn 9. "-yipnn t^'py p xn^y 12. '•nin:yn -iryax 11. "'Olii' ^riB'nn ^ano 13. "nn^ ^nsiDjn nno 15- ^N^Jriy!? ^nsiDjn n^n 14. ^Jinynsn n^ji XXIII. s 363 2 Sam. 23. 30b. uyy "bn:^ nn 31. "nniyn pn^y-'awX "•crnnn moiy 32. ^jdWi Nan>^x 33. ^'\'-\ni^ r.c'C'^^ :fn:in'' 34. Tiaynn p "-aonx p d^s^^n •'j^n ^Dn^nx p nr^x 35. ''^Di^n n^-n ■•a-ixn nya 36. naviD \n: p i?Nr ' T 37. '•iioyn p^x TiiNan nnj 38. >Tn\n NTj; 39- *rinn nnix I Ch. II. 32. t'y: ''^n:?D mn ^nanyn ^n^3N 33. "-r^nnan mory ■•n^yr'n NDn-^s* 34. m:n Dcn '•ja mnn n:c p in:v 35. --nnn -id::^ p DN'^ns "lis p ba^^K 36. *m3Dn nsn 37. "-brD-ian nvn : '3ix-p nyj IT : V ' 38. jn: ^nx ^wsv n:n p nnao 39. ^Jioyn pW 40. • nn*n NT'y nn>n ma 41^ Tinn .TTiN* First come the ' Three/ Ishba'al, Eleazar son of Dodo, and Shammah {vv. 8-17), whose exploits are specially recorded, then two others, Abishai and Jehoiada {vv. 18-23), whose bravery did not place them on an equality with the ' Three,' but who ranked above the 'Thirty,' lastly the 'Thirty' {vv. 24-39). 8-12. Exploits of the Three. 8. r\2^2 21^'''] LXX 'U{3oa-6e (i.e. nB>3"C'^N, as 2, 8 etc.); Luc. 'Uar/iaaX (i.e. ^yntJ'N; cf. on I 14, 49); LXX i Ch. 11 'Ua-e^aAa, (no doubt for 'Ico-e/JaAa), Luc. 'leo-o-c^aaX * ; I Ch. 27 '2,o^aX. The original name was thus evidently Pys^X (so first Geiger, ZDMG. 1862, p. 730; and then We. Klo. Bu. etc.); ^ynCN will then have been first altered to nc2CX (on 4, 2), whence LXX 'U/SoaOe; this ^ Also Codd. 44, 74, 120, 134, 144, 236, 243, 'l£;yeipe to 8opu avrov, v. 18, shews that icnrdaaTo ttjv pojj.(jiaLav avTov here is derived from the LXX translation of Chronicles (We.). Luc. oi)tos 8i€Kocr/i.€t rr/v Zia.(TK(.vy]v, which Klo. thinks points to £33")yD "Tiy (cf. i Ch. 12, 38), improved by Marquart into i"l^'i?P T^.y brandished his axe (Jer. 10, 3. Is. 44, I2t): so Bu. Dh. ii^ifn """ly, also brandished his axe (Ass. hasinnu, axe ; Eth. pvn iron (the common word for it: Dillm. Lex. 623); Targ. N3'':^n = *lVyD Jer. 10, 3. Is. 44, 12, and in Talm. : Syr. U-I*. axe (rare): cf. Frankel, Die Ara?n. Fremdworier im Arab., 1886, p. 86 f.). Either n^'J/'D or irvn resembles lii'yn more than IJT'in does ; and it is possible that one of these corrections is right. niSD T]yo^ ^y] 'over 800 slain ones,' i.e. in triumph, after he had slain them. For nyo^ i Ch. 11, 11 has uh^. But 'the text here is attested by all Versions [except Luc, who has crvaKoo-tous] ; and is also more probable independently, as otherwise ' Ishba'al ' would have no superiority over Abishai, v. 1%' (Thenius). 9. ""I"^] so Kt. and i Ch. 27, 4: iT^ Qre, LXX {rov TraTpaZiXf^ov ^ On the curious rend, of the Vulg. (' ipse est quasi tenerrimus ligni vermiculus '), based on a Haggadic interpretation of 13^Ty and "iJi'yn, see Aptowitzer, ZAW. 1909, p. 252 (i' and 23* — among the Thirty, — Abishai and Benaiah attained fame ^ In a note on the lists of David's heroes, Gesch. der Juden, i. (1874), pp. 419-428. 368 The Second Book of Samuel, (emph.) among the Thirty, and were more distinguished than the others ; but they did not equal the Three. J. T. S. Stopford, however, suggests very plausibly iflermathena, viii. 223) HB'p^B '\} DK' N?"). For Abishai, see I 26, 6-9. ch. 2, 18. 24. 3, 30, 10, 10. 14. 16, 9, II, etc.; 21, 17. 19. ''Dn] '''2r\ = Is it that..,} 9, I (in a simple interrogation). Gen. 27, 36 (expressing surprise^). 29, 15. Job 6, 22 (expecting a negative ans\ver)t: for 13, comp. on I 8, 9. Here, however, an affir?naiive answer is required, which does not seem to be compatible with the usage of "'3n (AV. R V. interpolate ' not '). The word does not stand in i Ch. 11, 21, or in the similarly worded sentence below, V. 23a (though there i Ch. 11, 25 has Nin 1333 isn n>'^h^r\ p); and can scarcely be right. It is easiest to suppose it a corruption of i3n, preserved in i Ch. 11, 25. For the position of r\'^b^rr\l2, comp. on I 20, 8. 20. yTl.T p liTjn] 8, 18. I Ki. I, 8—2, 46. 4, 4. (Qre) ^'''n tr''S p] p is not expressed in LXX. Read either B'''S ^Tl, p having been accidentally repeated from ynMiT p; or p C>"'K b^n (the sing, of ^''n ''32 n"'C>:N Jud. 18, 2 : cf. \>^r\ -1133 CT'-N Ru. 2, I, N''33 ^^^ etc.) : the former is preferable. D''!'yS"3"i] The expression has a poetical tinge, byb, except in the ll, I Ch. II, 22, and Ru. 2, 12 (^.?1|J? '"" 2.?^^), occurs only in poetry. Cf. 1 25, 3 Q^b^yn Vl. bsVSp] I Ch, II, 22. Jos. 15, 21 (in the Negeb, in the direction of Edom.)t; ^NVSp'' Neh. 11, 25t. Not identified. bx-lS' ^3^^ riN] Read ^xnx ^33 ^yy n^ with LXX ; and then either 3Sir3D (cf. above i'Xi'3pn), or, as p is not usual with the name of a country, pNilsn, for 3N"ir3. Klo., however, observing that an exploit against a lion follows, which, as the text stands, is wedged in between two exploits against warriors, conjectures, very cleverly, and almost convincingly, DX'3np"bi< ''15:!^ 'J^ ''J'J'-ns, which Bu. accepts : ' smote (and pursued) the two young lions (the cubs of the lion mentioned in V. 2oi3: "133, as in ^^3^ "'33 Job 4, 11) into their hiding-place (I 23, 23).' !?xnx (except Is. 29, I, as apparently a cryptic name of Zion) does not occur elsewhere as a pr. n. : but this is not a fatal objection to 1 ' Can a be thai he is called Jacob, and has hence overreached me twice ? ' XXIII. ig-2y 369 its being a pr. n. : we might also punctuate ''^"!^f. For another view of the meaning of ^JNIX, see W. R. Smith, Rel. Sem. 469 (' 488). nsm it] the sequence is unusual, though instances occur {Tejises, §"133; GK. § ii2i'P-ii'i). nam ni.) here would be unsuitable: for obviously a single exploit is referred to. nN3n] here "lN*3n (=li2n), the cistern, is evidently better than "lN3n the well (cf. 1 5). 21. lyio C'N ns*] Cf. 4, II pn^- ir\S* riN; and GK. § II 7*3. Read, with Bu., either nvo tr^N, or (i Ch. 11, 23) n^'DH U'-xn nx : the former is better. Kt. ns"iD nt^'^•] LXX avSpa 6paToi/=Qre hn-io C^^s*. But, as We. remarks, HNIO C'^N would mean a handsome man (Is. 53, 2 : cf. Gen. 39, 6 etc.), not, like the German *ein ansehnlicher INIann ' (Th. Keil), a considerable or large man : so that the true reading is no doubt preserved in i Ch. 11, 23 ITHtt C^i^ (see on ch. 21, 20). Klo., cleverly, and at the same time retaining the Kt. "l'-'8<, nb"]n "IB'N who had defied him (21, 21). 22. onajn rvihv^l nt:* lijl] Read (see on V. 18) either D''"i'l2in HK^PE'?, or D'l'njn D'"^7K'3 (cf. for the plur. noun Cant. 3, 7. c//. 9, 10; and see on v. 13), or (see p. 368 top) Dnajn nE^!?^^'3 1^ DC' sh. 23. n33J] Read either 13D3 (pf.), or ^393 Nin. i Ch. 11, 25 ian Nin npj,_a mixture of 12DJ inn and Nin n33J. inyDC'O ^s] ti^'^r ^/j- body-guard. See on I 22, 14. 24. ^snt^y] 2, i8fr.; 3, 27. 30. nn p] LXX vios AovSei ( = ■'11*1; cf. V. 9) tov TrarpaSiXcfiov avrov (=)'^'\1 ; cf. V. 9, Jud. 10, i), — a doublet. Cf. on v. 9, and 3, 3. Dn^ rT'a] Luc. (eV), and i Ch. 11, 26, Dn^ JT-aD, rightly. 25^ mnn] LXX 'PovSatos : perhaps ^/Tar^^/, Jud. 7, i. 25^. mnn NP'^^n] Not in LXX. Omitted, probably through ofxoLoreXevTov, in I Ch. II, and not recognized in i Ch. 27. 26. ''D^sn] From Beth-pelet, in the Negeb of Judah, Jos. 15, 27. Neh. II, 2 6t. ••Vpnn] Teqoa' was 10 miles S. of Jerusalem: see on 14, 2. 27. 27. Tiruyn] 'Anathoth, now 'Andtd, was 2 miles N. of Jerusalem (cf. Is. 10, 30). 1366 « ^ 370 77?^ Second Book of Samuel, ■•Jno] ^?3p (Ch.) is probably correct : so ch. 21, 18. BA have Ik twv vlSiv ( = MT.) ; but many MSS. ^a^ovxai, Luc. lafievi. 28, jlD^v] LXX EAXwv, Luc. kXifxav : cf. Ch. 'h'^V- Tinsn] See on v. 9. TiDD^n] Netophah (Ezr. 2, 22 = Neh. 7, 26t) was probably the present Betl Nettif, 12 miles W. of Bethlehem, and if miles NE. of Sochoh (on I 17, i). 29. niri] Probably "hvt or ""npn (cf. Zech. 6, 10) is correct. In Cod. B this name is omitted : Luc. has AAXav, other MSS. EAa. pn^n "33 nynjo] See on I 9, i. 30a. '':ny"iD 1iTJ3] Read, with Ch., '•jnynsn. LXX corruptly, pi^D Tliasn. On Pir'athon, in Ephraim (near Shechem), cf. Jud. 12, 15. Not improbably the modern Faratd, 6 miles NNW. of Nablous (Shechem). 3oi>-3ia. Transposed in LXX to the end of the chapter. 30b. tyyj >bn3a] U]}i is the name of a mountain in Ephraim, a little S. of Timnath-serah (Jos. 19, 50. 24, 30=Jud. 2, 9 [D"in"n:Dn], — probably (Buhl, loi, 170) Tibneh, lo miles NW. of Bethel). 31a. pn^y-'ns*] Ch. ^NUN, supported here by LXX Cod. B (ra8aPi.Y]\ vios {tov Apaf3(o6aiov) = \2 ^N^3N ^]}i)\ and Luc. (TaXo-apiTj? (6 ^apaLfiaOi), for \\2bv ''nx ^yj : TAAC prob. an error for PA AC), — perhaps originally (We. Bu. Now. Dh.) 7y2"'3N. Klo. would restore ''nnnyrrn''3 pN^nx, supposing pn^y-'nx to be a corruption of rT'a ^N"'nN, due to a copyist's eye catching ^J3?y"^ri in v. 32. This is very plausible. Either "'n2"iyn~n''3 or "D^iyn will be the gentile adj. ot '"^^lyC'"^^"' ^ place near the Jordan, in the * wilderness of Judah ' (Jos. 15, 5. 61, called naiyn (but nmyn n"'2 in LXX; v. Kiltel) ib, 18, 18). 31b. ^on-ian] Ch. ^rsnnnn. Probably "^insn of Bahurim (3, 16) is meant. 32a. '•n^yB'n] 'of D^aW' (i Ki. 4, 9), in Dan (Jos. 19, 42, where it is called D^3?y'^'), — a Canaanite city, the inhabitants of which were reduced to forced labour by the 'House of Joseph' (Jud. i, 35)t. See on I 9, 4. ' Twelve Codd., also, have actually (for ra8aPij}\) APitjK, eleven others AptrjX. XXIII. 2']-)6 371 32*'-33''. If 32^ be compared with i Ch. 11, 34, it will become evident (as shewn in the Table) that fn3in"» belongs to v. 33*, that Ity corresponds to D:^'^, and that the gentile name has fallen out after it in the text of Samuel. Either \^ "33 and Qt:>n ""ja are both corrup- tions of one and the same name, now lost, or, as Luc. has here 'leo-o-ai 6 Vovvi ^, and in Ch. Etpao-ai o Fovvi, it may be supposed with some plausibility that '•33 (in both texts) has arisen by dittography from the preceding >i37yk^. The name Gizon (Ch.) is not otherwise known: Lucian's o Vowl points to ''315[I, which, as Klo. observes, was the name of a Naphtalite family (Gen. 46, 24. Nu. 26, 48). Read, then, in 32b ''3^3n JB'J. The name in 33a will now be |njin» ^'y-\r\r\ r\r:i^ p : Ch. has NJC^ for noc, but Luc. there has 2a/xaia, and here LXX and MT. agree : noJi' has thus the presumption of being correct. The Jonathan mentioned was a son of ' Shammah the Hararite ' of Z;. 11. 34^ TiayDI-p ^3Dns-p D^a-'^xJ^i Ch. n, 35^'-36'» p hli^^ ^m^cn "i£n :~nx. "TiDyon-p is the gentile adj. of n^yo {ch. 10, 6. 8) or nDyi:"n''3 (20, 14. 15. i Ki. 15, 20. 2 Ki. 15, 29), as 2 Ki. 25, 23 (=Jer. 40, 8); perhaps, however, TlDyDn-n'^a (like ""Cn^n-n^n) should be read (Klo. Sm. Dh.). ''nDnN = "l2n niS (Ch.) are probably both corruptions of the name of Eliphelet's father : ""aDnx is a suspicious form. 34*'. "'ibn ^Dn''nN~p Oy^s] Evidently mutilated in i Ch. 11, 36b '3^Qn n^nx. ^3^"':n ^sn''nx is mentioned in 15, 12. 35*^. nvn] Qre "'li'n (but not in Ch.); so LXX Ao-apai, Luc. ••^Dl^n] See on I 25, i. 35b. "lanNn nys] LXX corruptly Tov Ovpaioepx^i. 6 epxii here would point to ''V\^^ (Klo.): cf. Jos. 16, 2 ; and '•Jixn -"tyin. A place 3")X in the Negeb of Judah, — possibly er-Rahtyeh, 6 miles W. of Carmel, — is, however, named Jos. 15, 52. Some twenty MSS. have TOV OvpaL (Oupe) VLo 3S1'' biA\ For "itJ* read with Luc. and Ch. "I"?'"''?"! ' to Joab and to the captains of the force, that were with him ; ' with which v. 4 agrees : Joab's natural title would be not nB'X 7^nn IB' iriN but N3sn nK'(i Ki. i, 19). ^ Some twenty Codd., however, have here Ma;3aav (al. Ma/SXac, MaojSac, Maraav, etc.) vloj 'kr^apilv, fx). XXIII. 37-XXIV. s 373 IDIB'] Rare in prose: but see Nu. ii, 8 ; also Job i, 7. With the emended text ItS^t^ must be read ; so Luc. 3. ^IDVI] 1 is used sometimes in Heb. (like et in Latin) to subjoin an impassioned question or exclamation: cf. ch. 18, 11. Nu. 12, 14. 20, 3. 2 Ki. I, 10. 7, 13. 19. Comp. Tenses, § iigynote; GK. § 154^; Lex. 254^(1. D'cys nxo DHDi nn3] Dt. i, n D'-oys fi^x d33 nyh>v fjDv rilwSI . . . "-yyi] The same idiomatic usage as mN"l *l"'J'yi Dt. 28, 32. 1 Ki. I, 48. Jer. 20, 4 (a circumstantial clause). , . , noi? "l^DH ''jnNi] On the position of the subj., see on I 20, 8. 4. •I^r::n •'ja!?] 'Vulg. Pesh. [and Lucian Ik irpocnaTrov] "li^cn ^JEO [rather, "y^TX "'psprp] : for according to MT. David himself would have gone forth as well' (Bo.). i:D7=before {ch. 5, 24): 'Jsi?D = from before (Gen. 41, 46 nyis ^J2^» flDI"" NV1; 2 Ki. 5, 27. 6, 32). 5. ':i Tyn po* -lynyn un^i] 'Read '3i n^yn |oi lynyt? ^j^nji in agreement with Dt. 2, 36. 3, 12. 16. 4, 48. Jos. 12, 2. 13, 9. 16. 2 Ki. 10, 33. The starting-point must here be named, from which they began to number the people. As such, the southern border (Nu. 22, 36) was the most natural, as it lay nearest to Jerusalem' (We.). This acute and felicitous conjecture was found afterwards to be confirmed by the same four MSS. of Holmes, 19, 82, 93, 108 — i.e. Lucian's recension^ — which had so remarkably supported the emendations in 13, 34. 39. 15, 23. 18, 28. In the passages cited, ' the city that is in the midst of the wady ' (perhaps 'Ar ; see the writer's note on Dt. 2, 36) is repeatedly named side by side with 'Aro'er. 'Aro'er, now 'Aratr, was on the N. edge of the deep gorge through which the Arnon flows from the E. into the Dead Sea. ^Ji^] In MT. this word is out of construction : nan prun cannot be rendered 'the wady of Gad,' and the case is not one in which apposition would be admissible (cf. Tenses,^ p. 254). Read with Lucian {t6v Tahhei) "'IJl' (Bu.), which, with the text as emended, will be construed as an accus. of direction, ' And they began from 'Aro'er ^ Kai Sif^rjcrav rbv 'lophavqv xal f)p5avTo diro 'Aporjp Kai diro t^s nuKtws t^s iy /xea<{) Tov xintappov kt\. 374 ^^^^ Second Book of Samuel, and from the city that is in the midst of the wady, towards the Gaditrs and on unto Ja'zer.' Cf. v. 6* ' And they came to Gil'ad, and on unto the land,' etc. Ja'zer was a border-town of Gad (Nu. 21, 24 LXX [ITV! for Ty], Jos. 13, 25 [read "i.t.V!'?], cf. vv. 16, 30), in the direction of Rabbath-'Ammon : Sar, 7 miles W. of 'Amman, would suit Eusebius' description {Onom. 264, 98 ff.), though of course there is no philolo- gical connexion between Sar and ~iTy\ See the writer's art. in the Expos. Times, xxi. (Sept. 1910), p. 562 f. (the second of two articles, criticizing the many doubtful identifications of ancient sites to be found in modern maps of Palestine). 6. '<^^n DTinn ps] Evidently corrupt. For DTinn Hitzig (C^f/^. d. Volkes Isr. p. 29) suggested D'^iinn ; and for ^C'nn Th. suggested '"'?'li?, — both strikingly confirmed subsequently by Lucian's recension (cis yrjv XiTTLeifx KaS->;s) : ' to the land of tke Hiitites, towards Qedesh! The Qedesh or Qadesh — in which case the word would be more correctly vocalized HK'ni? — meant, is the important Hittite city of that name on the Orontes, a little S. of the Lake of Homs (Maspero, Struggle of the Nations, pp. 137, 141 f.), and 100 miles N. of Dan. □"Tinn may be confidently accepted; but n'^lp, attractive as it is, occasions difficulty. A place 100 miles N. of Dan is very remote to be mentioned as the N. limit of Isr. territory, — it is, for instance, much further N. than the region probably meant by the 'entering in of Hamath,' mentioned Am. 6, 14 and elsewhere as marking the same point (see H. G. 177 ; my note on Am. 6, 2 ; Riblah in BB.): hence, if accepted, to Kedesh must be understood as embodying a highly idealistic conception of the N. limit of Isr. territory. Ewald {Hist. iii. 162) conjectured |tonn for ''tJ'nn; and this, whether we read {EB. iv. 4889) fD-in nnn D^nnn px b^ (see Jos. n, 3, cited below), or (Sm.) nJD-in D^nnn px h^^ certainly yields a more probable locality, — viz. a little E. of Dan : for the Hittites bordering here on the Israelites, see Jud. 3, 3 (where 'Jjinn must evidently be read for ■"'nn), and esp. Jos. 11, 3 (where read with LXX in a "^nn for 'nnn and in b ^T\nr\\ for '^nni,— pDin nnn ^nnni). Buhl (94) also prefers pin to nc^'lp. Klo. and Guthe {Gesch. 94) would read ''^nSJ pN i^^'li;?.: this would be quite suitable topographically, the C'np meant XXIV. 6-II 375 being the Kedesh of Naphtali, 4 miles NW. of Lake Huleh : but, as an emendation of D^nnn, vHSJ cannot come into competition with pn^V b^ TnDI \V^ nn "iNa''"l] No place Dan of Fa an is known. LXX Koi irapeyivovTO ets Aav Ei8av kol OrSav, kol iKVKXwcrav cts ^iSwva I Luc. Kal (.p)^ovTaL ews Aav, Koi iKVKXwa-av rryv SiSoJva Tiyv iJ.eya.X.r]v. As We. remarks, what the sense requires is pl^y 7N 133D |'nD^ ; and from the text of LXX, corrupt as the proper names in it are, it at least appears that the translators found p /zvue, and had a verb in place of 2^20). Read accordingly fn^i* bii =i3nD fnj?^ JT INTI (We. Now. Dh.). Klo. emends differently : . . . 13b;i |i»yi HJT 1N2'1 (so Bu.) : for JVy, see i Ki. 15, 20 (mentioned immediately before Dan and Abel of Beth-ma'achah). 2 Ki. 15, 29. For Dan, see on 20, 18. jVy was doubtless some place in the Merj 'Ayuti (' Meadow of 'Ayun '), a fertile oval plain, stretching out immediately to the N. of Abel of Beth-ma'achah. pTv] LXX (A, Luc, and many other MSS.) + '^?"1: so Jos. 11,8. 19, 28. 7. "IV ~1X3D] They(?r//-^ji-ofTyre, on the mainland. So Jos. 19, 29 1. Cf. Harper on Am. i, 9. Tyre would be just 27 miles W. of Dan. ■•inn] The original inhabitants of Shechem (Gen. 34, 2), and Gibeon (Jos. 9, 7, cf. V. 3), in Central Canaan. 9. Nnni] See on I 17, 21. ^??'] ^^"^ ^^^ retarding metheg, producing an ' incomplete retro- cession' of the tone, see GK. § 29^. 10. inN nn :b Ti] 1 24, 6. Dyn-nN 120 p nnx] Read oyn nx -idd ^hn (cf. LXX fx^Tk to dpLdfirjaat) : Construction as I 5, 9 (so Now. Dh.). p '•nriN must have been written in error by a scribe who did not notice the sentence that was following. Klo. Bu. Sm. prefer, with Luc. {/xeTa ravra, oti), to insert ^2 after p. — "i3yn as 12, 13. 11. rrri] had been, — before David arose in the morning. in nthj The -^ in st. c. (so Ginsb. Kit.) is most anomalous (GK. § 93"); no doubt Ew. § 21^^ nole is right in treating it as merely an error for mh (so Baer, p. 117, with Kimchi). Comp. ch. 15, 37^^"^ 'T- 376 The Second Book of Samuel, 12. T'^y i?D"i: ^DJN] do I lift up (LXX aipw), or hold, over thee. The root is rare (Is. 40, 15. Lam. 3, 28); and Ch. n^b is more probable. 13. Xinnn] They^w., the subject being conceived coUeciively : see on I 4, 15. j?3:i'] LXX here, and Ch., t^'i^B'— probably the original number : notice the three months and the three days following. 121"! Kim] The words form a circ. clause, as v. 3. With regard to the sing. Nin immediately after ^nv, no doubt a group or body of m^ may be spoken of in Heb. in either the sing.' or the pi. (cf. Is. 17, x-^ 'ai 13 (after i2-i3y nn^ D^r'r D'abn. 44, 9 (1'<5^:). Is. 30, 22 end'^h "IDXn N^ HIT 1J3D Dim. Am. 6, 9 f . Zech. 14, 12. Job 21, 10 (after 7-9). 24, 16-24. B"*^ '^i extreme cases, as when the sing, and pi. occur in one and the same clause, the text should no doubt be corrected : as Lev. 25, 14* (Versions -laon). 31* (rd. UK^ni; cf. p. Ixiif.^). Dt. 7, io» (rd. iNJb' for rXr^, and note iWtf' in "). Jos. 2, 4. Hos. 4,8 (rd. 0^23). 10, 5 (rd. by). Mic. 2,9. Zech. 14, 12 ^«rf(rd. liTSn). ^t. 5, 10 (rd. 1»''D3). 62,5. 63,11. 64,9. Is. 5, 23 (LXX pnS; cf. Qoh. 10, 15 LXX Codd. KA is'^DSn). Cf. GK. § 145°'. nm ^n^cy n^K'x hd] Cf. Pr. 27, n im •'s-ih nn^tiw. Lit. z£;///j Zf;>^a/ word I shall turn back {^ = reply to: see on 3, 11) viy sender. For "im . , , no, see on I 26, 18. * Cf. the series of almost uninterrupted sing, pronouns and verbs, referring to riTn Dyn in Dt. 31, 16-18. 20-21. 2 The principle of Lev. 17, 14 n-l3^ V^SN b^. 19, 8 is different (GK. § 145'). XXIV. i2-i6 311 14- n7D:] 'very unjustly changed by LXX and Chron. into the singular' (We.). 1 5*. LXX has : koI iieXeiaro AavciS eairrw tov Odvarov' Koi rjfx.epat ucpia-fxov irvpoiv, [/cai ISw/ccv Kvpios iv 'IcrparjX OdvaTOv diro irpwiOcv ecus wpas dpLCTTOv'j Koi rjp^aTO tj Opav(Ti 167, 333. Alphabet, early history of the Hebrew, i-xxvi. Anaplicative plural, 25. Apposition, 30, 45, 87, 108. Aquila, iii «., xl f., Ixxxii f. 'Araq el-Emir, Inscriptions at, xx. Article used idiomatically : = our ' a,' 6) 54j ^5> 157 » ill comparisons, 208 ; with a distrib. force, 209. — used exceptionally : as nS*13n px^ 58, 96, 137. 197 (a /^'"/O; after a prep, or 2, 356 with n. ; with force ofrelat, 75 f. ; n3xi?0n ^31 n3rc3 (incorrect), 124. — omitted exceptionally : withinN.S; in Xin ri?"')?3, 156; incorrectly, 193, 233. 240- 'Ashtart (MT. *Asht5reth, plur. 'Ashta- roth), 62 f., 230. Attraction, 12,4. Ba'al, meaning of, 253 f. ; as name of a deity, 63 f. ; as applied to Yahweh, 254 f. ; in names of persons, II 2,8, PP- 253-255) 263, II 23, 8. 31* ; of places, II 5, 20. 6, 2. ' Base' in EVV. = low in position, 274. Be'elyada', changed to Elyada', 263. BT)p(TaPe( for Bath-sheba', 289. Bichri, Bichrites, 340, 345. Bridal tent, the, 320. Caleb-clan, the, 196. Casus pendens, 27, 96, 306 (v. 10), 360 ; in clause introd, by H^HI, 40, by \T1,82. Cherethites, 223, 284. Circumstantial clauses, 13, 42 etc.; 81, 183. Collectives, 174; after ^3,310; after numeral, 223. See also Fern. sing. Compound names of deities, xc f. Confusion of letters, Ixiv-lxviii. 'Conjugation of attack' (Po'el), 152. Dagesh in \h "nnx-'l, 68 ; dirimens, 215. S^Aoi = D'l^N, 117. Diminutives, 300, Dittography, 36(?), 175, 264. Division ot words, incorrect, xxviii f. Dod, divine title, xc, II 23, 9. 24. Doublets ;in LXX\ xlix, Iv-lvii, Ixi. Dual names of places, 2. Duplication of word for emphasis, 24. «7tti ilyn (with a verb) in LXX. lix. Egyptian Aramaic (inscriptions and notes on the dialect), xii-xix. Emendation, conjectural, XI f., xxxv//., xxxvii n., xlix. Emphasis. See Order of words and Pronoun. English Versions (AV. and RV.), illegiti- mate renderings in, I 23,23. II 1,23. Z^ 36. 5» 8 (p. 260), p. 277, II 10, 7. 13, 34. 14, I6^ 15, 12. 23. 17, II. 19, 44. 20, 3. 6. 8. 19. 23. 21, 5. 23, 19; emendations implicitly adopted in, I 15, 9. 23, 6. 24, 20. 25, 30. II 15, 19. ' Explicita,' Ixii, Ixxiii. 'Fellow-wife' (HIV), 9 f. Fein. sing, construed with collectives, 48, 288, 376; used of countries, and peoples, 143, 211 (D^^K''', — anomalous). Final letters, origin of, xix. First person sing, used of a people, 53, 224. ' Fool,' bad rend, of ^33, 200. Force of interrog. or neg. extending over two clauses, 24. 'Futurum instans,' 43, 95, 107, 183. Tin LXX = y, 136W. Gezer, Inscription of, vii f. Guilt-ofTering (DK'N), 53 f. 382 1. Index of Subjects Hadad'ezer (name), 2S0. Hebrew, illustrated from Phoenician, xxv-xxvi. Hebrew Inscriptions, iv, vii, ix, xi, xx, xxi, xxiii. Hebrew MSS., character of, xxxiv- xxxvii, Ixiv-lxix. Ilexapla, Origen's, xli-xliv. ' Hypocoristic,' or ' caritative,' names, 19, 262. ' Idem per idem ' constructions, 21, 185 f. 'I«-inLXX for A -N, i2of. Imperfect with frequent, force, I i, 7 {bis). 13. 2,22. 3, 2. 5, 5. 13, 17. II 12, 31, etc. ; ='was to, II 3, 33. — with waw consec. introducing pred., 1 4, 20 (nnmrii nn^ro nyiij- 6, 6. 15, 27; 14, 19 (n^non ntj'x pnnni ■J^M D'TltJ'bD). 17, 24; irreg. for pf. and waw consec, I 2, i6. 14, 52 ; continuing ptcp., I 2, 6. Impersonal passive, 323 f. Implicit subject, 132, 242 ; with inf., I 2, 13 (T^nn ^E'ns). n, 2. 11 3, 34- Inf. abs., force of, 31, 36, 38, 249; in the protasis, 12 f., 162; at the beginning of a speech, 162; defin- ing, 43, 280. Sec also Types of sentence. — with \ carrying on finite verb, 36 {v. 28), or inf. constr. , 181. — in Qal, emphasizing a verb in a derived conjug., 347. Inf. constr. continued by finite verb, 26, 49. Inf. constr. in H , li f. Ishba'al, 120, 240, 363. Ishboshelh, correction for Ishba'al, 240. Ishui, correction for Ishba'al, 120. Judge, the, God regarded as speaking through, 35 f. ; judgement a sacred act, 66. Jussive with N?, 116, 323. «ai 7f (LXX) for D3, lix n. 3. Ko.p-naai.'i (LXX), 30 n, 1. Lapsus calami, 95, 198, 289, 352 (3?V). Letters confused (' and 1, T and T, JD and 3), Ixiv-lxvii ;,3 and JO, Ixviii n. Letters wrongly transposed in MT., 80, 308 with n. 2. Lucian's text of LXX, xlviii-li, Iv-lvii. I Maps of Palestine, X, xcv f. Mefiipt^oaOf for nK'3"w'^{<, 240 n. 2. Mej^hibosheth, correction for Meribba'al, 2.'^3-^55- Moabite Ijtone, the, Ixxxiv-xciv. Nif'al, reciprocal sense of, 92 f. ; tolera- tivum, 353. viKos in LXX for riifj, 129 n. i. ' Nomen unitatis,' 119. Numerals, not expressed anciently by letters, 97. Obed-edom, meaning of name, 268 f. Old Latin version, hi f., characteristics of, Ixxvi-lxxx. Omissions in I 17-18 (LXX), 140, i5of., 155. Order of words : — Obj. at end of long sentence, 7, 307 ; ny-i ^T-a nroi, 208; jnj^ h, 36; . . . ih, 5; »'3^2 ij^N^'h, 246; nn'^o 1^ njni , 203 ; . . . -won 7h\ , 125,35. — emphatic : — emph. word next to DN, n, nS, i2, etc. : 35 (J\\r\-h CN ::"« NDH'), 55 {yn ny:: rv xi?), II 15. 34 (ON), 17. 13 (DN), 367 (n, ^^n) ; ^3! ^l ' 52 ; 'ON, Sm, etc., before verb (various cases), 121 (see also on I 8, 7. 14, 35. 18, 17. 20, 9. 21, 10); 'I'-nN ih "in'zn nrnjob, 162, 11 24, 3; n^3 '?ir\z"<, 241 f.; xi:n 'nx 's, 213,311 ; . . . XD^ >byi, II 19, 39; ^^^x )b, 319; ^^. and px a/iernoun, 174; 'nX2 '•'"•b H^T^, 132, 249 (II 3, 25). — unusual: "J^OH ^Mi^ (late), 151, 305 ; D^tJ'On Q^bp^, 380. — obj. first, introducing variety, I 22, 10 ob ]r\: r\i' 3; delicate use of, to denote incipient action, I 14, 8 ; expressing tht fut. installs, I 3, 11. 12, 16. 20, 36 ; with art. as predicate, I 4, 16 ; with the art., and subst. without it, I 25, 10. Pausal form with minor disj. accent, 14, 15, 244, 249, 287, 306. Pelethites. 2S4. Perf. and simple waw used irregularly, I3> 199- Perf. and waw consec. with frequent. force, 11,3. 4''. 2, 15. 19. 20. 7, 16. 14,52. 17, 34''-35- 12, 16. 15, 2\ II 17, 17, etc. — introducing pred. or apod., I 2, 11''. 25, 27. II 14, 10. ' Periphrastic' future, 67. 'Perverse,' sense of, in EV^V., I70«. Peshitto, the, li f. ; characteristics of, in Sam., lx.\i-lxxvi. Phoenician Inscription (Tabnith), xxiv- xxvi. Pluperfect, how expressed in Heb., 73, 199, cf. 311. Po'lel, intensive (nniDD), 108. Pronominal suffix anticipating object of verb, 177, 306, or genitive, 50, 177 «. Pronoun emphatic : before verb, I 8, 5. 17. 10, 18. 12, 20. 17, 28 (':N). II 12, 7^ 19, 34 (nay nnx). 24, 17; in response to question, II 21, 7. — after verb, I 17, 56 ( nnX ?XK'\ 22, 18 (Nin y:Q^i). 23, 22 (Diy: Diy xin). II 12, 28 o:s ns!?^ fs). — . • > Nin ''D (in causal sentence), no «. 2, 153. — Nin, X''n, resuming subject, I i, 13. II 14, 19. Question indicated by the tone of the voice: I 11, 12 (li^^y I^D' ^1N*^')- 21, 16. 22, 15. II 19, 23; 16, 4 (QW). 18, 29; I 20, 9 (. . . N?1). 12. i4(?). II 19, 44; 24, 20 (. ..^n^c'1). 25, II (. ..'nnpjji); II II, II (. . . ^3N1); 15, 20. Rephaim, the, 353 f. Resumption, 200 (various cases'). — of object by pron., I 9, 13''. 15, 9. 25, 29 (n:y^p> . . . c'sj nsi) ; 13^ ns D:'n ^n* . . . nonsiji Dn?, I 9, 20. 116, 23 ; with emph., II 6, 22 (mn2N* Dsy . . . oy). — of 'D, I 14, 39. 25, 34. — of other words, I 17, 13. 20, I4''(?). 15*" (?; cf p. 166), and on I 25, 26. Revised Version, margins of, XVII. Roof-chamber (n>py), 333. ' Runners,' the (the royal escort), 181. * Scriptio plena ' and ' defectiva,' xxx- xxxii. Sentences, unusual types of: I 5, 10 Cr^y nsi 'jn'cnb) ; 6, n (lo-'t:'*! nx i n!?3 yn ks ^"> pnx nx Septuagint, xxxix f. ; the Hexapla, xll- xliv ; orii^inal text of LXX, xliv- xlvi, liv f. ; MSS. of, xlvi f. ; Lu- cian's recension, xlviii-H, Iv-lvii ; characteristics of the translation, Iv-lxii ^corruptions in the Greek, Ivii-lix ; Heb. words transliterated, Ix-lxi, 78 ti. ; rend, suggested by similarity to Heb., 51); character and script of Heb. basis, Ixiii-lxix; breathings and accents, XVIII. Siloam Inscription, viii-x. Sing, nouns used collectively, 174; after numerals, 223; after 73, 310. Sing, and plur. interchanging, 27, dif- ferent cases of, 376. Sing. I ps., of nation or group of persons, I 5, 10. 30, 22. II 20, 19 ; ct. p. 37. 'Strange,' 'stranger,' often 'foreign,' 'foreigner,' in EVV., 233, 313. Suffix, omission of, in inf., 153. Suspended genitive, I 2S, 7. II 20, 19. Symmachus, xl f., Ixxxi-lxxxiii, 96 w. Targum, li, characteristics of, Ixix-lxxi. Tertiutn comparationis , inlioduced by /, 309- Theodolion, xl f, Ix ;/., 129 //. i. Threshing-drags (D'3")iD), 379. 384 /. Index of Subjects Tiklcun sopherim, .^40. ToiavT?; (Hebraism), 46. Tone, retrocession of, 24, 356, 375, Types of sentence with inf. abs. : — iyji ^"^n (or !]^n"! or -ibn) tj^si, 56, cf. 45; four irregular cases, i6o. 3b'l •i\S\>r\ ^3it:'J1 (rare), 56. nani DIE'n "iniXI (Jerem.), 56. (adj.)3";i Tiii?n tjSpii, 1 10. bSpJ^^ N^:;^ S;^^ (rare), 318. Types of sentence with ptcp. : — (adj.) 3-J1 Tjb^n nyrri, 36. 2"!i^1 '^.^n (or Tl^h) Tjb"! (rare), 146. Verb with implicit subject, — finite, 90, infin., 86. Versions, ancient, value of, xxxiv-xxxix. 'Vile,' sense of, in EVV., 125 w. i, 274. Vulgate, the, liii f , characteristics of, in Sam., Ixxx-lxxxiii. Zdkef, the first in a half-verse the chief divider, 22. Zuphite, I. II. INDEX OF HEBREW WORDS AND IDIOMS Heb. words, idioms, etc. : — N softened from *<, 309, cf. 120 ;/. N, elision of, 15. nhnjn px, 58, cf. 96. i?^7\ pN, 310. n.N*, 127. -rts* = -nx, 298, 379. inX = ' a,' 54 ; THX in si. abs., 325 ; . , , "ins3, 243; , » , nnN3, 321. "•N = not, 49. PX, idiom, uses of: 70 (J^XI » . .) 5 ,., (ps) pi< nnm,i47,'i73,cf. 71; 6 ii^ pws, 1121,4. PX (peculiar), 176. K^'N (collect.), constniction of, 99. CXn prefixed to pr. n., 19. ']X asseverative, 133, 199. n^3N (inf. c), I If. T ; T ^ PN not = fiTj ; 212. Db'FI-ijX, 74. pX = in among, 84, 1 74. — = ■wii/i reference to, 21, 43, 49. — = ^y> 43= loi, 281, 348. ''^ (t?^) ~ ^^^» ^^^ "• 2, 34 «. . . . Dn n?x, 47. DTlbx construed as a pi., 47. Heb. words, idioms, etc. {cont.') : — DnnN D"'n'?x,2o8. 133 ^•^i?^^ 62. T •• ' ?)bs; 1, 200. ^NTl-a 'in Bethel,' but JT'DH not 'in the house,' 37 «. 2. "'L>'r2K'n-n''2, 57. ?y3 in pr. names. See Ba'al. DvV3 = citizens, 185, 239. Dn[^3 (rare and dub.), 68. 'hr\i, 326. nna added to fllN in MT., 45. n?3 , 49 f. ; how different from T\'2V T T XT' 221. n'p3 (the terrain.), 139, 159. D2 : — D2 correlativum, 21, 292; in DW DJ nnoyi, 1 1, 6 ; inTiC' D3, 25. 43- ba, 236 f. o n3•^, 1 19, 3. 25, 39; II 23, 3. n of Hif. inf. elided after prep., 37. — of Hif. retained in impf., I47. n (art.), retained after prep, or 3, 356 with n. — = relative, 75 f. n , emph. use of, 36, 368. ri-, sf. of 3 sg. masc, xxxii f., 350. f\—. for n_. (sf. of 3 sg. fem.), 168. '3 NH (Aram.), 308 «. 4. nx pmn, nnx p''3in, m, 227. "iiynn, 280, 288. X^in formerly written XH , xxx f. ; m3no N'^n n^m 1 1, 13; n^^ ^3 r3X DVD KM, 20, 33. 7''Nin, senses of, 279. rpin, 351. cf. 230 f. 1365 C C Heb. words, idioms, etc. {cont.) : — mn: r\]r] can DVO, I 14, 39; in- correct, I 17, 13. "I'-^ri, 113. 'nn , 29S, "TitDnnn , but ^hmnni , 1 26. ilT] and ptcp. 3<;^ Participle. nnx n-'H, 94, 342, 391, 313. "pn, II 9, T. 23, 19. p3n in military sense, i88. ''n"'3n,butn''3n, 183. T?n, 105. "IDS ^ix'^1 ... 1X3 nton, etc., I 9, 5. II. 17; 23 (n:ni); cf. 11 2, 24. jT'nt^'tsn, 102. nsn, expressing vividly a condition, 71, 164, 328; without suff., 73, 125, 134; inxip^ n3ni,83. ^32n expressing resignation, 119. "ivsn, 137. Driwn,84, xixf. 7''3b'n, meaning of, 149. "I3'=I '3 3''K'n, construction of, 144, T T • '• 247, cf. 89. ^:tb ibnnn,38. N33nn, 81. ^l?i;nn, 228. 1 and ' confused, i «. 2, Ixiv «. 3, Ixv f. 1 = and also, 55. 1 apparently (not really) = as, 94 w. 1 = bot/i (rare), 197. "I of concomitance, 29, 149, 288. 1 subjoining an emph. exclam., 373. V, old nomin. terrain., 18, 282. 1- of 3 plur. omitted, 103, cf. 69, 91. V wrongly added in 3 sing., 91, 136. ■J^ ■)T« yK'in'l, 200 f. n'm for 'n^i, 13. X31 -iN-"on-^3 n'-ni , 40. i3rx"'i, 149. Ti"'! , sq. i)lur., 5. QVn ''n^i,6. 386 //. Index of Hebrew Words and Idioms Heb. words, idioms, etc. {cont.) : — 1^?1^^ lynr-^j v,*i, 82. /. ". "llpN . . . n^NIDI, 148. X71 = and if not, 302. |1-, in 3 pi. impf., 30 f. ipsn riK'Wl (construction), 167. ^DNRI, 15. D''0\n nnr, 20. riT, as adv., 219 (D"'0' HT), 305; en- clitic, 83 (nrno), 148 (nr '•» p), 243 (nT nnN), 293 (ni no^). 3;n, 223. *n group of related families, 153, cf. 197, 366 (n;n). ^*k^•^: >n, 148. nbvn, construction of, 96, 193. CTiDn, 26. ■"irri arroiv, 172. D^.ri, C'lnn, 130 f. riBD (meaning of form), 67. -\ Syr. sound of, i2o;«., 181 ; softened to X, 309. ^ and 1 confused, i w. 2,lxiv«. 3, Ixv f. n^ = monument, 125, 281, 330. ^:i)"n^,2i4. p^<^ n^r, 258. Tl^^,Il5, 14. D^D'- j«far, 5, 16, 210; D-^D^ D''nrt^», n 13, 23. P___, in 2 fem. sg. impf., 14. p__, in masc. pi., xciii «. 3, 355. •in-i^, ini% 287; nhi^, ixxxix. K';, 147; ^3S^_1, ii6f. ' nyv^^, etym, meaning of, 118 f. 3 and 1 confused in MSS., 33. 3, properly an undeveloped subst., 106. '31 ... '3, 225. '33, jrp?, 85, ioS«. 2. Heb. words, idioms, etc. {cont.) : — ^:i D^n^N 'h ^t^'y'' n3, 44. Di»n3, 1 9, 12, p. 356;;. fn3,'2 84f. "•3 : — after oath, 117, 118 ; (resumed) ■•3 ... ''3, 117, 202 f., 247 ; . . , >3 '•31, 229; '•3 ' recitativum,' 31 f. ; O after -JX , DSX , etc.,I 8, 9. 10, i ; . . . DX ""3, 206; ,,,]£> "^»N '•3, 103; . . . Nin '•3, now.; HO '•3, 1 29, 8; nny •'3, 1 13, 13. 14, 30. DV3 DV3, 152. Di"? first of all, 31, 78. 133, -133n,33i. ^3, sq. collective sing., 310. n?3, xxxiii, 24T. Dn^3,Il23, 6. 1?3 after its subst., 241 f. ^^5^3, 64 f. Dy3 vexation, 8. DJ;3 d: nnDy3, sf. nno nj;3, 73. Dyan DyD3,43- 123, 47 f.; 123,88. D''D3 nDh3, 2 99f. p, as dat. of reference, I 2, 33. 9, 3. II, 2; \h niivy, 21,6; n^N no ^^, II16, i; >^ DS*5), 18, 3. — = in respect of, I 8,- 7». 14, 33. II 14, 17. 25 (defining the tertiittn comparationis). — reflexive, I 3, 13 MT. 8, 18 (03"? Dn-in3). 20, 20 (>1? rh'S). 22, 5 (1^ nsai). 30, 19 (inp^ Dn^). II 2, 21 ("1^3 np;). 16, 20 (D3^ 13n). 17, I. — of norm, I 23, 20. II 15, 11. — as ' nota accusativi,' I 22, 7. 23, 10. II 3, 30- I7>i6. — after pass, verb = by, \ i^, 7. II 2, 5- — . , . I'-SDii yh\ 1 23, 20, //. Index of Hebrew JJ^ords and Idioms 387 Heb. words, idioms, etc. {con/.) : — 7 with inf. as subj. of sentence, I .15, 22. N^ and v confused. 32. N7 with ptcp., 251. "7)737, sq. impf., 308. pb, idiom, use of, 44, 213 ; rendered ovx ovTois in LXX, 44. r\uP used idiom, in deprecation, 158. ]^b, 270, 274, 276, 301. n^bvb, ? for mbvrh, 37- >:d^ n"n,334- na&'b, 15- JO and 3 interchanged in LXX and MT., lxiv«. 3, Ixvii ; D and 3, Ixviii. nXt?, idiom, uses of, I i, 17 ( 20), ? meaning, 325. nO'-lO'' D''D''0, 5. 130,fig., I 12,9. faSp, 294-297. ••JD^D.IS, 18. 18, 12; p. 373. jO = at/^/il of, I 3, 19, cf. on 23, 23 ; eve7t one of, 14, 45; tJ'l.nTl'^X pyit? ^300,7.8; ^^l'? iDxm, 15, 23 ; with verb, denoting source or cause, 31, 3. 11 7, 29. O'-nx "ii3p, 139^- nmb, 280.' DP labour-gang., II 20, 24. byo, idiom, uses of, 216: also on 1 1, 14 (^. ■]?;» n^DH). 6, 5 {c. bpp. 20 (ly^ryt: nl'y" ^o ^n). 15, 28 Heb. words, idioms, etc. {cont.) : — n^bya . . . vi\>)- 17, 15 n^i'T i'lXB' ^yo 3^1). 26 (^. n^DH nsnn). 11 2, 27^ 10, 14 {c. 3vc). 13, 17 O^yi^ . . . ^rht). 19, 10 (m^::'3x byo m3). 20, 21. 24, 21 (^K-i:;» ^yo nsion ni*yni). Oyp after i?XC', I i, 17, Hjp, II 24, 21 ; = from beside, I 2, 33. 20, 34 ; = from with, 1 14, 17. 18, 13. II 3, 1 5 ; of origination, I 20, 7. II 3, 28. "JDD, force of, 278 «. 3. Ni*D, not = Aram. NDp, 187. n3;;p, n3ik*p, 330. nnno, 170. c*23 niD, 12. 3^i?'^P.339- nyOti'D, in concrete sense, i8i. nrxn jriD, 279. J-, in impf., I i, 14. 2, 15. ^33, 200; nb33, 298. T r T T : ■' n':3,73- n"13 (Qre nV3), 158 f. y^3,3i3- Xi*D3, idiom, iox present, 71. tJ'DJ , in Heb. psychology, the scat of feeling, desire, etc., I i, 15- 2, 16. 19. 4- by 3b*3, 180, 181. 3''i-: , 78. NK'3 (with TiaN),to i^Mr (notM'«.7r). 33D ■= sit round a table, 1 34. -\'3D (Massoretic term), 90 f. ; p"\"'3D in Samuel, 91 f. 1DD to ivail, 214. riDD to sweep away, 96, y = r in 1,XX, \lfin- n"lX"n3y, meaning, 268 f, cnib? iy, 126. 388 //. Index of Hebrew Words mid Idioms lleb. words, idioms, etc. {cont.) : — D^"iy (etymol.), 17^ i. my = (J.C to ^end ; and (^»c to ^0 ■ astray, err {cU pjj), i7of. "i?y, 114. py a substantive, 356. ^y, idiom, uses of :— 1 17, 32 (^D" ^X Vbv DIN 2^)- 25. 36; 21, 16 c^by yiDCT;^); 11 15, 33 (ri^ni N2^D^ ^^y); t8, II (nn^ -hv^); 24, 20 {vbv Dnay). — = ?N, I I, 10. 13. 2, II ; p. loi. ^3D pV, «su. = i?M ^aj-/ qf, 123, 191; not so, 205. Qy near, 78 ; = in the opinion, Judge- ment of, 36, 273. ''I^b icy = to zi\iit upon, 1 36 f. ppy, 56 f., cf. 229. CNsn pcy, 263. -ly, not =-!>?, I 28, 16. T T nfe'y, with pregnant force, 107, 209, 217. niriK'y, niiPiD'yn, 62-64; in Ash- kelon, 230. ^y. "I^V?' 353.- mD, 119. p13, I 25, 31. tl^Q, II 3, 29. b?3 to mediate, 35. fD, sq. perf., 342. ^12 for -)i'2, 219. CCJ'IS and D''^"IQ, 232. "i = ^u = Aram, y (and p), 9 >©. \^'i, construed with fem.pl., I 17, 28. n^v, 81. D^ips^, I 25, iS. -|^3V, 259. nix (= xt-» = jlt^), rival- (or fellow-)wifey 9 f. Heb. words, idioms, etc. {font.) : — nni;, 113,6. JDi? and |b^, 74 «. "llDp, T'tOpn, meaning of, 31. nib'p voices, of thunder, 95. vry nDi5,48. DDp, 215. ^Ip (!'fl//'/tf (Aram.), 322. "1,10, 122, 190, and esp. XIX f. b"i :— ^^nn, ^Th, 1 25, 27. 42. nis"'"!, II 17, 19. y"}, of the heart = be sad, 11, njJI, fig. for riile, 257. nyi in J/. <-., 317. < Inyi his friends, 225. Djn, D^ynn, lo. ^ = Aram. D = ^_p, 237 ». t^ written for D, 237, cf. 52 k. 1. fDb', 1 29, 4. iini'ir, 115. li> = Aram. B^= ,_^, 237^?. !?NB' = <^'). Third Edition. 1902. \2s,. T. & T. CLARK. Isaiah, his Life and Times, and the writings w^hich bear his name. Second Edition. 1S93. FRANCIS GRIFFITHS. The Book of Genesis. With Introduction and Notes (in \!ii^ Westminster Commentaries). Eighth Edition. 191 1. los.dd. Sermons on Subjects connected with the Old Testa- ment. 1892. bs. Contents : Introdiution. On the Permanent Moral and Devotional Value of the Old Testament fur the Christian Church, i. Evolution compatible with Faith. 2. Isaiah's Vision. 3. The Ideals of the Prophets. 4. Growth of Belief in a Future State. 5. The Hebrew Prophets. 6. The Voice of God in the Old Testament. 7. Inspiration. 8. The First Chapter of Genesis. 9. The Warrior from Edom. 10. The Six y-eighth Psalm. 11. The Lord our Righteousness. 12. Mercy, aud not Sacrifice. METHUEN &; CO. BY THE SAME AUTHOR {continued) In the Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges. The Book of Exodus. 1911. '^s.6d. The Books of Joel and Amos. Second Edition. 1901. 2S. Oil. The Book of Daniel. Second Edition. 1901. is.dd. CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS. In the Century Bible. The Minor Prophets (Nahum — Malachi). 1905. is. 6d. T. C. & E. C. JACK. The Book of the Prophet Jeremiah. A revised Transla tion, with Introductions and short Explanations. Second Edition. 1908. 6 1^, Jointly with A. F. Kirkpatrick (Dean of Ely). The Higher Criticism. Four papers on its character and importance. 1912. \s. HODDER & STOUGHTON. Jointly with H. A. White. The Book of Leviticus (in Haupt's Sacred Books of the Old Testament). I. The Hebrew Text. With short Notes on Textual Criticism. 1894. 2S. 6d. II. A New English Translation. With Introduction and Explanatory Notes. 1898. 65. JAMES CLARKE & CO., LONDON. Part I (pp. 1-152: On the bearings of Archaeology on the Old Testament) of Authority and Archaeology, Sacred and Profane, edited by D. G. Hogarth. 1899. i8j-. The author hopes before long to re-publish this essay separately in an enlarged form. JOHN MURRAY. University of California SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 305 De Neve Drive - Parking Lot 17 • Box 951388 LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90095-1388 Return this material to the library from which it was borrowed. VA f Ml OS Form L / 3 1 1 58 00299 2377 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY AA 000 620 476 2 ^ m :,'!;;^'?J|:.>\,',-V:C'?;P(.'Ar, ii;'!,^ :>^7';\ wmmi